diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-0.txt | 6283 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 144628 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 1808262 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/12481-h.htm | 6699 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 898804 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/front.jpg | bin | 0 -> 62202 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-103.jpg | bin | 0 -> 89251 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-129.jpg | bin | 0 -> 81468 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-179.jpg | bin | 0 -> 44077 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-201.jpg | bin | 0 -> 99114 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-207a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 113875 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-207b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 104947 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-227.jpg | bin | 0 -> 70826 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-275.jpg | bin | 0 -> 63659 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-343.jpg | bin | 0 -> 85398 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-colophon.jpg | bin | 0 -> 54202 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/i-frontis.jpg | bin | 0 -> 99687 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 12481-h/images/music.png | bin | 0 -> 80008 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481-8.txt | 6171 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 141329 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 286585 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481-h/12481-h.htm | 6779 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481-h/images/front.jpg | bin | 0 -> 62202 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481-h/images/music.png | bin | 0 -> 80008 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481.txt | 6171 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12481.zip | bin | 0 -> 141240 bytes |
29 files changed, 32119 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/12481-0.txt b/12481-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b542255 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6283 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook of Hero tales of the far north, by Jacob A. Riis + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at +www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you +will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before +using this eBook. + +Title: Hero tales of the far north + +Author: Jacob A. Riis + +Release Date: May 1, 2004 [EBook #12481] + +Most Recent Release Date: December 21, 2022 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +Produced by: Janet Kegg + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH *** + + + + +HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH + + + + + [Illustration: (Publisher colophon)] + + THE MACMILLAN COMPANY + NEW YORK · BOSTON · CHICAGO + ATLANTA · SAN FRANCISCO + + MACMILLAN & CO., LIMITED + LONDON · BOMBAY · CALCUTTA + MELBOURNE + + THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, LTD. + TORONTO + + + + +[Illustration: FREDERIKSBORG + + _See page 182_ +] + + + + + HERO TALES + OF THE FAR NORTH + + By + JACOB A. RIIS + + + + AUTHOR OF “HOW THE OTHER HALF LIVES” + “THE MAKING OF AN AMERICAN” + “THE OLD TOWN,” ETC. + + New York + THE MACMILLAN COMPANY + 1919 + + _All rights reserved_ + + + + + COPYRIGHT, 1910, + BY THE MACMILLAN COMPANY. + + Set up and electrotyped. Published September, 1910. + + + Norwood Press + J. S. Cushing Co.—Berwick & Smith Co. + Norwood, Mass. U.S.A. + + + + + THIS BOOK OF MY DEAD HEROES + + I DEDICATE TO MY LIVING HERO + + + THEODORE ROOSEVELT + + + MAY IT BE MANY YEARS BEFORE THE LAST CHAPTER + + OF HIS SPLENDID WHOLESOME LIFE IS + + WRITTEN IN THE PAGES OF OUR + + COUNTRY’S HISTORY + + + + +FOREWORD + + +When a man knocks at Uncle Sam’s gate, craving admission to his +house, we ask him how much money he brings, lest he become a +hindrance instead of a help. If now we were to ask what he brings, +not only in his pocket, but in his mind and in his heart, this +stranger, what ideals he owns, what company he kept in the country +he left that shaped his hopes and ambitions,—might it not, if the +answer were right, be a help to a better mutual understanding +between host and guest? For the _Mayflower_ did not hold all who +in this world have battled for freedom of home, of hope, and of +conscience. The struggle is bigger than that. Every land has its +George Washington, its Kosciusko, its William Tell, its Garibaldi, +its Kossuth, if there is but one that has a Joan d’Arc. What we +want to know of the man is: were its heroes his? + +This book is an attempt to ask and to answer that question for my +own people, in a very small and simple way, it is true, but perhaps +abler pens with more leisure than mine may follow the trail it has +blazed. I should like to see some Swede write of the heroes of his +noble, chivalrous people, whom lack of space has made me slight +here, though I count them with my own. I should like to hear the +epic of United Italy, of proud and freedom-loving Hungary, the +swan-song of unhappy Poland, chanted to young America again and +again, to help us all understand that we are kin in the things that +really count, and help us pull together as we must if we are to +make the most of our common country. + +These were my—our—heroes, then. Every lad of Northern blood, whose +heart is in the right place, loves them. And he need make no +excuses for any of them. Nor has he need of bartering them for the +great of his new home; they go very well together. It is partly +for his sake I have set their stories down here. All too quickly +he lets go his grip on them, on the new shore. Let him keep them +and cherish them with the memories of the motherland. The immigrant +America wants and needs is he who brings the best of the old home +to the new, not he who threw it overboard on the voyage. In the +great melting-pot it will tell its story for the good of us all. + +To those who wonder that I have left the Saga era of the North +untouched, I would say that I have preferred to deal here only with +downright historic figures. For valuable aid rendered in insuring +accuracy I am indebted to the services of Dr. P.A. Rydberg, Dr. J. +Emile Blomén, Gustaf V. Lindner, and Professor Joakim Reinhard. +My thanks are due likewise to many friends, Danes by birth like +myself, who have helped me with the illustrations. + + J. A. R. + + RICHMOND HILL, + June, 1910. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA 1 + + HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND 31 + + GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN 61 + + ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH 87 + + KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG 125 + + HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID 153 + + KING CHRISTIAN IV 179 + + GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING 205 + + KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN 239 + + THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE 263 + + CARL LINNÉ, KING OF THE FLOWERS 277 + + NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER 305 + + + + +A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA + + +The Eighteenth Century broke upon a noisy family quarrel in the +north of Europe. Charles the Twelfth of Sweden, the royal hotspur +of all history, and Frederik of Denmark had fallen out. Like their +people, they were first cousins, and therefore all the more bent +on settling the old question which was the better man. After the +fashion of the lion and the unicorn, they fought “all about the +town,” and, indeed, about every town that came in their way, now +this and now that side having the best of it. On the sea, which was +the more important because neither Swedes nor Danes could reach +their fighting ground or keep up their armaments without command +of the waterways, the victory rested finally with the Danes. And +this was due almost wholly to one extraordinary figure, the like +of which is scarce to be found in the annals of warfare, Peder +Tordenskjold. Rising in ten brief years from the humblest place +before the mast, a half-grown lad, to the rank of admiral, ennobled +by his King and the idol of two nations, only to be assassinated on +the “field of honor” at thirty, he seems the very incarnation of +the stormy times of the Eleven Years’ War, with which his sun rose +and set; for the year in which peace was made also saw his death. + +Peder Jansen Wessel was born on October 28, 1690, in the city of +Trondhjem, Norway, which country in those days was united with +Denmark under one king. His father was an alderman with eighteen +children. Peder was the tenth of twelve wild boys. It is related +that the father in sheer desperation once let make for him a pair +of leathern breeches which he would not be able to tear. But the +lad, not to be beaten so easily, sat on a grind-stone and had +one of his school-fellows turn it till the seat was worn thin, a +piece of bravado that probably cost him dear, for doubtless the +exasperated father’s stick found the attenuated spot. + +Since he would have none of the school, his father had him +apprenticed out to a tailor with the injunction not to spare the +rod. But sitting cross-legged on a tailor’s stool did not suit the +lad, and he took it out of his master by snowballing him thoroughly +one winter’s day. Next a barber undertook to teach him his trade; +but Peder ran away and was drifting about the streets when the King +came to Norway. The boy saw the splendid uniforms and heard the +story of the beautiful capital by the Öresund, with its palaces and +great fighting ships. When the King departed, he was missing, and +for a while there was peace in Trondhjem. + +Down in Copenhagen the homeless lad was found wandering about by +the King’s chaplain, who, being himself a Norwegian, took him home +and made him a household page. But the boy’s wanderings had led +him to the navy-yard, where he saw mid-shipmen of his own size at +drill, and he could think of nothing else. When he should have +been waiting at table he was down among the ships. For him there +was ever but one way to any goal, the straight cut, and at fifteen +he wrote to the King asking to be appointed a midshipman. “I am +wearing away my life as a servant,” he wrote. “I want to give it, +and my blood, to the service of your Majesty, and I will serve you +with all my might while I live!” + +The navy had need of that kind of recruits, and the King saw to it +that he was apprenticed at once. And that was the beginning of his +strangely romantic career. + +Three years he sailed before the mast and learned seamanship, +while Charles was baiting the Muscovite and the North was resting +on its arms. Then came Pultava and the Swedish King’s crushing +defeat. The storm-centre was transferred to the North again, and +the war on the sea opened with a splendid deed, fit to appeal to +any ardent young heart. At the battle in the Bay of Kjöge, the +_Dannebrog_, commanded by Ivar Hvitfeldt, caught fire, and by its +position exposed the Danish fleet to great danger. Hvitfeldt could +do one of two things: save his own life and his men’s by letting +his ship drift before the wind and by his escape risking the rest +of the fleet and losing the battle, or stay where he was to meet +certain death. He chose the latter, anchored his vessel securely, +and fought on until the ship was burned down to the water’s edge +and blew up with him and his five hundred men. Ivar Hvitfeldt’s +name is forever immortal in the history of his country. A few years +ago they raised the wreck of the _Dannebrog_, fitly called after +the Danish flag, and made of its guns a monument that stands on +Langelinie, the beautiful shore road of Copenhagen. + +Fired by such deeds, young Wessel implored the King, before he had +yet worn out his first midshipman’s jacket, to give him command of +a frigate. He compromised on a small privateer, the _Ormen_, but +with it he did such execution in Swedish waters and earned such +renown as a dauntless sailor and a bold scout whose information +about the enemy was always first and best, that before spring they +gave him a frigate with eighteen guns and the emphatic warning +“not to engage any enemy when he was not clearly the stronger.” He +immediately brought in a Swedish cruiser, the _Alabama_ of those +days, that had been the terror of the sea. In a naval battle in the +Baltic soon after, he engaged with his little frigate two of the +enemy’s line-of-battle ships that were trying to get away, and only +when a third came to help them did he retreat, so battered that he +had to seek port to make repairs. Accused of violating his orders, +his answer was prompt: “I promised your Majesty to do my best, and +I did.” King Frederik IV, himself a young and spirited man, made +him a captain, jumping him over fifty odd older lieutenants, and +gave him leave to war on the enemy as he saw fit. + +The immediate result was that the Governor of Göteborg, the enemy’s +chief seaport in the North Sea, put a price on his head. Captain +Wessel heard of it and sent word into town that he was outside—to +come and take him; but to hurry, for time was short. While waiting +for a reply, he fell in with two Swedish men-of-war having in tow +a Danish prize. That was not to be borne, and though they together +mounted ninety-four guns to his eighteen, he fell upon them like a +thunderbolt. They beat him off, but he returned for their prize. +That time they nearly sank him with three broad-sides. However, he +ran for the Norwegian coast and saved his ship. In his report of +this affair he excuses himself for running away with the reflection +that allowing himself to be sunk “would not rightly have benefited +his Majesty’s service.” + +However, the opportunity came to him swiftly of “rightly +benefiting” the King’s service. After the battle of Kolberger +Heide, that had gone against the Swedes, he found them beaching +their ships under cover of the night to prevent their falling into +the hands of the victors. Wessel halted them with the threat that +every man Jack in the fleet should be made to walk the plank, saved +the ships, and took their admiral prisoner to his chief. When +others slept, Wessel was abroad with his swift sailer. If wind and +sea went against him, he knew how to turn his mishap to account. +Driven in under the hostile shore once, he took the opportunity, +as was his wont, to get the lay of the land and of the enemy. He +learned quickly that in the harbor of Wesensö, not far away, a +Swedish cutter was lying with a Danish prize. She carried eight +guns and had a crew of thirty-six men; but though he had at the +moment only eighteen sailors in his boat, he crept up the coast at +once, slipped quietly in after sundown, and took ship and prize +with a rush, killing and throwing overboard such as resisted. In +Sweden mothers hushed their crying children with his dreaded name; +on the sea they came near to thinking him a troll, so sudden and +unexpected were his onsets. But there was no witchcraft about it. +He sailed swiftly because he was a skilled sailor and because he +missed no opportunity to have the bottom of his ship scraped and +greased. And when on board, pistol and cutlass hung loose; for it +was a time of war with a brave and relentless foe. + +His reconnoitring expeditions he always headed himself, and +sometimes he went alone. Thus, when getting ready to take +Marstrand, a fortified seaport of great importance to Charles, he +went ashore disguised as a fisherman and peddled fish through the +town, even in the very castle itself, where he took notice, along +with the position of the guns and the strength of the garrison, +of the fact that the commandant had two pretty daughters. He was +a sailor, sure enough. Once when ashore on such an expedition, +he was surprised by a company of dragoons. His men escaped, but +the dragoons cut off his way to the shore. As they rode at him, +reaching out for his sword, he suddenly dashed among them, cut +one down, and, diving through the surf, swam out to the boat, his +sword between his teeth. Their bullets churned up the sea all about +him, but he was not hit. He seemed to bear a charmed life; in all +his fights he was wounded but once. That was in the attack on the +strongly fortified port of Strömstad, in which he was repulsed with +a loss of 96 killed and 246 wounded, while the Swedish loss footed +up over 1500, a fight which led straight to the most astonishing +chapter in his whole career, of which more anon. + +All Denmark and Norway presently rang with the stories of +his exploits. They were always of the kind to appeal to the +imagination, for in truth he was a very knight errant of the sea +who fought for the love of it as well as of the flag, ardent +patriot that he was. A brave and chivalrous foe he loved next to a +loyal friend. Cowardice he loathed. Once when ordered to follow a +retreating enemy with his frigate _Hvide Örnen_ (the White Eagle) +of thirty guns, he hugged him so close that in the darkness he ran +his ship into the great Swedish man-of-war _Ösel_ of sixty-four +guns. The chance was too good to let pass. Seeing that the _Ösel’s_ +lower gun-ports were closed, and reasoning from this that she +had been struck in the water-line and badly damaged, he was for +boarding her at once, but his men refused to follow him. In the +delay the _Ösel_ backed away. Captain Wessel gave chase, pelted her +with shot, and called to her captain, whose name was _Söstjerna_ +(sea-star), to stop. + +“Running away from a frigate, are you? Shame on you, coward and +poltroon! Stay and fight like a man for your King and your flag!” + +Seeing him edge yet farther away, he shouted in utter exasperation, +“Your name shall be dog-star forever, not sea-star, if you don’t +stay.” + +“But all this,” he wrote sadly to the King, “with much more which +was worse, had no effect.” + +However, on his way back to join the fleet he ran across a +convoy of ten merchant vessels, guarded by three of the enemy’s +line-of-battle ships. He made a feint at passing, but, suddenly +turning, swooped down upon the biggest trader, ran out his boats, +made fast, and towed it away from under the very noses of its +protectors. It meant prize-money for his men, but their captain did +not forget their craven conduct of the night, which had made him +lose a bigger prize, and with the money they got a sound flogging. + +The account of the duel between his first frigate, _Lövendahl’s +Galley_, of eighteen guns, and a Swede of twenty-eight guns reads +like the doings of the old vikings, and indeed both commanders +were likely descended straight from those arch fighters. Wessel +certainly was. The other captain was an English officer, Bactman by +name, who was on the way to deliver his ship, that had been bought +in England, to the Swedes. They met in the North Sea and fell to +fighting by noon of one day. The afternoon of the next saw them at +it yet. Twice the crew of the Swedish frigate had thrown down their +arms, refusing to fight any more. Vainly the vessel had tried to +get away; the Dane hung to it like a leech. In the afternoon of the +second day Wessel was informed that his powder had given out. He +had a boat sent out with a herald, who presented to Captain Bactman +his regrets that he had to quit for lack of powder, but would he +come aboard and shake hands? + +The Briton declined. Meanwhile the ships had drifted close enough +to speak through the trumpet, and Captain Wessel shouted over from +his quarter-deck that “if he could lend him a little powder, they +might still go on.” Captain Bactman smilingly shook his head, +and then the two drank to one another’s health, each on his own +quarter-deck, and parted friends, while their crews manned what was +left of the yards and cheered each other wildly. + +Wessel’s enemies, of whom he had many, especially among the +nobility, who looked upon him as a vulgar upstart, used this +incident to bring him before a court-martial. It was unpatriotic, +they declared, and they demanded that he be degraded and fined. His +defence, which with all the records of his career are in the Navy +Department at Copenhagen, was brief but to the point. It is summed +up in the retort to his accusers that “they themselves should be +rebuked, and severely, for failing to understand that an officer in +the King’s service should be promoted instead of censured for doing +his plain duty,” and that there was nothing in the articles of war +commanding him to treat an honorable foe otherwise than with honor. + +It must be admitted that he gave his critics no lack of cause. +His enterprises were often enough of a hair-raising kind, and he +had scant patience with censure. Thus once, when harassed by an +Admiralty order purposely issued to annoy him, he wrote back: “The +biggest fool can see that to obey would defeat all my plans. I +shall not do it. It may suit folk who love loafing about shore, but +to an honest man such talk is disgusting, let alone that the thing +can’t be done.” He was at that time twenty-six years old, and in +charge of the whole North Sea fleet. No wonder he had enemies. + +However, the King was his friend. He made him a nobleman, and gave +him the name Tordenskjold. It means “thunder shield.” + +“Then, by the powers,” he swore when he was told, “I shall thunder +in the ears of the Swedes so that the King shall hear of it!” And +he kept his word. + +Charles had determined to take Denmark with one fell blow. He had +an army assembled in Skaane to cross the sound, which was frozen +over solid. All was ready for the invasion in January 1716. The +people throughout Sweden had assembled in the churches to pray +for the success of the King’s arms, and he was there himself to +lead; but in the early morning hours a strong east wind broke up +the ice, and the campaign ended before it was begun. Charles then +turned on Norway, and laid siege to the city of Frederikshald, +which, with its strong fort, Frederiksteen, was the key to that +country. A Danish fleet lay in the Skagerak, blocking his way of +reënforcements by sea. Tordenskjold, with his frigate, _Hvide +Örnen_, and six smaller ships (the frigate _Vindhunden_ of sixteen +guns, and five vessels of light draught, two of which were heavily +armed), was doing scouting duty for the Admiral when he learned +that the entire Swedish fleet of forty-four ships that was intended +to aid in the operations against Frederikshald lay in the harbor of +Dynekilen waiting its chance to slip out. It was so well shielded +there that its commander sent word to the King to rest easy; +nothing could happen to him. He would join him presently. + +Tordenskjold saw that if he could capture or destroy this fleet +Norway was saved; the siege must perforce be abandoned. And Norway +was his native land, which he loved with his whole fervid soul. But +no time was to be lost. He could not go back to ask for permission, +and one may shrewdly guess that he did not want to, for it would +certainly have been refused. He heard that the Swedish officers, +secure in their stronghold, were to attend a wedding on shore the +next day. His instructions from the Admiralty were: in an emergency +always to hold a council of war, and to abide by its decision. At +daybreak he ran his ship alongside _Vindhunden_, her companion +frigate, and called to the captain: + +“The Swedish officers are bidden to a wedding, and they have +forgotten us. What do you say—shall we go unasked?” + +Captain Grip was game. “Good enough!” he shouted back. “The wind is +fair, and we have all day. I am ready.” + +That was the council of war and its decision. Tordenskjold gave +the signal to clear for action, and sailed in at the head of his +handful of ships. + +The inlet to the harbor of Dynekilen is narrow and crooked, winding +between reefs and rocky steeps quite two miles, and only in +spots more than four hundred feet wide. Half-way in was a strong +battery. Tordenskjold’s fleet was received with a tremendous fire +from all the Swedish ships, from the battery, and from an army of +four thousand soldiers lying along shore. The Danish ships made +no reply. They sailed up grimly silent till they reached a place +wide enough to let them wear round, broadside on. Then their guns +spoke. Three hours the battle raged before the Swedish fire began +to slacken. As soon as he noticed it, Tordenskjold slipped into the +inner harbor under cover of the heavy pall of smoke, and before the +Swedes suspected their presence they found his ships alongside. +Broadside after broadside crashed into them, and in terror they +fled, soldiers and sailors alike. While they ran Tordenskjold +swooped down upon the half-way battery, seized it, and spiked its +guns. The fight was won. + +But the heaviest part was left—the towing out of the captured +ships. All the afternoon Tordenskjold led the work in person, +pulling on ropes, cheering on his men. The Swedes, returning +gamely to the fight, showered them with bullets from shore. One +of the abandoned vessels caught fire. Lieutenant Toender, of +Tordenskjold’s staff, a veteran with a wooden leg, boarded it just +as the quartermaster ran up yelling that the ship was full of +powder and was going to blow up. He tried to jump overboard, but +the lieutenant seized him by the collar and, stumping along, made +him lead the way to the magazine. A fuse had been laid to an open +keg of powder, and the fire was sputtering within an inch of it +when Lieutenant Tönder plucked it out, smothered it between thumb +and forefinger, and threw it through the nearest port-hole. There +were two hundred barrels of powder in the ship. + +Tordenskjold had kept his word to the King. Not as much as a yawl +of the Dynekilen fleet was left to the enemy. He had sunk or +burned thirteen and captured thirty-one ships with his seven, and +all the piled-up munitions of war were in his hands. King Charles +gave up the siege, marched his army out of Norway, and the country +was saved. The victory cost Tordenskjold but nineteen killed and +fifty-seven wounded. On his own ship six men were killed and twenty +wounded. + +Of infinite variety was this sea-fighter. After a victory like +this, one hears of him in the next breath gratifying a passing whim +of the King, who wanted to know what the Swedish people thought of +their Government after Charles’s long wars that are said to have +cost their country a million men. Tordenskjold overheard it, had +himself rowed across to Sweden, picked up there a wedding party, +bridegroom, minister, guests, and all, including the captain of +the shore watch who was among them, and returned in time for the +palace dinner with his catch. King Frederik was entertaining Czar +Peter the Great, who had been boasting of the unhesitating loyalty +of his men which his Danish host could not match. He now had the +tables turned upon him. It is recorded that the King sent the party +back with royal gifts for the bride. One would be glad to add that +Tordenskjold sent back, too, the silver pitcher and the parlor +clock his men took on their visit. But he didn’t. They were still +in Copenhagen a hundred years later, and may be they are yet. It +was not like his usual gallantry toward the fair sex. But perhaps +he didn’t know anything about it. + +Then we find him, after an unsuccessful attack on Göteborg that +cost many lives, sending in his adjutant to congratulate the +Swedish commandant on their “gallant encounter” the day before, +and exchanging presents with him in token of mutual regard. And +before one can turn the page he is discovered swooping down upon +Marstrand, taking town and fleet anchored there, and the castle +itself with its whole garrison, all with two hundred men, swelled +by stratagem into an army of thousands. We are told that an officer +sent out from the castle to parley, issuing forth from a generous +dinner, beheld the besieging army drawn up in street after street, +always two hundred men around every corner, as he made his way +through the town, piloted by Tordenskjold himself, who was careful +to take him the longest way, while the men took the short cut to +the next block. The man returned home with the message that the +town was full of them and that resistance was useless. The ruse +smacks of Peder Wessel’s boyish fight with a much bigger fellow who +had beaten him once by gripping his long hair, and so getting his +head in chancery. But Peder had taken notice. Next time he came to +the encounter with hair cut short and his whole head smeared with +soft-soap, and that time he won. + +The most extraordinary of all his adventures befell when, after the +attack on Strömstad, he was hastening home to Copenhagen. Crossing +the Kattegat in a little smack that carried but two three-pound +guns, he was chased and overtaken by a Swedish frigate of sixteen +guns and a crew of sixty men. Tordenskjold had but twenty-one, +and eight of them were servants and non-combatants. They were +dreadfully frightened, and tradition has it that one of them wept +when he saw the Swede coming on. Her captain called upon him to +surrender, but the answer was flung back: + +“I am Tordenskjold! Come and take me, if you can.” + +With that came a tiny broadside that did brisk execution on +the frigate. Tordenskjold had hauled both his guns over on the +“fighting side” of his vessel. There ensued a battle such as Homer +would have loved to sing. Both sides banged away for all they were +worth. In the midst of the din and smoke Tordenskjold used his +musket with cool skill; his servants loaded while he fired. At +every shot a man fell on the frigate. + +Word was brought that there was no more round shot. He bade them +twist up his pewter dinner service and fire that, which they did. +The Swede tried vainly to board. Tordenskjold manœuvred his smack +with such skill that they could not hook on. Seeing this, Captain +Lind, commander of the frigate, called to him to desist from the +useless struggle; he would be honored to carry such a prisoner into +Göteborg. Back came the taunt: + +“Neither you nor any other Swede shall ever carry me there!” And +with that he shot the captain down.[1] + +When his men saw him fall, they were seized with panic and made off +as quickly as they could, while Tordenskjold’s crew, of whom only +fourteen were left, beat their drums and blew trumpets in frantic +defiance. Their captain was for following the Swede and boarding +her, but he couldn’t. Sails, rigging, and masts were shot to +pieces. Perhaps the terror of the Swedes was increased by the sight +of Tordenskjold’s tame bear making faces at them behind his master. +It went with him everywhere till that day, and came out of the +fight unscathed. But during the night the crew ran the vessel on +the Swedish shore, whence Tordenskjold himself reached Denmark in +an open boat which he had to keep bailing all night, for the boat +was shot full of holes, and though he and his companions stuffed +their spare clothing into them it leaked badly. The enemy got the +smack, after all, and the bear, which, being a Norwegian, proved so +untractable on Swedish soil that, sad to relate, in the end they +cut him up and ate him. + +King Charles, himself a knightly soul and an admirer of a gallant +enemy, gave orders to have all Tordenskjold’s belongings sent +back to him, but he did not live to see the order carried out. He +was found dead in the rifle-pits before Frederiksteen on December +11, 1718, shot through the head. It was Tordenskjold himself who +brought the all-important news to King Frederik in the night +of December 28,—they were not the days of telegraphs and fast +steamers,—and when the King, who had been roused out of bed to +receive him, could not trust his ears, he said with characteristic +audacity, “I wish it were as true that your Majesty had made me a +schoutbynacht,”—the rank next below admiral. And so he took the +step next to the last on the ladder of his ambition. + +Within seven months he took Marstrand. It is part of the record +of that astonishing performance that when the unhappy Commandant +hesitated as the hour of evacuation came, not sure that he had done +right in capitulating, Tordenskjold walked up to the fort with a +hundred men, half his force, banged on the gate, went in alone and +up to the Commandant’s window, thundering out: + +“What are you waiting for? Don’t you know time is up?” + +In terror and haste, Colonel Dankwardt moved his Hessians out, and +Tordenskjold marched his handful of men in. When he brought the +King the keys of Marstrand, Frederik made him an admiral. + +It was while blockading the port of Göteborg in the last year of +the war that he met and made a friend of Lord Carteret, the English +Ambassador to Denmark, and fell in love with the picture of a young +Englishwoman, Miss Norris, a lady of great beauty and wealth, +who, Lord Carteret told him, was an ardent admirer of his. It was +this love which indirectly sent him to his death. Lord Carteret +had given him a picture of her, and as soon as peace was made he +started for England; but he never reached that country. The remnant +of the Swedish fleet lay in the roadstead at Göteborg, under the +guns of the two forts, New and Old Elfsborg. While Tordenskjold was +away at Marstrand, the enemy sallied forth and snapped up seven +of the smaller vessels of his blockading fleet. The news made him +furious. He sent in, demanding them back at once, “or I will come +after them.” He had already made one ineffectual attempt to take +New Elfsborg that cost him dear. In Göteborg they knew the strength +of his fleet and laughed at his threat. But it was never safe to +laugh at Tordenskjold. The first dark night he stole in with ten +armed boats, seized the shore batteries of the old fort, and spiked +their guns before a shot was fired. The rising moon saw his men +in possession of the ships lying at anchor. With their blue-lined +coats turned inside out so that they might pass for Swedish +uniforms, they surprised the watch in the guard-house and made them +all prisoners. Now that there was no longer reason for caution, +they raised a racket that woke the sleeping town up in a fright. +The commander of the other fort sent out a boat to ascertain the +cause. It met the Admiral’s and challenged it, “Who goes there?” + +“Tordenskjold,” was the reply, “come to teach you to keep awake.” + +It proved impossible to warp the ships out. Only one of the seven +lost ones was recovered; all the rest were set on fire. By the +light of the mighty bonfire Tordenskjold rowed out with his men, +hauling the recovered ship right under the guns of the forts, the +Danish flag flying at the bow of his boat. He had not lost a single +man. A cannon-ball swept away all the oars on one side of his boat, +but no one was hurt. + +At Marstrand they had been up all night listening to the +cannonading and the crash upon crash as the big ships blew up. They +knew that Tordenskjold was abroad with his men. In the morning, +when they were all in church, he walked in and sat down by his +chief, the old Admiral Judicher, who was a slow-going, cautious +man. He whispered anxiously, “What news?” but Tordenskjold only +shrugged his shoulders with unmoved face. It is not likely that +either the old Admiral or the congregation heard much of that +sermon, if indeed they heard any of it. But when it was over, they +saw from the walls of the town the Danish ships at anchor and heard +the story of the last of Tordenskjold’s exploits. It fitly capped +the climax of his life. Sweden’s entire force on the North Sea, +with the exception of five small galleys, had either been captured, +sunk, or burned by him. + +The King would not let Tordenskjold go when peace was made, but he +had his way in the end. To his undoing he consented to take with +him abroad a young scalawag, the son of his landlord, who had more +money than brains. In Hamburg the young man fell in with a gambler, +a Swedish colonel by name of Stahl, who fleeced him of all he had +and much more besides. When Tordenskjold heard of it and met the +Colonel in another man’s house, he caned him soundly and threw him +out in the street. For this he was challenged, but refused to fight +a gambler. + +“Friends,” particularly one Colonel Münnichhausen, who volunteered +to be his second, talked him over, and also persuaded him to give +up the pistol, with which he was an expert. The duel was fought at +the Village of Gledinge, over the line from Hanover, on the morning +of November 12, 1720. Tordenskjold was roused from sleep at five, +and, after saying his prayers, a duty he never on any account +omitted, he started for the place appointed. His old body-servant +vainly pleaded with his master to take his stout blade instead of +the flimsy parade sword the Admiral carried. Münnichhausen advised +against it; it would be too heavy, he said. Stahl’s weapon was a +long fighting rapier, and to this the treacherous second made no +objection. Almost at the first thrust he ran the Admiral through. +The seconds held his servant while Stahl jumped on his horse and +galloped away. Tordenskjold breathed out his dauntless soul in the +arms of his faithful servant and friend. + +His body lies in a black marble sarcophagus in the “Navy Church” +at Copenhagen. The Danish and Norwegian peoples have never ceased +to mourn their idol. He was a sailor with a sailor’s faults. But +he loved truth, honor, and courage in foe and friend alike. Like +many seafaring men, he was deeply religious, with the unquestioning +faith of a child. There is a letter in existence written by him +to his father when the latter was on his death-bed that bears +witness to this. He thanks him with filial affection for all his +care, and says naïvely that he would rather have his prayers +than fall heir to twenty thousand daler. His pictures show a +stocky, broad-shouldered youth with frank blue eyes, full lips, +and an eagle nose. His deep, sonorous voice used to be heard, in +his midshipman days, above the whole congregation in the Navy +Church. In after years it called louder still to Denmark’s foes. +When things were at their worst in storm or battle, he was wont +to shout to his men, “Hi, _now_ we are having a fine time!” and +his battle-cry has passed into the language. By it, in desperate +straits demanding stout hearts, one may know the Dane after his own +heart, the real Dane, the world over. Among his own Tordenskjold is +still and always will be “the Admiral of Norway’s fleet.” + + +Footnotes: + +[1] He was not mortally wounded, and Tordenskjold took him prisoner +later at the capture of Marstrand. + + + + +HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND + + +When in the fall of 1909 the statement was flashed around the +world that the North Pole had at last been reached, a name long +unfamiliar ran from mouth to mouth with that of the man who claimed +to be its discoverer. Dr. Cook was coming to Copenhagen, the daily +despatches read, on the Danish Government steamer _Hans Egede_. A +shipload of reporters kept an anxious lookout from the Skaw for +the vessel so suddenly become famous, but few who through their +telescopes made out the name at last upon the prow of the ship +gave it another thought in the eager welcome to the man it brought +back from the perils of the Farthest North. Yet the name of that +vessel stood for something of more real account to humanity than +the attainment of a goal that had been the mystery of the ages. No +such welcome awaited the explorer Hans Egede, who a hundred and +seventy-two years before sailed homeward over that very route, +a broken, saddened man, and all he brought was the ashes of his +best-beloved that they might rest in her native soil. No gold medal +was struck for him; the people did not greet him with loud acclaim. +The King and his court paid scant attention to him, and he was +allowed to live his last days in poverty. Yet a greater honor is +his than ever fell to a discoverer: the simple natives of Greenland +long reckoned the time from his coming among them. To them he was +in their ice-bound home what Father Damien was to the stricken +lepers in the South seas, and Dr. Grenfell is to the fishermen of +Labrador. + +Hans Poulsen Egede, the apostle of Greenland, was a Norwegian of +Danish descent. He was born in the Northlands, in the parish of +Trondenäs, on January 31, 1686. His grandfather and his father +before him had been clergymen in Denmark, the former in the town of +West Egede, whence the name. Graduated in a single year from the +University of Copenhagen, “at which,” his teachers bore witness, +“no one need wonder who knows the man,” he became at twenty-two +pastor of a parish up in the Lofoden Islands, where the fabled +maëlstrom churns. Eleven years he preached to the poor fisherfolk +on Sunday, and on week-days helped his parishioners rebuild the old +church. When it was finished and the bishop came to consecrate it, +he chided Egede because the altar was too fine; it must have cost +more than they could afford. + +“It did not cost anything,” was his reply. “I made it myself.” + +No wonder his fame went far. When the church bell of Vaagen called, +boats carrying Sunday-clad fishermen were seen making for the +island from every point of the compass. Great crowds flocked to +his church; great enough to arouse the jealousy of neighboring +preachers who were not so popular, and they made it so unpleasant +that his wife at last tired of it. They little dreamed that they +were industriously paving the way for his greater work and for his +undying fame. + +The sea that surges against that rockbound coast ever called its +people out in quest of adventure. Some who went nine hundred years +ago found a land in the far Northwest barred by great icebergs; but +once inside the barrier, they saw deep fjords like their own at +home, to which the mountains sloped down, covered with a wealth of +lovely flowers. On green meadows antlered deer were grazing, the +salmon leaped in brawling brooks, and birds called for their mates +in the barrens. Above it all towered snow-covered peaks. They saw +only the summer day; they did not know how brief it was, and how +long the winter night, and they called the country Greenland. They +built their homes there, and other settlers came. They were hardy +men, bred in a harsh climate, and they stayed. They built churches +and had their priests and bishops, for Norway was Christian by +that time. And they prospered after their fashion. They even paid +Peter’s Pence to Rome. There is a record that their contribution, +being in kind, namely, walrus teeth, was sold in 1386 by the Pope’s +agent to a merchant in Flanders for twelve livres, fourteen sous. +They kept up communication with their kin across the seas until the +Black Death swept through the Old World in the Fourteenth Century; +Norway, when it was gone, was like a vast tomb. Two-thirds of its +people lay dead. Those who were left had enough to do at home; and +Greenland was forgotten. + +The seasons passed, and the savages, with whom the colonists +had carried on a running feud, came out of the frozen North and +overwhelmed them. Dim traditions that were whispered among the +natives for centuries told of that last fight. It was the Ragnarok +of the Northmen. Not one was left to tell the tale. Long years +after, when fishing vessels landed on that desolate coast, they +found a strange and hostile people in possession. No one had ever +dared to settle there since. + +This last Egede knew, but little more. He believed that there were +still settlements on the inaccessible east coast of Greenland where +descendants of the old Northmen lived, cut off from all the world, +sunk into ignorance and godlessness,—men and women who had once +known the true light,—and his heart yearned to go to their rescue. +Waking and dreaming, he thought of nothing else. The lamp in his +quiet study shone out over the sea at night when his people were +long asleep. Their pastor was poring over old manuscripts and the +logs of whalers that had touched upon Greenland. From Bergen he +gathered the testimony of many sailors. None of them had ever seen +traces of, or heard of, the old Northmen. + +To his bishop went Egede with his burden. Ever it rang in his +ears: “God has chosen you to bring them back to the light.” The +bishop listened and was interested. Yes, that was the land from +which seafarers in a former king’s time had brought home golden +sand. There might be more. It couldn’t be far from Cuba and +Hispaniola, those golden coasts. If one were to go equipped for +trading, no doubt a fine stroke of business might be done. Thus +the Right Reverend Bishop Krog of Trondhjem, and Egede went home, +disheartened. + +At home his friends scouted him, said he was going mad to think +of giving up his living on such a fool’s chase. His wife implored +him to stay, and with a heavy heart Egede was about to abandon +his purpose when his jealous neighbor, whose parishioners had +been going to hear Egede preach, stirred up such trouble that his +wife was glad to go. She even urged him to, and he took her at +her word. They moved to Bergen, and from that port they sailed on +May 3, 1721, on the ship _Haabet_ (the Hope), with another and +smaller vessel as convoy, forty-six souls all told, bound for the +unknown North. The Danish King had made Egede missionary to the +Greenlanders on a salary of three hundred daler a year, the same +amount which Egede himself contributed of his scant store toward +the equipment. The bishop’s plan had prevailed; the mission was to +be carried by the expected commerce, and upon that was to be built +a permanent colonization. + +Early in June they sighted land, but the way to it was barred +by impassable ice. A whole month they sailed to and fro, trying +vainly for a passage. At last they found an opening and slipped +through, only to find themselves shut in, with towering icebergs +closing around them. As they looked fearfully out over the rail, +their convoy signalled that she had struck, and the captain of +_Haabet_ cried out that all was lost. In the tumult of terror that +succeeded, Egede alone remained calm. Praying for succor where +there seemed to be none, he remembered the One Hundred and Seventh +Psalm: “He brought them out of darkness and the shadow of death, +and brake their bands in sunder.” And the morning dawned clear, +the ice was moving and their prison widening. On July 3, _Haabet_ +cleared the last ice-reef, and the shore lay open before them. + +The Eskimos came out in their kayaks, and the boldest climbed +aboard the ship. In one boat sat an old man who refused the +invitation. He paddled about the vessel, mumbling darkly in a +strange tongue. He was an Angekok, one of the native medicine-men +of whom presently Egede was to know much more. As he stood upon +the deck and looked at these strangers for whose salvation he had +risked all, his heart fell. They were not the stalwart Northmen he +had looked for, and their jargon had no homelike sound. But a great +wave of pity swept over him, and the prayer that rose to his lips +was for strength to be their friend and their guide to the light. + +Not at once did the way open for the coveted friendship with the +Eskimos. While they thought the strangers came only to trade they +were hospitable enough, but when they saw them build, clearly +intent on staying, they made signs that they had better go. They +pointed to the sun that sank lower toward the horizon every day, +and shivered as if from extreme cold, and they showed their +visitors the icebergs and the snow, making them understand that +it would cover the house by and by. When it all availed nothing +and the winter came on, they retired into their huts and cut the +acquaintance of the white men. They were afraid that they had come +to take revenge for the harm done their people in the olden time. +There was nothing for it, then, but that Egede must go to them, and +this he did. + +They seized their spears when they saw him coming, but he made +signs that he was their friend. When he had nothing else to give +them, he let them cut the buttons from his coat. Throughout the +fifteen years he spent in Greenland Egede never wore furs, as +did the natives. The black robe he thought more seemly for a +clergyman, to his great discomfort. He tells in his diary and in +his letters that often when he returned from his winter travels it +could stand alone when he took it off, being frozen stiff. After +a while he got upon neighborly terms with the Eskimos; but, if +anything, the discomfort was greater. They housed him at night in +their huts, where the filth and the stench were unendurable. They +showed their special regard by first licking off the piece of seal +they put before him, and if he rejected it they were hurt. Their +housekeeping, of which he got an inside view, was embarrassing in +its simplicity. The dish-washing was done by the dogs licking the +kettles clean. Often, after a night or two in a hut that held half +a dozen families, he was compelled to change his clothes to the +skin in an open boat or out on the snow. But the alternative was to +sleep out in a cold that sometimes froze his pillow to the bed and +the tea-cup to the table even in his own home. Above all, he must +learn their language. + +It proved a difficult task, for the Eskimo tongue was both very +simple and very complex. In all the things pertaining to their +daily life it was exceedingly complex. For instance, to catch one +kind of fish was expressed by one word, to catch another kind in +quite different terms. They had one word for catching a young seal, +another for catching an old one. When it came to matters of moral +and spiritual import, the language was poor to desperation. Egede’s +instruction began when he caught the word “kine”—what is it? And +from that time on he learned every day; but the pronunciation was +as varied as the workaday vocabulary, and it was an unending task. + +It proceeded with many interruptions from the Angekoks, who +tried more than once to bewitch him, but finally gave it up, +convinced that he was a great medicine-man himself, and therefore +invulnerable. But before that they tried to foment a regular +mutiny, the colony being by that time well under way, and Egede +had to arrest and punish the leaders. The natives naturally clung +to them, and when Egede had mastered their language and tried to +make clear that the Angekoks deceived them when they pretended to +go to the other world for advice, they demurred. “Did you ever see +them go?” he asked. “Well, have you seen this God of yours of whom +you speak so much?” was their reply. When Egede spoke of spiritual +gifts, they asked for good health and blubber: “Our Angekoks give +us that.” Hell-fire was much in theological evidence in those +days, but among the Eskimos it was a failure as a deterrent. They +listened to the account of it eagerly and liked the prospect. When +at length they became convinced that Egede knew more than their +Angekoks, they came to him with the request that he would abolish +winter. Very likely they thought that one who had such knowledge of +the hot place ought to have influence enough with the keeper of it +to obtain this favor. + +It was not an easy task, from any point of view, to which he had +put his hands. As that first winter wore away there were gloomy +days and nights, and they were not brightened when, with the return +of the sun, no ship arrived from Denmark. The Dutch traders came, +and opened their eyes wide when they found Egede and his household +safe and even on friendly terms with the Eskimos. Pelesse—the +natives called the missionary that, as the nearest they could +come to the Danish _präst_ (priest)—Pelesse was not there after +blubber, they told the Dutchmen, but to teach them about heaven +and of “Him up there,” who had made them and wanted them home with +Him again. So he had not worked altogether in vain. But the brief +summer passed, and still no relief ship. The crew of _Haabet_ +clamored to go home, and Egede had at last to give a reluctant +promise that if no ship came in two weeks, he would break up. His +wife alone refused to take a hand in packing. The ship was coming, +she insisted, and at the last moment it did come. A boat arriving +after dark brought the first word of it. The people ashore heard +voices speaking in Danish, and flew to Egede, who had gone to bed, +with the news. The ship brought good cheer. The Government was well +disposed. Trading and preaching were to go on together, as planned. +Joyfully then they built a bigger and a better house, and called +their colony Godthaab (Good Hope). + +The work was now fairly under way. Of the energy and the hardships +it entailed, even we in our day that have heard so much of Arctic +exploration can have but a faint conception. Shut in on the coast +of eternal ice and silence,—silence, save when in summer the +Arctic rivers were alive, and crash after crash announced that the +glaciers coming down from the inland mountains were “casting their +calves,” the great icebergs, upon the ocean,—the colonists counted +the days from the one when that year’s ship was lost to sight till +the returning spring brought the next one, their only communication +with their far-off home. In summer the days were sometimes burning +hot, but the nights always bitterly cold. In winter, says Egede, +hot water spilled on the table froze as it ran, and the meat they +cooked was often frozen at the bone when set on the table. Summer +and winter Egede was on his travels between Sundays, sometimes in +the trader’s boat, more often the only white man with one or two +Eskimo companions, seeking out the people. When night surprised +him with no native hut in sight, he pulled the boat on some desert +shore and, commending his soul to God, slept under it. Once he and +his son found an empty hut, and slept there in the darkness. Not +until day came again did they know that they had made their bed on +the frozen bodies of dead men who had once been the occupants of +the house, and had died they never knew how. Peril was everywhere. +Again and again his little craft was wrecked. Once the house blew +down over their heads in one of the dreadful winter storms that +ravage those high latitudes. Often he had to sit on the rail of his +boat, and let his numbed feet hang into the sea to restore feeling +in them. On land he sometimes waded waist-deep in snow, climbed +mountains and slid down into valleys, having but the haziest notion +of where he would land. At home his brave wife sat alone, praying +for his safety and listening to every sound that might herald his +return. Tremble and doubt they did, Egede owns, but they never +flinched. Their work was before them, and neither thought of +turning back. + +The Eskimos soon came to know that Egede was their friend. When +his boat entered a fjord where they were fishing, and his rowers +shouted out that the good priest had come who had news of God, they +dropped their work and flocked out to meet him. Then he spoke to +a floating congregation, simply as if they were children, and, as +with Him whose message he bore, “the people heard him gladly.” They +took him to their sick, and asked him to breathe upon them, which +he did to humor them, until he found out that it was an Angekok +practice, whereupon he refused. Once, after he had spoken of the +raising of Lazarus from the dead, they took him to a new-made grave +and asked him, too, to bring back their dead. They brought him a +blind man to be healed. Egede looked upon them in sorrowful pity. +“I can do nothing,” he said; “but if he believes in Jesus, He has +the power and can do it.” + +“I do believe,” shouted the blind man: “let Him heal me.” It +occurred to Egede, perhaps as a mere effort at cleanliness, to wash +his eyes in cognac, and he sent him away with words of comfort. He +did not see his patient again for thirteen years. Then he was in a +crowd of Eskimos who came to Godthaab. The man saw as well as Egede. + +“Do you remember?” he said, “you washed my eyes with sharp water, +and the Son of God in whom I believed, He made me to see.” + +Children the Eskimos were in their idolatry, and children they +remained as Christians. By Egede’s prayers they set great store. +“You ask for us,” they told him. “God does not hear us; He does +not understand Eskimo.” Of God they spoke as “Him up there.” They +believed that the souls of the dead went up on the rainbow, and, +reaching the moon that night, rested there in the moon’s house, +on a bench covered with the white skins of young polar bears. +There they danced and played games, and the northern lights were +the young people playing ball. Afterward they lived in houses on +the shore of a big lake overshadowed by a snow mountain. When the +waters ran over the edge of the lake, it rained on earth. When the +“moon was dark,” it was down on earth catching seal for a living. +Thunder was caused by two old women shaking a dried sealskin +between them; the lightning came when they turned the white side +out. The “Big Nail” we have heard of as the Eskimos’ Pole, was a +high-pointed mountain in the Farthest North on which the sky rested +and turned around with the sun, moon, and stars. Up there the stars +were much bigger. Orion’s Belt was so near that you had to carry a +whip to drive him away. + +The women were slaves. An Eskimo might have as many wives as he +saw fit; they were his, and it was nobody’s business. But adultery +was unknown. The seventh commandment in Egede’s translation came +to read, “One wife alone you shall have and love.” The birth of +a girl was greeted with wailing. When grown, she was often wooed +by violence. If she fled from her admirer, he cut her feet when +he overtook her, so that she could run no more. The old women +were denounced as witches who drove the seals away, and were +murdered. An Eskimo who was going on a reindeer hunt, and found +his aged mother a burden, took her away and laid her in an open +grave. Returning on the third day, he heard her groaning yet, and +smothered her with a big stone. He tried to justify himself to +Egede by saying that “she died hard, and it was a pity not to speed +her.” Yet they buried a dog’s head with a child, so that the dog, +being clever, could run ahead and guide the little one’s steps to +heaven. + +They could count no further than five; at a stretch they might +get to twenty, on their fingers and toes, but there they stopped. +However, they were not without resources. It was the day of long +Sunday services, and the Eskimos were a restless people. When the +sermon dragged, they would go up to Egede and make him measure +on their arms how much longer the talk was going to be. Then +they tramped back to their seats and sat listening with great +attention, all the time moving one hand down the arm, checking off +the preacher’s progress. If they got to the finger-tips before he +stopped, they would shake their heads sourly and go back for a +remeasurement. No wonder Egede put his chief hope in the children, +whom he gathered about him in flocks. + +For all that, the natives loved him. There came a day that brought +this message from the North: “Say to the speaker to come to us to +live, for the other strangers who come here can only talk to us +of blubber, blubber, blubber, and we also would hear of the great +Creator.” Egede went as far as he could, but was compelled by ice +and storms to turn back after weeks of incredible hardships. The +disappointment was the more severe to him because he had never +quite given up his hope of finding remnants of the ancient Norse +settlements. The fact that the old records spoke of a West Bygd +(settlement) and an East Bygd had misled many into believing +that the desolate east coast had once been colonized. Not until +our own day was this shown to be an error, when Danish explorers +searched that coast for a hundred miles and found no other trace +of civilization than a beer bottle left behind by the explorer +Nordenskjold. + +Egede’s hope had been that Greenland might be once more colonized +by Christian people. When the Danish Government, after some years, +sent up a handful of soldiers, with a major who took the title of +governor, to give the settlement official character as a trading +station, they sent with them twenty unofficial “Christians,” ten +men out of the penitentiary and as many lewd and drunken women +from the treadmill, who were married by lot before setting sail, +to give the thing a half-way decent look. They were good enough +for the Eskimos, they seem to have thought at Copenhagen. There +followed a terrible winter, during which mutiny and murder were +threatened. “It is a pity,” writes the missionary, “that while we +sleep secure among the heathen savages, with so-called Christian +people our lives are not safe.” As a matter of fact they were not, +for the soldiers joined in the mutiny against Egede as the cause +of their having to live in such a place, and had not sickness and +death smitten the malcontents, neither he nor the governor would +have come safe through the winter. On the Eskimos this view of the +supposed fruits of Christian teaching made its own impression. +After seeing a woman scourged on shipboard for misbehavior, they +came innocently enough to Egede and suggested that some of their +best Angekoks be sent down to Denmark to teach the people to be +sober and decent. + +There came a breathing spell after ten years of labor in what +had often enough seemed to him the spiritual as well as physical +ice-barrens of the North, when Egede surveyed a prosperous mission, +with trade established, a hundred and fifty children christened and +schooled, and many of their elders asking to be baptized. In the +midst of his rejoicing the summer’s ship brought word from Denmark +that the King was dead, and orders from his successor to abandon +the station. Egede might stay with provisions for one year, if +there was enough left over after fitting out the ship; but after +that he would receive no further help. + +When the Eskimos heard the news, they brought their little children +to the mission. “These will not let you go,” they said; and he +stayed. His wife, whom hardship and privation and the lonely +waiting for her husband in the long winter nights had at last +broken down, refused to leave him, though she sadly needed the +care of a physician. A few of the sailors were persuaded to stay +another year. “So now,” Egede wrote in his diary when, on July 31, +1731, he had seen the ship sail away with all his hopes, “I am +left alone with my wife and three children, ten sailors and eight +Eskimos, girls and boys who have been with us from the start. God +let me live to see the blessed day that brings good news once more +from home.” His prayer was heard. The next summer brought word that +the mission was to be continued, partly because Egede had strained +every nerve to send home much blubber and many skins. But it was as +a glimpse of the sun from behind dark clouds. His greatest trials +trod hard upon the good news. + +To rouse interest in the mission Egede had sent home young Eskimos +from time to time. Three of these died of smallpox in Denmark. The +fourth came home and brought the contagion, all unknown, to his +people. It was the summer fishing season, when the natives travel +much and far, and wherever he went they flocked about him to hear +of the “Great Lord’s land,” where the houses were so tall that +one could not shoot an arrow over them, and to ask a multitude of +questions: Was the King very big? Had he caught many whales? Was +he strong and a great Angekok? and much more of the same kind. In +a week the disease broke out among the children at the mission, +and soon word came from islands and fjords where the Eskimos were +fishing, of death and misery unspeakable. It was virgin soil for +the plague, and it was terribly virulent, striking down young +and old in every tent and hut. More than two thousand natives, +one-fourth of the whole population, died that summer. Of two +hundred families near the mission only thirty were left alive. A +cry of terror and anguish rose throughout the settlements. No one +knew what to do. In vain did Egede implore them to keep their sick +apart. In fever delirium they ran out in the ice-fields or threw +themselves into the sea. A wild panic seized the survivors, and +they fled to the farthest tribes, carrying the seeds of death with +them wherever they went. Whole villages perished, and their dead lay +unburied. Utter desolation settled like a pall over the unhappy land. + +Through it all a single ray of hope shone. The faith that Egede +had preached all those years, and the life he had lived with them, +bore their fruit. They had struck deeper than he thought. They +crowded to him, all that could, as their one friend. Dying mothers +held their suckling babes up to him and died content. In a deserted +island camp a half-grown girl was found alone with three little +children. Their father was dead. When he knew that for him and the +baby there was no help, he went to a cave and, covering himself and +the child with skins, lay down to die. His parting words to his +daughter were, “Before you have eaten the two seals and the fish I +have laid away for you, Pelesse will come, no doubt, and take you +home. For he loves you and will take care of you.” At the mission +every nook and cranny was filled with the sick and the dying. Egede +and his wife nursed them day and night. Childlike, when death +approached, they tried to put on their best clothes, or even to +have new ones made, that they might please God by coming into His +presence looking fine. When Egede had closed their eyes, he carried +the dead in his arms to the vestibule, where in the morning the men +who dug the graves found them. At the sight of his suffering the +scoffers were dumb. What his preaching had not done to win them +over, his sorrows did. They were at last one. + +That dreadful year left Egede a broken man. In his dark moments +he reproached himself with having brought only misery to those he +had come to help and serve. One thorn which one would think he +might have been spared rankled deep in it all. Some missionaries +of a dissenting sect—Egede was Lutheran—had come with the smallpox +ship to set up an establishment of their own. At their head was +a man full of misdirected zeal and quite devoid of common-sense, +who engaged Egede in a wordy dispute about justification by faith +and condemned him and his work unsparingly. He had grave doubts +whether he was in truth a “converted man.” It came to an end when +they themselves fell ill, and Egede and his wife had the last word, +after their own fashion. They nursed the warlike brethren through +their illness with loving ministrations and gave them back to life, +let us hope, wiser and better men. + +At Christmas, 1735, Egede’s faithful wife, Gertrude, closed her +eyes. She had gone out with him from home and kin to a hard and +heathen land, and she had been his loyal helpmeet in all his +trials. Now it was all over. That winter scurvy laid him upon a bed +of pain and, lying there, his heart turned to the old home. His +son had come from Copenhagen to help, happily yet while his mother +lived. To him he would give over the work. In Denmark he could do +more for it than in Greenland, now he was alone. On July 29, 1736, +he preached for the last time to his people and baptized a little +Eskimo to whom they gave his name, Hans. The following week he +sailed for home, carrying, as all his earthly wealth, his beloved +dead and his motherless children. + +The Eskimos gathered on the shore and wept as the ship bore their +friend away. They never saw him again. He lived in Denmark eighteen +years, training young men to teach the Eskimos. They gave him the +title of bishop, but so little to live on that he was forced in +his last days to move from Copenhagen to a country town, to make +both ends meet. His grave was forgotten by the generation that came +after him. No one knows now where it is; but in ice-girt Greenland, +where the northern lights on wintry nights flash to the natives +their message from the souls that have gone home, his memory will +live when that of the North Pole seeker whom the world applauds is +long forgotten. Hans Egede was their great man, their hero. He was +more,—he was their friend. + + + + +GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN + + +A great and wise woman had, after ages of war and bloodshed, united +the crowns of the three Scandinavian kingdoms upon one head. In the +strong city of Kalmar, around which the tide of battle had ever +raged hottest, the union was declared in the closing days of the +Thirteenth Century. Norwegian, Swede, and Dane were thenceforth +to stand together, to the end of time; so they resolved. It was +all a vain dream. Queen Margaret was not cold in her grave before +the kingdoms fell apart. Norway clung to Denmark, but Sweden went +her own way. In the wars of two generations the Danish kings won +back the Swedish crown and lost it, again and again, until in 1520 +King Christian II clutched it for the last time, at the head of a +conquering army. He celebrated his victory with a general amnesty, +and bade the Swedish nobles to a great feast, held at the capital +in November. + +Christian is one of the unsolved riddles of history. Ablest but +unhappiest of all his house, he was an instinctive democrat, +sincerely solicitous for the welfare of the plain people, but +incredibly cruel and faithless when the dark mood seized him. +The coronation feast ended with the wholesale butchery of the +unsuspecting nobles. Hundreds were beheaded in the public square; +for days it was filled with the slain. It is small comfort that +the wicked priest who egged the King on to the dreadful deed was +himself burned at the stake by the master he had betrayed. The +Stockholm Massacre drowned the Kalmar Union in its torrents of +blood. Retribution came swiftly. Above the peal of the Christmas +bells rose the clash and clangor of armed hosts pouring forth from +the mountain fastnesses to avenge the foul treachery. They were led +by Gustav[2] Eriksson Vasa, a young noble upon whose head Christian +had set a price. + +The Vasas were among the oldest and best of the great Swedish +families. It was said of them that they ever loved a friend, +hated a foe, and never forgot. Gustav was born in the castle of +Lindholmen, when the news that the world had grown suddenly big by +the discovery of lands beyond the unknown seas was still ringing +through Europe, on May 12, 1496. He was brought up in the home +of his kinsman, the Swedish patriot Sten Sture, and early showed +the fruits of his training. “See what I will do,” he boasted in +school when he was thirteen, “I will go to Dalecarlia, rouse the +people, and give the Jutes (Danes) a black eye.” Master Ivar, his +Danish teacher, gave him a whaling for that. White with anger, +the boy drove his dirk through the book, nailing it to the desk, +and stalked out of the room. Master Ivar’s eyes followed the slim +figure in the scarlet cloak, and he sighed wearily “_nobilium nati +nolunt aliquid pati_,—the children of the great will put up with +nothing.” + +Hardly yet of age, he served under the banner of Sten Sture against +King Christian, and was one of six hostages sent to the King when +he asked an interview of the Swedish leader. But Christian stayed +away from the meeting and carried the hostages off to Denmark +against his plighted faith. There Gustav was held prisoner a year. +All that winter rumors of great armaments against Sweden filled the +land. He heard the young bloods from the court prate about bending +the stiff necks in the country across the Sound, and watched them +throw dice for Swedish castles and Swedish women,—part of the loot +when his fatherland should be laid under the yoke. Ready to burst +with anger and grief, he sat silent at their boasts. In the spring +he escaped, disguised as a cattle-herder, and made his way to +Luebeck, where he found refuge in the house of the wealthy merchant +Kort König. + +They soon heard in Denmark where he was, and the King sent letters +demanding his surrender; but the burghers of the Hanse town hated +Christian with cause, and would not give him up. Then came Gustav’s +warder who had gone bail for him in sixteen hundred gulden, and +pleaded for his prisoner. + +“I am not a prisoner,” was Gustav’s retort, “I am a hostage, for +whom the Danish king pledged his oath and faith. If any one can +prove that I was taken captive in a fight or for just cause, let +him stand forth. Ambushed was I, and betrayed.” The Lübeck men +thought of the plots King Christian was forever hatching against +them. Now, if he succeeded in getting Sweden under his heel, their +turn would come next. Better, they said, send this Gustav home to +his own country, perchance he might keep the King busy there; by +which they showed their good sense. His ex-keeper was packed off +back home, and Gustav reached Sweden, sole passenger on a little +coast-trader, on May 31, 1520. A stone marks the spot where he +landed, near Kalmar; for then struck the hour of Sweden’s freedom. + +But not yet for many weary months did the people hear its summons. +Swedish manhood was at its lowest ebb. Stockholm was held by the +widow of Sten Sture with a half-famished garrison. In Kalmar +another woman, Anna Bjelke, commanded, but her men murmured, and +the fall of the fortress was imminent. When Gustav Vasa, who had +slipped in unseen, exhorted them to stand fast, they would have +mobbed him. He left as he had come, the day before the surrender. +Travelling by night, he made his way inland, finding everywhere +fear and distrust. The King had promised that if they would obey +him “they should never want for herring and salt,” so they told +Gustav, and when he tried to put heart into them and rouse their +patriotism, they took up bows and arrows and bade him be gone. +Indeed, there were not wanting those who shot at him. Like a hunted +deer he fled from hamlet to hamlet. Such friends as he had left +advised him to throw himself upon the King’s mercy; told him of the +amnesty proclaimed. But Gustav’s thoughts dwelt grimly among the +Northern mountaineers whom as a boy he had bragged he would set +against the tyrant. Insensibly he shaped his course toward their +country. + +He was with his brother-in-law, Joachim Brahe, when the King’s +message bidding him to the coronation came. Gustav begged him not +to go, but Brahe’s wife and children were within Christian’s reach, +and he did not dare stay away. When he left, the fugitive hid in +his ancestral home at Räfsnäs on lake Mälar. There one of Brahe’s +men brought him news of the massacre in which his master and +Gustav’s father had perished. His mother, grandmother, and sisters +were dragged away to perish in Danish dungeons. On Gustav’s head +the King had set a price, and spies were even then on his track. + +Gustav’s mind was made up. What was there now to wait for? Clad as +a peasant, he started for Dalecarlia with a single servant to keep +him company, but before he reached the mines the man stole all his +money and ran away. He had to work now to live, and hired out to +Anders Persson, the farmer of Rankhyttan. He had not been there +many days when one of the women saw an embroidered sleeve stick out +under his coat and told her master that the new hand was not what +he pretended to be. The farmer called him aside, and Gustav told +him frankly who he was. Anders Persson kept his secret, but advised +him not to stay long in any one place lest his enemies get wind of +him. He slipped away as soon as it was dark, nearly lost his life +by breaking through the ice, but reached Ornäs on the other side of +Lake Runn, half dead with cold and exposure. He knew that another +Persson who had been with him in the war lived there, and found +his house. Arendt Persson was a rascal. He received him kindly, +but when he slept harnessed his horse and went to Måns Nilsson, a +neighbor, with the news: the King’s reward would make them both +rich, if he would help him seize the outlawed man. + +Måns Nilsson held with the Danes, but he was no traitor, and he +showed the fellow the door. He went next to the King’s sheriff; +he would be bound to help. To be sure, he would claim the lion’s +share of the blood-money, but something was better than nothing. +The sheriff came soon enough with a score of armed men. But Arendt +Persson had not reckoned with his honest wife. She guessed his +errand and let Gustav down from the window to the rear gate, where +she had a sleigh and team in waiting. When the sheriff’s posse +surrounded the house, Gustav was well on his way to Master Jon, the +parson of Svärdsjö, who was his friend. Tradition has it that while +Christian was King, the brave little woman never dared show her +face in the house again. + +Master Jon was all right, but news of the man-hunt had run through +the country, and when the parson’s housekeeper one day saw him hold +the wash-bowl for his guest she wanted to know why he was so polite +to a common clod. Master Jon told her that it was none of her +business, but that night he piloted his friend across the lake to +Isala, where Sven Elfsson lived, a gamekeeper who knew the country +and could be trusted. The good parson was hardly out of sight on +his way back when the sheriff’s men came looking for Gustav. It +did not occur to them that the yokel who stood warming himself by +the stove might be the man they were after. But the gamekeeper’s +wife was quick to see his peril. She was baking bread and had just +put the loaves into the oven with a long-handled spade. “Here, you +lummox!” she cried, and whacked him soundly over the back with +it, “what are ye standing there gaping at? Did ye never see folks +afore? Get back to your work in the barn.” And Gustav, taking the +hint, slunk out of the room. + +For three days after that he lay hidden under a fallen tree in +the snow and bitter cold; but even there he was not safe, and the +gamekeeper took him deeper into the forest, where a big spruce grew +on a hill in the middle of a frozen swamp. There no one would seek +him till he could make a shift to get him out of the country. The +hill is still there; the people call it the King’s Hill, and not +after King Christian, either. But in those long nights when Gustav +Vasa listened to the hungry wolves howling in the woods and nosing +about his retreat, it was hardly kingly conceits his mind brooded +over. His father and kinsmen were murdered; his mother and sister +in the pitiless grasp of the tyrant who was hunting him to his +death; he, the last of his race, alone and forsaken by his own. +Bitter sorrow filled his soul at the plight of his country that had +fallen so low. But the hope of the young years came to the rescue: +all was not lost yet. And in the morning came Sven, the gamekeeper, +with a load of straw, at the bottom of which he hid him. So no one +would be the wiser. + +It was well he did it, for half-way to the next town some prowling +soldiers overtook them, and just to make sure that there was +nothing in the straw, prodded the load with their spears. Nothing +stirred, and they went on their way. But a spear had gashed +Gustav’s leg, and presently blood began to drip in the snow. Sven +had his wits about him. He got down, and cut the fetlock of one of +the beasts with his jack-knife so that it bled and no one need ask +questions. When they got to Marnäs, Gustav was weak from the loss +of blood, but a friendly surgeon was found to bind up his wounds. + +Farther and farther north he fled, keeping to the deep woods in the +day, until he reached Rättwik. Feeling safer there, he spoke to the +people coming from church one Sunday and implored them to shake off +the Danish yoke. But they only shook their heads. He was a stranger +among them, and they would talk it over with their neighbors. Not +yet were his wanderings over. To Mora he went next, where Parson +Jakob hid him in a lonely farm-house. Evil chance led the spies +direct to his hiding-place, and once more it was the housewife +whose quick wit saved him. Dame Margit was brewing the Yule beer +when she saw them coming. In a trice she had Gustav in the cellar +and rolled the brewing vat over the trap-door. Then they might +search as they saw fit; there was nothing there. The first blood +was spilled for Gustav Vasa while he was at Mora, and it was a +Dane who did it. He was the kind that liked to see fair play; when +an under-sheriff came looking for the hunted man there, the Dane +waylaid and killed him. + +Christmas morning, when Master Jakob had preached his sermon in the +church, Gustav spoke to the congregation out in the snow-covered +churchyard. A gravestone was his pulpit. Eloquent always, his +sorrows and wrongs and the memory of the hard months lent wings to +his words. His speech lives yet in Dalecarlia, for now he was among +its mountains. + +“It is good to see this great meeting,” he said, “but when I think +of our fatherland I am filled with grief. At what peril I am here +with you, you know who see me hounded as a wild beast day by day, +hour by hour. But our beloved country is more to me than life. How +long must we be thralls, we who were born to freedom? Those of you +who are old remember what persecution Swedish men and women have +suffered from the Danish kings. The young have heard the story of +it and have learned from they were little children to hate and +resist such rule. These tyrants have laid waste our land and sucked +its marrow, until nothing remains for us but empty houses and lean +fields. Our very lives are not safe.” He called upon them to rise +and drive the invaders out. If they wanted a leader, he was ready. + +His words stirred the mountaineers deeply. Cries of anger were +heard in the crowd; it was not the first time they had taken up +arms in the cause of freedom. But when they talked it over, the +older heads prevailed; there had not been time enough to hear both +sides. They told him that they would not desert the King; he must +expect nothing of them. + +Broken-hearted and desperate, Gustav Vasa turned toward the +Norwegian frontier. He would leave the country for which there was +no hope. While the table in the poorest home groaned with Yuletide +cheer, Sweden’s coming king hid under an old bridge, outcast and +starving, till it was safe to leave. Then he took up his weary +journey alone. The winter cold had grown harder as the days grew +shorter. Famished wolves dogged his steps, but he outran them on +his snow-shoes. By night he slept in some wayside shelter, such +as they build for travellers in that desolate country, or in the +brush. The snow grew deeper, and the landscape wilder, as he went. +For days he had gone without food, when he saw the sun set behind +the lofty range that was to bar him out of home and hope forever. +Even there was no abiding place for him. What thoughts of his +vanished dream, perchance of the distant lands across the seas +where the tyrant’s hand could not reach him, were in his mind, who +knows, as he bent his strength to the last and hardest stage of his +journey? He was almost there, when he heard shouts behind him and +turned to sell his life dear. Two men on skis were calling to him. +They were unarmed, and he waited to let them come up. + +Their story was soon told. They had come to call him back. After he +left, an old soldier whom they knew in Mora had come from the south +and told them worse things than even Gustav knew. It was all true +about the Stockholm murder; worse, the King was having gallows set +up in every county to hang all those on who said him nay; a heavy +tax was laid upon the peasants, and whoever did not pay was to have +a hand or foot cut off; they could still follow the plow. And now +they had sent away the one man who could lead against the Danes, +with the forests full of outlawed men who would have enlisted +under him as soon as ever the cry was raised! While the men of +Dalecarlia were debating the news among themselves orders came from +the bailiff at Westerås that the tax was to be paid forthwith. That +night runners were sent on the trail of Gustav to tell him to come +back; they were ready. + +When he came, it was as if a mighty storm swept through the +mountains. The people rose in a body. Every day whole parishes +threw off their allegiance to King Christian. Sunday after Sunday +Gustav spoke to the people at their meeting-houses, and they raised +their spears and swore to follow him to death. Two months after +the murder in Stockholm an army of thousands that swelled like an +avalanche was marching south, and province after province joined +in the rebellion. King Christian’s host met them at Brunbäck in +April. One of its leaders asked the country folk what kind of men +the Dalecarlians were, and when he was told that they drank water +and ate bread made of bark, he cried out, “Such a people the devil +himself couldn’t whip; let us get out.” But his advice was not +taken and the Danish army was wiped out. Gustav halted long enough +to drill his men and give them time to temper their arrows and +spears, then he fell upon Westerås and beat the Danes there. The +peasant mob scattered too soon to loot the town, and the King’s men +came back with a sudden rush. Only Gustav’s valor and presence of +mind saved the day that had been won once from being lost again. + +When it was seen that the Danes were not invincible, the whole +country rose, took the scattered castles, and put their defenders +to the sword. Gustav bore the rising on his shoulders from first +to last. He was everywhere, ordering and leading. His fiery +eloquence won over the timorous; his irresistible advance swept +every obstacle aside. In May he took Upsala; by midsummer he was +besieging Stockholm itself. Most of the other cities were in his +hands. The Hanse towns had found out what this Gustav could do +at home. They sang his praise, but as for backing him with their +purse, that was another matter. They refused to lend Gustav two +siege-guns when he lay before Stockholm, though he offered to +pledge a castle for each. He had no money. Happily his enemy, +Christian, was even worse off. Neither pledges nor promises could +get him the money he needed. His chief men were fighting among +themselves and made peace only to turn upon him. Within a year +after the Swedish people had chosen Gustav Vasa to be Regent at +the Diet of Vadstena, Christian went into exile and, when he tried +to get his kingdom back, into prison, where he languished the rest +of his life. He fully deserved his fate. Yet he meant well and had +done some good things in his day. Had he been able to rule himself, +he might have ruled others with better success. Schoolboys remember +with gratitude that he forbade teachers to “spank their pupils +overmuch and without judgment, as was their wont.” + +At the Diet of Vadstena the people had offered Gustav the crown, +but he put it from him. Scarce eight months had passed since he hid +under the bridge, hunted and starving. When Stockholm had fallen +after a siege of two years and all Sweden was free, the people met +(1523) and made him King, whether or no. He still objected, but +gave in at last and was crowned. + +Popular favor is fickle. Hard times came that were not made easier +by Gustav’s determination to fill the royal coffers, and the very +Dalecarlians who had put him in the high seat rose against him and +served notice that if things did not mend they would have none of +him. Gustav made sure that they had no backing elsewhere, then went +up and persuaded them to be good by cutting off the heads of their +leaders, who both happened to be priests: one was even a bishop. +He had been taught in a school that always found an axe ready to +hand. Let those who lament the savagery of modern warfare consider +what happened then to a Danish fleet that tried to bring relief +to hard-pressed Stockholm. It was beaten in a fight in which six +hundred men were taken prisoners. They were all, say the accounts, +“tied hand and foot and flung overboard amid the beating of drums +and blowing of trumpets to drown their cries.” The clergy fared +little better than the laymen in that age, but then it was their +own fault. In plotting and scrapping they were abreast of the worst +and took the consequences. + +They were the days of the Reformation, and Gustav would not have +been human had he failed to see a way out of his money troubles by +confiscating church property. He had pawned the country’s trade to +the merchants of Lübeck and there was nothing else left. Naturally +the church opposed him. The King took the bull by the horns. He +called a meeting and told the people that he was sick of it all. He +had encouraged the Reformation for their good; now, if they did not +stand by him, they might choose between him and his enemies. The +oldest priest arose at that and said that the church’s property was +sacred. The King asked if the rest of them thought the same way. +Only one voice was raised, and to say yes. + +“Then,” said Gustav, “I don’t want to be your King any more. If it +does not rain, you blame me; if the sun does not shine, you do the +same. It is always so. All of you want to be masters. After all my +trouble and labor for you, you would as lief see my head split with +an axe, though none of you dare lay hold of the handle. Give me +back what I have spent in your service and I will go away and never +come back.” And go he did, to his castle, with half a dozen of his +nearest friends. + +They sat and looked at one another when he was gone, and then +priests and nobles fell to arguing among themselves, all talking +at once. The plain people, the burghers and the peasants, listened +awhile, but when they got no farther, let them know that if +they couldn’t settle it, they, the people, would, and in a way +that would give them little joy. The upshot of it all was that +messengers were sent to bring the King back. He made them go three +times, and when he came at last, it was as absolute master. In the +ordering of the kingdom that was made there, he became the head of +the church as well as of the state. Gustav’s pen was as sharp as +his tongue. When Hans Brask, the oldest prelate in the land, who +had stood stoutly by the old régime, left the country and refused +to come back, he wrote to him: “As long as you might milk and shear +your sheep, you staid by them. When God spake and said you were to +feed them, not to shear and slaughter them, you ran away. Every +honest man can judge if you have done well.” Hard words to a good +old man; but there were plenty of others who deserved them. That +was the end of the hierarchy in Sweden. + +But not of the unruly peasants who had tasted the joys of +king-making. How kindly they took to the Reformation at the outset +one can judge from the demand of some of them that the King should +“burn or otherwise kill such as ate meat on Friday.” They rose +again and again, and would listen only to the argument of force. +When the Lübeckers pressed hard for the payment of old debts, +and the treasury was empty as usual, King Gustav hit upon a new +kind of revenue. He demanded of every church in the land that it +give up its biggest bell to the funds. It was the last straw. +The Dalecarlians rose against what they deemed sacrilege, under +the leadership of Måns Nilsson and Anders Persson of Rankhyttan, +the very men who had befriended Gustav in his need, and the +insurrection spread. The “War of the Bells” was settled with the +sword, and the peasants gave in. But Gustav came of a stock that +“never forgot.” Two years later, when his hands were free at home, +he suddenly invaded Dalecarlia with a powerful army, determined to +“pull those weeds up by the roots.” He summoned the peasants to +Thing, made a ring around them of armed men, and gave them their +choice: + +“Submit now for good and all,” he said, “or I will spoil the land +so that cock shall not crow nor hound bark in it again forever!” + +The frightened peasants fell on their knees and begged for mercy. +He made them give up their leaders, including his former friends, +and they were all put to the sword. After that there was peace in +Dalecarlia. + +Gustav Vasa’s long reign ended in 1560. Like his enemy, Christian +II, he was a strange mixture of contradictions. He was brave in +battle, wise in council, pious, if not a saint, clean, and merciful +when mercy fitted into his plans. His enemies called him a greedy, +suspicious despot. Greedy he was. More than eleven thousand farms +were confiscated by the crown during his reign, and he left four +thousand farms and a great fortune to his children as his personal +share. But historians have called him “the great housekeeper” who +found waste and loss and left an ordered household. He gave all +for Sweden, and all he had was at her call. It was share and share +alike, in his view. Despotic he could be, too. _L’état c’est moi_ +might have been said by him. But he did not exploit the state; +he built it. He fashioned Sweden out of a bunch of quarrelsome +provincial governments into a hereditary monarchy, as the best +way—indeed, the only way then—of giving it strength and stability. +He was suspicious because everybody had betrayed him, or had tried +to. With all that, his steady purpose was to raise and enlighten +his people and make them keep the peace, if he had to adopt the +Irishman’s plan of keeping it himself with an axe. He was the +father of a line of great warriors. Gustav Adolf was his grandson. + +[Illustration: GUSTAV VASA BIDDING HIS PEOPLE GOOD-BY] + +Bent under the burden of years, he bade his people good-by at the +Diet of Stockholm, a few weeks before his death. His old eloquence +rings unimpaired in the farewell. He thanked God, who had chosen +him as His tool to set Sweden free from thralldom. Almost might +he liken himself to King David, whom God from a shepherd had made +the leader of his people. No such hope was in his heart when, +forty years before, he hid in the woods from a bloodthirsty enemy. +For what he had done wrong as king, he asked the people’s pardon; +it was not done on purpose. He knew well that many thought him a +hard ruler, but the time would come when they would gladly dig him +up from his grave if they only could. And with that he went out, +bowing deeply to the Diet, the tears streaming down his face. + +They saw him no more; but on his tomb the Swedish people, +forgetting all else, have written that he was the “Father of his +Country.” + + +Footnotes: + +[2] The older spelling of this name is followed here in preference +to the more modern Gustaf. Gustav Vasa himself wrote his name so. + + + + +ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH + + +A welcome change awaits the traveller who, having shaken off the +chill of the German Dreadnaughts at Kiel, crosses the Baltic to +the Danish Islands—a change from the dread portents of war to +smiling peace. There can be nothing more pastoral and restful than +the Seeland landscape as framed in a car window; yet he misses +its chief charm whom its folk-lore escapes—the countless legends +that cling to field and forest from days long gone. The guide-book +gives scarce a hint of them; but turn from its page and they meet +you at every step, hail you from every homestead, every copse. Nor +is their story always of peace. Here was Knud Lavard slain by his +envious kinsman for the crown, and a miraculous spring gushed forth +where he fell. Of the church they built for the pilgrims who sought +it from afar they will show you the site, but the spring dried +up with the simple old faith. Yonder, under the roof of Ringsted +church, lie Denmark’s greatest dead. Not half an hour from the +ferry landing at Korsör, your train labors past a hill crowned by a +venerable cross, Holy Anders’ Hill. So saintly was that masterful +priest that he was wont, when he prayed, to hang his hat and gloves +on a sunbeam as on a hook. And woe to the land if his cross be +disturbed, for then, the peasant will tell you, the cattle die of +plague and the crops fail. A little further on, just beyond Sorö, +a village church rears twin towers above the wheat-field where the +skylark soars and sings to its nesting mate. For seven hundred +years the story of that church and its builder has been told at +Danish firesides, and the time will never come when it is forgotten. + +Fjenneslev is the name of the village, and Asker Ryg[3] ruled +there in the Twelfth Century, when the king summoned his men to +the war. Bidding good-by to his wife, Sir Asker tells her to build +a new church while he is away, for the old, “with wall of clay, +straw-thatched and grim,” is in ruins. And let it be worthy of the +Master: + + “The roof let make of tiling red; + Of stone thou build the wall;” + +and then he whispers in her ear: + + “Hear thou, my Lady Inge, + Of women thou art the flower; + An’ thou bearest to me a son so bold, + Set on the church a tower.” + +Should the child be a girl, he tells her to build only a spire, for +“modesty beseemeth a woman.” Well for Sir Asker that he did not +live in our day of clamoring suffragists. He would have “views” +without doubt. But no such things troubled him while he battled +in foreign lands all summer. It was autumn when he returned and +saw from afar the swell behind which lay Fjenneslev and home. +Impatiently he spurred his horse to the brow of the hill, for no +news had come of Lady Inge those many months. The bard tells us +what he saw there: + + “It was the good Sir Asker Ryg; + Right merrily laughed he, + When from that green and swelling hill + Two towers did he see.” + +Two sons lay at the Lady Inge’s breast, and all was well. + + “The first one of the brothers two + They called him Esbern Snare.[4] + He grew as strong as a savage bear + And fleeter than any hare. + + “The second him called they Absalon, + A bishop he at home. + He used his trusty Danish sword + As the Pope his staff at Rome.” + +Absalon and Esbern were not twins, as tradition has it. They were +better than that. They became the great heroes of their day, and +the years have not dimmed their renown. And Absalon reached far +beyond the boundaries of little Denmark to every people that speaks +the English tongue. For it was he who, as archbishop of the North, +“strictly and earnestly” charged his friend and clerk Saxo to +gather the Danish chronicles while yet it was time, because, says +Saxo, in the preface of his monumental work, “he could no longer +abide that his fatherland, which he always honored and magnified +with especial zeal, should be without a record of the great deeds +of the fathers.” And from the record Saxo wrote we have our Hamlet. + +It was when they had grown great and famous that Sir Asker and his +wife built the church in thanksgiving for their boys, not when they +were born, and the way that came to light was good and wholesome. +They were about to rebuild the church, on which there had been +no towers at all since they crumbled in the middle ages, and had +decided to put on only one; for the sour critics, who are never +content in writing a people’s history unless they can divest it of +all its flesh and make it sit in its bones, as it were, sneered +at the tradition and called it an old woman’s tale. But they did +not shout quite so loud when, in peeling off the whitewash of the +Reformation, the mason’s hammer brought forth mural paintings that +grew and grew until there stood the whole story to read on the +wall, with Sir Asker himself and the Lady Inge, clad in garments +of the Twelfth Century, bringing to the Virgin the church with the +twin towers. So the folk-lore was not so far out after all, and the +church was rebuilt with two towers, as it should be. + +Under its eaves, whether of straw or tile, the two boys played +their childish games, and before long there came to join in them +another of their own age, young Valdemar, whose father, the very +Knud Lavard mentioned above, had been foully murdered a while +before. It was a time, says Saxo, in which “he must be of stout +heart and strong head who dared aspire to Denmark’s crown. For +in less than a hundred years more than sixteen of her kings and +their kin were either slain without cause by their own subjects, +or otherwise met a sudden death.” Sir Asker and the murdered +Knud had been foster brothers, and throughout the bloody years +that followed, he and his brothers, sons of the powerful Skjalm +Hvide,[5] espoused his cause in good and evil days, while they saw +to it that no harm came to the young prince under their roof. + +The three boys, as they grew up, were bred to the stern duties of +fighting men, as was the custom of their class. Absalon, indeed, +was destined for the church; but in a country so recently won from +the old war gods, it was the church militant yet, and he wielded +spear and sword with the best of them. When, at eighteen, they +sent him to France to be taught, he did not for his theological +studies neglect the instruction of his boyhood. There he became +the disciple and friend of the Abbot Bernard of Clairvaux, more +powerful then than prince or Pope, and when the abbot preached the +second great crusade, promising eternal salvation to those who +took up arms against the unbelievers, whether to wrest from them +the Holy Sepulchre or to plant the cross among the wild heathen +on the Baltic, his heart burned hot within him. It was a long way +to the Holy Land, but with the Baltic robbers his people had a +grievous score to settle. Their yells had sounded in his boyish +ears as they ravished the shores of his fatherland, penetrating +with murder and pillage almost to his peaceful home. And so, while +he lent a diligent ear to the teachings of the church, earning the +name of the “most learned clerk” in the cloister of Ste. Geneviève +in Paris, daily he laid the breviary aside and took up sword and +lance, learning the arts of modern warfare with the graces of +chivalry. In the old way of fighting, man to man, the men of the +North had been the equals of any, if not their betters; but against +the new methods of warfare their prowess availed little. Absalon, +the monk, kept his body strong while soul and mind matured. When +nothing more adventurous befell, he chopped down trees for the +cloister hearths. But oftener the clash of arms echoed in the quiet +halls, or the peaceful brethren crossed themselves as they watched +him break an unruly horse in the cloister fen. Saxo tells us that +he swam easily in full armor, and in more than one campaign in +later years saved drowning comrades who were not so well taught. + +The while he watched rising all about some of the finest churches +in Christendom. It was the era of cathedral building in Europe. +The Romanesque style of architecture had reached its highest +development in the very France where he spent his young manhood’s +years, and the Gothic, with its stamp of massive strength, was +beginning to displace its gentler curve. Ten years of such an +environment, in a land teeming with historic traditions, rounded +out the man who set his face toward home, bent on redeeming his +people from the unjust reproach of being mere “barbarians of the +North.” + +It was a stricken Denmark to which he came back. Three claimants +were fighting for the crown. The land was laid waste by sea-rovers, +who saw their chance to raid defenceless homes while the men able +to bear arms were following the rival kings. The people had lost +hope. Just when Absalon returned, peace was made between the +claimants. Knud, Svend, and Valdemar, his foster brother of old, +divided up the country between them. They swore a dear oath to keep +the pact, but for all that “the three kingdoms did not last three +days.” The treacherous Svend waited only for a chance to murder +both his rivals, and it came quickly, when he and Valdemar were +the guests of Knud at Roskilde. They had eaten and drunk together +and were gathered in the “Storstue,” the big room of the house, +when Knud saw Svend whispering aside with his men. With a sudden +foreboding of evil, he threw his arms about Valdemar’s shoulders +and kissed him. The young King, who was playing chess with one +of his men, looked up in surprise and asked what it meant. Just +then Svend left the hall, and his henchmen fell upon the two with +drawn swords. Knud was cut down at once, his head cleft in twain. +Valdemar upset the table with the candles and, wrapping his cloak +about his arm to ward off the blows that showered upon him, knocked +his assailants right and left and escaped, badly wounded. + +Absalon came into the room as Knud fell and, thinking it was +Valdemar, caught him in his arms and took his wounded head in his +lap. Sitting there in utter sorrow and despair, heedless of the +tumult that raged in the darkness around him, he felt the King’s +garment and knew that the man who was breathing his last in his +arms was not his friend. He laid the lifeless body down gently and +left the hall. The murderers barred his way, but he brushed their +swords and spears aside and strode forth unharmed. Valdemar had +found a horse and made for Fjenneslev, twenty miles away, with all +speed, and there Absalon met him and his brother Esbern in the +morning. + +King Svend sought him high and low to finish his dastardly work, +while on Thing he wailed loudly before the people that Valdemar +and Knud had tried to kill him, showing in proof of it his cloak, +which he had rent with his own sword. But Valdemar’s friends were +wide awake. Esbern flew through the island on his fleet horse +in Valdemar’s clothes, leading his pursuers a merry dance, and +when the young King’s wound was healed, he found him a boat and +ferried him across to the mainland, where the people flocked to +his standard. When Svend would have followed, it was the Lady Inge +who scuttled his ship by night and gave her foster son the start +he needed. There followed a short and sharp struggle that ended on +Grathe Heath with the utter rout of Svend’s forces. He himself was +killed, and Valdemar at last was King of all Denmark. + +From that time the three friends were inseparable as in the old +days when they played about the fields of Fjenneslev. Absalon was +the keeper of the King’s conscience who was not afraid to tell him +the truth when he needed to hear it. And where they were Esbern +was found, never wavering in his loyalty to either. Within a year +Absalon was made bishop of Roskilde, the chief See of Denmark. +Saxo innocently discovers to us King Valdemar’s little ruse to +have his friend chosen. He was yet a very young man, scarce turned +thirty, and had not been considered at all for the vacancy. There +were three candidates, all of powerful families, and, according to +ecclesiastical law, the brethren of the chapter were the electors. +The King went to their meeting and addressed them in person. +Nothing was farther from him, he said, than to wish to interfere +with their proper rights. Each must do as his conscience dictated, +unhindered. And with that he laid on the table _four_ books with +blank leaves and bade them write down their names in them, each for +his own choice, to get the matter right on the record. The brethren +thanked him kindly and all voted “nicely together” for Absalon. So +three of the books were wasted. But presently Saxo found good use +for them. + +For now had come the bishop’s chance of putting in practice the +great abbot’s precepts. “Pray and fight” was the motto he had +written into the Knights Templars’ rule, and Absalon had made it +his own. Of what use was it to build up the church at home, when +any day might see it raided by its enemies who were always watching +their chance outside? The Danish waters swarmed with pirates, the +very pagans against whom Abbot Bernard had preached his crusade. Of +them all the Wends were the worst, as they were the most powerful +of the Slav tribes that still resisted the efforts of their +neighbors, the Christian Germans, to dislodge them from their old +home on the Baltic. They lived in the island of Rügen, fairly in +sight of the Danish shores. Every favoring wind blew them across +the sea in shoals to burn and ravage. The Danes, once the terror of +the seas, had given over roving when they accepted the White Christ +in exchange for Thor and his hammer, and now, when they would be at +peace, they were in turn beset by this relentless enemy, who burned +their homes and their crops and dragged the peaceful husbandman +away to make him a thrall or offer him up as a sacrifice to heathen +idols. More than a third of all Denmark lay waste under their +ferocious assault. Here was the blow to be struck if the country +was to have peace and the church prosperity. + +The chance to strike came speedily. Absalon had been bishop only +a few months when, on the evening before Palm Sunday, word was +brought that the enemy had landed, twenty-four ship-crews strong, +and were burning and murdering as usual. Absalon marshalled his +eighteen house-carles and such of the country folk as he could, +and fell upon the Wends, routing them utterly. A bare handful +escaped, the rest were killed, while the bishop lost but a single +man. He said mass next morning, red-handed it is true, but one may +well believe that for all that his Easter message reached hearts +filled with a new, glad hope for their homes and for the country. +That was a bishop they could understand. So the first blow Absalon +struck for his people was at home. But he did not long wait for +the enemy to come to him. Half his long and stirring life he lived +on the seas, seeking them there. Saxo mentions, in speaking of his +return from one of his cruises, that he had then been nine months +on shipboard. And in a way he was shepherding his flock there, if +it was with a scourge; for, many years before, a Danish king had +punished the Wends in their own home and laid their lands under the +See of Roskilde, though little good it did them or any one else +then. But when Absalon had got his grip, there were days when he +baptized as many as a thousand of them into the true faith. + +He was not altogether alone in the stand he took. Here and there, +from very necessity, the people had organized to resist the +invaders, but as no one could tell where they would strike next, +they were not often successful, and fear and discouragement sat +heavy on the land. From his own city of Roskilde a little fleet of +swift sailers under the bold Wedeman had for years waged relentless +war upon the freebooters and had taken four times the number of +their own ships. Their crews were organized into a brotherhood +with vows like an order of fighting monks. Before setting out on +a cruise they were shriven and absolved. Their vows bound them to +unceasing vigilance, to live on the plainest of fare, to sleep +on their arms, ready for instant attack, and to the rescue of +Christians, wherever they were found in captivity. The Roskilde +guild became the strong core of the King’s armaments in his score +of campaigns against the Wends. + +Perhaps it was not strange that Valdemar should be of two minds +about venturing to attack so formidable an enemy in his own house. +The nation was cowed and slow to move. In fact, from the first +expedition, that started with 250 vessels, only seven returned with +the standard, keeping up a running fight all the way across the +Baltic with pursuing Wends. The rest had basely deserted. On the +way over, the King, listening to their doubts and fears, turned +back himself once, but Absalon, who always led in the attack and +was the last on the homeward run, overtook him and gave him the +talking to be deserved. Saxo, who was very likely there and heard, +for there is little doubt that he accompanied his master on many of +the campaigns he so vividly describes, gives us a verbatim report +of the lecture: + +“What wonder,” said the bishop, “if the words stick in our throats +and are nigh to stifling us, when such grievous dole is ours! +Grieve we must, indeed, to find in you such a turncoat that naught +but dishonor can come of it. You follow where you should lead, and +those you should rule over, you make your peers. There is nothing +to stop us but our own craven souls, hunt as we may for excuses. Is +it with such laurel you would bind your crown? with such high deed +you would consecrate your reign?” + +The King was hard hit, and showed it, but he walked away without +a word. In the night a furious storm swept the sea and kept the +fleet in shelter four whole days, during which Valdemar’s anger had +time to cool. He owned then that Absalon was right, and the friends +shook hands. The King gave order to make sail as soon as the gale +abated. If there was still a small doubt in Absalon’s mind as he +turned, on taking leave, and asked, “What now, if we must turn back +once more?” Valdemar set it at rest: + +“Then you write me from Wendland,” he laughed, “and tell me how +things are there.” + +If little glory or gain came to the Danes from this first +expedition, at least they landed in the enemy’s country and made +reprisal for past tort. The spirit of the people rose and shamed +them for their cowardice. When the King’s summons went round again, +as it did speedily, there were few laggards. Attacked at home, the +Wends lost much of the terror they had inspired. Before many moons, +the chronicle records, the Danes cut their spear-shafts short, that +they might the more handily get at the foe. Scarce a year passed +that did not see one or more of these crusades. Absalon preached +them all, and his ship was ever first in landing. In battle he and +the King fought shoulder to shoulder. In the spring of 1169, he +had at last his wish: the heathen idols were destroyed and their +temples burned. + +The holy city of the Wends, Arcona, stood on a steep cliff, +inaccessible save from the west, where a wall a hundred feet high +defended it. While the sacred banner Stanitza waved over it the +Danes might burn and kill, but the power of Svantevit was unbroken. +Svantevit was the god of gods in whose presence his own priests +dared not so much as breathe. When they had to, they must go to +the door and breathe in the open, a good enough plan if Saxo’s +disgust at the filth of the Wendish homes was justified. Svantevit +was a horrid monster with four heads, and girt about with a huge +sword. Up till then the Christian arms had always been stayed at +his door, but this time the King laid siege to Arcona, determined +to make an end of him. Some of the youngsters in his army, making +a mock assault upon the strong walls, discovered an accidental +hollow under the great tower over which the Stanitza flew and, +seizing upon a load of straw that was handy, stuffed it in and set +it on fire. It was done in a frolic, but when the tower caught +fire and was burned and the holy standard fell, Absalon was quick +to see his advantage, and got the King to order a general assault. +The besieged Wends, having no water, tried to put out the fire +with milk, but, says the chronicle, “it only fed the flames.” They +fought desperately till, between fire and foe, they were seized +with panic and, calling loudly upon Absalon in their extremity, +offered to give up their city. The army clamored for the revenge +that was at last within their grasp, and the King hesitated; but +Absalon met the uproar firmly, reminding them that they had crossed +the seas to convert the heathen, not to sack their towns. + +The city was allowed to surrender and the people were spared, but +Svantevit and his temple were destroyed. A great crowd of his +followers had gathered to see him crush his enemies at the last, +and Absalon cautioned the men who cut the idol down to be careful +that he did not fall on them and so seem to justify their hopes. +“He fell with so great a noise that it was a wonder,” says Saxo, +naïvely; “and in the same moment the fiend ran out of the temple in +a black shape with such speed that no eye could follow him or see +where he went.” Svantevit was dragged out of the town and chopped +into bits. That night he fed the fires of the camp. So fickle is +popular favor that when the crowd saw that nothing happened, they +spurned the god loudly before whom they had grovelled in the dust +till then. + +[Illustration: FALL OF ARCONA. THE IDOL SVANTEVIT DESTROYED] + +When they heard of Arcona’s fall in the royal city of Karents, they +hastened with offers of surrender, and Absalon went there with a +single ship’s crew to take possession. They were met by 6000 armed +Wends, who guarded the narrow approach to the city. In single file +they walked between the ranks of the enemy, who stood with inverted +spears, watching them in sullen silence. His men feared a trap, but +Absalon strode ahead unmoved. Coming to the temple of their local +god, Rygievit, he attacked him with his axe and bade his guard fall +to, which they did. Saxo has left us a unique description of this +idol that stood behind purple hangings, fashioned of oak “in every +evil and revolting shape. The swallows had made their nests in his +mouths and throats” (there were seven in so many faces) “and filled +him up with all manner of stinking uncleanness. Truly, for such god +was such sacrifice fit.” He had a sword for every one of his seven +faces, buckled about his ample waist, but for all that he went the +way of the others, and even had to put up with the indignity of +the Christian priests standing upon him while he was being dragged +out. That seems to have helped cure his followers of their faith +in him. They delivered the temple treasure into the hands of the +King—seven chests filled with money and valuables, among them a +silver cup which the wretched King Svend had sent to Svantevit as +a bribe to the Wends for joining him against his own country and +kin. But those days were ended. It was the Danes’ turn now, and +Wendland was laid waste until “the swallows found no eaves of any +house whereunder to build their nests and were forced to build them +on the ships.” A sad preliminary to bringing the country under the +rule of the Prince of Peace; but in the scheme of those days the +sword was equal partner with the cross in leading men to the true +God. + +The heathen temples were destroyed and churches built on their +sites of the timber gathered for the siege of Arcona. The people, +deserted by their own, accepted the Christians’ God in good faith, +and were baptized in hosts, thirteen hundred on one day and nine +hundred on the next. Three days and nights Absalon saw no sleep. He +did nothing half-way. No sooner was he back home than he sent over +priests and teachers supplied with everything, even food for their +keep, so that they “should not be a burden to the people whom they +had come to show the way to salvation.” + +The Wends were conquered, but the end was not yet. They had savage +neighbors, and many a crusade did Absalon lead against them in +the following years, before the new title of the Danish rulers, +“King of the Slavs and Wends,” was much more than an empty boast. +He organized a regular sea patrol of one-fourth of the available +ships, of which he himself took command, and said mass on board +much oftener than in the Roskilde church. It is the sailor, the +warrior, the leader of men one sees through all the troubled years +of his royal friend’s life. Now the Danish fleet is caught in +the inland sea before Stettin, unable to make its way out, and +already the heathen hosts are shouting their triumph on shore. +It is Absalon, then, who finds the way and, as one would expect, +he forces it. The captains wail over the trap and abuse him for +getting them into it. Absalon, disdaining to answer them, leads +his ships in single file straight for the gap where the Wendish +fleet lies waiting, and gets the King to attack with his horsemen +on shore. Between them the enemy is routed, and the cowards are +shamed. But when they come to make amends, he is as unmoved as ever +and will have none of it. Again, when he is leading his men to the +attack on a walled town, a bridge upon which they crowd breaks, and +it is the bishop who saves his comrades from drowning, swimming +ashore with them in full armor. + +Resting in his castle at Haffn, the present Copenhagen, which he +built as a defence against the sea-rovers, he hears, while in his +bath, his men talking of strange ships that are sailing into the +Sound, and, hastily throwing on his clothes, gives chase and kills +their crews, for they were pirates whose business was murder, and +they merely got their deserts. In the pursuit his archers “pinned +the hands of the rowers to the oars with their arrows” and crippled +them, so skilful had much practice made them. Turn the leaf of +Saxo’s chronicle, and we find him under Rügen with his fleet, +protecting the now peaceful Wendish fishermen in their autumn +herring-catch, on which their livelihood depended. Of such stuff +was made the bishop who + + “Used his trusty Danish sword + As the Pope his staff in Rome.” + +Wherever danger threatens Valdemar and Absalon, Esbern is found, +too, earning the name of the Fleet (Snare), which the people had +fondly given to their favorite. Where the fighting was hardest, he +was sure to be. The King’s son had ventured too far and was caught +in a tight place by an overwhelming force, when Esbern pushed his +ship in between him and the enemy and bore the brunt of a fight +that came near to making an end of him. He had at last only a +single man left, but the two made a stand against a hundred. “When +the heathen saw his face they fled in terror.” At last they knocked +him senseless with a stone and would have killed him, but in the +nick of time the King’s men came to the rescue. + +Coming home from Norway he ran afoul of forty pirate ships under +the coast of Seeland. He tried to steal past; forty against one +were heavy odds. But it was moonlight and he was discovered. The +pirates lay across his course and cut him off. Esbern made ready +for a fight and steered straight into the middle of them. The +steersman complained that he had no armor, and he gave him his own. +He beat his pursuers off again and again, but the wind slackened +and they were closing in once more, swearing by their heathen gods +that they would have him dead or alive, for a Danish prisoner on +one of their ships had told who he was. But Esbern had more than +one string to his bow. He sent a man aloft with flint and steel +to strike fire in the top, and the pirates, believing that he was +signalling to a fleet he had in ambush, fled helter-skelter. Esbern +got home safe. + +The German emperors’ fingers had always itched for the +over-lordship of the Danish isles, and they have not ceased to +do so to this day. When Frederick Barbarossa drove Alexander III +from Rome and set up a rival Pope in his place, Archbishop Eskild +of Lund, who was the Primate of the North, championed the exiled +Pope’s case, and Valdemar, whose path the ambitious priest had +crossed more than once, let it be known that he inclined to the +Emperor’s cause, in part probably from mere pique, perhaps also +because he thought it good politics. The archbishop in a rage +summoned Absalon and bade him join him in a rising against the +King. Absalon’s answer is worthy the man and friend: + +“My oath to you I will keep, and in this wise, that I will not +counsel you to your own undoing. Whatever your cause against the +King, war against him you cannot, and succeed. And this know, that +never will I join with you against my liege lord, to whom I have +sworn fealty and friendship with heart and soul all the days of my +life.” + +He could not persuade the archbishop, who went his own way and was +beaten and exiled for a season, nor could he prevent the King from +yielding to the blandishments of Frederick and getting mixed up +in the papal troubles; but he went with him to Germany and saved +him at the last moment from committing himself by making him leave +the church council just as the anti-pope was about to pronounce +sentence of excommunication against Alexander. He commanded Absalon +to remain, as a servant of the church, but Absalon replied calmly +that he was not there in that capacity, but as an attendant on +his King, and must follow where he went. It appeared speedily +that the Emperor’s real object was to get Valdemar to own him +as his over-lord, and this he did, to Absalon’s great grief, on +the idle promise that Frederick would join him in his war upon +all the Baltic pagans. However, it was to be a purely personal +matter, in nowise affecting his descendants. That much was saved, +and Absalon lived long enough to fling back, as the counsellor of +Valdemar’s son, from behind the stout wall he built at Denmark’s +southern gate, the Emperor’s demand for homage, with the reply that +“the King ruled in Denmark with the same right as the Emperor in +Germany, and was no man’s subject.” + +However grievously Absalon had offended the aged archbishop, when +after forty years in his high office illness compelled him to lay +it down, he could find no one so worthy to step into his shoes. He +sent secretly to Rome and got the Pope’s permission to name his own +successor, before he called a meeting of the church. The account of +what followed is the most singular of all Saxo’s stories. Valdemar +did not know what was coming and, fearing fresh trouble, got the +archbishop to swear on the bones of the saints before them all +that he was not moved to abdication by hate of the King, or by any +coercion whatever. Then the venerable priest laid his staff, his +mitre, and his ring on the altar and announced that he had done +with it all forever. But he had made up his mind not to use the +power given him by the Pontiff. They might choose his successor +themselves. He would do nothing to influence their action. + +The bishops and clergy went to the King and asked him if he had any +choice. The King said he had, but if he made it known he would get +no thanks for it and might estrange his best friend. If he did not, +he would certainly be committing a sin. He did not know what to do. + +“Name him,” said they, and Valdemar told them it was the bishop of +Roskilde. + +At that the old archbishop got up and insisted on the election then +and there; but Absalon would have none of it. The burden was too +heavy for his shoulders, he said. However, the clergy seized him, +“being,” says Saxo, who without doubt was one of them, “the more +emboldened to do so as the archbishop himself laid hands upon him +first.” Intoning the hymn sung at archiepiscopal consecrations, +they tried to lead him to the altar. He resisted with all his might +and knocked several of the brethren down. Vestments were torn and +scattered, and a mighty ruction arose, to which the laity, not to +be outdone, added by striking up a hymn of their own. Archbishop +and King tried vainly to make peace; the clamor and battle only +rose the higher. Despite his struggles, Absalon was dragged to the +high seat, but as they were about to force him into it, he asked +leave to say a single word, and instantly appealed his case to the +Pope. So there was an end; but when the aged Eskild, on the plea +of weakness, begged him to pronounce the benediction, he refused +warily, because so he would be exercising archiepiscopal functions +and would be _de facto_ incumbent of the office.[6] + +Here, as always, Absalon thought less of himself than of his +country, so the event showed. For when the Pope heard his plea, +though he decided against him, he allowed him to hold the bishopric +of Roskilde together with the higher office, and so he was left at +Valdemar’s side to help finish their work of building up Denmark +within and without. At Roskilde he spent, as a matter of fact, most +of his time while Valdemar lived. At Lund he would have been in +a distant part of the country, parted from his friend and out of +touch with the things that were the first concern of his life. + +They were preparing to aim a decisive blow against the Pomeranian +pagans when Valdemar died, on the very day set for the sailing. The +parting nearly killed Absalon. Saxo draws a touching picture of him +weeping bitterly as he said the requiem mass over his friend, and +observes: “Who can doubt that his tears, rising with the incense, +gave forth a peculiar and agreeable savour in high heaven before +God?” The plowmen left their fields and carried the bier, with sobs +and lamentations, to the church in Ringsted, where the great King +rests. His sorrow laid Absalon on a long and grievous sick-bed, +from which he rose only when Valdemar’s son needed and called him. + +In the fifteen years that follow we see his old warlike spirit +still unbroken. Thus his defiance of the German Emperor, whose +anger was hot. Frederick, in revenge, persuaded the Pomeranian duke +Bugislav to organize a raid on Denmark with a fleet of five hundred +sail. Scant warning reached Absalon of the danger. King Knud was +away, and there was no time to send for him. Mustering such vessels +as were near, he sailed across the Baltic and met the enemy under +Rügen the day after Whitsuntide (1184). The bishop had gone ashore +to say mass on the beach, when word was brought that the great +fleet was in sight. Hastily pulling off his robe and donning armor +instead, he made for his ship with the words: “Now let our swords +sing the praise of God.” The Pomeranians were taken completely by +surprise. They did not know the Danes were there, and when they +heard the archbishop’s dreaded war-cry raised, they turned and fled +in such terror and haste that eighteen of their ships were run down +and sunk with all on board. On one, a rower hanged himself for fear +of falling into the hands of the Danes. Absalon gave chase, and the +rout became complete. Of the five hundred ships only thirty-five +escaped; all the rest were either sunk or taken. Duke Bugislav soon +after became a vassal of Denmark, and of the Emperor’s plots there +was an end. + +It was the last blow, and the story of it went far and wide. +Absalon’s work was nearly done. Denmark was safe from her enemies. +The people were happy and prosperous. Valdemar’s son ruled +unchallenged, and though he was childless, by his side stood his +brother, a manly youth who, not yet full grown, had already shown +such qualities of courage and sagacious leadership that the old +archbishop could hang up the sword with heart at ease. The promise +was kept. The second Valdemar became Denmark’s royal hero for all +time. Absalon’s last days were devoted to strengthening the Church, +around which he had built such a stout wall. He built churches and +cloisters, and guided them with a wise and firm hand. And he made +Saxo, his clerk, set it all down as an eye-witness of these things, +and as one who came to the task by right; for, says the chronicler, +“have not my grandfather and his father before him served the King +well on land and sea, hence why should not I serve him with my +book-learning?” He bears witness that the bishop himself is his +authority for much that he has written. + +Archbishop Absalon closed his eyes on St. Benedict’s Day, March +21, 1201, in the cloister at Sorö which Sir Asker built and where +he lived his last days in peace. Absalon’s statue of bronze, on +horseback, battle-axe in hand, stands in the market square in +Copenhagen, the city he founded and of which he is the patron +saint; but his body lies within the quiet sanctuary where, in +the deep forest glades, one listens yet for the evensong of the +monks, long silent now. When his grave was opened, in 1826, the +lines of his tall form, clad in clerical robes, were yet clearly +traceable. The strong hands, turned to dust, held a silver chalice +in which lay his episcopal ring. They are there to be seen to-day, +with remnants of his staff that had partly crumbled away. No Dane +approaches his grave without emotion. “All Denmark grieved for +him,” says a German writer of that day, “and commended his soul +to Jesus Christ, the Prince of Peace, for that in his lifetime he +had led many who were enemies to peace and concord.” In his old +cathedral, in Roskilde town, lies Saxo, according to tradition +under an unmarked stone. When he went to rest his friend and master +had slept five years. + +Esbern outlived his brother three years. The hero of so many +battles met his death at last by an accidental fall in his own +house. The last we hear of him is at a meeting in the Christmas +season, 1187, where emissaries of Pope Gregory VIII preached a +general crusade. Their hearers wept at the picture they drew of the +sufferings Christians were made to endure in the Holy Land. Then +arose Esbern and reminded them of the great deeds of the fathers +at home and abroad. The faith and the fire of Absalon were in his +words: + +“These things they did,” he said, “for the glory of their name and +race, knowing nothing of our holy religion. Shall we, believing, +do less? Let us lay aside our petty quarrels and take up this +greater cause. Let us share the sufferings of the saints and earn +their reward. Perhaps we shall win—God keeps the issue. Let him who +cannot give himself, give of his means. So shall all we, sharing +the promise, share also the reward.” + +The account we have says that many took the cross, such was the +effect of his words, more likely of the man and what he was and had +been in the sight of them all throughout his long life. + + +Footnotes: + +[3] Pronounced Reeg. + +[4] Pronounced Snare, with a as in are. In the Danish hare rhymes +with snare, so pronounced. + +[5] Pronounced Veethe. + +[6] That all this in no way affected the personal relations of the +two men Saxo assures us in one of the little human touches with +which his chronicle abounds. When Eskild was going away to end his +days as a monk in the monastery of Clairvaux, he rested awhile with +Absalon at his castle Haffn, where he was received as a father. The +old man suffered greatly from cold feet, and Absalon made a box +with many little holes in, and put a hot brick in it. With this at +his feet, Eskild was able to sleep, and he was very grateful to +Absalon, both because of the comfort it gave him and “because that +he perceived that filial piety rather than skill in the healer’s +art” prompted the invention. + + + + +KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG + + +To the court of King Ottocar of Bohemia there came in the year +1205 a brilliant embassy from far-off Denmark to ask the hand of +his daughter Dragomir for King Valdemar, the young ruler of that +country. Sir Strange[7] Ebbesoen and Bishop Peder Sunesön were the +spokesmen, and many knights, whose fame had travelled far in the +long years of fighting to bring the Baltic pagans under the cross, +rode with them. The old king received them with delight. Valdemar +was not only a good son-in-law for a king to have, being himself +a great and renowned ruler, but he was a splendid knight, tall +and handsome, of most courteous bearing, ambitious, manly, and of +ready wit. So their suit prospered well. The folk-song tells how +they fared; how, according to the custom of those days, Sir Strange +wedded the fair princess by proxy for his lord, and how King +Ottocar, when he bade her good-by, took this promise of her: + + In piety, virtue, and fear of God, + Let all thy days be spent; + And ever thy subjects be thy thought, + Their hopes on thy care be bent. + +The daughter kept her vow. Never was queen more beloved of her +people than Dagmar. That was the name they gave her in Denmark, for +the Bohemian Dragomir was strange to them. Dagmar meant daybreak +in their ancient tongue, and it really seemed as if a new and +beautiful day dawned upon the land in her coming. The dry pages of +history have little enough to tell of her beyond the simple fact of +her marriage and untimely death, though they are filled with her +famous husband’s deeds; but not all of his glorious campaigns that +earned for him the name of “The Victor” have sunk so deep into the +people’s memory, or have taken such hold of their hearts, as the +lovely queen who + + Came without burden, she came with peace; + She came the good peasant to cheer. + +Through all the centuries the people have sung her praise, and they +sing it yet. Of the many folk-songs that have come down from the +middle ages, those that tell of Queen Dagmar are the sweetest, as +they are the most mournful, for her happiness was as brief as her +life was beautiful. + +They sailed homeward over sunny seas, until they came to the shore +where the royal lover awaited his bride, impatiently scanning the +horizon for the gilded dragon’s head of the ship that bore her. The +minstrel sings of the great wedding that was held in the old city +of Ribe.[8] The gray old cathedral in which they knelt together +still stands; but of Valdemar’s strong castle only a grass-grown +hill is left. It was the privilege of a bride in those days to ask +a gift of her husband on the morning after the wedding, and have it +granted without question. Two boons did Dagmar crave, + + “right early in the morning, long before it was day”: + +one, that the plow-tax might be forgiven the peasant, and that +those who for rising against it had been laid in irons be set free; +the other, that the prison door of Bishop Valdemar be opened. +Bishop Valdemar was the arch-enemy of the King. The first request +he granted; but the other he refused for cause: + + An’ he comes out, Bishop Valdemar, + Widow he makes you this year. + +And he did his worst; for in the end the King yielded to Dagmar’s +prayers, and much mischief came of it. + +Seven years the good queen lived. Seven centuries have not dimmed +the memory of them, or of her. The King was away in a distant part +of the country when they sent to him in haste with the message +that the queen was dying. The ballad tells of his fears as he sees +Dagmar’s page coming, and they proved only too true. + + The king his checker-board shut in haste, + The dice they rattled and rung. + Forbid it God, who dwells in heaven, + That Dagmar should die so young. + +In the wild ride over field and moor, the King left his men far +behind: + + When the king rode out of Skanderborg + Him followed a hundred men. + But when he rode o’er Ribe bridge, + Then rode the king alone. + +The tears of weeping women told him as he thundered over the +drawbridge of the castle that he was too late. But Dagmar had only +swooned. As he throws himself upon her bed she opens her eyes, and +smiles upon her husband. Her last prayer, as her first, is for +mercy and peace. Her sin, she says, is not great; she has done +nothing worse than to lace her silken sleeves on a Sunday. Then she +closes her eyes with a tired sigh: + + The bells of heaven are chiming for me; + No more may I stay to speak. + +Thus the folk-song. Long before Dagmar went to her rest, Bishop +Valdemar had stirred up all Germany to wreak his vengeance upon +the King. He was an ambitious, unscrupulous priest, who hated his +royal master because he held himself entitled to the crown, being +the natural son of King Knud, who was murdered at Roskilde, as told +in the story of Absalon. While they were yet young men, when he +saw that the people followed his rival, he set the German princes +against Denmark, a task he never found hard. But young Valdemar +made short work of them. He took the strong cities on the Elbe +and laid the lands of his adversaries under the Danish crown. The +bishop he seized, and threw him into the dungeon of Söborg Castle, +where he had sat thirteen years when Dagmar’s prayers set him free. +He could hardly walk when he came out, but he could hate, and all +the world knew it. The Pope bound him with heavy oaths never to +return to Denmark, and made him come to Italy so that he could keep +an eye on him himself. But two years had not passed before he broke +his oath, and fled to Bremen, where the people elected him to the +vacant archbishopric and its great political power. Forthwith he +began plotting against his native land. + +In the bitter feud between the Guelphs and the Ghibellines he found +his opportunity. One of the rival emperors marched an army north +to help the perjured priest. King Valdemar hastened to meet them, +but on the eve of battle the Emperor was slain by one of his own +men. On Sunday, when the archbishop was saying mass in the Bremen +cathedral, an unknown knight, the visor of whose helmet was closed +so that no one saw his face, strode up to the altar, and laying a +papal bull before him, cried out that he was accursed, and under +the ban of the church. The people fled, and forsaken by all, the +wretched man turned once more to Rome in submission. But though the +Pope forgave him on condition that he meddle no more with politics, +war, or episcopal office, another summer found him wielding sword +and lance against the man he hated, this time under the banner of +the Guelphs. The Germans had made another onset on Denmark, but +again King Valdemar defeated them. The bishop intrenched himself in +Hamburg, and made a desperate resistance, but the King carried the +city by storm. The beaten and hopeless man fled, and shut himself +up in a cloister in Hanover, where daily and nightly he scourged +himself for his sins. If it is true that “hell was fashioned by the +souls that hated,” not all the penance of all the years must have +availed to save him from the torments of the lost. + +Denmark now had peace on its southern border. Dagmar was dead, and +Valdemar, whose restless soul yearned for new worlds to conquer, +turned toward the east where the wild Esthland tribes were guilty +of even worse outrages than the Wends before Absalon tamed them. +The dreadful cruelties practised by these pagans upon christian +captives cried aloud to all civilized Europe, and Valdemar took the +cross “for the honor of the Virgin Mary and the absolution of his +sins,” and gathered a mighty fleet, the greatest ever assembled in +Danish waters. With more than a thousand ships he sailed across +the Baltic. The Pope sped them with his apostolic blessing, and +took king and people into his especial care, forbidding any one to +attack the country while they were away converting the heathen. +Archbishop Anders led the crusade with the king. As the fleet +approached the shore they saw it covered with an innumerable host +of the enemy. So great was their multitude that the crusaders +quailed before the peril of landing; but the archbishop put heart +into them, and led the fleet in fervent prayer to the God of +battle. Then they landed without hindrance. + +There was an old stronghold there called Lyndanissa that had +fallen into decay. The crusaders busied themselves for two days +with building another and better fort. On the third day, being St. +Vitus’ Day, they rested, fearing no harm. The Esthlanders had not +troubled them. Some of their chiefs had even come in with an offer +of surrender. They were willing to be converted, they said, and +the priests were baptizing them after vespers, while the camp was +making ready for the night, when suddenly the air was filled with +the yells of countless savages. On every side they broke from the +woods, where they had been gathering unsuspected, and overwhelmed +the camp. The guards were hewn down, the outposts taken, and the +King’s men were falling back in confusion, their standard lost, +when Prince Vitislav of Rügen who had been camping with his men in +a hollow between the sand-hills, out of the line of attack, threw +himself between them and the Esthlanders, and gave the Danes time +to form their lines. + +In the twilight of the June evening the battle raged with great +fury. With the King at their head, who had led them to victory on +so many hard-fought fields, the Danes drove back their savage foes +time after time, literally hewing their way through their ranks +with sword and battle-axe. But they were hopelessly outnumbered. +Their hearts misgave them as they saw ten heathen spring out of the +ground for every one that was felled. The struggle grew fiercer as +night came on. The Christians were fighting for life; defeat meant +that they must perish to a man, by the sword or upon pagan altars; +escape there was none. Upon the cliff overlooking the battle-field +the archbishop and his priests were praying for success to the +King’s arms. Tradition that has been busy with this great battle +all through the ages tells how, while the aged bishop’s hands were +raised toward heaven, victory leaned to the Danes; but when he +grew tired, and let them fall, the heathen won forward, until the +priests held up his hands and once more the tide of battle rolled +back from the shore, and the Christian war-cry rose higher. + +Suddenly, in the clash of steel upon steel and the wild tumult of +the conflict, there arose a great and wondering cry “the banner! +the banner! a miracle!” and Christian and pagan paused to listen. +Out of the sky, as it seemed, over against the hill upon which the +priests knelt, a blood-red banner with a great white cross was +seen falling into the ranks of the Christian knights, and a voice +resounded over the battle-field, “Bear this high, and victory +shall be yours.” With the exultant cry, “For God and the King,” +the crusaders seized it, and charged the foe. Terror-stricken, +the Esthlanders wavered, then turned, and fled. The battle became +a massacre. Thousands were slain. The chronicles say that the +dead lay piled fathom-high on the field that ran red with blood. +Upon it, when the pursuit was over, Valdemar knelt with his men, +and they bowed their heads in thanksgiving, while the venerable +archbishop gave praise to God for the victory. + +That is the story of the Dannebrog which has been the flag of the +Danes seven hundred years. Whether the archbishop had brought it +with him intending to present it to King Valdemar, and threw it +down among the fighting hordes in the moment of extreme peril, +or whether, as some think, the Pope himself had sent it to the +crusaders with a happy inspiration, the fact remains that it came +to the Danes in this great battle, and on the very day which, +fifty years before, had seen the fall of Arcona, and the end of +idol-worship among the western Slavs. Three hundred years the +standard flew over the Danes fighting on land and sea. Then it was +lost in a campaign against the Holstein counts and, when recovered +half a century later, was hung up in the cathedral at Slesvig, +where gradually it fell to pieces. In the first half of the +Nineteenth Century, when national feeling and national pride were +at their lowest ebb, it was taken down with other moth-eaten old +banners, one day when they were cleaning up, and somebody made a +bonfire of them in the street. Such was the fate of “the flag that +fell from heaven,” the sacred standard of the Danes. But it was +not the end of it. The Dannebrog flies yet over the Denmark of the +Valdemars, no longer great as then, it is true, nor master of its +ancient foes; but the world salutes it with respect, for there was +never blot of tyranny or treason upon it, and its sons own it with +pride wherever they go. + +King Valdemar knighted five and thirty of his brave men on the +battle-field, and from that day the Order of the Dannebrog is said +to date. It bears upon a white crusader’s cross the slogan of the +great fight “For God and the King,” and on its reverse the date +when it was won, “June 15, 1219.” The back of paganism was broken +that day, and the conversion of all Esthland followed soon. King +Valdemar built the castle he had begun before he sailed home, and +called it Reval, after one of the neighboring tribes. The Russian +city of that name grew up about it and about the church which +Archbishop Anders reared. The Dannebrog became its arms, and its +people call it to this day “the city of the Danes.” + +Denmark was now at the height of her glory. Her flag flew over all +the once hostile lands to the south and east, clear into Russia. +The Baltic was a Danish inland sea. King Valdemar was named +“Victor” with cause. His enemies feared him; his people adored him. +In a single night foul treachery laid the whole splendid structure +low. The King and young Valdemar, Dagmar’s son, with a small suite +of retainers had spent the day hunting on the little island of Lyö. +Count Henrik of Schwerin,—the Black Count they called him,—who had +just returned from a pilgrimage to the Holy Land, was his guest. +The count hated Valdemar bitterly for some real or fancied injury, +but he hid his hatred under a friendly bearing and smooth speech. +He brought the King gifts from the Holy Sepulchre, hunted with +him, and was his friend. But by night, when the King and his son +slept in their tent, unguarded, since no enemy was thought to be +near, he fell upon them with his cutthroats, bound and gagged them +despite their struggles, and gathering up all the valuables that +lay around, to put the finishing touch upon his villainy, fled +with his prisoners “in great haste and fear,” while the King’s +men slept. When they awoke, and tried to follow, they found their +ships scuttled. The count’s boat had been lying under sail all day, +hidden in a sheltered cove, awaiting his summons. + +Germany at last had the lion and its whelp in her grasp. In chains +and fetters they were dragged from one dungeon to another. The +traitors dared not trust them long in any city, however strong. The +German Emperor shook his fist at Count Henrik, but secretly he was +glad. He would have liked nothing better than to have the precious +spoil in his own power. The Pope thundered in Rome and hurled his +ban at the thugs. But the Black Count’s conscience was as swarthy +as his countenance; and besides, had he not just been to the Holy +Land, and thereby washed himself clean of all his sins, past and +present? + +Behind prison walls, comforted only by Dagmar’s son, sat the King, +growing old and gray with anger and grief. Denmark lay prostrate +under the sudden blow, while her enemies rose on every side. Day by +day word came of outbreaks in the conquered provinces. The people +did not know which way to turn; the strong hand that held the helm +was gone, and the ship drifted, the prey of every ill wind. It +was as if all that had been won by sixty years of victories and +sacrifice fell away in one brief season. The forests filled with +out-laws; neither peasant nor wayfarer, nor yet monk or nun in +their quiet retreat, was safe from outrage; and pirates swarmed +again in bay and sound, where for two generations there had been +peace. The twice-perjured Bishop Valdemar left his cloister cell +once more and girt on the sword, to take the kingdom he coveted by +storm. + +He was met by King Valdemar’s kinsman and friend, Albert of +Orlamunde, who hastened to the frontier with all the men he could +gather. They halted him with a treaty of peace that offered to set +Valdemar free if he would take his kingdom as a fief of the German +crown. He, Albert, so it was written, was to keep all his lands and +more, would he but sign it. He did not stop to hear the rest, but +slashed the parchment into ribbons with his sword, and ordered an +instant advance. The bishop he made short work of, and he was heard +of no more. But in the battle with the German princes Albert was +defeated and taken prisoner. The door of King Valdemar’s dungeon +was opened only to let his friend in. + +After two years and a half in chains, Valdemar was ransomed by his +people with a great sum of gold. The Danish women gave their rings +and their jewels to bring back their king. They flocked about him +when he returned, and received him like the conqueror of old; but +he rode among them gray and stern, and his thoughts were far away. + +They had made him swear on oath upon the sacrament, and all +Denmark’s bishops with him, before they set him free, that he +would not seek revenge. But once he was back in his own, he sent +to Pope Gregory, asking him to loose him from an oath wrung from +him while he was helpless in the power of bandits. And the Pope +responded that to keep faith with traitors was no man’s duty. Then +back he rode over the River Eider into the enemy’s land—for they +had stripped Denmark of all her hard-won possessions south of +the ancient border of the kingdom, except Esthland and Rügen—and +with him went every man who could bear arms in all the nation. +He crushed the Black Count who tried to block his way, and at +Bornhöved met the German allies who had gathered from far and +near to give him battle. Well they knew that if Valdemar won, the +reckoning would be terrible. All day they fought, and victory +seemed to lean toward the Danes, when the base Holsteiners, the +Danish rear-guard whom the enemy had bought to betray their king, +turned their spears upon his army, and decided the day. The battle +ended in utter rout of Valdemar’s forces. Four thousand Danish men +were slain. The King himself fell wounded on the field, his eye +pierced by an arrow, and would have fallen into the hands of the +enemy once more but for an unknown German knight, who took him upon +his horse and bore him in the night over unfrequented paths to +Kiel, where he was safe. + +“But all men said that this great hurt befell the King because that +he brake the oath he swore upon the sacred body of the Lord.” + +The wars of Valdemar were over, but his sorrows were not. Four +years later the crushing blow fell when Dagmar’s son, who was +crowned king to succeed him, lost his life while hunting. With him, +says the folk-song, died the hope of Denmark. The King had other +sons, but to Dagmar’s boy the people had given their love from +the first, as they had to his gentle mother. The old King and his +people grieved together. + +But Valdemar rose above his sorrows. Great as he had been in the +days of victory, he was greater still in adversity. The country +was torn by the wars of three-score years, and in need of rest. +He gave his last days to healing the wounds the sword had struck. +Valdemar, the Victor, became Valdemar, the Law-giver. The laws of +the country had hitherto made themselves. They were the outgrowths +of the people’s ancient customs, passed down by word of mouth +through the generations, and confirmed on Thing from time to time. +King Valdemar gave Denmark her first written laws that judged +between man and man, in at least one of her provinces clear down +into our day. “With law shall land be built” begins his code. “The +law,” it says, “must be honest, just, reasonable, and according to +the ways of the people. It must meet their needs, and speak plainly +so that all men may know and understand what the law is. It is not +to be made in any man’s favor, but for the needs of all them who +live in the land.” That is its purpose, and “no man shall judge +(condemn) the law which the King has given and the country chosen; +neither shall he (the King) take it back without the will of the +people.” That tells the story of Valdemar’s day, and of the people +who are so near of kin with ourselves. They were not sovereign +and subjects; they were a chosen king and a free people, working +together “with law land to build.” + +King Valdemar was married twice. The folk-song represents Dagmar as +urging the King with her dying breath + + “that Bengerd, my lord, that base bad dame you never to wife + will take.” + +Bengerd, or Berengaria, was a Portuguese princess whom Valdemar +married in spite of the warning, two years later. As the people had +loved the fair Dagmar, so they hated the proud Southern beauty, +whether with reason or not. The story of her “morning gift,” as it +has come down to us through the mists of time, is very different +from the other. She asks the King, so the ballad has it, to give +her Samsö, a great and fertile island, and “a golden crown[9] for +every maid,” but he tells her not to be quite so greedy: + + There be full many an honest maid with not dry bread to eat. + +Undismayed, Bengerd objects that Danish women have no business +to wear silken gowns, and that a good horse is not for a peasant +lad. The King replies patiently that what a woman can buy she may +wear for him, and that he will not take the lad’s horse if he can +feed it. Bengerd is not satisfied. “Let bar the land with iron +chains” is her next proposal, that neither man nor woman enter +it without paying tax. Her husband says scornfully that Danish +kings have never had need of such measures, and never will. He is +plainly getting bored, and when she keeps it up, and begrudges the +husbandman more than “two oxen and a cow,” he loses his temper, and +presumably there is a matrimonial tiff. Very likely most of this is +fiction, bred of the popular prejudice. The King loved her, that +is certain. She was a beautiful high-spirited woman, so beautiful +that many hundreds of years after, when her grave was opened, the +delicate oval of her skull excited admiration yet. But the people +hated her. Twenty generations after her death it was their custom +when passing her grave to spit on it with the exclamation “Out upon +thee, Bengerd! God bless the King of Denmark”; for in good or evil +days they never wavered in their love and admiration for the king +who was a son of the first Valdemar, and the heir of his greatness +and of that of the sainted Absalon. Tradition has it that Bengerd +was killed in battle, having gone with her husband on one of his +campaigns. “It was not heard in any place,” says the folk-song +wickedly, “that any one grieved for her.” But the King mourned for +his beautiful queen to the end of his days. + +Bengerd bore Valdemar three sons upon whom he lavished all the +affection of his lonely old age. Erik he chose as his successor, +and to keep his brothers loyal to him he gave them great fiefs and +thus, unknowing, brought on the very trouble he sought to avoid, +and set his foot on the path that led to Denmark’s dismemberment +after centuries of bloody wars. For to his second son Abel he gave +Slesvig, and Abel, when his brother became king, sought alliance +with the Holstein count Adolf,[10] the very one who had led the +Germans at the fatal battle of Bornhöved. The result was a war +between the brothers that raged seven years, and laid waste the +land. Worse was to follow, for Abel was only “Abel in name, but +Cain in deed.” But happily the old King’s eyes were closed then, +and he was spared the sight of one brother murdering the other for +the kingdom. + +Some foreboding of this seems to have troubled him in his last +years. It is related that once when he was mounting his horse to go +hunting he fell into a deep reverie, and remained standing with his +foot in the stirrup a long time, while his men wondered, not daring +to disturb him. At last one of them went to remind him that the +sun was low in the west. The King awoke from his dream, and bade +him go at once to a wise old hermit who lived in a distant part of +the country. “Ask him,” he said, “what King Valdemar was thinking +of just now, and bring me his answer.” The knight went away on his +strange errand, and found the hermit. And this was the message he +brought back: “Your lord and master pondered as he stood by his +horse, how his sons would fare when he was dead. Tell him that war +and discord they shall have, but kings they will all be.” When the +King heard the prophecy he was troubled in mind, and called his +sons and all his great knights to a council at which he pleaded +with them to keep the peace. But though they promised, he was +barely in his grave when riot and bloodshed filled the land. The +climax was reached when Abel inveigled his brother to his home with +fair words and, once he had him in his power, seized him and gave +him over to his men to do with “as they pleased.” They understood +their master only too well, and took King Erik out on the fjord in +an open boat, and killed him there, scarce giving him time to say +his prayers. They weighted his body with his helmet, and sank it in +the deep. + +Abel made oath with four and twenty of his men that he was innocent +of his brother’s blood, and took the crown after him. But the foul +crime was soon avenged. Within a few years he was himself slain +by a peasant in a rising of his own people. For a while his body +lay unburied, the prey of beast and bird, and when it was interred +in the Slesvig cathedral there was no rest for it. “Such turmoil +arose in the church by night that the monks could not chant their +vigils,” and in the end they took him out, and buried him in a +swamp, with a stake driven through the heart to lay his ghost. But +clear down to our time when people ceased to believe in ghosts, the +fratricide was seen at night hunting through the woods, coal-black +and on a white horse, with three fiery dogs trailing after; and +blue flames burned over the sea where they vanished. That was how +the superstition of the people judged the man whom the nobles and +the priests made king, red-handed. + +Christopher, the youngest of the three brothers, was king last. +His end was no better than that of the rest. Indeed, it was worse. +Hardly yet forty years old, he died—poisoned, it was said, by the +Abbot Arnfast, in the sacrament as he knelt at the altar-rail +in the Ribe cathedral. He was buried in the chancel where the +penitents going to the altar walk over his grave. So, of all +Valdemar’s four sons, not one died a peaceful, natural death. But +kings they all were. + +Valdemar was laid in Ringsted with his great father. He sleeps +between his two queens. Dagmar’s grave was disturbed in the late +middle ages by unknown vandals, and the remains of Denmark’s +best-loved queen were scattered. Only a golden cross, which she +had worn in life, somehow escaped, and found its way in course of +time into the museum of antiquities at Copenhagen, where it now is, +its chief and priceless treasure. There also is a braid of Queen +Bengerd’s hair that was found when her grave was opened in 1855. +The people’s hate had followed her even there, and would not let +her rest. The slab that covered her tomb had been pried off, and a +round stone dropped into the place made for her head. Otherwise her +grave was undisturbed. + +“Truly then fell the crown from the heads of Danish men,” says +the old chronicle of King Valdemar’s death, and black clouds were +gathering ominously even then over the land. But in storm and +stress, as in days that were fair, the Danish people have clung +loyally to the memory of their beloved King and of his sweet Dagmar. + + +Footnotes: + +[7] Pronounced as Strangle, with the l left out. + +[8] Pronounced Reebe, in two syllables. + +[9] A coin, probably. + +[10] That was the beginning of the Slesvig-Holstein question that +troubled Europe to our day; for the fashion set by Abel other +rulers of his dukedom followed, and by degrees Slesvig came to +be reckoned with the German duchies, whereas up till then it had +always been South-Jutland, a part of Denmark proper. + + + + +HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID + + +On the map of Europe the mainland of Denmark looks like a beckoning +finger pointing due north and ending in a narrow sand-reef, upon +which the waves of the North Sea and of the Kattegat break with +unceasing clamor and strife. The heart of the peninsula, quite +one-fourth of its area, was fifty years ago a desert, a barren, +melancholy waste, where the only sign of life encountered by the +hunter, gunning for heath-fowl and plover, was a rare shepherd +tending a few lonesome sheep, and knitting mechanically on his +endless stocking. The two, the lean sheep and the long stocking, +together comprised the only industries which the heath afforded and +was thought capable of sustaining. A great change has taken place +within the span of a single life, and it is all due to the clear +sight and patient devotion of one strong man, the Gifford Pinchot +of Denmark. The story of that unique achievement reads like the +tale of the Sleeping Beauty who was roused from her hundred years’ +sleep by the kiss of her lover prince. The prince who awoke the +slumbering heath was a captain of engineers, Enrico Dalgas by name. + +[Illustration: THE HEATH AS IT WAS FIFTY YEARS AGO] + +Not altogether fanciful is the conceit. Barren, black, and +desolate, the great moor gripped the imagination as no smiling +landscape of field and forest could—does yet, where enough of it +remains. Far as eye reaches the dun heather covers hill and plain +with its sombre pall. Like gloomy sentinels, furry cattails nod in +the bog where the blue gentian peeps timidly into murky pools; the +only human habitation in sight some heath boer’s ling-thatched hut, +flanked by rows of peat stacks in vain endeavor to stay the sweep +of the pitiless west wind. On the barrows where the vikings sleep +their long sleep, the plover pipes its melancholy lay; between +steep banks a furtive brook steals swiftly by as if anxious to +escape from the universal blight. Over it all broods the silence of +the desert, drowsy with the hum of many bees winging their swift +way to the secret feeding-places they know of, where mayflower and +anemone hide under the heather, witness that forests grew here in +the long ago. In midsummer, when the purple is on the broom, a +strange pageant moves on the dim horizon, a shifting mirage of sea +and shore, forest, lake, and islands lying high, with ships and +castles and spires of distant churches—the witchery of the heath +that speaks in the tales and superstitions of its simple people. +High in the blue soars the lark, singing its song of home and +hope to its nesting mate. This is the heath which, denying to the +hardest toil all but the barest living, has given of its poetry to +the Danish tongue some of its sweetest songs. + +But in this busy world day-dreams must make way for the things that +make the day count, castles in the air to homes upon the soil. The +heath had known such in the dim past. It had not always been a +desert. The numberless cairns that lie scattered over it, sometimes +strung out for miles as if marking the highways of the ancients, +which they doubtless do, sometimes grouped where their villages +stood, bear witness to it. Great battles account for their share, +and some of them were fought in historic times. On Grathe Heath the +young King Valdemar overcame his treacherous rival Svend. Alone +and hunted, the beaten man sought refuge, Saxo tells us, behind a +stump, where he was found and slain by one of the King’s axemen. A +chapel was built on the spot. More than seven centuries later (in +1892) they dug there, and found the bones of a man with skull split +in two. + +The stump behind which the wretched Svend hid was probably the last +representative of great forests that grew where now is sterile +moor. In the bogs trunks of oak and fir are found lying as they +fell centuries ago. The local names preserve the tradition, with +here and there patches of scrub oak that hug the ground close, to +escape the blast from the North Sea. There is one such thicket +near the hamlet of Taulund—the name itself tells of long-forgotten +groves—and the story runs among the people yet that once squirrels +jumped from tree to tree without touching ground all the way from +Taulund to Gjellerup church, a stretch of more than five miles to +which the wild things of the woods have long been strangers. In the +shelter of the old forests men dwelt through ages, and made the +land yield them a living. Some cairns that have been explored span +over more than a thousand years. They were built in the stone age, +and served the people of the bronze and iron ages successively as +burial-places, doubtless the same tribes who thus occupied their +homesteads from generation to generation. That they were farmers, +not nomads, is proved by the clear impression of grains of wheat +and barley in their burial urns. The seeds strayed into the clay +and were burned away, but the impression abides, and tells the +story. + +Clear down to historic times there was a thrifty population in many +of the now barren spots. But a change was slowly creeping over +the landscape. The country was torn by long and bloody wars. The +big men fought for the land and the little ones paid the score, +as they always do. They were hunted from house and home. Next the +wild hordes of the Holstein counts overran Jutland. Its towns were +burned, the country laid waste. Great fires swept the forests. +What ravaging armies had left was burned in the smelteries. In the +sandy crust of the heath there is iron, and swords and spears were +the grim need of that day. The smelteries are only names now. They +went, but they took the forests with them, and where the ground was +cleared the west wind broke through, and ruin followed fast. Last +of all came the Black Death, and set its seal of desolation upon +it all. When it had passed, the country was a huge graveyard. The +heath had moved in. Rovers and smugglers found refuge there; honest +folk shunned it. Under the heather the old landmarks are sometimes +found yet, and deep ruts made by wheels that long since ceased to +turn. + +In the Eighteenth Century men began to think of reclamation. A +thousand German colonists were called in and settled on the heath, +but it was stronger than they, and they drifted away until scarce +half a hundred families remained. The Government tried its hand, +but there was no one who knew just how, and only discouragement +resulted. Then came the war with Germany in 1864, that lost to +Denmark a third of her territory. The country lay prostrate under +the crushing blow. But it rose above defeat and disaster, and once +more expectant eyes were turned toward the ancient domain that had +slipped from its grasp. “What was lost without must be won within” +became the national slogan. And this time the man for the task was +at hand. + +Enrico Mylius Dalgas was by the accident of birth an Italian, his +father being the Danish consul in Naples; by descent a Frenchman; +by choice and training a Dane, typical of the best in that people. +He came of the Huguenot stock that left France after the repeal of +the Edict of Nantes in 1685 and scattered over Europe, to the great +good of every land in which it settled. They had been tillers of +the soil from the beginning, and at least two of the family, who +found homes in Denmark, made in their day notable contributions to +the cause of advanced, sensible husbandry. Enrico’s father, though +a merchant, had an open eye for the interests which in later years +claimed the son’s life-work. In the diary of a journey through +Sweden he makes indignant comment upon the reckless way in which +the people of that country dealt with their forests. That he was +also a man of resolution is shown by an incident of the time when +Jew-baiting was having its sorry day in Denmark. An innkeeper +mistook the dark-skinned little man for a Jew, and set before him +a spoiled ham, retorting contemptuously, when protest was made, +that it was “good enough for a Sheeny.” Without further parley +Mr. Dalgas seized the hot ham by its shank and beat the fellow +with it till he cried for mercy. The son tells of the first school +he attended, when he was but five years old. It was kept by the +widow of one of Napoleon’s generals, a militant lady who every +morning marshalled the school, a Lilliputian army with the teachers +flanking the line like beardless sergeants in stays and petticoats, +and distributed rewards and punishments as the great Emperor was +wont to do after a battle. For the dunces there was a corner strewn +with dried peas on which they were made to kneel with long-eared +donkey caps adorning their luckless heads. Very likely it was after +an insult of this kind that Enrico decided to elope to America with +his baby sister. They were found down by the harbor bargaining +with some fishermen to take them over to Capri _en route_ for the +land of freedom. The elder Dalgas died while the children were yet +little, and the widow went back to Denmark to bring up her boys +there. + +They were poor, and the change from the genial skies of sunny Italy +to the bleak North did not make it any easier for them. Enrico’s +teacher saw it, and gave him his overcoat to be made over. But +the boys spotted it and squared accounts with their teacher by +snowballing the wearer of the big green plaid until he was glad to +leave it at home, and go without. He was in the military school +when war broke out with Germany in 1848. Both of his brothers +volunteered, and fell in battle. Enrico was ordered out as +lieutenant, and put on the shoulder-straps joyfully, to the great +scandal of his godfather in Milan, who sympathized with the German +cause. When the young soldier refused to resign he not only cut him +off in his will, but took away a pension of four hundred kroner +he had given his mother in her widowhood. If he had thoughts of +bringing them over by such means, he found out his mistake. Mother +and son were made of sterner stuff. Dalgas fought twice for his +country, the last time in 1864, as a captain of engineers. + +It was no ordinary class, the one of 1851 that resumed its studies +in the military high school. Two of the students did not answer +roll-call; their names were written among the nation’s heroic dead. +Some had scars and wore the cross for valor in battle. All were +first lieutenants, to be graduated as captains. Dalgas had himself +transferred from the artillery to the engineers, and was detailed +as road inspector. So the opportunity of his life came to him. + +There were few railways in those days; the highways were still the +great arteries of traffic. Dalgas built roads that crossed the +heath, and he learned to know it and the strong and independent, +if narrow, people who clung to it with such a tenacious grip. He +had a natural liking for practical geology and for the chemistry +of the soil, and the deep cuts which his roads sometimes made gave +him the best of chances for following his bent. The heath lay as +an open book before him, and he studied it with delight. He found +the traces of the old forests, and noted their extent. Occasionally +the pickaxe uncovered peat deposits of unsuspected depth and +value. Sometimes the line led across the lean fields, and damages +had to be discussed and assessed. He learned the point of view +of the heath farmer, sympathized with his struggles, and gained +his confidence. Best of all, he found a man of his own mind, a +lawyer by the name of Morville, himself a descendant of the exiled +Huguenots. It is not a little curious that when the way was cleared +for the Heath Society’s great work, in its formal organization with +M. Mourier-Petersen, a large landowner, as their associate in its +management, the three men who for a quarter of a century planned +the work and marked out the groove in which it was to run were +all of that strong stock which is by no means the most common in +Denmark. + +With his lawyer friend Captain Dalgas tramped the heath far and +wide for ten years. Then their talks had matured a plan. Dalgas +wrote to the Copenhagen newspapers that the heath could be +reclaimed, and suggested that it should be done by the State. They +laughed at him. “Nothing better could have happened,” he said in +after years, “for it made us turn to the people themselves, and +that was the road to success, though we did not know it.” In the +spring of 1866 a hundred men, little and big landowners most of +them, met at his call, and organized the Heath Society[11] with the +object of reclaiming the moor. Dalgas became its managing director. + +To restore to the treeless waste its forest growth was the +fundamental idea, for until that was done nothing but the heather +could grow there. The west wind would not let it. But the heath +farmer shook his head. It would cost too much, and give too little +back. What he needed was water and marl. Could the captain help +them to these?—that was another matter. The little streams that +found their way into the heath and lost it there, dire need had +taught them to turn to use in their fields; not a drop escaped. But +the river that ran between deep banks was beyond their reach. Could +he show them how to harness that? Dalgas saw their point. “We are +working, not for the dead soil, but for the living men who find +homes upon it,” he told his associates, and tree planting was put +aside for the time. They turned canal diggers instead. Irrigation +became their aim and task; the engineer was in his right place. +The water was raised from the stream and led out upon the moor, +and presently grass grew in the sand which the wiry stems of the +heather had clutched so long. Green meadows lined the water-runs, +and fragrant haystacks rose. To the lean sheep was added a cow, +then two. The farmer laid by a little, and took in more land +for cultivation. That meant breaking the heath. Also, it meant +marl. The heath is lime-poor; marl is lime in the exact form in +which it best fits that sandy soil. It was known to exist in some +favored spots, but the poor heath farmer could not bring it from a +distance. So the marl borer went with the canal digger. Into every +acre he drove his auger, and mapped out his discoveries. At last +accounts he had found marl in more than seventeen hundred places, +and he is not done yet. Where there was none, Dalgas’s Society +built portable railways into the moor far enough to bring it to +nearly every farmer’s door. + +It was as if a magic wand had been waved over the heath. With +water and marl, the means were at hand for fighting it and winning +out. Heads that had drooped in discouragement were raised. The +cattle keep increased, and with it came the farmer’s wealth. Marl +changes the character of the heath soil; with manure to fertilize +it there was no reason why it should not grow crops—none, except +the withering blast of the west wind. The time for Dalgas to preach +tree planting had come. + +While the canal digger and marl seeker were at work, there had been +neighborhood meetings and talks at which Captain Dalgas did the +talking. When he spoke the heath boer listened, for he had learned +to look upon him as one of them. He wore no gold lace. A plain man +in every day gray tweeds, with his trousers tucked into his boots, +he spoke to plain people of things that concerned them vitally, and +in a way they could understand. So when he told them that the heath +had once been forest-clad, at least a large part of it, and pointed +them to the proofs, and that the woods could be made to grow again +to give them timber and shelter and crops, they gave heed. It was +worth trying at any rate. The shelter was the immediate thing. They +began planting hedges about their homesteads; not always wisely, +for it is not every tree that will grow in the heath. The wind +whipped and wore them, the ahl cramped their roots, and they died. +The ahl is the rusty-red crust that forms under the heather in the +course of the ages where the desert rules. Sometimes it is a loose +sandstone formation; sometimes it carries as much as twenty per +cent of iron that is absorbed from the upper layers of the sand. In +any case, it must be broken through; no tree root can do it. The +ahl, the poverty of the sand, and the wind, together make the “evil +genius” of the heath that had won until then in the century-old +fight with man. But this time he had backing, and was not minded to +give up. The Heath Society was there to counsel, to aid. And soon +the hedges took hold, and gardens grew in their shelter. There is +hardly a farm in all west Jutland to-day that has not one, even if +the moor waits just beyond the gate. + +Out in the desert the Society had made a beginning with plantations +of Norway spruce. They took root, but the heather soon overwhelmed +the young plants. Not without a fight would this enemy let go its +grip upon the land. It had smothered the hardy Scotch pine in days +past, and now the spruce was in peril. Searching high and low for +something that would grow fast and grow green, Dalgas and his +associates planted dwarf pine with the spruce. Strangely, it not +only grew itself, but proved to be a real nurse for the other. The +spruce took a fresh start, and they grew vigorously together—for a +while. Then the pine outstripped its nursling, and threatened to +smother it. The spruce was the more valuable; the other was at best +little more than a shrub. The croaker raised his voice: the black +heath had turned green, but it was still heath, of no value to any +one, then or ever. + +He had not reckoned with Dalgas. The captain of engineers could use +the axe as well as the spade. He cut the dwarf pine out wherever +the spruce had got its grip, and gave it light and air. And it grew +big and beautiful. The Heath Society has now over nineteen hundred +plantations that cover nearly a hundred thousand acres, and the +State and private individuals, inspired by the example it set, have +planted almost as large an area. The ghost of the heath has been +laid for all time. + +Go now across the heath and see the change forty years have +wrought. You shall seek in vain the lonely shepherd with his +stocking. The stocking has grown into an organized industry. In +grandfather’s day the farmer and his household “knitted for the +taxes”; if all hands made enough in the twelvemonth to pay the +tax-gatherer, they had done well. Last year the single county of +Hammerum, of which more below, sold machine-made underwear to the +value of over a million and a half kroner. The sheep are there, +but no longer lean; no more the ling-thatched hut, but prosperous +farms backed by thrifty groves, with hollyhock and marigold in the +dooryards, heaps of gray marl in the fields, tiny rivulets of water +singing the doom of the heath in the sand; for where it comes the +heather moves out. A resolute, thrifty peasantry looks hopefully +forward. Not all of the heath is conquered yet. Roughly speaking, +thirty-three hundred square miles of heath confronted Dalgas in +1866. Just about a thousand remain for those who come after to +wrestle with; but already voices are raised pleading that some of +it be preserved untouched for its natural beauty, while yet it is +time. + +Meanwhile the plow goes over fresh acres every year—once, twice, +then a deeper plowing, this time to break the stony crust, and the +heath is ready for its human mission. From the Society’s nurseries +that are scattered through the country come thousands of tiny +trees, and are set out in the furrows, two of the spruce for each +dwarf pine till the nurse has done her work. Then she is turned +into charcoal, into tar, and a score of other things of use. The +men who do the planting in summer find chopping to do in winter +in the older plantations, at good wages. Money is flowing into +the moor in the wake of the water and the marl. Roads are being +made, and every day the mail-carrier comes. In the olden time a +stranger straying into the heath often brought the first news of +the world without for weeks together. Game is coming, too,—roebuck +and deer,—in the young forests. The climate itself is changing; +more rain falls in midsummer, when it is needed. The sand-blast has +been checked, the power of the west wind broken. The shrivelled +soil once more takes up and holds the rains, and the streams will +deepen, fish leap in them as of yore. Groves of beech and oak are +springing up in the shelter of their hardier evergreen kin. “Make +the land furry,” Dalgas said, with prophetic eye beholding great +forests taking the place of sand and heather, and in his lifetime +the change was wrought that is transforming the barren moor into +the home-land of a prosperous people. + +To the most unlikely of places, through the very prison doors, +his gospel of hope has made its way. For the last dozen years the +life prisoners in the Horsens penitentiary have been employed in +breaking and reforesting the heath, and their keepers report that +the effect upon them of the hard work in the open has been to +notably cheer and brighten them. The discipline has been excellent. +There have been few attempts at escape, and they have come to +nothing through the vigilance of the other prisoners. + +While the population in the rest of Denmark is about stationary, in +west Jutland it grows apace. The case of Skåphus farm in the parish +of Sunds shows how this happens. Prior to 1870 this farm of three +thousand acres was rated the “biggest and poorest” in Denmark. Last +year it had dwindled to three hundred and fifty acres, but upon +its old land thirty-three homesteads had risen that kept between +them sixty-two horses and two hundred and fifty-two cows, beside +the sheep, and the manor farm was worth twice as much as before. +The town of Herning, sometimes called “the Star of the Heath,” is +the seat of Hammerum county, once the baldest and most miserable on +the Danish mainland. In 1841 twenty-one persons lived in Herning. +To-day there are more than six thousand in a town with handsome +buildings, gas, electric lighting, and paved streets. The heath is +half a dozen miles away. And this is not the result of any special +or forced industry, but the natural, healthy growth of a centre for +an army of industrious men and women winning back the land of their +fathers by patient toil. All through the landscape one sees from +the train the black giving way to the green. Churches rear their +white gables; bells that have been silent since the Black Death +stalked through the land once more call the people to worship on +the old sites. More churches were built in the reign of “the good +King Christian,” who has just been gathered to his fathers, than in +all the centuries since the day of the Valdemars. + +Bog cultivation is the Heath Society’s youngest child. The heath +is full of peat-bogs that only need the sand, so plentiful on the +uplands, to make their soil as good as the best, the muck of the +bog being all plant food, and they have a surplus of water to give +in exchange. With hope the keynote of it all, the State has taken +up the herculean task of keeping down the moving sands of the North +Sea coast. All along it is a range of dunes that in the fierce +storms of that region may change shape and place in a single night. +The “sand flight” at times reached miles inland, and threatened to +bury the farmer’s acres past recovery. Austrian fir and dwarf pine +now grow upon the white range, helping alike to keep down the sand +and to bar out the blast. + +With this exception, the great change has been, is being, wrought +by the people themselves. It was for their good, in the apathy +that followed 1864, that it should be so, and Dalgas saw it. The +State aids the man who plants ten acres or more, and assumes +the obligation to preserve the forest intact; the Heath Society +sells him plants at half-price, and helps him with its advice. It +disposes annually of over thirteen million young trees. The people +do the rest, and back the Society with their support. The Danish +peasant has learned the value of coöperation since he turned dairy +farmer, and associations for irrigation, for tree planting, and +garden planting are everywhere. They even reach across the ocean. +This year a call was issued to sons of the old soil, who have found +a new home in America, to join in planting a Danish-American forest +in the desert where hill and heather hide a silvery lake in their +deep shadows and returning wanderers may rest and dream of the long +ago. + +[Illustration: THE HEATH TRANSFORMED IN TWENTY-ONE YEARS] + +Soldier though he was, Enrico Dalgas’s pick and spade brigade won +greater victories for Denmark than her armies in two wars. He +literally “won for his country within what she had lost without.” A +natural organizer, a hard worker who found his greatest joy in his +daily tasks, a fearless and lucid writer who yet knew how to keep +his cause out of the rancorous politics that often enough seemed +to mistake partisanship for patriotism, he was the most modest of +men. Praise he always passed up to others. At the “silver wedding” +of the Society he founded they toasted him jubilantly, but he sat +quiet a long time. When at last he arose, it was to make this +characteristic little speech: + +“I thank you very much. His Excellency the Minister of the +Interior, who is present here, will see from this how much you +think of me, and possibly my recommendation that the State +make a larger contribution to the Heath Society’s treasury may +thereby acquire greater weight with him. I drink to an increased +appropriation.” + +On the heath Dalgas was prophet, prince, and friend of the people. +In the crowds that flocked about his bier homespun elbowed gold +lace in the grief of a common loss. Boughs of the fragrant spruce +decked his coffin, the gift of the heath to the memory of him who +set it free. + +To Dalgas apply the words of the seer with which he himself +characterized the Society that was the child of his heart and +brain: “The good men are those who plant and water,” for they add +to the happiness of mankind. + + +Footnotes: + +[11] Danske Hedeselskab. + + + + +KING CHRISTIAN IV + + +[Illustration: + + King Christian stood by loft - y mast In mist and + smoke; His sword was ham - mer - ing so fast, Thro’ + Goth -ic helm and brain it passed; Then sank each hos-tile + hulk and mast. In mist and smoke. “Fly,” + shout-ed they, “fly, he who can! Who braves of Denmark’s + Christ- i -an, Who braves of Denmark’s Christian The stroke?”] + +Deep in the beech-woods between Copenhagen and Elsinore, upon +the shore of a limpid lake, stands Frederiksborg, one of the +most beautiful castles in Europe. In its chapel the Danish kings +were crowned for two centuries, and here was born on April 12, +1577, King Christian of the Danish national hymn which Longfellow +translated into our tongue. No Danish ruler since the days of the +great Valdemars made such a mark upon his time; none lives as he +in the imagination of the people. He led armies to war and won +and lost battles; indeed, he lost more than he won on land when +matched against the great generals of that fighting era. On the sea +he sailed his own ship and was the captain of his own fleet, and +there he had no peer. He made laws in the days of peace and reigned +over a happy, prosperous land. In his old age misfortune in which +he had no share overwhelmed Denmark, but he was ever greatest in +adversity, and his courage saved the country from ruin. The great +did not love him overmuch; but to the plain people he was ever, +with all his failings, which were the failings of his day, a great, +appealing figure, and lives in their hearts, not merely in the dry +pages of musty books. + +He was eleven years old when his father died, and until he came of +age the country was governed by a council of happily most able men +who, with his mother, gave him such a schooling as few kings have +had. He not only became proficient in the languages, living and +dead, and in mathematics which he put to such practical use that +he was among the greatest of architects and ship-builders; he was +the best all-round athlete among his fellows as well, and there was +some sense in the tradition that survives to this day that whoever +was touched by him in wrath did not live long, for he was very tall +with a big, strong body, and when he struck, he struck hard. He was +a dauntless sailor who knew as much about sailing a ship as any one +of his captains, and much more about building it. Danger appealed +to him always. When the spire on the great cathedral in Copenhagen +threatened to fall, he was the one who went up in it alone and gave +orders where and how to brace it. + +As he grew, he sat in the council of state, learning kingcraft, and +showed there the hard-headed sense of fairness and justice that +went with him through life. He was hardly fourteen when the case +of three brothers of the powerful Friis family came before the +council. They had attacked another young nobleman in the street, +struck off one of his hands, and crippled the other. Because of +their influence, the council was for being lenient, atrocious as +the crime was. A fine was deemed sufficient. The young prince +asked if there were not some law covering the case with severer +punishment, and was told that in the province of Skaane there was +such a law that applied to serfs. But the assault had not been +committed in Skaane, and these were high noblemen. + +“All the worse for them,” said the prince. “Is then a serf in +Skaane to have more rights under the law than a nobleman in the +rest of Denmark? Let the law for the serf be theirs.” And the +judgment stood. + +He had barely attained his majority, when the young king was called +upon to judge between another great noble and a widow whom he sued +for 9000 daler, money he claimed to have lent to her husband. In +proof he laid before the judges two bonds bearing the signatures of +husband and wife. The widow denounced them as forgeries, but the +court decided that she must pay. She went straight to the King with +her story, assuring him that she had never heard of the debt. The +King sent for the bonds and upon close scrutiny discovered that one +of them was on paper bearing the water-mark of a mill that was not +built till two years after the date written in the bond. The noble +was arrested and the search of his house brought to light several +similar documents waiting their turn. He went to the scaffold. His +rank only aggravated his offence in the eyes of the King. No wonder +the fame of this judge spread quickly through the land. + +A dozen contented years he reigned in peace, doing justice between +man and man at home. Then the curse of his house gripped him. In +two centuries, since the brief union between the three Scandinavian +kingdoms was broken by the secession of Sweden, only two of sixteen +kings in either country had gone to their rest without ripping +up the old feud. It was now Christian’s turn. The pretext was of +little account: there was always cause enough. Gustav Adolf, whose +father was then on the throne of Sweden, said in after years that +there was no one he had such hearty admiration for and whose friend +he would like so well to be as Christian IV: “The mischief is that +we are neighbors.” King Christian crossed over into Sweden and laid +siege to the strong fortress of Kalmar where he first saw actual +war and showed himself a doughty campaigner of intrepid courage. +It came near costing him his life when a cannoneer with whom he +had often talked on his rounds deserted to the enemy and picked +the King out as his especial target. Twice he killed an officer +attending upon him, but the King he never hit. It is almost a +pleasure to record that when he tried it again, in another fight, +Christian caught him and dealt with him as the traitor he was, +though the rough justice of those days is not pleasant to dwell on. +The besieged tried to create a diversion by sneaking into camp at +night and burying wax images of the King and his generals in the +earth, where they were afterwards found and spread consternation +through the army; for such things were believed to be wrought by +witchcraft and to bring bad luck to those whom they represented. + +However, neither the real courage of the defenders, nor their +dallying with the black art, helped them any. King Christian +stormed the town at the head of his army and took it. The +burgomaster hid in the church, disguised as a priest, and pretended +to be shriving some women when the crash came, but it did not save +him. When the Swedish king came with a host twice the size of his +own, there was a battle royal, but Christian drove him off and laid +siege to the castle where dissension presently arose between the +garrison and its commander who was for surrendering. In the midst +of their noisy quarrel, King Christian was discovered standing upon +the wall, calmly looking on. He had climbed up alone on a rope +ladder which the sentinel let down at his bidding. At the sight +they gave it up and opened the gates, and the King wrote home, +proudly dating his letter from “our castle Kalmar.” + +Its loss so angered the Swedish king who was old and sick, that he +challenged Christian to single combat, without armor. The letters +that passed between them were hardly kingly. King Christian wrote +that he had other things to do: “Better catch a doctor, old man, +and have your head-piece looked after.” Helpless anger killed Karl, +and Gustav Adolf, of whom the world was presently to hear, took the +command and the crown. After that Christian had a harder road to +hoe. + +A foretaste of it came to him when he tried to surprise the +fortress of Gullberg near the present Götaborg. Its commander +was wounded early in the fight, but his wife who took his place +more than filled it. She and her women poured boiling lye upon +the attacking Danes until they lay “like scalded pigs” under the +walls. Their leader knew when he had enough and made off in haste, +with the lady commandant calling after him, “You were a little +unexpected for breakfast, but come back for dinner and we will +receive you properly.” She would not even let them take their +dead away. “Since God gave us luck to kill them,” she said, “we +will manage to bury them too.” They were very pious days after +their own fashion, and God was much on the lips of his servants. +Troubles rarely come singly. Soon after, King Christian met the +enemy unexpectedly and was so badly beaten that for the second time +he had to run for it, though he held out till nearly all his men +had fallen. His horse got mired in a swamp with the pursuers close +behind. The gay and wealthy Sir Christen Barnekow, who had been +last on the field, passed him there, and at once got down and gave +him his horse. It meant giving up his life, and when Sir Christen +could no longer follow the fleeing King he sat down on a rock with +the words, “I give the King my horse, the enemy my life, and God my +soul.” The rock is there yet and the country folk believe that the +red spots in the granite are Christen Barnekow’s blood which all +the years have not availed to wash out. + +They tired of fighting at last and made it up. Sweden paid Denmark +a million daler; for the rest, things stayed as they had been +before. King Christian had shown himself no mean fighter, but the +senseless sacking and burning of town and country that was an ugly +part of those days’ warfare went against his grain, and he tried to +persuade the Swedes to agree to leave that out in future. Gustav +Adolf had not yet grown into the man he afterward became. “As to +the burning,” was his reply, “seeing that it is the usage of war, +and we enemies, why we will each have to do the best we can,” which +meant the worst. Had the two kings, who had much in common, got +together in the years of peace that followed, much misery might +have been saved Denmark, and a black page of history might read +very differently. For those were the days of the Thirty Years’ War, +in which together they might have dictated peace to harassed Europe. + +Now King Christian’s ambition, his piety, for he was a sincerely +religious man, as well as his jealousy of his younger rival and of +the growing power of Sweden—so mixed are human motives—made him +yield to the entreaties of the hard-pressed Protestant princes to +take up alone their cause against the German Emperor. He had tried +for half a dozen years to make peace between them. At last he drew +the sword and went down to force it. After a year of fighting Tilly +and Wallenstein, the Emperor’s great generals, he met the former +in a decisive battle at Lutter-am-Baremberg. King Christian’s army +was beaten and put to rout. He himself fled bareheaded through the +forests of the Hartz Mountains, pursued by the enemy’s horsemen. +It was hardly necessary for the Emperor to make him promise as +the price of peace to keep out of German affairs thenceforth. His +allies had left him to fight it out alone. All their fine speeches +went for nothing when it came to the test, and King Christian rode +back to Denmark, a sadder and wiser man. It was left to Gustav +Adolf, after all, to teach the German generals the lesson they +needed. + +In the years of peace before that unhappy war, Danish trade and +Danish culture had blossomed exceedingly, thanks to the wisdom, +the clever management, and untiring industry of the King. He +built factories, cloth-mills, silk-mills, paper-mills, dammed the +North Sea out from the rich marshlands with great dikes, taught +the farmers profitable ways of tilling their fields; for he was a +wondrous manager for whom nothing was too little and nothing too +big. He kept minute account of his children’s socks and little +shirts, and found ways of providing money for his war-ships and +for countless building schemes he had in hand both in Denmark and +Norway. For many of them he himself drew the plans. Wherever one +goes to this day, his monogram, which heads this story, stares +at him from the splendid buildings he erected. The Bourse in +Copenhagen and the Round Tower, the beautiful palace of Rosenborg, +a sort of miniature of his beloved Frederiksborg which also he +rebuilt on a more magnificent scale—these are among his works +which every traveller in the North knows. He built more cities +and strongholds than those who went before or came after him for +centuries. Christiania and Christiansand in Norway bear his name. +He laid out a whole quarter of Copenhagen for his sailors, and +the quaint little houses still serve that purpose. Regentsen, a +dormitory for poor students at the university, was built by him. +He created seven new chairs of learning and saw to it that all +the professors got better pay. He ferreted out and dismissed in +disgrace all the grafting officials in Norway, and administered +justice with an even hand. At the same time he burned witches +without end, or let it be done for their souls’ sake. That was +the way of his time; and when he needed fireworks for his son’s +wedding (he made them himself, too), he sent around to all the old +cloisters and cathedral churches for the old parchments they had. +Heaven only knows what treasures that can never be replaced went up +in fire and smoke for that one night’s fun. + +King Christian founded a score of big trading companies to +exploit the East, taking care that their ships should have their +bulwarks pierced for at least six guns, so that they might serve +as war-ships in time of need. He sent one expedition after another +to the waters of Greenland in search of the Northwest Passage. +It was on the fourth of these, in 1619, that Jens Munk with two +ships and sixty-four sailors was caught in the ice of Hudson Bay +and compelled to winter there. One after another the crew died of +hunger and scurvy. When Jens Munk himself crept out from what he +had thought his death-bed, he found only two of them all alive. +Together they burrowed in the snow, digging for roots until spring +came when they managed to make their way down to Bergen in the +smallest of the two vessels. Jens Munk had deserved a better end +than he got. He spun his yarns so persistently at court that he +got to be a tiresome bore, and at last one day the King told him +that he had no time to listen to him. Whereat the veteran took +great umbrage and, slapping his sword, let the King know that he +had served him well and was entitled to better treatment. Christian +snatched the weapon in anger and struck him with the scabbard. The +sailor never got over it. “He withered away and died,” says the +tradition. It was the old superstition; but whether that killed him +or not, the King lost a good man in Jens Munk. + +He was not averse to hearing the truth, though, when boldly put. +When Ole Vind, a popular preacher, offended some of the nobles +by his plain speech and they complained to the King, he bade him +to the court and told him to preach the same sermon over. Master +Vind was game and the truths he told went straight home, for he +knew well where the shoe pinched. But King Christian promptly made +him court preacher. “He is the kind we need here,” he said. There +was never a day that the King did not devoutly read his Bible, +and he was determined that everybody should read it the same way. +The result was a kind of Puritanism that filled the churches and +compelled the employment of men to go around with long sticks to +rap the people on the head when they fell asleep. Christian the +Fourth was not the first ruler who has tried to herd men into +heaven by battalions. But his people would have gladly gone in the +fire for him. He was their friend. When on his tramps, as likely +as not he would come home sitting beside some peasant on his +load of truck, and would step off at the palace gate with a “So +long, thanks for good company!” He was everywhere, interested in +everything. In his walking-stick he carried a foot-rule, a level, +and other tools, and would stop at the bench of a workman in the +navy-yard and test his work to see how well he was doing it. “I +can lie down and sleep in any hut in the land,” was his contented +boast. And he would have been safe anywhere. + +Gustav Adolf was a wise and generous foe. While he lived he refused +to listen to proposals for the partition of Denmark after King +Christian’s defeat in Germany. He knew well that she was a barrier +against the ambition of the German princes and that, once she was +out of the way, Sweden’s turn would come next. But when he had +fallen on the battle-field of Lützen, and his generals, following +in his footsteps, had achieved fame and lands and the freedom +of worship for which he gave his life, the Swedish statesmen +lost their heads and dreamed of the erection of a great northern +Protestant state by the conquest of Denmark and Norway, to balance +the power of the German empire. Without warning or declaration of +war a great army was thrown into the Danish peninsula from the +south. Another advanced from Sweden upon the eastern provinces, and +a fleet hired in Holland for Swedish money came through the North +Sea to help them over to the Danish islands. If the two armies +met, Denmark was lost. In Swedish harbors a still bigger fleet was +fitting out for the Baltic. + +King Christian was well up in the sixties, worn with the tireless +activities of a long reign; but once more he proved himself greater +than adversity. When the evil tidings reached him, in the midst +of profound peace, the enemy was already within the gates. The +country lay prostrate. The name of Torstenson, the Swedish general, +spread terror wherever it was heard. In the German campaigns he had +been known as the “Swedish Lightning.” Beset on every side, never +had Denmark’s need been greater. The one man who did not lose his +head was her king. By his personal example he put heart into the +people and shamed the cowardly nobles. He borrowed money wherever +he could, sent his own silver to the mint, crowded the work in the +navy-yard by night and by day, gathered an army, and hurried with +it to the Sounds where the enemy might cross. When the first ships +were ready he sailed around the Skaw to meet the Dutch hirelings. +“I am old and stiff,” he said, “and no good any more to fight on +land. But I can manage the ships.” + +And he did. He met the Dutchmen in the North Sea, in under the +Danish coast, and whipped them, almost single-handed, for his own +ship _Trefoldigheden_ was for a long while the only one that wind +and tide would let come up with them. That done, he left one of his +captains to watch lest they come out from among the islands where +their ships of shallower draught had sought refuge, and sailed for +Copenhagen. Everything that could carry sail was ready for him +by that time; also the news that the Swedish fleet of forty-six +fighting ships under Klas Fleming had sailed for the coast of +Holstein to take on board Torstenson’s army. + +King Christian lost no time. He hoisted his flag on +_Trefoldigheden_ and made after them with thirty-nine ships, vowing +that he would win this fight or die. At Kolberger Heide, the water +outside the Fjord of Kiel, he caught up with them and attacked at +once. The battle that then ensued is the one of which the poet +sings and with which the name of Christian IV is forever linked. + +At the outset the Danish fleet was in great peril. The Swedes +fought gallantly as was their wont, and they were three or four +against one, for most of the King’s ships came up slowly, some of +them purposely, so it seems. The King said after the battle of +certain of his captains, “They used me as a screen between them +and the enemy.” His own ship and that of his chief admiral’s bore +the brunt of the battle for a long time. _Trefoldigheden_ fired +315 shots during the engagement, and at one time had four hostile, +ships clustering about her. King Christian was on the quarter-deck +when a cannon-ball shivered the bulwark and one of his guns, +throwing a shower of splintered iron and wood over him and those +near him, killing and wounding twelve of the crew. The King himself +fell, stunned and wounded in twenty-three places. His right eye was +knocked out, two of his teeth, and his left ear hung in shreds. + +The cry was raised that the King was dead and panic spread on +board. The story has it that a sailor was sent aloft to strike the +flag but purposely entangled it in the rigging so that it could not +fall; he could not bear to see the King’s ship strike its colors. +In the midst of the tumult the aged monarch rose to his feet, torn +and covered with blood. “I live yet,” he cried, “and God has left +me strength to fight on for my country. Let every man do his duty.” +Leaning on his sword, he led the fight until darkness fell and the +battle was won. Denmark was saved. The danger of an invasion was +averted. In the palace of Rosenborg the priceless treasure they +show to visitors is the linen cloth, all blood-stained, that bound +the King’s face as he fought and won his last and biggest fight +that day. + +[Illustration: CHRISTIAN IV AT THE BATTLE OF KOLBERGER HEIDE] + +Half blind, his body black and blue and sore from many bruises, +King Christian yet refused to sail for Copenhagen to have his +wounds attended. Three weeks he lay watching the narrow inlet +behind which the beaten enemy was hiding, to destroy his ships +when he came out. Then he gave over the command to another and +hastened to the province of Skaane on the Swedish mainland, from +which he expelled a hostile army. But when his back was turned, the +men he had set to watch fell asleep and let the Swedish admiral +steal out into the open. There he found and joined the Dutch ships +that had slipped around the Skaw during the rumpus. Together they +overwhelmed the Danish fleet, being now three to one, and crushed +it. The slothful admiral paid for it with his life, but the harm +was done. It was the last and heaviest blow. The old King sheathed +his sword and set his name to a peace that took from Denmark some +of her ancient provinces, with the bitter sigh: “God knows I had +no share in this,” and he had not. Even at the last he appealed +to the country to try the fortunes of war with him once more. The +people were willing, but the nobles wanted peace, “however God +send it,” and he had to yield. The treaty was made at Brömsebro, +where a bridge crossed the river dividing the two kingdoms. In +the middle of the river was an island and the negotiations were +carried on in a tent erected there, the French and the Dutch being +the arbitrators. The envoys of Sweden and Denmark sat on opposite +sides of the boundary post where the line cut through, each on the +soil of his own country. So bitterly did they hate one another that +they did not speak but wrote their messages, though they could have +shaken hands where they sat. Even that was too close quarters, and +they ended up by negotiating at second hand through the foreign +ambassadors, all at the same table, but each looking straight past +the other as if he were not there. + +Another touch of comedy relieves the gloom of that heavy day. It +was the conquest of the Särnadal, a mountain valley in Norway +just over the Swedish frontier, by Pastor Buschovius who, Bible +in hand, at the head of two hundred ski-men invaded and captured +it one winter’s day without a blow. He came over the snow-fields +into the valley that had not seen a preacher in many a long day, +had the church bells rung to summon the people, preached to them, +married and christened them, and gave them communion. The simple +mountaineers had hardly heard of the war and had nothing against +their neighbors over the mountain. They joined Sweden then and +there at the request of the preacher, and they stayed Swedes too, +for in the final muster they were forgotten with their valley. Very +likely the treaty-makers did not know that it existed. + +King Christian died four years later, in 1648, past the three score +and ten allotted to man. He was not a great leader like Gustav +Adolf, and he was very human in some of his failings. But he was a +strong man, a just king, and a father of his people who still cling +to his memory with more than filial affection. + + + + +GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING + + +The city of Prague, the capital of Bohemia, went wild with +excitement one spring morning in the year 1618. The Protestant +Estates of Germany had met there to protest against the aggressions +of the Catholic League and the bad faith of the Emperor, who +had guaranteed freedom of worship in the land and had now sent +two envoys to defy the meeting and declare it illegal. In the +old castle they delivered their message and bade the convention +disperse; and the delegates, when they had heard, seized them and +their clerk and threw them out of the window “in good old Bohemian +fashion.” They fell seventy feet and escaped almost without a +scratch, which fact was accepted by the Catholics of that strenuous +day as proof of their miraculous preservation; by the Protestants +as evidence that the devil ever takes care of his own. + +It was the tiny spark that set Europe on fire. Out of it grew +the Thirty Years’ War, the most terrible that ever scourged the +civilized world. When Catholic League and Evangelical Union first +mustered their armies, Bohemia had a prosperous population of four +million souls; when the war was over there were less than eight +hundred thousand alive in that unhappy land, and the wolves that +roamed its forests were scarcely more ferocious than the human +starvelings who skulked among the smoking ruins of burned towns and +hamlets. Other states fared little better. Two centuries did not +wipe out the blight of those awful years when rapine and murder, +inspired by bigotry and hate, ran riot in the name of religion. + +In the gloom and horror of it all a noble figure stands forth +alone. It were almost worth the sufferings of a Thirty Years’ War +for the world to have gained a Gustav Adolf. The “snow-king” the +Emperor’s generals named him when he first appeared on German soil +at the head of his army of Northmen, and they prophesied that he +would speedily melt, once the southern sun shone upon his host. +They little knew the man. He went from victory to victory, less +because he was the greatest general of his day than because he, and +all his army with him, believed himself charged by the Almighty +with the defence of his country and of his faith. The Emperor had +attacked both, the first by attempting to extend his dominion to +the Baltic; but Pommerania and the Baltic provinces were regarded +by the Swedish ruler as the outworks of his kingdom; and Sweden was +Protestant. Hence he drew the sword. “Our brethren in the faith are +sighing for deliverance from spiritual and bodily thraldom,” he +said to his people. “Please God, they shall not sigh long.” That +was his warrant. Axel Oxenstjerna, his friend and right hand who +lived to finish his work, said of him, “He felt himself impelled by +a mighty spirit which he was unable to resist.” As warrior, king, +and man, he was head and shoulders above his time. Gustav Adolf +saved religious liberty to the world. He paid the price with his +life, but he would have asked no better fate. A soldier of God, +he met a soldier’s death on the field of battle, in the hour of +victory. + +A man of destiny he was to his people as to himself. Long years +before his birth, upon the appearance of the comet of 1577, Tycho +Brahe, the astronomer, who was deep in the occultism of his day, +had predicted that a prince would appear in Finland who would do +great things in Germany and deliver the Protestant peoples from the +oppression of the popes, and the prophecy was applied to Gustav +Adolf by his subjects all through his life. He was born on December +9, 1594, old style, as they still reckon time in Russia. Very early +he showed the kind of stuff he was made of. When he was yet almost +a baby he was told that there were snakes in the park, and showed +fight at once: “Give me a stick and I will kill them.” With the +years he grew into a handsome youth who read his books, knew his +Seneca by heart, was fond of the poets and the great orators, and +mastered eight languages, living and dead. At seventeen he buckled +on the sword and put the books away, but kept Xenophon as his +friend; for he was a military historian after his own heart. He was +then Duke of Finland. + +The King, his father, was a stern but observant man who, seeing +his bent, threw him with soldiers to his heart’s content, glad to +have it so, for it was a warlike age. From his tenth year he let +him sit in council with him and early delegated to him the duty of +answering ambassadors from foreign countries. The lad was the only +one who dared oppose the king when he was in a temper, and often he +made peace and healed wounds struck in anger. The people worshipped +the fair young prince, and his father, when he felt the palsy of +old age and bodily infirmities creeping upon him and thought of +his unfinished tasks, would murmur as his eyes rested upon the +bonny youth: “_Ille faciet_—He will do it.” There is still in +existence a document in which he laid down to him his course as a +sovereign. “First of all,” he writes, “you shall fear God and honor +your father and mother. Give your brothers and sisters brotherly +affection; love your father’s faithful servants and requite them +after their due. Be gracious to your subjects; punish evil and love +the good. Believe in men, but find out first what is in them. Hold +by the law without respect of person.” + +It was good advice to a prince, and the king took it to heart. On +the docket of the Supreme Court at Stockholm is a letter written +by Gustav Adolf to the judges and ordered by him to be entered +there, which tells them plainly that if any of them is found +perverting justice to suit him, the King, or any one else, he will +have him flayed alive and his hide nailed to the judgment-seat, +his ears to the pillory! Not a nice way of talking to dignified +judges, perhaps, but then the prescription was intended to suit the +practice, if there was need. + +The young king earned his spurs in a war with Denmark that came +near being his last as it was his first campaign. He and his +horsemen were surprised by the Danes on a winter’s night as they +were warming themselves by a fire built of the pews in the Wittsjö +church, and they cut their way through only after a desperate fight +on the frozen lake. The ice broke under the king’s horse and he was +going down when two of his men caught him in the nick of time. He +got away with the loss of his sword, his pistols, and his gloves. +“I will remember you with a crust that shall do for your bairns +too,” he promised one of his rescuers, a stout peasant lad, and he +kept his word. Thomas Larssön’s descendants a generation ago still +tilled the farm the King gave him. When the trouble with Denmark +was over for the time being, he settled old scores with Russia and +Poland in a way that left Sweden mistress of the Baltic. In the +Polish war he was wounded twice and was repeatedly in peril of his +life. Once he was shot in the neck, and, as the bullet could not +be removed, it ever after troubled him to wear armor. His officers +pleaded with him to spare himself, but his reply was that Cæsar and +Alexander did not skulk behind the lines; a general must lead if he +expected his men to follow. + +In this campaign he met the League’s troops, sent to chase him back +to his own so that Wallenstein, the leader of the imperial armies, +might be “General of the Baltic Sea,” unmolested. “Go to Poland,” +he commanded one of his lieutenants, “and drive the snow-king out; +or else tell him that I shall come and do it myself.” The proud +soldier never knew how near he came to entertaining the snow-king +as his unwilling guest then. In a fight between his rear-guard and +the imperial army Gustav Adolf was disarmed and taken prisoner by +two troopers. There was another prisoner who had kept his pistol. +He handed it to the King behind his back and with it he shot one +of his captors and brained the other. For all that they nearly got +him. He saved himself only by wriggling out of his belt and leaving +it in the hands of the enemy. Eight years he campaigned in Poland +and Prussia, learning the arts of war. Then he was ready for his +life-work. He made a truce with Poland that freed his hands for a +season, and went home to Sweden. + +That spring (1629) he laid before the Swedish Estates his plan +of freeing the Protestants. To defend Sweden, he declared, was +to defend her faith, and the Estates voted supplies for the +war. To gauge fully the splendid courage of the nation it must +be remembered that the whole kingdom, including Finland, had +a population of only a million and a half at the time and was +preparing to attack the mighty Roman empire. In the first year of +the war the Swedish budget was thirteen millions of dollars, of +which nine and a half went for armaments. The whole army which +Gustav Adolf led into Germany numbered only 14,000 soldiers, but +it was made up of Swedish veterans led by men whose names were to +become famous for all time, and welded together by an unshakable +belief in their commander, a rigid discipline and a religious +enthusiasm that swayed master and men with a common impulse. Such a +combination has in all days proven irresistible. + +The King’s farewell to his people—he was never to see Sweden +again—moved a nation to tears. He spoke to the nobles, the clergy +and to the people, admonishing them to stand together in the hard +years that were coming and gave them all into the keeping of God. +They stood on the beach and watched his ships sail into the sunset +until they were swallowed up in glory. Then they went back home to +take up the burden that was their share. On the Rügen shore the +King knelt with his men and thanked God for having brought them +safe across the sea, then seized a spade, and himself turned the +first sod in the making of a camp. “Who prays well, fights well,” +he said. + +He was not exactly hospitably received. The old Duke of Pommerania +would have none of him, begged him to go away, and only when the +King pointed to his guns and hinted that he had keys well able to +open the gates of Stettin, his capital, did he give in and promise +help. The other German princes, with one or two exceptions, were +as cravenly short-sighted. They held meetings and denounced the +Emperor and his lawless doings, but Gustav they would not help. +The princes of Brandenburg and of Saxony, the two Protestant +Electors of the empire, were rather disposed to hinder him, if they +might, though Brandenburg was his brother-in-law. Only when the +King threatened to burn the city of Berlin over his head did he +listen. While he was yet laboring with them, recruiting his army +and keeping it in practice by driving the enemy out of Pommerania, +news reached him of the fall of Magdeburg, the strongest city in +northern Germany, that had of its own free will joined his cause. + +The sacking of Magdeburg is one of the black deeds of history. In +a night the populous city was reduced to a heap of smoking ruins +under which twenty thousand men, women, and children lay buried. +Not since the fall of Jerusalem, said Pappenheim, Tilly’s famous +cavalry leader to whom looting and burning were things of every +day, had so awful a visitation befallen a town. Only the great +cathedral and a few houses near it were left standing. The history +of warfare of the Christian peoples of that day reads like a horrid +nightmare. The fighting armies left a trail of black desolation +where they passed. “They are not made up of birds that feed on +air,” sneered Tilly. Peaceful husbandmen were murdered, the young +women dragged away to worse than slavery, and helpless children +spitted upon the lances of the wild landsknechts and tossed with a +laugh into the blazing ruins of their homes. But no such foul blot +cleaves to the memory of Gustav Adolf. While he lived his men were +soldiers, not demons. In his tent the work of Hugo Grotius on the +rights of the nations in war and peace lay beside the Bible and +he knew them both by heart. When he was gone, the fame of some of +his greatest generals was smirched by as vile orgies as Tilly’s +worst days had witnessed. It is told of John Banér, one of the most +brilliant of them, that he demanded ransom of the city of Prix, +past which his way led. The city fathers permitted themselves an +untimely jest: “Prix giebt nichts—Prix gives nothing,” they said. +Banér was as brief: “Prix wird zu nichts—Prix comes to nothing,” +and his army wiped it out. + +Grief and anger almost choked the King when he heard of Magdeburg’s +fate. “I will avenge that on the Old Corporal (Tilly’s nickname),” +he cried, “if it costs my life.” Without further ado he forced the +two Electors to terms and joined the Saxon army to his own. On +September 7, 1631, fifteen months after he had landed in Germany, +he met Tilly face to face at Breitenfeld, a village just north +of Leipzig. The Emperor’s host in its brave show of silver and +plumes and gold, the plunder of many campaigns under its invincible +leader, looked with contempt upon the travel-worn Swedes in their +poor, soiled garb. The stolid Finns sat their mean but wiry little +horses very unlike Pappenheim’s dreaded Walloons, descendants of +the warlike Belgæ of Gaul who defied the Germans of old in the +forest of the Ardennes and joined Cæsar in his victorious march. +But Tilly himself was not deceived. He knew how far this enemy had +come and with what hardships cheerfully borne; how they had routed +the Russians, written laws for the Poles in their own land, and +overthrown armies and forts that barred their way. He would wait +for reënforcements; but his generals egged him on, said age had +made him timid and slow, and carried the day. + +The King slept in an empty cart the night before the battle and +dreamed that he wrestled with Tilly and threw him, but that he tore +his breast with his teeth. When all was ready in the morning he +rode along the front and told his fusiliers not to shoot till they +saw the white in the enemy’s eyes, the horsemen not to dull their +swords by hacking the helmets of the Walloons: “Cut at their horses +and they will go down with them.” In the pause before the onset he +prayed with head uncovered and lowered sword, and his voice carried +to the farthest lines: + +“Thou, God, in whose hands are victory and defeat, look graciously +upon thy servants. From distant lands and peaceful homes have we +come to battle for freedom, truth and thy gospel. Give us victory +for thy holy name’s sake, Amen!” + +Tilly had expected the King to attack, but the fiery Pappenheim +upset his plans. The smoke of the guns drifted in the faces of the +Swedes and the King swung his army to the south to get the wind +right. In making the turn they had to cross a brook and this moment +Pappenheim chose for his charge. Like a thunderbolt his Walloons +fell upon them. The Swedish fire mowed them down like ripened grain +and checked their impetuous rush. They tried to turn the King’s +right and so outflank him; but the army turned with them and stood +like a rock. The extreme mobility of his forces was Gustav Adolf’s +great advantage in his campaigns. He revised the book of military +tactics up to date. The imperial troops were massed in solid +columns, after the old Spanish fashion, the impact of which was +hard to resist when they struck. The King’s, on the contrary, moved +in smaller bodies, quickly thrown upon the point of danger, and +his artillery was so distributed among them as to make every shot +tell on the compact body of the enemy. Whichever way Pappenheim +turned he found a firm front, bristling with guns, opposing him. +Seven times he threw himself upon the living wall; each time his +horsemen were flung back, their lines thinned and broken. The field +was strewn with their dead. Tilly, anxiously watching, threw up his +hands in despair. “This man will lose me honor and fame, and the +Emperor his lands,” he cried. The charge ended in wild flight, and +Tilly saw that he must himself attack, to turn the tide. + +On the double-quick his columns of spearmen charged down the +heights, swept the Saxons from the field, and fell upon the Swedish +left. The shock was tremendous. General Gustav Horn gave back to +let his second line come up, and held the ground stubbornly against +fearful odds. Word was brought the King of his danger. With the +right wing that had crushed Pappenheim he hurried to the rescue. +In the heat of the fight the armies had changed position, and +the Swedes found themselves climbing the hill upon which Tilly’s +artillery was posted. Seeing this, the King made one of the rapid +movements that more than once won him the day. Raising the cry, +“Remember Magdeburg!” he carried the position with his Finns by a +sudden overwhelming assault, and turned the guns upon the dense +masses of the enemy fighting below. + +In vain they stormed the heights. Both wings and the centre closed +in upon them, and the day was lost. Tilly fled, wounded, and +narrowly escaped capture. A captain in the Swedish army, who was +called Long Fritz because of his great height, was at his heels +hammering him on the head with the butt of his pistol. A staff +officer shot him down in passing, and freed his chief. Twilight +fell upon a battle-field where seven thousand men lay dead, +two-thirds of them the flower of the Emperor’s army. Blood-stained +and smoke-begrimed, Gustav Adolf and his men knelt on the field and +thanked God for the victory. + +Had the King’s friend and adviser, Axel Oxenstjerna, been with him +he might have marched upon Vienna then, leaving the Protestant +Estates to settle their own affairs, and very likely have ended the +war. Gustav Adolf thought of Tilly who would return with another +army. Oxenstjerna saw farther, weighing things upon the scales of +the diplomatist. + +“How think you we would fare,” asked the King once, when the +chancellor saw obstacles in their way which he would brush aside, +“if my fire did not thaw the chill in you?” + +“But for my chill cooling your Majesty’s fire,” was his friend’s +retort, “you would have long since been burned up.” The King +laughed and owned that he was right. + +Instead of bearding the Emperor in his capital he turned toward the +Rhine where millions of Protestants were praying for his coming and +where his army might find rest and abundance. The cathedral city +of Wuerzburg he took by storm. The bishop who ruled it fled at his +approach, but the full treasury of the Jesuits fell into his hands. +The Madonna of beaten gold and the twelve solid silver apostles, +famous throughout Europe, were sent to the mint and coined into +money to pay his army. In the cellar they found chests filled with +ducats. The bottom fell out of one as they carried it up and the +gold rolled out on the pavement. The soldiers swarmed to pick it +up, but a good many coins stuck to their pockets. The King saw it +and laughed: “Since you have them, boys, keep them.” The dead were +still lying in the castle yard after the siege, a number of monks +among them. The color of some of them seemed high for corpses. +“Arise from the dead,” he said waggishly, “no one will hurt you,” +and the frightened monks got upon their feet and scampered away. + +Frankfort opened its gates to his victorious host and Nürnberg +received him as a heaven-sent liberator. But Tilly was in the field +with a fresh army, burning to avenge Breitenfeld. He had surprised +General Horn at Bamberg and beaten him. At the approach of the King +he camped where the river Lech joins the Danube, awaiting attack. +There was but one place to cross to get at him, and right there he +stood. The king seized Donauworth and Ulm, and under cover of the +fire of seventy guns threw a bridge across the Lech. Three hundred +Finns carrying picks and spades ran across the shaky planks upon +which the fire of Tilly’s whole artillery park was concentrated. +Once across, they burrowed in the ground like moles and, with +bullets raining upon them, threw up earthworks for shelter. Squad +after squad of volunteers followed. Duke Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar +swam his horsemen across the river farther up-stream and took the +Bavarian troops in the flank, beating them back far enough to let +him join the Finns at the landing. The King himself was directing +the artillery on the other shore, aiming the guns with his own +hand. The Walloons, Tilly’s last hope, charged, but broke under the +withering fire. In desperation the old field-marshal seized the +standard and himself led the forlorn hope. Half-way to the bridge +he fell, one leg shattered by a cannon-ball, and panic seized his +men. The imperialists fled in the night, carrying their wounded +leader. He died on the march soon after. Men said of him that he +had served his master well. + +The snow-king had not melted in the south. He was master of the +Roman empire from the Baltic to the Alps. The way to Austria and +Italy lay open before him. Protestant princes crowded to do him +homage, offering him the imperial crown. But Gustav Adolf did +not lose his head. Toward the humbled Catholics he showed only +forbearance and toleration. In Munich he visited the college of +the Jesuits, and spoke long with the rector in the Latin tongue, +assuring him of their safety as long as they kept from politics and +plotting. The armory in that city was known to be the best stocked +in all Europe and the King’s surprise was great when he found +gun-carriages in plenty, but not a single cannon. Looking about +him, he saw evidence that the floor had been hastily relaid and +remembered the “dead” monks at Würzburg. He had it taken up and a +dark vault appeared. The King looked into it. + +“Arise!” he called out, “and come to judgment,” and amid shouts of +laughter willing hands brought out a hundred and forty good guns, +welcome reënforcements. + +The ignorant Bavarian peasants had been told that the King was +the very anti-Christ, come to harass the world for its sins, and +carried on a cruel guerilla warfare upon his army. They waylaid the +Swedes by night on their foraging trips and maimed and murdered +those they caught with fiendish tortures. The bitterest anger +filled Gustav Adolf’s soul when upon his entry into Landshut the +burgomaster knelt at his stirrup asking mercy for his city. + +“Pray not to me,” he said harshly, “but to God for yourself and for +your people, for in truth you have need.” + +For once thoughts of vengeance seemed to fill his soul. “No, no!” +he thundered when the frightened burgomaster pleaded that his +townsmen should not be held accountable for the cruelty of the +country folk, “you are beasts, not men, and deserve to be wiped +from the earth with fire and sword.” From out the multitude there +came a warning voice: “Will the King now abandon the path of mercy +for the way of vengeance and visit his wrath upon these innocent +people?” No one saw the speaker. The day was oppressively hot +and the King came near fainting in the saddle. As he rode out of +the city toward the camp, a bolt of lightning struck the ground +beside him and a mighty crash of thunder rolled overhead. Pale +and thoughtful, he rode on. But Landshut was spared. That evening +General Horn brought the anxious citizens the King’s promise of +pardon. + +A few weeks later tidings reached Gustav Adolf that Wallenstein +and the Elector of Bavaria were marching to effect a junction +at Nürnberg. If they took the city, his line of communication +was cut and his army threatened. Wallenstein, who was a traitor, +had been in disgrace; but he was a great general and in his dire +need Emperor Ferdinand had no one else to turn to. So he took him +back on his own terms, and in the spring he had an army of forty +thousand veterans in the field. This was the host he was leading +against Nürnberg. But the King got there first and intrenched +himself so strongly that there was no ousting him. Wallenstein +followed suit and for eleven weeks the enemies eyed one another +from their “lagers,” neither willing to risk an attack. In the +end Gustav Adolf tried, but even his Finns could not take the +impregnable heights the enemy held. At last he went away with +colors flying and bands playing, right under the enemy’s walls, in +the hope of tempting him out. But he never stirred. + +When Wallenstein was sure he had gone, he burned his camp and +turned toward Saxony to punish the Elector for joining the Swedes. +A wail of anguish went up from that unhappy land and the King heard +it clear across the country. By forced marches he hurried to the +rescue of his ally, picking up Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar on the way. +At Naumburg the people crowded about him and sought to kiss or even +to touch his garments. The King looked sadly at them. “They put +their trust in me, poor weak mortal, as if I were the Almighty. +It may be that He will punish their folly soon upon the object +of their senseless idolatry.” He had come to stay, but when he +learned that Wallenstein had sent Pappenheim away to the west, thus +weakening his army, and was going into winter quarters at Lützen, +near Leipzig, a half-day’s march from the memorable Breitenfeld, he +broke camp at once and hastened to attack him. Starting early, his +army reached Lützen at nightfall on November 15, 1632. + +Wallenstein believed the campaign was over for that year and the +Swedes in winter quarters, and was taken completely by surprise. +Had the King given battle that night, he would have wiped the enemy +out. Two things, in themselves of little account, delayed him: a +small brook that crossed his path, and the freshly plowed fields. +His men were tired after the long march and he decided to let them +rest. It was Wallenstein’s chance. Overnight he posted his army +north of the highway that leads from Lützen to Leipzig, dug deep +the ditches that enclosed it, and made breastworks of the dirt. +Sunrise found sheltered behind them twenty-seven thousand seasoned +veterans to whom Gustav Adolf could oppose but twenty thousand; but +he had more guns and they were better served. + +As the day broke the Swedish army, drawn up in battle array, +intoned Luther’s hymn, “A mighty fortress is our God,” and cheered +the King. He wore a leathern doublet and a gray mantle. To the +pleadings of his officers that he put on armor he replied only, +“God is my armor.” “To-day,” he cried as he rode along the lines, +“will end all our hardships.” He himself took command of the right +wing, the gallant Duke Bernhard of the left. As at Breitenfeld, the +rallying cry was, “God with us!” + +The King hoped to crush his enemy utterly, and the whole line +attacked at once with great fury. From the start victory leaned +toward the Swedish army. Then suddenly in the wild tumult of +battle a heavy fog settled upon the field. What followed was all +confusion. No one knows the rights of it to this day. The King led +his famous yellow and blue regiments against the enemy’s left. +“The black fellows there,” he shouted, pointing to the Emperor’s +cuirassiers in their black armor, “attack them!” Just then an +adjutant reported that his infantry was hard-pressed. “Follow me,” +he commanded, and, clapping spurs to his horse, set off at full +speed for the threatened quarter. In the fog he lost his way and +ran into the cuirassiers. His two attendants were shot down and a +bullet crushed the King’s right arm. He tried to hide the fact that +he was wounded, but pain and loss of blood made him faint and he +asked the Duke of Lauenburg who rode with him to help him out of +the crush. At that moment a fresh troop of horsemen bore down upon +them and their leader, Moritz von Falkenberg, shot the King through +the body with the exultant cry, “You I have long sought!” The words +had hardly left his lips when he fell with a bullet through his +head. + +The King swayed in the saddle and lost the reins. “Save yourself,” +he whispered to the Duke, “I am done for.” The Duke put his arm +around him to support him, but the cuirassiers surged against them +and tore them apart. The King’s horse was shot in the neck and +threw its rider. Awhile he hung by the stirrup and was dragged +over the trampled field. Then the horse shook itself free and ran +through the lines, spreading the tidings of the King’s fall afar. + +A German page, Leubelfing, a lad of eighteen, was alone with the +King. He sprang from his horse and tried to help him into the +saddle but had not the strength to do it. Gustav Adolf was stout +and very heavy. While he was trying to lift him some Croats rode up +and demanded the name of the wounded man. The page held his tongue, +and they ran him through. Gustav Adolf, to save him, said that +he was the King.[12] At that they shot him through the head, and +showered blows upon him. When the body was found in the night it +was naked. They had robbed and stripped him. + +The King was dead. Through the Swedish ranks Duke Bernhard shouted +the tidings. “Who now cares to live? Forward, to avenge his death!” +With the blind fury of the Berserkers of old the Swedes cleared +the ditches, stormed the breastworks, and drove the foe in a panic +before them. The Duke’s arm was broken by a bullet. He hardly knew +it. With his regiment he rode down the crew of one of the enemy’s +batteries and swept on. In the midst of it all a cry resounded over +the plain that made the runaways halt and turn back. + +“Pappenheim! Pappenheim is here!” + +He had come with his Walloons in answer to the general’s summons. +“Where is the King?” he asked, and they pointed to the Finnish +brigade. With a mighty crash the two hosts that had met so often +before came together. Wallenstein mustered his scattered forces and +the King’s army was attacked from three sides at once. The yellow +brigade fell where it stood almost to the last man. The blue fared +little better. Slowly the Swedish infantry gave back. The battle +seemed lost. + +But the tide turned once more. In the hottest fight Pappenheim +fell, pierced by three bullets. The “man of a hundred scars” +died, exulting that the King whom he hated had gone before. With +his death the Emperor’s men lost heart. The Swedes charged again +and again with unabated fury. Night closed in with Wallenstein’s +centre still unbroken; but he had lost all his guns. Under cover +of the darkness he made his escape. The King’s army camped upon +the battle-field. The carnage had been fearful; nine thousand were +slain. It was Wallenstein’s last fight. With the remnants of his +army he retreated to Bohemia, sick and sore, and spent his last +days there plotting against his master. He died by an assassin’s +hand. + +The cathedrals of Vienna, Brussels, and Madrid rang with joyful +Te Deums at the news of the King’s death. The Spanish capital +celebrated the “triumph” with twelve days of bull-fighting. Emperor +Ferdinand was better than his day; he wept at the sight of the +King’s blood-stained jacket. The Protestant world trembled; its +hope and strength were gone. But the Swedish people, wiping away +their tears, resolved stoutly to carry on Gustav Adolf’s work. The +men he had trained led his armies to victory on yet many a stricken +field. Peace came at length to Europe; the last religious war had +been fought and won. Freedom of worship, liberty of conscience, +were bought at the cost of the kingliest head that ever wore a +crown. The great ruler’s life-work was done. + +Gustav Adolf was in his thirty-eighth year when he fell. Of stature +he was tall and stout, a fair-haired, blue-eyed giant, stern in +war, gentle in the friendships of peace. He was a born ruler of +men. Though he was away fighting in foreign lands all the years of +his reign, he kept a firm grasp on the home affairs of his kingdom. +One traces his hand everywhere, ordering, shaping, finding ways, or +making them where there was none. The valuable mines of Sweden were +ill managed. The metal was exported in coarse pigs to Germany for +very little, worked up there, and resold to Sweden at the highest +price. He created a Board of Mines, established smelteries, and the +day came when, instead of going abroad for its munitions of war, +Sweden had for its customers half Europe. Like Christian of Denmark +with whom he disagreed, he encouraged industries and greatly +furthered trade and commerce. He built highways and canals, and he +did not forget the cause of instruction. Upon the university at +Upsala he bestowed his entire personal patrimony of three hundred +and thirteen farms as a free gift. His people honor him with cause +as the real founder of the Swedish system of education. + +The master he was always. Sweden had, on one hand, a powerful, +able nobility; on the other, a strong, independent peasantry,—a +combination full of pitfalls for a weak ruler, but with equal +promise of great things under the master hand. His father had cowed +the stubborn nobles with the headsman’s axe. Gustav Adolf drew +them to him and imbued them with his own spirit. He found them a +contentious party within the state; he left them its strongest +props in the conduct of public affairs. Nor was it always with +persuasion he worked. His reward for the unjust judge has been +quoted. When the council failed to send him supplies in Germany, +pleading failure of crops as their excuse, he wrote back: “You +speak of the high prices of corn. Probably they are high because +those who have it want to profit by the need of others.” And he set +a new chief over the finances. On the other hand, he gave shape +to the relations between king and people. The Riksdag held its +sessions, but the laws that ruled it were so vague that it was no +unusual thing for men who were not members at all to attend and +join in the debates. Gustav Adolf put an abrupt end to “a state +of things that exposed Sweden to the contempt of the nations.” +As he ordered it, the initiative remained with the crown; it was +the right of the Riksdag to complain and discuss; of the King to +“choose the best” after hearing all sides. + +As a young prince, Gustav Adolf fell deeply in love with Ebba +Brahe, the beautiful daughter of one of Sweden’s most powerful +noblemen. The two had been play-mates and became lovers. But the +old queen frowned upon the match. He was the coming king, she was +a subject, and the queen managed, with the help of Oxenstjerna, +who was Gustav’s best friend all through his life, to make him +give up his love. “Then I will never marry,” he cried in a burst +of tempestuous grief. But when the queen had got Ebba Brahe safely +married to one of his father’s famous generals, he wedded the +lovely sister of the Elector of Brandenburg. She adored her royal +husband, but never took kindly to Sweden, and the people did not +like her. They clung to the great king’s early love, and to this +day they linger before the picture of the beautiful Ebba in the +Stockholm castle when they come from his grave in the Riddarholm +church, while they pass the queen’s by with hardly a glance. It is +recorded that Ebba made her husband a good and dutiful wife. If her +thoughts strayed at times to the old days and what might have been, +it is not strange. In one of those moods she wrote on a window-pane +in the castle: + + I am happy in my lot, + And thanks I give to God. + +The queen-mother saw it and wrote under it her own version: + + You wouldn’t, but you must. + ’Tis the lot of the dust. + + +Footnotes: + +[12] This is the story as the page told it. He lived two days. + + + + +KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN + + +Of all the foolish wars that were ever waged, it would seem that +the one declared by Denmark against Sweden in 1657 had the least +excuse. A century before, the two countries had fought through +eight bitter years over the momentous question whether Denmark +should carry in her shield the three lions that stood for the three +Scandinavian kingdoms, the Swedish one having set up for itself +in the dissolution of the union between them, and at the end of +the fight they were where they had started: each of them kept the +whole brood. But this war was without even that excuse. Denmark +was helplessly impoverished. Her trade was ruined; the nobles were +sucking the marrow of the country. Of the freehold farms that had +been its strength scarce five thousand were left in the land. It +could hardly pay its way in days of peace. Its strongholds lay in +ruins; it had neither arms, ammunition, nor officers. On its roster +of thirty thousand men for the national defence were carried the +dead and the yet unborn, while the Swedish army of tried veterans +had gone from victory to victory under a warlike king. To cap the +climax, Copenhagen had been harassed by pestilence that had killed +one-fifth of its fifty thousand people. + +So ill matched were they when a stubborn king forced a war that +could end only in disaster. When one of his councillors advised +against the folly, he caned him and sent him into exile. Yet out of +the fiery trial this king came a hero; his queen, whose pride and +wasteful vanity[13] had done its full share in bringing the country +to the verge of ruin, became the idol of the nation. In the hour +of its peril she grew to the stature of a great woman who shared +danger and hardship with her people and by her example put hope and +courage into their hearts. + +Karl Gustav, the Swedish king, was campaigning in Poland, but as +soon as he could turn around he marched his army against Denmark, +scattered the forces that opposed him, and before news of his +advance had reached Copenhagen knocked at the gate of Denmark +demanding “speech of brother Frederik in good Swedish.” A winter +of great severity had bridged the Baltic and the sounds of the +island kingdom. In two weeks he led his army, horse, foot, and +guns, over the frozen seas where hardly a wagon had dared cross +before. Great rifts yawned in their way, and whole companies were +swallowed up; his own sleigh sank in the deep, but nothing stopped +him. Danish emissaries came pleading for peace. He met them on the +way to the capital, surrounded by his Finnish horsemen, and gave +scant ear to their speeches while he drove on. Before the city he +halted and dictated a peace so humiliating that one of the Danish +commissioners exclaimed when he came to sign, “I wish I could not +write.” Perhaps the same wish troubled the conqueror’s ambitious +dreams. The peace was broken as swiftly as made. In five months he +was back before Frederik’s capital with his whole army, while a +Swedish fleet anchored in the roadstead outside. “What difference +does it make to you,” was the contemptuous taunt flung at the +anxious envoys who sought his camp, “whether the name of your king +is Karl or Frederik so long as you are safe?” He had come to make +an end of Denmark. + +Copenhagen was almost without defences. The old earth walls mounted +only six guns, with breastworks scarce knee-high. In places King +Karl could have driven his sleigh into the heart of the city at the +head of his army. But for the second time he hesitated when a swift +blow would have won all—and lost. Overnight the Danish nation awoke +to a fight for its life. King and people, till then strangers, in +that hour became one. Frederik the Third met the craven counsel +that he fly to Norway with the proud answer, “I will die in my +nest, if need be, and my wife with me.” With a shout the burghers +swore to fight to the last man. The walls of the city rose as if +by magic. Nobles and mechanics, clergy and laborers, students, +professors and sailors worked side by side; high-born women wheeled +barrows. Every tree was cut down and made into palisades. The crops +ripening in the fields were gathered in haste and the cattle driven +in. The city had been provisioned for barely a week and garrisoned +by four hundred raw recruits. Sailors from the useless ships took +out their guns and mounted them in the redoubts. Peasants flocked +in and were armed with battle-axes, clubs, and boat-hooks when the +supply of muskets gave out. When Karl Gustav drew his lines tight +he faced six thousand determined men behind strong walls. The city +stood in a ring of blazing fires. Its defenders were burning down +the houses and woods beyond the moats to clear the way for their +gunners. The King watched the sight from his horse in silence. He +knew what it meant; he had fought in the Thirty Years’ War: “Now, I +vow, we shall have fighting,” was all he said. + +It was not long in coming. On the second night the garrison made +a sortie and drove back the invaders, destroying their works with +great slaughter. Night after night, and sometimes in the broad day, +they returned to the charge, overwhelming the Swedes where least +expected, capturing their guns, their supplies, and their outposts. +Short of arms and ammunition, they took them in the enemy’s +lines. In one of these raids Karl Gustav himself was all but made +prisoner. A horseman had him by the shoulder, but he wrenched +himself loose and spurred his horse into the sea where a boat from +one of the ships rescued him. The defence took on something of the +fervor of religious frenzy. Twice a day services were held on the +walls of the city; within, the men who could not bear arms, and the +women, barricaded the streets with stones and iron chains for the +last fight, were it to come. In his place on the wall every burgher +had a hundred brickbats or stones piled up for ammunition, and by +night when the enemy rained red-hot shot upon the city, he fought +with a club or spear in one hand, a torch in the other. + +[Illustration: + + _From a painting by Lund_ + +THE SIEGE OF COPENHAGEN, 1658] + +Eleven weeks the battle raged by night and by day. Then a Dutch +fleet forced its way through the blockade after a fight in which +it lost six ships and two admirals. It brought food, ammunition, +and troops. The joy in the city was great. All day the church bells +were rung, and the people hailed the Dutch as the saviours of the +nation. But when they, too, would thank God for the victory and +asked for the use of the University’s hall, they were refused. They +were followers of Calvin and their heresies must not be preached +in the place set apart for teaching the doctrines of the “pure +faith,” said the professors, who were Lutheran. It was the way of +the day. The Reformation had learned little from the bigotry of the +Inquisition. The Dutchmen had to be content with the court-house. +But the siege was not over. Another hard winter closed in with the +enemy at the door, burrowing hourly nearer the outworks, and food +and fire-wood grew scarcer day by day in the hard-pressed city. +When things were at the worst pass in February, the Swedes gathered +their hosts for a final assault. In the midnight hour they came on +with white shirts drawn over their uniforms to make it hard to tell +them from the snow. Karl Gustav himself led the storming party and +at last was in the way of “getting speech of brother Frederik,” for +the Danish King was as good as his word. He had said that he would +die in his nest, and time and again he had to be sternly reasoned +with to prevent him from exposing himself overmuch. Where the +danger was greatest he was, and beside him ever the queen, all her +frivolity gone and forgotten. She who had danced at the court fetes +and followed the hounds on the chase as if the world had no other +cares, became the very incarnation of the spirit of the bitter and +bloody struggle. All through that winter the royal couple lived in +a tent among their men, and when the alarm was sounded they were +first on foot to lead them. Now that the hour had come, they were +in the forefront of the fight. + +Where the famous pleasure garden Tivoli now is, the strength of the +enemy was massed against the redoubts at the western gate. The name +of “Storm Street” tells yet of the doings of that night. King Karl +had promised to give over the captured town to be sacked by his +army three days and nights, and like hungry wolves they swarmed to +the attack, a mob of sailors and workmen with scaling ladders in +the van. The moats they crossed in spite of the gaps that had been +made in the ice to stop them, but the garrison had poured water +over the walls that froze as it ran, until they were like slippery +icebergs. A bird could have found no foothold on them. Showers of +rocks and junk and clubs fell upon the laddermen. Three times Karl +Gustav hurled his columns against them; as often they were driven +back, broken and beaten. A few gained a foothold on the walls only +to be dashed down to death. The burghers fought for their lives and +their homes. Their women carried boiling pitch and poured it over +the breastworks, and when they had no more, dragged great beams +and rolled them down upon the ladders, sweeping them clear of the +enemy. In the hottest fight Gunde Rosenkrantz, one of the king’s +councillors, trod on a fallen soldier and, looking into his face, +saw that it was his own son breathing his last. He bent over and +kissed him, and went on fighting. + +In the early morning hour Karl Gustav gave the order to retreat. +The attack had failed. Many of his general officers were slain; +nearly half of his army was killed, disabled, or captured. Six +Swedish standards were taken by the Danes. The moats were filled +with the dead. The Swedes had “come in their shrouds.” The guns +of the city thundered out a triple salute of triumph and the +people sang Te Deums on the walls. Their hardships were not over. +Fifteen months yet the city was invested and the home of daily +privation; but their greatest peril was past. Copenhagen was saved, +and with it the nation; the people had found itself and its king. +That autumn a second Swedish army under the veteran Stenbock was +massacred in the island of Fyen, and Karl Gustav exclaimed when +the beaten general brought him the news, “Since the devil took the +sheep he might have taken the buck too.” He never got over it. +Three months later he lay dead, and the siege of Copenhagen was +raised in May, 1660. It had lasted twenty months. + + * * * * * + +Seven score years and one passed, and the morning of Holy +Thursday[14] saw a British fleet sailing slowly up the deep before +Copenhagen, the deck of every ship bristling with guns, their +crews at quarters, Lord Nelson’s signal to “close for action” +flying from the top of the flag-ship _Elephant_. Between the fleet +and the shore lay a line of dismantled hulks on which men with +steady eyes and stout hearts were guarding Denmark’s honor. Once +more it had been jeopardized by foolish counsel in high places. +Danish statesmen had trifled and temporized while England, facing +all Europe alone in the fight for her life, made ready to strike +a decisive blow against the Armed Neutrality that threatened +her supremacy on the sea. Once more the city had been caught +unprepared, defenceless, and once more its people rose as one man +to meet the danger. But it was too late. Outside, in the Sound, a +fleet as great as that led by Nelson waited, should he fail, to +finish his work. That was to destroy the Danish ships, if need +be to bombard the city and so detach Denmark from the coalition +of England’s foes. So she chose to consider such as were not her +declared friends. + +Denmark had no fighting ships at home to pit against her. Her +sailors were away serving in the merchant marine. She had no +practised gunners, nothing but a huddle of dismantled vessels +in her navy-yard, most of them half-rotten hulks without masts. +Those that had standing rigging were even worse, for none of them +had sails and the falling spars in battle lumbered up the decks +and menaced the crew. But such as they were she made the most of +them. Eighteen hulks were hauled into the channel and moored head +and stern. Where they lay they could not be moved. Only the guns +on one side were therefore of use, while the enemy could turn and +manœuvre. They were manned by farm lads, mechanics, students, +enlisted in haste, not one of whom had ever smelt powder, and these +were matched against Nelson’s grim veterans. Even their commander, +J. Olfert Fischer, had not been under fire before that day, for +Denmark had had peace for eighty years. But his father had served +as a midshipman with Tordenskjold and the son did not flinch, +outnumbered though his force was, two to one, in men and guns. + +The sun shone fair upon the blue waters as the great fleet of +thirty-odd fighting ships sailed up from the south. From the city’s +walls and towers a mighty multitude watched it come, unmindful of +peril from shot and shell; the Danish line was not half a mile +away. In the churches whose bells were still ringing when the first +gun was fired from the block-ship _Prövestenen_, the old men and +women prayed through the long day, for there were few homes in +Copenhagen that did not have son, brother, or friend fighting out +there. A single gun answered the challenge, now two and three at +once, then broadside crashed upon broadside with deafening roar. +When at length all was quiet a tremendous report shook the city. It +was the flag-ship _Dannebrog_ that blew up. She was on fire with +only three serviceable guns left when she struck her colors, but no +ship of her name might sail with an enemy’s prize crew on board, +and she did not. + +The story of that bloody day has been told many times. Briton and +Dane hoist their flags on April 2 with equal right, for never was +challenge met with more dauntless valor. Lord Nelson owned that of +all the hundred and five battles he had fought this was hottest. +On the _Monarch_, which for hours was under the most galling fire +from the Danish ships, two hundred and twenty of the crew were +killed or wounded. “There was not a single man standing,” wrote a +young officer on board of her, “the whole way from the mainmast +forward, a district containing eight guns a side, some of which +were run out ready for firing, others lay dismounted, and others +remained as they were after recoiling.... I hastened down the fore +ladder to the lower deck and felt really relieved to find somebody +alive.” The slaughter on the Danish ships was even greater. More +than one-fifth of their entire strength of a little over five +thousand men were slain or wounded. Of the eighteen hulls they +lost thirteen, but only one were the British able to take home +with them. The rest were literally shot to pieces and were burned +where they lay. As one after another was silenced, those yet alive +on board spiked their last guns, if indeed there were any left +worth the trouble, threw their powder overboard and made, for the +shore. Twice the Danish Admiral abandoned his burning ship, the +last time taking up his post in the island battery Tre Kroner. +Each time one of the old hulls was crushed, a Briton pushed into +the hole made in the line and raked the remaining ones fore and +aft until their decks were like huge shambles. The block-ship +_Indfödsretten_ bore the concentrated fire of five frigates and +two smaller vessels throughout most of the battle. Her chief was +killed. When the news reached head-quarters on shore, Captain von +Schrödersee, an old naval officer who had been retired because of +ill health, volunteered to take his place. He was rowed out, but +as he came over the side of the ship a cannon-ball cut him in two. +_Prövestenen_, as it was the first to fire a shot, held out also +to the last. One-fourth of her crew lay dead, and her flag had +been shot away three times when the decks threatened to cave in +and Captain Lassen spiked his last guns and left the wreck to be +burned. All through the fight she was the target of ninety guns to +which she could oppose only twenty-nine of her own sixty. + +Nelson had promised Admiral Parker to finish the fight in an hour. +When the battle had lasted three, Parker signalled to him to stop. +Every school-boy knows the story of how Lord Nelson put the glass +to his blind eye and, remarking that he could see no signal, kept +right on. In the end he had to resort to stratagem to force a truce +so that he might disentangle some of his ships that were drifting +into great danger in the narrow channel. The ruse succeeded. Crown +Prince Frederik, moved by compassion for the wounded whom Nelson +threatened to burn with the captured hulks if firing did not stop, +ordered hostilities to cease without consulting the Admiral of +the fleet, and the battle was over. Denmark’s honor was saved. +“Nothing,” wrote our own Captain Mahan, “could place a nation’s +warlike fame higher than did her great deeds that day.” All else +was lost; for “there had come upon Denmark one of those days of +judgment to which nations are liable who neglect in time of peace +to prepare for war.” It had been long coming, but it had overtaken +her at last and found all the bars down. + +Alongside the _Dannebrog_ throughout her fight with Nelson’s +flag-ship, and edging ever closer in under the _Elephant’s_ side +until at last the marines were sent to man her rail and keep it +away with their muskets, lay a floating battery mounting twenty +guns under command of a beardless second lieutenant. The name of +Peter Willemoes will live as long as the Danish tongue is spoken. +Barely graduated from the Naval Academy, he was but eighteen when +the need of officers thrust the command of “Floating Battery No. +1” upon him. So gallantly did he acquit himself that Nelson took +notice of the young man who, every time a broadside crashed into +his ship or overhead, swung his cocked hat and led his men in a +lusty cheer. When after the battle he met the Crown Prince on +shore, the English commander asked to be introduced to his youthful +adversary. “You ought to make an admiral of him,” he said, and +Prince Frederik smiled: “If I were to make admirals of all my brave +officers, I should have no captains or lieutenants left.” When the +_Dannebrog_ drifted on the shoals, abandoned and burning, Willemoes +cut his cables and got away under cover of the heavy smoke. Having +neither sails nor oars, he was at the mercy of the tide, but +luckily it carried him to the north of the Tre Kroner battery, and +he reached port with forty-nine of his crew of one hundred and +twenty-nine dead or wounded. The people received him as a conqueror +returning with victory. His youth and splendid valor aroused the +enthusiasm of the whole country. Wherever he went crowds flocked to +see him as the hero of “Holy Thursday’s Battle.” Especially was he +the young people’s idol. Sailor that he was, he was “the friend of +all pretty girls,” sang the poet of that day. He danced and made +merry with them, but the one of them all on whom his heart was set, +so runs the story, would have none of him, and sent him away to +foreign parts, a saddened lover. + +Meanwhile much praise had not made him vain. “I did my duty,” he +wrote to his father, a minor government official in the city of +Odense where four years later Hans Christian Andersen was born on +the anniversary day of the battle, “and I have whole limbs which I +least expected. The Crown Prince and the Admiral have said that I +behaved well.” He was to have one more opportunity of fighting his +country’s enemy, and this time to the death. + +In the summer of 1807, England was advised that by the treaty of +Tilsit Russia and Prussia had secretly joined Napoleon in his +purpose of finally crushing his mortal enemy by uniting all the +fleets of Europe against her, Denmark’s too, by compulsion if +persuasion failed. Without warning a British fleet swooped down +upon the unsuspecting nation, busy with the pursuits of peace, +bombarded and burned Copenhagen when the Commandant refused to +deliver the ships into the hands of the robbers as a “pledge of +peace,” and carried away ships, supplies, even the carpenters’ +tools in the navy-yard. Nothing was spared. Seventy vessels, +sixteen of them ships of the line, fell into their hands, and +supplies that filled ninety-two transports beside. A single +fighting ship was left to Denmark of all her fleet,—the _Prince +Christian Frederik_ of sixty-eight guns. She happened to be away in +a Norwegian port and so escaped. Willemoes was on leave serving in +the Russian navy, but hastened home when news came of the burning +of Copenhagen, and found a berth under Captain Jessen. + +On March 22, 1808, the _Prince Christian_, so she was popularly +called, hunting a British frigate that was making Danish waters +insecure, met in the Kattegat the _Stately_ and the _Nassau_, +each like herself of sixty-eight guns. The _Nassau_ was the old +_Holsteen_, renamed,—the single prize the victors had carried home +from the battle of Copenhagen. Three British frigates were working +up to join them. The coast of Seeland was near, but wind and tide +cut off escape to the Sound. Captain Jessen ran his ship in close +under the shore so that at the last he might beach her, and awaited +the enemy there. + +The sun had set, but the night was clear when the fight between the +three ships began. With one on either side, hardly a pistol-shot +away, Jessen returned shot for shot, giving as good as they sent, +and with such success that at the end of an hour and a half the +Britons dropped astern to make repairs. The _Prince Christian_ +drifted, helpless, with rudder shot to pieces, half a wreck, +rigging all gone, and a number of her guns demolished. But when the +enemy returned he was hailed with a cheer and a broadside, and the +fight was on once more. This time they were three to one; one of +the British frigates of forty-four guns had come up and joined in. + +When the hull of the _Prince Christian_ was literally knocked to +pieces, and of her 576 men 69 lay dead and 137 wounded, including +the chief and all of his officers who were yet alive, Captain +Jessen determined as a last desperate chance to run one of his +opponents down and board her with what remained of his crew. But +his officers showed him that it was impossible; the ship could not +be manœuvred. There was a momentary lull in the fire and out of +the night came a cry, “Strike your colors!” The Danish reply was a +hurrah and a volley from all the standing guns. Three broad-sides +crashed into the doomed ship in quick succession, and the battle +was over. The _Prince Christian_ stood upon the shore, a wreck. + +Young Willemoes was spared the grief of seeing the last Danish +man-of-war strike its flag. In the hottest of the fight, as he +jumped upon a gun the better to locate the enemy in the gloom, a +cannon-ball took off the top of his head. He fell into the arms +of a fellow officer with the muttered words, “Oh God! my head—my +country!” and was dead. In his report of the fight Captain Jessen +wrote against his name: “Fell in battle—honored as he is missed.” +They made his grave on shore with the fallen sailors, and as the +sea washed up other bodies they were buried with them. + +The British captured the wreck, but they could only set fire to it +after removing the wounded. In the night it blew up where it stood. +That was the end of the last ship of Denmark’s proud navy. + + +Footnotes: + +[13] It is of record that Queen Sofie Amalie used one-third of the +annual revenues of the country for her household. The menu of a +single “rustic dinner” of the court mentions 200 courses and nearly +as many kinds of preserves and dessert, served on gold, with wines +in corresponding abundance. + +[14] The battle of Copenhagen was fought April 2, 1801. + + + + +THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE + + +Jens Kofoed was the name of a trooper who served in the disastrous +war of Denmark against Sweden in Karl Gustav’s day. He came from +the island of Bornholm in the Baltic, where he tilled a farm in +days of peace. When his troop went into winter quarters, he got a +furlough to go home to receive the new baby that was expected about +Christmas. Most of his comrades were going home for the holidays, +and their captain made no objection. The Swedish king was fighting +in far-off Poland, and no one dreamed that he would come over the +ice with his army in the depth of winter to reckon with Denmark. So +Jens Kofoed took ship with the promise that he would be back in two +weeks. But they were to be two long weeks. They did not hear of him +again for many moons, and then strange tidings came of his doings. +Single-handed he had bearded the Swedish lion, and downed it in a +fair fight—strangest of all, almost without bloodshed. + +The winter storms blew hard, and it was Christmas eve when he made +land, but he came in time to receive, not one new heir, but twin +baby girls. Then there were six of them, counting Jens and his +wife, and a merry Christmas they all had together. On Twelfth Night +the little ones were christened, and then the trooper bethought +himself of his promise to get back soon. The storms had ceased, but +worse had befallen; the sea was frozen over as far as eye reached, +and the island was cut off from all communication with the outer +world. There was nothing for it but to wait. It proved the longest +and hardest winter any one then living could remember. Easter was +at hand before the ice broke up, and let a fishing smack slip +over to Ystad, on the mainland. It came back with news that set +the whole island wondering. Peace had been made, and Denmark had +ceded all its ancient provinces east of the Öresund to Karl Gustav. +Ystad itself and Skaane, the province in which Jens Kofoed had been +campaigning, were Swedish now, and so was Bornholm. All unknown +to its people, the island had changed hands in the game of war +overnight, as it were. A Swedish garrison was coming over presently +to take charge. + +When Jens Kofoed heard it, he sat down and thought things over. +If there was peace, his old captain had no use for him, that was +certain; but there might be need of him at home. What would happen +there, no one could tell. And there were the wife and children to +take care of. The upshot of it all was that he stayed. Only, to be +on the safe side, he got the Burgomaster and the Aldermen in his +home town, Hasle, to set it down in writing that he could not have +got back to his troop for all he might have tried. Kofoed, it will +be seen, was a man with a head on his shoulders, which was well, +for presently he had need of it. + +There were no Danish soldiers in the island, only a peasant +militia, ill-armed and untaught in the ways of war; so no one +thought of resisting the change of masters. The people simply +waited to see what would happen. Along in May a company of one +hundred and twenty men with four guns landed, and took possession +of Castle Hammershus, on the north shore, the only stronghold on +the island, in the name of the Swedish king. Colonel Printzensköld, +who had command, summoned the islanders to a meeting, and told them +that he had come to be their governor. They were to obey him, and +that was all. The people listened and said nothing. + +Perhaps if the new rulers had been wise, things might have kept +on so. The people would have tilled their farms, and paid their +taxes, and Jens Kofoed, with all his hot hatred of the enemy he +had fought, might never have been heard of outside his own island. +But the Swedish soldiers had been through the Thirty Years’ War +and plunder had become their profession. They rioted in the towns, +doubled the taxes, put an embargo on trade and export, crushed the +industries; worse, they took the young men and sent them away to +Karl Gustav’s wars in foreign lands. They left only the old men and +the boys, and these last they kept a watchful eye on for drafts in +days to come. When the conscripts hid in the woods, so as not to +be torn from their wives and sweethearts, they organized regular +man-hunts as if the quarry were wild beasts, and, indeed, the poor +fellows were not treated much better when caught. + +All summer they did as they pleased; then came word that Karl +Gustav had broken the peace he made, and of the siege of +Copenhagen. The news made the people sit up and take notice. Their +rightful sovereign had ceded the island to the Swedish king, that +was one thing. But now that they were at war again, these strangers +who persecuted them were the public enemy. It was time something +were done. In Hasle there was a young parson with his heart in the +right place, Poul Anker by name. Jens Kofoed sat in his church; he +had been to the wars, and was fit to take command. Also, the two +were friends. Presently a web of conspiracy spread quietly through +the island, gripping priest and peasant, skipper and trader, +alike. Its purpose was to rout out the Swedes. The Hasle trooper +and parson were the leaders; but their secret was well kept. With +the tidings that the Dutch fleet had forced its way through to +Copenhagen with aid for the besieged, and had bottled the Swedish +ships up in Landskrona, came a letter purporting to be from King +Frederik himself, encouraging the people to rise. It was passed +secretly from hand to hand by the underground route, and found the +island ready for rebellion. + +Governor Printzensköld had seen something brewing, but he was a +fearless man, and despised the “peasant mob.” However, he sent to +Sweden for a troop of horsemen, the better to patrol the island +and watch the people. Early in December, 1658, just a year after +Jens Kofoed, the trooper, had set out for his home on furlough, the +governor went to Rönne, the chief city in the island, to start off +a ship for the reënforcements. The conspirators sought to waylay +him at Hasle, where he stopped to give warning that all who had not +paid the heavy war-tax would be sold out forthwith; but they were +too late. Master Poul and Jens Kofoed rode after him, expecting +to meet a band of their fellows on the way, but missed them. The +parson stayed behind then to lay the fuse to the mine, while Kofoed +kept on to town. By the time he got there he had been joined by +four others, Aage Svendsön, Klavs Nielsen, Jens Laurssön, and Niels +Gummelöse. The last two were town officers. As soon as the report +went around Rönne that they had come, Burgomaster Klaus Kam went to +them openly. + +The governor had ridden to the house of the other burgomaster, Per +Larssön, who was not in the plot. His horse was tied outside and he +just sitting down to supper when Jens Kofoed and his band crowded +into the room, and took him prisoner. They would have killed him +there, but his host pleaded for his life. However, when they took +him out in the street, Printzensköld thought he saw a chance to +escape in the crowd and the darkness, and sprang for his horse. But +his great size made him an easy mark. He was shot through the head +as he ran. The man who shot him had loaded his pistol with a silver +button torn from his vest. That was sure death to any goblin on +whom neither lead nor steel would bite, and it killed the governor +all right. The place is marked to this day in the pavement of the +main street as the spot where fell the only tyrant who ever ruled +the island against the people’s will. + +The die was cast now, and there was need of haste. Under cover of +the night the little band rode through the island with the news, +ringing the church bells far and near to call the people to arms. +Many were up and waiting; Master Poul had roused them already. At +Hammershus the Swedish garrison heard the clamor, and wondered +what it meant. They found out when at sunrise an army of half +the population thundered on the castle gates summoning them to +surrender. Burgomaster Kam sat among them on the governor’s horse, +wearing his uniform, and shouted to the officers in command that +unless they surrendered, he, the governor, would be killed, and +his head sent in to his wife in the castle. The frightened woman’s +tears decided the day. The garrison surrendered, only to discover +that they had been tricked. Jens Kofoed took command in the castle. +The Swedish soldiers were set to doing chores for the farmers +they had so lately harassed. The ship that was to have fetched +reënforcements from Sweden was sent to Denmark instead, with the +heartening news. They needed that kind there just then. + +But the ex-trooper, now Commandant, knew that a day of reckoning +was coming, and kept a sharp lookout. When the hostile ship _Spes_ +was reported steering in from the sea, the flag of Sweden flew from +the peak of Hammershus, and nothing on land betrayed that there +had been a change. As soon as she anchored, a boat went out with +an invitation from the governor to any officers who might be on +board, to come ashore and arrange for the landing of the troops. +The captain of the ship and the major in charge came, and were made +prisoners as soon as they had them where they could not be seen +from the ship. It blew up to a storm, and the _Spes_ was obliged +to put to sea, but as soon as she returned boats were sent out to +land the soldiers. They sent only little skiffs that could hold +not over three or four, and as fast as they were landed they were +overpowered and bound. Half of the company had been thus disposed +of when the lieutenant on board grew suspicious, and sent word that +without the express orders of the major no more would come. But +Jens Kofoed’s wit was equal to the emergency. The next boat brought +an invitation to the lieutenant to come in and have breakfast +with the officers, who would give him his orders there. He walked +into the trap; but when he also failed to return, his men refused +to follow. He had arranged to send them a sign, they said, that +everything was all right. If it did not come, they would sail away +to Sweden for help. + +It took some little persuasion to make the lieutenant tell about +the sign, but in the end Jens Kofoed got it. It turned out to be +his pocket-knife. When they saw that, the rest came, and were put +under lock and key with their fellows. + +The ship was left. If that went back, all was lost. Happily +both captain and mate were prisoners ashore. Four boat-loads of +islanders, with arms carefully stowed under the seats, went out +with the mate of the _Spes_, who was given to understand that if he +as much as opened his mouth he would be a dead man. They boarded +the ship, taking the crew by surprise. By night the last enemy +was comfortably stowed, and the ship on her way to Rönne, where +the prisoners were locked in the court-house cellar, with shotted +guns guarding the door. Perhaps it was the cruelties practised by +Swedish troops in Denmark that preyed upon the mind of Jens Kofoed +when he sent the parson to prepare them for death then and there; +but better counsel prevailed. They were allowed to live. The whole +war cost only two lives, the governor’s and that of a sentinel at +the castle, who refused to surrender. The mate of the _Spes_ and +two of her crew contrived to escape after they had been taken to +Copenhagen, and from them Karl Gustav had the first tidings of how +he lost the island. + +The captured ship sailed down to Copenhagen with greeting to King +Frederik that the people of Bornholm had chosen him and his heirs +forever to rule over them, on condition that their island was never +to be separated from the Danish Crown. The king in his delight +presented them with a fine silver cup, and made Jens Kofoed captain +of the island, beside giving him a handsome estate. He lived +thirty-three years after that, the patriarch of his people, and +raised a large family of children. Not a few of his descendants are +to-day living in the United States. In the home of one of them in +Brooklyn, New York, is treasured a silver drinking cup which King +Frederik gave to the ex-trooper; but it is not the one he sent back +with his deputation. That one is still in the island of Bornholm. + + + + +CARL LINNÉ, KING OF THE FLOWERS + + +Years ago there grew on the Jonsboda farm in Smaland, Sweden, a +linden tree that was known far and wide for its great age and +size. So beautiful and majestic was the tree, and so wide the +reach of its spreading branches, that all the countryside called +it sacred. Misfortune was sure to come if any one did it injury. +So thought the people. It was not strange, then, that the farmer’s +boys, when they grew to be learned men and chose a name, should +call themselves after the linden. The peasant folk had no family +names in those days. Sven Carlsson was Sven, the son of Carl; and +his son, if his given name were John, would be John Svensson. So +it had always been. But when a man could make a name for himself +out of the big dictionary, that was his right. The daughter of the +Jonsboda farmer married; and her son played in the shadow of the +old tree, and grew so fond of it that when he went out to preach +he also called himself after it. Nils Ingemarsson was the name he +received in baptism, and to that he added Linnæus, never dreaming +that in doing it he handed down the name and the fame of the friend +of his play hours to all coming days. But it was so; for Parson +Nils’ eldest son, Carl Linné, or Linnæus, became a great man who +brought renown to his country and his people by telling them and +all the world more than any one had ever known before about the +trees and the flowers. The King knighted him for his services to +science, and the people of every land united in acclaiming him the +father of botany and the king of the flowers. + +They were the first things he learned to love in his baby world. If +he was cross, they had but to lay him on the grass in the garden +and put a daisy in his hand, and he would croon happily over it for +hours. He was four years old when his father took him to a wedding +in the neighborhood. The men guests took a tramp over the farm, and +in the twilight they sat and rested in the meadow, where the spring +flowers grew. The minister began telling them stories about them; +how they all had their own names and what powers for good or ill +the apothecary found in the leaves and root of some of them. Carl’s +father, though barely out of college, was a bright and gifted man. +One of his parishioners said once that they couldn’t afford a whole +parson, and so they took a young one; but if that was the way of +it, the men of Stenbrohult made a better bargain than they knew. +They sat about listening to his talk, but no one listened more +closely than little Carl. After that he had thought for nothing +else. In the corner of the garden he had a small plot of his own, +and into it he planted all the wild flowers from the fields, and he +asked many more questions about them than his father could answer. +One day he came back with one whose name he had forgotten. The +minister was busy with his sermon. + +“If you don’t remember,” he said impatiently, “I will never tell +you the name of another flower.” The boy went away, his eyes wide +with terror at the threat; but after that he did not forget a +single name. + +When he was big enough, they sent him to the Latin school at Wexiö, +where the other boys nicknamed him “the little botanist.” His +thoughts were outdoors when they should have been in the dry books, +and his teachers set him down as a dunce. They did not know that +his real study days were when, in vacation, he tramped the thirty +miles to his home. Every flower and every tree along the way was +an old friend, and he was glad to see them again. Once in a while +he found a book that told of plants, and then he was anything but +a dunce. But when his father, after Carl had been eight years in +the school, asked his teachers what they thought of him, they told +him flatly that he might make a good tailor or shoemaker, but a +minister—never; he was too stupid. + +That was a blow, for the parson of Stenbrohult and his wife had set +their hearts on making a minister of Carl, and small wonder. His +mother was born in the parsonage, and her father and grandfather +had been shepherds of the parish all their lives. There were tears +in the good minister’s eyes as he told Carl to pack up and get +ready to go back home; he had an errand at Dr. Rothman’s, but would +return presently. The good doctor saw that his patient was heavy +of heart and asked him what was wrong. When he heard what Carl’s +teachers had said, he flashed out: + +“What! he not amount to anything? There is not one in the whole +lot who will go as far as he. A minister he won’t be, that I’ll +allow, but I shall make a doctor of him such as none of them ever +saw. You leave him here with me.” And the parson did, comforted in +spite of himself. But Carl’s mother could not get over it. It was +that garden, she declared, and when his younger brother as much as +squinted that way, she flew at him with a “You dare to touch it!” +and shook him. + +When Dr. Rothman thought his pupil ready for the university, he +sent him up to Lund, and the head-master of the Latin School gave +him the letter he must bring, to be admitted. “Boys at school,” he +wrote in it, “may be likened to young trees in orchard nurseries, +where it sometimes happens that here and there among the saplings +there are some that make little growth, or even appear as wild +seedlings, giving no promise; but when afterwards transplanted to +the orchard, make a start, branch out freely, and at last yield +satisfactory fruit.” By good luck, though, Carl ran across an old +teacher from Wexiö, one of the few who had believed in him and was +glad to see him. He took him to the Rector and introduced him with +warm words of commendation, and also found him lodgings under the +roof of Dr. Kilian Stobæus. + +Dr. Stobæus was a physician of renown, but not good company. He was +one-eyed, sickly, lame in one foot, and a gloomy hypochondriac to +boot. Being unable to get around to his patients, he always had one +or two students to do the running for him and to learn as best they +might, in doing it. Carl found a young German installed there as +the doctor’s right hand. He also found a library full of books on +botany, a veritable heaven for him. But the gate was shut against +him; the doctor had the key, and he saw nothing in the country lad +but a needy student of no account. Perhaps the Rector had passed +the head-master’s letter along. However, love laughs at locksmiths, +and Carl Linnæus was hopelessly in love with his flowers. He got on +the right side of the German by helping him over some hard stiles +in the _materia medica_. In return, his fellow student brought him +books out of the library when the doctor had gone to bed, and Carl +sat up studying the big tomes till early cockcrow. Before the house +stirred, the books were back on their shelves, the door locked, and +no one was the wiser. + +No one except the doctor’s old mother, whose room was across the +yard. She did not sleep well, and all night she saw the window +lighted in her neighbor’s room. She told the doctor that Carl +Linnæus fell asleep with the candle burning every single night, and +sometime he would upset it and they would all be burned in their +beds. The doctor nodded grimly; he knew the young scamps. No doubt +they both sat up playing cards till dawn; but he would teach them. +And the very next morning, at two o’clock, up he stumped on his +lame foot to Carl’s room, in which there was light, sure enough, +and went in without knocking. + +Carl was so deep in his work that he did not hear him at all, and +the doctor stole up unperceived and looked over his shoulder. There +lay his precious books, which he thought safely locked in the +library, spread out before him, and his pupil was taking notes and +copying drawings as if his life depended upon it. He gave a great +start when Dr. Stobæus demanded what he was doing, but owned up +frankly, while the doctor frowned and turned over his notes, leaf +by leaf. + +“Go to bed and sleep like other people,” he said gruffly, yet +kindly, when he had heard it all, “and hereafter study in the +daytime;” and he not only gave him a key to his library, but took +him to his own table after that. Up till then Carl had merely been +a lodger in the house. + +When he was at last on the home stretch, as it seemed, an accident +came near upsetting it all. He was stung by an adder on one of his +botanizing excursions, so far from home and help that the bite +came near proving fatal. However, Dr. Stobæus’ skill pulled him +through, and in after years he got square by labelling the serpent +_furia infernalis_—hell-fury—in his natural history. It was his way +of fighting back. All through his life he never wasted an hour on +controversy. He had no time, he said. But once when a rival made +a particularly nasty attack upon him, he named a new plant after +him, adding the descriptive adjective _detestabilis_—the detestable +so-and-so. On the whole, he had the best of it; for the names he +gave stuck. + +It was during his vacation after the year at Lund that Linnæus made +a catalogue of the plants in his father’s garden at Stenbrohult +that shows us the country parson as no mean botanist himself; for +in the list, which is preserved in the Academy of Sciences at +Stockholm, are no less than two hundred and twenty-four kinds of +plants. Among them are six American plants that had found their +way to Sweden. The poison ivy is there, though what they wanted +of that is hard to tell, and the four-o’clock, the pokeweed, the +milkweed, the pearly everlasting, and the potato, which was then +(1732) classed as a rare plant. Not until twenty years later did +they begin to grow it for food in Sweden. + +When Carl Linnæus went up to Upsala University, his parents had so +far got over their disappointment at his deserting the ministry +that they gave him a little money to make a start with; but they +let him know that no more was coming—their pocket-book was empty. +And within the twelvemonth, for all his scrimping and saving, +he was on the point of starvation. He tells us himself that he +depended on chance for a meal and wore his fellow students’ +cast-off clothes. His boots were without soles, and in his +cheerless attic room he patched them with birch bark and card board +as well as he could. He was now twenty-three years old, and it +seemed as if he would have to give up the study that gave him no +bread; but still he clung to his beloved flowers. They often made +him forget the pangs of hunger. And when the cloud was darkest the +sun broke through. He was sitting in the Botanical Garden sketching +a plant, when Dean Celsius, a great orientalist and theologian of +his day, passed by. The evident poverty of the young man, together +with his deep absorption in his work, arrested his attention; he +sat down and talked with him. In five minutes Carl had found a +friend and the Dean a helper. He had been commissioned to write a +book on the plants of the Holy Land and had collected a botanical +library for the purpose, but the work lagged. Here now was the one +who could help set it going. That day Linnæus left his attic room +and went to live in the Dean’s house. His days of starvation were +over. + +In the Dean’s employ his organizing genius developed the marvellous +skill of the cataloguer that brought order out of the chaos of +groping and guessing and blundering in which the science of botany +had floundered up till then. Here and there in it all were flashes +of the truth, which Linnæus laid hold of and pinned down with his +own knowledge to system and order. Thus the Frenchman, Sebastian +Vaillant, who had died a dozen years before, had suggested a +classification of flowers by their seed-bearing organs, the stamens +and pistils, instead of by their fruits, the number of their +petals, or even by their color, as had been the vague practice of +the past. Linnæus seized upon this as the truer way and wrote a +brief treatise developing the idea, which so pleased Dr. Celsius +that he got his young friend a license to lecture publicly in the +Botanical Garden. + +The students flocked to hear him. His message was one that put life +and soul into the dry bones of a science that had only wearied them +before. The professor of botany himself sat in the front row and +hammered the floor with his cane in approval. But his very success +was the lecturer’s undoing. Envy grew in place of the poverty he +had conquered. The instructor, Nils Rosén, was abroad taking his +doctor’s degree. He came home to find his lectures deserted for the +irresponsible teachings of a mere undergraduate. He made grievous +complaint, and Linnæus was silenced, to his great good luck. For +so his friend the professor, though he was unable to break the red +tape of the university, got him an appointment to go to Lapland on +a botanical mission. His enemies were only too glad to see him go. + +Linnæus travelled more than three thousand miles that summer +through a largely unknown country, enduring, he tells us, more +hardships and dangers than in all his subsequent travels. Again +and again he nearly lost his life in swollen mountain streams, for +he would not wait until danger from the spring freshets was over. +Once he was shot at as he was gathering plants on a hillside, +but happily the Finn who did it was not a good marksman. Fish +and reindeer milk were his food, a pestilent plague of flies his +worst trouble. But, he says in his account of the trip, which is +as fascinating a report of a scientific expedition as was ever +penned, they were good for something, after all, for the migrating +birds fed on them. From his camps on lake or river bank he saw the +water covered far and near with swarms of ducks and geese. The +Laplander’s larder was easily stocked. + +He came back from the dangers of the wild with a reputation that +was clinched by his book “The Flora of Lapland,” to find the dragon +of professional jealousy rampant still at Upsala. His enemy, +Rosén, persuaded the senate of the university to adopt a rule that +no un-degreed man should lecture there to the prejudice of the +regularly appointed instructors. Tradition has it that Linnæus flew +into a passion at that and drew upon Rosén, and there might have +been one regular less but for the interference of bystanders. It +may be true, though it is not like him. Men wore side-arms in those +days just as some people carry pistols in their hip-pockets to-day, +and with as little sense. At least they had the defence, such as it +was, that it was the fashion. However, it made an end of Linnæus +at Upsala for the time. He sought a professorship at Lund, but +another got it. Then he led an expedition of his former students +into the Dalecarlia mountains and so he got to Falun, where Baron +Reuterholm, one of Sweden’s copper magnates, was seeking a guide +for his two sons through the region where his mines were. + +Linnæus was not merely a botanist, but an all around expert in +natural science. He took charge of the boys and, when the trip +was ended, started a school at Falun, where he taught mineralogy. +It had been hit or miss with the miners up till then. There was +neither science nor system in their work. What every day experience +or the test of fire had taught a prospector, in delving among the +rocks, was all there was of it. Linnæus was getting things upon a +scientific basis, when he met and fell in love with the handsome +daughter of Dr. Moræus. The young people would marry, but the +doctor, though he liked the mineralogist, would not hear of it till +he could support a wife. So he gave him three years in which to go +abroad and get a degree that would give him the right to practise +medicine anywhere in Sweden. The doctor’s daughter gave him a +hundred dollars she had saved, and her promise to wait for him. + +He went to Harderwyk in Holland and got his degree at the +university there on the strength of a thesis on the cause of +malarial fever, with the conclusions of which the learned doctors +did not agree; but they granted the diploma for the clever way +in which he defended it. On the way down he tarried in Hamburg +long enough to give the good burghers a severe jolt. They had a +seven-headed serpent that was one of the wonders of the town. The +keen sight of the young naturalist detected the fraud at once; +the heads were weasels’ heads, covered with serpent’s skin and +cunningly sewed on the head of the reptile. The shape of the jaws +betrayed the trick. But the Hamburgers were not grateful. The +serpent was an asset. There was a mortgage on it of ten thousand +marks; now it was not worth a hundred. They took it very ill, and +Linnæus found himself suddenly so unpopular that he was glad to get +out of town overnight. What became of the serpent history does not +record. + +Linnæus had carried more than his thesis on malarial fever with him +to Holland. At the bottom of his trunk were the manuscripts of two +books on botany which, he told his sweetheart on parting, would yet +make him famous. Probably she shook her head at that. Pills and +powders, and broken legs to set, were more to her way of thinking, +and her father’s, too. If only he had patients, fame might take +care of itself. But now he put them both to shame. At Leyden he +found friends who brought out his first book, “Systema Naturæ,” in +which he divides all nature into the three kingdoms known to every +child since. It was hardly more than a small pamphlet, but it laid +the foundation for his later fame. To the enlarged tenth edition +zoölogists point back to this day as to the bed-rock on which they +built their science. The first was quickly followed by another, and +yet another. Seven large volumes bearing his name had come from the +press before he set sail for home, a whole library in botany, and a +new botany at that, so simple and sensible that the world adopted +it at once. + +Dr. Hermann Boerhaave was at that time the most famous physician in +Europe. He was also the greatest authority on systematic botany. +Great men flocked to his door, but the testy old Dutchman let them +wait until it suited him to receive them. Peter the Great had to +cool his heels in his waiting-room two long hours before his turn +came. Linnæus he would not see at all—until he sent him a copy of +his book. Then he shut the door against all others and summoned +the author. The two walked through his garden, and the old doctor +pointed proudly to a tree which was very rare, he said, and not +in any of the books. Yes, said Linnæus, it was in Vaillant’s. The +doctor knew better; he had annotated Vaillant’s botany himself, and +it was not there. Linnæus insisted, and the doctor, in a temper, +went for the book to show him. But there it was; Linnæus was +right. Nothing would do then but he must stay in Holland. Linnæus +demurred; he could not afford it. But Dr. Boerhaave knew a way out +of that. He had for a patient Burgomaster Cliffort, a rich old +hypochondriac with whom he could do nothing because he would insist +on living high and taking too little exercise. When he came again +he told him that what he needed was a physician in daily attendance +upon him, and handed him over to Linnæus. + +“He will fix your diet and fix your garden, too,” was his +prescription. The Burgomaster was a famous collector and had a +wondrous garden that was the apple of his eye. He took Linnæus +into his house and gave him a ducat a day for writing his menu and +cataloguing his collection. That was where his books grew, and the +biggest and finest of them was “Hortus Cliffortianus,” the account +of his patron’s garden. + +Armed with letters from Dr. Boerhaave and the Burgomaster, he took +one stronghold of professional prejudice after another. Not without +a siege. One of them refused flatly to surrender. That was Sir Hans +Sloan, the great English naturalist, to whom Dr. Boerhaave wrote +in a letter that is preserved in the British Museum: “Linnæus, who +bears this letter, is alone worthy of seeing you, alone worthy of +being seen by you. He who shall see you both together shall see two +men whose like will scarce ever be found in the world.” And the +doctor was no flatterer, as may be inferred from his treatment of +Peter the Great. But the aged baronet had had his own way so long, +and was so well pleased with it, that he would have nothing to do +with Linnæus. At Oxford the learned professor Dillenius received +him with no better grace. “This,” he said aside to a friend, “is +the young man who confounds all botany,” and he took him rather +reluctantly into his garden. A plant that was new to him attracted +Linnæus’ attention and he asked to what family it belonged. + +“That is more than you can tell me,” was the curt answer. + +“I can, if you will let me pluck a flower and examine it.” + +“Do, and be welcome,” said the professor, and his visitor after +a brief glance at the flower told its species correctly. The +professor stared. + +“Now,” said Linnæus, who had kept his eyes open, “what did you mean +by the crosses you had put all through my book?” He had seen it +lying on the professor’s table, all marked up. + +“They mark the errors you made,” declared the other. + +“Suppose we see about that,” said the younger man and, taking +the book, led the way. They examined the flowers together, and +when they returned to the study all the pride had gone out of the +professor. He kept Linnæus with him a month, never letting him out +of his sight and, when he left, implored him with tears to stay and +share his professorship; the pay was enough for both. + +A letter that reached him from home on his return to Holland made +him realize with a start that he had overstayed his leave. It was +now in the fourth year since he had left Sweden. All the while he +had written to his sweetheart in the care of a friend who proved +false. He wanted her for himself and, when the three years had +passed, told her that Carl would never come back. Dr. Moræus was +of the same mind, and had not a real friend of the absent lover +turned up in the nick of time Linnæus would probably have stayed a +Dutchman to his death. Now, on the urgent message of his friend, he +hastened home, found his Elisabeth holding out yet, married her and +settled down in Stockholm to practise medicine. + +Famous as he had become, he found the first stretch of the row at +home a hard one to hoe. His books brought him no income. Nobody +would employ him, “even for a sick servant,” he complained. Envious +rivals assailed him and his botany, and there were days when +herring and black bread was fare not to be despised in Dr. Linnæus’ +household. But he kept pegging away and his luck changed. One +well-to-do patient brought another, and at last the queen herself +was opportunely seized with a bad cough. She saw one of her ladies +take a pill and asked what it was. Dr. Linnæus’ prescription for +a cold, she said, and it always cured her right up. So the doctor +was called to the castle and his cure worked there, too. Not long +after that he set down in his diary that “Now, no one can get well +without my help.” + +But he was not happy. “Once, I had flowers and no money,” he +said; “now, I have money and no flowers.” That they appointed him +professor of medicine at Upsala did not mend matters. His lectures +were popular and full of common sense. Diet and the simple life +were his hobbies, temperance in all things. He ever insisted that +where one man dies from drinking too much, ten die from overeating. +Children should eat four times a day, grown-ups twice, was his +rule. The foolish fashions and all luxury he abhorred. He himself +in his most famous years lived so plainly that some said he was +miserly, and his clothes were sometimes almost shabby. The happiest +day of his life came when he and his old enemy Rosén, whom he found +filling the chair of botany at the university, and with whom he +made it up soon after they became fellow members of the faculty, +exchanged chairs with the ready consent of the authorities. So, at +last, Linnæus had attained the place he coveted above all others, +and the goal of his ambition was reached. + +He lived at Upsala thirty-seven years and wrote many books. His +students idolized him. They came from all over the world. Twice a +week in summer, on Wednesday and Saturday, they sallied forth with +him to botanize in field and forest, and when they had collected +specimens all the long day they escorted the professor home through +the twilight streets with drums and trumpets and with flowers +in their hats. But however late they left him at his door, the +earliest dawn saw him up and at his work, for the older he grew the +more precious the hours that remained. In summer he was accustomed +to rise at three o’clock; in the dark winter days at six. + +He found biology a chaos and left it a science. In his special +field of botany he was not, as some think, the first. He himself +catalogued fully a thousand books on his topic. But he brought +order into it; he took what was good and, rejecting the false, +fashioned it into a workable system. In the mere matter of +nomenclature, his way of calling plants, like men, by a family name +and a given name wrought a change hard to appreciate in our day. +The common blue grass of our lawns, for instance, he called, and we +call it still, _Poa pratensis_. Up to his time it had three names +and one of them was _Gramen pratense paniculatum majus latiore +folio poa theophrasti_. Dr. Rydberg, of the New York Botanical +Gardens, said aptly at the bicentenary of his birth, that it was +as if instead of calling a girl Grace Darling one were to say “Mr. +Darling’s beautiful, slender, graceful, blue-eyed girl with long, +golden curls and rosy cheeks.” + +The binomial system revolutionized the science. What the lines +of longitude and latitude did for geography Linnæus’ genius did +for botany. And he did not let pride of achievement persuade him +that he had said the last word. He knew his system to be the best +till some one should find a better, and said so. The King gave him +a noble name and he was proud of it with reason—vain, some have +said. But vanity did not make the creature deny the Creator. He +ever tried to trace science to its author. When the people were +frightened by the “water turning to blood” and overzealous priests +cried that it was a sign of the wrath of God, he showed under the +magnifying glass the presence of innumerable little animals that +gave the water its reddish tinge, and thereby gave offence to some +pious souls. But over the door of his lecture room were the words +in Latin: “Live guiltless—God sees you!” and in his old age, seeing +with prophetic eye the day of bacteriology that dawned a hundred +years after his death, he thanked God that He had permitted him to +“look into His secret council room and workshop.” + +He was one of the clear thinkers of all days, uniting imagination +with sound sense. It was Linnæus who discovered that plants sleep +like animals. The Pope ordered that his books, wherever they were +found in his dominions, should be burned as materialistic and +heretical; but Linnæus lived to see a professor in botany at Rome +dismissed because he did not understand his system, and another put +in his place who did, and whose lectures followed his theories. +When he was seventy he was stricken with apoplexy, while lecturing +to his students, and the last year of his life was full of misery. +“Linnæus limps,” is one of the last entries in his diary, “can +hardly walk, speaks unintelligibly, and is scarce able to write.” +Death came on January 10, 1778. + +Under the white flashes of the northern lights in the desolate land +he explored in his youth, there grows in the shelter of the spruce +forests a flower which he found and loved beyond any other, the +_Linnæa borealis_, named after him. In some pictures we have of +him, he is seen holding a sprig of it in his hand. It is the twin +flower of the northern Pacific coast and of Labrador, indeed of the +far northern woods from Labrador all the way to Alaska, that lifts +its delicate, sweet-scented pink bells from the moss with gentle +appeal, “long overlooked, lowly, flowering early” despite cold and +storm, typical of the man himself. + + + + +NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER + + +Hard by the town of Thorshavn, in the Faröe islands, a little lad +sat one day carving his name on a rock. His rough-coated pony +cropped the tufts of stunted grass within call. The grim North +Sea beat upon the shore below. What thoughts of the great world +without it stirred in the boy he never told. He came of a people +to whom it called all through the ages with a summons that rarely +went unheeded. If he heard he gave no sign. Slowly and laboriously +he traced in the stone the letters N.R.F. When he had finished he +surveyed his work with a quiet smile. “There!” he said, “that is +done.” + +The years went by, and a distant city paused in its busy life to +hearken to bells tolling for one who lay dead. Kings and princes +walked behind his coffin and a whole people mourned. Yet in life he +had worn no purple. He was a plain, even a poor man. Upon his grave +they set a rock brought from the island in the North Sea, just like +the other that stands there yet, and in it they hewed the letters +N.R.F., for the man and the boy were one. And he who spoke there +said for all mankind that what he wrought was well done, for it was +done bravely and in love. + +Niels Ryberg Finsen was born in 1860 in the Faröe islands, where +his father was an official under the Danish Government. His family +came of the sturdy old Iceland stock that comes down to our time +unshorn of its strength from the day of the vikings, and back to +Iceland his people sent him to get his education in the Reykjavik +Latin school, after a brief stay in Denmark where his teachers +failed to find the key to the silent, reserved lad. There he lived +the seven pregnant years of boyhood and youth, from fourteen to +twenty-one, and ever after there was that about him that brought to +mind the wild fastnesses of that storm swept land. Its mountains +were not more rugged than his belief in the right as he saw it. + +The Reykjavik school had a good name, but school and pupils were +after their own kind. Conventional was hardly the word for it. Some +of the “boys” were twenty and over. Finsen loved to tell of how +they pursued the studies each liked best, paying scant attention to +the rest. In their chosen fields they often knew much more than the +curriculum called for, and were quite able to instruct the teacher; +the things they cared less about they helped one another out with, +so as to pass examinations. For mere proficiency in lessons they +cherished a sovereign contempt. To do anything by halves is not the +Iceland way, and it was not Niels Finsen’s. All through his life he +was impatient with second-hand knowledge and borrowed thinking. So +he worked and played through the long winters of the North. In the +summer vacations he roamed the barren hills, helped herd the sheep, +and drank in the rough freedom of the land and its people. At +twenty-one the school gave him up to the university at Copenhagen. + +Training for life there was not the heyday of youthful frolicking +we sometimes associate with college life in our day and land. Not +until he was thirty could he hang up his sheepskin as a physician. +Yet the students had their fun and their sports, and Finsen was +seldom missing where these went on. He was not an athlete because +already at twenty-three the crippling disease with which he battled +twenty years had got its grip on him, but all the more he was an +outdoor man. He sailed his boat, and practised with the rifle until +he became one of the best shots in Denmark. And it is recorded that +he got himself into at least one scrape at the university by his +love of freedom. + +The country was torn up at that time by a struggle between people +and government over constitutional rights, and it had reached a +point where a country parish had refused to pay taxes illegally +assessed, as they claimed. It was their Boston tea-party. A +delegation of the “tax refusers” had come to Copenhagen, where +the political pot was boiling hot over the incident. The students +were enthusiastic, but the authorities of the university sternly +unsympathetic. The “Reds” were for giving a reception to the +visitors in Regentsen, the great dormitory where, as an Iceland +student, Finsen had free lodging; but it was certain that the Dean +would frown upon such a proposition. So they applied innocently for +permission to entertain some “friends from the country,” and the +party was held in Finsen’s room. Great was the scandal when the +opposition newspapers exploited the feasting of the tax refusers +in the sacred precincts of the university. To the end of his days +Finsen chuckled over the way they stole a march on the Dean. + +For two or three years after getting his degree he taught in the +medical school as demonstrator, eking out his scant income by +tutoring students in anatomy. His sure hand and clear decision +in any situation marked him as a practitioner of power, and he +had thoughts once of devoting himself to the most delicate of +all surgery,—that of the eye. He was even then groping for his +life-work, without knowing it, for it was always light, light—the +source or avenue or effect of it—that held him. And presently his +work found him. + +It has been said that Finsen was a sick man. A mysterious +malady[15] with dropsical symptoms clutched him from the earliest +days with ever tightening grip, and all his manhood’s life he was a +great but silent sufferer. Perhaps it was that; perhaps it was the +bleak North in which his young years had been set that turned him +to the light as the source of life and healing. He said it himself: +“It was because I needed it so much, I longed for it so.” Probably +it was both. Add to them his unique power of turning the things +of every day life to account in his scientific research, and one +begins to understand at once his success and his speedy popularity. +He dealt with the humble things of life, and got to the heart of +things on that road. And the people comprehended; the wise men fell +in behind him—sometimes a long way behind. + +[Illustration: DR. NIELS FINSEN] + +In the yard of Regentsen there grows a famous old linden tree. +Standing at his window one day and watching its young leaf sprout, +Finsen saw a cat sunning itself on the pavement. The shadow of the +house was just behind it and presently crept up on pussy who got +up, stretched herself, and moved into the sunlight. In a little +while the shadow overtook her there, and pussy moved once more. +Finsen watched the shadow rout her out again and again. It was +clear that the cat liked the sunlight. + +A few days later he stood upon a bridge and saw a little squad of +insects sporting on the water. They drifted down happily with the +stream till they came within the shadow of the bridge, when they at +once began to work their way up a piece to get a fresh start for a +sunlight sail. Finsen knew just how they felt. His own room looked +north and was sunless; his work never prospered as it did when he +sat with a friend whose room was on the south side, where the sun +came in. It was warm and pleasant; but was that all? Was it only +the warmth that made the birds break into song when the sun came +out on a cloudy day, made the insects hum joyously and man himself +walk with a more springy step? The housekeeper who “sunned” the +bed-clothes and looked with suspicion on a dark room had something +else in mind; the sun “disinfected” the bedding. Finsen wanted to +know what it was in the sunlight that had this power, and how we +could borrow it and turn it to use. + +The men of science had long before analyzed the sunlight. They had +broken it up into the rays of different color that together make +the white light we see. Any boy can do it with a prism, and in the +band or spectrum of red, yellow, green, blue, and violet that then +appears, he has before him the cipher that holds the key to the +secrets of the universe if we but knew how to read it aright; for +the sunlight is the physical source of all life and of all power. +The different colors represent rays with different wave-lengths; +that is, they vibrate with different speed and do different work. +The red vibrate only half as fast as the violet, at the other end +of the spectrum, and, roughly speaking, they are the heat carriers. +The blue and violet are cold by comparison. They are the force +carriers. They have power to cause chemical changes, hence are +known as the chemical or actinic rays. It is these the photographer +shuts out of his dark room, where he intrenches himself behind a +ruby-colored window. The chemical ray cannot pass that; if it did +it would spoil his plate. + +This much was known, and it had been suggested more than once +that the “disinfecting” qualities of the sunlight might be due +to the chemical rays killing germs. Finsen, experimenting with +earthworms, earwigs, and butterflies, in a box covered with glass +of the different colors of the spectrum, noted first that the bugs +that naturally burrowed in darkness became uneasy in the blue +light. As fast as they were able, they got out of it and crawled +into the red, where they lay quiet and apparently content. When +the glass covers were changed they wandered about until they found +the red light again. The earwigs were the smartest. They developed +an intelligent grasp of the situation, and soon learned to make +straight for the red room. The butterflies, on the other hand, +liked the red light only to sleep in. It was made clear by many +such experiments that the chemical rays, and they only, had power +to stimulate, to “stir life.” Finsen called it that himself. In the +language of the children, he was getting “warm.” + +That this power, like any other, had its perils, and that nature, +if not man, was awake to them, he proved by some simple experiments +with sunburn. He showed that the tan which boys so covet was the +defence the skin puts forth against the blue ray. The inflammation +of sunburn is succeeded by the brown pigmentation that henceforth +stands guard like the photographer’s ruby window, protecting the +deeper layers of the skin. The black skin of the negro was no +longer a mystery. It is his protection against the fierce sunlight +of the tropics and the injurious effect of its chemical ray. + +Searching the libraries in Copenhagen for the records of earlier +explorers in his field, and finding little enough there, Finsen +came across the report of an American army surgeon on a smallpox +epidemic in the South in the thirties of the last century. There +were so many sick in the fort that, every available room being +filled, they had to put some of the patients into the bomb-proof, +to great inconvenience all-round, as it was entirely dark there. +The doctor noted incidentally that, as if to make up for it, the +underground patients got well sooner and escaped pitting. To him +it was a curious incident, nothing more. Upon Dr. Finsen, sitting +there with the seventy-five-year-old report from over the sea in +his hand, it burst with a flood of light: the patients got well +without scarring _because_ they were in the dark. Red light or +darkness, it was all the same. The point was that the chemical rays +that could cause sunburn on men climbing glaciers, and had power to +irritate the sick skin, were barred out. Within a month he jolted +the medical world by announcing that smallpox patients treated +under red light would recover readily and without disfigurement. + +The learned scoffed. There were some of them who had read of the +practice in the Middle Ages of smothering smallpox patients in +red blankets, giving them red wine to drink and hanging the room +with scarlet. Finsen had not heard of it, and was much interested. +Evidently they had been groping toward the truth. How they came +upon the idea is not the only mystery of that strange day, for +they knew nothing of actinic rays or sunlight analyzed. But Finsen +calmly invited the test, which was speedy in coming. + +They had smallpox in Bergen, Norway, and there the matter was +put to the proof with entire success; later in Sweden and in +Copenhagen. The patients who were kept under the red light +recovered rapidly, though some of them were unvaccinated children, +and bad cases. In no instance was the most dangerous stage of the +disease, the festering stage, reached; the temperature did not rise +again, and they all came out unscarred. + +Finsen pointed out that where other methods of treatment such as +painting the face with iodine or lunar caustic, or covering it +with a mask or with fat, had met with any success in the past, the +same principle was involved of protecting the skin from the light, +though the practitioner did not know it. He was doing the thing +they did in the middle ages, and calling them quacks. + +It is strange but true that Dr. Finsen had never seen a smallpox +patient at that time, but he knew the nature of the disease, and +that the sufferer was affected by its eruption first and worst on +the face and hands—that is to say, on the parts of the body exposed +to the light—and he was as sure of his ground as was Leverrier +when, fifty years before, he bade his fellow astronomers look in a +particular spot of the heavens for an unknown planet that disturbed +the movements of Uranus. And they found the one we call Neptune +there. + +Presently all the world knew that the first definite step had been +taken toward harnessing in the service of man the strange force +in the sunlight that had been the object of so much speculation +and conjecture. The next step followed naturally. In the published +account of his early experiments Finsen foreshadows it in the +words, “That the beginning has been made with the hurtful effects +of this force is odd enough, since without doubt its beneficial +effect is far greater.” His clear head had already asked the +question: if the blue rays of the sun can penetrate deep enough +into the skin to cause injury, why should they not be made to do +police duty there, and catch and kill offending germs—in short, to +heal? + +Finsen had demonstrated the correctness of the theory that the +chemical rays have power to kill germs. But it happens that these +are the rays that possess the least penetration. How to make +them go deeper was the problem. By an experiment that is, in its +simplicity, wholly characteristic of the man, he demonstrated that +the red blood in the deeper layers of the skin was the obstacle. He +placed a piece of photographic paper behind the lobe of his wife’s +ears and concentrated powerful blue rays on the other side. Five +minutes of exposure made no impression on the paper; it remained +white. But when he squeezed all the blood out of the lobe, by +pressing it between two pieces of glass, the paper was blackened in +twenty seconds. + +That night Finsen knew that he had within his grasp that which +would make him a rich man if he so chose. He had only to construct +apparatus to condense the chemical rays and double their power +many times, and to apply his discovery in medical practice. Wealth +and fame would come quickly. He told the writer in his own simple +way how he talked it over with his wife. They were poor. Finsen’s +salary as a teacher at the university was something like $1200 a +year. He was a sick man, and wealth would buy leisure and luxury. +Children were growing up about them who needed care. They talked it +out together, and resolutely turned their backs upon it all. Hand +in hand they faced the world with their sacrifice. What remained of +life to him was to be devoted to suffering mankind. That duty done, +what came they would meet together. Wealth never came, but fame in +full measure, and the love and gratitude of their fellow-men. + +There is a loathsome disease called lupus, of which, happily, in +America with our bright skies we know little. Lupus is the Latin +word for wolf, and the ravenous ailment is fitly named, for it +attacks by preference the face, and gnaws at the features, at nose, +chin, or eye, with horrible, torturing persistence, killing slowly, +while the patient shuts himself out from the world praying daily +for death to end his misery. + +In the north of Europe it is sadly common, and there had never been +any cure for it. Ointments, burning, surgery—they were all equally +useless. Once the wolf had buried its fangs in its victim, he was +doomed to inevitable death. The disease is, in fact, tuberculosis +of the skin, and is the most dreadful of all the forms in which the +white plague scourges mankind—was, until one day Finsen announced +to the world his second discovery, that lupus was cured by the +simple application of light. + +It was not a conjecture, a theory, like the red light treatment for +smallpox; it was a fact. For two years he had been sending people +away whole and happy who came to him in despair. The wolf was +slain, and by this silent sufferer whose modest establishment was +all contained within a couple of small shanties in a corner of the +city hospital grounds, at Copenhagen. + +There was a pause of amazed incredulity. The scientific men did +not believe it. Three years later, when the physician in charge +of Finsen’s clinic told at the medical congress in Paris of the +results obtained at the Light Institute, his story was still +received with a polite smile. The smile became astonishment when, +at a sign from him, the door opened and twelve healed lupus +patients came in, each carrying a photograph of himself as he was +before he underwent the treatment. Still the doctors could not +grasp it. The thing was too simple as matched against all their +futile skill. + +But the people did not doubt. There was a rush from all over Europe +to Copenhagen. Its streets became filled with men and women whose +faces were shrouded in heavy bandages, and it was easy to tell +the new-comers from those who had seen “the professor.” They came +in gloom and misery; they went away carrying in their faces the +sunshine that gave them back their life. Finsen never tired, when +showing friends over his Institute, of pointing out the joyous +happiness of his patients. It was his reward. For not “science +for science’s sake,” or pride in his achievement, was his aim and +thought, but just the wish to do good where he could. Then, in +three more years, they awarded him the great Nobel prize for signal +service to humanity, and criticism was silenced. All the world +applauded. + +“They gave it to me this year,” said Finsen, with his sad little +smile, “because they knew that next year it would have been too +late.” And he prophesied truly. He died nine months later. + +All that is here set down seems simple enough. But it was +achieved with infinite toil and patience, by the most painstaking +experiments, many times repeated to make sure. In his method of +working Finsen was eminently conservative and thorough. Nothing +“happened” with him. There was ever behind his doings a definite +purpose for which he sought a way, and the higher the obstacles +piled up the more resolutely he set his teeth and kept right on. +“The thing is not in itself so difficult,” he said, when making +ready for his war upon the wolf, “but the road is long and the +experiments many before we find the right way.” + +He took no new step before he had planted his foot firmly in the +one that went before; but once he knew where he stood, he did not +hesitate to question any scientific dogma that opposed him, always +in his own quiet way, backed by irrefutable facts. In a remarkable +degree he had the faculty of getting down through the husk to the +core of things, but he rejected nothing untried. The little thing +in hand, he ever insisted, if faithfully done might hold the key +to the whole problem; only let it be done _now_ to get the matter +settled. + +Whatever his mind touched it made perfectly clear, if it was not +so already. As a teacher of anatomy he invented a dissecting knife +that was an improvement on those in use, and clamps for securing +the edges of a wound in an operation. As a rifle shot he made an +improved breech; as a physician, observing the progress of his +own disease, an effective blood powder for anaemia. At the Light +Institute, which friends built for him, and the government endowed, +he devised the powerful electric lamps to which he turned in +the treatment of lupus, for the sun does not shine every day in +Copenhagen; and when it did not, the lenses that gathered the blue +rays and concentrated them upon the swollen faces were idle. And +gradually he increased their power, checking the heat rays that +would slip through and threatened to scorch the patient’s skin, by +cunning devices of cooling streams trickling through the tubes and +the hollow lenses. + +Nothing was patented; it was all given freely to the world. The +decision which he and his wife made together was made once for +all. When the great Nobel prize was given to him he turned it over +to the Light Institute, and was with difficulty persuaded to keep +half of it for himself only when friends raised an equal amount and +presented it to the Institute. + +Finsen knew that his discoveries were but the first groping steps +upon a new road that stretched farther ahead than any man now +living can see. He was content to have broken the way. His faith +was unshaken in the ultimate treatment of the whole organism under +electric light that, by concentrating the chemical rays, would +impart to the body their life-giving power. He himself was beyond +their help. Daily he felt life slipping from him, but no word of +complaint passed his lips. He prescribed for himself a treatment +that, if anything, was worse than the disease. Only a man of iron +will could have carried it through. + +A set of scales stood on the table before him, and for years he +weighed every mouthful of food he ate. He suffered tortures from +thirst because he would allow no fluid to pass his lips, on account +of his tendency to dropsy. Through it all he cheerfully kept up his +labors, rejoicing that he was allowed to do so much. His courage +was indomitable; his optimism under it all unwavering. His favorite +contention was that there is nothing in the world that is not good +for something, except war. That he hated, and his satire on the +militarism of Europe as its supreme folly was sharp and biting. + +Of such quality was this extraordinary man of whom half the world +was talking while the fewest, even in his own home city, ever saw +him. Fewer still knew him well. It suited his temper and native +modesty, as it did the state of his bodily health, to keep himself +secluded. His motto was: “_bene vixit qui bene latuit_—he has +lived well who has kept himself well hidden”—and his contention +was always that in proportion as one could keep himself in the +background his cause prospered, if it was a good cause. When kings +and queens came visiting, he could not always keep in hiding, +though he often tried. On one of his days of extreme prostration +the dowager empress of Russia knocked vainly at his door. She +pleaded so hard to be allowed to see Dr. Finsen that they relented +at last, and she sat by his bed and wept in sympathy with his +sufferings, while he with his brave smile on lips that would twitch +with pain did his best to comfort her. She and Queen Alexandra, +both daughters of King Christian, carried the gospel of hope and +healing from his study to their own lands, and Light Institutes +sprang up all over Europe. + +In his own life he treated nearly nineteen hundred sufferers, +two-thirds of them lupus patients, and scarce a handful went from +his door unhelped. When his work was done he fell asleep with +a smile upon his lips, and the “universal judgment was one of +universal thanksgiving that he had lived.” He was forty-three years +old. + +When the news of his death reached the Rigsdag, the Danish +parliament, it voted his widow a pension such as had been given to +few Danes in any day. The king, his sons and daughters, and, as it +seemed, the whole people followed his body to the grave. The rock +from his native island marks the place where he lies. His work is +his imperishable monument. His epitaph he wrote himself in the +speech another read when the Nobel prize was awarded him, for he +was then too ill to speak. + +“May the Light Institute grasp the obligation that comes with its +success, the obligation to maintain what I account the highest aim +in science—truth, faithful work, and sound criticism.” + + +Footnotes: + +[15] The autopsy which he himself ordered on his death-bed as his +last contribution to medical knowledge, showed it to be a slow +ossification of the membrane of the heart, involving the liver and +all the vital organs. He was “tapped” for dropsy more than twenty +times. + + +Printed in the United States of America. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH *** + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will +be renamed. + +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the +United States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. + +START: FULL LICENSE + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the +person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph +1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the +Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when +you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work +on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: + + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and + most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no + restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it + under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this + eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the + United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where + you are located before using this eBook. + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format +other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain +Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +provided that: + +* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation." + +* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm + works. + +* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + +* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at +www.gutenberg.org + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without +widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular +state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. + +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: www.gutenberg.org + +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/12481-0.zip b/12481-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..87c72ae --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-0.zip diff --git a/12481-h.zip b/12481-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..027c828 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h.zip diff --git a/12481-h/12481-h.htm b/12481-h/12481-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d9288e --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/12481-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,6699 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html> +<html lang="en"> +<head> + <meta charset="UTF-8"> + <title> + Hero tales of the far north, by Jacob A. Riis—A Project Gutenberg eBook + </title> + <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover"> + +<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Hero tales of the far north, by Jacob A. Riis</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online +at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you +are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the +country where you are located before using this eBook. +</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Hero tales of the far north</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Jacob A. Riis</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: January 1, 1999 [eBook #12481]<br /> +[Most recently updated: December 21, 2022]</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: Janet Kegg</div> +<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH ***</div> + + <style> +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + +h1,h2,h3 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + +h1 { + font-weight: bold; + font-size: 240% + } +h2 { + margin-top: 4em; + font-weight: bold; + font-size: 200% + } +h3 { + font-weight: bold; + font-size: 150% + } + + +p { + margin-top: .51em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .49em; + text-indent: 1em; +} + +.p1 {margin-top: 1em;} +.p2 {margin-top: 2em;} +.p2bot {margin-bottom: 2em;} +.p3 {margin-top: 3em;} +.p4 {margin-top: 4em;} + +.fs80 {font-size: 80%;} +.fs100 {font-size: 100%;} +.fs120 {font-size: 120%;} +.fs150 {font-size: 150%;} +.fs240 {font-size: 240%;} + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: 33.5%; + margin-right: 33.5%; + clear: both; +} + +hr.tb {width: 30%; margin-left: 35%; margin-right: 35%;} +hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} +x-ebookmaker hr.chap {width: 0%; display: none;} + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} +h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} + +/* A centered list */ + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + width: 90%; +} + +table.autotable { border-collapse: collapse;} + +.tdl {text-align: left;} +.tdr {text-align: right; padding-right: 1em;} + +.lht {line-height: 1em;} +.lht3 {line-height: 3em;} + +.blockquot { + margin-left: 5%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + +.center {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} +.noindent {text-indent: 0em;} +.right {text-align: right;} +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} +ul {list-style-type: none;} + +.caption {font-weight: normal; + font-size: 70%; +} + +img { + max-width: 100%; + height: auto; +} + +img.w100 {width: 100%;} +img.w80 {width: 80%;} + +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; + page-break-inside: avoid; + max-width: 100%; +} + +.footnotes { + border: dashed 1px; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 3em; + padding-bottom: 1em; + margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; +} + +.footnote { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + font-size: 90%; +} + +.footnote p {text-indent: 0em;} + +.footnote .label { + position: absolute; + right: 70%; + text-align: right; +} + +.fnanchor { + vertical-align: super; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: none; +} + +.poetry-container {text-align: center;} +.poetry {text-align: left; margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%;} +.poetry .stanza {margin: 1em 0 0 0;} +.poetry .verse {text-indent: -3em; padding-left: 3em;} +.poetry {display: inline-block; font-size: 80%} + +.x-ebookmaker .poetry {display: block;} + +/* Poetry indents */ +.poetry .indent0 {text-indent: 0em;} +.poetry .indent2 {text-indent: 2em;} + +.illowp70 {width: 70%;} +.illowe18 {width: 18em;} + +x-ebookmaker-drop, .x-ebookmaker-drop {} + + + </style> + </head> +<body> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter illowp70" id="cover"> +<img alt="Public domain cover" class="w80" src="images/cover.jpg"> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h1>HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH</h1> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<div class="figcenter illowe18" style="max-width: 30em;" id="Publisher_colophon"> +<img alt="Publisher Colophon" class="w100" src="images/i-colophon.jpg"> +</div> + +<p class="center p2 noindent"><span class="fs100">THE MACMILLAN COMPANY</span><br> +<span class="fs80">NEW YORK · BOSTON · CHICAGO<br> +ATLANTA · SAN FRANCISCO</span></p> + +<p class="center p2 noindent"><span class="fs100 p2">MACMILLAN & CO.,</span> <span class="smcap fs100">Limited</span><br> +<span class="fs80">LONDON · BOMBAY · CALCUTTA<br> +MELBOURNE</span></p> + +<p class="center p2 noindent"><span class="fs100 p2">THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA</span>, <span class="smcap fs100">Ltd.</span><br> +<span class="fs80">TORONTO</span></p> +</div> + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="frontis"> +<img alt="Frontispiece" class="w100" src="images/i-frontis.jpg"> +<div class="caption center"><span class="smcap">Frederiksborg</span> +<p class="noindent"><em>See page <a href="#182">182</a></em></p> +</div> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<p class="center noindent fs240 p4">HERO TALES<br> +OF THE FAR NORTH</p> + +<p class="center noindent p2"><span class="fs120">By</span><br> +<span class="fs150">JACOB A. RIIS</span></p> + +<p class="center noindent p2 fs100">AUTHOR OF “HOW THE OTHER HALF LIVES”<br> +“THE MAKING OF AN AMERICAN”<br> +“THE OLD TOWN,” ETC.</p> + +<p class="center noindent p2"><span class="fs120">New York</span><br> +<span class="fs150">THE MACMILLAN COMPANY<br> +1919</span> + +<p class="center noindent fs100 p1"><em>All rights reserved</em></p> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<p class="center noindent p4"><span class="smcap fs100">Copyright</span>, <span class="fs100">1910</span>,<br> +<span class="smcap fs120">By</span> <span class="fs120">THE MACMILLAN COMPANY</span>. + +<p class="center noindent p1 fs100">Set up and electrotyped. Published September, 1910.</p> + +<p class="center noindent p3 fs100">Norwood Press<br> +J. S. Cushing Co.—Berwick & Smith Co.<br> +Norwood, Mass. U.S.A.</p> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<p class="center noindent p4"><span class="fs120">THIS BOOK OF MY DEAD HEROES</span><br> +<span class=" fs120 lht">I DEDICATE TO MY LIVING HERO</span><br> + +<span class=" fs150 lht3">THEODORE ROOSEVELT</span><br> + +<span class=" fs120 lht3">MAY IT BE MANY YEARS BEFORE THE LAST CHAPTER</span><br> +<span class=" fs120 lht">OF HIS SPLENDID WHOLESOME LIFE IS</span><br> +<span class=" fs120 lht">WRITTEN IN THE PAGES OF OUR</span><br> +<span class=" fs120 lht">COUNTRY’S HISTORY</span></p> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="FOREWORD">FOREWORD</h2> +</div> + +<p>When a man knocks at Uncle Sam’s gate, craving admission to his +house, we ask him how much money he brings, lest he become a +hindrance instead of a help. If now we were to ask what he brings, +not only in his pocket, but in his mind and in his heart, this +stranger, what ideals he owns, what company he kept in the country +he left that shaped his hopes and ambitions,—might it not, if the +answer were right, be a help to a better mutual understanding +between host and guest? For the <i>Mayflower</i> did not hold all who in +this world have battled for freedom of home, of hope, and of +conscience. The struggle is bigger than that. Every land has its +George Washington, its Kosciusko, its William Tell, its Garibaldi, +its Kossuth, if there is but one that has a Joan d’Arc. What we want +to know of the man is: were its heroes his?</p> + +<p>This book is an attempt to ask and to answer that question for my +own people, in a very small and simple way, it is true, but perhaps +abler pens with more leisure than mine may follow the trail it has +blazed. I should like to see some Swede write of the heroes of his +noble, chivalrous people, whom lack of space has made me slight +here, though I count them with my own. I should like to hear the +epic of United Italy, of proud and freedom-loving Hungary, the +swan-song of unhappy Poland, chanted to young America again and +again, to help us all understand that we are kin in the things that +really count, and help us pull together as we must if we are to make +the most of our common country.</p> + +<p>These were my—our—heroes, then. Every lad of Northern blood, whose +heart is in the right place, loves them. And he need make no excuses +for any of them. Nor has he need of bartering them for the great of +his new home; they go very well together. It is partly for his sake +I have set their stories down here. All too quickly he lets go his +grip on them, on the new shore. Let him keep them and cherish them +with the memories of the motherland. The immigrant America wants and +needs is he who brings the best of the old home to the new, not he +who threw it overboard on the voyage. In the great melting-pot it +will tell its story for the good of us all.</p> + +<p>To those who wonder that I have left the Saga era of the North +untouched, I would say that I have preferred to deal here only with +downright historic figures. For valuable aid rendered in insuring +accuracy I am indebted to the services of Dr. P.A. Rydberg, Dr. J. +Emile Blomén, Gustaf V. Lindner, and Professor Joakim Reinhard. My +thanks are due likewise to many friends, Danes by birth like myself, +who have helped me with the illustrations.</p> + +<p class="noindent right">J. A. R.   </p> + +<p class="noindent"><span class="smcap">Richmond Hill</span>,<br> +    June, 1910.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CONTENTS">CONTENTS</h2> + +<table class="autotable"> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Knight Errant of the Sea</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#1">1</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Hans Egede, the Apostle to Greenland</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#31">31</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Gustav Vasa, the Father of Sweden</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#61">61</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Absalon, Warrior Bishop of the North</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#87">87</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">King Valdemar, and the Story of the Dannebrog</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#125">125</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">How the Ghost of the Heath was laid</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#153">153</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">King Christian IV</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#179">179</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Gustav Adolf, the Snow-King</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#205">205</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">King and Sailor, Heroes of Copenhagen</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#239">239</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Trooper who won a War alone</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#263">263</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Carl Linné, King of the Flowers</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#277">277</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Niels Finsen, the Wolf-Slayer</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#305">305</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="A_KNIGHT_ERRANT_OF_THE_SEA">A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA<a id="1"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>The Eighteenth Century broke upon a noisy family quarrel in the +north of Europe. Charles the Twelfth of Sweden, the royal hotspur of +all history, and Frederik of Denmark had fallen out. Like their +people, they were first cousins, and therefore all the more bent on +settling the old question which was the better man. After the +fashion of the lion and the unicorn, they fought “all about the +town,” and, indeed, about every town that came in their way, now +this and now that side having the best of it. On the sea, which was +the more important because neither Swedes nor Danes could reach +their fighting ground or keep up their armaments without command of +the waterways, the victory rested finally with the Danes. And this +was due almost wholly to one extraordinary figure, the like of which +is scarce to be found in the annals of warfare, Peder Tordenskjold. +Rising in ten brief years from the humblest place before the mast, +a half-grown lad, to the rank of admiral, ennobled by his King and +the idol of two nations, only to be assassinated on the “field of +honor” at thirty, he seems the very incarnation of the stormy times +of the Eleven Years’ War, with which his sun rose and set; for the +year in which peace was made also saw his death.</p> + +<p>Peder Jansen Wessel was born on October 28, 1690, in the city of +Trondhjem, Norway, which country in those days was united with +Denmark under one king. His father was an alderman with eighteen +children. Peder was the tenth of twelve wild boys. It is related +that the father in sheer desperation once let make for him a pair of +leathern breeches which he would not be able to tear. But the lad, +not to be beaten so easily, sat on a grind-stone and had one of his +school-fellows turn it till the seat was worn thin, a piece of +bravado that probably cost him dear, for doubtless the exasperated +father’s stick found the attenuated spot.</p> + +<p>Since he would have none of the school, his father had him +apprenticed out to a tailor with the injunction not to spare the +rod. But sitting cross-legged on a tailor’s stool did not suit the +lad, and he took it out of his master by snowballing him thoroughly +one winter’s day. Next a barber undertook to teach him his trade; +but Peder ran away and was drifting about the streets when the King +came to Norway. The boy saw the splendid uniforms and heard the +story of the beautiful capital by the Öresund, with its palaces and +great fighting ships. When the King departed, he was missing, and +for a while there was peace in Trondhjem.</p> + +<p>Down in Copenhagen the homeless lad was found wandering about by the +King’s chaplain, who, being himself a Norwegian, took him home and +made him a household page. But the boy’s wanderings had led him to +the navy-yard, where he saw mid-shipmen of his own size at drill, +and he could think of nothing else. When he should have been waiting +at table he was down among the ships. For him there was ever but one +way to any goal, the straight cut, and at fifteen he wrote to the +King asking to be appointed a midshipman. “I am wearing away my life +as a servant,” he wrote. “I want to give it, and my blood, to the +service of your Majesty, and I will serve you with all my might +while I live!”</p> + +<p>The navy had need of that kind of recruits, and the King saw to it +that he was apprenticed at once. And that was the beginning of his +strangely romantic career.</p> + +<p>Three years he sailed before the mast and learned seamanship, while +Charles was baiting the Muscovite and the North was resting on its +arms. Then came Pultava and the Swedish King’s crushing defeat. The +storm-centre was transferred to the North again, and the war on the +sea opened with a splendid deed, fit to appeal to any ardent young +heart. At the battle in the Bay of Kjöge, the <i>Dannebrog</i>, commanded +by Ivar Hvitfeldt, caught fire, and by its position exposed the +Danish fleet to great danger. Hvitfeldt could do one of two things: +save his own life and his men’s by letting his ship drift before the +wind and by his escape risking the rest of the fleet and losing the +battle, or stay where he was to meet certain death. He chose the +latter, anchored his vessel securely, and fought on until the ship +was burned down to the water’s edge and blew up with him and his +five hundred men. Ivar Hvitfeldt’s name is forever immortal in the +history of his country. A few years ago they raised the wreck of the +<i>Dannebrog</i>, fitly called after the Danish flag, and made of its +guns a monument that stands on Langelinie, the beautiful shore road +of Copenhagen.</p> + +<p>Fired by such deeds, young Wessel implored the King, before he had +yet worn out his first midshipman’s jacket, to give him command of a +frigate. He compromised on a small privateer, the <i>Ormen</i>, but with +it he did such execution in Swedish waters and earned such renown as +a dauntless sailor and a bold scout whose information about the +enemy was always first and best, that before spring they gave him a +frigate with eighteen guns and the emphatic warning “not to engage +any enemy when he was not clearly the stronger.” He immediately +brought in a Swedish cruiser, the <i>Alabama</i> of those days, that had +been the terror of the sea. In a naval battle in the Baltic soon +after, he engaged with his little frigate two of the enemy’s +line-of-battle ships that were trying to get away, and only when a +third came to help them did he retreat, so battered that he had to +seek port to make repairs. Accused of violating his orders, his +answer was prompt: “I promised your Majesty to do my best, and I +did.” King Frederik IV, himself a young and spirited man, made him a +captain, jumping him over fifty odd older lieutenants, and gave him +leave to war on the enemy as he saw fit.</p> + +<p>The immediate result was that the Governor of Göteborg, the enemy’s +chief seaport in the North Sea, put a price on his head. Captain +Wessel heard of it and sent word into town that he was outside—to +come and take him; but to hurry, for time was short. While waiting +for a reply, he fell in with two Swedish men-of-war having in tow a +Danish prize. That was not to be borne, and though they together +mounted ninety-four guns to his eighteen, he fell upon them like a +thunderbolt. They beat him off, but he returned for their prize. +That time they nearly sank him with three broad-sides. However, he +ran for the Norwegian coast and saved his ship. In his report of +this affair he excuses himself for running away with the reflection +that allowing himself to be sunk “would not rightly have benefited +his Majesty’s service.”</p> + +<p>However, the opportunity came to him swiftly of “rightly +benefiting” the King’s service. After the battle of Kolberger Heide, +that had gone against the Swedes, he found them beaching their ships +under cover of the night to prevent their falling into the hands of +the victors. Wessel halted them with the threat that every man Jack +in the fleet should be made to walk the plank, saved the ships, and +took their admiral prisoner to his chief. When others slept, Wessel +was abroad with his swift sailer. If wind and sea went against him, +he knew how to turn his mishap to account. Driven in under the +hostile shore once, he took the opportunity, as was his wont, to get +the lay of the land and of the enemy. He learned quickly that in the +harbor of Wesensö, not far away, a Swedish cutter was lying with a +Danish prize. She carried eight guns and had a crew of thirty-six +men; but though he had at the moment only eighteen sailors in his +boat, he crept up the coast at once, slipped quietly in after +sundown, and took ship and prize with a rush, killing and throwing +overboard such as resisted. In Sweden mothers hushed their crying +children with his dreaded name; on the sea they came near to +thinking him a troll, so sudden and unexpected were his onsets. But +there was no witchcraft about it. He sailed swiftly because he was a +skilled sailor and because he missed no opportunity to have the +bottom of his ship scraped and greased. And when on board, pistol +and cutlass hung loose; for it was a time of war with a brave and +relentless foe.</p> + +<p>His reconnoitring expeditions he always headed himself, and +sometimes he went alone. Thus, when getting ready to take Marstrand, +a fortified seaport of great importance to Charles, he went ashore +disguised as a fisherman and peddled fish through the town, even in +the very castle itself, where he took notice, along with the +position of the guns and the strength of the garrison, of the fact +that the commandant had two pretty daughters. He was a sailor, sure +enough. Once when ashore on such an expedition, he was surprised by +a company of dragoons. His men escaped, but the dragoons cut off his +way to the shore. As they rode at him, reaching out for his sword, +he suddenly dashed among them, cut one down, and, diving through the +surf, swam out to the boat, his sword between his teeth. Their +bullets churned up the sea all about him, but he was not hit. He +seemed to bear a charmed life; in all his fights he was wounded but +once. That was in the attack on the strongly fortified port of +Strömstad, in which he was repulsed with a loss of 96 killed and 246 +wounded, while the Swedish loss footed up over 1500, a fight which +led straight to the most astonishing chapter in his whole career, of +which more anon.</p> + +<p>All Denmark and Norway presently rang with the stories of his +exploits. They were always of the kind to appeal to the imagination, +for in truth he was a very knight errant of the sea who fought for +the love of it as well as of the flag, ardent patriot that he was. A +brave and chivalrous foe he loved next to a loyal friend. Cowardice +he loathed. Once when ordered to follow a retreating enemy with his +frigate <i>Hvide Örnen</i> (the White Eagle) of thirty guns, he hugged +him so close that in the darkness he ran his ship into the great +Swedish man-of-war <i>Ösel</i> of sixty-four guns. The chance was too +good to let pass. Seeing that the <i>Ösel’s</i> lower gun-ports were +closed, and reasoning from this that she had been struck in the +water-line and badly damaged, he was for boarding her at once, but +his men refused to follow him. In the delay the <i>Ösel</i> backed away. +Captain Wessel gave chase, pelted her with shot, and called to her +captain, whose name was <i>Söstjerna</i> (sea-star), to stop.</p> + +<p>“Running away from a frigate, are you? Shame on you, coward and +poltroon! Stay and fight like a man for your King and your flag!”</p> + +<p>Seeing him edge yet farther away, he shouted in utter exasperation, +“Your name shall be dog-star forever, not sea-star, if you don’t +stay.”</p> + +<p>“But all this,” he wrote sadly to the King, “with much more which +was worse, had no effect.”</p> + +<p>However, on his way back to join the fleet he ran across a convoy of +ten merchant vessels, guarded by three of the enemy’s line-of-battle +ships. He made a feint at passing, but, suddenly turning, swooped +down upon the biggest trader, ran out his boats, made fast, and +towed it away from under the very noses of its protectors. It meant +prize-money for his men, but their captain did not forget their +craven conduct of the night, which had made him lose a bigger +prize, and with the money they got a sound flogging.</p> + +<p>The account of the duel between his first frigate, <i>Lövendahl’s +Galley</i>, of eighteen guns, and a Swede of twenty-eight guns reads +like the doings of the old vikings, and indeed both commanders were +likely descended straight from those arch fighters. Wessel certainly +was. The other captain was an English officer, Bactman by name, who +was on the way to deliver his ship, that had been bought in England, +to the Swedes. They met in the North Sea and fell to fighting by +noon of one day. The afternoon of the next saw them at it yet. Twice +the crew of the Swedish frigate had thrown down their arms, refusing +to fight any more. Vainly the vessel had tried to get away; the Dane +hung to it like a leech. In the afternoon of the second day Wessel +was informed that his powder had given out. He had a boat sent out +with a herald, who presented to Captain Bactman his regrets that he +had to quit for lack of powder, but would he come aboard and shake +hands?</p> + +<p>The Briton declined. Meanwhile the ships had drifted close enough to +speak through the trumpet, and Captain Wessel shouted over from his +quarter-deck that “if he could lend him a little powder, they might +still go on.” Captain Bactman smilingly shook his head, and then the +two drank to one another’s health, each on his own quarter-deck, and +parted friends, while their crews manned what was left of the yards +and cheered each other wildly.</p> + +<p>Wessel’s enemies, of whom he had many, especially among the +nobility, who looked upon him as a vulgar upstart, used this +incident to bring him before a court-martial. It was unpatriotic, +they declared, and they demanded that he be degraded and fined. His +defence, which with all the records of his career are in the Navy +Department at Copenhagen, was brief but to the point. It is summed +up in the retort to his accusers that “they themselves should be +rebuked, and severely, for failing to understand that an officer in +the King’s service should be promoted instead of censured for doing +his plain duty,” and that there was nothing in the articles of war +commanding him to treat an honorable foe otherwise than with honor.</p> + +<p>It must be admitted that he gave his critics no lack of cause. His +enterprises were often enough of a hair-raising kind, and he had +scant patience with censure. Thus once, when harassed by an +Admiralty order purposely issued to annoy him, he wrote back: “The +biggest fool can see that to obey would defeat all my plans. I shall +not do it. It may suit folk who love loafing about shore, but to an +honest man such talk is disgusting, let alone that the thing can’t +be done.” He was at that time twenty-six years old, and in charge of +the whole North Sea fleet. No wonder he had enemies.</p> + +<p>However, the King was his friend. He made him a nobleman, and gave +him the name Tordenskjold. It means “thunder shield.”</p> + +<p>“Then, by the powers,” he swore when he was told, “I shall thunder +in the ears of the Swedes so that the King shall hear of it!” And he +kept his word.</p> + +<p>Charles had determined to take Denmark with one fell blow. He had an +army assembled in Skaane to cross the sound, which was frozen over +solid. All was ready for the invasion in January 1716. The people +throughout Sweden had assembled in the churches to pray for the +success of the King’s arms, and he was there himself to lead; but +in the early morning hours a strong east wind broke up the ice, and +the campaign ended before it was begun. Charles then turned on +Norway, and laid siege to the city of Frederikshald, which, with its +strong fort, Frederiksteen, was the key to that country. A Danish +fleet lay in the Skagerak, blocking his way of reënforcements by +sea. Tordenskjold, with his frigate, <i>Hvide Örnen</i>, and six smaller +ships (the frigate <i>Vindhunden</i> of sixteen guns, and five vessels of +light draught, two of which were heavily armed), was doing scouting +duty for the Admiral when he learned that the entire Swedish fleet +of forty-four ships that was intended to aid in the operations +against Frederikshald lay in the harbor of Dynekilen waiting its +chance to slip out. It was so well shielded there that its commander +sent word to the King to rest easy; nothing could happen to him. He +would join him presently.</p> + +<p>Tordenskjold saw that if he could capture or destroy this fleet +Norway was saved; the siege must perforce be abandoned. And Norway +was his native land, which he loved with his whole fervid soul. But +no time was to be lost. He could not go back to ask for permission, +and one may shrewdly guess that he did not want to, for it would +certainly have been refused. He heard that the Swedish officers, +secure in their stronghold, were to attend a wedding on shore the +next day. His instructions from the Admiralty were: in an emergency +always to hold a council of war, and to abide by its decision. At +daybreak he ran his ship alongside <i>Vindhunden</i>, her companion +frigate, and called to the captain:</p> + +<p>“The Swedish officers are bidden to a wedding, and they have +forgotten us. What do you say—shall we go unasked?”</p> + +<p>Captain Grip was game. “Good enough!” he shouted back. “The wind is +fair, and we have all day. I am ready.”</p> + +<p>That was the council of war and its decision. Tordenskjold gave the +signal to clear for action, and sailed in at the head of his handful +of ships.</p> + +<p>The inlet to the harbor of Dynekilen is narrow and crooked, winding +between reefs and rocky steeps quite two miles, and only in spots +more than four hundred feet wide. Half-way in was a strong battery. +Tordenskjold’s fleet was received with a tremendous fire from all +the Swedish ships, from the battery, and from an army of four +thousand soldiers lying along shore. The Danish ships made no reply. +They sailed up grimly silent till they reached a place wide enough +to let them wear round, broadside on. Then their guns spoke. Three +hours the battle raged before the Swedish fire began to slacken. As +soon as he noticed it, Tordenskjold slipped into the inner harbor +under cover of the heavy pall of smoke, and before the Swedes +suspected their presence they found his ships alongside. Broadside +after broadside crashed into them, and in terror they fled, soldiers +and sailors alike. While they ran Tordenskjold swooped down upon the +half-way battery, seized it, and spiked its guns. The fight was won.</p> + +<p>But the heaviest part was left—the towing out of the captured +ships. All the afternoon Tordenskjold led the work in person, +pulling on ropes, cheering on his men. The Swedes, returning gamely +to the fight, showered them with bullets from shore. One of the +abandoned vessels caught fire. Lieutenant Toender, of Tordenskjold’s +staff, a veteran with a wooden leg, boarded it just as the +quartermaster ran up yelling that the ship was full of powder and +was going to blow up. He tried to jump overboard, but the lieutenant +seized him by the collar and, stumping along, made him lead the way +to the magazine. A fuse had been laid to an open keg of powder, and +the fire was sputtering within an inch of it when Lieutenant Tönder +plucked it out, smothered it between thumb and forefinger, and threw +it through the nearest port-hole. There were two hundred barrels of +powder in the ship.</p> + +<p>Tordenskjold had kept his word to the King. Not as much as a yawl of +the Dynekilen fleet was left to the enemy. He had sunk or burned +thirteen and captured thirty-one ships with his seven, and all the +piled-up munitions of war were in his hands. King Charles gave up +the siege, marched his army out of Norway, and the country was +saved. The victory cost Tordenskjold but nineteen killed and +fifty-seven wounded. On his own ship six men were killed and twenty +wounded.</p> + +<p>Of infinite variety was this sea-fighter. After a victory like this, +one hears of him in the next breath gratifying a passing whim of +the King, who wanted to know what the Swedish people thought of +their Government after Charles’s long wars that are said to have +cost their country a million men. Tordenskjold overheard it, had +himself rowed across to Sweden, picked up there a wedding party, +bridegroom, minister, guests, and all, including the captain of the +shore watch who was among them, and returned in time for the palace +dinner with his catch. King Frederik was entertaining Czar Peter the +Great, who had been boasting of the unhesitating loyalty of his men +which his Danish host could not match. He now had the tables turned +upon him. It is recorded that the King sent the party back with +royal gifts for the bride. One would be glad to add that +Tordenskjold sent back, too, the silver pitcher and the parlor clock +his men took on their visit. But he didn’t. They were still in +Copenhagen a hundred years later, and may be they are yet. It was +not like his usual gallantry toward the fair sex. But perhaps he +didn’t know anything about it.</p> + +<p>Then we find him, after an unsuccessful attack on Göteborg that cost +many lives, sending in his adjutant to congratulate the Swedish +commandant on their “gallant encounter” the day before, and +exchanging presents with him in token of mutual regard. And before +one can turn the page he is discovered swooping down upon Marstrand, +taking town and fleet anchored there, and the castle itself with its +whole garrison, all with two hundred men, swelled by stratagem into +an army of thousands. We are told that an officer sent out from the +castle to parley, issuing forth from a generous dinner, beheld the +besieging army drawn up in street after street, always two hundred +men around every corner, as he made his way through the town, +piloted by Tordenskjold himself, who was careful to take him the +longest way, while the men took the short cut to the next block. The +man returned home with the message that the town was full of them +and that resistance was useless. The ruse smacks of Peder Wessel’s +boyish fight with a much bigger fellow who had beaten him once by +gripping his long hair, and so getting his head in chancery. But +Peder had taken notice. Next time he came to the encounter with hair +cut short and his whole head smeared with soft-soap, and that time +he won.</p> + +<p>The most extraordinary of all his adventures befell when, after the +attack on Strömstad, he was hastening home to Copenhagen. Crossing +the Kattegat in a little smack that carried but two three-pound +guns, he was chased and overtaken by a Swedish frigate of sixteen +guns and a crew of sixty men. Tordenskjold had but twenty-one, and +eight of them were servants and non-combatants. They were dreadfully +frightened, and tradition has it that one of them wept when he saw +the Swede coming on. Her captain called upon him to surrender, but +the answer was flung back:</p> + +<p>“I am Tordenskjold! Come and take me, if you can.”</p> + +<p>With that came a tiny broadside that did brisk execution on the +frigate. Tordenskjold had hauled both his guns over on the “fighting +side” of his vessel. There ensued a battle such as Homer would have +loved to sing. Both sides banged away for all they were worth. In +the midst of the din and smoke Tordenskjold used his musket with +cool skill; his servants loaded while he fired. At every shot a man +fell on the frigate.</p> + +<p>Word was brought that there was no more round shot. He bade them +twist up his pewter dinner service and fire that, which they did. +The Swede tried vainly to board. Tordenskjold manœuvred his smack +with such skill that they could not hook on. Seeing this, Captain +Lind, commander of the frigate, called to him to desist from the +useless struggle; he would be honored to carry such a prisoner into +Göteborg. Back came the taunt:</p> + +<p>“Neither you nor any other Swede shall ever carry me there!” And +with that he shot the captain down.<a id="FNanchor_1" href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></p> + +<p>When his men saw him fall, they were seized with panic and made off +as quickly as they could, while Tordenskjold’s crew, of whom only +fourteen were left, beat their drums and blew trumpets in frantic +defiance. Their captain was for following the Swede and boarding +her, but he couldn’t. Sails, rigging, and masts were shot to pieces. +Perhaps the terror of the Swedes was increased by the sight of +Tordenskjold’s tame bear making faces at them behind his master. It +went with him everywhere till that day, and came out of the fight +unscathed. But during the night the crew ran the vessel on the +Swedish shore, whence Tordenskjold himself reached Denmark in an +open boat which he had to keep bailing all night, for the boat was +shot full of holes, and though he and his companions stuffed their +spare clothing into them it leaked badly. The enemy got the smack, +after all, and the bear, which, being a Norwegian, proved so +untractable on Swedish soil that, sad to relate, in the end they cut +him up and ate him.</p> + +<p>King Charles, himself a knightly soul and an admirer of a gallant +enemy, gave orders to have all Tordenskjold’s belongings sent back +to him, but he did not live to see the order carried out. He was +found dead in the rifle-pits before Frederiksteen on December 11, +1718, shot through the head. It was Tordenskjold himself who brought +the all-important news to King Frederik in the night of December +28,—they were not the days of telegraphs and fast steamers,—and +when the King, who had been roused out of bed to receive him, could +not trust his ears, he said with characteristic audacity, “I wish it +were as true that your Majesty had made me a schoutbynacht,”—the +rank next below admiral. And so he took the step next to the last on +the ladder of his ambition.</p> + +<p>Within seven months he took Marstrand. It is part of the record of +that astonishing performance that when the unhappy Commandant +hesitated as the hour of evacuation came, not sure that he had done +right in capitulating, Tordenskjold walked up to the fort with a +hundred men, half his force, banged on the gate, went in alone and +up to the Commandant’s window, thundering out:</p> + +<p>“What are you waiting for? Don’t you know time is up?”</p> + +<p>In terror and haste, Colonel Dankwardt moved his Hessians out, and +Tordenskjold marched his handful of men in. When he brought the King +the keys of Marstrand, Frederik made him an admiral.</p> + +<p>It was while blockading the port of Göteborg in the last year of the +war that he met and made a friend of Lord Carteret, the English +Ambassador to Denmark, and fell in love with the picture of a young +Englishwoman, Miss Norris, a lady of great beauty and wealth, who, +Lord Carteret told him, was an ardent admirer of his. It was this +love which indirectly sent him to his death. Lord Carteret had given +him a picture of her, and as soon as peace was made he started for +England; but he never reached that country. The remnant of the +Swedish fleet lay in the roadstead at Göteborg, under the guns of +the two forts, New and Old Elfsborg. While Tordenskjold was away at +Marstrand, the enemy sallied forth and snapped up seven of the +smaller vessels of his blockading fleet. The news made him furious. +He sent in, demanding them back at once, “or I will come after +them.” He had already made one ineffectual attempt to take New +Elfsborg that cost him dear. In Göteborg they knew the strength of +his fleet and laughed at his threat. But it was never safe to laugh +at Tordenskjold. The first dark night he stole in with ten armed +boats, seized the shore batteries of the old fort, and spiked their +guns before a shot was fired. The rising moon saw his men in +possession of the ships lying at anchor. With their blue-lined coats +turned inside out so that they might pass for Swedish uniforms, they +surprised the watch in the guard-house and made them all prisoners. +Now that there was no longer reason for caution, they raised a +racket that woke the sleeping town up in a fright. The commander of +the other fort sent out a boat to ascertain the cause. It met the +Admiral’s and challenged it, “Who goes there?”</p> + +<p>“Tordenskjold,” was the reply, “come to teach you to keep awake.”</p> + +<p>It proved impossible to warp the ships out. Only one of the seven +lost ones was recovered; all the rest were set on fire. By the light +of the mighty bonfire Tordenskjold rowed out with his men, hauling +the recovered ship right under the guns of the forts, the Danish +flag flying at the bow of his boat. He had not lost a single man. A +cannon-ball swept away all the oars on one side of his boat, but no +one was hurt.</p> + +<p>At Marstrand they had been up all night listening to the cannonading +and the crash upon crash as the big ships blew up. They knew that +Tordenskjold was abroad with his men. In the morning, when they were +all in church, he walked in and sat down by his chief, the old +Admiral Judicher, who was a slow-going, cautious man. He whispered +anxiously, “What news?” but Tordenskjold only shrugged his shoulders +with unmoved face. It is not likely that either the old Admiral or +the congregation heard much of that sermon, if indeed they heard any +of it. But when it was over, they saw from the walls of the town +the Danish ships at anchor and heard the story of the last of +Tordenskjold’s exploits. It fitly capped the climax of his life. +Sweden’s entire force on the North Sea, with the exception of five +small galleys, had either been captured, sunk, or burned by him.</p> + +<p>The King would not let Tordenskjold go when peace was made, but he +had his way in the end. To his undoing he consented to take with him +abroad a young scalawag, the son of his landlord, who had more money +than brains. In Hamburg the young man fell in with a gambler, a +Swedish colonel by name of Stahl, who fleeced him of all he had and +much more besides. When Tordenskjold heard of it and met the Colonel +in another man’s house, he caned him soundly and threw him out in +the street. For this he was challenged, but refused to fight a +gambler.</p> + +<p>“Friends,” particularly one Colonel Münnichhausen, who volunteered +to be his second, talked him over, and also persuaded him to give up +the pistol, with which he was an expert. The duel was fought at the +Village of Gledinge, over the line from Hanover, on the morning of +November 12, 1720. Tordenskjold was roused from sleep at five, and, +after saying his prayers, a duty he never on any account omitted, he +started for the place appointed. His old body-servant vainly pleaded +with his master to take his stout blade instead of the flimsy parade +sword the Admiral carried. Münnichhausen advised against it; it +would be too heavy, he said. Stahl’s weapon was a long fighting +rapier, and to this the treacherous second made no objection. Almost +at the first thrust he ran the Admiral through. The seconds held his +servant while Stahl jumped on his horse and galloped away. +Tordenskjold breathed out his dauntless soul in the arms of his +faithful servant and friend.</p> + +<p>His body lies in a black marble sarcophagus in the “Navy Church” at +Copenhagen. The Danish and Norwegian peoples have never ceased to +mourn their idol. He was a sailor with a sailor’s faults. But he +loved truth, honor, and courage in foe and friend alike. Like many +seafaring men, he was deeply religious, with the unquestioning faith +of a child. There is a letter in existence written by him to his +father when the latter was on his death-bed that bears witness to +this. He thanks him with filial affection for all his care, and says +naïvely that he would rather have his prayers than fall heir to +twenty thousand daler. His pictures show a stocky, broad-shouldered +youth with frank blue eyes, full lips, and an eagle nose. His deep, +sonorous voice used to be heard, in his midshipman days, above the +whole congregation in the Navy Church. In after years it called +louder still to Denmark’s foes. When things were at their worst in +storm or battle, he was wont to shout to his men, “Hi, <em>now</em> we are +having a fine time!” and his battle-cry has passed into the +language. By it, in desperate straits demanding stout hearts, one +may know the Dane after his own heart, the real Dane, the world +over. Among his own Tordenskjold is still and always will be “the +Admiral of Norway’s fleet.”</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a class="label" href="#FNanchor_1" id="Footnote_1">[1]</a> He was not mortally wounded, and Tordenskjold took him +prisoner later at the capture of Marstrand.</p> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="HANS_EGEDE_THE_APOSTLE_TO_GREENLAND">HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND<a id="31"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>When in the fall of 1909 the statement was flashed around the world +that the North Pole had at last been reached, a name long unfamiliar +ran from mouth to mouth with that of the man who claimed to be its +discoverer. Dr. Cook was coming to Copenhagen, the daily despatches +read, on the Danish Government steamer <i>Hans Egede</i>. A shipload of +reporters kept an anxious lookout from the Skaw for the vessel so +suddenly become famous, but few who through their telescopes made +out the name at last upon the prow of the ship gave it another +thought in the eager welcome to the man it brought back from the +perils of the Farthest North. Yet the name of that vessel stood for +something of more real account to humanity than the attainment of a +goal that had been the mystery of the ages. No such welcome awaited +the explorer Hans Egede, who a hundred and seventy-two years before +sailed homeward over that very route, a broken, saddened man, and +all he brought was the ashes of his best-beloved that they might +rest in her native soil. No gold medal was struck for him; the +people did not greet him with loud acclaim. The King and his court +paid scant attention to him, and he was allowed to live his last +days in poverty. Yet a greater honor is his than ever fell to a +discoverer: the simple natives of Greenland long reckoned the time +from his coming among them. To them he was in their ice-bound home +what Father Damien was to the stricken lepers in the South seas, and +Dr. Grenfell is to the fishermen of Labrador.</p> + +<p>Hans Poulsen Egede, the apostle of Greenland, was a Norwegian of +Danish descent. He was born in the Northlands, in the parish of +Trondenäs, on January 31, 1686. His grandfather and his father +before him had been clergymen in Denmark, the former in the town of +West Egede, whence the name. Graduated in a single year from the +University of Copenhagen, “at which,” his teachers bore witness, “no +one need wonder who knows the man,” he became at twenty-two pastor +of a parish up in the Lofoden Islands, where the fabled maëlstrom +churns. Eleven years he preached to the poor fisherfolk on Sunday, +and on week-days helped his parishioners rebuild the old church. +When it was finished and the bishop came to consecrate it, he chided +Egede because the altar was too fine; it must have cost more than +they could afford.</p> + +<p>“It did not cost anything,” was his reply. “I made it myself.”</p> + +<p>No wonder his fame went far. When the church bell of Vaagen called, +boats carrying Sunday-clad fishermen were seen making for the island +from every point of the compass. Great crowds flocked to his church; +great enough to arouse the jealousy of neighboring preachers who +were not so popular, and they made it so unpleasant that his wife at +last tired of it. They little dreamed that they were industriously +paving the way for his greater work and for his undying fame.</p> + +<p>The sea that surges against that rockbound coast ever called its +people out in quest of adventure. Some who went nine hundred years +ago found a land in the far Northwest barred by great icebergs; but +once inside the barrier, they saw deep fjords like their own at +home, to which the mountains sloped down, covered with a wealth of +lovely flowers. On green meadows antlered deer were grazing, the +salmon leaped in brawling brooks, and birds called for their mates +in the barrens. Above it all towered snow-covered peaks. They saw +only the summer day; they did not know how brief it was, and how +long the winter night, and they called the country Greenland. They +built their homes there, and other settlers came. They were hardy +men, bred in a harsh climate, and they stayed. They built churches +and had their priests and bishops, for Norway was Christian by that +time. And they prospered after their fashion. They even paid Peter’s +Pence to Rome. There is a record that their contribution, being in +kind, namely, walrus teeth, was sold in 1386 by the Pope’s agent to +a merchant in Flanders for twelve livres, fourteen sous. They kept +up communication with their kin across the seas until the Black +Death swept through the Old World in the Fourteenth Century; Norway, +when it was gone, was like a vast tomb. Two-thirds of its people lay +dead. Those who were left had enough to do at home; and Greenland +was forgotten.</p> + +<p>The seasons passed, and the savages, with whom the colonists had +carried on a running feud, came out of the frozen North and +overwhelmed them. Dim traditions that were whispered among the +natives for centuries told of that last fight. It was the Ragnarok +of the Northmen. Not one was left to tell the tale. Long years +after, when fishing vessels landed on that desolate coast, they +found a strange and hostile people in possession. No one had ever +dared to settle there since.</p> + +<p>This last Egede knew, but little more. He believed that there were +still settlements on the inaccessible east coast of Greenland where +descendants of the old Northmen lived, cut off from all the world, +sunk into ignorance and godlessness,—men and women who had once +known the true light,—and his heart yearned to go to their rescue. +Waking and dreaming, he thought of nothing else. The lamp in his +quiet study shone out over the sea at night when his people were +long asleep. Their pastor was poring over old manuscripts and the +logs of whalers that had touched upon Greenland. From Bergen he +gathered the testimony of many sailors. None of them had ever seen +traces of, or heard of, the old Northmen.</p> + +<p>To his bishop went Egede with his burden. Ever it rang in his ears: +“God has chosen you to bring them back to the light.” The bishop +listened and was interested. Yes, that was the land from which +seafarers in a former king’s time had brought home golden sand. +There might be more. It couldn’t be far from Cuba and Hispaniola, +those golden coasts. If one were to go equipped for trading, no +doubt a fine stroke of business might be done. Thus the Right +Reverend Bishop Krog of Trondhjem, and Egede went home, +disheartened.</p> + +<p>At home his friends scouted him, said he was going mad to think of +giving up his living on such a fool’s chase. His wife implored him +to stay, and with a heavy heart Egede was about to abandon his +purpose when his jealous neighbor, whose parishioners had been going +to hear Egede preach, stirred up such trouble that his wife was glad +to go. She even urged him to, and he took her at her word. They +moved to Bergen, and from that port they sailed on May 3, 1721, on +the ship <i>Haabet</i> (the Hope), with another and smaller vessel as +convoy, forty-six souls all told, bound for the unknown North. The +Danish King had made Egede missionary to the Greenlanders on a +salary of three hundred daler a year, the same amount which Egede +himself contributed of his scant store toward the equipment. The +bishop’s plan had prevailed; the mission was to be carried by the +expected commerce, and upon that was to be built a permanent +colonization.</p> + +<p>Early in June they sighted land, but the way to it was barred by +impassable ice. A whole month they sailed to and fro, trying vainly +for a passage. At last they found an opening and slipped through, +only to find themselves shut in, with towering icebergs closing +around them. As they looked fearfully out over the rail, their +convoy signalled that she had struck, and the captain of <i>Haabet</i> +cried out that all was lost. In the tumult of terror that succeeded, +Egede alone remained calm. Praying for succor where there seemed to +be none, he remembered the One Hundred and Seventh Psalm: “He +brought them out of darkness and the shadow of death, and brake +their bands in sunder.” And the morning dawned clear, the ice was +moving and their prison widening. On July 3, <i>Haabet</i> cleared the +last ice-reef, and the shore lay open before them.</p> + +<p>The Eskimos came out in their kayaks, and the boldest climbed aboard +the ship. In one boat sat an old man who refused the invitation. He +paddled about the vessel, mumbling darkly in a strange tongue. He +was an Angekok, one of the native medicine-men of whom presently +Egede was to know much more. As he stood upon the deck and looked at +these strangers for whose salvation he had risked all, his heart +fell. They were not the stalwart Northmen he had looked for, and +their jargon had no homelike sound. But a great wave of pity swept +over him, and the prayer that rose to his lips was for strength to +be their friend and their guide to the light.</p> + +<p>Not at once did the way open for the coveted friendship with the +Eskimos. While they thought the strangers came only to trade they +were hospitable enough, but when they saw them build, clearly intent +on staying, they made signs that they had better go. They pointed to +the sun that sank lower toward the horizon every day, and shivered +as if from extreme cold, and they showed their visitors the +icebergs and the snow, making them understand that it would cover +the house by and by. When it all availed nothing and the winter came +on, they retired into their huts and cut the acquaintance of the +white men. They were afraid that they had come to take revenge for +the harm done their people in the olden time. There was nothing for +it, then, but that Egede must go to them, and this he did.</p> + +<p>They seized their spears when they saw him coming, but he made signs +that he was their friend. When he had nothing else to give them, he +let them cut the buttons from his coat. Throughout the fifteen years +he spent in Greenland Egede never wore furs, as did the natives. The +black robe he thought more seemly for a clergyman, to his great +discomfort. He tells in his diary and in his letters that often when +he returned from his winter travels it could stand alone when he +took it off, being frozen stiff. After a while he got upon +neighborly terms with the Eskimos; but, if anything, the discomfort +was greater. They housed him at night in their huts, where the filth +and the stench were unendurable. They showed their special regard +by first licking off the piece of seal they put before him, and if +he rejected it they were hurt. Their housekeeping, of which he got +an inside view, was embarrassing in its simplicity. The dish-washing +was done by the dogs licking the kettles clean. Often, after a night +or two in a hut that held half a dozen families, he was compelled to +change his clothes to the skin in an open boat or out on the snow. +But the alternative was to sleep out in a cold that sometimes froze +his pillow to the bed and the tea-cup to the table even in his own +home. Above all, he must learn their language.</p> + +<p>It proved a difficult task, for the Eskimo tongue was both very +simple and very complex. In all the things pertaining to their daily +life it was exceedingly complex. For instance, to catch one kind of +fish was expressed by one word, to catch another kind in quite +different terms. They had one word for catching a young seal, +another for catching an old one. When it came to matters of moral +and spiritual import, the language was poor to desperation. Egede’s +instruction began when he caught the word “kine”—what is it? And +from that time on he learned every day; but the pronunciation was as +varied as the workaday vocabulary, and it was an unending task.</p> + +<p>It proceeded with many interruptions from the Angekoks, who tried +more than once to bewitch him, but finally gave it up, convinced +that he was a great medicine-man himself, and therefore +invulnerable. But before that they tried to foment a regular mutiny, +the colony being by that time well under way, and Egede had to +arrest and punish the leaders. The natives naturally clung to them, +and when Egede had mastered their language and tried to make clear +that the Angekoks deceived them when they pretended to go to the +other world for advice, they demurred. “Did you ever see them go?” +he asked. “Well, have you seen this God of yours of whom you speak +so much?” was their reply. When Egede spoke of spiritual gifts, they +asked for good health and blubber: “Our Angekoks give us that.” +Hell-fire was much in theological evidence in those days, but among +the Eskimos it was a failure as a deterrent. They listened to the +account of it eagerly and liked the prospect. When at length they +became convinced that Egede knew more than their Angekoks, they came +to him with the request that he would abolish winter. Very likely +they thought that one who had such knowledge of the hot place ought +to have influence enough with the keeper of it to obtain this favor.</p> + +<p>It was not an easy task, from any point of view, to which he had put +his hands. As that first winter wore away there were gloomy days and +nights, and they were not brightened when, with the return of the +sun, no ship arrived from Denmark. The Dutch traders came, and +opened their eyes wide when they found Egede and his household safe +and even on friendly terms with the Eskimos. Pelesse—the natives +called the missionary that, as the nearest they could come to the +Danish <i lang="sv" xml:lang="sv">präst</i> (priest)—Pelesse was not there after blubber, they +told the Dutchmen, but to teach them about heaven and of “Him up +there,” who had made them and wanted them home with Him again. So he +had not worked altogether in vain. But the brief summer passed, and +still no relief ship. The crew of <i>Haabet</i> clamored to go home, and +Egede had at last to give a reluctant promise that if no ship came +in two weeks, he would break up. His wife alone refused to take a +hand in packing. The ship was coming, she insisted, and at the last +moment it did come. A boat arriving after dark brought the first +word of it. The people ashore heard voices speaking in Danish, and +flew to Egede, who had gone to bed, with the news. The ship brought +good cheer. The Government was well disposed. Trading and preaching +were to go on together, as planned. Joyfully then they built a +bigger and a better house, and called their colony Godthaab (Good +Hope).</p> + +<p>The work was now fairly under way. Of the energy and the hardships +it entailed, even we in our day that have heard so much of Arctic +exploration can have but a faint conception. Shut in on the coast of +eternal ice and silence,—silence, save when in summer the Arctic +rivers were alive, and crash after crash announced that the glaciers +coming down from the inland mountains were “casting their calves,” +the great icebergs, upon the ocean,—the colonists counted the days +from the one when that year’s ship was lost to sight till the +returning spring brought the next one, their only communication with +their far-off home. In summer the days were sometimes burning hot, +but the nights always bitterly cold. In winter, says Egede, hot +water spilled on the table froze as it ran, and the meat they cooked +was often frozen at the bone when set on the table. Summer and +winter Egede was on his travels between Sundays, sometimes in the +trader’s boat, more often the only white man with one or two Eskimo +companions, seeking out the people. When night surprised him with no +native hut in sight, he pulled the boat on some desert shore and, +commending his soul to God, slept under it. Once he and his son +found an empty hut, and slept there in the darkness. Not until day +came again did they know that they had made their bed on the frozen +bodies of dead men who had once been the occupants of the house, and +had died they never knew how. Peril was everywhere. Again and again +his little craft was wrecked. Once the house blew down over their +heads in one of the dreadful winter storms that ravage those high +latitudes. Often he had to sit on the rail of his boat, and let his +numbed feet hang into the sea to restore feeling in them. On land he +sometimes waded waist-deep in snow, climbed mountains and slid down +into valleys, having but the haziest notion of where he would land. +At home his brave wife sat alone, praying for his safety and +listening to every sound that might herald his return. Tremble and +doubt they did, Egede owns, but they never flinched. Their work was +before them, and neither thought of turning back.</p> + +<p>The Eskimos soon came to know that Egede was their friend. When his +boat entered a fjord where they were fishing, and his rowers shouted +out that the good priest had come who had news of God, they dropped +their work and flocked out to meet him. Then he spoke to a floating +congregation, simply as if they were children, and, as with Him +whose message he bore, “the people heard him gladly.” They took him +to their sick, and asked him to breathe upon them, which he did to +humor them, until he found out that it was an Angekok practice, +whereupon he refused. Once, after he had spoken of the raising of +Lazarus from the dead, they took him to a new-made grave and asked +him, too, to bring back their dead. They brought him a blind man to +be healed. Egede looked upon them in sorrowful pity. “I can do +nothing,” he said; “but if he believes in Jesus, He has the power +and can do it.”</p> + +<p>“I do believe,” shouted the blind man: “let Him heal me.” It +occurred to Egede, perhaps as a mere effort at cleanliness, to wash +his eyes in cognac, and he sent him away with words of comfort. He +did not see his patient again for thirteen years. Then he was in a +crowd of Eskimos who came to Godthaab. The man saw as well as Egede.</p> + +<p>“Do you remember?” he said, “you washed my eyes with sharp water, +and the Son of God in whom I believed, He made me to see.”</p> + +<p>Children the Eskimos were in their idolatry, and children they +remained as Christians. By Egede’s prayers they set great store. +“You ask for us,” they told him. “God does not hear us; He does not +understand Eskimo.” Of God they spoke as “Him up there.” They +believed that the souls of the dead went up on the rainbow, and, +reaching the moon that night, rested there in the moon’s house, on a +bench covered with the white skins of young polar bears. There they +danced and played games, and the northern lights were the young +people playing ball. Afterward they lived in houses on the shore of +a big lake overshadowed by a snow mountain. When the waters ran over +the edge of the lake, it rained on earth. When the “moon was dark,” +it was down on earth catching seal for a living. Thunder was caused +by two old women shaking a dried sealskin between them; the +lightning came when they turned the white side out. The “Big Nail” +we have heard of as the Eskimos’ Pole, was a high-pointed mountain +in the Farthest North on which the sky rested and turned around with +the sun, moon, and stars. Up there the stars were much bigger. +Orion’s Belt was so near that you had to carry a whip to drive him +away.</p> + +<p>The women were slaves. An Eskimo might have as many wives as he saw +fit; they were his, and it was nobody’s business. But adultery was +unknown. The seventh commandment in Egede’s translation came to +read, “One wife alone you shall have and love.” The birth of a girl +was greeted with wailing. When grown, she was often wooed by +violence. If she fled from her admirer, he cut her feet when he +overtook her, so that she could run no more. The old women were +denounced as witches who drove the seals away, and were murdered. An +Eskimo who was going on a reindeer hunt, and found his aged mother a +burden, took her away and laid her in an open grave. Returning on +the third day, he heard her groaning yet, and smothered her with a +big stone. He tried to justify himself to Egede by saying that “she +died hard, and it was a pity not to speed her.” Yet they buried a +dog’s head with a child, so that the dog, being clever, could run +ahead and guide the little one’s steps to heaven.</p> + +<p>They could count no further than five; at a stretch they might get +to twenty, on their fingers and toes, but there they stopped. +However, they were not without resources. It was the day of long +Sunday services, and the Eskimos were a restless people. When the +sermon dragged, they would go up to Egede and make him measure on +their arms how much longer the talk was going to be. Then they +tramped back to their seats and sat listening with great attention, +all the time moving one hand down the arm, checking off the +preacher’s progress. If they got to the finger-tips before he +stopped, they would shake their heads sourly and go back for a +remeasurement. No wonder Egede put his chief hope in the children, +whom he gathered about him in flocks.</p> + +<p>For all that, the natives loved him. There came a day that brought +this message from the North: “Say to the speaker to come to us to +live, for the other strangers who come here can only talk to us of +blubber, blubber, blubber, and we also would hear of the great +Creator.” Egede went as far as he could, but was compelled by ice +and storms to turn back after weeks of incredible hardships. The +disappointment was the more severe to him because he had never quite +given up his hope of finding remnants of the ancient Norse +settlements. The fact that the old records spoke of a West Bygd +(settlement) and an East Bygd had misled many into believing that +the desolate east coast had once been colonized. Not until our own +day was this shown to be an error, when Danish explorers searched +that coast for a hundred miles and found no other trace of +civilization than a beer bottle left behind by the explorer +Nordenskjold.</p> + +<p>Egede’s hope had been that Greenland might be once more colonized by +Christian people. When the Danish Government, after some years, sent +up a handful of soldiers, with a major who took the title of +governor, to give the settlement official character as a trading +station, they sent with them twenty unofficial “Christians,” ten men +out of the penitentiary and as many lewd and drunken women from the +treadmill, who were married by lot before setting sail, to give the +thing a half-way decent look. They were good enough for the Eskimos, +they seem to have thought at Copenhagen. There followed a terrible +winter, during which mutiny and murder were threatened. “It is a +pity,” writes the missionary, “that while we sleep secure among the +heathen savages, with so-called Christian people our lives are not +safe.” As a matter of fact they were not, for the soldiers joined in +the mutiny against Egede as the cause of their having to live in +such a place, and had not sickness and death smitten the +malcontents, neither he nor the governor would have come safe +through the winter. On the Eskimos this view of the supposed fruits +of Christian teaching made its own impression. After seeing a woman +scourged on shipboard for misbehavior, they came innocently enough +to Egede and suggested that some of their best Angekoks be sent down +to Denmark to teach the people to be sober and decent.</p> + +<p>There came a breathing spell after ten years of labor in what had +often enough seemed to him the spiritual as well as physical +ice-barrens of the North, when Egede surveyed a prosperous mission, +with trade established, a hundred and fifty children christened and +schooled, and many of their elders asking to be baptized. In the +midst of his rejoicing the summer’s ship brought word from Denmark +that the King was dead, and orders from his successor to abandon the +station. Egede might stay with provisions for one year, if there was +enough left over after fitting out the ship; but after that he would +receive no further help.</p> + +<p>When the Eskimos heard the news, they brought their little children +to the mission. “These will not let you go,” they said; and he +stayed. His wife, whom hardship and privation and the lonely waiting +for her husband in the long winter nights had at last broken down, +refused to leave him, though she sadly needed the care of a +physician. A few of the sailors were persuaded to stay another year. +“So now,” Egede wrote in his diary when, on July 31, 1731, he had +seen the ship sail away with all his hopes, “I am left alone with my +wife and three children, ten sailors and eight Eskimos, girls and +boys who have been with us from the start. God let me live to see +the blessed day that brings good news once more from home.” His +prayer was heard. The next summer brought word that the mission was +to be continued, partly because Egede had strained every nerve to +send home much blubber and many skins. But it was as a glimpse of +the sun from behind dark clouds. His greatest trials trod hard upon +the good news.</p> + +<p>To rouse interest in the mission Egede had sent home young Eskimos +from time to time. Three of these died of smallpox in Denmark. The +fourth came home and brought the contagion, all unknown, to his +people. It was the summer fishing season, when the natives travel +much and far, and wherever he went they flocked about him to hear of +the “Great Lord’s land,” where the houses were so tall that one +could not shoot an arrow over them, and to ask a multitude of +questions: Was the King very big? Had he caught many whales? Was he +strong and a great Angekok? and much more of the same kind. In a +week the disease broke out among the children at the mission, and +soon word came from islands and fjords where the Eskimos were +fishing, of death and misery unspeakable. It was virgin soil for the +plague, and it was terribly virulent, striking down young and old in +every tent and hut. More than two thousand natives, one-fourth of +the whole population, died that summer. Of two hundred families near +the mission only thirty were left alive. A cry of terror and anguish +rose throughout the settlements. No one knew what to do. In vain did +Egede implore them to keep their sick apart. In fever delirium they +ran out in the ice-fields or threw themselves into the sea. A wild +panic seized the survivors, and they fled to the farthest tribes, +carrying the seeds of death with them wherever they went. Whole +villages perished, and their dead lay unburied. Utter desolation +settled like a pall over the unhappy land.</p> + +<p>Through it all a single ray of hope shone. The faith that Egede had +preached all those years, and the life he had lived with them, bore +their fruit. They had struck deeper than he thought. They crowded to +him, all that could, as their one friend. Dying mothers held their +suckling babes up to him and died content. In a deserted island camp +a half-grown girl was found alone with three little children. Their +father was dead. When he knew that for him and the baby there was no +help, he went to a cave and, covering himself and the child with +skins, lay down to die. His parting words to his daughter were, +“Before you have eaten the two seals and the fish I have laid away +for you, Pelesse will come, no doubt, and take you home. For he +loves you and will take care of you.” At the mission every nook and +cranny was filled with the sick and the dying. Egede and his wife +nursed them day and night. Childlike, when death approached, they +tried to put on their best clothes, or even to have new ones made, +that they might please God by coming into His presence looking fine. +When Egede had closed their eyes, he carried the dead in his arms to +the vestibule, where in the morning the men who dug the graves found +them. At the sight of his suffering the scoffers were dumb. What his +preaching had not done to win them over, his sorrows did. They were +at last one.</p> + +<p>That dreadful year left Egede a broken man. In his dark moments he +reproached himself with having brought only misery to those he had +come to help and serve. One thorn which one would think he might +have been spared rankled deep in it all. Some missionaries of a +dissenting sect—Egede was Lutheran—had come with the smallpox ship +to set up an establishment of their own. At their head was a man +full of misdirected zeal and quite devoid of common-sense, who +engaged Egede in a wordy dispute about justification by faith and +condemned him and his work unsparingly. He had grave doubts whether +he was in truth a “converted man.” It came to an end when they +themselves fell ill, and Egede and his wife had the last word, after +their own fashion. They nursed the warlike brethren through their +illness with loving ministrations and gave them back to life, let us +hope, wiser and better men.</p> + +<p>At Christmas, 1735, Egede’s faithful wife, Gertrude, closed her +eyes. She had gone out with him from home and kin to a hard and +heathen land, and she had been his loyal helpmeet in all his trials. +Now it was all over. That winter scurvy laid him upon a bed of pain +and, lying there, his heart turned to the old home. His son had come +from Copenhagen to help, happily yet while his mother lived. To him +he would give over the work. In Denmark he could do more for it than +in Greenland, now he was alone. On July 29, 1736, he preached for +the last time to his people and baptized a little Eskimo to whom +they gave his name, Hans. The following week he sailed for home, +carrying, as all his earthly wealth, his beloved dead and his +motherless children.</p> + +<p>The Eskimos gathered on the shore and wept as the ship bore their +friend away. They never saw him again. He lived in Denmark eighteen +years, training young men to teach the Eskimos. They gave him the +title of bishop, but so little to live on that he was forced in his +last days to move from Copenhagen to a country town, to make both +ends meet. His grave was forgotten by the generation that came after +him. No one knows now where it is; but in ice-girt Greenland, where +the northern lights on wintry nights flash to the natives their +message from the souls that have gone home, his memory will live +when that of the North Pole seeker whom the world applauds is long +forgotten. Hans Egede was their great man, their hero. He was +more,—he was their friend.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="GUSTAV_VASA_THE_FATHER_OF_SWEDEN">GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN<a id="61"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>A great and wise woman had, after ages of war and bloodshed, united +the crowns of the three Scandinavian kingdoms upon one head. In the +strong city of Kalmar, around which the tide of battle had ever +raged hottest, the union was declared in the closing days of the +Thirteenth Century. Norwegian, Swede, and Dane were thenceforth to +stand together, to the end of time; so they resolved. It was all a +vain dream. Queen Margaret was not cold in her grave before the +kingdoms fell apart. Norway clung to Denmark, but Sweden went her +own way. In the wars of two generations the Danish kings won back +the Swedish crown and lost it, again and again, until in 1520 King +Christian II clutched it for the last time, at the head of a +conquering army. He celebrated his victory with a general amnesty, +and bade the Swedish nobles to a great feast, held at the capital in +November.</p> + +<p>Christian is one of the unsolved riddles of history. Ablest but +unhappiest of all his house, he was an instinctive democrat, +sincerely solicitous for the welfare of the plain people, but +incredibly cruel and faithless when the dark mood seized him. The +coronation feast ended with the wholesale butchery of the +unsuspecting nobles. Hundreds were beheaded in the public square; +for days it was filled with the slain. It is small comfort that the +wicked priest who egged the King on to the dreadful deed was himself +burned at the stake by the master he had betrayed. The Stockholm +Massacre drowned the Kalmar Union in its torrents of blood. +Retribution came swiftly. Above the peal of the Christmas bells rose +the clash and clangor of armed hosts pouring forth from the mountain +fastnesses to avenge the foul treachery. They were led by Gustav<a id="FNanchor_2" href="#Footnote_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a> +Eriksson Vasa, a young noble upon whose head Christian had set a +price.</p> + +<p>The Vasas were among the oldest and best of the great Swedish +families. It was said of them that they ever loved a friend, hated +a foe, and never forgot. Gustav was born in the castle of +Lindholmen, when the news that the world had grown suddenly big by +the discovery of lands beyond the unknown seas was still ringing +through Europe, on May 12, 1496. He was brought up in the home of +his kinsman, the Swedish patriot Sten Sture, and early showed the +fruits of his training. “See what I will do,” he boasted in school +when he was thirteen, “I will go to Dalecarlia, rouse the people, +and give the Jutes (Danes) a black eye.” Master Ivar, his Danish +teacher, gave him a whaling for that. White with anger, the boy +drove his dirk through the book, nailing it to the desk, and stalked +out of the room. Master Ivar’s eyes followed the slim figure in the +scarlet cloak, and he sighed wearily “<i lang="la" xml:lang="la">nobilium nati nolunt aliquid +pati</i>,—the children of the great will put up with nothing.”</p> + +<p>Hardly yet of age, he served under the banner of Sten Sture against +King Christian, and was one of six hostages sent to the King when he +asked an interview of the Swedish leader. But Christian stayed away +from the meeting and carried the hostages off to Denmark against his +plighted faith. There Gustav was held prisoner a year. All that +winter rumors of great armaments against Sweden filled the land. He +heard the young bloods from the court prate about bending the stiff +necks in the country across the Sound, and watched them throw dice +for Swedish castles and Swedish women,—part of the loot when his +fatherland should be laid under the yoke. Ready to burst with anger +and grief, he sat silent at their boasts. In the spring he escaped, +disguised as a cattle-herder, and made his way to Luebeck, where he +found refuge in the house of the wealthy merchant Kort König.</p> + +<p>They soon heard in Denmark where he was, and the King sent letters +demanding his surrender; but the burghers of the Hanse town hated +Christian with cause, and would not give him up. Then came Gustav’s +warder who had gone bail for him in sixteen hundred gulden, and +pleaded for his prisoner.</p> + +<p>“I am not a prisoner,” was Gustav’s retort, “I am a hostage, for +whom the Danish king pledged his oath and faith. If any one can +prove that I was taken captive in a fight or for just cause, let him +stand forth. Ambushed was I, and betrayed.” The Lübeck men thought +of the plots King Christian was forever hatching against them. Now, +if he succeeded in getting Sweden under his heel, their turn would +come next. Better, they said, send this Gustav home to his own +country, perchance he might keep the King busy there; by which they +showed their good sense. His ex-keeper was packed off back home, and +Gustav reached Sweden, sole passenger on a little coast-trader, on +May 31, 1520. A stone marks the spot where he landed, near Kalmar; +for then struck the hour of Sweden’s freedom.</p> + +<p>But not yet for many weary months did the people hear its summons. +Swedish manhood was at its lowest ebb. Stockholm was held by the +widow of Sten Sture with a half-famished garrison. In Kalmar another +woman, Anna Bjelke, commanded, but her men murmured, and the fall of +the fortress was imminent. When Gustav Vasa, who had slipped in +unseen, exhorted them to stand fast, they would have mobbed him. He +left as he had come, the day before the surrender. Travelling by +night, he made his way inland, finding everywhere fear and distrust. +The King had promised that if they would obey him “they should +never want for herring and salt,” so they told Gustav, and when he +tried to put heart into them and rouse their patriotism, they took +up bows and arrows and bade him be gone. Indeed, there were not +wanting those who shot at him. Like a hunted deer he fled from +hamlet to hamlet. Such friends as he had left advised him to throw +himself upon the King’s mercy; told him of the amnesty proclaimed. +But Gustav’s thoughts dwelt grimly among the Northern mountaineers +whom as a boy he had bragged he would set against the tyrant. +Insensibly he shaped his course toward their country.</p> + +<p>He was with his brother-in-law, Joachim Brahe, when the King’s +message bidding him to the coronation came. Gustav begged him not to +go, but Brahe’s wife and children were within Christian’s reach, and +he did not dare stay away. When he left, the fugitive hid in his +ancestral home at Räfsnäs on lake Mälar. There one of Brahe’s men +brought him news of the massacre in which his master and Gustav’s +father had perished. His mother, grandmother, and sisters were +dragged away to perish in Danish dungeons. On Gustav’s head the King +had set a price, and spies were even then on his track.</p> + +<p>Gustav’s mind was made up. What was there now to wait for? Clad as a +peasant, he started for Dalecarlia with a single servant to keep him +company, but before he reached the mines the man stole all his money +and ran away. He had to work now to live, and hired out to Anders +Persson, the farmer of Rankhyttan. He had not been there many days +when one of the women saw an embroidered sleeve stick out under his +coat and told her master that the new hand was not what he pretended +to be. The farmer called him aside, and Gustav told him frankly who +he was. Anders Persson kept his secret, but advised him not to stay +long in any one place lest his enemies get wind of him. He slipped +away as soon as it was dark, nearly lost his life by breaking +through the ice, but reached Ornäs on the other side of Lake Runn, +half dead with cold and exposure. He knew that another Persson who +had been with him in the war lived there, and found his house. +Arendt Persson was a rascal. He received him kindly, but when he +slept harnessed his horse and went to Måns Nilsson, a neighbor, +with the news: the King’s reward would make them both rich, if he +would help him seize the outlawed man.</p> + +<p>Måns Nilsson held with the Danes, but he was no traitor, and he +showed the fellow the door. He went next to the King’s sheriff; he +would be bound to help. To be sure, he would claim the lion’s share +of the blood-money, but something was better than nothing. The +sheriff came soon enough with a score of armed men. But Arendt +Persson had not reckoned with his honest wife. She guessed his +errand and let Gustav down from the window to the rear gate, where +she had a sleigh and team in waiting. When the sheriff’s posse +surrounded the house, Gustav was well on his way to Master Jon, the +parson of Svärdsjö, who was his friend. Tradition has it that while +Christian was King, the brave little woman never dared show her face +in the house again.</p> + +<p>Master Jon was all right, but news of the man-hunt had run through +the country, and when the parson’s housekeeper one day saw him hold +the wash-bowl for his guest she wanted to know why he was so polite +to a common clod. Master Jon told her that it was none of her +business, but that night he piloted his friend across the lake to +Isala, where Sven Elfsson lived, a gamekeeper who knew the country +and could be trusted. The good parson was hardly out of sight on his +way back when the sheriff’s men came looking for Gustav. It did not +occur to them that the yokel who stood warming himself by the stove +might be the man they were after. But the gamekeeper’s wife was +quick to see his peril. She was baking bread and had just put the +loaves into the oven with a long-handled spade. “Here, you lummox!” +she cried, and whacked him soundly over the back with it, “what are +ye standing there gaping at? Did ye never see folks afore? Get back +to your work in the barn.” And Gustav, taking the hint, slunk out of +the room.</p> + +<p>For three days after that he lay hidden under a fallen tree in the +snow and bitter cold; but even there he was not safe, and the +gamekeeper took him deeper into the forest, where a big spruce grew +on a hill in the middle of a frozen swamp. There no one would seek +him till he could make a shift to get him out of the country. The +hill is still there; the people call it the King’s Hill, and not +after King Christian, either. But in those long nights when Gustav +Vasa listened to the hungry wolves howling in the woods and nosing +about his retreat, it was hardly kingly conceits his mind brooded +over. His father and kinsmen were murdered; his mother and sister in +the pitiless grasp of the tyrant who was hunting him to his death; +he, the last of his race, alone and forsaken by his own. Bitter +sorrow filled his soul at the plight of his country that had fallen +so low. But the hope of the young years came to the rescue: all was +not lost yet. And in the morning came Sven, the gamekeeper, with a +load of straw, at the bottom of which he hid him. So no one would be +the wiser.</p> + +<p>It was well he did it, for half-way to the next town some prowling +soldiers overtook them, and just to make sure that there was nothing +in the straw, prodded the load with their spears. Nothing stirred, +and they went on their way. But a spear had gashed Gustav’s leg, and +presently blood began to drip in the snow. Sven had his wits about +him. He got down, and cut the fetlock of one of the beasts with his +jack-knife so that it bled and no one need ask questions. When they +got to Marnäs, Gustav was weak from the loss of blood, but a +friendly surgeon was found to bind up his wounds.</p> + +<p>Farther and farther north he fled, keeping to the deep woods in the +day, until he reached Rättwik. Feeling safer there, he spoke to the +people coming from church one Sunday and implored them to shake off +the Danish yoke. But they only shook their heads. He was a stranger +among them, and they would talk it over with their neighbors. Not +yet were his wanderings over. To Mora he went next, where Parson +Jakob hid him in a lonely farm-house. Evil chance led the spies +direct to his hiding-place, and once more it was the housewife whose +quick wit saved him. Dame Margit was brewing the Yule beer when she +saw them coming. In a trice she had Gustav in the cellar and rolled +the brewing vat over the trap-door. Then they might search as they +saw fit; there was nothing there. The first blood was spilled for +Gustav Vasa while he was at Mora, and it was a Dane who did it. He +was the kind that liked to see fair play; when an under-sheriff came +looking for the hunted man there, the Dane waylaid and killed him.</p> + +<p>Christmas morning, when Master Jakob had preached his sermon in the +church, Gustav spoke to the congregation out in the snow-covered +churchyard. A gravestone was his pulpit. Eloquent always, his +sorrows and wrongs and the memory of the hard months lent wings to +his words. His speech lives yet in Dalecarlia, for now he was among +its mountains.</p> + +<p>“It is good to see this great meeting,” he said, “but when I think +of our fatherland I am filled with grief. At what peril I am here +with you, you know who see me hounded as a wild beast day by day, +hour by hour. But our beloved country is more to me than life. How +long must we be thralls, we who were born to freedom? Those of you +who are old remember what persecution Swedish men and women have +suffered from the Danish kings. The young have heard the story of it +and have learned from they were little children to hate and resist +such rule. These tyrants have laid waste our land and sucked its +marrow, until nothing remains for us but empty houses and lean +fields. Our very lives are not safe.” He called upon them to rise +and drive the invaders out. If they wanted a leader, he was ready.</p> + +<p>His words stirred the mountaineers deeply. Cries of anger were +heard in the crowd; it was not the first time they had taken up arms +in the cause of freedom. But when they talked it over, the older +heads prevailed; there had not been time enough to hear both sides. +They told him that they would not desert the King; he must expect +nothing of them.</p> + +<p>Broken-hearted and desperate, Gustav Vasa turned toward the +Norwegian frontier. He would leave the country for which there was +no hope. While the table in the poorest home groaned with Yuletide +cheer, Sweden’s coming king hid under an old bridge, outcast and +starving, till it was safe to leave. Then he took up his weary +journey alone. The winter cold had grown harder as the days grew +shorter. Famished wolves dogged his steps, but he outran them on his +snow-shoes. By night he slept in some wayside shelter, such as they +build for travellers in that desolate country, or in the brush. The +snow grew deeper, and the landscape wilder, as he went. For days he +had gone without food, when he saw the sun set behind the lofty +range that was to bar him out of home and hope forever. Even there +was no abiding place for him. What thoughts of his vanished dream, +perchance of the distant lands across the seas where the tyrant’s +hand could not reach him, were in his mind, who knows, as he bent +his strength to the last and hardest stage of his journey? He was +almost there, when he heard shouts behind him and turned to sell his +life dear. Two men on skis were calling to him. They were unarmed, +and he waited to let them come up.</p> + +<p>Their story was soon told. They had come to call him back. After he +left, an old soldier whom they knew in Mora had come from the south +and told them worse things than even Gustav knew. It was all true +about the Stockholm murder; worse, the King was having gallows set +up in every county to hang all those on who said him nay; a heavy +tax was laid upon the peasants, and whoever did not pay was to have +a hand or foot cut off; they could still follow the plow. And now +they had sent away the one man who could lead against the Danes, +with the forests full of outlawed men who would have enlisted under +him as soon as ever the cry was raised! While the men of Dalecarlia +were debating the news among themselves orders came from the +bailiff at Westerås that the tax was to be paid forthwith. That +night runners were sent on the trail of Gustav to tell him to come +back; they were ready.</p> + +<p>When he came, it was as if a mighty storm swept through the +mountains. The people rose in a body. Every day whole parishes threw +off their allegiance to King Christian. Sunday after Sunday Gustav +spoke to the people at their meeting-houses, and they raised their +spears and swore to follow him to death. Two months after the murder +in Stockholm an army of thousands that swelled like an avalanche was +marching south, and province after province joined in the rebellion. +King Christian’s host met them at Brunbäck in April. One of its +leaders asked the country folk what kind of men the Dalecarlians +were, and when he was told that they drank water and ate bread made +of bark, he cried out, “Such a people the devil himself couldn’t +whip; let us get out.” But his advice was not taken and the Danish +army was wiped out. Gustav halted long enough to drill his men and +give them time to temper their arrows and spears, then he fell upon +Westerås and beat the Danes there. The peasant mob scattered too +soon to loot the town, and the King’s men came back with a sudden +rush. Only Gustav’s valor and presence of mind saved the day that +had been won once from being lost again.</p> + +<p>When it was seen that the Danes were not invincible, the whole +country rose, took the scattered castles, and put their defenders to +the sword. Gustav bore the rising on his shoulders from first to +last. He was everywhere, ordering and leading. His fiery eloquence +won over the timorous; his irresistible advance swept every obstacle +aside. In May he took Upsala; by midsummer he was besieging +Stockholm itself. Most of the other cities were in his hands. The +Hanse towns had found out what this Gustav could do at home. They +sang his praise, but as for backing him with their purse, that was +another matter. They refused to lend Gustav two siege-guns when he +lay before Stockholm, though he offered to pledge a castle for each. +He had no money. Happily his enemy, Christian, was even worse off. +Neither pledges nor promises could get him the money he needed. His +chief men were fighting among themselves and made peace only to turn +upon him. Within a year after the Swedish people had chosen Gustav +Vasa to be Regent at the Diet of Vadstena, Christian went into exile +and, when he tried to get his kingdom back, into prison, where he +languished the rest of his life. He fully deserved his fate. Yet he +meant well and had done some good things in his day. Had he been +able to rule himself, he might have ruled others with better +success. Schoolboys remember with gratitude that he forbade teachers +to “spank their pupils overmuch and without judgment, as was their +wont.”</p> + +<p>At the Diet of Vadstena the people had offered Gustav the crown, but +he put it from him. Scarce eight months had passed since he hid +under the bridge, hunted and starving. When Stockholm had fallen +after a siege of two years and all Sweden was free, the people met +(1523) and made him King, whether or no. He still objected, but gave +in at last and was crowned.</p> + +<p>Popular favor is fickle. Hard times came that were not made easier +by Gustav’s determination to fill the royal coffers, and the very +Dalecarlians who had put him in the high seat rose against him and +served notice that if things did not mend they would have none of +him. Gustav made sure that they had no backing elsewhere, then went +up and persuaded them to be good by cutting off the heads of their +leaders, who both happened to be priests: one was even a bishop. He +had been taught in a school that always found an axe ready to hand. +Let those who lament the savagery of modern warfare consider what +happened then to a Danish fleet that tried to bring relief to +hard-pressed Stockholm. It was beaten in a fight in which six +hundred men were taken prisoners. They were all, say the accounts, +“tied hand and foot and flung overboard amid the beating of drums +and blowing of trumpets to drown their cries.” The clergy fared +little better than the laymen in that age, but then it was their own +fault. In plotting and scrapping they were abreast of the worst and +took the consequences.</p> + +<p>They were the days of the Reformation, and Gustav would not have +been human had he failed to see a way out of his money troubles by +confiscating church property. He had pawned the country’s trade to +the merchants of Lübeck and there was nothing else left. Naturally +the church opposed him. The King took the bull by the horns. He +called a meeting and told the people that he was sick of it all. He +had encouraged the Reformation for their good; now, if they did not +stand by him, they might choose between him and his enemies. The +oldest priest arose at that and said that the church’s property was +sacred. The King asked if the rest of them thought the same way. +Only one voice was raised, and to say yes.</p> + +<p>“Then,” said Gustav, “I don’t want to be your King any more. If it +does not rain, you blame me; if the sun does not shine, you do the +same. It is always so. All of you want to be masters. After all my +trouble and labor for you, you would as lief see my head split with +an axe, though none of you dare lay hold of the handle. Give me back +what I have spent in your service and I will go away and never come +back.” And go he did, to his castle, with half a dozen of his +nearest friends.</p> + +<p>They sat and looked at one another when he was gone, and then +priests and nobles fell to arguing among themselves, all talking at +once. The plain people, the burghers and the peasants, listened +awhile, but when they got no farther, let them know that if they +couldn’t settle it, they, the people, would, and in a way that would +give them little joy. The upshot of it all was that messengers were +sent to bring the King back. He made them go three times, and when +he came at last, it was as absolute master. In the ordering of the +kingdom that was made there, he became the head of the church as +well as of the state. Gustav’s pen was as sharp as his tongue. When +Hans Brask, the oldest prelate in the land, who had stood stoutly by +the old régime, left the country and refused to come back, he wrote +to him: “As long as you might milk and shear your sheep, you staid +by them. When God spake and said you were to feed them, not to shear +and slaughter them, you ran away. Every honest man can judge if you +have done well.” Hard words to a good old man; but there were plenty +of others who deserved them. That was the end of the hierarchy in +Sweden.</p> + +<p>But not of the unruly peasants who had tasted the joys of +king-making. How kindly they took to the Reformation at the outset +one can judge from the demand of some of them that the King should +“burn or otherwise kill such as ate meat on Friday.” They rose +again and again, and would listen only to the argument of force. +When the Lübeckers pressed hard for the payment of old debts, and +the treasury was empty as usual, King Gustav hit upon a new kind of +revenue. He demanded of every church in the land that it give up its +biggest bell to the funds. It was the last straw. The Dalecarlians +rose against what they deemed sacrilege, under the leadership of +Måns Nilsson and Anders Persson of Rankhyttan, the very men who had +befriended Gustav in his need, and the insurrection spread. The “War +of the Bells” was settled with the sword, and the peasants gave in. +But Gustav came of a stock that “never forgot.” Two years later, +when his hands were free at home, he suddenly invaded Dalecarlia +with a powerful army, determined to “pull those weeds up by the +roots.” He summoned the peasants to Thing, made a ring around them +of armed men, and gave them their choice:</p> + +<p>“Submit now for good and all,” he said, “or I will spoil the land so +that cock shall not crow nor hound bark in it again forever!”</p> + +<p>The frightened peasants fell on their knees and begged for mercy. +He made them give up their leaders, including his former friends, +and they were all put to the sword. After that there was peace in +Dalecarlia.</p> + +<p class="p2bot">Gustav Vasa’s long reign ended in 1560. Like his enemy, Christian +II, he was a strange mixture of contradictions. He was brave in +battle, wise in council, pious, if not a saint, clean, and merciful +when mercy fitted into his plans. His enemies called him a greedy, +suspicious despot. Greedy he was. More than eleven thousand farms +were confiscated by the crown during his reign, and he left four +thousand farms and a great fortune to his children as his personal +share. But historians have called him “the great housekeeper” who +found waste and loss and left an ordered household. He gave all for +Sweden, and all he had was at her call. It was share and share +alike, in his view. Despotic he could be, too. <i lang="fr" xml:lang="fr">L’état c’est moi</i> +might have been said by him. But he did not exploit the state; he +built it. He fashioned Sweden out of a bunch of quarrelsome +provincial governments into a hereditary monarchy, as the best +way—indeed, the only way then—of giving it strength and +stability. He was suspicious because everybody had betrayed him, or +had tried to. With all that, his steady purpose was to raise and +enlighten his people and make them keep the peace, if he had to +adopt the Irishman’s plan of keeping it himself with an axe. He was +the father of a line of great warriors. Gustav Adolf was his +grandson.</p> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-103"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-103.jpg"> +<div class="caption"><span class="smcap">Gustav Vasa bidding his People Good-by</span></div> +</div> + +<p class="p2">Bent under the burden of years, he bade his people good-by at the +Diet of Stockholm, a few weeks before his death. His old eloquence +rings unimpaired in the farewell. He thanked God, who had chosen him +as His tool to set Sweden free from thralldom. Almost might he liken +himself to King David, whom God from a shepherd had made the leader +of his people. No such hope was in his heart when, forty years +before, he hid in the woods from a bloodthirsty enemy. For what he +had done wrong as king, he asked the people’s pardon; it was not +done on purpose. He knew well that many thought him a hard ruler, +but the time would come when they would gladly dig him up from his +grave if they only could. And with that he went out, bowing deeply +to the Diet, the tears streaming down his face.</p> + +<p>They saw him no more; but on his tomb the Swedish people, forgetting +all else, have written that he was the “Father of his Country.”</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_2" href="#FNanchor_2" class="label">[2]</a> The older spelling of this name is followed here in +preference to the more modern Gustaf. Gustav Vasa himself wrote his +name so.</p> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="ABSALON_WARRIOR_BISHOP_OF_THE_NORTH">ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH<a id="87"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>A welcome change awaits the traveller who, having shaken off the +chill of the German Dreadnaughts at Kiel, crosses the Baltic to the +Danish Islands—a change from the dread portents of war to smiling +peace. There can be nothing more pastoral and restful than the +Seeland landscape as framed in a car window; yet he misses its chief +charm whom its folk-lore escapes—the countless legends that cling +to field and forest from days long gone. The guide-book gives scarce +a hint of them; but turn from its page and they meet you at every +step, hail you from every homestead, every copse. Nor is their story +always of peace. Here was Knud Lavard slain by his envious kinsman +for the crown, and a miraculous spring gushed forth where he fell. +Of the church they built for the pilgrims who sought it from afar +they will show you the site, but the spring dried up with the simple +old faith. Yonder, under the roof of Ringsted church, lie Denmark’s +greatest dead. Not half an hour from the ferry landing at Korsör, +your train labors past a hill crowned by a venerable cross, Holy +Anders’ Hill. So saintly was that masterful priest that he was wont, +when he prayed, to hang his hat and gloves on a sunbeam as on a +hook. And woe to the land if his cross be disturbed, for then, the +peasant will tell you, the cattle die of plague and the crops fail. +A little further on, just beyond Sorö, a village church rears twin +towers above the wheat-field where the skylark soars and sings to +its nesting mate. For seven hundred years the story of that church +and its builder has been told at Danish firesides, and the time will +never come when it is forgotten.</p> + +<p>Fjenneslev is the name of the village, and Asker Ryg<a id="FNanchor_3" href="#Footnote_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a> ruled there +in the Twelfth Century, when the king summoned his men to the war. +Bidding good-by to his wife, Sir Asker tells her to build a new +church while he is away, for the old, “with wall of clay, +straw-thatched and grim,” is in ruins. And let it be worthy of the +Master:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">“The roof let make of tiling red;</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Of stone thou build the wall;”</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">and then he whispers in her ear:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">“Hear thou, my Lady Inge,</div> + <div class="verse indent2">Of women thou art the flower;</div> + <div class="verse indent0">An’ thou bearest to me a son so bold,</div> + <div class="verse indent2">Set on the church a tower.”</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">Should the child be a girl, he tells her to build only a spire, for +“modesty beseemeth a woman.” Well for Sir Asker that he did not live +in our day of clamoring suffragists. He would have “views” without +doubt. But no such things troubled him while he battled in foreign +lands all summer. It was autumn when he returned and saw from afar +the swell behind which lay Fjenneslev and home. Impatiently he +spurred his horse to the brow of the hill, for no news had come of +Lady Inge those many months. The bard tells us what he saw there:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">“It was the good Sir Asker Ryg;</div> + <div class="verse indent2">Right merrily laughed he,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">When from that green and swelling hill</div> + <div class="verse indent2">Two towers did he see.”</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">Two sons lay at the Lady Inge’s breast, and all was well.</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">“The first one of the brothers two</div> + <div class="verse indent2">They called him Esbern Snare.<a id="FNanchor_4" href="#Footnote_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a></div> + <div class="verse indent0">He grew as strong as a savage bear</div> + <div class="verse indent2">And fleeter than any hare.</div> + </div> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">“The second him called they Absalon,</div> + <div class="verse indent2">A bishop he at home.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">He used his trusty Danish sword</div> + <div class="verse indent2">As the Pope his staff at Rome.”</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p>Absalon and Esbern were not twins, as tradition has it. They were +better than that. They became the great heroes of their day, and the +years have not dimmed their renown. And Absalon reached far beyond +the boundaries of little Denmark to every people that speaks the +English tongue. For it was he who, as archbishop of the North, +“strictly and earnestly” charged his friend and clerk Saxo to gather +the Danish chronicles while yet it was time, because, says Saxo, in +the preface of his monumental work, “he could no longer abide that +his fatherland, which he always honored and magnified with especial +zeal, should be without a record of the great deeds of the fathers.” +And from the record Saxo wrote we have our Hamlet.</p> + +<p>It was when they had grown great and famous that Sir Asker and his +wife built the church in thanksgiving for their boys, not when they +were born, and the way that came to light was good and wholesome. +They were about to rebuild the church, on which there had been no +towers at all since they crumbled in the middle ages, and had +decided to put on only one; for the sour critics, who are never +content in writing a people’s history unless they can divest it of +all its flesh and make it sit in its bones, as it were, sneered at +the tradition and called it an old woman’s tale. But they did not +shout quite so loud when, in peeling off the whitewash of the +Reformation, the mason’s hammer brought forth mural paintings that +grew and grew until there stood the whole story to read on the wall, +with Sir Asker himself and the Lady Inge, clad in garments of the +Twelfth Century, bringing to the Virgin the church with the twin +towers. So the folk-lore was not so far out after all, and the +church was rebuilt with two towers, as it should be.</p> + +<p>Under its eaves, whether of straw or tile, the two boys played their +childish games, and before long there came to join in them another +of their own age, young Valdemar, whose father, the very Knud Lavard +mentioned above, had been foully murdered a while before. It was a +time, says Saxo, in which “he must be of stout heart and strong head +who dared aspire to Denmark’s crown. For in less than a hundred +years more than sixteen of her kings and their kin were either slain +without cause by their own subjects, or otherwise met a sudden +death.” Sir Asker and the murdered Knud had been foster brothers, +and throughout the bloody years that followed, he and his brothers, +sons of the powerful Skjalm Hvide,<a id="FNanchor_5" href="#Footnote_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a> espoused his cause in good and +evil days, while they saw to it that no harm came to the young +prince under their roof.</p> + +<p>The three boys, as they grew up, were bred to the stern duties of +fighting men, as was the custom of their class. Absalon, indeed, was +destined for the church; but in a country so recently won from the +old war gods, it was the church militant yet, and he wielded spear +and sword with the best of them. When, at eighteen, they sent him to +France to be taught, he did not for his theological studies neglect +the instruction of his boyhood. There he became the disciple and +friend of the Abbot Bernard of Clairvaux, more powerful then than +prince or Pope, and when the abbot preached the second great +crusade, promising eternal salvation to those who took up arms +against the unbelievers, whether to wrest from them the Holy +Sepulchre or to plant the cross among the wild heathen on the +Baltic, his heart burned hot within him. It was a long way to the +Holy Land, but with the Baltic robbers his people had a grievous +score to settle. Their yells had sounded in his boyish ears as they +ravished the shores of his fatherland, penetrating with murder and +pillage almost to his peaceful home. And so, while he lent a +diligent ear to the teachings of the church, earning the name of the +“most learned clerk” in the cloister of Ste. Geneviève in Paris, +daily he laid the breviary aside and took up sword and lance, +learning the arts of modern warfare with the graces of chivalry. In +the old way of fighting, man to man, the men of the North had been +the equals of any, if not their betters; but against the new methods +of warfare their prowess availed little. Absalon, the monk, kept his +body strong while soul and mind matured. When nothing more +adventurous befell, he chopped down trees for the cloister hearths. +But oftener the clash of arms echoed in the quiet halls, or the +peaceful brethren crossed themselves as they watched him break an +unruly horse in the cloister fen. Saxo tells us that he swam easily +in full armor, and in more than one campaign in later years saved +drowning comrades who were not so well taught.</p> + +<p>The while he watched rising all about some of the finest churches in +Christendom. It was the era of cathedral building in Europe. The +Romanesque style of architecture had reached its highest development +in the very France where he spent his young manhood’s years, and the +Gothic, with its stamp of massive strength, was beginning to +displace its gentler curve. Ten years of such an environment, in a +land teeming with historic traditions, rounded out the man who set +his face toward home, bent on redeeming his people from the unjust +reproach of being mere “barbarians of the North.”</p> + +<p>It was a stricken Denmark to which he came back. Three claimants +were fighting for the crown. The land was laid waste by sea-rovers, +who saw their chance to raid defenceless homes while the men able to +bear arms were following the rival kings. The people had lost hope. +Just when Absalon returned, peace was made between the claimants. +Knud, Svend, and Valdemar, his foster brother of old, divided up the +country between them. They swore a dear oath to keep the pact, but +for all that “the three kingdoms did not last three days.” The +treacherous Svend waited only for a chance to murder both his +rivals, and it came quickly, when he and Valdemar were the guests of +Knud at Roskilde. They had eaten and drunk together and were +gathered in the “Storstue,” the big room of the house, when Knud saw +Svend whispering aside with his men. With a sudden foreboding of +evil, he threw his arms about Valdemar’s shoulders and kissed him. +The young King, who was playing chess with one of his men, looked up +in surprise and asked what it meant. Just then Svend left the hall, +and his henchmen fell upon the two with drawn swords. Knud was cut +down at once, his head cleft in twain. Valdemar upset the table with +the candles and, wrapping his cloak about his arm to ward off the +blows that showered upon him, knocked his assailants right and left +and escaped, badly wounded.</p> + +<p>Absalon came into the room as Knud fell and, thinking it was +Valdemar, caught him in his arms and took his wounded head in his +lap. Sitting there in utter sorrow and despair, heedless of the +tumult that raged in the darkness around him, he felt the King’s +garment and knew that the man who was breathing his last in his arms +was not his friend. He laid the lifeless body down gently and left +the hall. The murderers barred his way, but he brushed their swords +and spears aside and strode forth unharmed. Valdemar had found a +horse and made for Fjenneslev, twenty miles away, with all speed, +and there Absalon met him and his brother Esbern in the morning.</p> + +<p>King Svend sought him high and low to finish his dastardly work, +while on Thing he wailed loudly before the people that Valdemar and +Knud had tried to kill him, showing in proof of it his cloak, which +he had rent with his own sword. But Valdemar’s friends were wide +awake. Esbern flew through the island on his fleet horse in +Valdemar’s clothes, leading his pursuers a merry dance, and when +the young King’s wound was healed, he found him a boat and ferried +him across to the mainland, where the people flocked to his +standard. When Svend would have followed, it was the Lady Inge who +scuttled his ship by night and gave her foster son the start he +needed. There followed a short and sharp struggle that ended on +Grathe Heath with the utter rout of Svend’s forces. He himself was +killed, and Valdemar at last was King of all Denmark.</p> + +<p>From that time the three friends were inseparable as in the old days +when they played about the fields of Fjenneslev. Absalon was the +keeper of the King’s conscience who was not afraid to tell him the +truth when he needed to hear it. And where they were Esbern was +found, never wavering in his loyalty to either. Within a year +Absalon was made bishop of Roskilde, the chief See of Denmark. Saxo +innocently discovers to us King Valdemar’s little ruse to have his +friend chosen. He was yet a very young man, scarce turned thirty, +and had not been considered at all for the vacancy. There were three +candidates, all of powerful families, and, according to +ecclesiastical law, the brethren of the chapter were the electors. +The King went to their meeting and addressed them in person. Nothing +was farther from him, he said, than to wish to interfere with their +proper rights. Each must do as his conscience dictated, unhindered. +And with that he laid on the table <em>four</em> books with blank leaves +and bade them write down their names in them, each for his own +choice, to get the matter right on the record. The brethren thanked +him kindly and all voted “nicely together” for Absalon. So three of +the books were wasted. But presently Saxo found good use for them.</p> + +<p>For now had come the bishop’s chance of putting in practice the +great abbot’s precepts. “Pray and fight” was the motto he had +written into the Knights Templars’ rule, and Absalon had made it his +own. Of what use was it to build up the church at home, when any day +might see it raided by its enemies who were always watching their +chance outside? The Danish waters swarmed with pirates, the very +pagans against whom Abbot Bernard had preached his crusade. Of them +all the Wends were the worst, as they were the most powerful of the +Slav tribes that still resisted the efforts of their neighbors, the +Christian Germans, to dislodge them from their old home on the +Baltic. They lived in the island of Rügen, fairly in sight of the +Danish shores. Every favoring wind blew them across the sea in +shoals to burn and ravage. The Danes, once the terror of the seas, +had given over roving when they accepted the White Christ in +exchange for Thor and his hammer, and now, when they would be at +peace, they were in turn beset by this relentless enemy, who burned +their homes and their crops and dragged the peaceful husbandman away +to make him a thrall or offer him up as a sacrifice to heathen +idols. More than a third of all Denmark lay waste under their +ferocious assault. Here was the blow to be struck if the country was +to have peace and the church prosperity.</p> + +<p>The chance to strike came speedily. Absalon had been bishop only a +few months when, on the evening before Palm Sunday, word was brought +that the enemy had landed, twenty-four ship-crews strong, and were +burning and murdering as usual. Absalon marshalled his eighteen +house-carles and such of the country folk as he could, and fell +upon the Wends, routing them utterly. A bare handful escaped, the +rest were killed, while the bishop lost but a single man. He said +mass next morning, red-handed it is true, but one may well believe +that for all that his Easter message reached hearts filled with a +new, glad hope for their homes and for the country. That was a +bishop they could understand. So the first blow Absalon struck for +his people was at home. But he did not long wait for the enemy to +come to him. Half his long and stirring life he lived on the seas, +seeking them there. Saxo mentions, in speaking of his return from +one of his cruises, that he had then been nine months on shipboard. +And in a way he was shepherding his flock there, if it was with a +scourge; for, many years before, a Danish king had punished the +Wends in their own home and laid their lands under the See of +Roskilde, though little good it did them or any one else then. But +when Absalon had got his grip, there were days when he baptized as +many as a thousand of them into the true faith.</p> + +<p>He was not altogether alone in the stand he took. Here and there, +from very necessity, the people had organized to resist the +invaders, but as no one could tell where they would strike next, +they were not often successful, and fear and discouragement sat +heavy on the land. From his own city of Roskilde a little fleet of +swift sailers under the bold Wedeman had for years waged relentless +war upon the freebooters and had taken four times the number of +their own ships. Their crews were organized into a brotherhood with +vows like an order of fighting monks. Before setting out on a cruise +they were shriven and absolved. Their vows bound them to unceasing +vigilance, to live on the plainest of fare, to sleep on their arms, +ready for instant attack, and to the rescue of Christians, wherever +they were found in captivity. The Roskilde guild became the strong +core of the King’s armaments in his score of campaigns against the +Wends.</p> + +<p>Perhaps it was not strange that Valdemar should be of two minds +about venturing to attack so formidable an enemy in his own house. +The nation was cowed and slow to move. In fact, from the first +expedition, that started with 250 vessels, only seven returned with +the standard, keeping up a running fight all the way across the +Baltic with pursuing Wends. The rest had basely deserted. On the +way over, the King, listening to their doubts and fears, turned back +himself once, but Absalon, who always led in the attack and was the +last on the homeward run, overtook him and gave him the talking to +be deserved. Saxo, who was very likely there and heard, for there is +little doubt that he accompanied his master on many of the campaigns +he so vividly describes, gives us a verbatim report of the lecture:</p> + +<p>“What wonder,” said the bishop, “if the words stick in our throats +and are nigh to stifling us, when such grievous dole is ours! Grieve +we must, indeed, to find in you such a turncoat that naught but +dishonor can come of it. You follow where you should lead, and those +you should rule over, you make your peers. There is nothing to stop +us but our own craven souls, hunt as we may for excuses. Is it with +such laurel you would bind your crown? with such high deed you would +consecrate your reign?”</p> + +<p>The King was hard hit, and showed it, but he walked away without a +word. In the night a furious storm swept the sea and kept the fleet +in shelter four whole days, during which Valdemar’s anger had time +to cool. He owned then that Absalon was right, and the friends shook +hands. The King gave order to make sail as soon as the gale abated. +If there was still a small doubt in Absalon’s mind as he turned, on +taking leave, and asked, “What now, if we must turn back once more?” +Valdemar set it at rest:</p> + +<p>“Then you write me from Wendland,” he laughed, “and tell me how +things are there.”</p> + +<p>If little glory or gain came to the Danes from this first +expedition, at least they landed in the enemy’s country and made +reprisal for past tort. The spirit of the people rose and shamed +them for their cowardice. When the King’s summons went round again, +as it did speedily, there were few laggards. Attacked at home, the +Wends lost much of the terror they had inspired. Before many moons, +the chronicle records, the Danes cut their spear-shafts short, that +they might the more handily get at the foe. Scarce a year passed +that did not see one or more of these crusades. Absalon preached +them all, and his ship was ever first in landing. In battle he and +the King fought shoulder to shoulder. In the spring of 1169, he had +at last his wish: the heathen idols were destroyed and their temples +burned.</p> + +<p>The holy city of the Wends, Arcona, stood on a steep cliff, +inaccessible save from the west, where a wall a hundred feet high +defended it. While the sacred banner Stanitza waved over it the +Danes might burn and kill, but the power of Svantevit was unbroken. +Svantevit was the god of gods in whose presence his own priests +dared not so much as breathe. When they had to, they must go to the +door and breathe in the open, a good enough plan if Saxo’s disgust +at the filth of the Wendish homes was justified. Svantevit was a +horrid monster with four heads, and girt about with a huge sword. Up +till then the Christian arms had always been stayed at his door, but +this time the King laid siege to Arcona, determined to make an end +of him. Some of the youngsters in his army, making a mock assault +upon the strong walls, discovered an accidental hollow under the +great tower over which the Stanitza flew and, seizing upon a load of +straw that was handy, stuffed it in and set it on fire. It was done +in a frolic, but when the tower caught fire and was burned and the +holy standard fell, Absalon was quick to see his advantage, and got +the King to order a general assault. The besieged Wends, having no +water, tried to put out the fire with milk, but, says the chronicle, +“it only fed the flames.” They fought desperately till, between fire +and foe, they were seized with panic and, calling loudly upon +Absalon in their extremity, offered to give up their city. The army +clamored for the revenge that was at last within their grasp, and +the King hesitated; but Absalon met the uproar firmly, reminding +them that they had crossed the seas to convert the heathen, not to +sack their towns.</p> + +<p class="p2bot">The city was allowed to surrender and the people were spared, but +Svantevit and his temple were destroyed. A great crowd of his +followers had gathered to see him crush his enemies at the last, and +Absalon cautioned the men who cut the idol down to be careful that +he did not fall on them and so seem to justify their hopes. “He fell +with so great a noise that it was a wonder,” says Saxo, naïvely; +“and in the same moment the fiend ran out of the temple in a black +shape with such speed that no eye could follow him or see where he +went.” Svantevit was dragged out of the town and chopped into bits. +That night he fed the fires of the camp. So fickle is popular favor +that when the crowd saw that nothing happened, they spurned the god +loudly before whom they had grovelled in the dust till then.</p> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-129"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-129.jpg"> +<div class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fall of Arcona. The Idol Svantevit destroyed</span></div> +</div> + +<p class="p2">When they heard of Arcona’s fall in the royal city of Karents, they +hastened with offers of surrender, and Absalon went there with a +single ship’s crew to take possession. They were met by 6000 armed +Wends, who guarded the narrow approach to the city. In single file +they walked between the ranks of the enemy, who stood with inverted +spears, watching them in sullen silence. His men feared a trap, but +Absalon strode ahead unmoved. Coming to the temple of their local +god, Rygievit, he attacked him with his axe and bade his guard fall +to, which they did. Saxo has left us a unique description of this +idol that stood behind purple hangings, fashioned of oak “in every +evil and revolting shape. The swallows had made their nests in his +mouths and throats” (there were seven in so many faces) “and filled +him up with all manner of stinking uncleanness. Truly, for such god +was such sacrifice fit.” He had a sword for every one of his seven +faces, buckled about his ample waist, but for all that he went the +way of the others, and even had to put up with the indignity of the +Christian priests standing upon him while he was being dragged out. +That seems to have helped cure his followers of their faith in him. +They delivered the temple treasure into the hands of the King—seven +chests filled with money and valuables, among them a silver cup +which the wretched King Svend had sent to Svantevit as a bribe to +the Wends for joining him against his own country and kin. But those +days were ended. It was the Danes’ turn now, and Wendland was laid +waste until “the swallows found no eaves of any house whereunder to +build their nests and were forced to build them on the ships.” A sad +preliminary to bringing the country under the rule of the Prince of +Peace; but in the scheme of those days the sword was equal partner +with the cross in leading men to the true God.</p> + +<p>The heathen temples were destroyed and churches built on their +sites of the timber gathered for the siege of Arcona. The people, +deserted by their own, accepted the Christians’ God in good faith, +and were baptized in hosts, thirteen hundred on one day and nine +hundred on the next. Three days and nights Absalon saw no sleep. He +did nothing half-way. No sooner was he back home than he sent over +priests and teachers supplied with everything, even food for their +keep, so that they “should not be a burden to the people whom they +had come to show the way to salvation.”</p> + +<p>The Wends were conquered, but the end was not yet. They had savage +neighbors, and many a crusade did Absalon lead against them in the +following years, before the new title of the Danish rulers, “King of +the Slavs and Wends,” was much more than an empty boast. He +organized a regular sea patrol of one-fourth of the available ships, +of which he himself took command, and said mass on board much +oftener than in the Roskilde church. It is the sailor, the warrior, +the leader of men one sees through all the troubled years of his +royal friend’s life. Now the Danish fleet is caught in the inland +sea before Stettin, unable to make its way out, and already the +heathen hosts are shouting their triumph on shore. It is Absalon, +then, who finds the way and, as one would expect, he forces it. The +captains wail over the trap and abuse him for getting them into it. +Absalon, disdaining to answer them, leads his ships in single file +straight for the gap where the Wendish fleet lies waiting, and gets +the King to attack with his horsemen on shore. Between them the +enemy is routed, and the cowards are shamed. But when they come to +make amends, he is as unmoved as ever and will have none of it. +Again, when he is leading his men to the attack on a walled town, a +bridge upon which they crowd breaks, and it is the bishop who saves +his comrades from drowning, swimming ashore with them in full armor.</p> + +<p>Resting in his castle at Haffn, the present Copenhagen, which he +built as a defence against the sea-rovers, he hears, while in his +bath, his men talking of strange ships that are sailing into the +Sound, and, hastily throwing on his clothes, gives chase and kills +their crews, for they were pirates whose business was murder, and +they merely got their deserts. In the pursuit his archers “pinned +the hands of the rowers to the oars with their arrows” and crippled +them, so skilful had much practice made them. Turn the leaf of +Saxo’s chronicle, and we find him under Rügen with his fleet, +protecting the now peaceful Wendish fishermen in their autumn +herring-catch, on which their livelihood depended. Of such stuff was +made the bishop who</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">“Used his trusty Danish sword</div> + <div class="verse indent0">As the Pope his staff in Rome.”</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p>Wherever danger threatens Valdemar and Absalon, Esbern is found, +too, earning the name of the Fleet (Snare), which the people had +fondly given to their favorite. Where the fighting was hardest, he +was sure to be. The King’s son had ventured too far and was caught +in a tight place by an overwhelming force, when Esbern pushed his +ship in between him and the enemy and bore the brunt of a fight that +came near to making an end of him. He had at last only a single man +left, but the two made a stand against a hundred. “When the heathen +saw his face they fled in terror.” At last they knocked him +senseless with a stone and would have killed him, but in the nick of +time the King’s men came to the rescue.</p> + +<p>Coming home from Norway he ran afoul of forty pirate ships under +the coast of Seeland. He tried to steal past; forty against one were +heavy odds. But it was moonlight and he was discovered. The pirates +lay across his course and cut him off. Esbern made ready for a fight +and steered straight into the middle of them. The steersman +complained that he had no armor, and he gave him his own. He beat +his pursuers off again and again, but the wind slackened and they +were closing in once more, swearing by their heathen gods that they +would have him dead or alive, for a Danish prisoner on one of their +ships had told who he was. But Esbern had more than one string to +his bow. He sent a man aloft with flint and steel to strike fire in +the top, and the pirates, believing that he was signalling to a +fleet he had in ambush, fled helter-skelter. Esbern got home safe.</p> + +<p>The German emperors’ fingers had always itched for the over-lordship +of the Danish isles, and they have not ceased to do so to this day. +When Frederick Barbarossa drove Alexander III from Rome and set up a +rival Pope in his place, Archbishop Eskild of Lund, who was the +Primate of the North, championed the exiled Pope’s case, and +Valdemar, whose path the ambitious priest had crossed more than +once, let it be known that he inclined to the Emperor’s cause, in +part probably from mere pique, perhaps also because he thought it +good politics. The archbishop in a rage summoned Absalon and bade +him join him in a rising against the King. Absalon’s answer is +worthy the man and friend:</p> + +<p>“My oath to you I will keep, and in this wise, that I will not +counsel you to your own undoing. Whatever your cause against the +King, war against him you cannot, and succeed. And this know, that +never will I join with you against my liege lord, to whom I have +sworn fealty and friendship with heart and soul all the days of my +life.”</p> + +<p>He could not persuade the archbishop, who went his own way and was +beaten and exiled for a season, nor could he prevent the King from +yielding to the blandishments of Frederick and getting mixed up in +the papal troubles; but he went with him to Germany and saved him at +the last moment from committing himself by making him leave the +church council just as the anti-pope was about to pronounce sentence +of excommunication against Alexander. He commanded Absalon to +remain, as a servant of the church, but Absalon replied calmly that +he was not there in that capacity, but as an attendant on his King, +and must follow where he went. It appeared speedily that the +Emperor’s real object was to get Valdemar to own him as his +over-lord, and this he did, to Absalon’s great grief, on the idle +promise that Frederick would join him in his war upon all the Baltic +pagans. However, it was to be a purely personal matter, in nowise +affecting his descendants. That much was saved, and Absalon lived +long enough to fling back, as the counsellor of Valdemar’s son, from +behind the stout wall he built at Denmark’s southern gate, the +Emperor’s demand for homage, with the reply that “the King ruled in +Denmark with the same right as the Emperor in Germany, and was no +man’s subject.”</p> + +<p>However grievously Absalon had offended the aged archbishop, when +after forty years in his high office illness compelled him to lay it +down, he could find no one so worthy to step into his shoes. He sent +secretly to Rome and got the Pope’s permission to name his own +successor, before he called a meeting of the church. The account of +what followed is the most singular of all Saxo’s stories. Valdemar +did not know what was coming and, fearing fresh trouble, got the +archbishop to swear on the bones of the saints before them all that +he was not moved to abdication by hate of the King, or by any +coercion whatever. Then the venerable priest laid his staff, his +mitre, and his ring on the altar and announced that he had done with +it all forever. But he had made up his mind not to use the power +given him by the Pontiff. They might choose his successor +themselves. He would do nothing to influence their action.</p> + +<p>The bishops and clergy went to the King and asked him if he had any +choice. The King said he had, but if he made it known he would get +no thanks for it and might estrange his best friend. If he did not, +he would certainly be committing a sin. He did not know what to do.</p> + +<p>“Name him,” said they, and Valdemar told them it was the bishop of +Roskilde.</p> + +<p>At that the old archbishop got up and insisted on the election then +and there; but Absalon would have none of it. The burden was too +heavy for his shoulders, he said. However, the clergy seized him, +“being,” says Saxo, who without doubt was one of them, “the more +emboldened to do so as the archbishop himself laid hands upon him +first.” Intoning the hymn sung at archiepiscopal consecrations, they +tried to lead him to the altar. He resisted with all his might and +knocked several of the brethren down. Vestments were torn and +scattered, and a mighty ruction arose, to which the laity, not to be +outdone, added by striking up a hymn of their own. Archbishop and +King tried vainly to make peace; the clamor and battle only rose the +higher. Despite his struggles, Absalon was dragged to the high seat, +but as they were about to force him into it, he asked leave to say a +single word, and instantly appealed his case to the Pope. So there +was an end; but when the aged Eskild, on the plea of weakness, +begged him to pronounce the benediction, he refused warily, because +so he would be exercising archiepiscopal functions and would be <i>de +facto</i> incumbent of the office.<a id="FNanchor_6" href="#Footnote_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a></p> + +<p>Here, as always, Absalon thought less of himself than of his +country, so the event showed. For when the Pope heard his plea, +though he decided against him, he allowed him to hold the bishopric +of Roskilde together with the higher office, and so he was left at +Valdemar’s side to help finish their work of building up Denmark +within and without. At Roskilde he spent, as a matter of fact, most +of his time while Valdemar lived. At Lund he would have been in a +distant part of the country, parted from his friend and out of touch +with the things that were the first concern of his life.</p> + +<p>They were preparing to aim a decisive blow against the Pomeranian +pagans when Valdemar died, on the very day set for the sailing. The +parting nearly killed Absalon. Saxo draws a touching picture of him +weeping bitterly as he said the requiem mass over his friend, and +observes: “Who can doubt that his tears, rising with the incense, +gave forth a peculiar and agreeable savour in high heaven before +God?” The plowmen left their fields and carried the bier, with sobs +and lamentations, to the church in Ringsted, where the great King +rests. His sorrow laid Absalon on a long and grievous sick-bed, from +which he rose only when Valdemar’s son needed and called him.</p> + +<p>In the fifteen years that follow we see his old warlike spirit still +unbroken. Thus his defiance of the German Emperor, whose anger was +hot. Frederick, in revenge, persuaded the Pomeranian duke Bugislav +to organize a raid on Denmark with a fleet of five hundred sail. +Scant warning reached Absalon of the danger. King Knud was away, and +there was no time to send for him. Mustering such vessels as were +near, he sailed across the Baltic and met the enemy under Rügen the +day after Whitsuntide (1184). The bishop had gone ashore to say mass +on the beach, when word was brought that the great fleet was in +sight. Hastily pulling off his robe and donning armor instead, he +made for his ship with the words: “Now let our swords sing the +praise of God.” The Pomeranians were taken completely by surprise. +They did not know the Danes were there, and when they heard the +archbishop’s dreaded war-cry raised, they turned and fled in such +terror and haste that eighteen of their ships were run down and sunk +with all on board. On one, a rower hanged himself for fear of +falling into the hands of the Danes. Absalon gave chase, and the +rout became complete. Of the five hundred ships only thirty-five +escaped; all the rest were either sunk or taken. Duke Bugislav soon +after became a vassal of Denmark, and of the Emperor’s plots there +was an end.</p> + +<p>It was the last blow, and the story of it went far and wide. +Absalon’s work was nearly done. Denmark was safe from her enemies. +The people were happy and prosperous. Valdemar’s son ruled +unchallenged, and though he was childless, by his side stood his +brother, a manly youth who, not yet full grown, had already shown +such qualities of courage and sagacious leadership that the old +archbishop could hang up the sword with heart at ease. The promise +was kept. The second Valdemar became Denmark’s royal hero for all +time. Absalon’s last days were devoted to strengthening the Church, +around which he had built such a stout wall. He built churches and +cloisters, and guided them with a wise and firm hand. And he made +Saxo, his clerk, set it all down as an eye-witness of these things, +and as one who came to the task by right; for, says the chronicler, +“have not my grandfather and his father before him served the King +well on land and sea, hence why should not I serve him with my +book-learning?” He bears witness that the bishop himself is his +authority for much that he has written.</p> + +<p>Archbishop Absalon closed his eyes on St. Benedict’s Day, March 21, +1201, in the cloister at Sorö which Sir Asker built and where he +lived his last days in peace. Absalon’s statue of bronze, on +horseback, battle-axe in hand, stands in the market square in +Copenhagen, the city he founded and of which he is the patron saint; +but his body lies within the quiet sanctuary where, in the deep +forest glades, one listens yet for the evensong of the monks, long +silent now. When his grave was opened, in 1826, the lines of his +tall form, clad in clerical robes, were yet clearly traceable. The +strong hands, turned to dust, held a silver chalice in which lay his +episcopal ring. They are there to be seen to-day, with remnants of +his staff that had partly crumbled away. No Dane approaches his +grave without emotion. “All Denmark grieved for him,” says a German +writer of that day, “and commended his soul to Jesus Christ, the +Prince of Peace, for that in his lifetime he had led many who were +enemies to peace and concord.” In his old cathedral, in Roskilde +town, lies Saxo, according to tradition under an unmarked stone. +When he went to rest his friend and master had slept five years.</p> + +<p>Esbern outlived his brother three years. The hero of so many battles +met his death at last by an accidental fall in his own house. The +last we hear of him is at a meeting in the Christmas season, 1187, +where emissaries of Pope Gregory VIII preached a general crusade. +Their hearers wept at the picture they drew of the sufferings +Christians were made to endure in the Holy Land. Then arose Esbern +and reminded them of the great deeds of the fathers at home and +abroad. The faith and the fire of Absalon were in his words:</p> + +<p>“These things they did,” he said, “for the glory of their name and +race, knowing nothing of our holy religion. Shall we, believing, do +less? Let us lay aside our petty quarrels and take up this greater +cause. Let us share the sufferings of the saints and earn their +reward. Perhaps we shall win—God keeps the issue. Let him who +cannot give himself, give of his means. So shall all we, sharing the +promise, share also the reward.”</p> + +<p>The account we have says that many took the cross, such was the +effect of his words, more likely of the man and what he was and had +been in the sight of them all throughout his long life.</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_3" href="#FNanchor_3" class="label">[3]</a> Pronounced Reeg.</p> +</div> + +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_4" href="#FNanchor_4" class="label">[4]</a> Pronounced Snare, with a as in are. In the Danish hare +rhymes with snare, so pronounced.</p> +</div> + +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_5" href="#FNanchor_5" class="label">[5]</a> Pronounced Veethe.</p> +</div> + +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_6" href="#FNanchor_6" class="label">[6]</a> That all this in no way affected the personal relations +of the two men Saxo assures us in one of the little human touches +with which his chronicle abounds. When Eskild was going away to end +his days as a monk in the monastery of Clairvaux, he rested awhile +with Absalon at his castle Haffn, where he was received as a father. +The old man suffered greatly from cold feet, and Absalon made a box +with many little holes in, and put a hot brick in it. With this at +his feet, Eskild was able to sleep, and he was very grateful to +Absalon, both because of the comfort it gave him and “because that +he perceived that filial piety rather than skill in the healer’s +art” prompted the invention.</p> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="KING_VALDEMAR_AND_THE_STORY_OF_THE_DANNEBROG">KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG<a id="125"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>To the court of King Ottocar of Bohemia there came in the year 1205 +a brilliant embassy from far-off Denmark to ask the hand of his +daughter Dragomir for King Valdemar, the young ruler of that +country. Sir Strange<a id="FNanchor_7" href="#Footnote_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a> Ebbesoen and Bishop Peder Sunesön were the +spokesmen, and many knights, whose fame had travelled far in the +long years of fighting to bring the Baltic pagans under the cross, +rode with them. The old king received them with delight. Valdemar +was not only a good son-in-law for a king to have, being himself a +great and renowned ruler, but he was a splendid knight, tall and +handsome, of most courteous bearing, ambitious, manly, and of ready +wit. So their suit prospered well. The folk-song tells how they +fared; how, according to the custom of those days, Sir Strange +wedded the fair princess by proxy for his lord, and how King +Ottocar, when he bade her good-by, took this promise of her:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">In piety, virtue, and fear of God,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Let all thy days be spent;</div> + <div class="verse indent0">And ever thy subjects be thy thought,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Their hopes on thy care be bent.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p>The daughter kept her vow. Never was queen more beloved of her +people than Dagmar. That was the name they gave her in Denmark, for +the Bohemian Dragomir was strange to them. Dagmar meant daybreak in +their ancient tongue, and it really seemed as if a new and beautiful +day dawned upon the land in her coming. The dry pages of history +have little enough to tell of her beyond the simple fact of her +marriage and untimely death, though they are filled with her famous +husband’s deeds; but not all of his glorious campaigns that earned +for him the name of “The Victor” have sunk so deep into the people’s +memory, or have taken such hold of their hearts, as the lovely queen +who</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">Came without burden, she came with peace;</div> + <div class="verse indent0">She came the good peasant to cheer.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">Through all the centuries the people have sung her praise, and they +sing it yet. Of the many folk-songs that have come down from the +middle ages, those that tell of Queen Dagmar are the sweetest, as +they are the most mournful, for her happiness was as brief as her +life was beautiful.</p> + +<p>They sailed homeward over sunny seas, until they came to the shore +where the royal lover awaited his bride, impatiently scanning the +horizon for the gilded dragon’s head of the ship that bore her. The +minstrel sings of the great wedding that was held in the old city of +Ribe.<a id="FNanchor_8" href="#Footnote_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a> The gray old cathedral in which they knelt together still +stands; but of Valdemar’s strong castle only a grass-grown hill is +left. It was the privilege of a bride in those days to ask a gift of +her husband on the morning after the wedding, and have it granted +without question. Two boons did Dagmar crave,</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> +<p class="noindent">“right early in the morning, long before it was day”:<br></p> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">one, that the plow-tax might be forgiven the peasant, and that those +who for rising against it had been laid in irons be set free; the +other, that the prison door of Bishop Valdemar be opened. Bishop +Valdemar was the arch-enemy of the King. The first request he +granted; but the other he refused for cause:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">An’ he comes out, Bishop Valdemar,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Widow he makes you this year.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">And he did his worst; for in the end the King yielded to Dagmar’s +prayers, and much mischief came of it.</p> + +<p>Seven years the good queen lived. Seven centuries have not dimmed +the memory of them, or of her. The King was away in a distant part +of the country when they sent to him in haste with the message that +the queen was dying. The ballad tells of his fears as he sees +Dagmar’s page coming, and they proved only too true.</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">The king his checker-board shut in haste,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">The dice they rattled and rung.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Forbid it God, who dwells in heaven,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">That Dagmar should die so young.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">In the wild ride over field and moor, the King left his men far +behind:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">When the king rode out of Skanderborg</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Him followed a hundred men.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">But when he rode o’er Ribe bridge,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Then rode the king alone.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p>The tears of weeping women told him as he thundered over the +drawbridge of the castle that he was too late. But Dagmar had only +swooned. As he throws himself upon her bed she opens her eyes, and +smiles upon her husband. Her last prayer, as her first, is for mercy +and peace. Her sin, she says, is not great; she has done nothing +worse than to lace her silken sleeves on a Sunday. Then she closes +her eyes with a tired sigh:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">The bells of heaven are chiming for me;</div> + <div class="verse indent0">No more may I stay to speak.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p>Thus the folk-song. Long before Dagmar went to her rest, Bishop +Valdemar had stirred up all Germany to wreak his vengeance upon the +King. He was an ambitious, unscrupulous priest, who hated his royal +master because he held himself entitled to the crown, being the +natural son of King Knud, who was murdered at Roskilde, as told in +the story of Absalon. While they were yet young men, when he saw +that the people followed his rival, he set the German princes +against Denmark, a task he never found hard. But young Valdemar made +short work of them. He took the strong cities on the Elbe and laid +the lands of his adversaries under the Danish crown. The bishop he +seized, and threw him into the dungeon of Söborg Castle, where he +had sat thirteen years when Dagmar’s prayers set him free. He could +hardly walk when he came out, but he could hate, and all the world +knew it. The Pope bound him with heavy oaths never to return to +Denmark, and made him come to Italy so that he could keep an eye on +him himself. But two years had not passed before he broke his oath, +and fled to Bremen, where the people elected him to the vacant +archbishopric and its great political power. Forthwith he began +plotting against his native land.</p> + +<p>In the bitter feud between the Guelphs and the Ghibellines he found +his opportunity. One of the rival emperors marched an army north to +help the perjured priest. King Valdemar hastened to meet them, but +on the eve of battle the Emperor was slain by one of his own men. On +Sunday, when the archbishop was saying mass in the Bremen cathedral, +an unknown knight, the visor of whose helmet was closed so that no +one saw his face, strode up to the altar, and laying a papal bull +before him, cried out that he was accursed, and under the ban of the +church. The people fled, and forsaken by all, the wretched man +turned once more to Rome in submission. But though the Pope forgave +him on condition that he meddle no more with politics, war, or +episcopal office, another summer found him wielding sword and lance +against the man he hated, this time under the banner of the Guelphs. +The Germans had made another onset on Denmark, but again King +Valdemar defeated them. The bishop intrenched himself in Hamburg, +and made a desperate resistance, but the King carried the city by +storm. The beaten and hopeless man fled, and shut himself up in a +cloister in Hanover, where daily and nightly he scourged himself for +his sins. If it is true that “hell was fashioned by the souls that +hated,” not all the penance of all the years must have availed to +save him from the torments of the lost.</p> + +<p>Denmark now had peace on its southern border. Dagmar was dead, and +Valdemar, whose restless soul yearned for new worlds to conquer, +turned toward the east where the wild Esthland tribes were guilty of +even worse outrages than the Wends before Absalon tamed them. The +dreadful cruelties practised by these pagans upon christian captives +cried aloud to all civilized Europe, and Valdemar took the cross +“for the honor of the Virgin Mary and the absolution of his sins,” +and gathered a mighty fleet, the greatest ever assembled in Danish +waters. With more than a thousand ships he sailed across the Baltic. +The Pope sped them with his apostolic blessing, and took king and +people into his especial care, forbidding any one to attack the +country while they were away converting the heathen. Archbishop +Anders led the crusade with the king. As the fleet approached the +shore they saw it covered with an innumerable host of the enemy. So +great was their multitude that the crusaders quailed before the +peril of landing; but the archbishop put heart into them, and led +the fleet in fervent prayer to the God of battle. Then they landed +without hindrance.</p> + +<p>There was an old stronghold there called Lyndanissa that had fallen +into decay. The crusaders busied themselves for two days with +building another and better fort. On the third day, being St. Vitus’ +Day, they rested, fearing no harm. The Esthlanders had not troubled +them. Some of their chiefs had even come in with an offer of +surrender. They were willing to be converted, they said, and the +priests were baptizing them after vespers, while the camp was making +ready for the night, when suddenly the air was filled with the yells +of countless savages. On every side they broke from the woods, where +they had been gathering unsuspected, and overwhelmed the camp. The +guards were hewn down, the outposts taken, and the King’s men were +falling back in confusion, their standard lost, when Prince Vitislav +of Rügen who had been camping with his men in a hollow between the +sand-hills, out of the line of attack, threw himself between them +and the Esthlanders, and gave the Danes time to form their lines.</p> + +<p>In the twilight of the June evening the battle raged with great +fury. With the King at their head, who had led them to victory on so +many hard-fought fields, the Danes drove back their savage foes time +after time, literally hewing their way through their ranks with +sword and battle-axe. But they were hopelessly outnumbered. Their +hearts misgave them as they saw ten heathen spring out of the ground +for every one that was felled. The struggle grew fiercer as night +came on. The Christians were fighting for life; defeat meant that +they must perish to a man, by the sword or upon pagan altars; escape +there was none. Upon the cliff overlooking the battle-field the +archbishop and his priests were praying for success to the King’s +arms. Tradition that has been busy with this great battle all +through the ages tells how, while the aged bishop’s hands were +raised toward heaven, victory leaned to the Danes; but when he grew +tired, and let them fall, the heathen won forward, until the priests +held up his hands and once more the tide of battle rolled back from +the shore, and the Christian war-cry rose higher.</p> + +<p>Suddenly, in the clash of steel upon steel and the wild tumult of +the conflict, there arose a great and wondering cry “the banner! the +banner! a miracle!” and Christian and pagan paused to listen. Out of +the sky, as it seemed, over against the hill upon which the priests +knelt, a blood-red banner with a great white cross was seen falling +into the ranks of the Christian knights, and a voice resounded over +the battle-field, “Bear this high, and victory shall be yours.” With +the exultant cry, “For God and the King,” the crusaders seized it, +and charged the foe. Terror-stricken, the Esthlanders wavered, then +turned, and fled. The battle became a massacre. Thousands were +slain. The chronicles say that the dead lay piled fathom-high on the +field that ran red with blood. Upon it, when the pursuit was over, +Valdemar knelt with his men, and they bowed their heads in +thanksgiving, while the venerable archbishop gave praise to God for +the victory.</p> + +<p>That is the story of the Dannebrog which has been the flag of the +Danes seven hundred years. Whether the archbishop had brought it +with him intending to present it to King Valdemar, and threw it down +among the fighting hordes in the moment of extreme peril, or +whether, as some think, the Pope himself had sent it to the +crusaders with a happy inspiration, the fact remains that it came to +the Danes in this great battle, and on the very day which, fifty +years before, had seen the fall of Arcona, and the end of +idol-worship among the western Slavs. Three hundred years the +standard flew over the Danes fighting on land and sea. Then it was +lost in a campaign against the Holstein counts and, when recovered +half a century later, was hung up in the cathedral at Slesvig, +where gradually it fell to pieces. In the first half of the +Nineteenth Century, when national feeling and national pride were at +their lowest ebb, it was taken down with other moth-eaten old +banners, one day when they were cleaning up, and somebody made a +bonfire of them in the street. Such was the fate of “the flag that +fell from heaven,” the sacred standard of the Danes. But it was not +the end of it. The Dannebrog flies yet over the Denmark of the +Valdemars, no longer great as then, it is true, nor master of its +ancient foes; but the world salutes it with respect, for there was +never blot of tyranny or treason upon it, and its sons own it with +pride wherever they go.</p> + +<p>King Valdemar knighted five and thirty of his brave men on the +battle-field, and from that day the Order of the Dannebrog is said +to date. It bears upon a white crusader’s cross the slogan of the +great fight “For God and the King,” and on its reverse the date when +it was won, “June 15, 1219.” The back of paganism was broken that +day, and the conversion of all Esthland followed soon. King Valdemar +built the castle he had begun before he sailed home, and called it +Reval, after one of the neighboring tribes. The Russian city of that +name grew up about it and about the church which Archbishop Anders +reared. The Dannebrog became its arms, and its people call it to +this day “the city of the Danes.”</p> + +<p>Denmark was now at the height of her glory. Her flag flew over all +the once hostile lands to the south and east, clear into Russia. The +Baltic was a Danish inland sea. King Valdemar was named “Victor” +with cause. His enemies feared him; his people adored him. In a +single night foul treachery laid the whole splendid structure low. +The King and young Valdemar, Dagmar’s son, with a small suite of +retainers had spent the day hunting on the little island of Lyö. +Count Henrik of Schwerin,—the Black Count they called him,—who had +just returned from a pilgrimage to the Holy Land, was his guest. The +count hated Valdemar bitterly for some real or fancied injury, but +he hid his hatred under a friendly bearing and smooth speech. He +brought the King gifts from the Holy Sepulchre, hunted with him, and +was his friend. But by night, when the King and his son slept in +their tent, unguarded, since no enemy was thought to be near, he +fell upon them with his cutthroats, bound and gagged them despite +their struggles, and gathering up all the valuables that lay around, +to put the finishing touch upon his villainy, fled with his +prisoners “in great haste and fear,” while the King’s men slept. +When they awoke, and tried to follow, they found their ships +scuttled. The count’s boat had been lying under sail all day, hidden +in a sheltered cove, awaiting his summons.</p> + +<p>Germany at last had the lion and its whelp in her grasp. In chains +and fetters they were dragged from one dungeon to another. The +traitors dared not trust them long in any city, however strong. The +German Emperor shook his fist at Count Henrik, but secretly he was +glad. He would have liked nothing better than to have the precious +spoil in his own power. The Pope thundered in Rome and hurled his +ban at the thugs. But the Black Count’s conscience was as swarthy as +his countenance; and besides, had he not just been to the Holy Land, +and thereby washed himself clean of all his sins, past and present?</p> + +<p>Behind prison walls, comforted only by Dagmar’s son, sat the King, +growing old and gray with anger and grief. Denmark lay prostrate +under the sudden blow, while her enemies rose on every side. Day by +day word came of outbreaks in the conquered provinces. The people +did not know which way to turn; the strong hand that held the helm +was gone, and the ship drifted, the prey of every ill wind. It was +as if all that had been won by sixty years of victories and +sacrifice fell away in one brief season. The forests filled with +out-laws; neither peasant nor wayfarer, nor yet monk or nun in their +quiet retreat, was safe from outrage; and pirates swarmed again in +bay and sound, where for two generations there had been peace. The +twice-perjured Bishop Valdemar left his cloister cell once more and +girt on the sword, to take the kingdom he coveted by storm.</p> + +<p>He was met by King Valdemar’s kinsman and friend, Albert of +Orlamunde, who hastened to the frontier with all the men he could +gather. They halted him with a treaty of peace that offered to set +Valdemar free if he would take his kingdom as a fief of the German +crown. He, Albert, so it was written, was to keep all his lands and +more, would he but sign it. He did not stop to hear the rest, but +slashed the parchment into ribbons with his sword, and ordered an +instant advance. The bishop he made short work of, and he was heard +of no more. But in the battle with the German princes Albert was +defeated and taken prisoner. The door of King Valdemar’s dungeon was +opened only to let his friend in.</p> + +<p>After two years and a half in chains, Valdemar was ransomed by his +people with a great sum of gold. The Danish women gave their rings +and their jewels to bring back their king. They flocked about him +when he returned, and received him like the conqueror of old; but he +rode among them gray and stern, and his thoughts were far away.</p> + +<p>They had made him swear on oath upon the sacrament, and all +Denmark’s bishops with him, before they set him free, that he would +not seek revenge. But once he was back in his own, he sent to Pope +Gregory, asking him to loose him from an oath wrung from him while +he was helpless in the power of bandits. And the Pope responded that +to keep faith with traitors was no man’s duty. Then back he rode +over the River Eider into the enemy’s land—for they had stripped +Denmark of all her hard-won possessions south of the ancient border +of the kingdom, except Esthland and Rügen—and with him went every +man who could bear arms in all the nation. He crushed the Black +Count who tried to block his way, and at Bornhöved met the German +allies who had gathered from far and near to give him battle. Well +they knew that if Valdemar won, the reckoning would be terrible. All +day they fought, and victory seemed to lean toward the Danes, when +the base Holsteiners, the Danish rear-guard whom the enemy had +bought to betray their king, turned their spears upon his army, and +decided the day. The battle ended in utter rout of Valdemar’s +forces. Four thousand Danish men were slain. The King himself fell +wounded on the field, his eye pierced by an arrow, and would have +fallen into the hands of the enemy once more but for an unknown +German knight, who took him upon his horse and bore him in the night +over unfrequented paths to Kiel, where he was safe.</p> + +<p>“But all men said that this great hurt befell the King because that +he brake the oath he swore upon the sacred body of the Lord.”</p> + +<p>The wars of Valdemar were over, but his sorrows were not. Four years +later the crushing blow fell when Dagmar’s son, who was crowned king +to succeed him, lost his life while hunting. With him, says the +folk-song, died the hope of Denmark. The King had other sons, but to +Dagmar’s boy the people had given their love from the first, as they +had to his gentle mother. The old King and his people grieved +together.</p> + +<p>But Valdemar rose above his sorrows. Great as he had been in the +days of victory, he was greater still in adversity. The country was +torn by the wars of three-score years, and in need of rest. He gave +his last days to healing the wounds the sword had struck. Valdemar, +the Victor, became Valdemar, the Law-giver. The laws of the country +had hitherto made themselves. They were the outgrowths of the +people’s ancient customs, passed down by word of mouth through the +generations, and confirmed on Thing from time to time. King +Valdemar gave Denmark her first written laws that judged between +man and man, in at least one of her provinces clear down into our +day. “With law shall land be built” begins his code. “The law,” it +says, “must be honest, just, reasonable, and according to the ways +of the people. It must meet their needs, and speak plainly so that +all men may know and understand what the law is. It is not to be +made in any man’s favor, but for the needs of all them who live in +the land.” That is its purpose, and “no man shall judge (condemn) +the law which the King has given and the country chosen; neither +shall he (the King) take it back without the will of the people.” +That tells the story of Valdemar’s day, and of the people who are so +near of kin with ourselves. They were not sovereign and subjects; +they were a chosen king and a free people, working together “with +law land to build.”</p> + +<p>King Valdemar was married twice. The folk-song represents Dagmar as +urging the King with her dying breath</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>“that Bengerd, my lord, that base bad dame you never to wife will take.”</p> +</div> + +<p class="noindent">Bengerd, or Berengaria, was a Portuguese princess whom Valdemar +married in spite of the warning, two years later. As the people had +loved the fair Dagmar, so they hated the proud Southern beauty, +whether with reason or not. The story of her “morning gift,” as it +has come down to us through the mists of time, is very different +from the other. She asks the King, so the ballad has it, to give her +Samsö, a great and fertile island, and “a golden crown<a id="FNanchor_9" href="#Footnote_9" class="fnanchor">[9]</a> for every +maid,” but he tells her not to be quite so greedy:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>There be full many an honest maid with not dry bread to eat.<br></p> +</div> + +<p>Undismayed, Bengerd objects that Danish women have no business to +wear silken gowns, and that a good horse is not for a peasant lad. +The King replies patiently that what a woman can buy she may wear +for him, and that he will not take the lad’s horse if he can feed +it. Bengerd is not satisfied. “Let bar the land with iron chains” is +her next proposal, that neither man nor woman enter it without +paying tax. Her husband says scornfully that Danish kings have never +had need of such measures, and never will. He is plainly getting +bored, and when she keeps it up, and begrudges the husbandman more +than “two oxen and a cow,” he loses his temper, and presumably there +is a matrimonial tiff. Very likely most of this is fiction, bred of +the popular prejudice. The King loved her, that is certain. She was +a beautiful high-spirited woman, so beautiful that many hundreds of +years after, when her grave was opened, the delicate oval of her +skull excited admiration yet. But the people hated her. Twenty +generations after her death it was their custom when passing her +grave to spit on it with the exclamation “Out upon thee, Bengerd! +God bless the King of Denmark”; for in good or evil days they never +wavered in their love and admiration for the king who was a son of +the first Valdemar, and the heir of his greatness and of that of the +sainted Absalon. Tradition has it that Bengerd was killed in battle, +having gone with her husband on one of his campaigns. “It was not +heard in any place,” says the folk-song wickedly, “that any one +grieved for her.” But the King mourned for his beautiful queen to +the end of his days.</p> + +<p>Bengerd bore Valdemar three sons upon whom he lavished all the +affection of his lonely old age. Erik he chose as his successor, and +to keep his brothers loyal to him he gave them great fiefs and thus, +unknowing, brought on the very trouble he sought to avoid, and set +his foot on the path that led to Denmark’s dismemberment after +centuries of bloody wars. For to his second son Abel he gave +Slesvig, and Abel, when his brother became king, sought alliance +with the Holstein count Adolf,<a id="FNanchor_10" href="#Footnote_10" class="fnanchor">[10]</a> the very one who had led the +Germans at the fatal battle of Bornhöved. The result was a war +between the brothers that raged seven years, and laid waste the +land. Worse was to follow, for Abel was only “Abel in name, but Cain +in deed.” But happily the old King’s eyes were closed then, and he +was spared the sight of one brother murdering the other for the +kingdom.</p> + +<p>Some foreboding of this seems to have troubled him in his last +years. It is related that once when he was mounting his horse to go +hunting he fell into a deep reverie, and remained standing with his +foot in the stirrup a long time, while his men wondered, not daring +to disturb him. At last one of them went to remind him that the sun +was low in the west. The King awoke from his dream, and bade him go +at once to a wise old hermit who lived in a distant part of the +country. “Ask him,” he said, “what King Valdemar was thinking of +just now, and bring me his answer.” The knight went away on his +strange errand, and found the hermit. And this was the message he +brought back: “Your lord and master pondered as he stood by his +horse, how his sons would fare when he was dead. Tell him that war +and discord they shall have, but kings they will all be.” When the +King heard the prophecy he was troubled in mind, and called his sons +and all his great knights to a council at which he pleaded with them +to keep the peace. But though they promised, he was barely in his +grave when riot and bloodshed filled the land. The climax was +reached when Abel inveigled his brother to his home with fair words +and, once he had him in his power, seized him and gave him over to +his men to do with “as they pleased.” They understood their master +only too well, and took King Erik out on the fjord in an open boat, +and killed him there, scarce giving him time to say his prayers. +They weighted his body with his helmet, and sank it in the deep.</p> + +<p>Abel made oath with four and twenty of his men that he was innocent +of his brother’s blood, and took the crown after him. But the foul +crime was soon avenged. Within a few years he was himself slain by a +peasant in a rising of his own people. For a while his body lay +unburied, the prey of beast and bird, and when it was interred in +the Slesvig cathedral there was no rest for it. “Such turmoil arose +in the church by night that the monks could not chant their vigils,” +and in the end they took him out, and buried him in a swamp, with a +stake driven through the heart to lay his ghost. But clear down to +our time when people ceased to believe in ghosts, the fratricide was +seen at night hunting through the woods, coal-black and on a white +horse, with three fiery dogs trailing after; and blue flames burned +over the sea where they vanished. That was how the superstition of +the people judged the man whom the nobles and the priests made +king, red-handed.</p> + +<p>Christopher, the youngest of the three brothers, was king last. His +end was no better than that of the rest. Indeed, it was worse. +Hardly yet forty years old, he died—poisoned, it was said, by the +Abbot Arnfast, in the sacrament as he knelt at the altar-rail in the +Ribe cathedral. He was buried in the chancel where the penitents +going to the altar walk over his grave. So, of all Valdemar’s four +sons, not one died a peaceful, natural death. But kings they all +were.</p> + +<p>Valdemar was laid in Ringsted with his great father. He sleeps +between his two queens. Dagmar’s grave was disturbed in the late +middle ages by unknown vandals, and the remains of Denmark’s +best-loved queen were scattered. Only a golden cross, which she had +worn in life, somehow escaped, and found its way in course of time +into the museum of antiquities at Copenhagen, where it now is, its +chief and priceless treasure. There also is a braid of Queen +Bengerd’s hair that was found when her grave was opened in 1855. The +people’s hate had followed her even there, and would not let her +rest. The slab that covered her tomb had been pried off, and a round +stone dropped into the place made for her head. Otherwise her grave +was undisturbed.</p> + +<p>“Truly then fell the crown from the heads of Danish men,” says the +old chronicle of King Valdemar’s death, and black clouds were +gathering ominously even then over the land. But in storm and +stress, as in days that were fair, the Danish people have clung +loyally to the memory of their beloved King and of his sweet Dagmar.</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_7" href="#FNanchor_7" class="label">[7]</a> Pronounced as Strangle, with the l left out.</p> +</div> + +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_8" href="#FNanchor_8" class="label">[8]</a> Pronounced Reebe, in two syllables.</p> +</div> + +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_9" href="#FNanchor_9" class="label">[9]</a> A coin, probably.</p> +</div> + +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_10" href="#FNanchor_10" class="label">[10]</a> That was the beginning of the Slesvig-Holstein question +that troubled Europe to our day; for the fashion set by Abel other +rulers of his dukedom followed, and by degrees Slesvig came to be +reckoned with the German duchies, whereas up till then it had always +been South-Jutland, a part of Denmark proper.</p> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="HOW_THE_GHOST_OF_THE_HEATH_WAS_LAID">HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID<a id="153"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p class="p2bot">On the map of Europe the mainland of Denmark looks like a beckoning +finger pointing due north and ending in a narrow sand-reef, upon +which the waves of the North Sea and of the Kattegat break with +unceasing clamor and strife. The heart of the peninsula, quite +one-fourth of its area, was fifty years ago a desert, a barren, +melancholy waste, where the only sign of life encountered by the +hunter, gunning for heath-fowl and plover, was a rare shepherd +tending a few lonesome sheep, and knitting mechanically on his +endless stocking. The two, the lean sheep and the long stocking, +together comprised the only industries which the heath afforded and +was thought capable of sustaining. A great change has taken place +within the span of a single life, and it is all due to the clear +sight and patient devotion of one strong man, the Gifford Pinchot of +Denmark. The story of that unique achievement reads like the tale +of the Sleeping Beauty who was roused from her hundred years’ sleep +by the kiss of her lover prince. The prince who awoke the slumbering +heath was a captain of engineers, Enrico Dalgas by name.</p> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-179"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-179.jpg"> +<div class="caption"><span class="smcap">The Heath as it was Fifty Years ago</span></div> +</div> + +<p class="p2">Not altogether fanciful is the conceit. Barren, black, and desolate, +the great moor gripped the imagination as no smiling landscape of +field and forest could—does yet, where enough of it remains. Far as +eye reaches the dun heather covers hill and plain with its sombre +pall. Like gloomy sentinels, furry cattails nod in the bog where the +blue gentian peeps timidly into murky pools; the only human +habitation in sight some heath boer’s ling-thatched hut, flanked by +rows of peat stacks in vain endeavor to stay the sweep of the +pitiless west wind. On the barrows where the vikings sleep their +long sleep, the plover pipes its melancholy lay; between steep banks +a furtive brook steals swiftly by as if anxious to escape from the +universal blight. Over it all broods the silence of the desert, +drowsy with the hum of many bees winging their swift way to the +secret feeding-places they know of, where mayflower and anemone hide +under the heather, witness that forests grew here in the long ago. +In midsummer, when the purple is on the broom, a strange pageant +moves on the dim horizon, a shifting mirage of sea and shore, +forest, lake, and islands lying high, with ships and castles and +spires of distant churches—the witchery of the heath that speaks in +the tales and superstitions of its simple people. High in the blue +soars the lark, singing its song of home and hope to its nesting +mate. This is the heath which, denying to the hardest toil all but +the barest living, has given of its poetry to the Danish tongue some +of its sweetest songs.</p> + +<p>But in this busy world day-dreams must make way for the things that +make the day count, castles in the air to homes upon the soil. The +heath had known such in the dim past. It had not always been a +desert. The numberless cairns that lie scattered over it, sometimes +strung out for miles as if marking the highways of the ancients, +which they doubtless do, sometimes grouped where their villages +stood, bear witness to it. Great battles account for their share, +and some of them were fought in historic times. On Grathe Heath the +young King Valdemar overcame his treacherous rival Svend. Alone and +hunted, the beaten man sought refuge, Saxo tells us, behind a stump, +where he was found and slain by one of the King’s axemen. A chapel +was built on the spot. More than seven centuries later (in 1892) +they dug there, and found the bones of a man with skull split in +two.</p> + +<p>The stump behind which the wretched Svend hid was probably the last +representative of great forests that grew where now is sterile moor. +In the bogs trunks of oak and fir are found lying as they fell +centuries ago. The local names preserve the tradition, with here and +there patches of scrub oak that hug the ground close, to escape the +blast from the North Sea. There is one such thicket near the hamlet +of Taulund—the name itself tells of long-forgotten groves—and the +story runs among the people yet that once squirrels jumped from tree +to tree without touching ground all the way from Taulund to +Gjellerup church, a stretch of more than five miles to which the +wild things of the woods have long been strangers. In the shelter of +the old forests men dwelt through ages, and made the land yield them +a living. Some cairns that have been explored span over more than a +thousand years. They were built in the stone age, and served the +people of the bronze and iron ages successively as burial-places, +doubtless the same tribes who thus occupied their homesteads from +generation to generation. That they were farmers, not nomads, is +proved by the clear impression of grains of wheat and barley in +their burial urns. The seeds strayed into the clay and were burned +away, but the impression abides, and tells the story.</p> + +<p>Clear down to historic times there was a thrifty population in many +of the now barren spots. But a change was slowly creeping over the +landscape. The country was torn by long and bloody wars. The big men +fought for the land and the little ones paid the score, as they +always do. They were hunted from house and home. Next the wild +hordes of the Holstein counts overran Jutland. Its towns were +burned, the country laid waste. Great fires swept the forests. What +ravaging armies had left was burned in the smelteries. In the sandy +crust of the heath there is iron, and swords and spears were the +grim need of that day. The smelteries are only names now. They +went, but they took the forests with them, and where the ground was +cleared the west wind broke through, and ruin followed fast. Last of +all came the Black Death, and set its seal of desolation upon it +all. When it had passed, the country was a huge graveyard. The heath +had moved in. Rovers and smugglers found refuge there; honest folk +shunned it. Under the heather the old landmarks are sometimes found +yet, and deep ruts made by wheels that long since ceased to turn.</p> + +<p>In the Eighteenth Century men began to think of reclamation. A +thousand German colonists were called in and settled on the heath, +but it was stronger than they, and they drifted away until scarce +half a hundred families remained. The Government tried its hand, but +there was no one who knew just how, and only discouragement +resulted. Then came the war with Germany in 1864, that lost to +Denmark a third of her territory. The country lay prostrate under +the crushing blow. But it rose above defeat and disaster, and once +more expectant eyes were turned toward the ancient domain that had +slipped from its grasp. “What was lost without must be won within” +became the national slogan. And this time the man for the task was +at hand.</p> + +<p>Enrico Mylius Dalgas was by the accident of birth an Italian, his +father being the Danish consul in Naples; by descent a Frenchman; by +choice and training a Dane, typical of the best in that people. He +came of the Huguenot stock that left France after the repeal of the +Edict of Nantes in 1685 and scattered over Europe, to the great good +of every land in which it settled. They had been tillers of the soil +from the beginning, and at least two of the family, who found homes +in Denmark, made in their day notable contributions to the cause of +advanced, sensible husbandry. Enrico’s father, though a merchant, +had an open eye for the interests which in later years claimed the +son’s life-work. In the diary of a journey through Sweden he makes +indignant comment upon the reckless way in which the people of that +country dealt with their forests. That he was also a man of +resolution is shown by an incident of the time when Jew-baiting was +having its sorry day in Denmark. An innkeeper mistook the +dark-skinned little man for a Jew, and set before him a spoiled +ham, retorting contemptuously, when protest was made, that it was +“good enough for a Sheeny.” Without further parley Mr. Dalgas seized +the hot ham by its shank and beat the fellow with it till he cried +for mercy. The son tells of the first school he attended, when he +was but five years old. It was kept by the widow of one of +Napoleon’s generals, a militant lady who every morning marshalled +the school, a Lilliputian army with the teachers flanking the line +like beardless sergeants in stays and petticoats, and distributed +rewards and punishments as the great Emperor was wont to do after a +battle. For the dunces there was a corner strewn with dried peas on +which they were made to kneel with long-eared donkey caps adorning +their luckless heads. Very likely it was after an insult of this +kind that Enrico decided to elope to America with his baby sister. +They were found down by the harbor bargaining with some fishermen to +take them over to Capri <i>en route</i> for the land of freedom. The +elder Dalgas died while the children were yet little, and the widow +went back to Denmark to bring up her boys there.</p> + +<p>They were poor, and the change from the genial skies of sunny Italy +to the bleak North did not make it any easier for them. Enrico’s +teacher saw it, and gave him his overcoat to be made over. But the +boys spotted it and squared accounts with their teacher by +snowballing the wearer of the big green plaid until he was glad to +leave it at home, and go without. He was in the military school when +war broke out with Germany in 1848. Both of his brothers +volunteered, and fell in battle. Enrico was ordered out as +lieutenant, and put on the shoulder-straps joyfully, to the great +scandal of his godfather in Milan, who sympathized with the German +cause. When the young soldier refused to resign he not only cut him +off in his will, but took away a pension of four hundred kroner he +had given his mother in her widowhood. If he had thoughts of +bringing them over by such means, he found out his mistake. Mother +and son were made of sterner stuff. Dalgas fought twice for his +country, the last time in 1864, as a captain of engineers.</p> + +<p>It was no ordinary class, the one of 1851 that resumed its studies +in the military high school. Two of the students did not answer +roll-call; their names were written among the nation’s heroic dead. +Some had scars and wore the cross for valor in battle. All were +first lieutenants, to be graduated as captains. Dalgas had himself +transferred from the artillery to the engineers, and was detailed as +road inspector. So the opportunity of his life came to him.</p> + +<p>There were few railways in those days; the highways were still the +great arteries of traffic. Dalgas built roads that crossed the +heath, and he learned to know it and the strong and independent, if +narrow, people who clung to it with such a tenacious grip. He had a +natural liking for practical geology and for the chemistry of the +soil, and the deep cuts which his roads sometimes made gave him the +best of chances for following his bent. The heath lay as an open +book before him, and he studied it with delight. He found the traces +of the old forests, and noted their extent. Occasionally the pickaxe +uncovered peat deposits of unsuspected depth and value. Sometimes +the line led across the lean fields, and damages had to be discussed +and assessed. He learned the point of view of the heath farmer, +sympathized with his struggles, and gained his confidence. Best of +all, he found a man of his own mind, a lawyer by the name of +Morville, himself a descendant of the exiled Huguenots. It is not a +little curious that when the way was cleared for the Heath Society’s +great work, in its formal organization with M. Mourier-Petersen, a +large landowner, as their associate in its management, the three men +who for a quarter of a century planned the work and marked out the +groove in which it was to run were all of that strong stock which is +by no means the most common in Denmark.</p> + +<p>With his lawyer friend Captain Dalgas tramped the heath far and wide +for ten years. Then their talks had matured a plan. Dalgas wrote to +the Copenhagen newspapers that the heath could be reclaimed, and +suggested that it should be done by the State. They laughed at him. +“Nothing better could have happened,” he said in after years, “for +it made us turn to the people themselves, and that was the road to +success, though we did not know it.” In the spring of 1866 a hundred +men, little and big landowners most of them, met at his call, and +organized the Heath Society<a id="FNanchor_11" href="#Footnote_11" class="fnanchor">[11]</a> with the object of reclaiming the +moor. Dalgas became its managing director.</p> + +<p>To restore to the treeless waste its forest growth was the +fundamental idea, for until that was done nothing but the heather +could grow there. The west wind would not let it. But the heath +farmer shook his head. It would cost too much, and give too little +back. What he needed was water and marl. Could the captain help them +to these?—that was another matter. The little streams that found +their way into the heath and lost it there, dire need had taught +them to turn to use in their fields; not a drop escaped. But the +river that ran between deep banks was beyond their reach. Could he +show them how to harness that? Dalgas saw their point. “We are +working, not for the dead soil, but for the living men who find +homes upon it,” he told his associates, and tree planting was put +aside for the time. They turned canal diggers instead. Irrigation +became their aim and task; the engineer was in his right place. The +water was raised from the stream and led out upon the moor, and +presently grass grew in the sand which the wiry stems of the heather +had clutched so long. Green meadows lined the water-runs, and +fragrant haystacks rose. To the lean sheep was added a cow, then +two. The farmer laid by a little, and took in more land for +cultivation. That meant breaking the heath. Also, it meant marl. The +heath is lime-poor; marl is lime in the exact form in which it best +fits that sandy soil. It was known to exist in some favored spots, +but the poor heath farmer could not bring it from a distance. So the +marl borer went with the canal digger. Into every acre he drove his +auger, and mapped out his discoveries. At last accounts he had found +marl in more than seventeen hundred places, and he is not done yet. +Where there was none, Dalgas’s Society built portable railways into +the moor far enough to bring it to nearly every farmer’s door.</p> + +<p>It was as if a magic wand had been waved over the heath. With water +and marl, the means were at hand for fighting it and winning out. +Heads that had drooped in discouragement were raised. The cattle +keep increased, and with it came the farmer’s wealth. Marl changes +the character of the heath soil; with manure to fertilize it there +was no reason why it should not grow crops—none, except the +withering blast of the west wind. The time for Dalgas to preach tree +planting had come.</p> + +<p>While the canal digger and marl seeker were at work, there had been +neighborhood meetings and talks at which Captain Dalgas did the +talking. When he spoke the heath boer listened, for he had learned +to look upon him as one of them. He wore no gold lace. A plain man +in every day gray tweeds, with his trousers tucked into his boots, +he spoke to plain people of things that concerned them vitally, and +in a way they could understand. So when he told them that the heath +had once been forest-clad, at least a large part of it, and pointed +them to the proofs, and that the woods could be made to grow again +to give them timber and shelter and crops, they gave heed. It was +worth trying at any rate. The shelter was the immediate thing. They +began planting hedges about their homesteads; not always wisely, for +it is not every tree that will grow in the heath. The wind whipped +and wore them, the ahl cramped their roots, and they died. The ahl +is the rusty-red crust that forms under the heather in the course of +the ages where the desert rules. Sometimes it is a loose sandstone +formation; sometimes it carries as much as twenty per cent of iron +that is absorbed from the upper layers of the sand. In any case, it +must be broken through; no tree root can do it. The ahl, the poverty +of the sand, and the wind, together make the “evil genius” of the +heath that had won until then in the century-old fight with man. But +this time he had backing, and was not minded to give up. The Heath +Society was there to counsel, to aid. And soon the hedges took hold, +and gardens grew in their shelter. There is hardly a farm in all +west Jutland to-day that has not one, even if the moor waits just +beyond the gate.</p> + +<p>Out in the desert the Society had made a beginning with plantations +of Norway spruce. They took root, but the heather soon overwhelmed +the young plants. Not without a fight would this enemy let go its +grip upon the land. It had smothered the hardy Scotch pine in days +past, and now the spruce was in peril. Searching high and low for +something that would grow fast and grow green, Dalgas and his +associates planted dwarf pine with the spruce. Strangely, it not +only grew itself, but proved to be a real nurse for the other. The +spruce took a fresh start, and they grew vigorously together—for a +while. Then the pine outstripped its nursling, and threatened to +smother it. The spruce was the more valuable; the other was at best +little more than a shrub. The croaker raised his voice: the black +heath had turned green, but it was still heath, of no value to any +one, then or ever.</p> + +<p>He had not reckoned with Dalgas. The captain of engineers could use +the axe as well as the spade. He cut the dwarf pine out wherever the +spruce had got its grip, and gave it light and air. And it grew big +and beautiful. The Heath Society has now over nineteen hundred +plantations that cover nearly a hundred thousand acres, and the +State and private individuals, inspired by the example it set, have +planted almost as large an area. The ghost of the heath has been +laid for all time.</p> + +<p>Go now across the heath and see the change forty years have wrought. +You shall seek in vain the lonely shepherd with his stocking. The +stocking has grown into an organized industry. In grandfather’s day +the farmer and his household “knitted for the taxes”; if all hands +made enough in the twelvemonth to pay the tax-gatherer, they had +done well. Last year the single county of Hammerum, of which more +below, sold machine-made underwear to the value of over a million +and a half kroner. The sheep are there, but no longer lean; no more +the ling-thatched hut, but prosperous farms backed by thrifty +groves, with hollyhock and marigold in the dooryards, heaps of gray +marl in the fields, tiny rivulets of water singing the doom of the +heath in the sand; for where it comes the heather moves out. A +resolute, thrifty peasantry looks hopefully forward. Not all of the +heath is conquered yet. Roughly speaking, thirty-three hundred +square miles of heath confronted Dalgas in 1866. Just about a +thousand remain for those who come after to wrestle with; but +already voices are raised pleading that some of it be preserved +untouched for its natural beauty, while yet it is time.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile the plow goes over fresh acres every year—once, twice, +then a deeper plowing, this time to break the stony crust, and the +heath is ready for its human mission. From the Society’s nurseries +that are scattered through the country come thousands of tiny +trees, and are set out in the furrows, two of the spruce for each +dwarf pine till the nurse has done her work. Then she is turned into +charcoal, into tar, and a score of other things of use. The men who +do the planting in summer find chopping to do in winter in the older +plantations, at good wages. Money is flowing into the moor in the +wake of the water and the marl. Roads are being made, and every day +the mail-carrier comes. In the olden time a stranger straying into +the heath often brought the first news of the world without for +weeks together. Game is coming, too,—roebuck and deer,—in the +young forests. The climate itself is changing; more rain falls in +midsummer, when it is needed. The sand-blast has been checked, the +power of the west wind broken. The shrivelled soil once more takes +up and holds the rains, and the streams will deepen, fish leap in +them as of yore. Groves of beech and oak are springing up in the +shelter of their hardier evergreen kin. “Make the land furry,” +Dalgas said, with prophetic eye beholding great forests taking the +place of sand and heather, and in his lifetime the change was +wrought that is transforming the barren moor into the home-land of +a prosperous people.</p> + +<p>To the most unlikely of places, through the very prison doors, his +gospel of hope has made its way. For the last dozen years the life +prisoners in the Horsens penitentiary have been employed in breaking +and reforesting the heath, and their keepers report that the effect +upon them of the hard work in the open has been to notably cheer and +brighten them. The discipline has been excellent. There have been +few attempts at escape, and they have come to nothing through the +vigilance of the other prisoners.</p> + +<p>While the population in the rest of Denmark is about stationary, in +west Jutland it grows apace. The case of Skåphus farm in the parish +of Sunds shows how this happens. Prior to 1870 this farm of three +thousand acres was rated the “biggest and poorest” in Denmark. Last +year it had dwindled to three hundred and fifty acres, but upon its +old land thirty-three homesteads had risen that kept between them +sixty-two horses and two hundred and fifty-two cows, beside the +sheep, and the manor farm was worth twice as much as before. The +town of Herning, sometimes called “the Star of the Heath,” is the +seat of Hammerum county, once the baldest and most miserable on the +Danish mainland. In 1841 twenty-one persons lived in Herning. To-day +there are more than six thousand in a town with handsome buildings, +gas, electric lighting, and paved streets. The heath is half a dozen +miles away. And this is not the result of any special or forced +industry, but the natural, healthy growth of a centre for an army of +industrious men and women winning back the land of their fathers by +patient toil. All through the landscape one sees from the train the +black giving way to the green. Churches rear their white gables; +bells that have been silent since the Black Death stalked through +the land once more call the people to worship on the old sites. More +churches were built in the reign of “the good King Christian,” who +has just been gathered to his fathers, than in all the centuries +since the day of the Valdemars.</p> + +<p>Bog cultivation is the Heath Society’s youngest child. The heath is +full of peat-bogs that only need the sand, so plentiful on the +uplands, to make their soil as good as the best, the muck of the bog +being all plant food, and they have a surplus of water to give in +exchange. With hope the keynote of it all, the State has taken up +the herculean task of keeping down the moving sands of the North Sea +coast. All along it is a range of dunes that in the fierce storms of +that region may change shape and place in a single night. The “sand +flight” at times reached miles inland, and threatened to bury the +farmer’s acres past recovery. Austrian fir and dwarf pine now grow +upon the white range, helping alike to keep down the sand and to bar +out the blast.</p> + +<p class="p2bot">With this exception, the great change has been, is being, wrought by +the people themselves. It was for their good, in the apathy that +followed 1864, that it should be so, and Dalgas saw it. The State +aids the man who plants ten acres or more, and assumes the +obligation to preserve the forest intact; the Heath Society sells +him plants at half-price, and helps him with its advice. It disposes +annually of over thirteen million young trees. The people do the +rest, and back the Society with their support. The Danish peasant +has learned the value of coöperation since he turned dairy farmer, +and associations for irrigation, for tree planting, and garden +planting are everywhere. They even reach across the ocean. This year +a call was issued to sons of the old soil, who have found a new home +in America, to join in planting a Danish-American forest in the +desert where hill and heather hide a silvery lake in their deep +shadows and returning wanderers may rest and dream of the long ago.</p> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-201"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-201.jpg"> +<div class="caption"><span class="smcap">The Heath transformed in Twenty-one Years</span></div> +</div> + +<p class="p2">Soldier though he was, Enrico Dalgas’s pick and spade brigade won +greater victories for Denmark than her armies in two wars. He +literally “won for his country within what she had lost without.” A +natural organizer, a hard worker who found his greatest joy in his +daily tasks, a fearless and lucid writer who yet knew how to keep +his cause out of the rancorous politics that often enough seemed to +mistake partisanship for patriotism, he was the most modest of men. +Praise he always passed up to others. At the “silver wedding” of the +Society he founded they toasted him jubilantly, but he sat quiet a +long time. When at last he arose, it was to make this characteristic +little speech:</p> + +<p>“I thank you very much. His Excellency the Minister of the Interior, +who is present here, will see from this how much you think of me, +and possibly my recommendation that the State make a larger +contribution to the Heath Society’s treasury may thereby acquire +greater weight with him. I drink to an increased appropriation.”</p> + +<p>On the heath Dalgas was prophet, prince, and friend of the people. +In the crowds that flocked about his bier homespun elbowed gold lace +in the grief of a common loss. Boughs of the fragrant spruce decked +his coffin, the gift of the heath to the memory of him who set it +free.</p> + +<p>To Dalgas apply the words of the seer with which he himself +characterized the Society that was the child of his heart and brain: +“The good men are those who plant and water,” for they add to the +happiness of mankind.</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_11" href="#FNanchor_11" class="label">[11]</a> Danske Hedeselskab.</p> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="KING_CHRISTIAN_IV">KING CHRISTIAN IV<a id="179"></a></h2> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-207a"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-207a.jpg"> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-207b"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-207b.jpg"> +<div class="caption"> +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">King Christian stood by loft - y mast In mist and</div> + <div class="verse indent0">smoke; His sword was ham - mer - ing so fast, Thro’</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Goth -ic helm and brain it passed; Then sank each hos-tile</div> + <div class="verse indent0">hulk and mast. In mist and smoke. “Fly,”</div> + <div class="verse indent0">shout-ed they, “fly, he who can! Who braves of Denmark’s</div> + <div class="verse indent0">Christ- i -an, Who braves of Denmark’s Christian The stroke?”</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="p2"><a id="182"></a>Deep in the beech-woods between Copenhagen and Elsinore, upon the +shore of a limpid lake, stands Frederiksborg, one of the most +beautiful castles in Europe. In its chapel the Danish kings were +crowned for two centuries, and here was born on April 12, 1577, King +Christian of the Danish national hymn which Longfellow translated +into our tongue. No Danish ruler since the days of the great +Valdemars made such a mark upon his time; none lives as he in the +imagination of the people. He led armies to war and won and lost +battles; indeed, he lost more than he won on land when matched +against the great generals of that fighting era. On the sea he +sailed his own ship and was the captain of his own fleet, and there +he had no peer. He made laws in the days of peace and reigned over a +happy, prosperous land. In his old age misfortune in which he had no +share overwhelmed Denmark, but he was ever greatest in adversity, +and his courage saved the country from ruin. The great did not love +him overmuch; but to the plain people he was ever, with all his +failings, which were the failings of his day, a great, appealing +figure, and lives in their hearts, not merely in the dry pages of +musty books.</p> + +<p>He was eleven years old when his father died, and until he came of +age the country was governed by a council of happily most able men +who, with his mother, gave him such a schooling as few kings have +had. He not only became proficient in the languages, living and +dead, and in mathematics which he put to such practical use that he +was among the greatest of architects and ship-builders; he was the +best all-round athlete among his fellows as well, and there was some +sense in the tradition that survives to this day that whoever was +touched by him in wrath did not live long, for he was very tall with +a big, strong body, and when he struck, he struck hard. He was a +dauntless sailor who knew as much about sailing a ship as any one of +his captains, and much more about building it. Danger appealed to +him always. When the spire on the great cathedral in Copenhagen +threatened to fall, he was the one who went up in it alone and gave +orders where and how to brace it.</p> + +<p>As he grew, he sat in the council of state, learning kingcraft, and +showed there the hard-headed sense of fairness and justice that went +with him through life. He was hardly fourteen when the case of three +brothers of the powerful Friis family came before the council. They +had attacked another young nobleman in the street, struck off one of +his hands, and crippled the other. Because of their influence, the +council was for being lenient, atrocious as the crime was. A fine +was deemed sufficient. The young prince asked if there were not some +law covering the case with severer punishment, and was told that in +the province of Skaane there was such a law that applied to serfs. +But the assault had not been committed in Skaane, and these were +high noblemen.</p> + +<p>“All the worse for them,” said the prince. “Is then a serf in Skaane +to have more rights under the law than a nobleman in the rest of +Denmark? Let the law for the serf be theirs.” And the judgment +stood.</p> + +<p>He had barely attained his majority, when the young king was called +upon to judge between another great noble and a widow whom he sued +for 9000 daler, money he claimed to have lent to her husband. In +proof he laid before the judges two bonds bearing the signatures of +husband and wife. The widow denounced them as forgeries, but the +court decided that she must pay. She went straight to the King with +her story, assuring him that she had never heard of the debt. The +King sent for the bonds and upon close scrutiny discovered that one +of them was on paper bearing the water-mark of a mill that was not +built till two years after the date written in the bond. The noble +was arrested and the search of his house brought to light several +similar documents waiting their turn. He went to the scaffold. His +rank only aggravated his offence in the eyes of the King. No wonder +the fame of this judge spread quickly through the land.</p> + +<p>A dozen contented years he reigned in peace, doing justice between +man and man at home. Then the curse of his house gripped him. In two +centuries, since the brief union between the three Scandinavian +kingdoms was broken by the secession of Sweden, only two of sixteen +kings in either country had gone to their rest without ripping up +the old feud. It was now Christian’s turn. The pretext was of little +account: there was always cause enough. Gustav Adolf, whose father +was then on the throne of Sweden, said in after years that there was +no one he had such hearty admiration for and whose friend he would +like so well to be as Christian IV: “The mischief is that we are +neighbors.” King Christian crossed over into Sweden and laid siege +to the strong fortress of Kalmar where he first saw actual war and +showed himself a doughty campaigner of intrepid courage. It came +near costing him his life when a cannoneer with whom he had often +talked on his rounds deserted to the enemy and picked the King out +as his especial target. Twice he killed an officer attending upon +him, but the King he never hit. It is almost a pleasure to record +that when he tried it again, in another fight, Christian caught him +and dealt with him as the traitor he was, though the rough justice +of those days is not pleasant to dwell on. The besieged tried to +create a diversion by sneaking into camp at night and burying wax +images of the King and his generals in the earth, where they were +afterwards found and spread consternation through the army; for such +things were believed to be wrought by witchcraft and to bring bad +luck to those whom they represented.</p> + +<p>However, neither the real courage of the defenders, nor their +dallying with the black art, helped them any. King Christian stormed +the town at the head of his army and took it. The burgomaster hid in +the church, disguised as a priest, and pretended to be shriving some +women when the crash came, but it did not save him. When the +Swedish king came with a host twice the size of his own, there was +a battle royal, but Christian drove him off and laid siege to the +castle where dissension presently arose between the garrison and its +commander who was for surrendering. In the midst of their noisy +quarrel, King Christian was discovered standing upon the wall, +calmly looking on. He had climbed up alone on a rope ladder which +the sentinel let down at his bidding. At the sight they gave it up +and opened the gates, and the King wrote home, proudly dating his +letter from “our castle Kalmar.”</p> + +<p>Its loss so angered the Swedish king who was old and sick, that he +challenged Christian to single combat, without armor. The letters +that passed between them were hardly kingly. King Christian wrote +that he had other things to do: “Better catch a doctor, old man, and +have your head-piece looked after.” Helpless anger killed Karl, and +Gustav Adolf, of whom the world was presently to hear, took the +command and the crown. After that Christian had a harder road to +hoe.</p> + +<p>A foretaste of it came to him when he tried to surprise the fortress +of Gullberg near the present Götaborg. Its commander was wounded +early in the fight, but his wife who took his place more than filled +it. She and her women poured boiling lye upon the attacking Danes +until they lay “like scalded pigs” under the walls. Their leader +knew when he had enough and made off in haste, with the lady +commandant calling after him, “You were a little unexpected for +breakfast, but come back for dinner and we will receive you +properly.” She would not even let them take their dead away. “Since +God gave us luck to kill them,” she said, “we will manage to bury +them too.” They were very pious days after their own fashion, and +God was much on the lips of his servants. Troubles rarely come +singly. Soon after, King Christian met the enemy unexpectedly and +was so badly beaten that for the second time he had to run for it, +though he held out till nearly all his men had fallen. His horse got +mired in a swamp with the pursuers close behind. The gay and wealthy +Sir Christen Barnekow, who had been last on the field, passed him +there, and at once got down and gave him his horse. It meant giving +up his life, and when Sir Christen could no longer follow the +fleeing King he sat down on a rock with the words, “I give the King +my horse, the enemy my life, and God my soul.” The rock is there yet +and the country folk believe that the red spots in the granite are +Christen Barnekow’s blood which all the years have not availed to +wash out.</p> + +<p>They tired of fighting at last and made it up. Sweden paid Denmark a +million daler; for the rest, things stayed as they had been before. +King Christian had shown himself no mean fighter, but the senseless +sacking and burning of town and country that was an ugly part of +those days’ warfare went against his grain, and he tried to persuade +the Swedes to agree to leave that out in future. Gustav Adolf had +not yet grown into the man he afterward became. “As to the burning,” +was his reply, “seeing that it is the usage of war, and we enemies, +why we will each have to do the best we can,” which meant the worst. +Had the two kings, who had much in common, got together in the years +of peace that followed, much misery might have been saved Denmark, +and a black page of history might read very differently. For those +were the days of the Thirty Years’ War, in which together they +might have dictated peace to harassed Europe.</p> + +<p>Now King Christian’s ambition, his piety, for he was a sincerely +religious man, as well as his jealousy of his younger rival and of +the growing power of Sweden—so mixed are human motives—made him +yield to the entreaties of the hard-pressed Protestant princes to +take up alone their cause against the German Emperor. He had tried +for half a dozen years to make peace between them. At last he drew +the sword and went down to force it. After a year of fighting Tilly +and Wallenstein, the Emperor’s great generals, he met the former in +a decisive battle at Lutter-am-Baremberg. King Christian’s army was +beaten and put to rout. He himself fled bareheaded through the +forests of the Hartz Mountains, pursued by the enemy’s horsemen. It +was hardly necessary for the Emperor to make him promise as the +price of peace to keep out of German affairs thenceforth. His allies +had left him to fight it out alone. All their fine speeches went for +nothing when it came to the test, and King Christian rode back to +Denmark, a sadder and wiser man. It was left to Gustav Adolf, after +all, to teach the German generals the lesson they needed.</p> + +<p>In the years of peace before that unhappy war, Danish trade and +Danish culture had blossomed exceedingly, thanks to the wisdom, the +clever management, and untiring industry of the King. He built +factories, cloth-mills, silk-mills, paper-mills, dammed the North +Sea out from the rich marshlands with great dikes, taught the +farmers profitable ways of tilling their fields; for he was a +wondrous manager for whom nothing was too little and nothing too +big. He kept minute account of his children’s socks and little +shirts, and found ways of providing money for his war-ships and for +countless building schemes he had in hand both in Denmark and +Norway. For many of them he himself drew the plans. Wherever one +goes to this day, his monogram, which heads this story, stares at +him from the splendid buildings he erected. The Bourse in Copenhagen +and the Round Tower, the beautiful palace of Rosenborg, a sort of +miniature of his beloved Frederiksborg which also he rebuilt on a +more magnificent scale—these are among his works which every +traveller in the North knows. He built more cities and strongholds +than those who went before or came after him for centuries. +Christiania and Christiansand in Norway bear his name. He laid out a +whole quarter of Copenhagen for his sailors, and the quaint little +houses still serve that purpose. Regentsen, a dormitory for poor +students at the university, was built by him. He created seven new +chairs of learning and saw to it that all the professors got better +pay. He ferreted out and dismissed in disgrace all the grafting +officials in Norway, and administered justice with an even hand. At +the same time he burned witches without end, or let it be done for +their souls’ sake. That was the way of his time; and when he needed +fireworks for his son’s wedding (he made them himself, too), he sent +around to all the old cloisters and cathedral churches for the old +parchments they had. Heaven only knows what treasures that can never +be replaced went up in fire and smoke for that one night’s fun.</p> + +<p>King Christian founded a score of big trading companies to exploit +the East, taking care that their ships should have their bulwarks +pierced for at least six guns, so that they might serve as war-ships +in time of need. He sent one expedition after another to the waters +of Greenland in search of the Northwest Passage. It was on the +fourth of these, in 1619, that Jens Munk with two ships and +sixty-four sailors was caught in the ice of Hudson Bay and compelled +to winter there. One after another the crew died of hunger and +scurvy. When Jens Munk himself crept out from what he had thought +his death-bed, he found only two of them all alive. Together they +burrowed in the snow, digging for roots until spring came when they +managed to make their way down to Bergen in the smallest of the two +vessels. Jens Munk had deserved a better end than he got. He spun +his yarns so persistently at court that he got to be a tiresome +bore, and at last one day the King told him that he had no time to +listen to him. Whereat the veteran took great umbrage and, slapping +his sword, let the King know that he had served him well and was +entitled to better treatment. Christian snatched the weapon in anger +and struck him with the scabbard. The sailor never got over it. “He +withered away and died,” says the tradition. It was the old +superstition; but whether that killed him or not, the King lost a +good man in Jens Munk.</p> + +<p>He was not averse to hearing the truth, though, when boldly put. +When Ole Vind, a popular preacher, offended some of the nobles by +his plain speech and they complained to the King, he bade him to the +court and told him to preach the same sermon over. Master Vind was +game and the truths he told went straight home, for he knew well +where the shoe pinched. But King Christian promptly made him court +preacher. “He is the kind we need here,” he said. There was never a +day that the King did not devoutly read his Bible, and he was +determined that everybody should read it the same way. The result +was a kind of Puritanism that filled the churches and compelled the +employment of men to go around with long sticks to rap the people on +the head when they fell asleep. Christian the Fourth was not the +first ruler who has tried to herd men into heaven by battalions. But +his people would have gladly gone in the fire for him. He was their +friend. When on his tramps, as likely as not he would come home +sitting beside some peasant on his load of truck, and would step off +at the palace gate with a “So long, thanks for good company!” He was +everywhere, interested in everything. In his walking-stick he +carried a foot-rule, a level, and other tools, and would stop at the +bench of a workman in the navy-yard and test his work to see how +well he was doing it. “I can lie down and sleep in any hut in the +land,” was his contented boast. And he would have been safe +anywhere.</p> + +<p>Gustav Adolf was a wise and generous foe. While he lived he refused +to listen to proposals for the partition of Denmark after King +Christian’s defeat in Germany. He knew well that she was a barrier +against the ambition of the German princes and that, once she was +out of the way, Sweden’s turn would come next. But when he had +fallen on the battle-field of Lützen, and his generals, following in +his footsteps, had achieved fame and lands and the freedom of +worship for which he gave his life, the Swedish statesmen lost their +heads and dreamed of the erection of a great northern Protestant +state by the conquest of Denmark and Norway, to balance the power +of the German empire. Without warning or declaration of war a great +army was thrown into the Danish peninsula from the south. Another +advanced from Sweden upon the eastern provinces, and a fleet hired +in Holland for Swedish money came through the North Sea to help them +over to the Danish islands. If the two armies met, Denmark was lost. +In Swedish harbors a still bigger fleet was fitting out for the +Baltic.</p> + +<p>King Christian was well up in the sixties, worn with the tireless +activities of a long reign; but once more he proved himself greater +than adversity. When the evil tidings reached him, in the midst of +profound peace, the enemy was already within the gates. The country +lay prostrate. The name of Torstenson, the Swedish general, spread +terror wherever it was heard. In the German campaigns he had been +known as the “Swedish Lightning.” Beset on every side, never had +Denmark’s need been greater. The one man who did not lose his head +was her king. By his personal example he put heart into the people +and shamed the cowardly nobles. He borrowed money wherever he could, +sent his own silver to the mint, crowded the work in the navy-yard +by night and by day, gathered an army, and hurried with it to the +Sounds where the enemy might cross. When the first ships were ready +he sailed around the Skaw to meet the Dutch hirelings. “I am old and +stiff,” he said, “and no good any more to fight on land. But I can +manage the ships.”</p> + +<p>And he did. He met the Dutchmen in the North Sea, in under the +Danish coast, and whipped them, almost single-handed, for his own +ship <i>Trefoldigheden</i> was for a long while the only one that wind +and tide would let come up with them. That done, he left one of his +captains to watch lest they come out from among the islands where +their ships of shallower draught had sought refuge, and sailed for +Copenhagen. Everything that could carry sail was ready for him by +that time; also the news that the Swedish fleet of forty-six +fighting ships under Klas Fleming had sailed for the coast of +Holstein to take on board Torstenson’s army.</p> + +<p>King Christian lost no time. He hoisted his flag on <i>Trefoldigheden</i> +and made after them with thirty-nine ships, vowing that he would +win this fight or die. At Kolberger Heide, the water outside the +Fjord of Kiel, he caught up with them and attacked at once. The +battle that then ensued is the one of which the poet sings and with +which the name of Christian IV is forever linked.</p> + +<p>At the outset the Danish fleet was in great peril. The Swedes fought +gallantly as was their wont, and they were three or four against +one, for most of the King’s ships came up slowly, some of them +purposely, so it seems. The King said after the battle of certain of +his captains, “They used me as a screen between them and the enemy.” +His own ship and that of his chief admiral’s bore the brunt of the +battle for a long time. <i>Trefoldigheden</i> fired 315 shots during the +engagement, and at one time had four hostile, ships clustering about +her. King Christian was on the quarter-deck when a cannon-ball +shivered the bulwark and one of his guns, throwing a shower of +splintered iron and wood over him and those near him, killing and +wounding twelve of the crew. The King himself fell, stunned and +wounded in twenty-three places. His right eye was knocked out, two +of his teeth, and his left ear hung in shreds.</p> + +<p class="p2bot">The cry was raised that the King was dead and panic spread on board. +The story has it that a sailor was sent aloft to strike the flag but +purposely entangled it in the rigging so that it could not fall; he +could not bear to see the King’s ship strike its colors. In the +midst of the tumult the aged monarch rose to his feet, torn and +covered with blood. “I live yet,” he cried, “and God has left me +strength to fight on for my country. Let every man do his duty.” +Leaning on his sword, he led the fight until darkness fell and the +battle was won. Denmark was saved. The danger of an invasion was +averted. In the palace of Rosenborg the priceless treasure they show +to visitors is the linen cloth, all blood-stained, that bound the +King’s face as he fought and won his last and biggest fight that +day.</p> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-227"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-227.jpg"> +<div class="caption"><span class="smcap">Christian IV at the Battle of Kolberger Heide</span></div> +</div> + +<p class="p2">Half blind, his body black and blue and sore from many bruises, King +Christian yet refused to sail for Copenhagen to have his wounds +attended. Three weeks he lay watching the narrow inlet behind which +the beaten enemy was hiding, to destroy his ships when he came out. +Then he gave over the command to another and hastened to the +province of Skaane on the Swedish mainland, from which he expelled a +hostile army. But when his back was turned, the men he had set to +watch fell asleep and let the Swedish admiral steal out into the +open. There he found and joined the Dutch ships that had slipped +around the Skaw during the rumpus. Together they overwhelmed the +Danish fleet, being now three to one, and crushed it. The slothful +admiral paid for it with his life, but the harm was done. It was the +last and heaviest blow. The old King sheathed his sword and set his +name to a peace that took from Denmark some of her ancient +provinces, with the bitter sigh: “God knows I had no share in this,” +and he had not. Even at the last he appealed to the country to try +the fortunes of war with him once more. The people were willing, but +the nobles wanted peace, “however God send it,” and he had to yield. +The treaty was made at Brömsebro, where a bridge crossed the river +dividing the two kingdoms. In the middle of the river was an island +and the negotiations were carried on in a tent erected there, the +French and the Dutch being the arbitrators. The envoys of Sweden +and Denmark sat on opposite sides of the boundary post where the +line cut through, each on the soil of his own country. So bitterly +did they hate one another that they did not speak but wrote their +messages, though they could have shaken hands where they sat. Even +that was too close quarters, and they ended up by negotiating at +second hand through the foreign ambassadors, all at the same table, +but each looking straight past the other as if he were not there.</p> + +<p>Another touch of comedy relieves the gloom of that heavy day. It was +the conquest of the Särnadal, a mountain valley in Norway just over +the Swedish frontier, by Pastor Buschovius who, Bible in hand, at +the head of two hundred ski-men invaded and captured it one winter’s +day without a blow. He came over the snow-fields into the valley +that had not seen a preacher in many a long day, had the church +bells rung to summon the people, preached to them, married and +christened them, and gave them communion. The simple mountaineers +had hardly heard of the war and had nothing against their neighbors +over the mountain. They joined Sweden then and there at the request +of the preacher, and they stayed Swedes too, for in the final muster +they were forgotten with their valley. Very likely the treaty-makers +did not know that it existed.</p> + +<p>King Christian died four years later, in 1648, past the three score +and ten allotted to man. He was not a great leader like Gustav +Adolf, and he was very human in some of his failings. But he was a +strong man, a just king, and a father of his people who still cling +to his memory with more than filial affection.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="GUSTAV_ADOLF_THE_SNOW-KING">GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING<a id="205"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>The city of Prague, the capital of Bohemia, went wild with +excitement one spring morning in the year 1618. The Protestant +Estates of Germany had met there to protest against the aggressions +of the Catholic League and the bad faith of the Emperor, who had +guaranteed freedom of worship in the land and had now sent two +envoys to defy the meeting and declare it illegal. In the old castle +they delivered their message and bade the convention disperse; and +the delegates, when they had heard, seized them and their clerk and +threw them out of the window “in good old Bohemian fashion.” They +fell seventy feet and escaped almost without a scratch, which fact +was accepted by the Catholics of that strenuous day as proof of +their miraculous preservation; by the Protestants as evidence that +the devil ever takes care of his own.</p> + +<p>It was the tiny spark that set Europe on fire. Out of it grew the +Thirty Years’ War, the most terrible that ever scourged the +civilized world. When Catholic League and Evangelical Union first +mustered their armies, Bohemia had a prosperous population of four +million souls; when the war was over there were less than eight +hundred thousand alive in that unhappy land, and the wolves that +roamed its forests were scarcely more ferocious than the human +starvelings who skulked among the smoking ruins of burned towns and +hamlets. Other states fared little better. Two centuries did not +wipe out the blight of those awful years when rapine and murder, +inspired by bigotry and hate, ran riot in the name of religion.</p> + +<p>In the gloom and horror of it all a noble figure stands forth alone. +It were almost worth the sufferings of a Thirty Years’ War for the +world to have gained a Gustav Adolf. The “snow-king” the Emperor’s +generals named him when he first appeared on German soil at the head +of his army of Northmen, and they prophesied that he would speedily +melt, once the southern sun shone upon his host. They little knew +the man. He went from victory to victory, less because he was the +greatest general of his day than because he, and all his army with +him, believed himself charged by the Almighty with the defence of +his country and of his faith. The Emperor had attacked both, the +first by attempting to extend his dominion to the Baltic; but +Pommerania and the Baltic provinces were regarded by the Swedish +ruler as the outworks of his kingdom; and Sweden was Protestant. +Hence he drew the sword. “Our brethren in the faith are sighing for +deliverance from spiritual and bodily thraldom,” he said to his +people. “Please God, they shall not sigh long.” That was his +warrant. Axel Oxenstjerna, his friend and right hand who lived to +finish his work, said of him, “He felt himself impelled by a mighty +spirit which he was unable to resist.” As warrior, king, and man, he +was head and shoulders above his time. Gustav Adolf saved religious +liberty to the world. He paid the price with his life, but he would +have asked no better fate. A soldier of God, he met a soldier’s +death on the field of battle, in the hour of victory.</p> + +<p>A man of destiny he was to his people as to himself. Long years +before his birth, upon the appearance of the comet of 1577, Tycho +Brahe, the astronomer, who was deep in the occultism of his day, had +predicted that a prince would appear in Finland who would do great +things in Germany and deliver the Protestant peoples from the +oppression of the popes, and the prophecy was applied to Gustav +Adolf by his subjects all through his life. He was born on December +9, 1594, old style, as they still reckon time in Russia. Very early +he showed the kind of stuff he was made of. When he was yet almost a +baby he was told that there were snakes in the park, and showed +fight at once: “Give me a stick and I will kill them.” With the +years he grew into a handsome youth who read his books, knew his +Seneca by heart, was fond of the poets and the great orators, and +mastered eight languages, living and dead. At seventeen he buckled +on the sword and put the books away, but kept Xenophon as his +friend; for he was a military historian after his own heart. He was +then Duke of Finland.</p> + +<p>The King, his father, was a stern but observant man who, seeing his +bent, threw him with soldiers to his heart’s content, glad to have +it so, for it was a warlike age. From his tenth year he let him sit +in council with him and early delegated to him the duty of answering +ambassadors from foreign countries. The lad was the only one who +dared oppose the king when he was in a temper, and often he made +peace and healed wounds struck in anger. The people worshipped the +fair young prince, and his father, when he felt the palsy of old age +and bodily infirmities creeping upon him and thought of his +unfinished tasks, would murmur as his eyes rested upon the bonny +youth: “<i lang="la" xml:lang="la">Ille faciet</i>—He will do it.” There is still in existence a +document in which he laid down to him his course as a sovereign. +“First of all,” he writes, “you shall fear God and honor your father +and mother. Give your brothers and sisters brotherly affection; love +your father’s faithful servants and requite them after their due. Be +gracious to your subjects; punish evil and love the good. Believe in +men, but find out first what is in them. Hold by the law without +respect of person.”</p> + +<p>It was good advice to a prince, and the king took it to heart. On +the docket of the Supreme Court at Stockholm is a letter written by +Gustav Adolf to the judges and ordered by him to be entered there, +which tells them plainly that if any of them is found perverting +justice to suit him, the King, or any one else, he will have him +flayed alive and his hide nailed to the judgment-seat, his ears +to the pillory! Not a nice way of talking to dignified judges, +perhaps, but then the prescription was intended to suit the +practice, if there was need.</p> + +<p>The young king earned his spurs in a war with Denmark that came near +being his last as it was his first campaign. He and his horsemen +were surprised by the Danes on a winter’s night as they were warming +themselves by a fire built of the pews in the Wittsjö church, and +they cut their way through only after a desperate fight on the +frozen lake. The ice broke under the king’s horse and he was going +down when two of his men caught him in the nick of time. He got away +with the loss of his sword, his pistols, and his gloves. “I will +remember you with a crust that shall do for your bairns too,” he +promised one of his rescuers, a stout peasant lad, and he kept his +word. Thomas Larssön’s descendants a generation ago still tilled the +farm the King gave him. When the trouble with Denmark was over for +the time being, he settled old scores with Russia and Poland in a +way that left Sweden mistress of the Baltic. In the Polish war he +was wounded twice and was repeatedly in peril of his life. Once he +was shot in the neck, and, as the bullet could not be removed, it +ever after troubled him to wear armor. His officers pleaded with him +to spare himself, but his reply was that Cæsar and Alexander did not +skulk behind the lines; a general must lead if he expected his men +to follow.</p> + +<p>In this campaign he met the League’s troops, sent to chase him back +to his own so that Wallenstein, the leader of the imperial armies, +might be “General of the Baltic Sea,” unmolested. “Go to Poland,” he +commanded one of his lieutenants, “and drive the snow-king out; or +else tell him that I shall come and do it myself.” The proud soldier +never knew how near he came to entertaining the snow-king as his +unwilling guest then. In a fight between his rear-guard and the +imperial army Gustav Adolf was disarmed and taken prisoner by two +troopers. There was another prisoner who had kept his pistol. He +handed it to the King behind his back and with it he shot one of his +captors and brained the other. For all that they nearly got him. He +saved himself only by wriggling out of his belt and leaving it in +the hands of the enemy. Eight years he campaigned in Poland and +Prussia, learning the arts of war. Then he was ready for his +life-work. He made a truce with Poland that freed his hands for a +season, and went home to Sweden.</p> + +<p>That spring (1629) he laid before the Swedish Estates his plan of +freeing the Protestants. To defend Sweden, he declared, was to +defend her faith, and the Estates voted supplies for the war. To +gauge fully the splendid courage of the nation it must be remembered +that the whole kingdom, including Finland, had a population of only +a million and a half at the time and was preparing to attack the +mighty Roman empire. In the first year of the war the Swedish budget +was thirteen millions of dollars, of which nine and a half went for +armaments. The whole army which Gustav Adolf led into Germany +numbered only 14,000 soldiers, but it was made up of Swedish +veterans led by men whose names were to become famous for all time, +and welded together by an unshakable belief in their commander, a +rigid discipline and a religious enthusiasm that swayed master and +men with a common impulse. Such a combination has in all days proven +irresistible.</p> + +<p>The King’s farewell to his people—he was never to see Sweden +again—moved a nation to tears. He spoke to the nobles, the clergy +and to the people, admonishing them to stand together in the hard +years that were coming and gave them all into the keeping of God. +They stood on the beach and watched his ships sail into the sunset +until they were swallowed up in glory. Then they went back home to +take up the burden that was their share. On the Rügen shore the King +knelt with his men and thanked God for having brought them safe +across the sea, then seized a spade, and himself turned the first +sod in the making of a camp. “Who prays well, fights well,” he said.</p> + +<p>He was not exactly hospitably received. The old Duke of Pommerania +would have none of him, begged him to go away, and only when the +King pointed to his guns and hinted that he had keys well able to +open the gates of Stettin, his capital, did he give in and promise +help. The other German princes, with one or two exceptions, were as +cravenly short-sighted. They held meetings and denounced the Emperor +and his lawless doings, but Gustav they would not help. The princes +of Brandenburg and of Saxony, the two Protestant Electors of the +empire, were rather disposed to hinder him, if they might, though +Brandenburg was his brother-in-law. Only when the King threatened to +burn the city of Berlin over his head did he listen. While he was +yet laboring with them, recruiting his army and keeping it in +practice by driving the enemy out of Pommerania, news reached him of +the fall of Magdeburg, the strongest city in northern Germany, that +had of its own free will joined his cause.</p> + +<p>The sacking of Magdeburg is one of the black deeds of history. In a +night the populous city was reduced to a heap of smoking ruins under +which twenty thousand men, women, and children lay buried. Not since +the fall of Jerusalem, said Pappenheim, Tilly’s famous cavalry +leader to whom looting and burning were things of every day, had so +awful a visitation befallen a town. Only the great cathedral and a +few houses near it were left standing. The history of warfare of the +Christian peoples of that day reads like a horrid nightmare. The +fighting armies left a trail of black desolation where they passed. +“They are not made up of birds that feed on air,” sneered Tilly. +Peaceful husbandmen were murdered, the young women dragged away to +worse than slavery, and helpless children spitted upon the lances +of the wild landsknechts and tossed with a laugh into the blazing +ruins of their homes. But no such foul blot cleaves to the memory of +Gustav Adolf. While he lived his men were soldiers, not demons. In +his tent the work of Hugo Grotius on the rights of the nations in +war and peace lay beside the Bible and he knew them both by heart. +When he was gone, the fame of some of his greatest generals was +smirched by as vile orgies as Tilly’s worst days had witnessed. It +is told of John Banér, one of the most brilliant of them, that he +demanded ransom of the city of Prix, past which his way led. The +city fathers permitted themselves an untimely jest: “Prix giebt +nichts—Prix gives nothing,” they said. Banér was as brief: “Prix +wird zu nichts—Prix comes to nothing,” and his army wiped it out.</p> + +<p>Grief and anger almost choked the King when he heard of Magdeburg’s +fate. “I will avenge that on the Old Corporal (Tilly’s nickname),” +he cried, “if it costs my life.” Without further ado he forced the +two Electors to terms and joined the Saxon army to his own. On +September 7, 1631, fifteen months after he had landed in Germany, he +met Tilly face to face at Breitenfeld, a village just north of +Leipzig. The Emperor’s host in its brave show of silver and plumes +and gold, the plunder of many campaigns under its invincible leader, +looked with contempt upon the travel-worn Swedes in their poor, +soiled garb. The stolid Finns sat their mean but wiry little horses +very unlike Pappenheim’s dreaded Walloons, descendants of the +warlike Belgæ of Gaul who defied the Germans of old in the forest of +the Ardennes and joined Cæsar in his victorious march. But Tilly +himself was not deceived. He knew how far this enemy had come and +with what hardships cheerfully borne; how they had routed the +Russians, written laws for the Poles in their own land, and +overthrown armies and forts that barred their way. He would wait for +reënforcements; but his generals egged him on, said age had made him +timid and slow, and carried the day.</p> + +<p>The King slept in an empty cart the night before the battle and +dreamed that he wrestled with Tilly and threw him, but that he tore +his breast with his teeth. When all was ready in the morning he rode +along the front and told his fusiliers not to shoot till they saw +the white in the enemy’s eyes, the horsemen not to dull their +swords by hacking the helmets of the Walloons: “Cut at their horses +and they will go down with them.” In the pause before the onset he +prayed with head uncovered and lowered sword, and his voice carried +to the farthest lines:</p> + +<p>“Thou, God, in whose hands are victory and defeat, look graciously +upon thy servants. From distant lands and peaceful homes have we +come to battle for freedom, truth and thy gospel. Give us victory +for thy holy name’s sake, Amen!”</p> + +<p>Tilly had expected the King to attack, but the fiery Pappenheim +upset his plans. The smoke of the guns drifted in the faces of the +Swedes and the King swung his army to the south to get the wind +right. In making the turn they had to cross a brook and this moment +Pappenheim chose for his charge. Like a thunderbolt his Walloons +fell upon them. The Swedish fire mowed them down like ripened grain +and checked their impetuous rush. They tried to turn the King’s +right and so outflank him; but the army turned with them and stood +like a rock. The extreme mobility of his forces was Gustav Adolf’s +great advantage in his campaigns. He revised the book of military +tactics up to date. The imperial troops were massed in solid +columns, after the old Spanish fashion, the impact of which was hard +to resist when they struck. The King’s, on the contrary, moved in +smaller bodies, quickly thrown upon the point of danger, and his +artillery was so distributed among them as to make every shot tell +on the compact body of the enemy. Whichever way Pappenheim turned he +found a firm front, bristling with guns, opposing him. Seven times +he threw himself upon the living wall; each time his horsemen were +flung back, their lines thinned and broken. The field was strewn +with their dead. Tilly, anxiously watching, threw up his hands in +despair. “This man will lose me honor and fame, and the Emperor his +lands,” he cried. The charge ended in wild flight, and Tilly saw +that he must himself attack, to turn the tide.</p> + +<p>On the double-quick his columns of spearmen charged down the +heights, swept the Saxons from the field, and fell upon the Swedish +left. The shock was tremendous. General Gustav Horn gave back to let +his second line come up, and held the ground stubbornly against +fearful odds. Word was brought the King of his danger. With the +right wing that had crushed Pappenheim he hurried to the rescue. In +the heat of the fight the armies had changed position, and the +Swedes found themselves climbing the hill upon which Tilly’s +artillery was posted. Seeing this, the King made one of the rapid +movements that more than once won him the day. Raising the cry, +“Remember Magdeburg!” he carried the position with his Finns by a +sudden overwhelming assault, and turned the guns upon the dense +masses of the enemy fighting below.</p> + +<p>In vain they stormed the heights. Both wings and the centre closed +in upon them, and the day was lost. Tilly fled, wounded, and +narrowly escaped capture. A captain in the Swedish army, who was +called Long Fritz because of his great height, was at his heels +hammering him on the head with the butt of his pistol. A staff +officer shot him down in passing, and freed his chief. Twilight fell +upon a battle-field where seven thousand men lay dead, two-thirds of +them the flower of the Emperor’s army. Blood-stained and +smoke-begrimed, Gustav Adolf and his men knelt on the field and +thanked God for the victory.</p> + +<p>Had the King’s friend and adviser, Axel Oxenstjerna, been with him +he might have marched upon Vienna then, leaving the Protestant +Estates to settle their own affairs, and very likely have ended the +war. Gustav Adolf thought of Tilly who would return with another +army. Oxenstjerna saw farther, weighing things upon the scales of +the diplomatist.</p> + +<p>“How think you we would fare,” asked the King once, when the +chancellor saw obstacles in their way which he would brush aside, +“if my fire did not thaw the chill in you?”</p> + +<p>“But for my chill cooling your Majesty’s fire,” was his friend’s +retort, “you would have long since been burned up.” The King laughed +and owned that he was right.</p> + +<p>Instead of bearding the Emperor in his capital he turned toward the +Rhine where millions of Protestants were praying for his coming and +where his army might find rest and abundance. The cathedral city of +Wuerzburg he took by storm. The bishop who ruled it fled at his +approach, but the full treasury of the Jesuits fell into his hands. +The Madonna of beaten gold and the twelve solid silver apostles, +famous throughout Europe, were sent to the mint and coined into +money to pay his army. In the cellar they found chests filled with +ducats. The bottom fell out of one as they carried it up and the +gold rolled out on the pavement. The soldiers swarmed to pick it up, +but a good many coins stuck to their pockets. The King saw it and +laughed: “Since you have them, boys, keep them.” The dead were still +lying in the castle yard after the siege, a number of monks among +them. The color of some of them seemed high for corpses. “Arise from +the dead,” he said waggishly, “no one will hurt you,” and the +frightened monks got upon their feet and scampered away.</p> + +<p>Frankfort opened its gates to his victorious host and Nürnberg +received him as a heaven-sent liberator. But Tilly was in the field +with a fresh army, burning to avenge Breitenfeld. He had surprised +General Horn at Bamberg and beaten him. At the approach of the King +he camped where the river Lech joins the Danube, awaiting attack. +There was but one place to cross to get at him, and right there he +stood. The king seized Donauworth and Ulm, and under cover of the +fire of seventy guns threw a bridge across the Lech. Three hundred +Finns carrying picks and spades ran across the shaky planks upon +which the fire of Tilly’s whole artillery park was concentrated. +Once across, they burrowed in the ground like moles and, with +bullets raining upon them, threw up earthworks for shelter. Squad +after squad of volunteers followed. Duke Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar +swam his horsemen across the river farther up-stream and took the +Bavarian troops in the flank, beating them back far enough to let +him join the Finns at the landing. The King himself was directing +the artillery on the other shore, aiming the guns with his own hand. +The Walloons, Tilly’s last hope, charged, but broke under the +withering fire. In desperation the old field-marshal seized the +standard and himself led the forlorn hope. Half-way to the bridge he +fell, one leg shattered by a cannon-ball, and panic seized his men. +The imperialists fled in the night, carrying their wounded leader. +He died on the march soon after. Men said of him that he had served +his master well.</p> + +<p>The snow-king had not melted in the south. He was master of the +Roman empire from the Baltic to the Alps. The way to Austria and +Italy lay open before him. Protestant princes crowded to do him +homage, offering him the imperial crown. But Gustav Adolf did not +lose his head. Toward the humbled Catholics he showed only +forbearance and toleration. In Munich he visited the college of the +Jesuits, and spoke long with the rector in the Latin tongue, +assuring him of their safety as long as they kept from politics and +plotting. The armory in that city was known to be the best stocked +in all Europe and the King’s surprise was great when he found +gun-carriages in plenty, but not a single cannon. Looking about him, +he saw evidence that the floor had been hastily relaid and +remembered the “dead” monks at Würzburg. He had it taken up and a +dark vault appeared. The King looked into it.</p> + +<p>“Arise!” he called out, “and come to judgment,” and amid shouts of +laughter willing hands brought out a hundred and forty good guns, +welcome reënforcements.</p> + +<p>The ignorant Bavarian peasants had been told that the King was the +very anti-Christ, come to harass the world for its sins, and carried +on a cruel guerilla warfare upon his army. They waylaid the Swedes +by night on their foraging trips and maimed and murdered those they +caught with fiendish tortures. The bitterest anger filled Gustav +Adolf’s soul when upon his entry into Landshut the burgomaster knelt +at his stirrup asking mercy for his city.</p> + +<p>“Pray not to me,” he said harshly, “but to God for yourself and for +your people, for in truth you have need.”</p> + +<p>For once thoughts of vengeance seemed to fill his soul. “No, no!” he +thundered when the frightened burgomaster pleaded that his townsmen +should not be held accountable for the cruelty of the country folk, +“you are beasts, not men, and deserve to be wiped from the earth +with fire and sword.” From out the multitude there came a warning +voice: “Will the King now abandon the path of mercy for the way of +vengeance and visit his wrath upon these innocent people?” No one +saw the speaker. The day was oppressively hot and the King came near +fainting in the saddle. As he rode out of the city toward the camp, +a bolt of lightning struck the ground beside him and a mighty crash +of thunder rolled overhead. Pale and thoughtful, he rode on. But +Landshut was spared. That evening General Horn brought the anxious +citizens the King’s promise of pardon.</p> + +<p>A few weeks later tidings reached Gustav Adolf that Wallenstein and +the Elector of Bavaria were marching to effect a junction at +Nürnberg. If they took the city, his line of communication was cut +and his army threatened. Wallenstein, who was a traitor, had been in +disgrace; but he was a great general and in his dire need Emperor +Ferdinand had no one else to turn to. So he took him back on his own +terms, and in the spring he had an army of forty thousand veterans +in the field. This was the host he was leading against Nürnberg. But +the King got there first and intrenched himself so strongly that +there was no ousting him. Wallenstein followed suit and for eleven +weeks the enemies eyed one another from their “lagers,” neither +willing to risk an attack. In the end Gustav Adolf tried, but even +his Finns could not take the impregnable heights the enemy held. At +last he went away with colors flying and bands playing, right under +the enemy’s walls, in the hope of tempting him out. But he never +stirred.</p> + +<p>When Wallenstein was sure he had gone, he burned his camp and +turned toward Saxony to punish the Elector for joining the Swedes. A +wail of anguish went up from that unhappy land and the King heard it +clear across the country. By forced marches he hurried to the rescue +of his ally, picking up Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar on the way. At +Naumburg the people crowded about him and sought to kiss or even to +touch his garments. The King looked sadly at them. “They put their +trust in me, poor weak mortal, as if I were the Almighty. It may be +that He will punish their folly soon upon the object of their +senseless idolatry.” He had come to stay, but when he learned that +Wallenstein had sent Pappenheim away to the west, thus weakening his +army, and was going into winter quarters at Lützen, near Leipzig, a +half-day’s march from the memorable Breitenfeld, he broke camp at +once and hastened to attack him. Starting early, his army reached +Lützen at nightfall on November 15, 1632.</p> + +<p>Wallenstein believed the campaign was over for that year and the +Swedes in winter quarters, and was taken completely by surprise. Had +the King given battle that night, he would have wiped the enemy +out. Two things, in themselves of little account, delayed him: a +small brook that crossed his path, and the freshly plowed fields. +His men were tired after the long march and he decided to let them +rest. It was Wallenstein’s chance. Overnight he posted his army +north of the highway that leads from Lützen to Leipzig, dug deep the +ditches that enclosed it, and made breastworks of the dirt. Sunrise +found sheltered behind them twenty-seven thousand seasoned veterans +to whom Gustav Adolf could oppose but twenty thousand; but he had +more guns and they were better served.</p> + +<p>As the day broke the Swedish army, drawn up in battle array, intoned +Luther’s hymn, “A mighty fortress is our God,” and cheered the King. +He wore a leathern doublet and a gray mantle. To the pleadings of +his officers that he put on armor he replied only, “God is my +armor.” “To-day,” he cried as he rode along the lines, “will end all +our hardships.” He himself took command of the right wing, the +gallant Duke Bernhard of the left. As at Breitenfeld, the rallying +cry was, “God with us!”</p> + +<p>The King hoped to crush his enemy utterly, and the whole line +attacked at once with great fury. From the start victory leaned +toward the Swedish army. Then suddenly in the wild tumult of battle +a heavy fog settled upon the field. What followed was all confusion. +No one knows the rights of it to this day. The King led his famous +yellow and blue regiments against the enemy’s left. “The black +fellows there,” he shouted, pointing to the Emperor’s cuirassiers in +their black armor, “attack them!” Just then an adjutant reported +that his infantry was hard-pressed. “Follow me,” he commanded, and, +clapping spurs to his horse, set off at full speed for the +threatened quarter. In the fog he lost his way and ran into the +cuirassiers. His two attendants were shot down and a bullet crushed +the King’s right arm. He tried to hide the fact that he was wounded, +but pain and loss of blood made him faint and he asked the Duke of +Lauenburg who rode with him to help him out of the crush. At that +moment a fresh troop of horsemen bore down upon them and their +leader, Moritz von Falkenberg, shot the King through the body with +the exultant cry, “You I have long sought!” The words had hardly +left his lips when he fell with a bullet through his head.</p> + +<p>The King swayed in the saddle and lost the reins. “Save yourself,” +he whispered to the Duke, “I am done for.” The Duke put his arm +around him to support him, but the cuirassiers surged against them +and tore them apart. The King’s horse was shot in the neck and threw +its rider. Awhile he hung by the stirrup and was dragged over the +trampled field. Then the horse shook itself free and ran through the +lines, spreading the tidings of the King’s fall afar.</p> + +<p>A German page, Leubelfing, a lad of eighteen, was alone with the +King. He sprang from his horse and tried to help him into the saddle +but had not the strength to do it. Gustav Adolf was stout and very +heavy. While he was trying to lift him some Croats rode up and +demanded the name of the wounded man. The page held his tongue, and +they ran him through. Gustav Adolf, to save him, said that he was +the King.<a id="FNanchor_12" href="#Footnote_12" class="fnanchor">[12]</a> At that they shot him through the head, and showered +blows upon him. When the body was found in the night it was naked. +They had robbed and stripped him.</p> + +<p>The King was dead. Through the Swedish ranks Duke Bernhard shouted +the tidings. “Who now cares to live? Forward, to avenge his death!” +With the blind fury of the Berserkers of old the Swedes cleared the +ditches, stormed the breastworks, and drove the foe in a panic +before them. The Duke’s arm was broken by a bullet. He hardly knew +it. With his regiment he rode down the crew of one of the enemy’s +batteries and swept on. In the midst of it all a cry resounded over +the plain that made the runaways halt and turn back.</p> + +<p>“Pappenheim! Pappenheim is here!”</p> + +<p>He had come with his Walloons in answer to the general’s summons. +“Where is the King?” he asked, and they pointed to the Finnish +brigade. With a mighty crash the two hosts that had met so often +before came together. Wallenstein mustered his scattered forces and +the King’s army was attacked from three sides at once. The yellow +brigade fell where it stood almost to the last man. The blue fared +little better. Slowly the Swedish infantry gave back. The battle +seemed lost.</p> + +<p>But the tide turned once more. In the hottest fight Pappenheim +fell, pierced by three bullets. The “man of a hundred scars” died, +exulting that the King whom he hated had gone before. With his death +the Emperor’s men lost heart. The Swedes charged again and again +with unabated fury. Night closed in with Wallenstein’s centre still +unbroken; but he had lost all his guns. Under cover of the darkness +he made his escape. The King’s army camped upon the battle-field. +The carnage had been fearful; nine thousand were slain. It was +Wallenstein’s last fight. With the remnants of his army he retreated +to Bohemia, sick and sore, and spent his last days there plotting +against his master. He died by an assassin’s hand.</p> + +<p>The cathedrals of Vienna, Brussels, and Madrid rang with joyful Te +Deums at the news of the King’s death. The Spanish capital +celebrated the “triumph” with twelve days of bull-fighting. Emperor +Ferdinand was better than his day; he wept at the sight of the +King’s blood-stained jacket. The Protestant world trembled; its hope +and strength were gone. But the Swedish people, wiping away their +tears, resolved stoutly to carry on Gustav Adolf’s work. The men he +had trained led his armies to victory on yet many a stricken field. +Peace came at length to Europe; the last religious war had been +fought and won. Freedom of worship, liberty of conscience, were +bought at the cost of the kingliest head that ever wore a crown. The +great ruler’s life-work was done.</p> + +<p>Gustav Adolf was in his thirty-eighth year when he fell. Of stature +he was tall and stout, a fair-haired, blue-eyed giant, stern in war, +gentle in the friendships of peace. He was a born ruler of men. +Though he was away fighting in foreign lands all the years of his +reign, he kept a firm grasp on the home affairs of his kingdom. One +traces his hand everywhere, ordering, shaping, finding ways, or +making them where there was none. The valuable mines of Sweden were +ill managed. The metal was exported in coarse pigs to Germany for +very little, worked up there, and resold to Sweden at the highest +price. He created a Board of Mines, established smelteries, and the +day came when, instead of going abroad for its munitions of war, +Sweden had for its customers half Europe. Like Christian of Denmark +with whom he disagreed, he encouraged industries and greatly +furthered trade and commerce. He built highways and canals, and he +did not forget the cause of instruction. Upon the university at +Upsala he bestowed his entire personal patrimony of three hundred +and thirteen farms as a free gift. His people honor him with cause +as the real founder of the Swedish system of education.</p> + +<p>The master he was always. Sweden had, on one hand, a powerful, able +nobility; on the other, a strong, independent peasantry,—a combination +full of pitfalls for a weak ruler, but with equal promise of great +things under the master hand. His father had cowed the stubborn +nobles with the headsman’s axe. Gustav Adolf drew them to him and +imbued them with his own spirit. He found them a contentious party +within the state; he left them its strongest props in the conduct of +public affairs. Nor was it always with persuasion he worked. His +reward for the unjust judge has been quoted. When the council failed +to send him supplies in Germany, pleading failure of crops as their +excuse, he wrote back: “You speak of the high prices of corn. +Probably they are high because those who have it want to profit by +the need of others.” And he set a new chief over the finances. On +the other hand, he gave shape to the relations between king and +people. The Riksdag held its sessions, but the laws that ruled it +were so vague that it was no unusual thing for men who were not +members at all to attend and join in the debates. Gustav Adolf put +an abrupt end to “a state of things that exposed Sweden to the +contempt of the nations.” As he ordered it, the initiative remained +with the crown; it was the right of the Riksdag to complain and +discuss; of the King to “choose the best” after hearing all sides.</p> + +<p>As a young prince, Gustav Adolf fell deeply in love with Ebba Brahe, +the beautiful daughter of one of Sweden’s most powerful noblemen. +The two had been play-mates and became lovers. But the old queen +frowned upon the match. He was the coming king, she was a subject, +and the queen managed, with the help of Oxenstjerna, who was +Gustav’s best friend all through his life, to make him give up his +love. “Then I will never marry,” he cried in a burst of tempestuous +grief. But when the queen had got Ebba Brahe safely married to one +of his father’s famous generals, he wedded the lovely sister of the +Elector of Brandenburg. She adored her royal husband, but never took +kindly to Sweden, and the people did not like her. They clung to the +great king’s early love, and to this day they linger before the +picture of the beautiful Ebba in the Stockholm castle when they come +from his grave in the Riddarholm church, while they pass the queen’s +by with hardly a glance. It is recorded that Ebba made her husband a +good and dutiful wife. If her thoughts strayed at times to the old +days and what might have been, it is not strange. In one of those +moods she wrote on a window-pane in the castle:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">I am happy in my lot,</div> + <div class="verse indent0">And thanks I give to God.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + +<p>The queen-mother saw it and wrote under it her own version:</p> + +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> + <div class="stanza"> + <div class="verse indent0">You wouldn’t, but you must.</div> + <div class="verse indent0">’Tis the lot of the dust.</div> + </div> +</div> +</div> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_12" href="#FNanchor_12" class="label">[12]</a> This is the story as the page told it. He lived two days.</p> +</div> +</div> + + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="KING_AND_SAILOR_HEROES_OF_COPENHAGEN">KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN<a id="239"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>Of all the foolish wars that were ever waged, it would seem that the +one declared by Denmark against Sweden in 1657 had the least excuse. +A century before, the two countries had fought through eight bitter +years over the momentous question whether Denmark should carry in +her shield the three lions that stood for the three Scandinavian +kingdoms, the Swedish one having set up for itself in the +dissolution of the union between them, and at the end of the fight +they were where they had started: each of them kept the whole brood. +But this war was without even that excuse. Denmark was helplessly +impoverished. Her trade was ruined; the nobles were sucking the +marrow of the country. Of the freehold farms that had been its +strength scarce five thousand were left in the land. It could hardly +pay its way in days of peace. Its strongholds lay in ruins; it had +neither arms, ammunition, nor officers. On its roster of thirty +thousand men for the national defence were carried the dead and the +yet unborn, while the Swedish army of tried veterans had gone from +victory to victory under a warlike king. To cap the climax, +Copenhagen had been harassed by pestilence that had killed one-fifth +of its fifty thousand people.</p> + +<p>So ill matched were they when a stubborn king forced a war that +could end only in disaster. When one of his councillors advised +against the folly, he caned him and sent him into exile. Yet out of +the fiery trial this king came a hero; his queen, whose pride and +wasteful vanity<a id="FNanchor_13" href="#Footnote_13" class="fnanchor">[13]</a> had done its full share in bringing the country +to the verge of ruin, became the idol of the nation. In the hour of +its peril she grew to the stature of a great woman who shared danger +and hardship with her people and by her example put hope and courage +into their hearts.</p> + +<p>Karl Gustav, the Swedish king, was campaigning in Poland, but as +soon as he could turn around he marched his army against Denmark, +scattered the forces that opposed him, and before news of his +advance had reached Copenhagen knocked at the gate of Denmark +demanding “speech of brother Frederik in good Swedish.” A winter of +great severity had bridged the Baltic and the sounds of the island +kingdom. In two weeks he led his army, horse, foot, and guns, over +the frozen seas where hardly a wagon had dared cross before. Great +rifts yawned in their way, and whole companies were swallowed up; +his own sleigh sank in the deep, but nothing stopped him. Danish +emissaries came pleading for peace. He met them on the way to the +capital, surrounded by his Finnish horsemen, and gave scant ear to +their speeches while he drove on. Before the city he halted and +dictated a peace so humiliating that one of the Danish commissioners +exclaimed when he came to sign, “I wish I could not write.” Perhaps +the same wish troubled the conqueror’s ambitious dreams. The peace +was broken as swiftly as made. In five months he was back before +Frederik’s capital with his whole army, while a Swedish fleet +anchored in the roadstead outside. “What difference does it make to +you,” was the contemptuous taunt flung at the anxious envoys who +sought his camp, “whether the name of your king is Karl or Frederik +so long as you are safe?” He had come to make an end of Denmark.</p> + +<p>Copenhagen was almost without defences. The old earth walls mounted +only six guns, with breastworks scarce knee-high. In places King +Karl could have driven his sleigh into the heart of the city at the +head of his army. But for the second time he hesitated when a swift +blow would have won all—and lost. Overnight the Danish nation awoke +to a fight for its life. King and people, till then strangers, in +that hour became one. Frederik the Third met the craven counsel that +he fly to Norway with the proud answer, “I will die in my nest, if +need be, and my wife with me.” With a shout the burghers swore to +fight to the last man. The walls of the city rose as if by magic. +Nobles and mechanics, clergy and laborers, students, professors and +sailors worked side by side; high-born women wheeled barrows. Every +tree was cut down and made into palisades. The crops ripening in +the fields were gathered in haste and the cattle driven in. The city +had been provisioned for barely a week and garrisoned by four +hundred raw recruits. Sailors from the useless ships took out their +guns and mounted them in the redoubts. Peasants flocked in and were +armed with battle-axes, clubs, and boat-hooks when the supply of +muskets gave out. When Karl Gustav drew his lines tight he faced six +thousand determined men behind strong walls. The city stood in a +ring of blazing fires. Its defenders were burning down the houses +and woods beyond the moats to clear the way for their gunners. The +King watched the sight from his horse in silence. He knew what it +meant; he had fought in the Thirty Years’ War: “Now, I vow, we shall +have fighting,” was all he said.</p> + +<p class="p2bot">It was not long in coming. On the second night the garrison made a +sortie and drove back the invaders, destroying their works with +great slaughter. Night after night, and sometimes in the broad day, +they returned to the charge, overwhelming the Swedes where least +expected, capturing their guns, their supplies, and their outposts. +Short of arms and ammunition, they took them in the enemy’s lines. +In one of these raids Karl Gustav himself was all but made prisoner. +A horseman had him by the shoulder, but he wrenched himself loose +and spurred his horse into the sea where a boat from one of the +ships rescued him. The defence took on something of the fervor of +religious frenzy. Twice a day services were held on the walls of the +city; within, the men who could not bear arms, and the women, +barricaded the streets with stones and iron chains for the last +fight, were it to come. In his place on the wall every burgher had a +hundred brickbats or stones piled up for ammunition, and by night +when the enemy rained red-hot shot upon the city, he fought with a +club or spear in one hand, a torch in the other.</p> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-275"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-275.jpg"> +<div class="caption"> +<p class="right"><em>From a painting by Lund</em>   </p> +<p class="nobreak center"><span class="smcap">The Siege of Copenhagen</span>, 1658</div> +</div> + +<p class="p2">Eleven weeks the battle raged by night and by day. Then a Dutch +fleet forced its way through the blockade after a fight in which it +lost six ships and two admirals. It brought food, ammunition, and +troops. The joy in the city was great. All day the church bells were +rung, and the people hailed the Dutch as the saviours of the nation. +But when they, too, would thank God for the victory and asked for +the use of the University’s hall, they were refused. They were +followers of Calvin and their heresies must not be preached in the +place set apart for teaching the doctrines of the “pure faith,” said +the professors, who were Lutheran. It was the way of the day. The +Reformation had learned little from the bigotry of the Inquisition. +The Dutchmen had to be content with the court-house. But the siege +was not over. Another hard winter closed in with the enemy at the +door, burrowing hourly nearer the outworks, and food and fire-wood +grew scarcer day by day in the hard-pressed city. When things were +at the worst pass in February, the Swedes gathered their hosts for a +final assault. In the midnight hour they came on with white shirts +drawn over their uniforms to make it hard to tell them from the +snow. Karl Gustav himself led the storming party and at last was in +the way of “getting speech of brother Frederik,” for the Danish King +was as good as his word. He had said that he would die in his nest, +and time and again he had to be sternly reasoned with to prevent him +from exposing himself overmuch. Where the danger was greatest he +was, and beside him ever the queen, all her frivolity gone and +forgotten. She who had danced at the court fetes and followed the +hounds on the chase as if the world had no other cares, became the +very incarnation of the spirit of the bitter and bloody struggle. +All through that winter the royal couple lived in a tent among their +men, and when the alarm was sounded they were first on foot to lead +them. Now that the hour had come, they were in the forefront of the +fight.</p> + +<p>Where the famous pleasure garden Tivoli now is, the strength of the +enemy was massed against the redoubts at the western gate. The name +of “Storm Street” tells yet of the doings of that night. King Karl +had promised to give over the captured town to be sacked by his army +three days and nights, and like hungry wolves they swarmed to the +attack, a mob of sailors and workmen with scaling ladders in the +van. The moats they crossed in spite of the gaps that had been made +in the ice to stop them, but the garrison had poured water over the +walls that froze as it ran, until they were like slippery icebergs. +A bird could have found no foothold on them. Showers of rocks and +junk and clubs fell upon the laddermen. Three times Karl Gustav +hurled his columns against them; as often they were driven back, +broken and beaten. A few gained a foothold on the walls only to be +dashed down to death. The burghers fought for their lives and their +homes. Their women carried boiling pitch and poured it over the +breastworks, and when they had no more, dragged great beams and +rolled them down upon the ladders, sweeping them clear of the enemy. +In the hottest fight Gunde Rosenkrantz, one of the king’s +councillors, trod on a fallen soldier and, looking into his face, +saw that it was his own son breathing his last. He bent over and +kissed him, and went on fighting.</p> + +<p>In the early morning hour Karl Gustav gave the order to retreat. The +attack had failed. Many of his general officers were slain; nearly +half of his army was killed, disabled, or captured. Six Swedish +standards were taken by the Danes. The moats were filled with the +dead. The Swedes had “come in their shrouds.” The guns of the city +thundered out a triple salute of triumph and the people sang Te +Deums on the walls. Their hardships were not over. Fifteen months +yet the city was invested and the home of daily privation; but their +greatest peril was past. Copenhagen was saved, and with it the +nation; the people had found itself and its king. That autumn a +second Swedish army under the veteran Stenbock was massacred in the +island of Fyen, and Karl Gustav exclaimed when the beaten general +brought him the news, “Since the devil took the sheep he might have +taken the buck too.” He never got over it. Three months later he lay +dead, and the siege of Copenhagen was raised in May, 1660. It had +lasted twenty months.</p> + +<hr class="tb"> + +<p>Seven score years and one passed, and the morning of Holy +Thursday<a id="FNanchor_14" href="#Footnote_14" class="fnanchor">[14]</a> saw a British fleet sailing slowly up the deep before +Copenhagen, the deck of every ship bristling with guns, their crews +at quarters, Lord Nelson’s signal to “close for action” flying from +the top of the flag-ship <i>Elephant</i>. Between the fleet and the shore +lay a line of dismantled hulks on which men with steady eyes and +stout hearts were guarding Denmark’s honor. Once more it had been +jeopardized by foolish counsel in high places. Danish statesmen had +trifled and temporized while England, facing all Europe alone in the +fight for her life, made ready to strike a decisive blow against the +Armed Neutrality that threatened her supremacy on the sea. Once more +the city had been caught unprepared, defenceless, and once more its +people rose as one man to meet the danger. But it was too late. +Outside, in the Sound, a fleet as great as that led by Nelson +waited, should he fail, to finish his work. That was to destroy the +Danish ships, if need be to bombard the city and so detach Denmark +from the coalition of England’s foes. So she chose to consider such +as were not her declared friends.</p> + +<p>Denmark had no fighting ships at home to pit against her. Her +sailors were away serving in the merchant marine. She had no +practised gunners, nothing but a huddle of dismantled vessels in her +navy-yard, most of them half-rotten hulks without masts. Those that +had standing rigging were even worse, for none of them had sails and +the falling spars in battle lumbered up the decks and menaced the +crew. But such as they were she made the most of them. Eighteen +hulks were hauled into the channel and moored head and stern. Where +they lay they could not be moved. Only the guns on one side were +therefore of use, while the enemy could turn and manœuvre. They +were manned by farm lads, mechanics, students, enlisted in haste, +not one of whom had ever smelt powder, and these were matched +against Nelson’s grim veterans. Even their commander, J. Olfert +Fischer, had not been under fire before that day, for Denmark had +had peace for eighty years. But his father had served as a +midshipman with Tordenskjold and the son did not flinch, outnumbered +though his force was, two to one, in men and guns.</p> + +<p>The sun shone fair upon the blue waters as the great fleet of +thirty-odd fighting ships sailed up from the south. From the city’s +walls and towers a mighty multitude watched it come, unmindful of +peril from shot and shell; the Danish line was not half a mile away. +In the churches whose bells were still ringing when the first gun +was fired from the block-ship <i>Prövestenen</i>, the old men and women +prayed through the long day, for there were few homes in Copenhagen +that did not have son, brother, or friend fighting out there. A +single gun answered the challenge, now two and three at once, then +broadside crashed upon broadside with deafening roar. When at length +all was quiet a tremendous report shook the city. It was the +flag-ship <i>Dannebrog</i> that blew up. She was on fire with only three +serviceable guns left when she struck her colors, but no ship of her +name might sail with an enemy’s prize crew on board, and she did +not.</p> + +<p>The story of that bloody day has been told many times. Briton and +Dane hoist their flags on April 2 with equal right, for never was +challenge met with more dauntless valor. Lord Nelson owned that of +all the hundred and five battles he had fought this was hottest. On +the <i>Monarch</i>, which for hours was under the most galling fire from +the Danish ships, two hundred and twenty of the crew were killed or +wounded. “There was not a single man standing,” wrote a young +officer on board of her, “the whole way from the mainmast forward, a +district containing eight guns a side, some of which were run out +ready for firing, others lay dismounted, and others remained as they +were after recoiling.... I hastened down the fore ladder to the +lower deck and felt really relieved to find somebody alive.” The +slaughter on the Danish ships was even greater. More than one-fifth +of their entire strength of a little over five thousand men were +slain or wounded. Of the eighteen hulls they lost thirteen, but only +one were the British able to take home with them. The rest were +literally shot to pieces and were burned where they lay. As one +after another was silenced, those yet alive on board spiked their +last guns, if indeed there were any left worth the trouble, threw +their powder overboard and made, for the shore. Twice the Danish +Admiral abandoned his burning ship, the last time taking up his post +in the island battery Tre Kroner. Each time one of the old hulls was +crushed, a Briton pushed into the hole made in the line and raked +the remaining ones fore and aft until their decks were like huge +shambles. The block-ship <i>Indfödsretten</i> bore the concentrated fire +of five frigates and two smaller vessels throughout most of the +battle. Her chief was killed. When the news reached head-quarters on +shore, Captain von Schrödersee, an old naval officer who had been +retired because of ill health, volunteered to take his place. He was +rowed out, but as he came over the side of the ship a cannon-ball +cut him in two. <i>Prövestenen</i>, as it was the first to fire a shot, +held out also to the last. One-fourth of her crew lay dead, and her +flag had been shot away three times when the decks threatened to +cave in and Captain Lassen spiked his last guns and left the wreck +to be burned. All through the fight she was the target of ninety +guns to which she could oppose only twenty-nine of her own sixty.</p> + +<p>Nelson had promised Admiral Parker to finish the fight in an hour. +When the battle had lasted three, Parker signalled to him to stop. +Every school-boy knows the story of how Lord Nelson put the glass to +his blind eye and, remarking that he could see no signal, kept right +on. In the end he had to resort to stratagem to force a truce so +that he might disentangle some of his ships that were drifting into +great danger in the narrow channel. The ruse succeeded. Crown Prince +Frederik, moved by compassion for the wounded whom Nelson threatened +to burn with the captured hulks if firing did not stop, ordered +hostilities to cease without consulting the Admiral of the fleet, +and the battle was over. Denmark’s honor was saved. “Nothing,” wrote +our own Captain Mahan, “could place a nation’s warlike fame higher +than did her great deeds that day.” All else was lost; for “there +had come upon Denmark one of those days of judgment to which nations +are liable who neglect in time of peace to prepare for war.” It had +been long coming, but it had overtaken her at last and found all the +bars down.</p> + +<p>Alongside the <i>Dannebrog</i> throughout her fight with Nelson’s +flag-ship, and edging ever closer in under the <i>Elephant’s</i> side +until at last the marines were sent to man her rail and keep it away +with their muskets, lay a floating battery mounting twenty guns +under command of a beardless second lieutenant. The name of Peter +Willemoes will live as long as the Danish tongue is spoken. Barely +graduated from the Naval Academy, he was but eighteen when the need +of officers thrust the command of “Floating Battery No. 1” upon him. +So gallantly did he acquit himself that Nelson took notice of the +young man who, every time a broadside crashed into his ship or +overhead, swung his cocked hat and led his men in a lusty cheer. +When after the battle he met the Crown Prince on shore, the English +commander asked to be introduced to his youthful adversary. “You +ought to make an admiral of him,” he said, and Prince Frederik +smiled: “If I were to make admirals of all my brave officers, I +should have no captains or lieutenants left.” When the <i>Dannebrog</i> +drifted on the shoals, abandoned and burning, Willemoes cut his +cables and got away under cover of the heavy smoke. Having neither +sails nor oars, he was at the mercy of the tide, but luckily it +carried him to the north of the Tre Kroner battery, and he reached +port with forty-nine of his crew of one hundred and twenty-nine dead +or wounded. The people received him as a conqueror returning with +victory. His youth and splendid valor aroused the enthusiasm of the +whole country. Wherever he went crowds flocked to see him as the +hero of “Holy Thursday’s Battle.” Especially was he the young +people’s idol. Sailor that he was, he was “the friend of all pretty +girls,” sang the poet of that day. He danced and made merry with +them, but the one of them all on whom his heart was set, so runs the +story, would have none of him, and sent him away to foreign parts, a +saddened lover.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile much praise had not made him vain. “I did my duty,” he +wrote to his father, a minor government official in the city of +Odense where four years later Hans Christian Andersen was born on +the anniversary day of the battle, “and I have whole limbs which I +least expected. The Crown Prince and the Admiral have said that I +behaved well.” He was to have one more opportunity of fighting his +country’s enemy, and this time to the death.</p> + +<p>In the summer of 1807, England was advised that by the treaty of +Tilsit Russia and Prussia had secretly joined Napoleon in his +purpose of finally crushing his mortal enemy by uniting all the +fleets of Europe against her, Denmark’s too, by compulsion if +persuasion failed. Without warning a British fleet swooped down upon +the unsuspecting nation, busy with the pursuits of peace, bombarded +and burned Copenhagen when the Commandant refused to deliver the +ships into the hands of the robbers as a “pledge of peace,” and +carried away ships, supplies, even the carpenters’ tools in the +navy-yard. Nothing was spared. Seventy vessels, sixteen of them +ships of the line, fell into their hands, and supplies that filled +ninety-two transports beside. A single fighting ship was left to +Denmark of all her fleet,—the <i>Prince Christian Frederik</i> of +sixty-eight guns. She happened to be away in a Norwegian port and so +escaped. Willemoes was on leave serving in the Russian navy, but +hastened home when news came of the burning of Copenhagen, and found +a berth under Captain Jessen.</p> + +<p>On March 22, 1808, the <i>Prince Christian</i>, so she was popularly +called, hunting a British frigate that was making Danish waters +insecure, met in the Kattegat the <i>Stately</i> and the <i>Nassau</i>, each +like herself of sixty-eight guns. The <i>Nassau</i> was the old +<i>Holsteen</i>, renamed,—the single prize the victors had carried home +from the battle of Copenhagen. Three British frigates were working +up to join them. The coast of Seeland was near, but wind and tide +cut off escape to the Sound. Captain Jessen ran his ship in close +under the shore so that at the last he might beach her, and awaited +the enemy there.</p> + +<p>The sun had set, but the night was clear when the fight between the +three ships began. With one on either side, hardly a pistol-shot +away, Jessen returned shot for shot, giving as good as they sent, +and with such success that at the end of an hour and a half the +Britons dropped astern to make repairs. The <i>Prince Christian</i> +drifted, helpless, with rudder shot to pieces, half a wreck, rigging +all gone, and a number of her guns demolished. But when the enemy +returned he was hailed with a cheer and a broadside, and the fight +was on once more. This time they were three to one; one of the +British frigates of forty-four guns had come up and joined in.</p> + +<p>When the hull of the <i>Prince Christian</i> was literally knocked to +pieces, and of her 576 men 69 lay dead and 137 wounded, including +the chief and all of his officers who were yet alive, Captain Jessen +determined as a last desperate chance to run one of his opponents +down and board her with what remained of his crew. But his officers +showed him that it was impossible; the ship could not be manœuvred. +There was a momentary lull in the fire and out of the night came a +cry, “Strike your colors!” The Danish reply was a hurrah and a +volley from all the standing guns. Three broad-sides crashed into +the doomed ship in quick succession, and the battle was over. The +<i>Prince Christian</i> stood upon the shore, a wreck.</p> + +<p>Young Willemoes was spared the grief of seeing the last Danish +man-of-war strike its flag. In the hottest of the fight, as he +jumped upon a gun the better to locate the enemy in the gloom, a +cannon-ball took off the top of his head. He fell into the arms of a +fellow officer with the muttered words, “Oh God! my head—my +country!” and was dead. In his report of the fight Captain Jessen +wrote against his name: “Fell in battle—honored as he is missed.” +They made his grave on shore with the fallen sailors, and as the sea +washed up other bodies they were buried with them.</p> + +<p>The British captured the wreck, but they could only set fire to it +after removing the wounded. In the night it blew up where it stood. +That was the end of the last ship of Denmark’s proud navy.</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_13" href="#FNanchor_13" class="label">[13]</a> It is of record that Queen Sofie Amalie used one-third +of the annual revenues of the country for her household. The menu of +a single “rustic dinner” of the court mentions 200 courses and +nearly as many kinds of preserves and dessert, served on gold, with +wines in corresponding abundance.</p> +</div> + +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_14" href="#FNanchor_14" class="label">[14]</a> The battle of Copenhagen was fought April 2, 1801.</p> +</div> +</div> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="THE_TROOPER_WHO_WON_A_WAR_ALONE">THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE<a id="263"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>Jens Kofoed was the name of a trooper who served in the disastrous +war of Denmark against Sweden in Karl Gustav’s day. He came from the +island of Bornholm in the Baltic, where he tilled a farm in days of +peace. When his troop went into winter quarters, he got a furlough +to go home to receive the new baby that was expected about +Christmas. Most of his comrades were going home for the holidays, +and their captain made no objection. The Swedish king was fighting +in far-off Poland, and no one dreamed that he would come over the +ice with his army in the depth of winter to reckon with Denmark. So +Jens Kofoed took ship with the promise that he would be back in two +weeks. But they were to be two long weeks. They did not hear of him +again for many moons, and then strange tidings came of his doings. +Single-handed he had bearded the Swedish lion, and downed it in a +fair fight—strangest of all, almost without bloodshed.</p> + +<p>The winter storms blew hard, and it was Christmas eve when he made +land, but he came in time to receive, not one new heir, but twin +baby girls. Then there were six of them, counting Jens and his wife, +and a merry Christmas they all had together. On Twelfth Night the +little ones were christened, and then the trooper bethought himself +of his promise to get back soon. The storms had ceased, but worse +had befallen; the sea was frozen over as far as eye reached, and the +island was cut off from all communication with the outer world. +There was nothing for it but to wait. It proved the longest and +hardest winter any one then living could remember. Easter was at +hand before the ice broke up, and let a fishing smack slip over to +Ystad, on the mainland. It came back with news that set the whole +island wondering. Peace had been made, and Denmark had ceded all its +ancient provinces east of the Öresund to Karl Gustav. Ystad itself +and Skaane, the province in which Jens Kofoed had been campaigning, +were Swedish now, and so was Bornholm. All unknown to its people, +the island had changed hands in the game of war overnight, as it +were. A Swedish garrison was coming over presently to take charge.</p> + +<p>When Jens Kofoed heard it, he sat down and thought things over. If +there was peace, his old captain had no use for him, that was +certain; but there might be need of him at home. What would happen +there, no one could tell. And there were the wife and children to +take care of. The upshot of it all was that he stayed. Only, to be +on the safe side, he got the Burgomaster and the Aldermen in his +home town, Hasle, to set it down in writing that he could not have +got back to his troop for all he might have tried. Kofoed, it will +be seen, was a man with a head on his shoulders, which was well, for +presently he had need of it.</p> + +<p>There were no Danish soldiers in the island, only a peasant militia, +ill-armed and untaught in the ways of war; so no one thought of +resisting the change of masters. The people simply waited to see +what would happen. Along in May a company of one hundred and twenty +men with four guns landed, and took possession of Castle +Hammershus, on the north shore, the only stronghold on the island, +in the name of the Swedish king. Colonel Printzensköld, who had +command, summoned the islanders to a meeting, and told them that he +had come to be their governor. They were to obey him, and that was +all. The people listened and said nothing.</p> + +<p>Perhaps if the new rulers had been wise, things might have kept on +so. The people would have tilled their farms, and paid their taxes, +and Jens Kofoed, with all his hot hatred of the enemy he had fought, +might never have been heard of outside his own island. But the +Swedish soldiers had been through the Thirty Years’ War and plunder +had become their profession. They rioted in the towns, doubled the +taxes, put an embargo on trade and export, crushed the industries; +worse, they took the young men and sent them away to Karl Gustav’s +wars in foreign lands. They left only the old men and the boys, and +these last they kept a watchful eye on for drafts in days to come. +When the conscripts hid in the woods, so as not to be torn from +their wives and sweethearts, they organized regular man-hunts as if +the quarry were wild beasts, and, indeed, the poor fellows were not +treated much better when caught.</p> + +<p>All summer they did as they pleased; then came word that Karl Gustav +had broken the peace he made, and of the siege of Copenhagen. The +news made the people sit up and take notice. Their rightful +sovereign had ceded the island to the Swedish king, that was one +thing. But now that they were at war again, these strangers who +persecuted them were the public enemy. It was time something were +done. In Hasle there was a young parson with his heart in the right +place, Poul Anker by name. Jens Kofoed sat in his church; he had +been to the wars, and was fit to take command. Also, the two were +friends. Presently a web of conspiracy spread quietly through the +island, gripping priest and peasant, skipper and trader, alike. Its +purpose was to rout out the Swedes. The Hasle trooper and parson +were the leaders; but their secret was well kept. With the tidings +that the Dutch fleet had forced its way through to Copenhagen with +aid for the besieged, and had bottled the Swedish ships up in +Landskrona, came a letter purporting to be from King Frederik +himself, encouraging the people to rise. It was passed secretly +from hand to hand by the underground route, and found the island +ready for rebellion.</p> + +<p>Governor Printzensköld had seen something brewing, but he was a +fearless man, and despised the “peasant mob.” However, he sent to +Sweden for a troop of horsemen, the better to patrol the island and +watch the people. Early in December, 1658, just a year after Jens +Kofoed, the trooper, had set out for his home on furlough, the +governor went to Rönne, the chief city in the island, to start off a +ship for the reënforcements. The conspirators sought to waylay him +at Hasle, where he stopped to give warning that all who had not paid +the heavy war-tax would be sold out forthwith; but they were too +late. Master Poul and Jens Kofoed rode after him, expecting to meet +a band of their fellows on the way, but missed them. The parson +stayed behind then to lay the fuse to the mine, while Kofoed kept on +to town. By the time he got there he had been joined by four others, +Aage Svendsön, Klavs Nielsen, Jens Laurssön, and Niels Gummelöse. +The last two were town officers. As soon as the report went around +Rönne that they had come, Burgomaster Klaus Kam went to them openly.</p> + +<p>The governor had ridden to the house of the other burgomaster, Per +Larssön, who was not in the plot. His horse was tied outside and he +just sitting down to supper when Jens Kofoed and his band crowded +into the room, and took him prisoner. They would have killed him +there, but his host pleaded for his life. However, when they took +him out in the street, Printzensköld thought he saw a chance to +escape in the crowd and the darkness, and sprang for his horse. But +his great size made him an easy mark. He was shot through the head +as he ran. The man who shot him had loaded his pistol with a silver +button torn from his vest. That was sure death to any goblin on whom +neither lead nor steel would bite, and it killed the governor all +right. The place is marked to this day in the pavement of the main +street as the spot where fell the only tyrant who ever ruled the +island against the people’s will.</p> + +<p>The die was cast now, and there was need of haste. Under cover of +the night the little band rode through the island with the news, +ringing the church bells far and near to call the people to arms. +Many were up and waiting; Master Poul had roused them already. At +Hammershus the Swedish garrison heard the clamor, and wondered what +it meant. They found out when at sunrise an army of half the +population thundered on the castle gates summoning them to +surrender. Burgomaster Kam sat among them on the governor’s horse, +wearing his uniform, and shouted to the officers in command that +unless they surrendered, he, the governor, would be killed, and his +head sent in to his wife in the castle. The frightened woman’s tears +decided the day. The garrison surrendered, only to discover that +they had been tricked. Jens Kofoed took command in the castle. The +Swedish soldiers were set to doing chores for the farmers they had +so lately harassed. The ship that was to have fetched reënforcements +from Sweden was sent to Denmark instead, with the heartening news. +They needed that kind there just then.</p> + +<p>But the ex-trooper, now Commandant, knew that a day of reckoning was +coming, and kept a sharp lookout. When the hostile ship <i>Spes</i> was +reported steering in from the sea, the flag of Sweden flew from the +peak of Hammershus, and nothing on land betrayed that there had been +a change. As soon as she anchored, a boat went out with an +invitation from the governor to any officers who might be on board, +to come ashore and arrange for the landing of the troops. The +captain of the ship and the major in charge came, and were made +prisoners as soon as they had them where they could not be seen from +the ship. It blew up to a storm, and the <i>Spes</i> was obliged to put +to sea, but as soon as she returned boats were sent out to land the +soldiers. They sent only little skiffs that could hold not over +three or four, and as fast as they were landed they were overpowered +and bound. Half of the company had been thus disposed of when the +lieutenant on board grew suspicious, and sent word that without the +express orders of the major no more would come. But Jens Kofoed’s +wit was equal to the emergency. The next boat brought an invitation +to the lieutenant to come in and have breakfast with the officers, +who would give him his orders there. He walked into the trap; but +when he also failed to return, his men refused to follow. He had +arranged to send them a sign, they said, that everything was all +right. If it did not come, they would sail away to Sweden for help.</p> + +<p>It took some little persuasion to make the lieutenant tell about the +sign, but in the end Jens Kofoed got it. It turned out to be his +pocket-knife. When they saw that, the rest came, and were put under +lock and key with their fellows.</p> + +<p>The ship was left. If that went back, all was lost. Happily both +captain and mate were prisoners ashore. Four boat-loads of +islanders, with arms carefully stowed under the seats, went out with +the mate of the <i>Spes</i>, who was given to understand that if he as +much as opened his mouth he would be a dead man. They boarded the +ship, taking the crew by surprise. By night the last enemy was +comfortably stowed, and the ship on her way to Rönne, where the +prisoners were locked in the court-house cellar, with shotted guns +guarding the door. Perhaps it was the cruelties practised by Swedish +troops in Denmark that preyed upon the mind of Jens Kofoed when he +sent the parson to prepare them for death then and there; but +better counsel prevailed. They were allowed to live. The whole war +cost only two lives, the governor’s and that of a sentinel at the +castle, who refused to surrender. The mate of the <i>Spes</i> and two +of her crew contrived to escape after they had been taken to +Copenhagen, and from them Karl Gustav had the first tidings of how +he lost the island.</p> + +<p>The captured ship sailed down to Copenhagen with greeting to King +Frederik that the people of Bornholm had chosen him and his heirs +forever to rule over them, on condition that their island was never +to be separated from the Danish Crown. The king in his delight +presented them with a fine silver cup, and made Jens Kofoed captain +of the island, beside giving him a handsome estate. He lived +thirty-three years after that, the patriarch of his people, and +raised a large family of children. Not a few of his descendants are +to-day living in the United States. In the home of one of them in +Brooklyn, New York, is treasured a silver drinking cup which King +Frederik gave to the ex-trooper; but it is not the one he sent back +with his deputation. That one is still in the island of Bornholm.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CARL_LINNE_KING_OF_THE_FLOWERS">CARL LINNÉ, KING OF THE FLOWERS<a id="277"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>Years ago there grew on the Jonsboda farm in Smaland, Sweden, a +linden tree that was known far and wide for its great age and size. +So beautiful and majestic was the tree, and so wide the reach of its +spreading branches, that all the countryside called it sacred. +Misfortune was sure to come if any one did it injury. So thought the +people. It was not strange, then, that the farmer’s boys, when they +grew to be learned men and chose a name, should call themselves +after the linden. The peasant folk had no family names in those +days. Sven Carlsson was Sven, the son of Carl; and his son, if his +given name were John, would be John Svensson. So it had always been. +But when a man could make a name for himself out of the big +dictionary, that was his right. The daughter of the Jonsboda farmer +married; and her son played in the shadow of the old tree, and grew +so fond of it that when he went out to preach he also called himself +after it. Nils Ingemarsson was the name he received in baptism, and +to that he added Linnæus, never dreaming that in doing it he handed +down the name and the fame of the friend of his play hours to all +coming days. But it was so; for Parson Nils’ eldest son, Carl Linné, +or Linnæus, became a great man who brought renown to his country and +his people by telling them and all the world more than any one had +ever known before about the trees and the flowers. The King knighted +him for his services to science, and the people of every land united +in acclaiming him the father of botany and the king of the flowers.</p> + +<p>They were the first things he learned to love in his baby world. If +he was cross, they had but to lay him on the grass in the garden and +put a daisy in his hand, and he would croon happily over it for +hours. He was four years old when his father took him to a wedding +in the neighborhood. The men guests took a tramp over the farm, and +in the twilight they sat and rested in the meadow, where the spring +flowers grew. The minister began telling them stories about them; +how they all had their own names and what powers for good or ill +the apothecary found in the leaves and root of some of them. Carl’s +father, though barely out of college, was a bright and gifted man. +One of his parishioners said once that they couldn’t afford a whole +parson, and so they took a young one; but if that was the way of it, +the men of Stenbrohult made a better bargain than they knew. They +sat about listening to his talk, but no one listened more closely +than little Carl. After that he had thought for nothing else. In the +corner of the garden he had a small plot of his own, and into it he +planted all the wild flowers from the fields, and he asked many more +questions about them than his father could answer. One day he came +back with one whose name he had forgotten. The minister was busy +with his sermon.</p> + +<p>“If you don’t remember,” he said impatiently, “I will never tell you +the name of another flower.” The boy went away, his eyes wide with +terror at the threat; but after that he did not forget a single +name.</p> + +<p>When he was big enough, they sent him to the Latin school at Wexiö, +where the other boys nicknamed him “the little botanist.” His +thoughts were outdoors when they should have been in the dry books, +and his teachers set him down as a dunce. They did not know that his +real study days were when, in vacation, he tramped the thirty miles +to his home. Every flower and every tree along the way was an old +friend, and he was glad to see them again. Once in a while he found +a book that told of plants, and then he was anything but a dunce. +But when his father, after Carl had been eight years in the school, +asked his teachers what they thought of him, they told him +flatly that he might make a good tailor or shoemaker, but a +minister—never; he was too stupid.</p> + +<p>That was a blow, for the parson of Stenbrohult and his wife had set +their hearts on making a minister of Carl, and small wonder. His +mother was born in the parsonage, and her father and grandfather had +been shepherds of the parish all their lives. There were tears in +the good minister’s eyes as he told Carl to pack up and get ready to +go back home; he had an errand at Dr. Rothman’s, but would return +presently. The good doctor saw that his patient was heavy of heart +and asked him what was wrong. When he heard what Carl’s teachers +had said, he flashed out:</p> + +<p>“What! he not amount to anything? There is not one in the whole lot +who will go as far as he. A minister he won’t be, that I’ll allow, +but I shall make a doctor of him such as none of them ever saw. You +leave him here with me.” And the parson did, comforted in spite of +himself. But Carl’s mother could not get over it. It was that +garden, she declared, and when his younger brother as much as +squinted that way, she flew at him with a “You dare to touch it!” +and shook him.</p> + +<p>When Dr. Rothman thought his pupil ready for the university, he sent +him up to Lund, and the head-master of the Latin School gave him the +letter he must bring, to be admitted. “Boys at school,” he wrote in +it, “may be likened to young trees in orchard nurseries, where it +sometimes happens that here and there among the saplings there are +some that make little growth, or even appear as wild seedlings, +giving no promise; but when afterwards transplanted to the orchard, +make a start, branch out freely, and at last yield satisfactory +fruit.” By good luck, though, Carl ran across an old teacher from +Wexiö, one of the few who had believed in him and was glad to see +him. He took him to the Rector and introduced him with warm words of +commendation, and also found him lodgings under the roof of Dr. +Kilian Stobæus.</p> + +<p>Dr. Stobæus was a physician of renown, but not good company. He was +one-eyed, sickly, lame in one foot, and a gloomy hypochondriac to +boot. Being unable to get around to his patients, he always had one +or two students to do the running for him and to learn as best they +might, in doing it. Carl found a young German installed there as the +doctor’s right hand. He also found a library full of books on +botany, a veritable heaven for him. But the gate was shut against +him; the doctor had the key, and he saw nothing in the country lad +but a needy student of no account. Perhaps the Rector had passed the +head-master’s letter along. However, love laughs at locksmiths, and +Carl Linnæus was hopelessly in love with his flowers. He got on the +right side of the German by helping him over some hard stiles in the +<i lang="it" xml:lang="it">materia medica</i>. In return, his fellow student brought him books +out of the library when the doctor had gone to bed, and Carl sat up +studying the big tomes till early cockcrow. Before the house +stirred, the books were back on their shelves, the door locked, and +no one was the wiser.</p> + +<p>No one except the doctor’s old mother, whose room was across the +yard. She did not sleep well, and all night she saw the window +lighted in her neighbor’s room. She told the doctor that Carl +Linnæus fell asleep with the candle burning every single night, and +sometime he would upset it and they would all be burned in their +beds. The doctor nodded grimly; he knew the young scamps. No doubt +they both sat up playing cards till dawn; but he would teach them. +And the very next morning, at two o’clock, up he stumped on his lame +foot to Carl’s room, in which there was light, sure enough, and went +in without knocking.</p> + +<p>Carl was so deep in his work that he did not hear him at all, and +the doctor stole up unperceived and looked over his shoulder. There +lay his precious books, which he thought safely locked in the +library, spread out before him, and his pupil was taking notes and +copying drawings as if his life depended upon it. He gave a great +start when Dr. Stobæus demanded what he was doing, but owned up +frankly, while the doctor frowned and turned over his notes, leaf by +leaf.</p> + +<p>“Go to bed and sleep like other people,” he said gruffly, yet +kindly, when he had heard it all, “and hereafter study in the +daytime;” and he not only gave him a key to his library, but took +him to his own table after that. Up till then Carl had merely been a +lodger in the house.</p> + +<p>When he was at last on the home stretch, as it seemed, an accident +came near upsetting it all. He was stung by an adder on one of his +botanizing excursions, so far from home and help that the bite came +near proving fatal. However, Dr. Stobæus’ skill pulled him through, +and in after years he got square by labelling the serpent <i lang="la" xml:lang="la">furia +infernalis</i>—hell-fury—in his natural history. It was his way of +fighting back. All through his life he never wasted an hour on +controversy. He had no time, he said. But once when a rival made a +particularly nasty attack upon him, he named a new plant after him, +adding the descriptive adjective <i lang="la" xml:lang="la">detestabilis</i>—the detestable +so-and-so. On the whole, he had the best of it; for the names he +gave stuck.</p> + +<p>It was during his vacation after the year at Lund that Linnæus made +a catalogue of the plants in his father’s garden at Stenbrohult that +shows us the country parson as no mean botanist himself; for in the +list, which is preserved in the Academy of Sciences at Stockholm, +are no less than two hundred and twenty-four kinds of plants. Among +them are six American plants that had found their way to Sweden. The +poison ivy is there, though what they wanted of that is hard to +tell, and the four-o’clock, the pokeweed, the milkweed, the pearly +everlasting, and the potato, which was then (1732) classed as a rare +plant. Not until twenty years later did they begin to grow it for +food in Sweden.</p> + +<p>When Carl Linnæus went up to Upsala University, his parents had so +far got over their disappointment at his deserting the ministry that +they gave him a little money to make a start with; but they let him +know that no more was coming—their pocket-book was empty. And +within the twelvemonth, for all his scrimping and saving, he was on +the point of starvation. He tells us himself that he depended on +chance for a meal and wore his fellow students’ cast-off clothes. +His boots were without soles, and in his cheerless attic room he +patched them with birch bark and card board as well as he could. He +was now twenty-three years old, and it seemed as if he would have to +give up the study that gave him no bread; but still he clung to his +beloved flowers. They often made him forget the pangs of hunger. And +when the cloud was darkest the sun broke through. He was sitting in +the Botanical Garden sketching a plant, when Dean Celsius, a great +orientalist and theologian of his day, passed by. The evident +poverty of the young man, together with his deep absorption in his +work, arrested his attention; he sat down and talked with him. In +five minutes Carl had found a friend and the Dean a helper. He had +been commissioned to write a book on the plants of the Holy Land and +had collected a botanical library for the purpose, but the work +lagged. Here now was the one who could help set it going. That day +Linnæus left his attic room and went to live in the Dean’s house. +His days of starvation were over.</p> + +<p>In the Dean’s employ his organizing genius developed the marvellous +skill of the cataloguer that brought order out of the chaos of +groping and guessing and blundering in which the science of botany +had floundered up till then. Here and there in it all were flashes +of the truth, which Linnæus laid hold of and pinned down with his +own knowledge to system and order. Thus the Frenchman, Sebastian +Vaillant, who had died a dozen years before, had suggested a +classification of flowers by their seed-bearing organs, the stamens +and pistils, instead of by their fruits, the number of their petals, +or even by their color, as had been the vague practice of the past. +Linnæus seized upon this as the truer way and wrote a brief treatise +developing the idea, which so pleased Dr. Celsius that he got his +young friend a license to lecture publicly in the Botanical Garden.</p> + +<p>The students flocked to hear him. His message was one that put life +and soul into the dry bones of a science that had only wearied them +before. The professor of botany himself sat in the front row and +hammered the floor with his cane in approval. But his very success +was the lecturer’s undoing. Envy grew in place of the poverty he had +conquered. The instructor, Nils Rosén, was abroad taking his +doctor’s degree. He came home to find his lectures deserted for the +irresponsible teachings of a mere undergraduate. He made grievous +complaint, and Linnæus was silenced, to his great good luck. For so +his friend the professor, though he was unable to break the red tape +of the university, got him an appointment to go to Lapland on a +botanical mission. His enemies were only too glad to see him go.</p> + +<p>Linnæus travelled more than three thousand miles that summer through +a largely unknown country, enduring, he tells us, more hardships and +dangers than in all his subsequent travels. Again and again he +nearly lost his life in swollen mountain streams, for he would not +wait until danger from the spring freshets was over. Once he was +shot at as he was gathering plants on a hillside, but happily the +Finn who did it was not a good marksman. Fish and reindeer milk were +his food, a pestilent plague of flies his worst trouble. But, he +says in his account of the trip, which is as fascinating a report of +a scientific expedition as was ever penned, they were good for +something, after all, for the migrating birds fed on them. From his +camps on lake or river bank he saw the water covered far and near +with swarms of ducks and geese. The Laplander’s larder was easily +stocked.</p> + +<p>He came back from the dangers of the wild with a reputation that was +clinched by his book “The Flora of Lapland,” to find the dragon of +professional jealousy rampant still at Upsala. His enemy, Rosén, +persuaded the senate of the university to adopt a rule that no +un-degreed man should lecture there to the prejudice of the +regularly appointed instructors. Tradition has it that Linnæus flew +into a passion at that and drew upon Rosén, and there might have +been one regular less but for the interference of bystanders. It may +be true, though it is not like him. Men wore side-arms in those days +just as some people carry pistols in their hip-pockets to-day, and +with as little sense. At least they had the defence, such as it was, +that it was the fashion. However, it made an end of Linnæus at +Upsala for the time. He sought a professorship at Lund, but another +got it. Then he led an expedition of his former students into the +Dalecarlia mountains and so he got to Falun, where Baron Reuterholm, +one of Sweden’s copper magnates, was seeking a guide for his two +sons through the region where his mines were.</p> + +<p>Linnæus was not merely a botanist, but an all around expert in +natural science. He took charge of the boys and, when the trip was +ended, started a school at Falun, where he taught mineralogy. It had +been hit or miss with the miners up till then. There was neither +science nor system in their work. What every day experience or the +test of fire had taught a prospector, in delving among the rocks, +was all there was of it. Linnæus was getting things upon a +scientific basis, when he met and fell in love with the handsome +daughter of Dr. Moræus. The young people would marry, but the +doctor, though he liked the mineralogist, would not hear of it till +he could support a wife. So he gave him three years in which to go +abroad and get a degree that would give him the right to practise +medicine anywhere in Sweden. The doctor’s daughter gave him a +hundred dollars she had saved, and her promise to wait for him.</p> + +<p>He went to Harderwyk in Holland and got his degree at the university +there on the strength of a thesis on the cause of malarial fever, +with the conclusions of which the learned doctors did not agree; +but they granted the diploma for the clever way in which he defended +it. On the way down he tarried in Hamburg long enough to give the +good burghers a severe jolt. They had a seven-headed serpent that +was one of the wonders of the town. The keen sight of the young +naturalist detected the fraud at once; the heads were weasels’ +heads, covered with serpent’s skin and cunningly sewed on the head +of the reptile. The shape of the jaws betrayed the trick. But the +Hamburgers were not grateful. The serpent was an asset. There was a +mortgage on it of ten thousand marks; now it was not worth a +hundred. They took it very ill, and Linnæus found himself suddenly +so unpopular that he was glad to get out of town overnight. What +became of the serpent history does not record.</p> + +<p>Linnæus had carried more than his thesis on malarial fever with him +to Holland. At the bottom of his trunk were the manuscripts of two +books on botany which, he told his sweetheart on parting, would yet +make him famous. Probably she shook her head at that. Pills and +powders, and broken legs to set, were more to her way of thinking, +and her father’s, too. If only he had patients, fame might take care +of itself. But now he put them both to shame. At Leyden he found +friends who brought out his first book, “Systema Naturæ,” in which +he divides all nature into the three kingdoms known to every child +since. It was hardly more than a small pamphlet, but it laid the +foundation for his later fame. To the enlarged tenth edition +zoölogists point back to this day as to the bed-rock on which they +built their science. The first was quickly followed by another, and +yet another. Seven large volumes bearing his name had come from the +press before he set sail for home, a whole library in botany, and a +new botany at that, so simple and sensible that the world adopted it +at once.</p> + +<p>Dr. Hermann Boerhaave was at that time the most famous physician in +Europe. He was also the greatest authority on systematic botany. +Great men flocked to his door, but the testy old Dutchman let them +wait until it suited him to receive them. Peter the Great had to +cool his heels in his waiting-room two long hours before his turn +came. Linnæus he would not see at all—until he sent him a copy of +his book. Then he shut the door against all others and summoned the +author. The two walked through his garden, and the old doctor +pointed proudly to a tree which was very rare, he said, and not in +any of the books. Yes, said Linnæus, it was in Vaillant’s. The +doctor knew better; he had annotated Vaillant’s botany himself, and +it was not there. Linnæus insisted, and the doctor, in a temper, +went for the book to show him. But there it was; Linnæus was right. +Nothing would do then but he must stay in Holland. Linnæus demurred; +he could not afford it. But Dr. Boerhaave knew a way out of that. He +had for a patient Burgomaster Cliffort, a rich old hypochondriac +with whom he could do nothing because he would insist on living high +and taking too little exercise. When he came again he told him that +what he needed was a physician in daily attendance upon him, and +handed him over to Linnæus.</p> + +<p>“He will fix your diet and fix your garden, too,” was his +prescription. The Burgomaster was a famous collector and had a +wondrous garden that was the apple of his eye. He took Linnæus into +his house and gave him a ducat a day for writing his menu and +cataloguing his collection. That was where his books grew, and the +biggest and finest of them was “Hortus Cliffortianus,” the account +of his patron’s garden.</p> + +<p>Armed with letters from Dr. Boerhaave and the Burgomaster, he took +one stronghold of professional prejudice after another. Not without +a siege. One of them refused flatly to surrender. That was Sir Hans +Sloan, the great English naturalist, to whom Dr. Boerhaave wrote in +a letter that is preserved in the British Museum: “Linnæus, who +bears this letter, is alone worthy of seeing you, alone worthy of +being seen by you. He who shall see you both together shall see two +men whose like will scarce ever be found in the world.” And the +doctor was no flatterer, as may be inferred from his treatment of +Peter the Great. But the aged baronet had had his own way so long, +and was so well pleased with it, that he would have nothing to do +with Linnæus. At Oxford the learned professor Dillenius received him +with no better grace. “This,” he said aside to a friend, “is the +young man who confounds all botany,” and he took him rather +reluctantly into his garden. A plant that was new to him attracted +Linnæus’ attention and he asked to what family it belonged.</p> + +<p>“That is more than you can tell me,” was the curt answer.</p> + +<p>“I can, if you will let me pluck a flower and examine it.”</p> + +<p>“Do, and be welcome,” said the professor, and his visitor after a +brief glance at the flower told its species correctly. The professor +stared.</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Linnæus, who had kept his eyes open, “what did you mean +by the crosses you had put all through my book?” He had seen it +lying on the professor’s table, all marked up.</p> + +<p>“They mark the errors you made,” declared the other.</p> + +<p>“Suppose we see about that,” said the younger man and, taking the +book, led the way. They examined the flowers together, and when they +returned to the study all the pride had gone out of the professor. +He kept Linnæus with him a month, never letting him out of his sight +and, when he left, implored him with tears to stay and share his +professorship; the pay was enough for both.</p> + +<p>A letter that reached him from home on his return to Holland made +him realize with a start that he had overstayed his leave. It was +now in the fourth year since he had left Sweden. All the while he +had written to his sweetheart in the care of a friend who proved +false. He wanted her for himself and, when the three years had +passed, told her that Carl would never come back. Dr. Moræus was of +the same mind, and had not a real friend of the absent lover turned +up in the nick of time Linnæus would probably have stayed a Dutchman +to his death. Now, on the urgent message of his friend, he hastened +home, found his Elisabeth holding out yet, married her and settled +down in Stockholm to practise medicine.</p> + +<p>Famous as he had become, he found the first stretch of the row at +home a hard one to hoe. His books brought him no income. Nobody +would employ him, “even for a sick servant,” he complained. Envious +rivals assailed him and his botany, and there were days when herring +and black bread was fare not to be despised in Dr. Linnæus’ +household. But he kept pegging away and his luck changed. One +well-to-do patient brought another, and at last the queen herself +was opportunely seized with a bad cough. She saw one of her ladies +take a pill and asked what it was. Dr. Linnæus’ prescription for a +cold, she said, and it always cured her right up. So the doctor was +called to the castle and his cure worked there, too. Not long after +that he set down in his diary that “Now, no one can get well without +my help.”</p> + +<p>But he was not happy. “Once, I had flowers and no money,” he said; +“now, I have money and no flowers.” That they appointed him +professor of medicine at Upsala did not mend matters. His lectures +were popular and full of common sense. Diet and the simple life were +his hobbies, temperance in all things. He ever insisted that where +one man dies from drinking too much, ten die from overeating. +Children should eat four times a day, grown-ups twice, was his rule. +The foolish fashions and all luxury he abhorred. He himself in his +most famous years lived so plainly that some said he was miserly, +and his clothes were sometimes almost shabby. The happiest day of +his life came when he and his old enemy Rosén, whom he found filling +the chair of botany at the university, and with whom he made it up +soon after they became fellow members of the faculty, exchanged +chairs with the ready consent of the authorities. So, at last, +Linnæus had attained the place he coveted above all others, and the +goal of his ambition was reached.</p> + +<p>He lived at Upsala thirty-seven years and wrote many books. His +students idolized him. They came from all over the world. Twice a +week in summer, on Wednesday and Saturday, they sallied forth with +him to botanize in field and forest, and when they had collected +specimens all the long day they escorted the professor home through +the twilight streets with drums and trumpets and with flowers in +their hats. But however late they left him at his door, the earliest +dawn saw him up and at his work, for the older he grew the more +precious the hours that remained. In summer he was accustomed to +rise at three o’clock; in the dark winter days at six.</p> + +<p>He found biology a chaos and left it a science. In his special field +of botany he was not, as some think, the first. He himself +catalogued fully a thousand books on his topic. But he brought order +into it; he took what was good and, rejecting the false, fashioned +it into a workable system. In the mere matter of nomenclature, his +way of calling plants, like men, by a family name and a given name +wrought a change hard to appreciate in our day. The common blue +grass of our lawns, for instance, he called, and we call it still, +<i lang="nl" xml:lang="nl">Poa pratensis</i>. Up to his time it had three names and one of them +was <i lang="la" xml:lang="la">Gramen pratense paniculatum majus latiore folio poa +theophrasti</i>. Dr. Rydberg, of the New York Botanical Gardens, said +aptly at the bicentenary of his birth, that it was as if instead of +calling a girl Grace Darling one were to say “Mr. Darling’s +beautiful, slender, graceful, blue-eyed girl with long, golden curls +and rosy cheeks.”</p> + +<p>The binomial system revolutionized the science. What the lines of +longitude and latitude did for geography Linnæus’ genius did for +botany. And he did not let pride of achievement persuade him that he +had said the last word. He knew his system to be the best till some +one should find a better, and said so. The King gave him a noble +name and he was proud of it with reason—vain, some have said. But +vanity did not make the creature deny the Creator. He ever tried to +trace science to its author. When the people were frightened by the +“water turning to blood” and overzealous priests cried that it was a +sign of the wrath of God, he showed under the magnifying glass the +presence of innumerable little animals that gave the water its +reddish tinge, and thereby gave offence to some pious souls. But +over the door of his lecture room were the words in Latin: “Live +guiltless—God sees you!” and in his old age, seeing with prophetic +eye the day of bacteriology that dawned a hundred years after his +death, he thanked God that He had permitted him to “look into His +secret council room and workshop.”</p> + +<p>He was one of the clear thinkers of all days, uniting imagination +with sound sense. It was Linnæus who discovered that plants sleep +like animals. The Pope ordered that his books, wherever they were +found in his dominions, should be burned as materialistic and +heretical; but Linnæus lived to see a professor in botany at Rome +dismissed because he did not understand his system, and another put +in his place who did, and whose lectures followed his theories. When +he was seventy he was stricken with apoplexy, while lecturing to his +students, and the last year of his life was full of misery. +“Linnæus limps,” is one of the last entries in his diary, “can +hardly walk, speaks unintelligibly, and is scarce able to write.” +Death came on January 10, 1778.</p> + +<p>Under the white flashes of the northern lights in the desolate land +he explored in his youth, there grows in the shelter of the spruce +forests a flower which he found and loved beyond any other, the +<i>Linnæa borealis</i>, named after him. In some pictures we have of him, +he is seen holding a sprig of it in his hand. It is the twin flower +of the northern Pacific coast and of Labrador, indeed of the far +northern woods from Labrador all the way to Alaska, that lifts its +delicate, sweet-scented pink bells from the moss with gentle appeal, +“long overlooked, lowly, flowering early” despite cold and storm, +typical of the man himself.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="NIELS_FINSEN_THE_WOLF-SLAYER">NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER<a id="305"></a></h2> +</div> + +<p>Hard by the town of Thorshavn, in the Faröe islands, a little lad +sat one day carving his name on a rock. His rough-coated pony +cropped the tufts of stunted grass within call. The grim North Sea +beat upon the shore below. What thoughts of the great world without +it stirred in the boy he never told. He came of a people to whom it +called all through the ages with a summons that rarely went +unheeded. If he heard he gave no sign. Slowly and laboriously he +traced in the stone the letters N.R.F. When he had finished he +surveyed his work with a quiet smile. “There!” he said, “that is +done.”</p> + +<p>The years went by, and a distant city paused in its busy life to +hearken to bells tolling for one who lay dead. Kings and princes +walked behind his coffin and a whole people mourned. Yet in life he +had worn no purple. He was a plain, even a poor man. Upon his grave +they set a rock brought from the island in the North Sea, just like +the other that stands there yet, and in it they hewed the letters +N.R.F., for the man and the boy were one. And he who spoke there +said for all mankind that what he wrought was well done, for it was +done bravely and in love.</p> + +<p>Niels Ryberg Finsen was born in 1860 in the Faröe islands, where his +father was an official under the Danish Government. His family came +of the sturdy old Iceland stock that comes down to our time unshorn +of its strength from the day of the vikings, and back to Iceland his +people sent him to get his education in the Reykjavik Latin school, +after a brief stay in Denmark where his teachers failed to find the +key to the silent, reserved lad. There he lived the seven pregnant +years of boyhood and youth, from fourteen to twenty-one, and ever +after there was that about him that brought to mind the wild +fastnesses of that storm swept land. Its mountains were not more +rugged than his belief in the right as he saw it.</p> + +<p>The Reykjavik school had a good name, but school and pupils were +after their own kind. Conventional was hardly the word for it. Some +of the “boys” were twenty and over. Finsen loved to tell of how they +pursued the studies each liked best, paying scant attention to the +rest. In their chosen fields they often knew much more than the +curriculum called for, and were quite able to instruct the teacher; +the things they cared less about they helped one another out with, +so as to pass examinations. For mere proficiency in lessons they +cherished a sovereign contempt. To do anything by halves is not the +Iceland way, and it was not Niels Finsen’s. All through his life he +was impatient with second-hand knowledge and borrowed thinking. So +he worked and played through the long winters of the North. In the +summer vacations he roamed the barren hills, helped herd the sheep, +and drank in the rough freedom of the land and its people. At +twenty-one the school gave him up to the university at Copenhagen.</p> + +<p>Training for life there was not the heyday of youthful frolicking we +sometimes associate with college life in our day and land. Not until +he was thirty could he hang up his sheepskin as a physician. Yet the +students had their fun and their sports, and Finsen was seldom +missing where these went on. He was not an athlete because already +at twenty-three the crippling disease with which he battled twenty +years had got its grip on him, but all the more he was an outdoor +man. He sailed his boat, and practised with the rifle until he +became one of the best shots in Denmark. And it is recorded that he +got himself into at least one scrape at the university by his love +of freedom.</p> + +<p>The country was torn up at that time by a struggle between people +and government over constitutional rights, and it had reached a +point where a country parish had refused to pay taxes illegally +assessed, as they claimed. It was their Boston tea-party. A +delegation of the “tax refusers” had come to Copenhagen, where the +political pot was boiling hot over the incident. The students were +enthusiastic, but the authorities of the university sternly +unsympathetic. The “Reds” were for giving a reception to the +visitors in Regentsen, the great dormitory where, as an Iceland +student, Finsen had free lodging; but it was certain that the Dean +would frown upon such a proposition. So they applied innocently for +permission to entertain some “friends from the country,” and the +party was held in Finsen’s room. Great was the scandal when the +opposition newspapers exploited the feasting of the tax refusers in +the sacred precincts of the university. To the end of his days +Finsen chuckled over the way they stole a march on the Dean.</p> + +<p>For two or three years after getting his degree he taught in the +medical school as demonstrator, eking out his scant income by +tutoring students in anatomy. His sure hand and clear decision in +any situation marked him as a practitioner of power, and he had +thoughts once of devoting himself to the most delicate of all +surgery,—that of the eye. He was even then groping for his +life-work, without knowing it, for it was always light, light—the +source or avenue or effect of it—that held him. And presently his +work found him.</p> + +<p class="p2bot">It has been said that Finsen was a sick man. A mysterious malady<a id="FNanchor_15" href="#Footnote_15" class="fnanchor">[15]</a> +with dropsical symptoms clutched him from the earliest days with +ever tightening grip, and all his manhood’s life he was a great but +silent sufferer. Perhaps it was that; perhaps it was the bleak North +in which his young years had been set that turned him to the light +as the source of life and healing. He said it himself: “It was +because I needed it so much, I longed for it so.” Probably it was +both. Add to them his unique power of turning the things of every day +life to account in his scientific research, and one begins to +understand at once his success and his speedy popularity. He dealt +with the humble things of life, and got to the heart of things on +that road. And the people comprehended; the wise men fell in behind +him—sometimes a long way behind.</p> + +<div class="figcenter illowp70" style="max-width: 43.75em;" id="i-343"> +<img alt="" class="w100" src="images/i-343.jpg"> +<div class="caption"><span class="smcap">Dr. Niels Finsen</span></div> +</div> + +<p class="p2">In the yard of Regentsen there grows a famous old linden tree. +Standing at his window one day and watching its young leaf sprout, +Finsen saw a cat sunning itself on the pavement. The shadow of the +house was just behind it and presently crept up on pussy who got up, +stretched herself, and moved into the sunlight. In a little while +the shadow overtook her there, and pussy moved once more. Finsen +watched the shadow rout her out again and again. It was clear that +the cat liked the sunlight.</p> + +<p>A few days later he stood upon a bridge and saw a little squad of +insects sporting on the water. They drifted down happily with the +stream till they came within the shadow of the bridge, when they at +once began to work their way up a piece to get a fresh start for a +sunlight sail. Finsen knew just how they felt. His own room looked +north and was sunless; his work never prospered as it did when he +sat with a friend whose room was on the south side, where the sun +came in. It was warm and pleasant; but was that all? Was it only the +warmth that made the birds break into song when the sun came out on +a cloudy day, made the insects hum joyously and man himself walk +with a more springy step? The housekeeper who “sunned” the +bed-clothes and looked with suspicion on a dark room had something +else in mind; the sun “disinfected” the bedding. Finsen wanted to +know what it was in the sunlight that had this power, and how we +could borrow it and turn it to use.</p> + +<p>The men of science had long before analyzed the sunlight. They had +broken it up into the rays of different color that together make +the white light we see. Any boy can do it with a prism, and in the +band or spectrum of red, yellow, green, blue, and violet that then +appears, he has before him the cipher that holds the key to the +secrets of the universe if we but knew how to read it aright; for +the sunlight is the physical source of all life and of all power. +The different colors represent rays with different wave-lengths; +that is, they vibrate with different speed and do different work. +The red vibrate only half as fast as the violet, at the other end of +the spectrum, and, roughly speaking, they are the heat carriers. The +blue and violet are cold by comparison. They are the force carriers. +They have power to cause chemical changes, hence are known as the +chemical or actinic rays. It is these the photographer shuts out of +his dark room, where he intrenches himself behind a ruby-colored +window. The chemical ray cannot pass that; if it did it would spoil +his plate.</p> + +<p>This much was known, and it had been suggested more than once that +the “disinfecting” qualities of the sunlight might be due to the +chemical rays killing germs. Finsen, experimenting with earthworms, +earwigs, and butterflies, in a box covered with glass of the +different colors of the spectrum, noted first that the bugs that +naturally burrowed in darkness became uneasy in the blue light. As +fast as they were able, they got out of it and crawled into the red, +where they lay quiet and apparently content. When the glass covers +were changed they wandered about until they found the red light +again. The earwigs were the smartest. They developed an intelligent +grasp of the situation, and soon learned to make straight for the +red room. The butterflies, on the other hand, liked the red light +only to sleep in. It was made clear by many such experiments that +the chemical rays, and they only, had power to stimulate, to “stir +life.” Finsen called it that himself. In the language of the +children, he was getting “warm.”</p> + +<p>That this power, like any other, had its perils, and that nature, if +not man, was awake to them, he proved by some simple experiments +with sunburn. He showed that the tan which boys so covet was the +defence the skin puts forth against the blue ray. The inflammation +of sunburn is succeeded by the brown pigmentation that henceforth +stands guard like the photographer’s ruby window, protecting the +deeper layers of the skin. The black skin of the negro was no longer +a mystery. It is his protection against the fierce sunlight of the +tropics and the injurious effect of its chemical ray.</p> + +<p>Searching the libraries in Copenhagen for the records of earlier +explorers in his field, and finding little enough there, Finsen came +across the report of an American army surgeon on a smallpox epidemic +in the South in the thirties of the last century. There were so many +sick in the fort that, every available room being filled, they had +to put some of the patients into the bomb-proof, to great +inconvenience all-round, as it was entirely dark there. The doctor +noted incidentally that, as if to make up for it, the underground +patients got well sooner and escaped pitting. To him it was a +curious incident, nothing more. Upon Dr. Finsen, sitting there with +the seventy-five-year-old report from over the sea in his hand, it +burst with a flood of light: the patients got well without scarring +<em>because</em> they were in the dark. Red light or darkness, it was all +the same. The point was that the chemical rays that could cause +sunburn on men climbing glaciers, and had power to irritate the sick +skin, were barred out. Within a month he jolted the medical world by +announcing that smallpox patients treated under red light would +recover readily and without disfigurement.</p> + +<p>The learned scoffed. There were some of them who had read of the +practice in the Middle Ages of smothering smallpox patients in red +blankets, giving them red wine to drink and hanging the room with +scarlet. Finsen had not heard of it, and was much interested. +Evidently they had been groping toward the truth. How they came upon +the idea is not the only mystery of that strange day, for they knew +nothing of actinic rays or sunlight analyzed. But Finsen calmly +invited the test, which was speedy in coming.</p> + +<p>They had smallpox in Bergen, Norway, and there the matter was put to +the proof with entire success; later in Sweden and in Copenhagen. +The patients who were kept under the red light recovered rapidly, +though some of them were unvaccinated children, and bad cases. In no +instance was the most dangerous stage of the disease, the festering +stage, reached; the temperature did not rise again, and they all +came out unscarred.</p> + +<p>Finsen pointed out that where other methods of treatment such as +painting the face with iodine or lunar caustic, or covering it with +a mask or with fat, had met with any success in the past, the same +principle was involved of protecting the skin from the light, though +the practitioner did not know it. He was doing the thing they did in +the middle ages, and calling them quacks.</p> + +<p>It is strange but true that Dr. Finsen had never seen a smallpox +patient at that time, but he knew the nature of the disease, and +that the sufferer was affected by its eruption first and worst on +the face and hands—that is to say, on the parts of the body exposed +to the light—and he was as sure of his ground as was Leverrier +when, fifty years before, he bade his fellow astronomers look in a +particular spot of the heavens for an unknown planet that disturbed +the movements of Uranus. And they found the one we call Neptune +there.</p> + +<p>Presently all the world knew that the first definite step had been +taken toward harnessing in the service of man the strange force in +the sunlight that had been the object of so much speculation and +conjecture. The next step followed naturally. In the published +account of his early experiments Finsen foreshadows it in the words, +“That the beginning has been made with the hurtful effects of this +force is odd enough, since without doubt its beneficial effect is +far greater.” His clear head had already asked the question: if the +blue rays of the sun can penetrate deep enough into the skin to +cause injury, why should they not be made to do police duty there, +and catch and kill offending germs—in short, to heal?</p> + +<p>Finsen had demonstrated the correctness of the theory that the +chemical rays have power to kill germs. But it happens that these +are the rays that possess the least penetration. How to make them go +deeper was the problem. By an experiment that is, in its simplicity, +wholly characteristic of the man, he demonstrated that the red blood +in the deeper layers of the skin was the obstacle. He placed a piece +of photographic paper behind the lobe of his wife’s ears and +concentrated powerful blue rays on the other side. Five minutes of +exposure made no impression on the paper; it remained white. But +when he squeezed all the blood out of the lobe, by pressing it +between two pieces of glass, the paper was blackened in twenty +seconds.</p> + +<p>That night Finsen knew that he had within his grasp that which would +make him a rich man if he so chose. He had only to construct +apparatus to condense the chemical rays and double their power many +times, and to apply his discovery in medical practice. Wealth and +fame would come quickly. He told the writer in his own simple way +how he talked it over with his wife. They were poor. Finsen’s salary +as a teacher at the university was something like $1200 a year. He +was a sick man, and wealth would buy leisure and luxury. Children +were growing up about them who needed care. They talked it out +together, and resolutely turned their backs upon it all. Hand in +hand they faced the world with their sacrifice. What remained of +life to him was to be devoted to suffering mankind. That duty done, +what came they would meet together. Wealth never came, but fame in +full measure, and the love and gratitude of their fellow-men.</p> + +<p>There is a loathsome disease called lupus, of which, happily, in +America with our bright skies we know little. Lupus is the Latin +word for wolf, and the ravenous ailment is fitly named, for it +attacks by preference the face, and gnaws at the features, at nose, +chin, or eye, with horrible, torturing persistence, killing slowly, +while the patient shuts himself out from the world praying daily for +death to end his misery.</p> + +<p>In the north of Europe it is sadly common, and there had never been +any cure for it. Ointments, burning, surgery—they were all equally +useless. Once the wolf had buried its fangs in its victim, he was +doomed to inevitable death. The disease is, in fact, tuberculosis of +the skin, and is the most dreadful of all the forms in which the +white plague scourges mankind—was, until one day Finsen announced +to the world his second discovery, that lupus was cured by the +simple application of light.</p> + +<p>It was not a conjecture, a theory, like the red light treatment for +smallpox; it was a fact. For two years he had been sending people +away whole and happy who came to him in despair. The wolf was +slain, and by this silent sufferer whose modest establishment was +all contained within a couple of small shanties in a corner of the +city hospital grounds, at Copenhagen.</p> + +<p>There was a pause of amazed incredulity. The scientific men did not +believe it. Three years later, when the physician in charge of +Finsen’s clinic told at the medical congress in Paris of the results +obtained at the Light Institute, his story was still received with a +polite smile. The smile became astonishment when, at a sign from +him, the door opened and twelve healed lupus patients came in, each +carrying a photograph of himself as he was before he underwent the +treatment. Still the doctors could not grasp it. The thing was too +simple as matched against all their futile skill.</p> + +<p>But the people did not doubt. There was a rush from all over Europe +to Copenhagen. Its streets became filled with men and women whose +faces were shrouded in heavy bandages, and it was easy to tell the +new-comers from those who had seen “the professor.” They came in +gloom and misery; they went away carrying in their faces the +sunshine that gave them back their life. Finsen never tired, when +showing friends over his Institute, of pointing out the joyous +happiness of his patients. It was his reward. For not “science for +science’s sake,” or pride in his achievement, was his aim and +thought, but just the wish to do good where he could. Then, in three +more years, they awarded him the great Nobel prize for signal +service to humanity, and criticism was silenced. All the world +applauded.</p> + +<p>“They gave it to me this year,” said Finsen, with his sad little +smile, “because they knew that next year it would have been too +late.” And he prophesied truly. He died nine months later.</p> + +<p>All that is here set down seems simple enough. But it was achieved +with infinite toil and patience, by the most painstaking +experiments, many times repeated to make sure. In his method of +working Finsen was eminently conservative and thorough. Nothing +“happened” with him. There was ever behind his doings a definite +purpose for which he sought a way, and the higher the obstacles +piled up the more resolutely he set his teeth and kept right on. +“The thing is not in itself so difficult,” he said, when making +ready for his war upon the wolf, “but the road is long and the +experiments many before we find the right way.”</p> + +<p>He took no new step before he had planted his foot firmly in the one +that went before; but once he knew where he stood, he did not +hesitate to question any scientific dogma that opposed him, always +in his own quiet way, backed by irrefutable facts. In a remarkable +degree he had the faculty of getting down through the husk to the +core of things, but he rejected nothing untried. The little thing in +hand, he ever insisted, if faithfully done might hold the key to the +whole problem; only let it be done <em>now</em> to get the matter settled.</p> + +<p>Whatever his mind touched it made perfectly clear, if it was not so +already. As a teacher of anatomy he invented a dissecting knife that +was an improvement on those in use, and clamps for securing the +edges of a wound in an operation. As a rifle shot he made an +improved breech; as a physician, observing the progress of his own +disease, an effective blood powder for anaemia. At the Light +Institute, which friends built for him, and the government endowed, +he devised the powerful electric lamps to which he turned in the +treatment of lupus, for the sun does not shine every day in +Copenhagen; and when it did not, the lenses that gathered the blue +rays and concentrated them upon the swollen faces were idle. And +gradually he increased their power, checking the heat rays that +would slip through and threatened to scorch the patient’s skin, by +cunning devices of cooling streams trickling through the tubes and +the hollow lenses.</p> + +<p>Nothing was patented; it was all given freely to the world. The +decision which he and his wife made together was made once for all. +When the great Nobel prize was given to him he turned it over to the +Light Institute, and was with difficulty persuaded to keep half of +it for himself only when friends raised an equal amount and +presented it to the Institute.</p> + +<p>Finsen knew that his discoveries were but the first groping steps +upon a new road that stretched farther ahead than any man now living +can see. He was content to have broken the way. His faith was +unshaken in the ultimate treatment of the whole organism under +electric light that, by concentrating the chemical rays, would +impart to the body their life-giving power. He himself was beyond +their help. Daily he felt life slipping from him, but no word of +complaint passed his lips. He prescribed for himself a treatment +that, if anything, was worse than the disease. Only a man of iron +will could have carried it through.</p> + +<p>A set of scales stood on the table before him, and for years he +weighed every mouthful of food he ate. He suffered tortures from +thirst because he would allow no fluid to pass his lips, on account +of his tendency to dropsy. Through it all he cheerfully kept up his +labors, rejoicing that he was allowed to do so much. His courage was +indomitable; his optimism under it all unwavering. His favorite +contention was that there is nothing in the world that is not good +for something, except war. That he hated, and his satire on the +militarism of Europe as its supreme folly was sharp and biting.</p> + +<p>Of such quality was this extraordinary man of whom half the world +was talking while the fewest, even in his own home city, ever saw +him. Fewer still knew him well. It suited his temper and native +modesty, as it did the state of his bodily health, to keep himself +secluded. His motto was: “<i lang="la" xml:lang="la">bene vixit qui bene latuit</i>—he has +lived well who has kept himself well hidden”—and his contention was +always that in proportion as one could keep himself in the +background his cause prospered, if it was a good cause. When kings +and queens came visiting, he could not always keep in hiding, though +he often tried. On one of his days of extreme prostration the +dowager empress of Russia knocked vainly at his door. She pleaded so +hard to be allowed to see Dr. Finsen that they relented at last, and +she sat by his bed and wept in sympathy with his sufferings, while +he with his brave smile on lips that would twitch with pain did his +best to comfort her. She and Queen Alexandra, both daughters of King +Christian, carried the gospel of hope and healing from his study to +their own lands, and Light Institutes sprang up all over Europe.</p> + +<p>In his own life he treated nearly nineteen hundred sufferers, +two-thirds of them lupus patients, and scarce a handful went from +his door unhelped. When his work was done he fell asleep with a +smile upon his lips, and the “universal judgment was one of +universal thanksgiving that he had lived.” He was forty-three years +old.</p> + +<p>When the news of his death reached the Rigsdag, the Danish +parliament, it voted his widow a pension such as had been given to +few Danes in any day. The king, his sons and daughters, and, as it +seemed, the whole people followed his body to the grave. The rock +from his native island marks the place where he lies. His work is +his imperishable monument. His epitaph he wrote himself in the +speech another read when the Nobel prize was awarded him, for he was +then too ill to speak.</p> + +<p>“May the Light Institute grasp the obligation that comes with its +success, the obligation to maintain what I account the highest aim +in science—truth, faithful work, and sound criticism.”</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>Footnotes:</h3> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a id="Footnote_15" href="#FNanchor_15" class="label">[15]</a> The autopsy which he himself ordered on his death-bed +as his last contribution to medical knowledge, showed it to be a +slow ossification of the membrane of the heart, involving the liver +and all the vital organs. He was “tapped” for dropsy more than +twenty times.</p> +</div> +</div> + +<p class="center noindent p3 p2bot">Printed in the United States of America.</p> + +<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH ***</div> +<div style='text-align:left'> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will +be renamed. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United +States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. +</div> + +<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> +<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person +or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the +Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when +you share it without charge with others. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work +on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: +</div> + +<blockquote> + <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most + other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions + whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms + of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online + at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you + are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws + of the country where you are located before using this eBook. + </div> +</blockquote> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg™ License. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format +other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain +Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +provided that: +</div> + +<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation.” + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ + works. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. + </div> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread +public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state +visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. +</div> + +</div> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/12481-h/images/cover.jpg b/12481-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9848312 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/front.jpg b/12481-h/images/front.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7265e8f --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/front.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-103.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-103.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f3e76b --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-103.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-129.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-129.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..136dc6c --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-129.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-179.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-179.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d34076 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-179.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-201.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-201.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6844041 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-201.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-207a.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-207a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..900f131 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-207a.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-207b.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-207b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ec802b --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-207b.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-227.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-227.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..09f2946 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-227.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-275.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-275.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3077811 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-275.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-343.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-343.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2392426 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-343.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-colophon.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-colophon.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8789abb --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-colophon.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/i-frontis.jpg b/12481-h/images/i-frontis.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5bfc6aa --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/i-frontis.jpg diff --git a/12481-h/images/music.png b/12481-h/images/music.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0600ad7 --- /dev/null +++ b/12481-h/images/music.png diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c834c33 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #12481 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/12481) diff --git a/old/12481-8.txt b/old/12481-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..795c26a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6171 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, Hero Tales of the Far North, by Jacob A. Riis + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: Hero Tales of the Far North + +Author: Jacob A. Riis + +Release Date: May 31, 2004 [eBook #12481] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: iso-8859-1 + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH*** + + +E-text prepared by Janet Kegg and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed +Proofreading Team + + + +HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH + +By + +JACOB A. RIIS + +AUTHOR OF "HOW THE OTHER HALF LIVES" +"THE MAKING OF AN AMERICAN" +"THE OLD TOWN," ETC. + +New York, 1921 + + + + + + +[Illustration: FREDERIKSBORG] + + + + + THIS BOOK OF MY DEAD HEROES + I DEDICATE TO MY LIVING HERO + + THEODORE ROOSEVELT + + MAY IT BE MANY YEARS BEFORE THE LAST CHAPTER + OF HIS SPLENDID WHOLESOME LIFE IS + WRITTEN IN THE PAGES OF OUR + COUNTRY'S HISTORY + + + + +FOREWORD + + +When a man knocks at Uncle Sam's gate, craving admission to his +house, we ask him how much money he brings, lest he become a +hindrance instead of a help. If now we were to ask what he brings, +not only in his pocket, but in his mind and in his heart, this +stranger, what ideals he owns, what company he kept in the country +he left that shaped his hopes and ambitions,--might it not, if the +answer were right, be a help to a better mutual understanding +between host and guest? For the _Mayflower_ did not hold all who in +this world have battled for freedom of home, of hope, and of +conscience. The struggle is bigger than that. Every land has its +George Washington, its Kosciusko, its William Tell, its Garibaldi, +its Kossuth, if there is but one that has a Joan d'Arc. What we want +to know of the man is: were its heroes his? + +This book is an attempt to ask and to answer that question for my +own people, in a very small and simple way, it is true, but perhaps +abler pens with more leisure than mine may follow the trail it has +blazed. I should like to see some Swede write of the heroes of his +noble, chivalrous people, whom lack of space has made me slight +here, though I count them with my own. I should like to hear the +epic of United Italy, of proud and freedom-loving Hungary, the +swan-song of unhappy Poland, chanted to young America again and +again, to help us all understand that we are kin in the things that +really count, and help us pull together as we must if we are to make +the most of our common country. + +These were my--our--heroes, then. Every lad of Northern blood, whose +heart is in the right place, loves them. And he need make no excuses +for any of them. Nor has he need of bartering them for the great of +his new home; they go very well together. It is partly for his sake +I have set their stories down here. All too quickly he lets go his +grip on them, on the new shore. Let him keep them and cherish them +with the memories of the motherland. The immigrant America wants and +needs is he who brings the best of the old home to the new, not he +who threw it overboard on the voyage. In the great melting-pot it +will tell its story for the good of us all. + +To those who wonder that I have left the Saga era of the North +untouched, I would say that I have preferred to deal here only with +downright historic figures. For valuable aid rendered in insuring +accuracy I am indebted to the services of Dr. P.A. Rydberg, Dr. J. +Emile Blomn, Gustaf V. Lindner, and Professor Joakim Reinhard. My +thanks are due likewise to many friends, Danes by birth like myself, +who have helped me with the illustrations. + +J. A. R. +RICHMOND HILL, +June, 1910. + + + + CONTENTS + + A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA + HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND + GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN + ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH + KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG + HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID + KING CHRISTIAN IV + GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING + KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN + THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE + CARL LINN, KING OF THE FLOWERS + NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER + + + + + +A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA + + +The Eighteenth Century broke upon a noisy family quarrel in the +north of Europe. Charles the Twelfth of Sweden, the royal hotspur of +all history, and Frederik of Denmark had fallen out. Like their +people, they were first cousins, and therefore all the more bent on +settling the old question which was the better man. After the +fashion of the lion and the unicorn, they fought "all about the +town," and, indeed, about every town that came in their way, now +this and now that side having the best of it. On the sea, which was +the more important because neither Swedes nor Danes could reach +their fighting ground or keep up their armaments without command of +the waterways, the victory rested finally with the Danes. And this +was due almost wholly to one extraordinary figure, the like of which +is scarce to be found in the annals of warfare, Peder Tordenskjold. +Rising in ten brief years from the humblest place before the mast, +a half-grown lad, to the rank of admiral, ennobled by his King and +the idol of two nations, only to be assassinated on the "field of +honor" at thirty, he seems the very incarnation of the stormy times +of the Eleven Years' War, with which his sun rose and set; for the +year in which peace was made also saw his death. + +Peder Jansen Wessel was born on October 28, 1690, in the city of +Trondhjem, Norway, which country in those days was united with +Denmark under one king. His father was an alderman with eighteen +children. Peder was the tenth of twelve wild boys. It is related +that the father in sheer desperation once let make for him a pair of +leathern breeches which he would not be able to tear. But the lad, +not to be beaten so easily, sat on a grind-stone and had one of his +school-fellows turn it till the seat was worn thin, a piece of +bravado that probably cost him dear, for doubtless the exasperated +father's stick found the attenuated spot. + +Since he would have none of the school, his father had him +apprenticed out to a tailor with the injunction not to spare the +rod. But sitting cross-legged on a tailor's stool did not suit the +lad, and he took it out of his master by snowballing him thoroughly +one winter's day. Next a barber undertook to teach him his trade; +but Peder ran away and was drifting about the streets when the King +came to Norway. The boy saw the splendid uniforms and heard the +story of the beautiful capital by the resund, with its palaces and +great fighting ships. When the King departed, he was missing, and +for a while there was peace in Trondhjem. + +Down in Copenhagen the homeless lad was found wandering about by the +King's chaplain, who, being himself a Norwegian, took him home and +made him a household page. But the boy's wanderings had led him to +the navy-yard, where he saw mid-shipmen of his own size at drill, +and he could think of nothing else. When he should have been waiting +at table he was down among the ships. For him there was ever but one +way to any goal, the straight cut, and at fifteen he wrote to the +King asking to be appointed a midshipman. "I am wearing away my life +as a servant," he wrote. "I want to give it, and my blood, to the +service of your Majesty, and I will serve you with all my might +while I live!" + +The navy had need of that kind of recruits, and the King saw to it +that he was apprenticed at once. And that was the beginning of his +strangely romantic career. + +Three years he sailed before the mast and learned seamanship, while +Charles was baiting the Muscovite and the North was resting on its +arms. Then came Pultava and the Swedish King's crushing defeat. The +storm-centre was transferred to the North again, and the war on the +sea opened with a splendid deed, fit to appeal to any ardent young +heart. At the battle in the Bay of Kjge, the _Dannebrog_, commanded +by Ivar Hvitfeldt, caught fire, and by its position exposed the +Danish fleet to great danger. Hvitfeldt could do one of two things: +save his own life and his men's by letting his ship drift before the +wind and by his escape risking the rest of the fleet and losing the +battle, or stay where he was to meet certain death. He chose the +latter, anchored his vessel securely, and fought on until the ship +was burned down to the water's edge and blew up with him and his +five hundred men. Ivar Hvitfeldt's name is forever immortal in the +history of his country. A few years ago they raised the wreck of the +_Dannebrog_, fitly called after the Danish flag, and made of its +guns a monument that stands on Langelinie, the beautiful shore road +of Copenhagen. + +Fired by such deeds, young Wessel implored the King, before he had +yet worn out his first midshipman's jacket, to give him command of a +frigate. He compromised on a small privateer, the _Ormen_, but with +it he did such execution in Swedish waters and earned such renown as +a dauntless sailor and a bold scout whose information about the +enemy was always first and best, that before spring they gave him a +frigate with eighteen guns and the emphatic warning "not to engage +any enemy when he was not clearly the stronger." He immediately +brought in a Swedish cruiser, the _Alabama_ of those days, that had +been the terror of the sea. In a naval battle in the Baltic soon +after, he engaged with his little frigate two of the enemy's +line-of-battle ships that were trying to get away, and only when a +third came to help them did he retreat, so battered that he had to +seek port to make repairs. Accused of violating his orders, his +answer was prompt: "I promised your Majesty to do my best, and I +did." King Frederik IV, himself a young and spirited man, made him a +captain, jumping him over fifty odd older lieutenants, and gave him +leave to war on the enemy as he saw fit. + +The immediate result was that the Governor of Gteborg, the enemy's +chief seaport in the North Sea, put a price on his head. Captain +Wessel heard of it and sent word into town that he was outside--to +come and take him; but to hurry, for time was short. While waiting +for a reply, he fell in with two Swedish men-of-war having in tow a +Danish prize. That was not to be borne, and though they together +mounted ninety-four guns to his eighteen, he fell upon them like a +thunderbolt. They beat him off, but he returned for their prize. +That time they nearly sank him with three broad-sides. However, he +ran for the Norwegian coast and saved his ship. In his report of +this affair he excuses himself for running away with the reflection +that allowing himself to be sunk "would not rightly have benefited +his Majesty's service." + +However, the opportunity came to him swiftly of "rightly +benefiting" the King's service. After the battle of Kolberger Heide, +that had gone against the Swedes, he found them beaching their ships +under cover of the night to prevent their falling into the hands of +the victors. Wessel halted them with the threat that every man Jack +in the fleet should be made to walk the plank, saved the ships, and +took their admiral prisoner to his chief. When others slept, Wessel +was abroad with his swift sailer. If wind and sea went against him, +he knew how to turn his mishap to account. Driven in under the +hostile shore once, he took the opportunity, as was his wont, to get +the lay of the land and of the enemy. He learned quickly that in the +harbor of Wesens, not far away, a Swedish cutter was lying with a +Danish prize. She carried eight guns and had a crew of thirty-six +men; but though he had at the moment only eighteen sailors in his +boat, he crept up the coast at once, slipped quietly in after +sundown, and took ship and prize with a rush, killing and throwing +overboard such as resisted. In Sweden mothers hushed their crying +children with his dreaded name; on the sea they came near to +thinking him a troll, so sudden and unexpected were his onsets. But +there was no witchcraft about it. He sailed swiftly because he was a +skilled sailor and because he missed no opportunity to have the +bottom of his ship scraped and greased. And when on board, pistol +and cutlass hung loose; for it was a time of war with a brave and +relentless foe. + +His reconnoitring expeditions he always headed himself, and +sometimes he went alone. Thus, when getting ready to take Marstrand, +a fortified seaport of great importance to Charles, he went ashore +disguised as a fisherman and peddled fish through the town, even in +the very castle itself, where he took notice, along with the +position of the guns and the strength of the garrison, of the fact +that the commandant had two pretty daughters. He was a sailor, sure +enough. Once when ashore on such an expedition, he was surprised by +a company of dragoons. His men escaped, but the dragoons cut off his +way to the shore. As they rode at him, reaching out for his sword, +he suddenly dashed among them, cut one down, and, diving through the +surf, swam out to the boat, his sword between his teeth. Their +bullets churned up the sea all about him, but he was not hit. He +seemed to bear a charmed life; in all his fights he was wounded but +once. That was in the attack on the strongly fortified port of +Strmstad, in which he was repulsed with a loss of 96 killed and 246 +wounded, while the Swedish loss footed up over 1500, a fight which +led straight to the most astonishing chapter in his whole career, of +which more anon. + +All Denmark and Norway presently rang with the stories of his +exploits. They were always of the kind to appeal to the imagination, +for in truth he was a very knight errant of the sea who fought for +the love of it as well as of the flag, ardent patriot that he was. A +brave and chivalrous foe he loved next to a loyal friend. Cowardice +he loathed. Once when ordered to follow a retreating enemy with his +frigate _Hvide rnen_ (the White Eagle) of thirty guns, he hugged +him so close that in the darkness he ran his ship into the great +Swedish man-of-war _sel_ of sixty-four guns. The chance was too +good to let pass. Seeing that the _sel's_ lower gun-ports were +closed, and reasoning from this that she had been struck in the +water-line and badly damaged, he was for boarding her at once, but +his men refused to follow him. In the delay the _sel_ backed away. +Captain Wessel gave chase, pelted her with shot, and called to her +captain, whose name was _Sstjerna_ (sea-star), to stop. + +"Running away from a frigate, are you? Shame on you, coward and +poltroon! Stay and fight like a man for your King and your flag!" + +Seeing him edge yet farther away, he shouted in utter exasperation, +"Your name shall be dog-star forever, not sea-star, if you don't +stay." + +"But all this," he wrote sadly to the King, "with much more which +was worse, had no effect." + +However, on his way back to join the fleet he ran across a convoy of +ten merchant vessels, guarded by three of the enemy's line-of-battle +ships. He made a feint at passing, but, suddenly turning, swooped +down upon the biggest trader, ran out his boats, made fast, and +towed it away from under the very noses of its protectors. It meant +prize-money for his men, but their captain did not forget their +craven conduct of the night, which had made him lose a bigger +prize, and with the money they got a sound flogging. + +The account of the duel between his first frigate, _Lvendahl's +Galley_, of eighteen guns, and a Swede of twenty-eight guns reads +like the doings of the old vikings, and indeed both commanders were +likely descended straight from those arch fighters. Wessel certainly +was. The other captain was an English officer, Bactman by name, who +was on the way to deliver his ship, that had been bought in England, +to the Swedes. They met in the North Sea and fell to fighting by +noon of one day. The afternoon of the next saw them at it yet. Twice +the crew of the Swedish frigate had thrown down their arms, refusing +to fight any more. Vainly the vessel had tried to get away; the Dane +hung to it like a leech. In the afternoon of the second day Wessel +was informed that his powder had given out. He had a boat sent out +with a herald, who presented to Captain Bactman his regrets that he +had to quit for lack of powder, but would he come aboard and shake +hands? + +The Briton declined. Meanwhile the ships had drifted close enough to +speak through the trumpet, and Captain Wessel shouted over from his +quarter-deck that "if he could lend him a little powder, they might +still go on." Captain Bactman smilingly shook his head, and then the +two drank to one another's health, each on his own quarter-deck, and +parted friends, while their crews manned what was left of the yards +and cheered each other wildly. + +Wessel's enemies, of whom he had many, especially among the +nobility, who looked upon him as a vulgar upstart, used this +incident to bring him before a court-martial. It was unpatriotic, +they declared, and they demanded that he be degraded and fined. His +defence, which with all the records of his career are in the Navy +Department at Copenhagen, was brief but to the point. It is summed +up in the retort to his accusers that "they themselves should be +rebuked, and severely, for failing to understand that an officer in +the King's service should be promoted instead of censured for doing +his plain duty," and that there was nothing in the articles of war +commanding him to treat an honorable foe otherwise than with honor. + +It must be admitted that he gave his critics no lack of cause. His +enterprises were often enough of a hair-raising kind, and he had +scant patience with censure. Thus once, when harassed by an +Admiralty order purposely issued to annoy him, he wrote back: "The +biggest fool can see that to obey would defeat all my plans. I shall +not do it. It may suit folk who love loafing about shore, but to an +honest man such talk is disgusting, let alone that the thing can't +be done." He was at that time twenty-six years old, and in charge of +the whole North Sea fleet. No wonder he had enemies. + +However, the King was his friend. He made him a nobleman, and gave +him the name Tordenskjold. It means "thunder shield." + +"Then, by the powers," he swore when he was told, "I shall thunder +in the ears of the Swedes so that the King shall hear of it!" And he +kept his word. + +Charles had determined to take Denmark with one fell blow. He had an +army assembled in Skaane to cross the sound, which was frozen over +solid. All was ready for the invasion in January 1716. The people +throughout Sweden had assembled in the churches to pray for the +success of the King's arms, and he was there himself to lead; but +in the early morning hours a strong east wind broke up the ice, and +the campaign ended before it was begun. Charles then turned on +Norway, and laid siege to the city of Frederikshald, which, with its +strong fort, Frederiksteen, was the key to that country. A Danish +fleet lay in the Skagerak, blocking his way of renforcements by +sea. Tordenskjold, with his frigate, _Hvide rnen_, and six smaller +ships (the frigate _Vindhunden_ of sixteen guns, and five vessels of +light draught, two of which were heavily armed), was doing scouting +duty for the Admiral when he learned that the entire Swedish fleet +of forty-four ships that was intended to aid in the operations +against Frederikshald lay in the harbor of Dynekilen waiting its +chance to slip out. It was so well shielded there that its commander +sent word to the King to rest easy; nothing could happen to him. He +would join him presently. + +Tordenskjold saw that if he could capture or destroy this fleet +Norway was saved; the siege must perforce be abandoned. And Norway +was his native land, which he loved with his whole fervid soul. But +no time was to be lost. He could not go back to ask for permission, +and one may shrewdly guess that he did not want to, for it would +certainly have been refused. He heard that the Swedish officers, +secure in their stronghold, were to attend a wedding on shore the +next day. His instructions from the Admiralty were: in an emergency +always to hold a council of war, and to abide by its decision. At +daybreak he ran his ship alongside _Vindhunden_, her companion +frigate, and called to the captain: + +"The Swedish officers are bidden to a wedding, and they have +forgotten us. What do you say--shall we go unasked?" + +Captain Grip was game. "Good enough!" he shouted back. "The wind is +fair, and we have all day. I am ready." + +That was the council of war and its decision. Tordenskjold gave the +signal to clear for action, and sailed in at the head of his handful +of ships. + +The inlet to the harbor of Dynekilen is narrow and crooked, winding +between reefs and rocky steeps quite two miles, and only in spots +more than four hundred feet wide. Halfway in was a strong battery. +Tordenskjold's fleet was received with a tremendous fire from all +the Swedish ships, from the battery, and from an army of four +thousand soldiers lying along shore. The Danish ships made no reply. +They sailed up grimly silent till they reached a place wide enough +to let them wear round, broadside on. Then their guns spoke. Three +hours the battle raged before the Swedish fire began to slacken. As +soon as he noticed it, Tordenskjold slipped into the inner harbor +under cover of the heavy pall of smoke, and before the Swedes +suspected their presence they found his ships alongside. Broadside +after broadside crashed into them, and in terror they fled, soldiers +and sailors alike. While they ran Tordenskjold swooped down upon the +half-way battery, seized it, and spiked its guns. The fight was won. + +But the heaviest part was left--the towing out of the captured +ships. All the afternoon Tordenskjold led the work in person, +pulling on ropes, cheering on his men. The Swedes, returning gamely +to the fight, showered them with bullets from shore. One of the +abandoned vessels caught fire. Lieutenant Tnder, of Tordenskjold's +staff, a veteran with a wooden leg, boarded it just as the +quartermaster ran up yelling that the ship was full of powder and +was going to blow up. He tried to jump overboard, but the lieutenant +seized him by the collar and, stumping along, made him lead the way +to the magazine. A fuse had been laid to an open keg of powder, and +the fire was sputtering within an inch of it when Lieutenant Tnder +plucked it out, smothered it between thumb and forefinger, and threw +it through the nearest port-hole. There were two hundred barrels of +powder in the ship. + +Tordenskjold had kept his word to the King. Not as much as a yawl of +the Dynekilen fleet was left to the enemy. He had sunk or burned +thirteen and captured thirty-one ships with his seven, and all the +piled-up munitions of war were in his hands. King Charles gave up +the siege, marched his army out of Norway, and the country was +saved. The victory cost Tordenskjold but nineteen killed and +fifty-seven wounded. On his own ship six men were killed and twenty +wounded. + +Of infinite variety was this sea-fighter. After a victory like this, +one hears of him in the next breath gratifying a passing whim of +the King, who wanted to know what the Swedish people thought of +their Government after Charles's long wars that are said to have +cost their country a million men. Tordenskjold overheard it, had +himself rowed across to Sweden, picked up there a wedding party, +bridegroom, minister, guests, and all, including the captain of the +shore watch who was among them, and returned in time for the palace +dinner with his catch. King Frederik was entertaining Czar Peter the +Great, who had been boasting of the unhesitating loyalty of his men +which his Danish host could not match. He now had the tables turned +upon him. It is recorded that the King sent the party back with +royal gifts for the bride. One would be glad to add that +Tordenskjold sent back, too, the silver pitcher and the parlor clock +his men took on their visit. But he didn't. They were still in +Copenhagen a hundred years later, and may be they are yet. It was +not like his usual gallantry toward the fair sex. But perhaps he +didn't know anything about it. + +Then we find him, after an unsuccessful attack on Gteborg that cost +many lives, sending in his adjutant to congratulate the Swedish +commandant on their "gallant encounter" the day before, and +exchanging presents with him in token of mutual regard. And before +one can turn the page he is discovered swooping down upon Marstrand, +taking town and fleet anchored there, and the castle itself with its +whole garrison, all with two hundred men, swelled by stratagem into +an army of thousands. We are told that an officer sent out from the +castle to parley, issuing forth from a generous dinner, beheld the +besieging army drawn up in street after street, always two hundred +men around every corner, as he made his way through the town, +piloted by Tordenskjold himself, who was careful to take him the +longest way, while the men took the short cut to the next block. The +man returned home with the message that the town was full of them +and that resistance was useless. The ruse smacks of Peder Wessel's +boyish fight with a much bigger fellow who had beaten him once by +gripping his long hair, and so getting his head in chancery. But +Peder had taken notice. Next time he came to the encounter with hair +cut short and his whole head smeared with soft-soap, and that time +he won. + +The most extraordinary of all his adventures befell when, after the +attack on Strmstad, he was hastening home to Copenhagen. Crossing +the Kattegat in a little smack that carried but two three-pound +guns, he was chased and overtaken by a Swedish frigate of sixteen +guns and a crew of sixty men. Tordenskjold had but twenty-one, and +eight of them were servants and non-combatants. They were dreadfully +frightened, and tradition has it that one of them wept when he saw +the Swede coming on. Her captain called upon him to surrender, but +the answer was flung back: + +"I am Tordenskjold! Come and take me, if you can." + +With that came a tiny broadside that did brisk execution on the +frigate. Tordenskjold had hauled both his guns over on the "fighting +side" of his vessel. There ensued a battle such as Homer would have +loved to sing. Both sides banged away for all they were worth. In +the midst of the din and smoke Tordenskjold used his musket with +cool skill; his servants loaded while he fired. At every shot a man +fell on the frigate. + +Word was brought that there was no more round shot. He bade them +twist up his pewter dinner service and fire that, which they did. +The Swede tried vainly to board. Tordenskjold manoeuvred his smack +with such skill that they could not hook on. Seeing this, Captain +Lind, commander of the frigate, called to him to desist from the +useless struggle; he would be honored to carry such a prisoner into +Gteborg. Back came the taunt: + +"Neither you nor any other Swede shall ever carry me there!" And +with that he shot the captain down.[1] + +[Footnote 1: He was not mortally wounded, and Tordenskjold took him +prisoner later at the capture of Marstrand.] + +When his men saw him fall, they were seized with panic and made off +as quickly as they could, while Tordenskjold's crew, of whom only +fourteen were left, beat their drums and blew trumpets in frantic +defiance. Their captain was for following the Swede and boarding +her, but he couldn't. Sails, rigging, and masts were shot to pieces. +Perhaps the terror of the Swedes was increased by the sight of +Tordenskjold's tame bear making faces at them behind his master. It +went with him everywhere till that day, and came out of the fight +unscathed. But during the night the crew ran the vessel on the +Swedish shore, whence Tordenskjold himself reached Denmark in an +open boat which he had to keep bailing all night, for the boat was +shot full of holes, and though he and his companions stuffed their +spare clothing into them it leaked badly. The enemy got the smack, +after all, and the bear, which, being a Norwegian, proved so +untractable on Swedish soil that, sad to relate, in the end they cut +him up and ate him. + +King Charles, himself a knightly soul and an admirer of a gallant +enemy, gave orders to have all Tordenskjold's belongings sent back +to him, but he did not live to see the order carried out. He was +found dead in the rifle-pits before Frederiksteen on December 11, +1718, shot through the head. It was Tordenskjold himself who brought +the all-important news to King Frederik in the night of December +28,--they were not the days of telegraphs and fast steamers,--and +when the King, who had been roused out of bed to receive him, could +not trust his ears, he said with characteristic audacity, "I wish it +were as true that your Majesty had made me a schoutbynacht,"--the +rank next below admiral. And so he took the step next to the last on +the ladder of his ambition. + +Within seven months he took Marstrand. It is part of the record of +that astonishing performance that when the unhappy Commandant +hesitated as the hour of evacuation came, not sure that he had done +right in capitulating, Tordenskjold walked up to the fort with a +hundred men, half his force, banged on the gate, went in alone and +up to the Commandant's window, thundering out: + +"What are you waiting for? Don't you know time is up?" + +In terror and haste, Colonel Dankwardt moved his Hessians out, and +Tordenskjold marched his handful of men in. When he brought the King +the keys of Marstrand, Frederik made him an admiral. + +It was while blockading the port of Gteborg in the last year of the +war that he met and made a friend of Lord Carteret, the English +Ambassador to Denmark, and fell in love with the picture of a young +Englishwoman, Miss Norris, a lady of great beauty and wealth, who, +Lord Carteret told him, was an ardent admirer of his. It was this +love which indirectly sent him to his death. Lord Carteret had given +him a picture of her, and as soon as peace was made he started for +England; but he never reached that country. The remnant of the +Swedish fleet lay in the roadstead at Gteborg, under the guns of +the two forts, New and Old Elfsborg. While Tordenskjold was away at +Marstrand, the enemy sallied forth and snapped up seven of the +smaller vessels of his blockading fleet. The news made him furious. +He sent in, demanding them back at once, "or I will come after +them." He had already made one ineffectual attempt to take New +Elfsborg that cost him dear. In Gteborg they knew the strength of +his fleet and laughed at his threat. But it was never safe to laugh +at Tordenskjold. The first dark night he stole in with ten armed +boats, seized the shore batteries of the old fort, and spiked their +guns before a shot was fired. The rising moon saw his men in +possession of the ships lying at anchor. With their blue-lined coats +turned inside out so that they might pass for Swedish uniforms, they +surprised the watch in the guard-house and made them all prisoners. +Now that there was no longer reason for caution, they raised a +racket that woke the sleeping town up in a fright. The commander of +the other fort sent out a boat to ascertain the cause. It met the +Admiral's and challenged it, "Who goes there?" + +"Tordenskjold," was the reply, "come to teach you to keep awake." + +It proved impossible to warp the ships out. Only one of the seven +lost ones was recovered; all the rest were set on fire. By the light +of the mighty bonfire Tordenskjold rowed out with his men, hauling +the recovered ship right under the guns of the forts, the Danish +flag flying at the bow of his boat. He had not lost a single man. A +cannon-ball swept away all the oars on one side of his boat, but no +one was hurt. + +At Marstrand they had been up all night listening to the cannonading +and the crash upon crash as the big ships blew up. They knew that +Tordenskjold was abroad with his men. In the morning, when they were +all in church, he walked in and sat down by his chief, the old +Admiral Judicher, who was a slow-going, cautious man. He whispered +anxiously, "What news?" but Tordenskjold only shrugged his shoulders +with unmoved face. It is not likely that either the old Admiral or +the congregation heard much of that sermon, if indeed they heard any +of it. But when it was over, they saw from the walls of the town +the Danish ships at anchor and heard the story of the last of +Tordenskjold's exploits. It fitly capped the climax of his life. +Sweden's entire force on the North Sea, with the exception of five +small galleys, had either been captured, sunk, or burned by him. + +The King would not let Tordenskjold go when peace was made, but he +had his way in the end. To his undoing he consented to take with him +abroad a young scalawag, the son of his landlord, who had more money +than brains. In Hamburg the young man fell in with a gambler, a +Swedish colonel by name of Stahl, who fleeced him of all he had and +much more besides. When Tordenskjold heard of it and met the Colonel +in another man's house, he caned him soundly and threw him out in +the street. For this he was challenged, but refused to fight a +gambler. + +"Friends," particularly one Colonel Mnnichhausen, who volunteered +to be his second, talked him over, and also persuaded him to give up +the pistol, with which he was an expert. The duel was fought at the +Village of Gledinge, over the line from Hanover, on the morning of +November 12, 1720. Tordenskjold was roused from sleep at five, and, +after saying his prayers, a duty he never on any account omitted, he +started for the place appointed. His old body-servant vainly pleaded +with his master to take his stout blade instead of the flimsy parade +sword the Admiral carried. Mnnichhausen advised against it; it +would be too heavy, he said. Stahl's weapon was a long fighting +rapier, and to this the treacherous second made no objection. Almost +at the first thrust he ran the Admiral through. The seconds held his +servant while Stahl jumped on his horse and galloped away. +Tordenskjold breathed out his dauntless soul in the arms of his +faithful servant and friend. + +His body lies in a black marble sarcophagus in the "Navy Church" at +Copenhagen. The Danish and Norwegian peoples have never ceased to +mourn their idol. He was a sailor with a sailor's faults. But he +loved truth, honor, and courage in foe and friend alike. Like many +seafaring men, he was deeply religious, with the unquestioning faith +of a child. There is a letter in existence written by him to his +father when the latter was on his death-bed that bears witness to +this. He thanks him with filial affection for all his care, and says +navely that he would rather have his prayers than fall heir to +twenty thousand daler. His pictures show a stocky, broad-shouldered +youth with frank blue eyes, full lips, and an eagle nose. His deep, +sonorous voice used to be heard, in his midshipman days, above the +whole congregation in the Navy Church. In after years it called +louder still to Denmark's foes. When things were at their worst in +storm or battle, he was wont to shout to his men, "Hi, _now_ we are +having a fine time!" and his battle-cry has passed into the +language. By it, in desperate straits demanding stout hearts, one +may know the Dane after his own heart, the real Dane, the world +over. Among his own Tordenskjold is still and always will be "the +Admiral of Norway's fleet." + + + + + +HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND + + +When in the fall of 1909 the statement was flashed around the world +that the North Pole had at last been reached, a name long unfamiliar +ran from mouth to mouth with that of the man who claimed to be its +discoverer. Dr. Cook was coming to Copenhagen, the daily despatches +read, on the Danish Government steamer _Hans Egede_. A shipload of +reporters kept an anxious lookout from the Skaw for the vessel so +suddenly become famous, but few who through their telescopes made +out the name at last upon the prow of the ship gave it another +thought in the eager welcome to the man it brought back from the +perils of the Farthest North. Yet the name of that vessel stood for +something of more real account to humanity than the attainment of a +goal that had been the mystery of the ages. No such welcome awaited +the explorer Hans Egede, who a hundred and seventy-two years before +sailed homeward over that very route, a broken, saddened man, and +all he brought was the ashes of his best-beloved that they might +rest in her native soil. No gold medal was struck for him; the +people did not greet him with loud acclaim. The King and his court +paid scant attention to him, and he was allowed to live his last +days in poverty. Yet a greater honor is his than ever fell to a +discoverer: the simple natives of Greenland long reckoned the time +from his coming among them. To them he was in their ice-bound home +what Father Damien was to the stricken lepers in the South seas, and +Dr. Grenfell is to the fishermen of Labrador. + +Hans Poulsen Egede, the apostle of Greenland, was a Norwegian of +Danish descent. He was born in the Northlands, in the parish of +Trondens, on January 31, 1686. His grandfather and his father +before him had been clergymen in Denmark, the former in the town of +West Egede, whence the name. Graduated in a single year from the +University of Copenhagen, "at which," his teachers bore witness, "no +one need wonder who knows the man," he became at twenty-two pastor +of a parish up in the Lofoden Islands, where the fabled malstrom +churns. Eleven years he preached to the poor fisherfolk on Sunday, +and on week-days helped his parishioners rebuild the old church. +When it was finished and the bishop came to consecrate it, he chided +Egede because the altar was too fine; it must have cost more than +they could afford. + +"It did not cost anything," was his reply. "I made it myself." + +No wonder his fame went far. When the church bell of Vaagen called, +boats carrying Sunday-clad fishermen were seen making for the island +from every point of the compass. Great crowds flocked to his church; +great enough to arouse the jealousy of neighboring preachers who +were not so popular, and they made it so unpleasant that his wife at +last tired of it. They little dreamed that they were industriously +paving the way for his greater work and for his undying fame. + +The sea that surges against that rockbound coast ever called its +people out in quest of adventure. Some who went nine hundred years +ago found a land in the far Northwest barred by great icebergs; but +once inside the barrier, they saw deep fjords like their own at +home, to which the mountains sloped down, covered with a wealth of +lovely flowers. On green meadows antlered deer were grazing, the +salmon leaped in brawling brooks, and birds called for their mates +in the barrens. Above it all towered snow-covered peaks. They saw +only the summer day; they did not know how brief it was, and how +long the winter night, and they called the country Greenland. They +built their homes there, and other settlers came. They were hardy +men, bred in a harsh climate, and they stayed. They built churches +and had their priests and bishops, for Norway was Christian by that +time. And they prospered after their fashion. They even paid Peter's +Pence to Rome. There is a record that their contribution, being in +kind, namely, walrus teeth, was sold in 1386 by the Pope's agent to +a merchant in Flanders for twelve livres, fourteen sous. They kept +up communication with their kin across the seas until the Black +Death swept through the Old World in the Fourteenth Century; Norway, +when it was gone, was like a vast tomb. Two-thirds of its people lay +dead. Those who were left had enough to do at home; and Greenland +was forgotten. + +The seasons passed, and the savages, with whom the colonists had +carried on a running feud, came out of the frozen North and +overwhelmed them. Dim traditions that were whispered among the +natives for centuries told of that last fight. It was the Ragnarok +of the Northmen. Not one was left to tell the tale. Long years +after, when fishing vessels landed on that desolate coast, they +found a strange and hostile people in possession. No one had ever +dared to settle there since. + +This last Egede knew, but little more. He believed that there were +still settlements on the inaccessible east coast of Greenland where +descendants of the old Northmen lived, cut off from all the world, +sunk into ignorance and godlessness,--men and women who had once +known the true light,--and his heart yearned to go to their rescue. +Waking and dreaming, he thought of nothing else. The lamp in his +quiet study shone out over the sea at night when his people were +long asleep. Their pastor was poring over old manuscripts and the +logs of whalers that had touched upon Greenland. From Bergen he +gathered the testimony of many sailors. None of them had ever seen +traces of, or heard of, the old Northmen. + +To his bishop went Egede with his burden. Ever it rang in his ears: +"God has chosen you to bring them back to the light." The bishop +listened and was interested. Yes, that was the land from which +seafarers in a former king's time had brought home golden sand. +There might be more. It couldn't be far from Cuba and Hispaniola, +those golden coasts. If one were to go equipped for trading, no +doubt a fine stroke of business might be done. Thus the Right +Reverend Bishop Krog of Trondhjem, and Egede went home, +disheartened. + +At home his friends scouted him, said he was going mad to think of +giving up his living on such a fool's chase. His wife implored him +to stay, and with a heavy heart Egede was about to abandon his +purpose when his jealous neighbor, whose parishioners had been going +to hear Egede preach, stirred up such trouble that his wife was glad +to go. She even urged him to, and he took her at her word. They +moved to Bergen, and from that port they sailed on May 3, 1721, on +the ship _Haabet_ (the Hope), with another and smaller vessel as +convoy, forty-six souls all told, bound for the unknown North. The +Danish King had made Egede missionary to the Greenlanders on a +salary of three hundred daler a year, the same amount which Egede +himself contributed of his scant store toward the equipment. The +bishop's plan had prevailed; the mission was to be carried by the +expected commerce, and upon that was to be built a permanent +colonization. + +Early in June they sighted land, but the way to it was barred by +impassable ice. A whole month they sailed to and fro, trying vainly +for a passage. At last they found an opening and slipped through, +only to find themselves shut in, with towering icebergs closing +around them. As they looked fearfully out over the rail, their +convoy signalled that she had struck, and the captain of _Haabet_ +cried out that all was lost. In the tumult of terror that succeeded, +Egede alone remained calm. Praying for succor where there seemed to +be none, he remembered the One Hundred and Seventh Psalm: "He +brought them out of darkness and the shadow of death, and brake +their bands in sunder." And the morning dawned clear, the ice was +moving and their prison widening. On July 3, _Haabet_ cleared the +last ice-reef, and the shore lay open before them. + +The Eskimos came out in their kayaks, and the boldest climbed aboard +the ship. In one boat sat an old man who refused the invitation. He +paddled about the vessel, mumbling darkly in a strange tongue. He +was an Angekok, one of the native medicine-men of whom presently +Egede was to know much more. As he stood upon the deck and looked at +these strangers for whose salvation he had risked all, his heart +fell. They were not the stalwart Northmen he had looked for, and +their jargon had no homelike sound. But a great wave of pity swept +over him, and the prayer that rose to his lips was for strength to +be their friend and their guide to the light. + +Not at once did the way open for the coveted friendship with the +Eskimos. While they thought the strangers came only to trade they +were hospitable enough, but when they saw them build, clearly intent +on staying, they made signs that they had better go. They pointed to +the sun that sank lower toward the horizon every day, and shivered +as if from extreme cold, and they showed their visitors the +icebergs and the snow, making them understand that it would cover +the house by and by. When it all availed nothing and the winter came +on, they retired into their huts and cut the acquaintance of the +white men. They were afraid that they had come to take revenge for +the harm done their people in the olden time. There was nothing for +it, then, but that Egede must go to them, and this he did. + +They seized their spears when they saw him coming, but he made signs +that he was their friend. When he had nothing else to give them, he +let them cut the buttons from his coat. Throughout the fifteen years +he spent in Greenland Egede never wore furs, as did the natives. The +black robe he thought more seemly for a clergyman, to his great +discomfort. He tells in his diary and in his letters that often when +he returned from his winter travels it could stand alone when he +took it off, being frozen stiff. After a while he got upon +neighborly terms with the Eskimos; but, if anything, the discomfort +was greater. They housed him at night in their huts, where the filth +and the stench were unendurable. They showed their special regard +by first licking off the piece of seal they put before him, and if +he rejected it they were hurt. Their housekeeping, of which he got +an inside view, was embarrassing in its simplicity. The dish-washing +was done by the dogs licking the kettles clean. Often, after a night +or two in a hut that held half a dozen families, he was compelled to +change his clothes to the skin in an open boat or out on the snow. +But the alternative was to sleep out in a cold that sometimes froze +his pillow to the bed and the tea-cup to the table even in his own +home. Above all, he must learn their language. + +It proved a difficult task, for the Eskimo tongue was both very +simple and very complex. In all the things pertaining to their daily +life it was exceedingly complex. For instance, to catch one kind of +fish was expressed by one word, to catch another kind in quite +different terms. They had one word for catching a young seal, +another for catching an old one. When it came to matters of moral +and spiritual import, the language was poor to desperation. Egede's +instruction began when he caught the word "kine"--what is it? And +from that time on he learned every day; but the pronunciation was as +varied as the workaday vocabulary, and it was an unending task. + +It proceeded with many interruptions from the Angekoks, who tried +more than once to bewitch him, but finally gave it up, convinced +that he was a great medicine-man himself, and therefore +invulnerable. But before that they tried to foment a regular mutiny, +the colony being by that time well under way, and Egede had to +arrest and punish the leaders. The natives naturally clung to them, +and when Egede had mastered their language and tried to make clear +that the Angekoks deceived them when they pretended to go to the +other world for advice, they demurred. "Did you ever see them go?" +he asked. "Well, have you seen this God of yours of whom you speak +so much?" was their reply. When Egede spoke of spiritual gifts, they +asked for good health and blubber: "Our Angekoks give us that." +Hell-fire was much in theological evidence in those days, but among +the Eskimos it was a failure as a deterrent. They listened to the +account of it eagerly and liked the prospect. When at length they +became convinced that Egede knew more than their Angekoks, they came +to him with the request that he would abolish winter. Very likely +they thought that one who had such knowledge of the hot place ought +to have influence enough with the keeper of it to obtain this favor. + +It was not an easy task, from any point of view, to which he had put +his hands. As that first winter wore away there were gloomy days and +nights, and they were not brightened when, with the return of the +sun, no ship arrived from Denmark. The Dutch traders came, and +opened their eyes wide when they found Egede and his household safe +and even on friendly terms with the Eskimos. Pelesse--the natives +called the missionary that, as the nearest they could come to the +Danish _prst_ (priest)--Pelesse was not there after blubber, they +told the Dutchmen, but to teach them about heaven and of "Him up +there," who had made them and wanted them home with Him again. So he +had not worked altogether in vain. But the brief summer passed, and +still no relief ship. The crew of _Haabet_ clamored to go home, and +Egede had at last to give a reluctant promise that if no ship came +in two weeks, he would break up. His wife alone refused to take a +hand in packing. The ship was coming, she insisted, and at the last +moment it did come. A boat arriving after dark brought the first +word of it. The people ashore heard voices speaking in Danish, and +flew to Egede, who had gone to bed, with the news. The ship brought +good cheer. The Government was well disposed. Trading and preaching +were to go on together, as planned. Joyfully then they built a +bigger and a better house, and called their colony Godthaab (Good +Hope). + +The work was now fairly under way. Of the energy and the hardships +it entailed, even we in our day that have heard so much of Arctic +exploration can have but a faint conception. Shut in on the coast of +eternal ice and silence,--silence, save when in summer the Arctic +rivers were alive, and crash after crash announced that the glaciers +coming down from the inland mountains were "casting their calves," +the great icebergs, upon the ocean,--the colonists counted the days +from the one when that year's ship was lost to sight till the +returning spring brought the next one, their only communication with +their far-off home. In summer the days were sometimes burning hot, +but the nights always bitterly cold. In winter, says Egede, hot +water spilled on the table froze as it ran, and the meat they cooked +was often frozen at the bone when set on the table. Summer and +winter Egede was on his travels between Sundays, sometimes in the +trader's boat, more often the only white man with one or two Eskimo +companions, seeking out the people. When night surprised him with no +native hut in sight, he pulled the boat on some desert shore and, +commending his soul to God, slept under it. Once he and his son +found an empty hut, and slept there in the darkness. Not until day +came again did they know that they had made their bed on the frozen +bodies of dead men who had once been the occupants of the house, and +had died they never knew how. Peril was everywhere. Again and again +his little craft was wrecked. Once the house blew down over their +heads in one of the dreadful winter storms that ravage those high +latitudes. Often he had to sit on the rail of his boat, and let his +numbed feet hang into the sea to restore feeling in them. On land he +sometimes waded waist-deep in snow, climbed mountains and slid down +into valleys, having but the haziest notion of where he would land. +At home his brave wife sat alone, praying for his safety and +listening to every sound that might herald his return. Tremble and +doubt they did, Egede owns, but they never flinched. Their work was +before them, and neither thought of turning back. + +The Eskimos soon came to know that Egede was their friend. When his +boat entered a fjord where they were fishing, and his rowers shouted +out that the good priest had come who had news of God, they dropped +their work and flocked out to meet him. Then he spoke to a floating +congregation, simply as if they were children, and, as with Him +whose message he bore, "the people heard him gladly." They took him +to their sick, and asked him to breathe upon them, which he did to +humor them, until he found out that it was an Angekok practice, +whereupon he refused. Once, after he had spoken of the raising of +Lazarus from the dead, they took him to a new-made grave and asked +him, too, to bring back their dead. They brought him a blind man to +be healed. Egede looked upon them in sorrowful pity. "I can do +nothing," he said; "but if he believes in Jesus, He has the power +and can do it." + +"I do believe," shouted the blind man: "let Him heal me." It +occurred to Egede, perhaps as a mere effort at cleanliness, to wash +his eyes in cognac, and he sent him away with words of comfort. He +did not see his patient again for thirteen years. Then he was in a +crowd of Eskimos who came to Godthaab. The man saw as well as Egede. + +"Do you remember?" he said, "you washed my eyes with sharp water, +and the Son of God in whom I believed, He made me to see." + +Children the Eskimos were in their idolatry, and children they +remained as Christians. By Egede's prayers they set great store. +"You ask for us," they told him. "God does not hear us; He does not +understand Eskimo." Of God they spoke as "Him up there." They +believed that the souls of the dead went up on the rainbow, and, +reaching the moon that night, rested there in the moon's house, on a +bench covered with the white skins of young polar bears. There they +danced and played games, and the northern lights were the young +people playing ball. Afterward they lived in houses on the shore of +a big lake overshadowed by a snow mountain. When the waters ran over +the edge of the lake, it rained on earth. When the "moon was dark," +it was down on earth catching seal for a living. Thunder was caused +by two old women shaking a dried sealskin between them; the +lightning came when they turned the white side out. The "Big Nail" +we have heard of as the Eskimos' Pole, was a high-pointed mountain +in the Farthest North on which the sky rested and turned around with +the sun, moon, and stars. Up there the stars were much bigger. +Orion's Belt was so near that you had to carry a whip to drive him +away. + +The women were slaves. An Eskimo might have as many wives as he saw +fit; they were his, and it was nobody's business. But adultery was +unknown. The seventh commandment in Egede's translation came to +read, "One wife alone you shall have and love." The birth of a girl +was greeted with wailing. When grown, she was often wooed by +violence. If she fled from her admirer, he cut her feet when he +overtook her, so that she could run no more. The old women were +denounced as witches who drove the seals away, and were murdered. An +Eskimo who was going on a reindeer hunt, and found his aged mother a +burden, took her away and laid her in an open grave. Returning on +the third day, he heard her groaning yet, and smothered her with a +big stone. He tried to justify himself to Egede by saying that "she +died hard, and it was a pity not to speed her." Yet they buried a +dog's head with a child, so that the dog, being clever, could run +ahead and guide the little one's steps to heaven. + +They could count no further than five; at a stretch they might get +to twenty, on their fingers and toes, but there they stopped. +However, they were not without resources. It was the day of long +Sunday services, and the Eskimos were a restless people. When the +sermon dragged, they would go up to Egede and make him measure on +their arms how much longer the talk was going to be. Then they +tramped back to their seats and sat listening with great attention, +all the time moving one hand down the arm, checking off the +preacher's progress. If they got to the finger-tips before he +stopped, they would shake their heads sourly and go back for a +remeasurement. No wonder Egede put his chief hope in the children, +whom he gathered about him in flocks. + +For all that, the natives loved him. There came a day that brought +this message from the North: "Say to the speaker to come to us to +live, for the other strangers who come here can only talk to us of +blubber, blubber, blubber, and we also would hear of the great +Creator." Egede went as far as he could, but was compelled by ice +and storms to turn back after weeks of incredible hardships. The +disappointment was the more severe to him because he had never quite +given up his hope of finding remnants of the ancient Norse +settlements. The fact that the old records spoke of a West Bygd +(settlement) and an East Bygd had misled many into believing that +the desolate east coast had once been colonized. Not until our own +day was this shown to be an error, when Danish explorers searched +that coast for a hundred miles and found no other trace of +civilization than a beer bottle left behind by the explorer +Nordenskjold. + +Egede's hope had been that Greenland might be once more colonized by +Christian people. When the Danish Government, after some years, sent +up a handful of soldiers, with a major who took the title of +governor, to give the settlement official character as a trading +station, they sent with them twenty unofficial "Christians," ten men +out of the penitentiary and as many lewd and drunken women from the +treadmill, who were married by lot before setting sail, to give the +thing a halfway decent look. They were good enough for the Eskimos, +they seem to have thought at Copenhagen. There followed a terrible +winter, during which mutiny and murder were threatened. "It is a +pity," writes the missionary, "that while we sleep secure among the +heathen savages, with so-called Christian people our lives are not +safe." As a matter of fact they were not, for the soldiers joined in +the mutiny against Egede as the cause of their having to live in +such a place, and had not sickness and death smitten the +malcontents, neither he nor the governor would have come safe +through the winter. On the Eskimos this view of the supposed fruits +of Christian teaching made its own impression. After seeing a woman +scourged on shipboard for misbehavior, they came innocently enough +to Egede and suggested that some of their best Angekoks be sent down +to Denmark to teach the people to be sober and decent. + +There came a breathing spell after ten years of labor in what had +often enough seemed to him the spiritual as well as physical +ice-barrens of the North, when Egede surveyed a prosperous mission, +with trade established, a hundred and fifty children christened and +schooled, and many of their elders asking to be baptized. In the +midst of his rejoicing the summer's ship brought word from Denmark +that the King was dead, and orders from his successor to abandon the +station. Egede might stay with provisions for one year, if there was +enough left over after fitting out the ship; but after that he would +receive no further help. + +When the Eskimos heard the news, they brought their little children +to the mission. "These will not let you go," they said; and he +stayed. His wife, whom hardship and privation and the lonely waiting +for her husband in the long winter nights had at last broken down, +refused to leave him, though she sadly needed the care of a +physician. A few of the sailors were persuaded to stay another year. +"So now," Egede wrote in his diary when, on July 31, 1731, he had +seen the ship sail away with all his hopes, "I am left alone with my +wife and three children, ten sailors and eight Eskimos, girls and +boys who have been with us from the start. God let me live to see +the blessed day that brings good news once more from home." His +prayer was heard. The next summer brought word that the mission was +to be continued, partly because Egede had strained every nerve to +send home much blubber and many skins. But it was as a glimpse of +the sun from behind dark clouds. His greatest trials trod hard upon +the good news. + +To rouse interest in the mission Egede had sent home young Eskimos +from time to time. Three of these died of smallpox in Denmark. The +fourth came home and brought the contagion, all unknown, to his +people. It was the summer fishing season, when the natives travel +much and far, and wherever he went they flocked about him to hear of +the "Great Lord's land," where the houses were so tall that one +could not shoot an arrow over them, and to ask a multitude of +questions: Was the King very big? Had he caught many whales? Was he +strong and a great Angekok? and much more of the same kind. In a +week the disease broke out among the children at the mission, and +soon word came from islands and fjords where the Eskimos were +fishing, of death and misery unspeakable. It was virgin soil for the +plague, and it was terribly virulent, striking down young and old in +every tent and hut. More than two thousand natives, one-fourth of +the whole population, died that summer. Of two hundred families near +the mission only thirty were left alive. A cry of terror and anguish +rose throughout the settlements. No one knew what to do. In vain did +Egede implore them to keep their sick apart. In fever delirium they +ran out in the ice-fields or threw themselves into the sea. A wild +panic seized the survivors, and they fled to the farthest tribes, +carrying the seeds of death with them wherever they went. Whole +villages perished, and their dead lay unburied. Utter desolation +settled like a pall over the unhappy land. + +Through it all a single ray of hope shone. The faith that Egede had +preached all those years, and the life he had lived with them, bore +their fruit. They had struck deeper than he thought. They crowded to +him, all that could, as their one friend. Dying mothers held their +suckling babes up to him and died content. In a deserted island camp +a half-grown girl was found alone with three little children. Their +father was dead. When he knew that for him and the baby there was no +help, he went to a cave and, covering himself and the child with +skins, lay down to die. His parting words to his daughter were, +"Before you have eaten the two seals and the fish I have laid away +for you, Pelesse will come, no doubt, and take you home. For he +loves you and will take care of you." At the mission every nook and +cranny was filled with the sick and the dying. Egede and his wife +nursed them day and night. Childlike, when death approached, they +tried to put on their best clothes, or even to have new ones made, +that they might please God by coming into His presence looking fine. +When Egede had closed their eyes, he carried the dead in his arms to +the vestibule, where in the morning the men who dug the graves found +them. At the sight of his suffering the scoffers were dumb. What his +preaching had not done to win them over, his sorrows did. They were +at last one. + +That dreadful year left Egede a broken man. In his dark moments he +reproached himself with having brought only misery to those he had +come to help and serve. One thorn which one would think he might +have been spared rankled deep in it all. Some missionaries of a +dissenting sect--Egede was Lutheran--had come with the smallpox ship +to set up an establishment of their own. At their head was a man +full of misdirected zeal and quite devoid of common-sense, who +engaged Egede in a wordy dispute about justification by faith and +condemned him and his work unsparingly. He had grave doubts whether +he was in truth a "converted man." It came to an end when they +themselves fell ill, and Egede and his wife had the last word, after +their own fashion. They nursed the warlike brethren through their +illness with loving ministrations and gave them back to life, let us +hope, wiser and better men. + +At Christmas, 1735, Egede's faithful wife, Gertrude, closed her +eyes. She had gone out with him from home and kin to a hard and +heathen land, and she had been his loyal helpmeet in all his trials. +Now it was all over. That winter scurvy laid him upon a bed of pain +and, lying there, his heart turned to the old home. His son had come +from Copenhagen to help, happily yet while his mother lived. To him +he would give over the work. In Denmark he could do more for it than +in Greenland, now he was alone. On July 29, 1736, he preached for +the last time to his people and baptized a little Eskimo to whom +they gave his name, Hans. The following week he sailed for home, +carrying, as all his earthly wealth, his beloved dead and his +motherless children. + +The Eskimos gathered on the shore and wept as the ship bore their +friend away. They never saw him again. He lived in Denmark eighteen +years, training young men to teach the Eskimos. They gave him the +title of bishop, but so little to live on that he was forced in his +last days to move from Copenhagen to a country town, to make both +ends meet. His grave was forgotten by the generation that came after +him. No one knows now where it is; but in ice-girt Greenland, where +the northern lights on wintry nights flash to the natives their +message from the souls that have gone home, his memory will live +when that of the North Pole seeker whom the world applauds is long +forgotten. Hans Egede was their great man, their hero. He was +more,--he was their friend. + + + + + +GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN + + +A great and wise woman had, after ages of war and bloodshed, united +the crowns of the three Scandinavian kingdoms upon one head. In the +strong city of Kalmar, around which the tide of battle had ever +raged hottest, the union was declared in the closing days of the +Thirteenth Century. Norwegian, Swede, and Dane were thenceforth to +stand together, to the end of time; so they resolved. It was all a +vain dream. Queen Margaret was not cold in her grave before the +kingdoms fell apart. Norway clung to Denmark, but Sweden went her +own way. In the wars of two generations the Danish kings won back +the Swedish crown and lost it, again and again, until in 1520 King +Christian II clutched it for the last time, at the head of a +conquering army. He celebrated his victory with a general amnesty, +and bade the Swedish nobles to a great feast, held at the capital in +November. + +Christian is one of the unsolved riddles of history. Ablest but +unhappiest of all his house, he was an instinctive democrat, +sincerely solicitous for the welfare of the plain people, but +incredibly cruel and faithless when the dark mood seized him. The +coronation feast ended with the wholesale butchery of the +unsuspecting nobles. Hundreds were beheaded in the public square; +for days it was filled with the slain. It is small comfort that the +wicked priest who egged the King on to the dreadful deed was himself +burned at the stake by the master he had betrayed. The Stockholm +Massacre drowned the Kalmar Union in its torrents of blood. +Retribution came swiftly. Above the peal of the Christmas bells rose +the clash and clangor of armed hosts pouring forth from the mountain +fastnesses to avenge the foul treachery. They were led by Gustav[1] +Eriksson Vasa, a young noble upon whose head Christian had set a +price. + +[Footnote 1: The older spelling of this name is followed here in +preference to the more modern Gustaf. Gustav Vasa himself wrote his +name so.] + +The Vasas were among the oldest and best of the great Swedish +families. It was said of them that they ever loved a friend, hated +a foe, and never forgot. Gustav was born in the castle of +Lindholmen, when the news that the world had grown suddenly big by +the discovery of lands beyond the unknown seas was still ringing +through Europe, on May 12, 1496. He was brought up in the home of +his kinsman, the Swedish patriot Sten Sture, and early showed the +fruits of his training. "See what I will do," he boasted in school +when he was thirteen, "I will go to Dalecarlia, rouse the people, +and give the Jutes (Danes) a black eye." Master Ivar, his Danish +teacher, gave him a whaling for that. White with anger, the boy +drove his dirk through the book, nailing it to the desk, and stalked +out of the room. Master Ivar's eyes followed the slim figure in the +scarlet cloak, and he sighed wearily "_nobilium nati nolunt aliquid +pati_,--the children of the great will put up with nothing." + +Hardly yet of age, he served under the banner of Sten Sture against +King Christian, and was one of six hostages sent to the King when he +asked an interview of the Swedish leader. But Christian stayed away +from the meeting and carried the hostages off to Denmark against his +plighted faith. There Gustav was held prisoner a year. All that +winter rumors of great armaments against Sweden filled the land. He +heard the young bloods from the court prate about bending the stiff +necks in the country across the Sound, and watched them throw dice +for Swedish castles and Swedish women,--part of the loot when his +fatherland should be laid under the yoke. Ready to burst with anger +and grief, he sat silent at their boasts. In the spring he escaped, +disguised as a cattle-herder, and made his way to Lbeck, where he +found refuge in the house of the wealthy merchant Kort Knig. + +They soon heard in Denmark where he was, and the King sent letters +demanding his surrender; but the burghers of the Hanse town hated +Christian with cause, and would not give him up. Then came Gustav's +warder who had gone bail for him in sixteen hundred gulden, and +pleaded for his prisoner. + +"I am not a prisoner," was Gustav's retort, "I am a hostage, for +whom the Danish king pledged his oath and faith. If any one can +prove that I was taken captive in a fight or for just cause, let him +stand forth. Ambushed was I, and betrayed." The Lbeck men thought +of the plots King Christian was forever hatching against them. Now, +if he succeeded in getting Sweden under his heel, their turn would +come next. Better, they said, send this Gustav home to his own +country, perchance he might keep the King busy there; by which they +showed their good sense. His ex-keeper was packed off back home, and +Gustav reached Sweden, sole passenger on a little coast-trader, on +May 31, 1520. A stone marks the spot where he landed, near Kalmar; +for then struck the hour of Sweden's freedom. + +But not yet for many weary months did the people hear its summons. +Swedish manhood was at its lowest ebb. Stockholm was held by the +widow of Sten Sture with a half-famished garrison. In Kalmar another +woman, Anna Bjelke, commanded, but her men murmured, and the fall of +the fortress was imminent. When Gustav Vasa, who had slipped in +unseen, exhorted them to stand fast, they would have mobbed him. He +left as he had come, the day before the surrender. Travelling by +night, he made his way inland, finding everywhere fear and distrust. +The King had promised that if they would obey him "they should +never want for herring and salt," so they told Gustav, and when he +tried to put heart into them and rouse their patriotism, they took +up bows and arrows and bade him be gone. Indeed, there were not +wanting those who shot at him. Like a hunted deer he fled from +hamlet to hamlet. Such friends as he had left advised him to throw +himself upon the King's mercy; told him of the amnesty proclaimed. +But Gustav's thoughts dwelt grimly among the Northern mountaineers +whom as a boy he had bragged he would set against the tyrant. +Insensibly he shaped his course toward their country. + +He was with his brother-in-law, Joachim Brahe, when the King's +message bidding him to the coronation came. Gustav begged him not to +go, but Brahe's wife and children were within Christian's reach, and +he did not dare stay away. When he left, the fugitive hid in his +ancestral home at Rfsns on lake Mlar. There one of Brahe's men +brought him news of the massacre in which his master and Gustav's +father had perished. His mother, grandmother, and sisters were +dragged away to perish in Danish dungeons. On Gustav's head the King +had set a price, and spies were even then on his track. + +Gustav's mind was made up. What was there now to wait for? Clad as a +peasant, he started for Dalecarlia with a single servant to keep him +company, but before he reached the mines the man stole all his money +and ran away. He had to work now to live, and hired out to Anders +Persson, the farmer of Rankhyttan. He had not been there many days +when one of the women saw an embroidered sleeve stick out under his +coat and told her master that the new hand was not what he pretended +to be. The farmer called him aside, and Gustav told him frankly who +he was. Anders Persson kept his secret, but advised him not to stay +long in any one place lest his enemies get wind of him. He slipped +away as soon as it was dark, nearly lost his life by breaking +through the ice, but reached Orns on the other side of Lake Runn, +half dead with cold and exposure. He knew that another Persson who +had been with him in the war lived there, and found his house. +Arendt Persson was a rascal. He received him kindly, but when he +slept harnessed his horse and went to Mns Nilsson, a neighbor, +with the news: the King's reward would make them both rich, if he +would help him seize the outlawed man. + +Mns Nilsson held with the Danes, but he was no traitor, and he +showed the fellow the door. He went next to the King's sheriff; he +would be bound to help. To be sure, he would claim the lion's share +of the blood-money, but something was better than nothing. The +sheriff came soon enough with a score of armed men. But Arendt +Persson had not reckoned with his honest wife. She guessed his +errand and let Gustav down from the window to the rear gate, where +she had a sleigh and team in waiting. When the sheriff's posse +surrounded the house, Gustav was well on his way to Master Jon, the +parson of Svrdsj, who was his friend. Tradition has it that while +Christian was King, the brave little woman never dared show her face +in the house again. + +Master Jon was all right, but news of the man-hunt had run through +the country, and when the parson's housekeeper one day saw him hold +the wash-bowl for his guest she wanted to know why he was so polite +to a common clod. Master Jon told her that it was none of her +business, but that night he piloted his friend across the lake to +Isala, where Sven Elfsson lived, a gamekeeper who knew the country +and could be trusted. The good parson was hardly out of sight on his +way back when the sheriff's men came looking for Gustav. It did not +occur to them that the yokel who stood warming himself by the stove +might be the man they were after. But the gamekeeper's wife was +quick to see his peril. She was baking bread and had just put the +loaves into the oven with a long-handled spade. "Here, you lummox!" +she cried, and whacked him soundly over the back with it, "what are +ye standing there gaping at? Did ye never see folks afore? Get back +to your work in the barn." And Gustav, taking the hint, slunk out of +the room. + +For three days after that he lay hidden under a fallen tree in the +snow and bitter cold; but even there he was not safe, and the +gamekeeper took him deeper into the forest, where a big spruce grew +on a hill in the middle of a frozen swamp. There no one would seek +him till he could make a shift to get him out of the country. The +hill is still there; the people call it the King's Hill, and not +after King Christian, either. But in those long nights when Gustav +Vasa listened to the hungry wolves howling in the woods and nosing +about his retreat, it was hardly kingly conceits his mind brooded +over. His father and kinsmen were murdered; his mother and sister in +the pitiless grasp of the tyrant who was hunting him to his death; +he, the last of his race, alone and forsaken by his own. Bitter +sorrow filled his soul at the plight of his country that had fallen +so low. But the hope of the young years came to the rescue: all was +not lost yet. And in the morning came Sven, the gamekeeper, with a +load of straw, at the bottom of which he hid him. So no one would be +the wiser. + +It was well he did it, for half-way to the next town some prowling +soldiers overtook them, and just to make sure that there was nothing +in the straw, prodded the load with their spears. Nothing stirred, +and they went on their way. But a spear had gashed Gustav's leg, and +presently blood began to drip in the snow. Sven had his wits about +him. He got down, and cut the fetlock of one of the beasts with his +jack-knife so that it bled and no one need ask questions. When they +got to Marns, Gustav was weak from the loss of blood, but a +friendly surgeon was found to bind up his wounds. + +Farther and farther north he fled, keeping to the deep woods in the +day, until he reached Rttwik. Feeling safer there, he spoke to the +people coming from church one Sunday and implored them to shake off +the Danish yoke. But they only shook their heads. He was a stranger +among them, and they would talk it over with their neighbors. Not +yet were his wanderings over. To Mora he went next, where Parson +Jakob hid him in a lonely farm-house. Evil chance led the spies +direct to his hiding-place, and once more it was the housewife whose +quick wit saved him. Dame Margit was brewing the Yule beer when she +saw them coming. In a trice she had Gustav in the cellar and rolled +the brewing vat over the trap-door. Then they might search as they +saw fit; there was nothing there. The first blood was spilled for +Gustav Vasa while he was at Mora, and it was a Dane who did it. He +was the kind that liked to see fair play; when an under-sheriff came +looking for the hunted man there, the Dane waylaid and killed him. + +Christmas morning, when Master Jakob had preached his sermon in the +church, Gustav spoke to the congregation out in the snow-covered +churchyard. A gravestone was his pulpit. Eloquent always, his +sorrows and wrongs and the memory of the hard months lent wings to +his words. His speech lives yet in Dalecarlia, for now he was among +its mountains. + +"It is good to see this great meeting," he said, "but when I think +of our fatherland I am filled with grief. At what peril I am here +with you, you know who see me hounded as a wild beast day by day, +hour by hour. But our beloved country is more to me than life. How +long must we be thralls, we who were born to freedom? Those of you +who are old remember what persecution Swedish men and women have +suffered from the Danish kings. The young have heard the story of it +and have learned from they were little children to hate and resist +such rule. These tyrants have laid waste our land and sucked its +marrow, until nothing remains for us but empty houses and lean +fields. Our very lives are not safe." He called upon them to rise +and drive the invaders out. If they wanted a leader, he was ready. + +His words stirred the mountaineers deeply. Cries of anger were +heard in the crowd; it was not the first time they had taken up arms +in the cause of freedom. But when they talked it over, the older +heads prevailed; there had not been time enough to hear both sides. +They told him that they would not desert the King; he must expect +nothing of them. + +Broken-hearted and desperate, Gustav Vasa turned toward the +Norwegian frontier. He would leave the country for which there was +no hope. While the table in the poorest home groaned with Yuletide +cheer, Sweden's coming king hid under an old bridge, outcast and +starving, till it was safe to leave. Then he took up his weary +journey alone. The winter cold had grown harder as the days grew +shorter. Famished wolves dogged his steps, but he outran them on his +snow-shoes. By night he slept in some wayside shelter, such as they +build for travellers in that desolate country, or in the brush. The +snow grew deeper, and the landscape wilder, as he went. For days he +had gone without food, when he saw the sun set behind the lofty +range that was to bar him out of home and hope forever. Even there +was no abiding place for him. What thoughts of his vanished dream, +perchance of the distant lands across the seas where the tyrant's +hand could not reach him, were in his mind, who knows, as he bent +his strength to the last and hardest stage of his journey? He was +almost there, when he heard shouts behind him and turned to sell his +life dear. Two men on skis were calling to him. They were unarmed, +and he waited to let them come up. + +Their story was soon told. They had come to call him back. After he +left, an old soldier whom they knew in Mora had come from the south +and told them worse things than even Gustav knew. It was all true +about the Stockholm murder; worse, the King was having gallows set +up in every county to hang all those on who said him nay; a heavy +tax was laid upon the peasants, and whoever did not pay was to have +a hand or foot cut off; they could still follow the plow. And now +they had sent away the one man who could lead against the Danes, +with the forests full of outlawed men who would have enlisted under +him as soon as ever the cry was raised! While the men of Dalecarlia +were debating the news among themselves orders came from the +bailiff at Westers that the tax was to be paid forthwith. That +night runners were sent on the trail of Gustav to tell him to come +back; they were ready. + +When he came, it was as if a mighty storm swept through the +mountains. The people rose in a body. Every day whole parishes threw +off their allegiance to King Christian. Sunday after Sunday Gustav +spoke to the people at their meeting-houses, and they raised their +spears and swore to follow him to death. Two months after the murder +in Stockholm an army of thousands that swelled like an avalanche was +marching south, and province after province joined in the rebellion. +King Christian's host met them at Brunbck in April. One of its +leaders asked the country folk what kind of men the Dalecarlians +were, and when he was told that they drank water and ate bread made +of bark, he cried out, "Such a people the devil himself couldn't +whip; let us get out." But his advice was not taken and the Danish +army was wiped out. Gustav halted long enough to drill his men and +give them time to temper their arrows and spears, then he fell upon +Westers and beat the Danes there. The peasant mob scattered too +soon to loot the town, and the King's men came back with a sudden +rush. Only Gustav's valor and presence of mind saved the day that +had been won once from being lost again. + +When it was seen that the Danes were not invincible, the whole +country rose, took the scattered castles, and put their defenders to +the sword. Gustav bore the rising on his shoulders from first to +last. He was everywhere, ordering and leading. His fiery eloquence +won over the timorous; his irresistible advance swept every obstacle +aside. In May he took Upsala; by midsummer he was besieging +Stockholm itself. Most of the other cities were in his hands. The +Hanse towns had found out what this Gustav could do at home. They +sang his praise, but as for backing him with their purse, that was +another matter. They refused to lend Gustav two siege-guns when he +lay before Stockholm, though he offered to pledge a castle for each. +He had no money. Happily his enemy, Christian, was even worse off. +Neither pledges nor promises could get him the money he needed. His +chief men were fighting among themselves and made peace only to turn +upon him. Within a year after the Swedish people had chosen Gustav +Vasa to be Regent at the Diet of Vadstena, Christian went into exile +and, when he tried to get his kingdom back, into prison, where he +languished the rest of his life. He fully deserved his fate. Yet he +meant well and had done some good things in his day. Had he been +able to rule himself, he might have ruled others with better +success. Schoolboys remember with gratitude that he forbade teachers +to "spank their pupils overmuch and without judgment, as was their +wont." + +At the Diet of Vadstena the people had offered Gustav the crown, but +he put it from him. Scarce eight months had passed since he hid +under the bridge, hunted and starving. When Stockholm had fallen +after a siege of two years and all Sweden was free, the people met +(1523) and made him King, whether or no. He still objected, but gave +in at last and was crowned. + +Popular favor is fickle. Hard times came that were not made easier +by Gustav's determination to fill the royal coffers, and the very +Dalecarlians who had put him in the high seat rose against him and +served notice that if things did not mend they would have none of +him. Gustav made sure that they had no backing elsewhere, then went +up and persuaded them to be good by cutting off the heads of their +leaders, who both happened to be priests: one was even a bishop. He +had been taught in a school that always found an axe ready to hand. +Let those who lament the savagery of modern warfare consider what +happened then to a Danish fleet that tried to bring relief to +hard-pressed Stockholm. It was beaten in a fight in which six +hundred men were taken prisoners. They were all, say the accounts, +"tied hand and foot and flung overboard amid the beating of drums +and blowing of trumpets to drown their cries." The clergy fared +little better than the laymen in that age, but then it was their own +fault. In plotting and scrapping they were abreast of the worst and +took the consequences. + +They were the days of the Reformation, and Gustav would not have +been human had he failed to see a way out of his money troubles by +confiscating church property. He had pawned the country's trade to +the merchants of Lbeck and there was nothing else left. Naturally +the church opposed him. The King took the bull by the horns. He +called a meeting and told the people that he was sick of it all. He +had encouraged the Reformation for their good; now, if they did not +stand by him, they might choose between him and his enemies. The +oldest priest arose at that and said that the church's property was +sacred. The King asked if the rest of them thought the same way. +Only one voice was raised, and to say yes. + +"Then," said Gustav, "I don't want to be your King any more. If it +does not rain, you blame me; if the sun does not shine, you do the +same. It is always so. All of you want to be masters. After all my +trouble and labor for you, you would as lief see my head split with +an axe, though none of you dare lay hold of the handle. Give me back +what I have spent in your service and I will go away and never come +back." And go he did, to his castle, with half a dozen of his +nearest friends. + +They sat and looked at one another when he was gone, and then +priests and nobles fell to arguing among themselves, all talking at +once. The plain people, the burghers and the peasants, listened +awhile, but when they got no farther, let them know that if they +couldn't settle it, they, the people, would, and in a way that would +give them little joy. The upshot of it all was that messengers were +sent to bring the King back. He made them go three times, and when +he came at last, it was as absolute master. In the ordering of the +kingdom that was made there, he became the head of the church as +well as of the state. Gustav's pen was as sharp as his tongue. When +Hans Brask, the oldest prelate in the land, who had stood stoutly by +the old rgime, left the country and refused to come back, he wrote +to him: "As long as you might milk and shear your sheep, you staid +by them. When God spake and said you were to feed them, not to shear +and slaughter them, you ran away. Every honest man can judge if you +have done well." Hard words to a good old man; but there were plenty +of others who deserved them. That was the end of the hierarchy in +Sweden. + +But not of the unruly peasants who had tasted the joys of +king-making. How kindly they took to the Reformation at the outset +one can judge from the demand of some of them that the King should +"burn or otherwise kill such as ate meat on Friday." They rose +again and again, and would listen only to the argument of force. +When the Lbeckers pressed hard for the payment of old debts, and +the treasury was empty as usual, King Gustav hit upon a new kind of +revenue. He demanded of every church in the land that it give up its +biggest bell to the funds. It was the last straw. The Dalecarlians +rose against what they deemed sacrilege, under the leadership of +Mns Nilsson and Anders Persson of Rankhyttan, the very men who had +befriended Gustav in his need, and the insurrection spread. The "War +of the Bells" was settled with the sword, and the peasants gave in. +But Gustav came of a stock that "never forgot." Two years later, +when his hands were free at home, he suddenly invaded Dalecarlia +with a powerful army, determined to "pull those weeds up by the +roots." He summoned the peasants to Thing, made a ring around them +of armed men, and gave them their choice: + +"Submit now for good and all," he said, "or I will spoil the land so +that cock shall not crow nor hound bark in it again forever!" + +The frightened peasants fell on their knees and begged for mercy. +He made them give up their leaders, including his former friends, +and they were all put to the sword. After that there was peace in +Dalecarlia. + +Gustav Vasa's long reign ended in 1560. Like his enemy, Christian +II, he was a strange mixture of contradictions. He was brave in +battle, wise in council, pious, if not a saint, clean, and merciful +when mercy fitted into his plans. His enemies called him a greedy, +suspicious despot. Greedy he was. More than eleven thousand farms +were confiscated by the crown during his reign, and he left four +thousand farms and a great fortune to his children as his personal +share. But historians have called him "the great housekeeper" who +found waste and loss and left an ordered household. He gave all for +Sweden, and all he had was at her call. It was share and share +alike, in his view. Despotic he could be, too. _L'tat c'est moi_ +might have been said by him. But he did not exploit the state; he +built it. He fashioned Sweden out of a bunch of quarrelsome +provincial governments into a hereditary monarchy, as the best +way--indeed, the only way then--of giving it strength and +stability. He was suspicious because everybody had betrayed him, or +had tried to. With all that, his steady purpose was to raise and +enlighten his people and make them keep the peace, if he had to +adopt the Irishman's plan of keeping it himself with an axe. He was +the father of a line of great warriors. Gustav Adolf was his +grandson. + +Bent under the burden of years, he bade his people good-by at the +Diet of Stockholm, a few weeks before his death. His old eloquence +rings unimpaired in the farewell. He thanked God, who had chosen him +as His tool to set Sweden free from thralldom. Almost might he liken +himself to King David, whom God from a shepherd had made the leader +of his people. No such hope was in his heart when, forty years +before, he hid in the woods from a bloodthirsty enemy. For what he +had done wrong as king, he asked the people's pardon; it was not +done on purpose. He knew well that many thought him a hard ruler, +but the time would come when they would gladly dig him up from his +grave if they only could. And with that he went out, bowing deeply +to the Diet, the tears streaming down his face. + +They saw him no more; but on his tomb the Swedish people, forgetting +all else, have written that he was the "Father of his Country." + + + + +ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH + + +A welcome change awaits the traveller who, having shaken off the +chill of the German Dreadnaughts at Kiel, crosses the Baltic to the +Danish Islands--a change from the dread portents of war to smiling +peace. There can be nothing more pastoral and restful than the +Seeland landscape as framed in a car window; yet he misses its chief +charm whom its folk-lore escapes--the countless legends that cling +to field and forest from days long gone. The guide-book gives scarce +a hint of them; but turn from its page and they meet you at every +step, hail you from every homestead, every copse. Nor is their story +always of peace. Here was Knud Lavard slain by his envious kinsman +for the crown, and a miraculous spring gushed forth where he fell. +Of the church they built for the pilgrims who sought it from afar +they will show you the site, but the spring dried up with the simple +old faith. Yonder, under the roof of Ringsted church, lie Denmark's +greatest dead. Not half an hour from the ferry landing at Korsr, +your train labors past a hill crowned by a venerable cross, Holy +Anders' Hill. So saintly was that masterful priest that he was wont, +when he prayed, to hang his hat and gloves on a sunbeam as on a +hook. And woe to the land if his cross be disturbed, for then, the +peasant will tell you, the cattle die of plague and the crops fail. +A little further on, just beyond Sor, a village church rears twin +towers above the wheat-field where the skylark soars and sings to +its nesting mate. For seven hundred years the story of that church +and its builder has been told at Danish firesides, and the time will +never come when it is forgotten. + +Fjenneslev is the name of the village, and Asker Ryg[1] ruled there +in the Twelfth Century, when the king summoned his men to the war. +Bidding good-by to his wife, Sir Asker tells her to build a new +church while he is away, for the old, "with wall of clay, +straw-thatched and grim," is in ruins. And let it be worthy of the +Master: + + "The roof let make of tiling red; + Of stone thou build the wall;" + +and then he whispers in her ear: + + "Hear thou, my Lady Inge, + Of women thou art the flower; + An' thou bearest to me a son so bold, + Set on the church a tower." + +[Footnote 1: Pronounce Reeg.] + +Should the child be a girl, he tells her to build only a spire, for +"modesty beseemeth a woman." Well for Sir Asker that he did not live +in our day of clamoring suffragists. He would have "views" without +doubt. But no such things troubled him while he battled in foreign +lands all summer. It was autumn when he returned and saw from afar +the swell behind which lay Fjenneslev and home. Impatiently he +spurred his horse to the brow of the hill, for no news had come of +Lady Inge those many months. The bard tells us what he saw there: + + "It was the good Sir Asker Ryg; + Right merrily laughed he, + When from that green and swelling hill + Two towers did he see." + +Two sons lay at the Lady Inge's breast, and all was well. + + "The first one of the brothers two + They called him Esbern Snare.[2] + He grew as strong as a savage bear + And fleeter than any hare. + + "The second him called they Absalon, + A bishop he at home. + He used his trusty Danish sword + As the Pope his staff at Rome." + +[Footnote 2: Pronounce Snar, with a as in are. In the Danish hare +rhymes with snare, so pronounced.] + +Absalon and Esbern were not twins, as tradition has it. They were +better than that. They became the great heroes of their day, and the +years have not dimmed their renown. And Absalon reached far beyond +the boundaries of little Denmark to every people that speaks the +English tongue. For it was he who, as archbishop of the North, +"strictly and earnestly" charged his friend and clerk Saxo to gather +the Danish chronicles while yet it was time, because, says Saxo, in +the preface of his monumental work, "he could no longer abide that +his fatherland, which he always honored and magnified with especial +zeal, should be without a record of the great deeds of the fathers." +And from the record Saxo wrote we have our Hamlet. + +It was when they had grown great and famous that Sir Asker and his +wife built the church in thanksgiving for their boys, not when they +were born, and the way that came to light was good and wholesome. +They were about to rebuild the church, on which there had been no +towers at all since they crumbled in the middle ages, and had +decided to put on only one; for the sour critics, who are never +content in writing a people's history unless they can divest it of +all its flesh and make it sit in its bones, as it were, sneered at +the tradition and called it an old woman's tale. But they did not +shout quite so loud when, in peeling off the whitewash of the +Reformation, the mason's hammer brought forth mural paintings that +grew and grew until there stood the whole story to read on the wall, +with Sir Asker himself and the Lady Inge, clad in garments of the +Twelfth Century, bringing to the Virgin the church with the twin +towers. So the folk-lore was not so far out after all, and the +church was rebuilt with two towers, as it should be. + +Under its eaves, whether of straw or tile, the two boys played their +childish games, and before long there came to join in them another +of their own age, young Valdemar, whose father, the very Knud Lavard +mentioned above, had been foully murdered a while before. It was a +time, says Saxo, in which "he must be of stout heart and strong head +who dared aspire to Denmark's crown. For in less than a hundred +years more than sixteen of her kings and their kin were either slain +without cause by their own subjects, or otherwise met a sudden +death." Sir Asker and the murdered Knud had been foster brothers, +and throughout the bloody years that followed, he and his brothers, +sons of the powerful Skjalm Hvide,[3] espoused his cause in good and +evil days, while they saw to it that no harm came to the young +prince under their roof. + +[Footnote 3: Pronounced Veeth.] + +The three boys, as they grew up, were bred to the stern duties of +fighting men, as was the custom of their class. Absalon, indeed, was +destined for the church; but in a country so recently won from the +old war gods, it was the church militant yet, and he wielded spear +and sword with the best of them. When, at eighteen, they sent him to +France to be taught, he did not for his theological studies neglect +the instruction of his boyhood. There he became the disciple and +friend of the Abbot Bernard of Clairvaux, more powerful then than +prince or Pope, and when the abbot preached the second great +crusade, promising eternal salvation to those who took up arms +against the unbelievers, whether to wrest from them the Holy +Sepulchre or to plant the cross among the wild heathen on the +Baltic, his heart burned hot within him. It was a long way to the +Holy Land, but with the Baltic robbers his people had a grievous +score to settle. Their yells had sounded in his boyish ears as they +ravished the shores of his fatherland, penetrating with murder and +pillage almost to his peaceful home. And so, while he lent a +diligent ear to the teachings of the church, earning the name of the +"most learned clerk" in the cloister of Ste. Genevive in Paris, +daily he laid the breviary aside and took up sword and lance, +learning the arts of modern warfare with the graces of chivalry. In +the old way of fighting, man to man, the men of the North had been +the equals of any, if not their betters; but against the new methods +of warfare their prowess availed little. Absalon, the monk, kept his +body strong while soul and mind matured. When nothing more +adventurous befell, he chopped down trees for the cloister hearths. +But oftener the clash of arms echoed in the quiet halls, or the +peaceful brethren crossed themselves as they watched him break an +unruly horse in the cloister fen. Saxo tells us that he swam easily +in full armor, and in more than one campaign in later years saved +drowning comrades who were not so well taught. + +The while he watched rising all about some of the finest churches in +Christendom. It was the era of cathedral building in Europe. The +Romanesque style of architecture had reached its highest development +in the very France where he spent his young manhood's years, and the +Gothic, with its stamp of massive strength, was beginning to +displace its gentler curve. Ten years of such an environment, in a +land teeming with historic traditions, rounded out the man who set +his face toward home, bent on redeeming his people from the unjust +reproach of being mere "barbarians of the North." + +It was a stricken Denmark to which he came back. Three claimants +were fighting for the crown. The land was laid waste by sea-rovers, +who saw their chance to raid defenceless homes while the men able to +bear arms were following the rival kings. The people had lost hope. +Just when Absalon returned, peace was made between the claimants. +Knud, Svend, and Valdemar, his foster brother of old, divided up the +country between them. They swore a dear oath to keep the pact, but +for all that "the three kingdoms did not last three days." The +treacherous Svend waited only for a chance to murder both his +rivals, and it came quickly, when he and Valdemar were the guests of +Knud at Roskilde. They had eaten and drunk together and were +gathered in the "Storstue," the big room of the house, when Knud saw +Svend whispering aside with his men. With a sudden foreboding of +evil, he threw his arms about Valdemar's shoulders and kissed him. +The young King, who was playing chess with one of his men, looked up +in surprise and asked what it meant. Just then Svend left the hall, +and his henchmen fell upon the two with drawn swords. Knud was cut +down at once, his head cleft in twain. Valdemar upset the table with +the candles and, wrapping his cloak about his arm to ward off the +blows that showered upon him, knocked his assailants right and left +and escaped, badly wounded. + +Absalon came into the room as Knud fell and, thinking it was +Valdemar, caught him in his arms and took his wounded head in his +lap. Sitting there in utter sorrow and despair, heedless of the +tumult that raged in the darkness around him, he felt the King's +garment and knew that the man who was breathing his last in his arms +was not his friend. He laid the lifeless body down gently and left +the hall. The murderers barred his way, but he brushed their swords +and spears aside and strode forth unharmed. Valdemar had found a +horse and made for Fjenneslev, twenty miles away, with all speed, +and there Absalon met him and his brother Esbern in the morning. + +King Svend sought him high and low to finish his dastardly work, +while on Thing he wailed loudly before the people that Valdemar and +Knud had tried to kill him, showing in proof of it his cloak, which +he had rent with his own sword. But Valdemar's friends were wide +awake. Esbern flew through the island on his fleet horse in +Valdemar's clothes, leading his pursuers a merry dance, and when +the young King's wound was healed, he found him a boat and ferried +him across to the mainland, where the people flocked to his +standard. When Svend would have followed, it was the Lady Inge who +scuttled his ship by night and gave her foster son the start he +needed. There followed a short and sharp struggle that ended on +Grathe Heath with the utter rout of Svend's forces. He himself was +killed, and Valdemar at last was King of all Denmark. + +From that time the three friends were inseparable as in the old days +when they played about the fields of Fjenneslev. Absalon was the +keeper of the King's conscience who was not afraid to tell him the +truth when he needed to hear it. And where they were Esbern was +found, never wavering in his loyalty to either. Within a year +Absalon was made bishop of Roskilde, the chief See of Denmark. Saxo +innocently discovers to us King Valdemar's little ruse to have his +friend chosen. He was yet a very young man, scarce turned thirty, +and had not been considered at all for the vacancy. There were three +candidates, all of powerful families, and, according to +ecclesiastical law, the brethren of the chapter were the electors. +The King went to their meeting and addressed them in person. Nothing +was farther from him, he said, than to wish to interfere with their +proper rights. Each must do as his conscience dictated, unhindered. +And with that he laid on the table _four_ books with blank leaves +and bade them write down their names in them, each for his own +choice, to get the matter right on the record. The brethren thanked +him kindly and all voted "nicely together" for Absalon. So three of +the books were wasted. But presently Saxo found good use for them. + +For now had come the bishop's chance of putting in practice the +great abbot's precepts. "Pray and fight" was the motto he had +written into the Knights Templars' rule, and Absalon had made it his +own. Of what use was it to build up the church at home, when any day +might see it raided by its enemies who were always watching their +chance outside? The Danish waters swarmed with pirates, the very +pagans against whom Abbot Bernard had preached his crusade. Of them +all the Wends were the worst, as they were the most powerful of the +Slav tribes that still resisted the efforts of their neighbors, the +Christian Germans, to dislodge them from their old home on the +Baltic. They lived in the island of Rgen, fairly in sight of the +Danish shores. Every favoring wind blew them across the sea in +shoals to burn and ravage. The Danes, once the terror of the seas, +had given over roving when they accepted the White Christ in +exchange for Thor and his hammer, and now, when they would be at +peace, they were in turn beset by this relentless enemy, who burned +their homes and their crops and dragged the peaceful husbandman away +to make him a thrall or offer him up as a sacrifice to heathen +idols. More than a third of all Denmark lay waste under their +ferocious assault. Here was the blow to be struck if the country was +to have peace and the church prosperity. + +The chance to strike came speedily. Absalon had been bishop only a +few months when, on the evening before Palm Sunday, word was brought +that the enemy had landed, twenty-four ship-crews strong, and were +burning and murdering as usual. Absalon marshalled his eighteen +house-carles and such of the country-folk as he could, and fell +upon the Wends, routing them utterly. A bare handful escaped, the +rest were killed, while the bishop lost but a single man. He said +mass next morning, red-handed it is true, but one may well believe +that for all that his Easter message reached hearts filled with a +new, glad hope for their homes and for the country. That was a +bishop they could understand. So the first blow Absalon struck for +his people was at home. But he did not long wait for the enemy to +come to him. Half his long and stirring life he lived on the seas, +seeking them there. Saxo mentions, in speaking of his return from +one of his cruises, that he had then been nine months on shipboard. +And in a way he was shepherding his flock there, if it was with a +scourge; for, many years before, a Danish king had punished the +Wends in their own home and laid their lands under the See of +Roskilde, though little good it did them or any one else then. But +when Absalon had got his grip, there were days when he baptized as +many as a thousand of them into the true faith. + +He was not altogether alone in the stand he took. Here and there, +from very necessity, the people had organized to resist the +invaders, but as no one could tell where they would strike next, +they were not often successful, and fear and discouragement sat +heavy on the land. From his own city of Roskilde a little fleet of +swift sailers under the bold Wedeman had for years waged relentless +war upon the freebooters and had taken four times the number of +their own ships. Their crews were organized into a brotherhood with +vows like an order of fighting monks. Before setting out on a cruise +they were shriven and absolved. Their vows bound them to unceasing +vigilance, to live on the plainest of fare, to sleep on their arms, +ready for instant attack, and to the rescue of Christians, wherever +they were found in captivity. The Roskilde guild became the strong +core of the King's armaments in his score of campaigns against the +Wends. + +Perhaps it was not strange that Valdemar should be of two minds +about venturing to attack so formidable an enemy in his own house. +The nation was cowed and slow to move. In fact, from the first +expedition, that started with 250 vessels, only seven returned with +the standard, keeping up a running fight all the way across the +Baltic with pursuing Wends. The rest had basely deserted. On the +way over, the King, listening to their doubts and fears, turned back +himself once, but Absalon, who always led in the attack and was the +last on the homeward run, overtook him and gave him the talking to +be deserved. Saxo, who was very likely there and heard, for there is +little doubt that he accompanied his master on many of the campaigns +he so vividly describes, gives us a verbatim report of the lecture: + +"What wonder," said the bishop, "if the words stick in our throats +and are nigh to stifling us, when such grievous dole is ours! Grieve +we must, indeed, to find in you such a turncoat that naught but +dishonor can come of it. You follow where you should lead, and those +you should rule over, you make your peers. There is nothing to stop +us but our own craven souls, hunt as we may for excuses. Is it with +such laurel you would bind your crown? with such high deed you would +consecrate your reign?" + +The King was hard hit, and showed it, but he walked away without a +word. In the night a furious storm swept the sea and kept the fleet +in shelter four whole days, during which Valdemar's anger had time +to cool. He owned then that Absalon was right, and the friends shook +hands. The King gave order to make sail as soon as the gale abated. +If there was still a small doubt in Absalon's mind as he turned, on +taking leave, and asked, "What now, if we must turn back once more?" +Valdemar set it at rest: + +"Then you write me from Wendland," he laughed, "and tell me how +things are there." + +If little glory or gain came to the Danes from this first +expedition, at least they landed in the enemy's country and made +reprisal for past tort. The spirit of the people rose and shamed +them for their cowardice. When the King's summons went round again, +as it did speedily, there were few laggards. Attacked at home, the +Wends lost much of the terror they had inspired. Before many moons, +the chronicle records, the Danes cut their spear-shafts short, that +they might the more handily get at the foe. Scarce a year passed +that did not see one or more of these crusades. Absalon preached +them all, and his ship was ever first in landing. In battle he and +the King fought shoulder to shoulder. In the spring of 1169, he had +at last his wish: the heathen idols were destroyed and their temples +burned. + +The holy city of the Wends, Arcona, stood on a steep cliff, +inaccessible save from the west, where a wall a hundred feet high +defended it. While the sacred banner Stanitza waved over it the +Danes might burn and kill, but the power of Svantevit was unbroken. +Svantevit was the god of gods in whose presence his own priests +dared not so much as breathe. When they had to, they must go to the +door and breathe in the open, a good enough plan if Saxo's disgust +at the filth of the Wendish homes was justified. Svantevit was a +horrid monster with four heads, and girt about with a huge sword. Up +till then the Christian arms had always been stayed at his door, but +this time the King laid siege to Arcona, determined to make an end +of him. Some of the youngsters in his army, making a mock assault +upon the strong walls, discovered an accidental hollow under the +great tower over which the Stanitza flew and, seizing upon a load of +straw that was handy, stuffed it in and set it on fire. It was done +in a frolic, but when the tower caught fire and was burned and the +holy standard fell, Absalon was quick to see his advantage, and got +the King to order a general assault. The besieged Wends, having no +water, tried to put out the fire with milk, but, says the chronicle, +"it only fed the flames." They fought desperately till, between fire +and foe, they were seized with panic and, calling loudly upon +Absalon in their extremity, offered to give up their city. The army +clamored for the revenge that was at last within their grasp, and +the King hesitated; but Absalon met the uproar firmly, reminding +them that they had crossed the seas to convert the heathen, not to +sack their towns. + +The city was allowed to surrender and the people were spared, but +Svantevit and his temple were destroyed. A great crowd of his +followers had gathered to see him crush his enemies at the last, and +Absalon cautioned the men who cut the idol down to be careful that +he did not fall on them and so seem to justify their hopes. "He fell +with so great a noise that it was a wonder," says Saxo, navely; +"and in the same moment the fiend ran out of the temple in a black +shape with such speed that no eye could follow him or see where he +went." Svantevit was dragged out of the town and chopped into bits. +That night he fed the fires of the camp. So fickle is popular favor +that when the crowd saw that nothing happened, they spurned the god +loudly before whom they had grovelled in the dust till then. + +When they heard of Arcona's fall in the royal city of Karents, they +hastened with offers of surrender, and Absalon went there with a +single ship's crew to take possession. They were met by 6000 armed +Wends, who guarded the narrow approach to the city. In single file +they walked between the ranks of the enemy, who stood with inverted +spears, watching them in sullen silence. His men feared a trap, but +Absalon strode ahead unmoved. Coming to the temple of their local +god, Rygievit, he attacked him with his axe and bade his guard fall +to, which they did. Saxo has left us a unique description of this +idol that stood behind purple hangings, fashioned of oak "in every +evil and revolting shape. The swallows had made their nests in his +mouths and throats" (there were seven in so many faces) "and filled +him up with all manner of stinking uncleanness. Truly, for such god +was such sacrifice fit." He had a sword for every one of his seven +faces, buckled about his ample waist, but for all that he went the +way of the others, and even had to put up with the indignity of the +Christian priests standing upon him while he was being dragged out. +That seems to have helped cure his followers of their faith in him. +They delivered the temple treasure into the hands of the King--seven +chests filled with money and valuables, among them a silver cup +which the wretched King Svend had sent to Svantevit as a bribe to +the Wends for joining him against his own country and kin. But those +days were ended. It was the Danes' turn now, and Wendland was laid +waste until "the swallows found no eaves of any house whereunder to +build their nests and were forced to build them on the ships." A sad +preliminary to bringing the country under the rule of the Prince of +Peace; but in the scheme of those days the sword was equal partner +with the cross in leading men to the true God. + +The heathen temples were destroyed and churches built on their +sites of the timber gathered for the siege of Arcona. The people, +deserted by their own, accepted the Christians' God in good faith, +and were baptized in hosts, thirteen hundred on one day and nine +hundred on the next. Three days and nights Absalon saw no sleep. He +did nothing half-way. No sooner was he back home than he sent over +priests and teachers supplied with everything, even food for their +keep, so that they "should not be a burden to the people whom they +had come to show the way to salvation." + +The Wends were conquered, but the end was not yet. They had savage +neighbors, and many a crusade did Absalon lead against them in the +following years, before the new title of the Danish rulers, "King of +the Slavs and Wends," was much more than an empty boast. He +organized a regular sea patrol of one-fourth of the available ships, +of which he himself took command, and said mass on board much +oftener than in the Roskilde church. It is the sailor, the warrior, +the leader of men one sees through all the troubled years of his +royal friend's life. Now the Danish fleet is caught in the inland +sea before Stettin, unable to make its way out, and already the +heathen hosts are shouting their triumph on shore. It is Absalon, +then, who finds the way and, as one would expect, he forces it. The +captains wail over the trap and abuse him for getting them into it. +Absalon, disdaining to answer them, leads his ships in single file +straight for the gap where the Wendish fleet lies waiting, and gets +the King to attack with his horsemen on shore. Between them the +enemy is routed, and the cowards are shamed. But when they come to +make amends, he is as unmoved as ever and will have none of it. +Again, when he is leading his men to the attack on a walled town, a +bridge upon which they crowd breaks, and it is the bishop who saves +his comrades from drowning, swimming ashore with them in full armor. + +Resting in his castle at Haffn, the present Copenhagen, which he +built as a defence against the sea-rovers, he hears, while in his +bath, his men talking of strange ships that are sailing into the +Sound, and, hastily throwing on his clothes, gives chase and kills +their crews, for they were pirates whose business was murder, and +they merely got their deserts. In the pursuit his archers "pinned +the hands of the rowers to the oars with their arrows" and crippled +them, so skilful had much practice made them. Turn the leaf of +Saxo's chronicle, and we find him under Rgen with his fleet, +protecting the now peaceful Wendish fishermen in their autumn +herring-catch, on which their livelihood depended. Of such stuff was +made the bishop who + + "Used his trusty Danish sword + As the Pope his staff in Rome." + +Wherever danger threatens Valdemar and Absalon, Esbern is found, +too, earning the name of the Fleet (Snare), which the people had +fondly given to their favorite. Where the fighting was hardest, he +was sure to be. The King's son had ventured too far and was caught +in a tight place by an overwhelming force, when Esbern pushed his +ship in between him and the enemy and bore the brunt of a fight that +came near to making an end of him. He had at last only a single man +left, but the two made a stand against a hundred. "When the heathen +saw his face they fled in terror." At last they knocked him +senseless with a stone and would have killed him, but in the nick of +time the King's men came to the rescue. + +Coming home from Norway he ran afoul of forty pirate ships under +the coast of Seeland. He tried to steal past; forty against one were +heavy odds. But it was moonlight and he was discovered. The pirates +lay across his course and cut him off. Esbern made ready for a fight +and steered straight into the middle of them. The steersman +complained that he had no armor, and he gave him his own. He beat +his pursuers off again and again, but the wind slackened and they +were closing in once more, swearing by their heathen gods that they +would have him dead or alive, for a Danish prisoner on one of their +ships had told who he was. But Esbern had more than one string to +his bow. He sent a man aloft with flint and steel to strike fire in +the top, and the pirates, believing that he was signalling to a +fleet he had in ambush, fled helter-skelter. Esbern got home safe. + +The German emperors' fingers had always itched for the over-lordship +of the Danish isles, and they have not ceased to do so to this day. +When Frederick Barbarossa drove Alexander III from Rome and set up a +rival Pope in his place, Archbishop Eskild of Lund, who was the +Primate of the North, championed the exiled Pope's case, and +Valdemar, whose path the ambitious priest had crossed more than +once, let it be known that he inclined to the Emperor's cause, in +part probably from mere pique, perhaps also because he thought it +good politics. The archbishop in a rage summoned Absalon and bade +him join him in a rising against the King. Absalon's answer is +worthy the man and friend: + +"My oath to you I will keep, and in this wise, that I will not +counsel you to your own undoing. Whatever your cause against the +King, war against him you cannot, and succeed. And this know, that +never will I join with you against my liege lord, to whom I have +sworn fealty and friendship with heart and soul all the days of my +life." + +He could not persuade the archbishop, who went his own way and was +beaten and exiled for a season, nor could he prevent the King from +yielding to the blandishments of Frederick and getting mixed up in +the papal troubles; but he went with him to Germany and saved him at +the last moment from committing himself by making him leave the +church council just as the anti-pope was about to pronounce sentence +of excommunication against Alexander. He commanded Absalon to +remain, as a servant of the church, but Absalon replied calmly that +he was not there in that capacity, but as an attendant on his King, +and must follow where he went. It appeared speedily that the +Emperor's real object was to get Valdemar to own him as his +over-lord, and this he did, to Absalon's great grief, on the idle +promise that Frederick would join him in his war upon all the Baltic +pagans. However, it was to be a purely personal matter, in nowise +affecting his descendants. That much was saved, and Absalon lived +long enough to fling back, as the counsellor of Valdemar's son, from +behind the stout wall he built at Denmark's southern gate, the +Emperor's demand for homage, with the reply that "the King ruled in +Denmark with the same right as the Emperor in Germany, and was no +man's subject." + +However grievously Absalon had offended the aged archbishop, when +after forty years in his high office illness compelled him to lay it +down, he could find no one so worthy to step into his shoes. He sent +secretly to Rome and got the Pope's permission to name his own +successor, before he called a meeting of the church. The account of +what followed is the most singular of all Saxo's stories. Valdemar +did not know what was coming and, fearing fresh trouble, got the +archbishop to swear on the bones of the saints before them all that +he was not moved to abdication by hate of the King, or by any +coercion whatever. Then the venerable priest laid his staff, his +mitre, and his ring on the altar and announced that he had done with +it all forever. But he had made up his mind not to use the power +given him by the Pontiff. They might choose his successor +themselves. He would do nothing to influence their action. + +The bishops and clergy went to the King and asked him if he had any +choice. The King said he had, but if he made it known he would get +no thanks for it and might estrange his best friend. If he did not, +he would certainly be committing a sin. He did not know what to do. + +"Name him," said they, and Valdemar told them it was the bishop of +Roskilde. + +At that the old archbishop got up and insisted on the election then +and there; but Absalon would have none of it. The burden was too +heavy for his shoulders, he said. However, the clergy seized him, +"being," says Saxo, who without doubt was one of them, "the more +emboldened to do so as the archbishop himself laid hands upon him +first." Intoning the hymn sung at archiepiscopal consecrations, they +tried to lead him to the altar. He resisted with all his might and +knocked several of the brethren down. Vestments were torn and +scattered, and a mighty ruction arose, to which the laity, not to be +outdone, added by striking up a hymn of their own. Archbishop and +King tried vainly to make peace; the clamor and battle only rose the +higher. Despite his struggles, Absalon was dragged to the high seat, +but as they were about to force him into it, he asked leave to say a +single word, and instantly appealed his case to the Pope. So there +was an end; but when the aged Eskild, on the plea of weakness, +begged him to pronounce the benediction, he refused warily, because +so he would be exercising archiepiscopal functions and would be _de +facto_ incumbent of the office.[4] + +[Footnote 4: That all this in no way affected the personal relations +of the two men Saxo assures us in one of the little human touches +with which his chronicle abounds. When Eskild was going away to end +his days as a monk in the monastery of Clairvaux, he rested awhile +with Absalon at his castle Haffn, where he was received as a father. +The old man suffered greatly from cold feet, and Absalon made a box +with many little holes in, and put a hot brick in it. With this at +his feet, Eskild was able to sleep, and he was very grateful to +Absalon, both because of the comfort it gave him and "because that +he perceived that filial piety rather than skill in the healer's +art" prompted the invention.] + +Here, as always, Absalon thought less of himself than of his +country, so the event showed. For when the Pope heard his plea, +though he decided against him, he allowed him to hold the bishopric +of Roskilde together with the higher office, and so he was left at +Valdemar's side to help finish their work of building up Denmark +within and without. At Roskilde he spent, as a matter of fact, most +of his time while Valdemar lived. At Lund he would have been in a +distant part of the country, parted from his friend and out of touch +with the things that were the first concern of his life. + +They were preparing to aim a decisive blow against the Pomeranian +pagans when Valdemar died, on the very day set for the sailing. The +parting nearly killed Absalon. Saxo draws a touching picture of him +weeping bitterly as he said the requiem mass over his friend, and +observes: "Who can doubt that his tears, rising with the incense, +gave forth a peculiar and agreeable savour in high heaven before +God?" The plowmen left their fields and carried the bier, with sobs +and lamentations, to the church in Ringsted, where the great King +rests. His sorrow laid Absalon on a long and grievous sick-bed, from +which he rose only when Valdemar's son needed and called him. + +In the fifteen years that follow we see his old warlike spirit still +unbroken. Thus his defiance of the German Emperor, whose anger was +hot. Frederick, in revenge, persuaded the Pomeranian duke Bugislav +to organize a raid on Denmark with a fleet of five hundred sail. +Scant warning reached Absalon of the danger. King Knud was away, and +there was no time to send for him. Mustering such vessels as were +near, he sailed across the Baltic and met the enemy under Rgen the +day after Whitsuntide (1184). The bishop had gone ashore to say mass +on the beach, when word was brought that the great fleet was in +sight. Hastily pulling off his robe and donning armor instead, he +made for his ship with the words: "Now let our swords sing the +praise of God." The Pomeranians were taken completely by surprise. +They did not know the Danes were there, and when they heard the +archbishop's dreaded war-cry raised, they turned and fled in such +terror and haste that eighteen of their ships were run down and sunk +with all on board. On one, a rower hanged himself for fear of +falling into the hands of the Danes. Absalon gave chase, and the +rout became complete. Of the five hundred ships only thirty-five +escaped; all the rest were either sunk or taken. Duke Bugislav soon +after became a vassal of Denmark, and of the Emperor's plots there +was an end. + +It was the last blow, and the story of it went far and wide. +Absalon's work was nearly done. Denmark was safe from her enemies. +The people were happy and prosperous. Valdemar's son ruled +unchallenged, and though he was childless, by his side stood his +brother, a manly youth who, not yet full grown, had already shown +such qualities of courage and sagacious leadership that the old +archbishop could hang up the sword with heart at ease. The promise +was kept. The second Valdemar became Denmark's royal hero for all +time. Absalon's last days were devoted to strengthening the Church, +around which he had built such a stout wall. He built churches and +cloisters, and guided them with a wise and firm hand. And he made +Saxo, his clerk, set it all down as an eye-witness of these things, +and as one who came to the task by right; for, says the chronicler, +"have not my grandfather and his father before him served the King +well on land and sea, hence why should not I serve him with my +book-learning?" He bears witness that the bishop himself is his +authority for much that he has written. + +Archbishop Absalon closed his eyes on St. Benedict's Day, March 21, +1201, in the cloister at Sor which Sir Asker built and where he +lived his last days in peace. Absalon's statue of bronze, on +horseback, battle-axe in hand, stands in the market square in +Copenhagen, the city he founded and of which he is the patron saint; +but his body lies within the quiet sanctuary where, in the deep +forest glades, one listens yet for the evensong of the monks, long +silent now. When his grave was opened, in 1826, the lines of his +tall form, clad in clerical robes, were yet clearly traceable. The +strong hands, turned to dust, held a silver chalice in which lay his +episcopal ring. They are there to be seen to-day, with remnants of +his staff that had partly crumbled away. No Dane approaches his +grave without emotion. "All Denmark grieved for him," says a German +writer of that day, "and commended his soul to Jesus Christ, the +Prince of Peace, for that in his lifetime he had led many who were +enemies to peace and concord." In his old cathedral, in Roskilde +town, lies Saxo, according to tradition under an unmarked stone. +When he went to rest his friend and master had slept five years. + +Esbern outlived his brother three years. The hero of so many battles +met his death at last by an accidental fall in his own house. The +last we hear of him is at a meeting in the Christmas season, 1187, +where emissaries of Pope Gregory VIII preached a general crusade. +Their hearers wept at the picture they drew of the sufferings +Christians were made to endure in the Holy Land. Then arose Esbern +and reminded them of the great deeds of the fathers at home and +abroad. The faith and the fire of Absalon were in his words: + +"These things they did," he said, "for the glory of their name and +race, knowing nothing of our holy religion. Shall we, believing, do +less? Let us lay aside our petty quarrels and take up this greater +cause. Let us share the sufferings of the saints and earn their +reward. Perhaps we shall win--God keeps the issue. Let him who +cannot give himself, give of his means. So shall all we, sharing the +promise, share also the reward." + +The account we have says that many took the cross, such was the +effect of his words, more likely of the man and what he was and had +been in the sight of them all throughout his long life. + + + + +KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG + + +To the court of King Ottocar of Bohemia there came in the year 1205 +a brilliant embassy from far-off Denmark to ask the hand of his +daughter Dragomir for King Valdemar, the young ruler of that +country. Sir Strange[1] Ebbesn and Bishop Peder Sunesn were the +spokesmen, and many knights, whose fame had travelled far in the +long years of fighting to bring the Baltic pagans under the cross, +rode with them. The old king received them with delight. Valdemar +was not only a good son-in-law for a king to have, being himself a +great and renowned ruler, but he was a splendid knight, tall and +handsome, of most courteous bearing, ambitious, manly, and of ready +wit. So their suit prospered well. The folk-song tells how they +fared; how, according to the custom of those days, Sir Strange +wedded the fair princess by proxy for his lord, and how King +Ottocar, when he bade her good-by, took this promise of her: + + In piety, virtue, and fear of God, + Let all thy days be spent; + And ever thy subjects be thy thought, + Their hopes on thy care be bent. + +[Footnote 1: Pronounce as Strangle, with the l left out.] + +The daughter kept her vow. Never was queen more beloved of her +people than Dagmar. That was the name they gave her in Denmark, for +the Bohemian Dragomir was strange to them. Dagmar meant daybreak in +their ancient tongue, and it really seemed as if a new and beautiful +day dawned upon the land in her coming. The dry pages of history +have little enough to tell of her beyond the simple fact of her +marriage and untimely death, though they are filled with her famous +husband's deeds; but not all of his glorious campaigns that earned +for him the name of "The Victor" have sunk so deep into the people's +memory, or have taken such hold of their hearts, as the lovely queen +who + + Came without burden, she came with peace; + She came the good peasant to cheer. + +Through all the centuries the people have sung her praise, and they +sing it yet. Of the many folk-songs that have come down from the +middle ages, those that tell of Queen Dagmar are the sweetest, as +they are the most mournful, for her happiness was as brief as her +life was beautiful. + +They sailed homeward over sunny seas, until they came to the shore +where the royal lover awaited his bride, impatiently scanning the +horizon for the gilded dragon's head of the ship that bore her. The +minstrel sings of the great wedding that was held in the old city of +Ribe.[2] The gray old cathedral in which they knelt together still +stands; but of Valdemar's strong castle only a grass-grown hill is +left. It was the privilege of a bride in those days to ask a gift of +her husband on the morning after the wedding, and have it granted +without question. Two boons did Dagmar crave, + + "right early in the morning, long before it was day": + +one, that the plow-tax might be forgiven the peasant, and that those +who for rising against it had been laid in irons be set free; the +other, that the prison door of Bishop Valdemar be opened. Bishop +Valdemar was the arch-enemy of the King. The first request he +granted; but the other he refused for cause: + + An' he comes out, Bishop Valdemar, + Widow he makes you this year. + +And he did his worst; for in the end the King yielded to Dagmar's +prayers, and much mischief came of it. + +[Footnote 2: Pronounced Reebe, in two syllables.] + +Seven years the good queen lived. Seven centuries have not dimmed +the memory of them, or of her. The King was away in a distant part +of the country when they sent to him in haste with the message that +the queen was dying. The ballad tells of his fears as he sees +Dagmar's page coming, and they proved only too true. + + The king his checker-board shut in haste, + The dice they rattled and rung. + Forbid it God, who dwells in heaven, + That Dagmar should die so young. + +In the wild ride over field and moor, the King left his men far +behind: + + When the king rode out of Skanderborg + Him followed a hundred men. + But when he rode o'er Ribe bridge, + Then rode the king alone. + +The tears of weeping women told him as he thundered over the +drawbridge of the castle that he was too late. But Dagmar had only +swooned. As he throws himself upon her bed she opens her eyes, and +smiles upon her husband. Her last prayer, as her first, is for mercy +and peace. Her sin, she says, is not great; she has done nothing +worse than to lace her silken sleeves on a Sunday. Then she closes +her eyes with a tired sigh: + + The bells of heaven are chiming for me; + No more may I stay to speak. + +Thus the folk-song. Long before Dagmar went to her rest, Bishop +Valdemar had stirred up all Germany to wreak his vengeance upon the +King. He was an ambitious, unscrupulous priest, who hated his royal +master because he held himself entitled to the crown, being the +natural son of King Knud, who was murdered at Roskilde, as told in +the story of Absalon. While they were yet young men, when he saw +that the people followed his rival, he set the German princes +against Denmark, a task he never found hard. But young Valdemar made +short work of them. He took the strong cities on the Elbe and laid +the lands of his adversaries under the Danish crown. The bishop he +seized, and threw him into the dungeon of Sborg Castle, where he +had sat thirteen years when Dagmar's prayers set him free. He could +hardly walk when he came out, but he could hate, and all the world +knew it. The Pope bound him with heavy oaths never to return to +Denmark, and made him come to Italy so that he could keep an eye on +him himself. But two years had not passed before he broke his oath, +and fled to Bremen, where the people elected him to the vacant +archbishopric and its great political power. Forthwith he began +plotting against his native land. + +In the bitter feud between the Guelphs and the Ghibellines he found +his opportunity. One of the rival emperors marched an army north to +help the perjured priest. King Valdemar hastened to meet them, but +on the eve of battle the Emperor was slain by one of his own men. On +Sunday, when the archbishop was saying mass in the Bremen cathedral, +an unknown knight, the visor of whose helmet was closed so that no +one saw his face, strode up to the altar, and laying a papal bull +before him, cried out that he was accursed, and under the ban of the +church. The people fled, and forsaken by all, the wretched man +turned once more to Rome in submission. But though the Pope forgave +him on condition that he meddle no more with politics, war, or +episcopal office, another summer found him wielding sword and lance +against the man he hated, this time under the banner of the Guelphs. +The Germans had made another onset on Denmark, but again King +Valdemar defeated them. The bishop intrenched himself in Hamburg, +and made a desperate resistance, but the King carried the city by +storm. The beaten and hopeless man fled, and shut himself up in a +cloister in Hanover, where daily and nightly he scourged himself for +his sins. If it is true that "hell was fashioned by the souls that +hated," not all the penance of all the years must have availed to +save him from the torments of the lost. + +Denmark now had peace on its southern border. Dagmar was dead, and +Valdemar, whose restless soul yearned for new worlds to conquer, +turned toward the east where the wild Esthland tribes were guilty of +even worse outrages than the Wends before Absalon tamed them. The +dreadful cruelties practised by these pagans upon christian captives +cried aloud to all civilized Europe, and Valdemar took the cross +"for the honor of the Virgin Mary and the absolution of his sins," +and gathered a mighty fleet, the greatest ever assembled in Danish +waters. With more than a thousand ships he sailed across the Baltic. +The Pope sped them with his apostolic blessing, and took king and +people into his especial care, forbidding any one to attack the +country while they were away converting the heathen. Archbishop +Anders led the crusade with the king. As the fleet approached the +shore they saw it covered with an innumerable host of the enemy. So +great was their multitude that the crusaders quailed before the +peril of landing; but the archbishop put heart into them, and led +the fleet in fervent prayer to the God of battle. Then they landed +without hindrance. + +There was an old stronghold there called Lyndanissa that had fallen +into decay. The crusaders busied themselves for two days with +building another and better fort. On the third day, being St. Vitus' +Day, they rested, fearing no harm. The Esthlanders had not troubled +them. Some of their chiefs had even come in with an offer of +surrender. They were willing to be converted, they said, and the +priests were baptizing them after vespers, while the camp was making +ready for the night, when suddenly the air was filled with the yells +of countless savages. On every side they broke from the woods, where +they had been gathering unsuspected, and overwhelmed the camp. The +guards were hewn down, the outposts taken, and the King's men were +falling back in confusion, their standard lost, when Prince Vitislav +of Rgen who had been camping with his men in a hollow between the +sand-hills, out of the line of attack, threw himself between them +and the Esthlanders, and gave the Danes time to form their lines. + +In the twilight of the June evening the battle raged with great +fury. With the King at their head, who had led them to victory on so +many hard-fought fields, the Danes drove back their savage foes time +after time, literally hewing their way through their ranks with +sword and battle-axe. But they were hopelessly outnumbered. Their +hearts misgave them as they saw ten heathen spring out of the ground +for every one that was felled. The struggle grew fiercer as night +came on. The Christians were fighting for life; defeat meant that +they must perish to a man, by the sword or upon pagan altars; escape +there was none. Upon the cliff overlooking the battle-field the +archbishop and his priests were praying for success to the King's +arms. Tradition that has been busy with this great battle all +through the ages tells how, while the aged bishop's hands were +raised toward heaven, victory leaned to the Danes; but when he grew +tired, and let them fall, the heathen won forward, until the priests +held up his hands and once more the tide of battle rolled back from +the shore, and the Christian war-cry rose higher. + +Suddenly, in the clash of steel upon steel and the wild tumult of +the conflict, there arose a great and wondering cry "the banner! the +banner! a miracle!" and Christian and pagan paused to listen. Out of +the sky, as it seemed, over against the hill upon which the priests +knelt, a blood-red banner with a great white cross was seen falling +into the ranks of the Christian knights, and a voice resounded over +the battle-field, "Bear this high, and victory shall be yours." With +the exultant cry, "For God and the King," the crusaders seized it, +and charged the foe. Terror-stricken, the Esthlanders wavered, then +turned, and fled. The battle became a massacre. Thousands were +slain. The chronicles say that the dead lay piled fathom-high on the +field that ran red with blood. Upon it, when the pursuit was over, +Valdemar knelt with his men, and they bowed their heads in +thanksgiving, while the venerable archbishop gave praise to God for +the victory. + +That is the story of the Dannebrog which has been the flag of the +Danes seven hundred years. Whether the archbishop had brought it +with him intending to present it to King Valdemar, and threw it down +among the fighting hordes in the moment of extreme peril, or +whether, as some think, the Pope himself had sent it to the +crusaders with a happy inspiration, the fact remains that it came to +the Danes in this great battle, and on the very day which, fifty +years before, had seen the fall of Arcona, and the end of +idol-worship among the western Slavs. Three hundred years the +standard flew over the Danes fighting on land and sea. Then it was +lost in a campaign against the Holstein counts and, when recovered +half a century later, was hung up in the cathedral at Slesvig, +where gradually it fell to pieces. In the first half of the +Nineteenth Century, when national feeling and national pride were at +their lowest ebb, it was taken down with other moth-eaten old +banners, one day when they were cleaning up, and somebody made a +bonfire of them in the street. Such was the fate of "the flag that +fell from heaven," the sacred standard of the Danes. But it was not +the end of it. The Dannebrog flies yet over the Denmark of the +Valdemars, no longer great as then, it is true, nor master of its +ancient foes; but the world salutes it with respect, for there was +never blot of tyranny or treason upon it, and its sons own it with +pride wherever they go. + +King Valdemar knighted five and thirty of his brave men on the +battle-field, and from that day the Order of the Dannebrog is said +to date. It bears upon a white crusader's cross the slogan of the +great fight "For God and the King," and on its reverse the date when +it was won, "June 15, 1219." The back of paganism was broken that +day, and the conversion of all Esthland followed soon. King Valdemar +built the castle he had begun before he sailed home, and called it +Reval, after one of the neighboring tribes. The Russian city of that +name grew up about it and about the church which Archbishop Anders +reared. The Dannebrog became its arms, and its people call it to +this day "the city of the Danes." + +Denmark was now at the height of her glory. Her flag flew over all +the once hostile lands to the south and east, clear into Russia. The +Baltic was a Danish inland sea. King Valdemar was named "Victor" +with cause. His enemies feared him; his people adored him. In a +single night foul treachery laid the whole splendid structure low. +The King and young Valdemar, Dagmar's son, with a small suite of +retainers had spent the day hunting on the little island of Ly. +Count Henrik of Schwerin,--the Black Count they called him,--who had +just returned from a pilgrimage to the Holy Land, was his guest. The +count hated Valdemar bitterly for some real or fancied injury, but +he hid his hatred under a friendly bearing and smooth speech. He +brought the King gifts from the Holy Sepulchre, hunted with him, and +was his friend. But by night, when the King and his son slept in +their tent, unguarded, since no enemy was thought to be near, he +fell upon them with his cutthroats, bound and gagged them despite +their struggles, and gathering up all the valuables that lay around, +to put the finishing touch upon his villainy, fled with his +prisoners "in great haste and fear," while the King's men slept. +When they awoke, and tried to follow, they found their ships +scuttled. The count's boat had been lying under sail all day, hidden +in a sheltered cove, awaiting his summons. + +Germany at last had the lion and its whelp in her grasp. In chains +and fetters they were dragged from one dungeon to another. The +traitors dared not trust them long in any city, however strong. The +German Emperor shook his fist at Count Henrik, but secretly he was +glad. He would have liked nothing better than to have the precious +spoil in his own power. The Pope thundered in Rome and hurled his +ban at the thugs. But the Black Count's conscience was as swarthy as +his countenance; and besides, had he not just been to the Holy Land, +and thereby washed himself clean of all his sins, past and present? + +Behind prison walls, comforted only by Dagmar's son, sat the King, +growing old and gray with anger and grief. Denmark lay prostrate +under the sudden blow, while her enemies rose on every side. Day by +day word came of outbreaks in the conquered provinces. The people +did not know which way to turn; the strong hand that held the helm +was gone, and the ship drifted, the prey of every ill wind. It was +as if all that had been won by sixty years of victories and +sacrifice fell away in one brief season. The forests filled with +out-laws; neither peasant nor wayfarer, nor yet monk or nun in their +quiet retreat, was safe from outrage; and pirates swarmed again in +bay and sound, where for two generations there had been peace. The +twice-perjured Bishop Valdemar left his cloister cell once more and +girt on the sword, to take the kingdom he coveted by storm. + +He was met by King Valdemar's kinsman and friend, Albert of +Orlamunde, who hastened to the frontier with all the men he could +gather. They halted him with a treaty of peace that offered to set +Valdemar free if he would take his kingdom as a fief of the German +crown. He, Albert, so it was written, was to keep all his lands and +more, would he but sign it. He did not stop to hear the rest, but +slashed the parchment into ribbons with his sword, and ordered an +instant advance. The bishop he made short work of, and he was heard +of no more. But in the battle with the German princes Albert was +defeated and taken prisoner. The door of King Valdemar's dungeon was +opened only to let his friend in. + +After two years and a half in chains, Valdemar was ransomed by his +people with a great sum of gold. The Danish women gave their rings +and their jewels to bring back their king. They flocked about him +when he returned, and received him like the conqueror of old; but he +rode among them gray and stern, and his thoughts were far away. + +They had made him swear on oath upon the sacrament, and all +Denmark's bishops with him, before they set him free, that he would +not seek revenge. But once he was back in his own, he sent to Pope +Gregory, asking him to loose him from an oath wrung from him while +he was helpless in the power of bandits. And the Pope responded that +to keep faith with traitors was no man's duty. Then back he rode +over the River Eider into the enemy's land--for they had stripped +Denmark of all her hard-won possessions south of the ancient border +of the kingdom, except Esthland and Rgen--and with him went every +man who could bear arms in all the nation. He crushed the Black +Count who tried to block his way, and at Bornhved met the German +allies who had gathered from far and near to give him battle. Well +they knew that if Valdemar won, the reckoning would be terrible. All +day they fought, and victory seemed to lean toward the Danes, when +the base Holsteiners, the Danish rear-guard whom the enemy had +bought to betray their king, turned their spears upon his army, and +decided the day. The battle ended in utter rout of Valdemar's +forces. Four thousand Danish men were slain. The King himself fell +wounded on the field, his eye pierced by an arrow, and would have +fallen into the hands of the enemy once more but for an unknown +German knight, who took him upon his horse and bore him in the night +over unfrequented paths to Kiel, where he was safe. + +"But all men said that this great hurt befell the King because that +he brake the oath he swore upon the sacred body of the Lord." + +The wars of Valdemar were over, but his sorrows were not. Four years +later the crushing blow fell when Dagmar's son, who was crowned king +to succeed him, lost his life while hunting. With him, says the +folk-song, died the hope of Denmark. The King had other sons, but to +Dagmar's boy the people had given their love from the first, as they +had to his gentle mother. The old King and his people grieved +together. + +But Valdemar rose above his sorrows. Great as he had been in the +days of victory, he was greater still in adversity. The country was +torn by the wars of three-score years, and in need of rest. He gave +his last days to healing the wounds the sword had struck. Valdemar, +the Victor, became Valdemar, the Law-giver. The laws of the country +had hitherto made themselves. They were the outgrowths of the +people's ancient customs, passed down by word of mouth through the +generations, and confirmed on Thing from time to time. King +Valdemar gave Denmark her first written laws that judged between +man and man, in at least one of her provinces clear down into our +day. "With law shall land be built" begins his code. "The law," it +says, "must be honest, just, reasonable, and according to the ways +of the people. It must meet their needs, and speak plainly so that +all men may know and understand what the law is. It is not to be +made in any man's favor, but for the needs of all them who live in +the land." That is its purpose, and "no man shall judge (condemn) +the law which the King has given and the country chosen; neither +shall he (the King) take it back without the will of the people." +That tells the story of Valdemar's day, and of the people who are so +near of kin with ourselves. They were not sovereign and subjects; +they were a chosen king and a free people, working together "with +law land to build." + +King Valdemar was married twice. The folk-song represents Dagmar as +urging the King with her dying breath + + "that Bengerd, my lord, that base bad dame + you never to wife will take." + +Bengerd, or Berengaria, was a Portuguese princess whom Valdemar +married in spite of the warning, two years later. As the people had +loved the fair Dagmar, so they hated the proud Southern beauty, +whether with reason or not. The story of her "morning gift," as it +has come down to us through the mists of time, is very different +from the other. She asks the King, so the ballad has it, to give her +Sams, a great and fertile island, and "a golden crown[3] for every +maid," but he tells her not to be quite so greedy: + + There be full many an honest maid + with not dry bread to eat. + +[Footnote 3: A coin, probably.] + +Undismayed, Bengerd objects that Danish women have no business to +wear silken gowns, and that a good horse is not for a peasant lad. +The King replies patiently that what a woman can buy she may wear +for him, and that he will not take the lad's horse if he can feed +it. Bengerd is not satisfied. "Let bar the land with iron chains" is +her next proposal, that neither man nor woman enter it without +paying tax. Her husband says scornfully that Danish kings have never +had need of such measures, and never will. He is plainly getting +bored, and when she keeps it up, and begrudges the husbandman more +than "two oxen and a cow," he loses his temper, and presumably there +is a matrimonial tiff. Very likely most of this is fiction, bred of +the popular prejudice. The King loved her, that is certain. She was +a beautiful high-spirited woman, so beautiful that many hundreds of +years after, when her grave was opened, the delicate oval of her +skull excited admiration yet. But the people hated her. Twenty +generations after her death it was their custom when passing her +grave to spit on it with the exclamation "Out upon thee, Bengerd! +God bless the King of Denmark"; for in good or evil days they never +wavered in their love and admiration for the king who was a son of +the first Valdemar, and the heir of his greatness and of that of the +sainted Absalon. Tradition has it that Bengerd was killed in battle, +having gone with her husband on one of his campaigns. "It was not +heard in any place," says the folk-song wickedly, "that any one +grieved for her." But the King mourned for his beautiful queen to +the end of his days. + +Bengerd bore Valdemar three sons upon whom he lavished all the +affection of his lonely old age. Erik he chose as his successor, and +to keep his brothers loyal to him he gave them great fiefs and thus, +unknowing, brought on the very trouble he sought to avoid, and set +his foot on the path that led to Denmark's dismemberment after +centuries of bloody wars. For to his second son Abel he gave +Slesvig, and Abel, when his brother became king, sought alliance +with the Holstein count Adolf,[4] the very one who had led the +Germans at the fatal battle of Bornhved. The result was a war +between the brothers that raged seven years, and laid waste the +land. Worse was to follow, for Abel was only "Abel in name, but Cain +in deed." But happily the old King's eyes were closed then, and he +was spared the sight of one brother murdering the other for the +kingdom. + +[Footnote 4: That was the beginning of the Slesvig-Holstein question +that troubled Europe to our day; for the fashion set by Abel other +rulers of his dukedom followed, and by degrees Slesvig came to be +reckoned with the German duchies, whereas up till then it had always +been South-Jutland, a part of Denmark proper.] + +Some foreboding of this seems to have troubled him in his last +years. It is related that once when he was mounting his horse to go +hunting he fell into a deep reverie, and remained standing with his +foot in the stirrup a long time, while his men wondered, not daring +to disturb him. At last one of them went to remind him that the sun +was low in the west. The King awoke from his dream, and bade him go +at once to a wise old hermit who lived in a distant part of the +country. "Ask him," he said, "what King Valdemar was thinking of +just now, and bring me his answer." The knight went away on his +strange errand, and found the hermit. And this was the message he +brought back: "Your lord and master pondered as he stood by his +horse, how his sons would fare when he was dead. Tell him that war +and discord they shall have, but kings they will all be." When the +King heard the prophecy he was troubled in mind, and called his sons +and all his great knights to a council at which he pleaded with them +to keep the peace. But though they promised, he was barely in his +grave when riot and bloodshed filled the land. The climax was +reached when Abel inveigled his brother to his home with fair words +and, once he had him in his power, seized him and gave him over to +his men to do with "as they pleased." They understood their master +only too well, and took King Erik out on the fjord in an open boat, +and killed him there, scarce giving him time to say his prayers. +They weighted his body with his helmet, and sank it in the deep. + +Abel made oath with four and twenty of his men that he was innocent +of his brother's blood, and took the crown after him. But the foul +crime was soon avenged. Within a few years he was himself slain by a +peasant in a rising of his own people. For a while his body lay +unburied, the prey of beast and bird, and when it was interred in +the Slesvig cathedral there was no rest for it. "Such turmoil arose +in the church by night that the monks could not chant their vigils," +and in the end they took him out, and buried him in a swamp, with a +stake driven through the heart to lay his ghost. But clear down to +our time when people ceased to believe in ghosts, the fratricide was +seen at night hunting through the woods, coal-black and on a white +horse, with three fiery dogs trailing after; and blue flames burned +over the sea where they vanished. That was how the superstition of +the people judged the man whom the nobles and the priests made +king, red-handed. + +Christopher, the youngest of the three brothers, was king last. His +end was no better than that of the rest. Indeed, it was worse. +Hardly yet forty years old, he died--poisoned, it was said, by the +Abbot Arnfast, in the sacrament as he knelt at the altar-rail in the +Ribe cathedral. He was buried in the chancel where the penitents +going to the altar walk over his grave. So, of all Valdemar's four +sons, not one died a peaceful, natural death. But kings they all +were. + +Valdemar was laid in Ringsted with his great father. He sleeps +between his two queens. Dagmar's grave was disturbed in the late +middle ages by unknown vandals, and the remains of Denmark's +best-loved queen were scattered. Only a golden cross, which she had +worn in life, somehow escaped, and found its way in course of time +into the museum of antiquities at Copenhagen, where it now is, its +chief and priceless treasure. There also is a braid of Queen +Bengerd's hair that was found when her grave was opened in 1855. The +people's hate had followed her even there, and would not let her +rest. The slab that covered her tomb had been pried off, and a round +stone dropped into the place made for her head. Otherwise her grave +was undisturbed. + +"Truly then fell the crown from the heads of Danish men," says the +old chronicle of King Valdemar's death, and black clouds were +gathering ominously even then over the land. But in storm and +stress, as in days that were fair, the Danish people have clung +loyally to the memory of their beloved King and of his sweet Dagmar. + + + + +HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID + + +On the map of Europe the mainland of Denmark looks like a beckoning +finger pointing due north and ending in a narrow sand-reef, upon +which the waves of the North Sea and of the Kattegat break with +unceasing clamor and strife. The heart of the peninsula, quite +one-fourth of its area, was fifty years ago a desert, a barren, +melancholy waste, where the only sign of life encountered by the +hunter, gunning for heath-fowl and plover, was a rare shepherd +tending a few lonesome sheep, and knitting mechanically on his +endless stocking. The two, the lean sheep and the long stocking, +together comprised the only industries which the heath afforded and +was thought capable of sustaining. A great change has taken place +within the span of a single life, and it is all due to the clear +sight and patient devotion of one strong man, the Gifford Pinchot of +Denmark. The story of that unique achievement reads like the tale +of the Sleeping Beauty who was roused from her hundred years' sleep +by the kiss of her lover prince. The prince who awoke the slumbering +heath was a captain of engineers, Enrico Dalgas by name. + +Not altogether fanciful is the conceit. Barren, black, and desolate, +the great moor gripped the imagination as no smiling landscape of +field and forest could--does yet, where enough of it remains. Far as +eye reaches the dun heather covers hill and plain with its sombre +pall. Like gloomy sentinels, furry cattails nod in the bog where the +blue gentian peeps timidly into murky pools; the only human +habitation in sight some heath boer's ling-thatched hut, flanked by +rows of peat stacks in vain endeavor to stay the sweep of the +pitiless west wind. On the barrows where the vikings sleep their +long sleep, the plover pipes its melancholy lay; between steep banks +a furtive brook steals swiftly by as if anxious to escape from the +universal blight. Over it all broods the silence of the desert, +drowsy with the hum of many bees winging their swift way to the +secret feeding-places they know of, where mayflower and anemone hide +under the heather, witness that forests grew here in the long ago. +In midsummer, when the purple is on the broom, a strange pageant +moves on the dim horizon, a shifting mirage of sea and shore, +forest, lake, and islands lying high, with ships and castles and +spires of distant churches--the witchery of the heath that speaks in +the tales and superstitions of its simple people. High in the blue +soars the lark, singing its song of home and hope to its nesting +mate. This is the heath which, denying to the hardest toil all but +the barest living, has given of its poetry to the Danish tongue some +of its sweetest songs. + +But in this busy world day-dreams must make way for the things that +make the day count, castles in the air to homes upon the soil. The +heath had known such in the dim past. It had not always been a +desert. The numberless cairns that lie scattered over it, sometimes +strung out for miles as if marking the highways of the ancients, +which they doubtless do, sometimes grouped where their villages +stood, bear witness to it. Great battles account for their share, +and some of them were fought in historic times. On Grathe Heath the +young King Valdemar overcame his treacherous rival Svend. Alone and +hunted, the beaten man sought refuge, Saxo tells us, behind a stump, +where he was found and slain by one of the King's axemen. A chapel +was built on the spot. More than seven centuries later (in 1892) +they dug there, and found the bones of a man with skull split in +two. + +The stump behind which the wretched Svend hid was probably the last +representative of great forests that grew where now is sterile moor. +In the bogs trunks of oak and fir are found lying as they fell +centuries ago. The local names preserve the tradition, with here and +there patches of scrub oak that hug the ground close, to escape the +blast from the North Sea. There is one such thicket near the hamlet +of Taulund--the name itself tells of long-forgotten groves--and the +story runs among the people yet that once squirrels jumped from tree +to tree without touching ground all the way from Taulund to +Gjellerup church, a stretch of more than five miles to which the +wild things of the woods have long been strangers. In the shelter of +the old forests men dwelt through ages, and made the land yield them +a living. Some cairns that have been explored span over more than a +thousand years. They were built in the stone age, and served the +people of the bronze and iron ages successively as burial-places, +doubtless the same tribes who thus occupied their homesteads from +generation to generation. That they were farmers, not nomads, is +proved by the clear impression of grains of wheat and barley in +their burial urns. The seeds strayed into the clay and were burned +away, but the impression abides, and tells the story. + +Clear down to historic times there was a thrifty population in many +of the now barren spots. But a change was slowly creeping over the +landscape. The country was torn by long and bloody wars. The big men +fought for the land and the little ones paid the score, as they +always do. They were hunted from house and home. Next the wild +hordes of the Holstein counts overran Jutland. Its towns were +burned, the country laid waste. Great fires swept the forests. What +ravaging armies had left was burned in the smelteries. In the sandy +crust of the heath there is iron, and swords and spears were the +grim need of that day. The smelteries are only names now. They +went, but they took the forests with them, and where the ground was +cleared the west wind broke through, and ruin followed fast. Last of +all came the Black Death, and set its seal of desolation upon it +all. When it had passed, the country was a huge graveyard. The heath +had moved in. Rovers and smugglers found refuge there; honest folk +shunned it. Under the heather the old landmarks are sometimes found +yet, and deep ruts made by wheels that long since ceased to turn. + +In the Eighteenth Century men began to think of reclamation. A +thousand German colonists were called in and settled on the heath, +but it was stronger than they, and they drifted away until scarce +half a hundred families remained. The Government tried its hand, but +there was no one who knew just how, and only discouragement +resulted. Then came the war with Germany in 1864, that lost to +Denmark a third of her territory. The country lay prostrate under +the crushing blow. But it rose above defeat and disaster, and once +more expectant eyes were turned toward the ancient domain that had +slipped from its grasp. "What was lost without must be won within" +became the national slogan. And this time the man for the task was +at hand. + +Enrico Mylius Dalgas was by the accident of birth an Italian, his +father being the Danish consul in Naples; by descent a Frenchman; by +choice and training a Dane, typical of the best in that people. He +came of the Huguenot stock that left France after the repeal of the +Edict of Nantes in 1685 and scattered over Europe, to the great good +of every land in which it settled. They had been tillers of the soil +from the beginning, and at least two of the family, who found homes +in Denmark, made in their day notable contributions to the cause of +advanced, sensible husbandry. Enrico's father, though a merchant, +had an open eye for the interests which in later years claimed the +son's life-work. In the diary of a journey through Sweden he makes +indignant comment upon the reckless way in which the people of that +country dealt with their forests. That he was also a man of +resolution is shown by an incident of the time when Jew-baiting was +having its sorry day in Denmark. An innkeeper mistook the +dark-skinned little man for a Jew, and set before him a spoiled +ham, retorting contemptuously, when protest was made, that it was +"good enough for a Sheeny." Without further parley Mr. Dalgas seized +the hot ham by its shank and beat the fellow with it till he cried +for mercy. The son tells of the first school he attended, when he +was but five years old. It was kept by the widow of one of +Napoleon's generals, a militant lady who every morning marshalled +the school, a Lilliputian army with the teachers flanking the line +like beardless sergeants in stays and petticoats, and distributed +rewards and punishments as the great Emperor was wont to do after a +battle. For the dunces there was a corner strewn with dried peas on +which they were made to kneel with long-eared donkey caps adorning +their luckless heads. Very likely it was after an insult of this +kind that Enrico decided to elope to America with his baby sister. +They were found down by the harbor bargaining with some fishermen to +take them over to Capri _en route_ for the land of freedom. The +elder Dalgas died while the children were yet little, and the widow +went back to Denmark to bring up her boys there. + +They were poor, and the change from the genial skies of sunny Italy +to the bleak North did not make it any easier for them. Enrico's +teacher saw it, and gave him his overcoat to be made over. But the +boys spotted it and squared accounts with their teacher by +snowballing the wearer of the big green plaid until he was glad to +leave it at home, and go without. He was in the military school when +war broke out with Germany in 1848. Both of his brothers +volunteered, and fell in battle. Enrico was ordered out as +lieutenant, and put on the shoulder-straps joyfully, to the great +scandal of his godfather in Milan, who sympathized with the German +cause. When the young soldier refused to resign he not only cut him +off in his will, but took away a pension of four hundred kroner he +had given his mother in her widowhood. If he had thoughts of +bringing them over by such means, he found out his mistake. Mother +and son were made of sterner stuff. Dalgas fought twice for his +country, the last time in 1864, as a captain of engineers. + +It was no ordinary class, the one of 1851 that resumed its studies +in the military high school. Two of the students did not answer +roll-call; their names were written among the nation's heroic dead. +Some had scars and wore the cross for valor in battle. All were +first lieutenants, to be graduated as captains. Dalgas had himself +transferred from the artillery to the engineers, and was detailed as +road inspector. So the opportunity of his life came to him. + +There were few railways in those days; the highways were still the +great arteries of traffic. Dalgas built roads that crossed the +heath, and he learned to know it and the strong and independent, if +narrow, people who clung to it with such a tenacious grip. He had a +natural liking for practical geology and for the chemistry of the +soil, and the deep cuts which his roads sometimes made gave him the +best of chances for following his bent. The heath lay as an open +book before him, and he studied it with delight. He found the traces +of the old forests, and noted their extent. Occasionally the pickaxe +uncovered peat deposits of unsuspected depth and value. Sometimes +the line led across the lean fields, and damages had to be discussed +and assessed. He learned the point of view of the heath farmer, +sympathized with his struggles, and gained his confidence. Best of +all, he found a man of his own mind, a lawyer by the name of +Morville, himself a descendant of the exiled Huguenots. It is not a +little curious that when the way was cleared for the Heath Society's +great work, in its formal organization with M. Mourier-Petersen, a +large landowner, as their associate in its management, the three men +who for a quarter of a century planned the work and marked out the +groove in which it was to run were all of that strong stock which is +by no means the most common in Denmark. + +With his lawyer friend Captain Dalgas tramped the heath far and wide +for ten years. Then their talks had matured a plan. Dalgas wrote to +the Copenhagen newspapers that the heath could be reclaimed, and +suggested that it should be done by the State. They laughed at him. +"Nothing better could have happened," he said in after years, "for +it made us turn to the people themselves, and that was the road to +success, though we did not know it." In the spring of 1866 a hundred +men, little and big landowners most of them, met at his call, and +organized the Heath Society[1] with the object of reclaiming the +moor. Dalgas became its managing director. + +[Footnote 1: Danske Hedeselskab.] + +To restore to the treeless waste its forest growth was the +fundamental idea, for until that was done nothing but the heather +could grow there. The west wind would not let it. But the heath +farmer shook his head. It would cost too much, and give too little +back. What he needed was water and marl. Could the captain help them +to these?--that was another matter. The little streams that found +their way into the heath and lost it there, dire need had taught +them to turn to use in their fields; not a drop escaped. But the +river that ran between deep banks was beyond their reach. Could he +show them how to harness that? Dalgas saw their point. "We are +working, not for the dead soil, but for the living men who find +homes upon it," he told his associates, and tree planting was put +aside for the time. They turned canal diggers instead. Irrigation +became their aim and task; the engineer was in his right place. The +water was raised from the stream and led out upon the moor, and +presently grass grew in the sand which the wiry stems of the heather +had clutched so long. Green meadows lined the water-runs, and +fragrant haystacks rose. To the lean sheep was added a cow, then +two. The farmer laid by a little, and took in more land for +cultivation. That meant breaking the heath. Also, it meant marl. The +heath is lime-poor; marl is lime in the exact form in which it best +fits that sandy soil. It was known to exist in some favored spots, +but the poor heath farmer could not bring it from a distance. So the +marl borer went with the canal digger. Into every acre he drove his +auger, and mapped out his discoveries. At last accounts he had found +marl in more than seventeen hundred places, and he is not done yet. +Where there was none, Dalgas's Society built portable railways into +the moor far enough to bring it to nearly every farmer's door. + +It was as if a magic wand had been waved over the heath. With water +and marl, the means were at hand for fighting it and winning out. +Heads that had drooped in discouragement were raised. The cattle +keep increased, and with it came the farmer's wealth. Marl changes +the character of the heath soil; with manure to fertilize it there +was no reason why it should not grow crops--none, except the +withering blast of the west wind. The time for Dalgas to preach tree +planting had come. + +While the canal digger and marl seeker were at work, there had been +neighborhood meetings and talks at which Captain Dalgas did the +talking. When he spoke the heath boer listened, for he had learned +to look upon him as one of them. He wore no gold lace. A plain man +in every-day gray tweeds, with his trousers tucked into his boots, +he spoke to plain people of things that concerned them vitally, and +in a way they could understand. So when he told them that the heath +had once been forest-clad, at least a large part of it, and pointed +them to the proofs, and that the woods could be made to grow again +to give them timber and shelter and crops, they gave heed. It was +worth trying at any rate. The shelter was the immediate thing. They +began planting hedges about their homesteads; not always wisely, for +it is not every tree that will grow in the heath. The wind whipped +and wore them, the ahl cramped their roots, and they died. The ahl +is the rusty-red crust that forms under the heather in the course of +the ages where the desert rules. Sometimes it is a loose sandstone +formation; sometimes it carries as much as twenty per cent of iron +that is absorbed from the upper layers of the sand. In any case, it +must be broken through; no tree root can do it. The ahl, the poverty +of the sand, and the wind, together make the "evil genius" of the +heath that had won until then in the century-old fight with man. But +this time he had backing, and was not minded to give up. The Heath +Society was there to counsel, to aid. And soon the hedges took hold, +and gardens grew in their shelter. There is hardly a farm in all +west Jutland to-day that has not one, even if the moor waits just +beyond the gate. + +Out in the desert the Society had made a beginning with plantations +of Norway spruce. They took root, but the heather soon overwhelmed +the young plants. Not without a fight would this enemy let go its +grip upon the land. It had smothered the hardy Scotch pine in days +past, and now the spruce was in peril. Searching high and low for +something that would grow fast and grow green, Dalgas and his +associates planted dwarf pine with the spruce. Strangely, it not +only grew itself, but proved to be a real nurse for the other. The +spruce took a fresh start, and they grew vigorously together--for a +while. Then the pine outstripped its nursling, and threatened to +smother it. The spruce was the more valuable; the other was at best +little more than a shrub. The croaker raised his voice: the black +heath had turned green, but it was still heath, of no value to any +one, then or ever. + +He had not reckoned with Dalgas. The captain of engineers could use +the axe as well as the spade. He cut the dwarf pine out wherever the +spruce had got its grip, and gave it light and air. And it grew big +and beautiful. The Heath Society has now over nineteen hundred +plantations that cover nearly a hundred thousand acres, and the +State and private individuals, inspired by the example it set, have +planted almost as large an area. The ghost of the heath has been +laid for all time. + +Go now across the heath and see the change forty years have wrought. +You shall seek in vain the lonely shepherd with his stocking. The +stocking has grown into an organized industry. In grandfather's day +the farmer and his household "knitted for the taxes"; if all hands +made enough in the twelvemonth to pay the tax-gatherer, they had +done well. Last year the single county of Hammerum, of which more +below, sold machine-made underwear to the value of over a million +and a half kroner. The sheep are there, but no longer lean; no more +the ling-thatched hut, but prosperous farms backed by thrifty +groves, with hollyhock and marigold in the dooryards, heaps of gray +marl in the fields, tiny rivulets of water singing the doom of the +heath in the sand; for where it comes the heather moves out. A +resolute, thrifty peasantry looks hopefully forward. Not all of the +heath is conquered yet. Roughly speaking, thirty-three hundred +square miles of heath confronted Dalgas in 1866. Just about a +thousand remain for those who come after to wrestle with; but +already voices are raised pleading that some of it be preserved +untouched for its natural beauty, while yet it is time. + +Meanwhile the plow goes over fresh acres every year--once, twice, +then a deeper plowing, this time to break the stony crust, and the +heath is ready for its human mission. From the Society's nurseries +that are scattered through the country come thousands of tiny +trees, and are set out in the furrows, two of the spruce for each +dwarf pine till the nurse has done her work. Then she is turned into +charcoal, into tar, and a score of other things of use. The men who +do the planting in summer find chopping to do in winter in the older +plantations, at good wages. Money is flowing into the moor in the +wake of the water and the marl. Roads are being made, and every day +the mail-carrier comes. In the olden time a stranger straying into +the heath often brought the first news of the world without for +weeks together. Game is coming, too,--roebuck and deer,--in the +young forests. The climate itself is changing; more rain falls in +midsummer, when it is needed. The sand-blast has been checked, the +power of the west wind broken. The shrivelled soil once more takes +up and holds the rains, and the streams will deepen, fish leap in +them as of yore. Groves of beech and oak are springing up in the +shelter of their hardier evergreen kin. "Make the land furry," +Dalgas said, with prophetic eye beholding great forests taking the +place of sand and heather, and in his lifetime the change was +wrought that is transforming the barren moor into the home-land of +a prosperous people. + +To the most unlikely of places, through the very prison doors, his +gospel of hope has made its way. For the last dozen years the life +prisoners in the Horsens penitentiary have been employed in breaking +and reforesting the heath, and their keepers report that the effect +upon them of the hard work in the open has been to notably cheer and +brighten them. The discipline has been excellent. There have been +few attempts at escape, and they have come to nothing through the +vigilance of the other prisoners. + +While the population in the rest of Denmark is about stationary, in +west Jutland it grows apace. The case of Skphus farm in the parish +of Sunds shows how this happens. Prior to 1870 this farm of three +thousand acres was rated the "biggest and poorest" in Denmark. Last +year it had dwindled to three hundred and fifty acres, but upon its +old land thirty-three homesteads had risen that kept between them +sixty-two horses and two hundred and fifty-two cows, beside the +sheep, and the manor farm was worth twice as much as before. The +town of Herning, sometimes called "the Star of the Heath," is the +seat of Hammerum county, once the baldest and most miserable on the +Danish mainland. In 1841 twenty-one persons lived in Herning. To-day +there are more than six thousand in a town with handsome buildings, +gas, electric lighting, and paved streets. The heath is half a dozen +miles away. And this is not the result of any special or forced +industry, but the natural, healthy growth of a centre for an army of +industrious men and women winning back the land of their fathers by +patient toil. All through the landscape one sees from the train the +black giving way to the green. Churches rear their white gables; +bells that have been silent since the Black Death stalked through +the land once more call the people to worship on the old sites. More +churches were built in the reign of "the good King Christian," who +has just been gathered to his fathers, than in all the centuries +since the day of the Valdemars. + +Bog cultivation is the Heath Society's youngest child. The heath is +full of peat-bogs that only need the sand, so plentiful on the +uplands, to make their soil as good as the best, the muck of the bog +being all plant food, and they have a surplus of water to give in +exchange. With hope the keynote of it all, the State has taken up +the herculean task of keeping down the moving sands of the North Sea +coast. All along it is a range of dunes that in the fierce storms of +that region may change shape and place in a single night. The "sand +flight" at times reached miles inland, and threatened to bury the +farmer's acres past recovery. Austrian fir and dwarf pine now grow +upon the white range, helping alike to keep down the sand and to bar +out the blast. + +With this exception, the great change has been, is being, wrought by +the people themselves. It was for their good, in the apathy that +followed 1864, that it should be so, and Dalgas saw it. The State +aids the man who plants ten acres or more, and assumes the +obligation to preserve the forest intact; the Heath Society sells +him plants at half-price, and helps him with its advice. It disposes +annually of over thirteen million young trees. The people do the +rest, and back the Society with their support. The Danish peasant +has learned the value of coperation since he turned dairy farmer, +and associations for irrigation, for tree planting, and garden +planting are everywhere. They even reach across the ocean. This year +a call was issued to sons of the old soil, who have found a new home +in America, to join in planting a Danish-American forest in the +desert where hill and heather hide a silvery lake in their deep +shadows and returning wanderers may rest and dream of the long ago. + +Soldier though he was, Enrico Dalgas's pick and spade brigade won +greater victories for Denmark than her armies in two wars. He +literally "won for his country within what she had lost without." A +natural organizer, a hard worker who found his greatest joy in his +daily tasks, a fearless and lucid writer who yet knew how to keep +his cause out of the rancorous politics that often enough seemed to +mistake partisanship for patriotism, he was the most modest of men. +Praise he always passed up to others. At the "silver wedding" of the +Society he founded they toasted him jubilantly, but he sat quiet a +long time. When at last he arose, it was to make this characteristic +little speech: + +"I thank you very much. His Excellency the Minister of the Interior, +who is present here, will see from this how much you think of me, +and possibly my recommendation that the State make a larger +contribution to the Heath Society's treasury may thereby acquire +greater weight with him. I drink to an increased appropriation." + +On the heath Dalgas was prophet, prince, and friend of the people. +In the crowds that flocked about his bier homespun elbowed gold lace +in the grief of a common loss. Boughs of the fragrant spruce decked +his coffin, the gift of the heath to the memory of him who set it +free. + +To Dalgas apply the words of the seer with which he himself +characterized the Society that was the child of his heart and brain: +"The good men are those who plant and water," for they add to the +happiness of mankind. + + + + +KING CHRISTIAN IV + + +[Illustration: Musical notation with lyrics] + + _Maestoso_. + + King Christian stood by loft-y mast In mist and + smoke; His sword was ham-mer-ing so fast, Thro' + Goth-ic helm and brain it passed; Then sank each hos-tile + hulk and mast. In mist and smoke. "Fly," + shout-ed they, "fly, he who can! Who braves of Denmark's + Christ-i-an, Who braves of Denmark's Christian The stroke?" + + +Deep in the beech-woods between Copenhagen and Elsinore, upon the +shore of a limpid lake, stands Frederiksborg, one of the most +beautiful castles in Europe. In its chapel the Danish kings were +crowned for two centuries, and here was born on April 12, 1577, King +Christian of the Danish national hymn which Longfellow translated +into our tongue. No Danish ruler since the days of the great +Valdemars made such a mark upon his time; none lives as he in the +imagination of the people. He led armies to war and won and lost +battles; indeed, he lost more than he won on land when matched +against the great generals of that fighting era. On the sea he +sailed his own ship and was the captain of his own fleet, and there +he had no peer. He made laws in the days of peace and reigned over a +happy, prosperous land. In his old age misfortune in which he had no +share overwhelmed Denmark, but he was ever greatest in adversity, +and his courage saved the country from ruin. The great did not love +him overmuch; but to the plain people he was ever, with all his +failings, which were the failings of his day, a great, appealing +figure, and lives in their hearts, not merely in the dry pages of +musty books. + +He was eleven years old when his father died, and until he came of +age the country was governed by a council of happily most able men +who, with his mother, gave him such a schooling as few kings have +had. He not only became proficient in the languages, living and +dead, and in mathematics which he put to such practical use that he +was among the greatest of architects and ship-builders; he was the +best all-round athlete among his fellows as well, and there was some +sense in the tradition that survives to this day that whoever was +touched by him in wrath did not live long, for he was very tall with +a big, strong body, and when he struck, he struck hard. He was a +dauntless sailor who knew as much about sailing a ship as any one of +his captains, and much more about building it. Danger appealed to +him always. When the spire on the great cathedral in Copenhagen +threatened to fall, he was the one who went up in it alone and gave +orders where and how to brace it. + +As he grew, he sat in the council of state, learning kingcraft, and +showed there the hard-headed sense of fairness and justice that went +with him through life. He was hardly fourteen when the case of three +brothers of the powerful Friis family came before the council. They +had attacked another young nobleman in the street, struck off one of +his hands, and crippled the other. Because of their influence, the +council was for being lenient, atrocious as the crime was. A fine +was deemed sufficient. The young prince asked if there were not some +law covering the case with severer punishment, and was told that in +the province of Skaane there was such a law that applied to serfs. +But the assault had not been committed in Skaane, and these were +high noblemen. + +"All the worse for them," said the prince. "Is then a serf in Skaane +to have more rights under the law than a nobleman in the rest of +Denmark? Let the law for the serf be theirs." And the judgment +stood. + +He had barely attained his majority, when the young king was called +upon to judge between another great noble and a widow whom he sued +for 9000 daler, money he claimed to have lent to her husband. In +proof he laid before the judges two bonds bearing the signatures of +husband and wife. The widow denounced them as forgeries, but the +court decided that she must pay. She went straight to the King with +her story, assuring him that she had never heard of the debt. The +King sent for the bonds and upon close scrutiny discovered that one +of them was on paper bearing the water-mark of a mill that was not +built till two years after the date written in the bond. The noble +was arrested and the search of his house brought to light several +similar documents waiting their turn. He went to the scaffold. His +rank only aggravated his offence in the eyes of the King. No wonder +the fame of this judge spread quickly through the land. + +A dozen contented years he reigned in peace, doing justice between +man and man at home. Then the curse of his house gripped him. In two +centuries, since the brief union between the three Scandinavian +kingdoms was broken by the secession of Sweden, only two of sixteen +kings in either country had gone to their rest without ripping up +the old feud. It was now Christian's turn. The pretext was of little +account: there was always cause enough. Gustav Adolf, whose father +was then on the throne of Sweden, said in after years that there was +no one he had such hearty admiration for and whose friend he would +like so well to be as Christian IV: "The mischief is that we are +neighbors." King Christian crossed over into Sweden and laid siege +to the strong fortress of Kalmar where he first saw actual war and +showed himself a doughty campaigner of intrepid courage. It came +near costing him his life when a cannoneer with whom he had often +talked on his rounds deserted to the enemy and picked the King out +as his especial target. Twice he killed an officer attending upon +him, but the King he never hit. It is almost a pleasure to record +that when he tried it again, in another fight, Christian caught him +and dealt with him as the traitor he was, though the rough justice +of those days is not pleasant to dwell on. The besieged tried to +create a diversion by sneaking into camp at night and burying wax +images of the King and his generals in the earth, where they were +afterwards found and spread consternation through the army; for such +things were believed to be wrought by witchcraft and to bring bad +luck to those whom they represented. + +However, neither the real courage of the defenders, nor their +dallying with the black art, helped them any. King Christian stormed +the town at the head of his army and took it. The burgomaster hid in +the church, disguised as a priest, and pretended to be shriving some +women when the crash came, but it did not save him. When the +Swedish king came with a host twice the size of his own, there was +a battle royal, but Christian drove him off and laid siege to the +castle where dissension presently arose between the garrison and its +commander who was for surrendering. In the midst of their noisy +quarrel, King Christian was discovered standing upon the wall, +calmly looking on. He had climbed up alone on a rope ladder which +the sentinel let down at his bidding. At the sight they gave it up +and opened the gates, and the King wrote home, proudly dating his +letter from "our castle Kalmar." + +Its loss so angered the Swedish king who was old and sick, that he +challenged Christian to single combat, without armor. The letters +that passed between them were hardly kingly. King Christian wrote +that he had other things to do: "Better catch a doctor, old man, and +have your head-piece looked after." Helpless anger killed Karl, and +Gustav Adolf, of whom the world was presently to hear, took the +command and the crown. After that Christian had a harder road to +hoe. + +A foretaste of it came to him when he tried to surprise the fortress +of Gullberg near the present Gtaborg. Its commander was wounded +early in the fight, but his wife who took his place more than filled +it. She and her women poured boiling lye upon the attacking Danes +until they lay "like scalded pigs" under the walls. Their leader +knew when he had enough and made off in haste, with the lady +commandant calling after him, "You were a little unexpected for +breakfast, but come back for dinner and we will receive you +properly." She would not even let them take their dead away. "Since +God gave us luck to kill them," she said, "we will manage to bury +them too." They were very pious days after their own fashion, and +God was much on the lips of his servants. Troubles rarely come +singly. Soon after, King Christian met the enemy unexpectedly and +was so badly beaten that for the second time he had to run for it, +though he held out till nearly all his men had fallen. His horse got +mired in a swamp with the pursuers close behind. The gay and wealthy +Sir Christen Barnekow, who had been last on the field, passed him +there, and at once got down and gave him his horse. It meant giving +up his life, and when Sir Christen could no longer follow the +fleeing King he sat down on a rock with the words, "I give the King +my horse, the enemy my life, and God my soul." The rock is there yet +and the country folk believe that the red spots in the granite are +Christen Barnekow's blood which all the years have not availed to +wash out. + +They tired of fighting at last and made it up. Sweden paid Denmark a +million daler; for the rest, things stayed as they had been before. +King Christian had shown himself no mean fighter, but the senseless +sacking and burning of town and country that was an ugly part of +those days' warfare went against his grain, and he tried to persuade +the Swedes to agree to leave that out in future. Gustav Adolf had +not yet grown into the man he afterward became. "As to the burning," +was his reply, "seeing that it is the usage of war, and we enemies, +why we will each have to do the best we can," which meant the worst. +Had the two kings, who had much in common, got together in the years +of peace that followed, much misery might have been saved Denmark, +and a black page of history might read very differently. For those +were the days of the Thirty Years' War, in which together they +might have dictated peace to harassed Europe. + +Now King Christian's ambition, his piety, for he was a sincerely +religious man, as well as his jealousy of his younger rival and of +the growing power of Sweden--so mixed are human motives--made him +yield to the entreaties of the hard-pressed Protestant princes to +take up alone their cause against the German Emperor. He had tried +for half a dozen years to make peace between them. At last he drew +the sword and went down to force it. After a year of fighting Tilly +and Wallenstein, the Emperor's great generals, he met the former in +a decisive battle at Lutter-am-Baremberg. King Christian's army was +beaten and put to rout. He himself fled bareheaded through the +forests of the Hartz Mountains, pursued by the enemy's horsemen. It +was hardly necessary for the Emperor to make him promise as the +price of peace to keep out of German affairs thenceforth. His allies +had left him to fight it out alone. All their fine speeches went for +nothing when it came to the test, and King Christian rode back to +Denmark, a sadder and wiser man. It was left to Gustav Adolf, after +all, to teach the German generals the lesson they needed. + +In the years of peace before that unhappy war, Danish trade and +Danish culture had blossomed exceedingly, thanks to the wisdom, the +clever management, and untiring industry of the King. He built +factories, cloth-mills, silk-mills, paper-mills, dammed the North +Sea out from the rich marshlands with great dikes, taught the +farmers profitable ways of tilling their fields; for he was a +wondrous manager for whom nothing was too little and nothing too +big. He kept minute account of his children's socks and little +shirts, and found ways of providing money for his war-ships and for +countless building schemes he had in hand both in Denmark and +Norway. For many of them he himself drew the plans. Wherever one +goes to this day, his monogram, which heads this story, stares at +him from the splendid buildings he erected. The Bourse in Copenhagen +and the Round Tower, the beautiful palace of Rosenborg, a sort of +miniature of his beloved Frederiksborg which also he rebuilt on a +more magnificent scale--these are among his works which every +traveller in the North knows. He built more cities and strongholds +than those who went before or came after him for centuries. +Christiania and Christiansand in Norway bear his name. He laid out a +whole quarter of Copenhagen for his sailors, and the quaint little +houses still serve that purpose. Regentsen, a dormitory for poor +students at the university, was built by him. He created seven new +chairs of learning and saw to it that all the professors got better +pay. He ferreted out and dismissed in disgrace all the grafting +officials in Norway, and administered justice with an even hand. At +the same time he burned witches without end, or let it be done for +their souls' sake. That was the way of his time; and when he needed +fireworks for his son's wedding (he made them himself, too), he sent +around to all the old cloisters and cathedral churches for the old +parchments they had. Heaven only knows what treasures that can never +be replaced went up in fire and smoke for that one night's fun. + +King Christian founded a score of big trading companies to exploit +the East, taking care that their ships should have their bulwarks +pierced for at least six guns, so that they might serve as war-ships +in time of need. He sent one expedition after another to the waters +of Greenland in search of the Northwest Passage. It was on the +fourth of these, in 1619, that Jens Munk with two ships and +sixty-four sailors was caught in the ice of Hudson Bay and compelled +to winter there. One after another the crew died of hunger and +scurvy. When Jens Munk himself crept out from what he had thought +his death-bed, he found only two of them all alive. Together they +burrowed in the snow, digging for roots until spring came when they +managed to make their way down to Bergen in the smallest of the two +vessels. Jens Munk had deserved a better end than he got. He spun +his yarns so persistently at court that he got to be a tiresome +bore, and at last one day the King told him that he had no time to +listen to him. Whereat the veteran took great umbrage and, slapping +his sword, let the King know that he had served him well and was +entitled to better treatment. Christian snatched the weapon in anger +and struck him with the scabbard. The sailor never got over it. "He +withered away and died," says the tradition. It was the old +superstition; but whether that killed him or not, the King lost a +good man in Jens Munk. + +He was not averse to hearing the truth, though, when boldly put. +When Ole Vind, a popular preacher, offended some of the nobles by +his plain speech and they complained to the King, he bade him to the +court and told him to preach the same sermon over. Master Vind was +game and the truths he told went straight home, for he knew well +where the shoe pinched. But King Christian promptly made him court +preacher. "He is the kind we need here," he said. There was never a +day that the King did not devoutly read his Bible, and he was +determined that everybody should read it the same way. The result +was a kind of Puritanism that filled the churches and compelled the +employment of men to go around with long sticks to rap the people on +the head when they fell asleep. Christian the Fourth was not the +first ruler who has tried to herd men into heaven by battalions. But +his people would have gladly gone in the fire for him. He was their +friend. When on his tramps, as likely as not he would come home +sitting beside some peasant on his load of truck, and would step off +at the palace gate with a "So long, thanks for good company!" He was +everywhere, interested in everything. In his walking-stick he +carried a foot-rule, a level, and other tools, and would stop at the +bench of a workman in the navy-yard and test his work to see how +well he was doing it. "I can lie down and sleep in any hut in the +land," was his contented boast. And he would have been safe +anywhere. + +Gustav Adolf was a wise and generous foe. While he lived he refused +to listen to proposals for the partition of Denmark after King +Christian's defeat in Germany. He knew well that she was a barrier +against the ambition of the German princes and that, once she was +out of the way, Sweden's turn would come next. But when he had +fallen on the battle-field of Ltzen, and his generals, following in +his footsteps, had achieved fame and lands and the freedom of +worship for which he gave his life, the Swedish statesmen lost their +heads and dreamed of the erection of a great northern Protestant +state by the conquest of Denmark and Norway, to balance the power +of the German empire. Without warning or declaration of war a great +army was thrown into the Danish peninsula from the south. Another +advanced from Sweden upon the eastern provinces, and a fleet hired +in Holland for Swedish money came through the North Sea to help them +over to the Danish islands. If the two armies met, Denmark was lost. +In Swedish harbors a still bigger fleet was fitting out for the +Baltic. + +King Christian was well up in the sixties, worn with the tireless +activities of a long reign; but once more he proved himself greater +than adversity. When the evil tidings reached him, in the midst of +profound peace, the enemy was already within the gates. The country +lay prostrate. The name of Torstenson, the Swedish general, spread +terror wherever it was heard. In the German campaigns he had been +known as the "Swedish Lightning." Beset on every side, never had +Denmark's need been greater. The one man who did not lose his head +was her king. By his personal example he put heart into the people +and shamed the cowardly nobles. He borrowed money wherever he could, +sent his own silver to the mint, crowded the work in the navy-yard +by night and by day, gathered an army, and hurried with it to the +Sounds where the enemy might cross. When the first ships were ready +he sailed around the Skaw to meet the Dutch hirelings. "I am old and +stiff," he said, "and no good any more to fight on land. But I can +manage the ships." + +And he did. He met the Dutchmen in the North Sea, in under the +Danish coast, and whipped them, almost single-handed, for his own +ship _Trefoldigheden_ was for a long while the only one that wind +and tide would let come up with them. That done, he left one of his +captains to watch lest they come out from among the islands where +their ships of shallower draught had sought refuge, and sailed for +Copenhagen. Everything that could carry sail was ready for him by +that time; also the news that the Swedish fleet of forty-six +fighting ships under Klas Fleming had sailed for the coast of +Holstein to take on board Torstenson's army. + +King Christian lost no time. He hoisted his flag on _Trefoldigheden_ +and made after them with thirty-nine ships, vowing that he would +win this fight or die. At Kolberger Heide, the water outside the +Fjord of Kiel, he caught up with them and attacked at once. The +battle that then ensued is the one of which the poet sings and with +which the name of Christian IV is forever linked. + +At the outset the Danish fleet was in great peril. The Swedes fought +gallantly as was their wont, and they were three or four against +one, for most of the King's ships came up slowly, some of them +purposely, so it seems. The King said after the battle of certain of +his captains, "They used me as a screen between them and the enemy." +His own ship and that of his chief admiral's bore the brunt of the +battle for a long time. _Trefoldigheden_ fired 315 shots during the +engagement, and at one time had four hostile, ships clustering about +her. King Christian was on the quarter-deck when a cannon-ball +shivered the bulwark and one of his guns, throwing a shower of +splintered iron and wood over him and those near him, killing and +wounding twelve of the crew. The King himself fell, stunned and +wounded in twenty-three places. His right eye was knocked out, two +of his teeth, and his left ear hung in shreds. + +The cry was raised that the King was dead and panic spread on board. +The story has it that a sailor was sent aloft to strike the flag but +purposely entangled it in the rigging so that it could not fall; he +could not bear to see the King's ship strike its colors. In the +midst of the tumult the aged monarch rose to his feet, torn and +covered with blood. "I live yet," he cried, "and God has left me +strength to fight on for my country. Let every man do his duty." +Leaning on his sword, he led the fight until darkness fell and the +battle was won. Denmark was saved. The danger of an invasion was +averted. In the palace of Rosenborg the priceless treasure they show +to visitors is the linen cloth, all blood-stained, that bound the +King's face as he fought and won his last and biggest fight that +day. + +Half blind, his body black and blue and sore from many bruises, King +Christian yet refused to sail for Copenhagen to have his wounds +attended. Three weeks he lay watching the narrow inlet behind which +the beaten enemy was hiding, to destroy his ships when he came out. +Then he gave over the command to another and hastened to the +province of Skaane on the Swedish mainland, from which he expelled a +hostile army. But when his back was turned, the men he had set to +watch fell asleep and let the Swedish admiral steal out into the +open. There he found and joined the Dutch ships that had slipped +around the Skaw during the rumpus. Together they overwhelmed the +Danish fleet, being now three to one, and crushed it. The slothful +admiral paid for it with his life, but the harm was done. It was the +last and heaviest blow. The old King sheathed his sword and set his +name to a peace that took from Denmark some of her ancient +provinces, with the bitter sigh: "God knows I had no share in this," +and he had not. Even at the last he appealed to the country to try +the fortunes of war with him once more. The people were willing, but +the nobles wanted peace, "however God send it," and he had to yield. +The treaty was made at Brmsebro, where a bridge crossed the river +dividing the two kingdoms. In the middle of the river was an island +and the negotiations were carried on in a tent erected there, the +French and the Dutch being the arbitrators. The envoys of Sweden +and Denmark sat on opposite sides of the boundary post where the +line cut through, each on the soil of his own country. So bitterly +did they hate one another that they did not speak but wrote their +messages, though they could have shaken hands where they sat. Even +that was too close quarters, and they ended up by negotiating at +second hand through the foreign ambassadors, all at the same table, +but each looking straight past the other as if he were not there. + +Another touch of comedy relieves the gloom of that heavy day. It was +the conquest of the Srnadal, a mountain valley in Norway just over +the Swedish frontier, by Pastor Buschovius who, Bible in hand, at +the head of two hundred ski-men invaded and captured it one winter's +day without a blow. He came over the snow-fields into the valley +that had not seen a preacher in many a long day, had the church +bells rung to summon the people, preached to them, married and +christened them, and gave them communion. The simple mountaineers +had hardly heard of the war and had nothing against their neighbors +over the mountain. They joined Sweden then and there at the request +of the preacher, and they stayed Swedes too, for in the final muster +they were forgotten with their valley. Very likely the treaty-makers +did not know that it existed. + +King Christian died four years later, in 1648, past the three score +and ten allotted to man. He was not a great leader like Gustav +Adolf, and he was very human in some of his failings. But he was a +strong man, a just king, and a father of his people who still cling +to his memory with more than filial affection. + + + + +GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING + + +The city of Prague, the capital of Bohemia, went wild with +excitement one spring morning in the year 1618. The Protestant +Estates of Germany had met there to protest against the aggressions +of the Catholic League and the bad faith of the Emperor, who had +guaranteed freedom of worship in the land and had now sent two +envoys to defy the meeting and declare it illegal. In the old castle +they delivered their message and bade the convention disperse; and +the delegates, when they had heard, seized them and their clerk and +threw them out of the window "in good old Bohemian fashion." They +fell seventy feet and escaped almost without a scratch, which fact +was accepted by the Catholics of that strenuous day as proof of +their miraculous preservation; by the Protestants as evidence that +the devil ever takes care of his own. + +It was the tiny spark that set Europe on fire. Out of it grew the +Thirty Years' War, the most terrible that ever scourged the +civilized world. When Catholic League and Evangelical Union first +mustered their armies, Bohemia had a prosperous population of four +million souls; when the war was over there were less than eight +hundred thousand alive in that unhappy land, and the wolves that +roamed its forests were scarcely more ferocious than the human +starvelings who skulked among the smoking ruins of burned towns and +hamlets. Other states fared little better. Two centuries did not +wipe out the blight of those awful years when rapine and murder, +inspired by bigotry and hate, ran riot in the name of religion. + +In the gloom and horror of it all a noble figure stands forth alone. +It were almost worth the sufferings of a Thirty Years' War for the +world to have gained a Gustav Adolf. The "snow-king" the Emperor's +generals named him when he first appeared on German soil at the head +of his army of Northmen, and they prophesied that he would speedily +melt, once the southern sun shone upon his host. They little knew +the man. He went from victory to victory, less because he was the +greatest general of his day than because he, and all his army with +him, believed himself charged by the Almighty with the defence of +his country and of his faith. The Emperor had attacked both, the +first by attempting to extend his dominion to the Baltic; but +Pommerania and the Baltic provinces were regarded by the Swedish +ruler as the outworks of his kingdom; and Sweden was Protestant. +Hence he drew the sword. "Our brethren in the faith are sighing for +deliverance from spiritual and bodily thraldom," he said to his +people. "Please God, they shall not sigh long." That was his +warrant. Axel Oxenstjerna, his friend and right hand who lived to +finish his work, said of him, "He felt himself impelled by a mighty +spirit which he was unable to resist." As warrior, king, and man, he +was head and shoulders above his time. Gustav Adolf saved religious +liberty to the world. He paid the price with his life, but he would +have asked no better fate. A soldier of God, he met a soldier's +death on the field of battle, in the hour of victory. + +A man of destiny he was to his people as to himself. Long years +before his birth, upon the appearance of the comet of 1577, Tycho +Brahe, the astronomer, who was deep in the occultism of his day, had +predicted that a prince would appear in Finland who would do great +things in Germany and deliver the Protestant peoples from the +oppression of the popes, and the prophecy was applied to Gustav +Adolf by his subjects all through his life. He was born on December +9, 1594, old style, as they still reckon time in Russia. Very early +he showed the kind of stuff he was made of. When he was yet almost a +baby he was told that there were snakes in the park, and showed +fight at once: "Give me a stick and I will kill them." With the +years he grew into a handsome youth who read his books, knew his +Seneca by heart, was fond of the poets and the great orators, and +mastered eight languages, living and dead. At seventeen he buckled +on the sword and put the books away, but kept Xenophon as his +friend; for he was a military historian after his own heart. He was +then Duke of Finland. + +The King, his father, was a stern but observant man who, seeing his +bent, threw him with soldiers to his heart's content, glad to have +it so, for it was a warlike age. From his tenth year he let him sit +in council with him and early delegated to him the duty of answering +ambassadors from foreign countries. The lad was the only one who +dared oppose the king when he was in a temper, and often he made +peace and healed wounds struck in anger. The people worshipped the +fair young prince, and his father, when he felt the palsy of old age +and bodily infirmities creeping upon him and thought of his +unfinished tasks, would murmur as his eyes rested upon the bonny +youth: "_Ille faciet_--He will do it." There is still in existence a +document in which he laid down to him his course as a sovereign. +"First of all," he writes, "you shall fear God and honor your father +and mother. Give your brothers and sisters brotherly affection; love +your father's faithful servants and requite them after their due. Be +gracious to your subjects; punish evil and love the good. Believe in +men, but find out first what is in them. Hold by the law without +respect of person." + +It was good advice to a prince, and the king took it to heart. On +the docket of the Supreme Court at Stockholm is a letter written by +Gustav Adolf to the judges and ordered by him to be entered there, +which tells them plainly that if any of them is found perverting +justice to suit him, the King, or any one else, he will have him +flayed alive and his hide nailed to the judgment-seat, his ears +to the pillory! Not a nice way of talking to dignified judges, +perhaps, but then the prescription was intended to suit the +practice, if there was need. + +The young king earned his spurs in a war with Denmark that came near +being his last as it was his first campaign. He and his horsemen +were surprised by the Danes on a winter's night as they were warming +themselves by a fire built of the pews in the Wittsj church, and +they cut their way through only after a desperate fight on the +frozen lake. The ice broke under the king's horse and he was going +down when two of his men caught him in the nick of time. He got away +with the loss of his sword, his pistols, and his gloves. "I will +remember you with a crust that shall do for your bairns too," he +promised one of his rescuers, a stout peasant lad, and he kept his +word. Thomas Larsson's descendants a generation ago still tilled the +farm the King gave him. When the trouble with Denmark was over for +the time being, he settled old scores with Russia and Poland in a +way that left Sweden mistress of the Baltic. In the Polish war he +was wounded twice and was repeatedly in peril of his life. Once he +was shot in the neck, and, as the bullet could not be removed, it +ever after troubled him to wear armor. His officers pleaded with him +to spare himself, but his reply was that Csar and Alexander did not +skulk behind the lines; a general must lead if he expected his men +to follow. + +In this campaign he met the League's troops, sent to chase him back +to his own so that Wallenstein, the leader of the imperial armies, +might be "General of the Baltic Sea," unmolested. "Go to Poland," he +commanded one of his lieutenants, "and drive the snow-king out; or +else tell him that I shall come and do it myself." The proud soldier +never knew how near he came to entertaining the snow-king as his +unwilling guest then. In a fight between his rear-guard and the +imperial army Gustav Adolf was disarmed and taken prisoner by two +troopers. There was another prisoner who had kept his pistol. He +handed it to the King behind his back and with it he shot one of his +captors and brained the other. For all that they nearly got him. He +saved himself only by wriggling out of his belt and leaving it in +the hands of the enemy. Eight years he campaigned in Poland and +Prussia, learning the arts of war. Then he was ready for his +life-work. He made a truce with Poland that freed his hands for a +season, and went home to Sweden. + +That spring (1629) he laid before the Swedish Estates his plan of +freeing the Protestants. To defend Sweden, he declared, was to +defend her faith, and the Estates voted supplies for the war. To +gauge fully the splendid courage of the nation it must be remembered +that the whole kingdom, including Finland, had a population of only +a million and a half at the time and was preparing to attack the +mighty Roman empire. In the first year of the war the Swedish budget +was thirteen millions of dollars, of which nine and a half went for +armaments. The whole army which Gustav Adolf led into Germany +numbered only 14,000 soldiers, but it was made up of Swedish +veterans led by men whose names were to become famous for all time, +and welded together by an unshakable belief in their commander, a +rigid discipline and a religious enthusiasm that swayed master and +men with a common impulse. Such a combination has in all days proven +irresistible. + +The King's farewell to his people--he was never to see Sweden +again--moved a nation to tears. He spoke to the nobles, the clergy +and to the people, admonishing them to stand together in the hard +years that were coming and gave them all into the keeping of God. +They stood on the beach and watched his ships sail into the sunset +until they were swallowed up in glory. Then they went back home to +take up the burden that was their share. On the Rgen shore the King +knelt with his men and thanked God for having brought them safe +across the sea, then seized a spade, and himself turned the first +sod in the making of a camp. "Who prays well, fights well," he said. + +He was not exactly hospitably received. The old Duke of Pommerania +would have none of him, begged him to go away, and only when the +King pointed to his guns and hinted that he had keys well able to +open the gates of Stettin, his capital, did he give in and promise +help. The other German princes, with one or two exceptions, were as +cravenly short-sighted. They held meetings and denounced the Emperor +and his lawless doings, but Gustav they would not help. The princes +of Brandenburg and of Saxony, the two Protestant Electors of the +empire, were rather disposed to hinder him, if they might, though +Brandenburg was his brother-in-law. Only when the King threatened to +burn the city of Berlin over his head did he listen. While he was +yet laboring with them, recruiting his army and keeping it in +practice by driving the enemy out of Pommerania, news reached him of +the fall of Magdeburg, the strongest city in northern Germany, that +had of its own free will joined his cause. + +The sacking of Magdeburg is one of the black deeds of history. In a +night the populous city was reduced to a heap of smoking ruins under +which twenty thousand men, women, and children lay buried. Not since +the fall of Jerusalem, said Pappenheim, Tilly's famous cavalry +leader to whom looting and burning were things of every day, had so +awful a visitation befallen a town. Only the great cathedral and a +few houses near it were left standing. The history of warfare of the +Christian peoples of that day reads like a horrid nightmare. The +fighting armies left a trail of black desolation where they passed. +"They are not made up of birds that feed on air," sneered Tilly. +Peaceful husbandmen were murdered, the young women dragged away to +worse than slavery, and helpless children spitted upon the lances +of the wild landsknechts and tossed with a laugh into the blazing +ruins of their homes. But no such foul blot cleaves to the memory of +Gustav Adolf. While he lived his men were soldiers, not demons. In +his tent the work of Hugo Grotius on the rights of the nations in +war and peace lay beside the Bible and he knew them both by heart. +When he was gone, the fame of some of his greatest generals was +smirched by as vile orgies as Tilly's worst days had witnessed. It +is told of John Banr, one of the most brilliant of them, that he +demanded ransom of the city of Prix, past which his way led. The +city fathers permitted themselves an untimely jest: "Prix giebt +nichts--Prix gives nothing," they said. Banr was as brief: "Prix +wird zu nichts--Prix comes to nothing," and his army wiped it out. + +Grief and anger almost choked the King when he heard of Magdeburg's +fate. "I will avenge that on the Old Corporal (Tilly's nickname)," +he cried, "if it costs my life." Without further ado he forced the +two Electors to terms and joined the Saxon army to his own. On +September 7, 1631, fifteen months after he had landed in Germany, he +met Tilly face to face at Breitenfeld, a village just north of +Leipzig. The Emperor's host in its brave show of silver and plumes +and gold, the plunder of many campaigns under its invincible leader, +looked with contempt upon the travel-worn Swedes in their poor, +soiled garb. The stolid Finns sat their mean but wiry little horses +very unlike Pappenheim's dreaded Walloons, descendants of the +warlike Belg of Gaul who defied the Germans of old in the forest of +the Ardennes and joined Csar in his victorious march. But Tilly +himself was not deceived. He knew how far this enemy had come and +with what hardships cheerfully borne; how they had routed the +Russians, written laws for the Poles in their own land, and +overthrown armies and forts that barred their way. He would wait for +reinforcements; but his generals egged him on, said age had made him +timid and slow, and carried the day. + +The King slept in an empty cart the night before the battle and +dreamed that he wrestled with Tilly and threw him, but that he tore +his breast with his teeth. When all was ready in the morning he rode +along the front and told his fusiliers not to shoot till they saw +the white in the enemy's eyes, the horsemen not to dull their +swords by hacking the helmets of the Walloons: "Cut at their horses +and they will go down with them." In the pause before the onset he +prayed with head uncovered and lowered sword, and his voice carried +to the farthest lines: + +"Thou, God, in whose hands are victory and defeat, look graciously +upon thy servants. From distant lands and peaceful homes have we +come to battle for freedom, truth and thy gospel. Give us victory +for thy holy name's sake, Amen!" + +Tilly had expected the King to attack, but the fiery Pappenheim +upset his plans. The smoke of the guns drifted in the faces of the +Swedes and the King swung his army to the south to get the wind +right. In making the turn they had to cross a brook and this moment +Pappenheim chose for his charge. Like a thunderbolt his Walloons +fell upon them. The Swedish fire mowed them down like ripened grain +and checked their impetuous rush. They tried to turn the King's +right and so outflank him; but the army turned with them and stood +like a rock. The extreme mobility of his forces was Gustav Adolf's +great advantage in his campaigns. He revised the book of military +tactics up to date. The imperial troops were massed in solid +columns, after the old Spanish fashion, the impact of which was hard +to resist when they struck. The King's, on the contrary, moved in +smaller bodies, quickly thrown upon the point of danger, and his +artillery was so distributed among them as to make every shot tell +on the compact body of the enemy. Whichever way Pappenheim turned he +found a firm front, bristling with guns, opposing him. Seven times +he threw himself upon the living wall; each time his horsemen were +flung back, their lines thinned and broken. The field was strewn +with their dead. Tilly, anxiously watching, threw up his hands in +despair. "This man will lose me honor and fame, and the Emperor his +lands," he cried. The charge ended in wild flight, and Tilly saw +that he must himself attack, to turn the tide. + +On the double-quick his columns of spearmen charged down the +heights, swept the Saxons from the field, and fell upon the Swedish +left. The shock was tremendous. General Gustav Horn gave back to let +his second line come up, and held the ground stubbornly against +fearful odds. Word was brought the King of his danger. With the +right wing that had crushed Pappenheim he hurried to the rescue. In +the heat of the fight the armies had changed position, and the +Swedes found themselves climbing the hill upon which Tilly's +artillery was posted. Seeing this, the King made one of the rapid +movements that more than once won him the day. Raising the cry, +"Remember Magdeburg!" he carried the position with his Finns by a +sudden overwhelming assault, and turned the guns upon the dense +masses of the enemy fighting below. + +In vain they stormed the heights. Both wings and the centre closed +in upon them, and the day was lost. Tilly fled, wounded, and +narrowly escaped capture. A captain in the Swedish army, who was +called Long Fritz because of his great height, was at his heels +hammering him on the head with the butt of his pistol. A staff +officer shot him down in passing, and freed his chief. Twilight fell +upon a battle-field where seven thousand men lay dead, two-thirds of +them the flower of the Emperor's army. Blood-stained and +smoke-begrimed, Gustav Adolf and his men knelt on the field and +thanked God for the victory. + +Had the King's friend and adviser, Axel Oxenstjerna, been with him +he might have marched upon Vienna then, leaving the Protestant +Estates to settle their own affairs, and very likely have ended the +war. Gustav Adolf thought of Tilly who would return with another +army. Oxenstjerna saw farther, weighing things upon the scales of +the diplomatist. + +"How think you we would fare," asked the King once, when the +chancellor saw obstacles in their way which he would brush aside, +"if my fire did not thaw the chill in you?" + +"But for my chill cooling your Majesty's fire," was his friend's +retort, "you would have long since been burned up." The King laughed +and owned that he was right. + +Instead of bearding the Emperor in his capital he turned toward the +Rhine where millions of Protestants were praying for his coming and +where his army might find rest and abundance. The cathedral city of +Wrzburg he took by storm. The bishop who ruled it fled at his +approach, but the full treasury of the Jesuits fell into his hands. +The Madonna of beaten gold and the twelve solid silver apostles, +famous throughout Europe, were sent to the mint and coined into +money to pay his army. In the cellar they found chests filled with +ducats. The bottom fell out of one as they carried it up and the +gold rolled out on the pavement. The soldiers swarmed to pick it up, +but a good many coins stuck to their pockets. The King saw it and +laughed: "Since you have them, boys, keep them." The dead were still +lying in the castle yard after the siege, a number of monks among +them. The color of some of them seemed high for corpses. "Arise from +the dead," he said waggishly, "no one will hurt you," and the +frightened monks got upon their feet and scampered away. + +Frankfort opened its gates to his victorious host and Nrnberg +received him as a heaven-sent liberator. But Tilly was in the field +with a fresh army, burning to avenge Breitenfeld. He had surprised +General Horn at Bamberg and beaten him. At the approach of the King +he camped where the river Lech joins the Danube, awaiting attack. +There was but one place to cross to get at him, and right there he +stood. The king seized Donauworth and Ulm, and under cover of the +fire of seventy guns threw a bridge across the Lech. Three hundred +Finns carrying picks and spades ran across the shaky planks upon +which the fire of Tilly's whole artillery park was concentrated. +Once across, they burrowed in the ground like moles and, with +bullets raining upon them, threw up earthworks for shelter. Squad +after squad of volunteers followed. Duke Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar +swam his horsemen across the river farther up-stream and took the +Bavarian troops in the flank, beating them back far enough to let +him join the Finns at the landing. The King himself was directing +the artillery on the other shore, aiming the guns with his own hand. +The Walloons, Tilly's last hope, charged, but broke under the +withering fire. In desperation the old field-marshal seized the +standard and himself led the forlorn hope. Half-way to the bridge he +fell, one leg shattered by a cannon-ball, and panic seized his men. +The imperialists fled in the night, carrying their wounded leader. +He died on the march soon after. Men said of him that he had served +his master well. + +The snow-king had not melted in the south. He was master of the +Roman empire from the Baltic to the Alps. The way to Austria and +Italy lay open before him. Protestant princes crowded to do him +homage, offering him the imperial crown. But Gustav Adolf did not +lose his head. Toward the humbled Catholics he showed only +forbearance and toleration. In Munich he visited the college of the +Jesuits, and spoke long with the rector in the Latin tongue, +assuring him of their safety as long as they kept from politics and +plotting. The armory in that city was known to be the best stocked +in all Europe and the King's surprise was great when he found +gun-carriages in plenty, but not a single cannon. Looking about him, +he saw evidence that the floor had been hastily relaid and +remembered the "dead" monks at Wrzburg. He had it taken up and a +dark vault appeared. The King looked into it. + +"Arise!" he called out, "and come to judgment," and amid shouts of +laughter willing hands brought out a hundred and forty good guns, +welcome renforcements. + +The ignorant Bavarian peasants had been told that the King was the +very anti-Christ, come to harass the world for its sins, and carried +on a cruel guerilla warfare upon his army. They waylaid the Swedes +by night on their foraging trips and maimed and murdered those they +caught with fiendish tortures. The bitterest anger filled Gustav +Adolf's soul when upon his entry into Landshut the burgomaster knelt +at his stirrup asking mercy for his city. + +"Pray not to me," he said harshly, "but to God for yourself and for +your people, for in truth you have need." + +For once thoughts of vengeance seemed to fill his soul. "No, no!" he +thundered when the frightened burgomaster pleaded that his townsmen +should not be held accountable for the cruelty of the country-folk, +"you are beasts, not men, and deserve to be wiped from the earth +with fire and sword." From out the multitude there came a warning +voice: "Will the King now abandon the path of mercy for the way of +vengeance and visit his wrath upon these innocent people?" No one +saw the speaker. The day was oppressively hot and the King came near +fainting in the saddle. As he rode out of the city toward the camp, +a bolt of lightning struck the ground beside him and a mighty crash +of thunder rolled overhead. Pale and thoughtful, he rode on. But +Landshut was spared. That evening General Horn brought the anxious +citizens the King's promise of pardon. + +A few weeks later tidings reached Gustav Adolf that Wallenstein and +the Elector of Bavaria were marching to effect a junction at +Nrnberg. If they took the city, his line of communication was cut +and his army threatened. Wallenstein, who was a traitor, had been in +disgrace; but he was a great general and in his dire need Emperor +Ferdinand had no one else to turn to. So he took him back on his own +terms, and in the spring he had an army of forty thousand veterans +in the field. This was the host he was leading against Nrnberg. But +the King got there first and intrenched himself so strongly that +there was no ousting him. Wallenstein followed suit and for eleven +weeks the enemies eyed one another from their "lagers," neither +willing to risk an attack. In the end Gustav Adolf tried, but even +his Finns could not take the impregnable heights the enemy held. At +last he went away with colors flying and bands playing, right under +the enemy's walls, in the hope of tempting him out. But he never +stirred. + +When Wallenstein was sure he had gone, he burned his camp and +turned toward Saxony to punish the Elector for joining the Swedes. A +wail of anguish went up from that unhappy land and the King heard it +clear across the country. By forced marches he hurried to the rescue +of his ally, picking up Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar on the way. At +Naumburg the people crowded about him and sought to kiss or even to +touch his garments. The King looked sadly at them. "They put their +trust in me, poor weak mortal, as if I were the Almighty. It may be +that He will punish their folly soon upon the object of their +senseless idolatry." He had come to stay, but when he learned that +Wallenstein had sent Pappenheim away to the west, thus weakening his +army, and was going into winter quarters at Ltzen, near Leipzig, a +half-day's march from the memorable Breitenfeld, he broke camp at +once and hastened to attack him. Starting early, his army reached +Ltzen at nightfall on November 15, 1632. + +Wallenstein believed the campaign was over for that year and the +Swedes in winter quarters, and was taken completely by surprise. Had +the King given battle that night, he would have wiped the enemy +out. Two things, in themselves of little account, delayed him: a +small brook that crossed his path, and the freshly plowed fields. +His men were tired after the long march and he decided to let them +rest. It was Wallenstein's chance. Overnight he posted his army +north of the highway that leads from Ltzen to Leipzig, dug deep the +ditches that enclosed it, and made breastworks of the dirt. Sunrise +found sheltered behind them twenty-seven thousand seasoned veterans +to whom Gustav Adolf could oppose but twenty thousand; but he had +more guns and they were better served. + +As the day broke the Swedish army, drawn up in battle array, intoned +Luther's hymn, "A mighty fortress is our God," and cheered the King. +He wore a leathern doublet and a gray mantle. To the pleadings of +his officers that he put on armor he replied only, "God is my +armor." "To-day," he cried as he rode along the lines, "will end all +our hardships." He himself took command of the right wing, the +gallant Duke Bernhard of the left. As at Breitenfeld, the rallying +cry was, "God with us!" + +The King hoped to crush his enemy utterly, and the whole line +attacked at once with great fury. From the start victory leaned +toward the Swedish army. Then suddenly in the wild tumult of battle +a heavy fog settled upon the field. What followed was all confusion. +No one knows the rights of it to this day. The King led his famous +yellow and blue regiments against the enemy's left. "The black +fellows there," he shouted, pointing to the Emperor's cuirassiers in +their black armor, "attack them!" Just then an adjutant reported +that his infantry was hard pressed. "Follow me," he commanded, and, +clapping spurs to his horse, set off at full speed for the +threatened quarter. In the fog he lost his way and ran into the +cuirassiers. His two attendants were shot down and a bullet crushed +the King's right arm. He tried to hide the fact that he was wounded, +but pain and loss of blood made him faint and he asked the Duke of +Lauenburg who rode with him to help him out of the crush. At that +moment a fresh troop of horsemen bore down upon them and their +leader, Moritz von Falkenberg, shot the King through the body with +the exultant cry, "You I have long sought!" The words had hardly +left his lips when he fell with a bullet through his head. + +The King swayed in the saddle and lost the reins. "Save yourself," +he whispered to the Duke, "I am done for." The Duke put his arm +around him to support him, but the cuirassiers surged against them +and tore them apart. The King's horse was shot in the neck and threw +its rider. Awhile he hung by the stirrup and was dragged over the +trampled field. Then the horse shook itself free and ran through the +lines, spreading the tidings of the King's fall afar. + +A German page, Leubelfing, a lad of eighteen, was alone with the +King. He sprang from his horse and tried to help him into the saddle +but had not the strength to do it. Gustav Adolf was stout and very +heavy. While he was trying to lift him some Croats rode up and +demanded the name of the wounded man. The page held his tongue, and +they ran him through. Gustav Adolf, to save him, said that he was +the King.[1] At that they shot him through the head, and showered +blows upon him. When the body was found in the night it was naked. +They had robbed and stripped him. + +[Footnote 1: This is the story as the page told it. He lived two +days.] + +The King was dead. Through the Swedish ranks Duke Bernhard shouted +the tidings. "Who now cares to live? Forward, to avenge his death!" +With the blind fury of the Berserkers of old the Swedes cleared the +ditches, stormed the breastworks, and drove the foe in a panic +before them. The Duke's arm was broken by a bullet. He hardly knew +it. With his regiment he rode down the crew of one of the enemy's +batteries and swept on. In the midst of it all a cry resounded over +the plain that made the runaways halt and turn back. + +"Pappenheim! Pappenheim is here!" + +He had come with his Walloons in answer to the general's summons. +"Where is the King?" he asked, and they pointed to the Finnish +brigade. With a mighty crash the two hosts that had met so often +before came together. Wallenstein mustered his scattered forces and +the King's army was attacked from three sides at once. The yellow +brigade fell where it stood almost to the last man. The blue fared +little better. Slowly the Swedish infantry gave back. The battle +seemed lost. + +But the tide turned once more. In the hottest fight Pappenheim +fell, pierced by three bullets. The "man of a hundred scars" died, +exulting that the King whom he hated had gone before. With his death +the Emperor's men lost heart. The Swedes charged again and again +with unabated fury. Night closed in with Wallenstein's centre still +unbroken; but he had lost all his guns. Under cover of the darkness +he made his escape. The King's army camped upon the battle-field. +The carnage had been fearful; nine thousand were slain. It was +Wallenstein's last fight. With the remnants of his army he retreated +to Bohemia, sick and sore, and spent his last days there plotting +against his master. He died by an assassin's hand. + +The cathedrals of Vienna, Brussels, and Madrid rang with joyful Te +Deums at the news of the King's death. The Spanish capital +celebrated the "triumph" with twelve days of bull-fighting. Emperor +Ferdinand was better than his day; he wept at the sight of the +King's blood-stained jacket. The Protestant world trembled; its hope +and strength were gone. But the Swedish people, wiping away their +tears, resolved stoutly to carry on Gustav Adolf's work. The men he +had trained led his armies to victory on yet many a stricken field. +Peace came at length to Europe; the last religious war had been +fought and won. Freedom of worship, liberty of conscience, were +bought at the cost of the kingliest head that ever wore a crown. The +great ruler's life-work was done. + +Gustav Adolf was in his thirty-eighth year when he fell. Of stature +he was tall and stout, a fair-haired, blue-eyed giant, stern in war, +gentle in the friendships of peace. He was a born ruler of men. +Though he was away fighting in foreign lands all the years of his +reign, he kept a firm grasp on the home affairs of his kingdom. One +traces his hand everywhere, ordering, shaping, finding ways, or +making them where there was none. The valuable mines of Sweden were +ill managed. The metal was exported in coarse pigs to Germany for +very little, worked up there, and resold to Sweden at the highest +price. He created a Board of Mines, established smelteries, and the +day came when, instead of going abroad for its munitions of war, +Sweden had for its customers half Europe. Like Christian of Denmark +with whom he disagreed, he encouraged industries and greatly +furthered trade and commerce. He built highways and canals, and he +did not forget the cause of instruction. Upon the university at +Upsala he bestowed his entire personal patrimony of three hundred +and thirteen farms as a free gift. His people honor him with cause +as the real founder of the Swedish system of education. + +The master he was always. Sweden had, on one hand, a powerful, able +nobility; on the other, a strong, independent peasantry,--a combination +full of pitfalls for a weak ruler, but with equal promise of great +things under the master hand. His father had cowed the stubborn +nobles with the headsman's axe. Gustav Adolf drew them to him and +imbued them with his own spirit. He found them a contentious party +within the state; he left them its strongest props in the conduct of +public affairs. Nor was it always with persuasion he worked. His +reward for the unjust judge has been quoted. When the council failed +to send him supplies in Germany, pleading failure of crops as their +excuse, he wrote back: "You speak of the high prices of corn. +Probably they are high because those who have it want to profit by +the need of others." And he set a new chief over the finances. On +the other hand, he gave shape to the relations between king and +people. The Riksdag held its sessions, but the laws that ruled it +were so vague that it was no unusual thing for men who were not +members at all to attend and join in the debates. Gustav Adolf put +an abrupt end to "a state of things that exposed Sweden to the +contempt of the nations." As he ordered it, the initiative remained +with the crown; it was the right of the Riksdag to complain and +discuss; of the King to "choose the best" after hearing all sides. + +As a young prince, Gustav Adolf fell deeply in love with Ebba Brahe, +the beautiful daughter of one of Sweden's most powerful noblemen. +The two had been play-mates and became lovers. But the old queen +frowned upon the match. He was the coming king, she was a subject, +and the queen managed, with the help of Oxenstjerna, who was +Gustav's best friend all through his life, to make him give up his +love. "Then I will never marry," he cried in a burst of tempestuous +grief. But when the queen had got Ebba Brahe safely married to one +of his father's famous generals, he wedded the lovely sister of the +Elector of Brandenburg. She adored her royal husband, but never took +kindly to Sweden, and the people did not like her. They clung to the +great king's early love, and to this day they linger before the +picture of the beautiful Ebba in the Stockholm castle when they come +from his grave in the Riddarholm church, while they pass the queen's +by with hardly a glance. It is recorded that Ebba made her husband a +good and dutiful wife. If her thoughts strayed at times to the old +days and what might have been, it is not strange. In one of those +moods she wrote on a window-pane in the castle: + + I am happy in my lot, + And thanks I give to God. + +The queen-mother saw it and wrote under it her own version: + + You wouldn't, but you must. + 'Tis the lot of the dust. + + + + +KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN + + +Of all the foolish wars that were ever waged, it would seem that the +one declared by Denmark against Sweden in 1657 had the least excuse. +A century before, the two countries had fought through eight bitter +years over the momentous question whether Denmark should carry in +her shield the three lions that stood for the three Scandinavian +kingdoms, the Swedish one having set up for itself in the +dissolution of the union between them, and at the end of the fight +they were where they had started: each of them kept the whole brood. +But this war was without even that excuse. Denmark was helplessly +impoverished. Her trade was ruined; the nobles were sucking the +marrow of the country. Of the freehold farms that had been its +strength scarce five thousand were left in the land. It could hardly +pay its way in days of peace. Its strongholds lay in ruins; it had +neither arms, ammunition, nor officers. On its roster of thirty +thousand men for the national defence were carried the dead and the +yet unborn, while the Swedish army of tried veterans had gone from +victory to victory under a warlike king. To cap the climax, +Copenhagen had been harassed by pestilence that had killed one-fifth +of its fifty thousand people. + +So ill matched were they when a stubborn king forced a war that +could end only in disaster. When one of his councillors advised +against the folly, he caned him and sent him into exile. Yet out of +the fiery trial this king came a hero; his queen, whose pride and +wasteful vanity[1] had done its full share in bringing the country +to the verge of ruin, became the idol of the nation. In the hour of +its peril she grew to the stature of a great woman who shared danger +and hardship with her people and by her example put hope and courage +into their hearts. + +[Footnote 1: It is of record that Queen Sofie Amalie used one-third +of the annual revenues of the country for her household. The menu of +a single "rustic dinner" of the court mentions 200 courses and +nearly as many kinds of preserves and dessert, served on gold, with +wines in corresponding abundance.] + +Karl Gustav, the Swedish king, was campaigning in Poland, but as +soon as he could turn around he marched his army against Denmark, +scattered the forces that opposed him, and before news of his +advance had reached Copenhagen knocked at the gate of Denmark +demanding "speech of brother Frederik in good Swedish." A winter of +great severity had bridged the Baltic and the sounds of the island +kingdom. In two weeks he led his army, horse, foot, and guns, over +the frozen seas where hardly a wagon had dared cross before. Great +rifts yawned in their way, and whole companies were swallowed up; +his own sleigh sank in the deep, but nothing stopped him. Danish +emissaries came pleading for peace. He met them on the way to the +capital, surrounded by his Finnish horsemen, and gave scant ear to +their speeches while he drove on. Before the city he halted and +dictated a peace so humiliating that one of the Danish commissioners +exclaimed when he came to sign, "I wish I could not write." Perhaps +the same wish troubled the conqueror's ambitious dreams. The peace +was broken as swiftly as made. In five months he was back before +Frederik's capital with his whole army, while a Swedish fleet +anchored in the roadstead outside. "What difference does it make to +you," was the contemptuous taunt flung at the anxious envoys who +sought his camp, "whether the name of your king is Karl or Frederik +so long as you are safe?" He had come to make an end of Denmark. + +Copenhagen was almost without defences. The old earth walls mounted +only six guns, with breastworks scarce knee-high. In places King +Karl could have driven his sleigh into the heart of the city at the +head of his army. But for the second time he hesitated when a swift +blow would have won all--and lost. Overnight the Danish nation awoke +to a fight for its life. King and people, till then strangers, in +that hour became one. Frederik the Third met the craven counsel that +he fly to Norway with the proud answer, "I will die in my nest, if +need be, and my wife with me." With a shout the burghers swore to +fight to the last man. The walls of the city rose as if by magic. +Nobles and mechanics, clergy and laborers, students, professors and +sailors worked side by side; high-born women wheeled barrows. Every +tree was cut down and made into palisades. The crops ripening in +the fields were gathered in haste and the cattle driven in. The city +had been provisioned for barely a week and garrisoned by four +hundred raw recruits. Sailors from the useless ships took out their +guns and mounted them in the redoubts. Peasants flocked in and were +armed with battle-axes, clubs, and boat-hooks when the supply of +muskets gave out. When Karl Gustav drew his lines tight he faced six +thousand determined men behind strong walls. The city stood in a +ring of blazing fires. Its defenders were burning down the houses +and woods beyond the moats to clear the way for their gunners. The +King watched the sight from his horse in silence. He knew what it +meant; he had fought in the Thirty Years' War: "Now, I vow, we shall +have fighting," was all he said. + +It was not long in coming. On the second night the garrison made a +sortie and drove back the invaders, destroying their works with +great slaughter. Night after night, and sometimes in the broad day, +they returned to the charge, overwhelming the Swedes where least +expected, capturing their guns, their supplies, and their outposts. +Short of arms and ammunition, they took them in the enemy's lines. +In one of these raids Karl Gustav himself was all but made prisoner. +A horseman had him by the shoulder, but he wrenched himself loose +and spurred his horse into the sea where a boat from one of the +ships rescued him. The defence took on something of the fervor of +religious frenzy. Twice a day services were held on the walls of the +city; within, the men who could not bear arms, and the women, +barricaded the streets with stones and iron chains for the last +fight, were it to come. In his place on the wall every burgher had a +hundred brickbats or stones piled up for ammunition, and by night +when the enemy rained red-hot shot upon the city, he fought with a +club or spear in one hand, a torch in the other. + +Eleven weeks the battle raged by night and by day. Then a Dutch +fleet forced its way through the blockade after a fight in which it +lost six ships and two admirals. It brought food, ammunition, and +troops. The joy in the city was great. All day the church bells were +rung, and the people hailed the Dutch as the saviours of the nation. +But when they, too, would thank God for the victory and asked for +the use of the University's hall, they were refused. They were +followers of Calvin and their heresies must not be preached in the +place set apart for teaching the doctrines of the "pure faith," said +the professors, who were Lutheran. It was the way of the day. The +Reformation had learned little from the bigotry of the Inquisition. +The Dutchmen had to be content with the court-house. But the siege +was not over. Another hard winter closed in with the enemy at the +door, burrowing hourly nearer the outworks, and food and fire-wood +grew scarcer day by day in the hard-pressed city. When things were +at the worst pass in February, the Swedes gathered their hosts for a +final assault. In the midnight hour they came on with white shirts +drawn over their uniforms to make it hard to tell them from the +snow. Karl Gustav himself led the storming party and at last was in +the way of "getting speech of brother Frederik," for the Danish King +was as good as his word. He had said that he would die in his nest, +and time and again he had to be sternly reasoned with to prevent him +from exposing himself overmuch. Where the danger was greatest he +was, and beside him ever the queen, all her frivolity gone and +forgotten. She who had danced at the court ftes and followed the +hounds on the chase as if the world had no other cares, became the +very incarnation of the spirit of the bitter and bloody struggle. +All through that winter the royal couple lived in a tent among their +men, and when the alarm was sounded they were first on foot to lead +them. Now that the hour had come, they were in the forefront of the +fight. + +Where the famous pleasure garden Tivoli now is, the strength of the +enemy was massed against the redoubts at the western gate. The name +of "Storm Street" tells yet of the doings of that night. King Karl +had promised to give over the captured town to be sacked by his army +three days and nights, and like hungry wolves they swarmed to the +attack, a mob of sailors and workmen with scaling ladders in the +van. The moats they crossed in spite of the gaps that had been made +in the ice to stop them, but the garrison had poured water over the +walls that froze as it ran, until they were like slippery icebergs. +A bird could have found no foothold on them. Showers of rocks and +junk and clubs fell upon the laddermen. Three times Karl Gustav +hurled his columns against them; as often they were driven back, +broken and beaten. A few gained a foothold on the walls only to be +dashed down to death. The burghers fought for their lives and their +homes. Their women carried boiling pitch and poured it over the +breastworks, and when they had no more, dragged great beams and +rolled them down upon the ladders, sweeping them clear of the enemy. +In the hottest fight Gunde Rosenkrantz, one of the king's +councillors, trod on a fallen soldier and, looking into his face, +saw that it was his own son breathing his last. He bent over and +kissed him, and went on fighting. + +In the early morning hour Karl Gustav gave the order to retreat. The +attack had failed. Many of his general officers were slain; nearly +half of his army was killed, disabled, or captured. Six Swedish +standards were taken by the Danes. The moats were filled with the +dead. The Swedes had "come in their shrouds." The guns of the city +thundered out a triple salute of triumph and the people sang Te +Deums on the walls. Their hardships were not over. Fifteen months +yet the city was invested and the home of daily privation; but their +greatest peril was past. Copenhagen was saved, and with it the +nation; the people had found itself and its king. That autumn a +second Swedish army under the veteran Stenbock was massacred in the +island of Fyen, and Karl Gustav exclaimed when the beaten general +brought him the news, "Since the devil took the sheep he might have +taken the buck too." He never got over it. Three months later he lay +dead, and the siege of Copenhagen was raised in May, 1660. It had +lasted twenty months. + + * * * * * + +Seven score years and one passed, and the morning of Holy +Thursday[2] saw a British fleet sailing slowly up the deep before +Copenhagen, the deck of every ship bristling with guns, their crews +at quarters, Lord Nelson's signal to "close for action" flying from +the top of the flag-ship _Elephant_. Between the fleet and the shore +lay a line of dismantled hulks on which men with steady eyes and +stout hearts were guarding Denmark's honor. Once more it had been +jeopardized by foolish counsel in high places. Danish statesmen had +trifled and temporized while England, facing all Europe alone in the +fight for her life, made ready to strike a decisive blow against the +Armed Neutrality that threatened her supremacy on the sea. Once more +the city had been caught unprepared, defenceless, and once more its +people rose as one man to meet the danger. But it was too late. +Outside, in the Sound, a fleet as great as that led by Nelson +waited, should he fail, to finish his work. That was to destroy the +Danish ships, if need be to bombard the city and so detach Denmark +from the coalition of England's foes. So she chose to consider such +as were not her declared friends. + +[Footnote 2: The battle of Copenhagen was fought April 2, 1801.] + +Denmark had no fighting ships at home to pit against her. Her +sailors were away serving in the merchant marine. She had no +practised gunners, nothing but a huddle of dismantled vessels in her +navy-yard, most of them half-rotten hulks without masts. Those that +had standing rigging were even worse, for none of them had sails and +the falling spars in battle lumbered up the decks and menaced the +crew. But such as they were she made the most of them. Eighteen +hulks were hauled into the channel and moored head and stern. Where +they lay they could not be moved. Only the guns on one side were +therefore of use, while the enemy could turn and manoeuvre. They +were manned by farm lads, mechanics, students, enlisted in haste, +not one of whom had ever smelt powder, and these were matched +against Nelson's grim veterans. Even their commander, J. Olfert +Fischer, had not been under fire before that day, for Denmark had +had peace for eighty years. But his father had served as a +midshipman with Tordenskjold and the son did not flinch, outnumbered +though his force was, two to one, in men and guns. + +The sun shone fair upon the blue waters as the great fleet of +thirty-odd fighting ships sailed up from the south. From the city's +walls and towers a mighty multitude watched it come, unmindful of +peril from shot and shell; the Danish line was not half a mile away. +In the churches whose bells were still ringing when the first gun +was fired from the block-ship _Prvestenen_, the old men and women +prayed through the long day, for there were few homes in Copenhagen +that did not have son, brother, or friend fighting out there. A +single gun answered the challenge, now two and three at once, then +broadside crashed upon broadside with deafening roar. When at length +all was quiet a tremendous report shook the city. It was the +flag-ship _Dannebrog_ that blew up. She was on fire with only three +serviceable guns left when she struck her colors, but no ship of her +name might sail with an enemy's prize crew on board, and she did +not. + +The story of that bloody day has been told many times. Briton and +Dane hoist their flags on April 2 with equal right, for never was +challenge met with more dauntless valor. Lord Nelson owned that of +all the hundred and five battles he had fought this was hottest. On +the _Monarch_, which for hours was under the most galling fire from +the Danish ships, two hundred and twenty of the crew were killed or +wounded. "There was not a single man standing," wrote a young +officer on board of her, "the whole way from the mainmast forward, a +district containing eight guns a side, some of which were run out +ready for firing, others lay dismounted, and others remained as they +were after recoiling.... I hastened down the fore ladder to the +lower deck and felt really relieved to find somebody alive." The +slaughter on the Danish ships was even greater. More than one-fifth +of their entire strength of a little over five thousand men were +slain or wounded. Of the eighteen hulls they lost thirteen, but only +one were the British able to take home with them. The rest were +literally shot to pieces and were burned where they lay. As one +after another was silenced, those yet alive on board spiked their +last guns, if indeed there were any left worth the trouble, threw +their powder overboard and made, for the shore. Twice the Danish +Admiral abandoned his burning ship, the last time taking up his post +in the island battery Tre Kroner. Each time one of the old hulls was +crushed, a Briton pushed into the hole made in the line and raked +the remaining ones fore and aft until their decks were like huge +shambles. The block-ship _Indfdsretten_ bore the concentrated fire +of five frigates and two smaller vessels throughout most of the +battle. Her chief was killed. When the news reached head-quarters on +shore, Captain von Schrdersee, an old naval officer who had been +retired because of ill health, volunteered to take his place. He was +rowed out, but as he came over the side of the ship a cannon-ball +cut him in two. _Prvestenen_, as it was the first to fire a shot, +held out also to the last. One-fourth of her crew lay dead, and her +flag had been shot away three times when the decks threatened to +cave in and Captain Lassen spiked his last guns and left the wreck +to be burned. All through the fight she was the target of ninety +guns to which she could oppose only twenty-nine of her own sixty. + +Nelson had promised Admiral Parker to finish the fight in an hour. +When the battle had lasted three, Parker signalled to him to stop. +Every school-boy knows the story of how Lord Nelson put the glass to +his blind eye and, remarking that he could see no signal, kept right +on. In the end he had to resort to stratagem to force a truce so +that he might disentangle some of his ships that were drifting into +great danger in the narrow channel. The ruse succeeded. Crown Prince +Frederik, moved by compassion for the wounded whom Nelson threatened +to burn with the captured hulks if firing did not stop, ordered +hostilities to cease without consulting the Admiral of the fleet, +and the battle was over. Denmark's honor was saved. "Nothing," wrote +our own Captain Mahan, "could place a nation's warlike fame higher +than did her great deeds that day." All else was lost; for "there +had come upon Denmark one of those days of judgment to which nations +are liable who neglect in time of peace to prepare for war." It had +been long coming, but it had overtaken her at last and found all the +bars down. + +Alongside the _Dannebrog_ throughout her fight with Nelson's +flag-ship, and edging ever closer in under the _Elephant's_ side +until at last the marines were sent to man her rail and keep it away +with their muskets, lay a floating battery mounting twenty guns +under command of a beardless second lieutenant. The name of Peter +Willemoes will live as long as the Danish tongue is spoken. Barely +graduated from the Naval Academy, he was but eighteen when the need +of officers thrust the command of "Floating Battery No. 1" upon him. +So gallantly did he acquit himself that Nelson took notice of the +young man who, every time a broadside crashed into his ship or +overhead, swung his cocked hat and led his men in a lusty cheer. +When after the battle he met the Crown Prince on shore, the English +commander asked to be introduced to his youthful adversary. "You +ought to make an admiral of him," he said, and Prince Frederik +smiled: "If I were to make admirals of all my brave officers, I +should have no captains or lieutenants left." When the _Dannebrog_ +drifted on the shoals, abandoned and burning, Willemoes cut his +cables and got away under cover of the heavy smoke. Having neither +sails nor oars, he was at the mercy of the tide, but luckily it +carried him to the north of the Tre Kroner battery, and he reached +port with forty-nine of his crew of one hundred and twenty-nine dead +or wounded. The people received him as a conqueror returning with +victory. His youth and splendid valor aroused the enthusiasm of the +whole country. Wherever he went crowds flocked to see him as the +hero of "Holy Thursday's Battle." Especially was he the young +people's idol. Sailor that he was, he was "the friend of all pretty +girls," sang the poet of that day. He danced and made merry with +them, but the one of them all on whom his heart was set, so runs the +story, would have none of him, and sent him away to foreign parts, a +saddened lover. + +Meanwhile much praise had not made him vain. "I did my duty," he +wrote to his father, a minor government official in the city of +Odense where four years later Hans Christian Andersen was born on +the anniversary day of the battle, "and I have whole limbs which I +least expected. The Crown Prince and the Admiral have said that I +behaved well." He was to have one more opportunity of fighting his +country's enemy, and this time to the death. + +In the summer of 1807, England was advised that by the treaty of +Tilsit Russia and Prussia had secretly joined Napoleon in his +purpose of finally crushing his mortal enemy by uniting all the +fleets of Europe against her, Denmark's too, by compulsion if +persuasion failed. Without warning a British fleet swooped down upon +the unsuspecting nation, busy with the pursuits of peace, bombarded +and burned Copenhagen when the Commandant refused to deliver the +ships into the hands of the robbers as a "pledge of peace," and +carried away ships, supplies, even the carpenters' tools in the +navy-yard. Nothing was spared. Seventy vessels, sixteen of them +ships of the line, fell into their hands, and supplies that filled +ninety-two transports beside. A single fighting ship was left to +Denmark of all her fleet,--the _Prince Christian Frederik_ of +sixty-eight guns. She happened to be away in a Norwegian port and so +escaped. Willemoes was on leave serving in the Russian navy, but +hastened home when news came of the burning of Copenhagen, and found +a berth under Captain Jessen. + +On March 22, 1808, the _Prince Christian_, so she was popularly +called, hunting a British frigate that was making Danish waters +insecure, met in the Kattegat the _Stately_ and the _Nassau_, each +like herself of sixty-eight guns. The _Nassau_ was the old +_Holsteen_, renamed,--the single prize the victors had carried home +from the battle of Copenhagen. Three British frigates were working +up to join them. The coast of Seeland was near, but wind and tide +cut off escape to the Sound. Captain Jessen ran his ship in close +under the shore so that at the last he might beach her, and awaited +the enemy there. + +The sun had set, but the night was clear when the fight between the +three ships began. With one on either side, hardly a pistol-shot +away, Jessen returned shot for shot, giving as good as they sent, +and with such success that at the end of an hour and a half the +Britons dropped astern to make repairs. The _Prince Christian_ +drifted, helpless, with rudder shot to pieces, half a wreck, rigging +all gone, and a number of her guns demolished. But when the enemy +returned he was hailed with a cheer and a broadside, and the fight +was on once more. This time they were three to one; one of the +British frigates of forty-four guns had come up and joined in. + +When the hull of the _Prince Christian_ was literally knocked to +pieces, and of her 576 men 69 lay dead and 137 wounded, including +the chief and all of his officers who were yet alive, Captain Jessen +determined as a last desperate chance to run one of his opponents +down and board her with what remained of his crew. But his officers +showed him that it was impossible; the ship could not be manoeuvred. +There was a momentary lull in the fire and out of the night came a +cry, "Strike your colors!" The Danish reply was a hurrah and a +volley from all the standing guns. Three broad-sides crashed into +the doomed ship in quick succession, and the battle was over. The +_Prince Christian_ stood upon the shore, a wreck. + +Young Willemoes was spared the grief of seeing the last Danish +man-of-war strike its flag. In the hottest of the fight, as he +jumped upon a gun the better to locate the enemy in the gloom, a +cannon-ball took off the top of his head. He fell into the arms of a +fellow officer with the muttered words, "Oh God! my head--my +country!" and was dead. In his report of the fight Captain Jessen +wrote against his name: "Fell in battle--honored as he is missed." +They made his grave on shore with the fallen sailors, and as the sea +washed up other bodies they were buried with them. + +The British captured the wreck, but they could only set fire to it +after removing the wounded. In the night it blew up where it stood. +That was the end of the last ship of Denmark's proud navy. + + + + +THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE + + +Jens Kofoed was the name of a trooper who served in the disastrous +war of Denmark against Sweden in Karl Gustav's day. He came from the +island of Bornholm in the Baltic, where he tilled a farm in days of +peace. When his troop went into winter quarters, he got a furlough +to go home to receive the new baby that was expected about +Christmas. Most of his comrades were going home for the holidays, +and their captain made no objection. The Swedish king was fighting +in far-off Poland, and no one dreamed that he would come over the +ice with his army in the depth of winter to reckon with Denmark. So +Jens Kofoed took ship with the promise that he would be back in two +weeks. But they were to be two long weeks. They did not hear of him +again for many moons, and then strange tidings came of his doings. +Single-handed he had bearded the Swedish lion, and downed it in a +fair fight--strangest of all, almost without bloodshed. + +The winter storms blew hard, and it was Christmas eve when he made +land, but he came in time to receive, not one new heir, but twin +baby girls. Then there were six of them, counting Jens and his wife, +and a merry Christmas they all had together. On Twelfth Night the +little ones were christened, and then the trooper bethought himself +of his promise to get back soon. The storms had ceased, but worse +had befallen; the sea was frozen over as far as eye reached, and the +island was cut off from all communication with the outer world. +There was nothing for it but to wait. It proved the longest and +hardest winter any one then living could remember. Easter was at +hand before the ice broke up, and let a fishing smack slip over to +Ystad, on the mainland. It came back with news that set the whole +island wondering. Peace had been made, and Denmark had ceded all its +ancient provinces east of the resund to Karl Gustav. Ystad itself +and Skaane, the province in which Jens Kofoed had been campaigning, +were Swedish now, and so was Bornholm. All unknown to its people, +the island had changed hands in the game of war overnight, as it +were. A Swedish garrison was coming over presently to take charge. + +When Jens Kofoed heard it, he sat down and thought things over. If +there was peace, his old captain had no use for him, that was +certain; but there might be need of him at home. What would happen +there, no one could tell. And there were the wife and children to +take care of. The upshot of it all was that he stayed. Only, to be +on the safe side, he got the Burgomaster and the Aldermen in his +home town, Hasle, to set it down in writing that he could not have +got back to his troop for all he might have tried. Kofoed, it will +be seen, was a man with a head on his shoulders, which was well, for +presently he had need of it. + +There were no Danish soldiers in the island, only a peasant militia, +ill-armed and untaught in the ways of war; so no one thought of +resisting the change of masters. The people simply waited to see +what would happen. Along in May a company of one hundred and twenty +men with four guns landed, and took possession of Castle +Hammershus, on the north shore, the only stronghold on the island, +in the name of the Swedish king. Colonel Printzenskld, who had +command, summoned the islanders to a meeting, and told them that he +had come to be their governor. They were to obey him, and that was +all. The people listened and said nothing. + +Perhaps if the new rulers had been wise, things might have kept on +so. The people would have tilled their farms, and paid their taxes, +and Jens Kofoed, with all his hot hatred of the enemy he had fought, +might never have been heard of outside his own island. But the +Swedish soldiers had been through the Thirty Years' War and plunder +had become their profession. They rioted in the towns, doubled the +taxes, put an embargo on trade and export, crushed the industries; +worse, they took the young men and sent them away to Karl Gustav's +wars in foreign lands. They left only the old men and the boys, and +these last they kept a watchful eye on for drafts in days to come. +When the conscripts hid in the woods, so as not to be torn from +their wives and sweethearts, they organized regular man-hunts as if +the quarry were wild beasts, and, indeed, the poor fellows were not +treated much better when caught. + +All summer they did as they pleased; then came word that Karl Gustav +had broken the peace he made, and of the siege of Copenhagen. The +news made the people sit up and take notice. Their rightful +sovereign had ceded the island to the Swedish king, that was one +thing. But now that they were at war again, these strangers who +persecuted them were the public enemy. It was time something were +done. In Hasle there was a young parson with his heart in the right +place, Poul Anker by name. Jens Kofoed sat in his church; he had +been to the wars, and was fit to take command. Also, the two were +friends. Presently a web of conspiracy spread quietly through the +island, gripping priest and peasant, skipper and trader, alike. Its +purpose was to rout out the Swedes. The Hasle trooper and parson +were the leaders; but their secret was well kept. With the tidings +that the Dutch fleet had forced its way through to Copenhagen with +aid for the besieged, and had bottled the Swedish ships up in +Landskrona, came a letter purporting to be from King Frederik +himself, encouraging the people to rise. It was passed secretly +from hand to hand by the underground route, and found the island +ready for rebellion. + +Governor Printzenskld had seen something brewing, but he was a +fearless man, and despised the "peasant mob." However, he sent to +Sweden for a troop of horsemen, the better to patrol the island and +watch the people. Early in December, 1658, just a year after Jens +Kofoed, the trooper, had set out for his home on furlough, the +governor went to Rnne, the chief city in the island, to start off a +ship for the reinforcements. The conspirators sought to waylay him +at Hasle, where he stopped to give warning that all who had not paid +the heavy war-tax would be sold out forthwith; but they were too +late. Master Poul and Jens Kofoed rode after him, expecting to meet +a band of their fellows on the way, but missed them. The parson +stayed behind then to lay the fuse to the mine, while Kofoed kept on +to town. By the time he got there he had been joined by four others, +Aage Svendsn, Klavs Nielsen, Jens Laurssn, and Niels Gummelse. +The last two were town officers. As soon as the report went around +Rnne that they had come, Burgomaster Klaus Kam went to them openly. + +The governor had ridden to the house of the other burgomaster, Per +Larssn, who was not in the plot. His horse was tied outside and he +just sitting down to supper when Jens Kofoed and his band crowded +into the room, and took him prisoner. They would have killed him +there, but his host pleaded for his life. However, when they took +him out in the street, Printzenskld thought he saw a chance to +escape in the crowd and the darkness, and sprang for his horse. But +his great size made him an easy mark. He was shot through the head +as he ran. The man who shot him had loaded his pistol with a silver +button torn from his vest. That was sure death to any goblin on whom +neither lead nor steel would bite, and it killed the governor all +right. The place is marked to this day in the pavement of the main +street as the spot where fell the only tyrant who ever ruled the +island against the people's will. + +The die was cast now, and there was need of haste. Under cover of +the night the little band rode through the island with the news, +ringing the church bells far and near to call the people to arms. +Many were up and waiting; Master Poul had roused them already. At +Hammershus the Swedish garrison heard the clamor, and wondered what +it meant. They found out when at sunrise an army of half the +population thundered on the castle gates summoning them to +surrender. Burgomaster Kam sat among them on the governor's horse, +wearing his uniform, and shouted to the officers in command that +unless they surrendered, he, the governor, would be killed, and his +head sent in to his wife in the castle. The frightened woman's tears +decided the day. The garrison surrendered, only to discover that +they had been tricked. Jens Kofoed took command in the castle. The +Swedish soldiers were set to doing chores for the farmers they had +so lately harassed. The ship that was to have fetched renforcements +from Sweden was sent to Denmark instead, with the heartening news. +They needed that kind there just then. + +But the ex-trooper, now Commandant, knew that a day of reckoning was +coming, and kept a sharp lookout. When the hostile ship _Spes_ was +reported steering in from the sea, the flag of Sweden flew from the +peak of Hammershus, and nothing on land betrayed that there had been +a change. As soon as she anchored, a boat went out with an +invitation from the governor to any officers who might be on board, +to come ashore and arrange for the landing of the troops. The +captain of the ship and the major in charge came, and were made +prisoners as soon as they had them where they could not be seen from +the ship. It blew up to a storm, and the _Spes_ was obliged to put +to sea, but as soon as she returned boats were sent out to land the +soldiers. They sent only little skiffs that could hold not over +three or four, and as fast as they were landed they were overpowered +and bound. Half of the company had been thus disposed of when the +lieutenant on board grew suspicious, and sent word that without the +express orders of the major no more would come. But Jens Kofoed's +wit was equal to the emergency. The next boat brought an invitation +to the lieutenant to come in and have breakfast with the officers, +who would give him his orders there. He walked into the trap; but +when he also failed to return, his men refused to follow. He had +arranged to send them a sign, they said, that everything was all +right. If it did not come, they would sail away to Sweden for help. + +It took some little persuasion to make the lieutenant tell about the +sign, but in the end Jens Kofoed got it. It turned out to be his +pocket-knife. When they saw that, the rest came, and were put under +lock and key with their fellows. + +The ship was left. If that went back, all was lost. Happily both +captain and mate were prisoners ashore. Four boat-loads of +islanders, with arms carefully stowed under the seats, went out with +the mate of the _Spes_, who was given to understand that if he as +much as opened his mouth he would be a dead man. They boarded the +ship, taking the crew by surprise. By night the last enemy was +comfortably stowed, and the ship on her way to Rnne, where the +prisoners were locked in the court-house cellar, with shotted guns +guarding the door. Perhaps it was the cruelties practised by Swedish +troops in Denmark that preyed upon the mind of Jens Kofoed when he +sent the parson to prepare them for death then and there; but +better counsel prevailed. They were allowed to live. The whole war +cost only two lives, the governor's and that of a sentinel at the +castle, who refused to surrender. The mate of the _Spes_ and two +of her crew contrived to escape after they had been taken to +Copenhagen, and from them Karl Gustav had the first tidings of how +he lost the island. + +The captured ship sailed down to Copenhagen with greeting to King +Frederik that the people of Bornholm had chosen him and his heirs +forever to rule over them, on condition that their island was never +to be separated from the Danish Crown. The king in his delight +presented them with a fine silver cup, and made Jens Kofoed captain +of the island, beside giving him a handsome estate. He lived +thirty-three years after that, the patriarch of his people, and +raised a large family of children. Not a few of his descendants are +to-day living in the United States. In the home of one of them in +Brooklyn, New York, is treasured a silver drinking cup which King +Frederik gave to the ex-trooper; but it is not the one he sent back +with his deputation. That one is still in the island of Bornholm. + + + + +CARL LINN, KING OF THE FLOWERS + + +Years ago there grew on the Jonsboda farm in Smland, Sweden, a +linden tree that was known far and wide for its great age and size. +So beautiful and majestic was the tree, and so wide the reach of its +spreading branches, that all the countryside called it sacred. +Misfortune was sure to come if any one did it injury. So thought the +people. It was not strange, then, that the farmer's boys, when they +grew to be learned men and chose a name, should call themselves +after the linden. The peasant folk had no family names in those +days. Sven Carlsson was Sven, the son of Carl; and his son, if his +given name were John, would be John Svensson. So it had always been. +But when a man could make a name for himself out of the big +dictionary, that was his right. The daughter of the Jonsboda farmer +married; and her son played in the shadow of the old tree, and grew +so fond of it that when he went out to preach he also called himself +after it. Nils Ingemarsson was the name he received in baptism, and +to that he added Linnus, never dreaming that in doing it he handed +down the name and the fame of the friend of his play hours to all +coming days. But it was so; for Parson Nils' eldest son, Carl Linn, +or Linnus, became a great man who brought renown to his country and +his people by telling them and all the world more than any one had +ever known before about the trees and the flowers. The King knighted +him for his services to science, and the people of every land united +in acclaiming him the father of botany and the king of the flowers. + +They were the first things he learned to love in his baby world. If +he was cross, they had but to lay him on the grass in the garden and +put a daisy in his hand, and he would croon happily over it for +hours. He was four years old when his father took him to a wedding +in the neighborhood. The men guests took a tramp over the farm, and +in the twilight they sat and rested in the meadow, where the spring +flowers grew. The minister began telling them stories about them; +how they all had their own names and what powers for good or ill +the apothecary found in the leaves and root of some of them. Carl's +father, though barely out of college, was a bright and gifted man. +One of his parishioners said once that they couldn't afford a whole +parson, and so they took a young one; but if that was the way of it, +the men of Stenbrohult made a better bargain than they knew. They +sat about listening to his talk, but no one listened more closely +than little Carl. After that he had thought for nothing else. In the +corner of the garden he had a small plot of his own, and into it he +planted all the wild flowers from the fields, and he asked many more +questions about them than his father could answer. One day he came +back with one whose name he had forgotten. The minister was busy +with his sermon. + +"If you don't remember," he said impatiently, "I will never tell you +the name of another flower." The boy went away, his eyes wide with +terror at the threat; but after that he did not forget a single +name. + +When he was big enough, they sent him to the Latin school at Wexi, +where the other boys nicknamed him "the little botanist." His +thoughts were outdoors when they should have been in the dry books, +and his teachers set him down as a dunce. They did not know that his +real study days were when, in vacation, he tramped the thirty miles +to his home. Every flower and every tree along the way was an old +friend, and he was glad to see them again. Once in a while he found +a book that told of plants, and then he was anything but a dunce. +But when his father, after Carl had been eight years in the school, +asked his teachers what they thought of him, they told him +flatly that he might make a good tailor or shoemaker, but a +minister--never; he was too stupid. + +That was a blow, for the parson of Stenbrohult and his wife had set +their hearts on making a minister of Carl, and small wonder. His +mother was born in the parsonage, and her father and grandfather had +been shepherds of the parish all their lives. There were tears in +the good minister's eyes as he told Carl to pack up and get ready to +go back home; he had an errand at Dr. Rothman's, but would return +presently. The good doctor saw that his patient was heavy of heart +and asked him what was wrong. When he heard what Carl's teachers +had said, he flashed out: + +"What! he not amount to anything? There is not one in the whole lot +who will go as far as he. A minister he won't be, that I'll allow, +but I shall make a doctor of him such as none of them ever saw. You +leave him here with me." And the parson did, comforted in spite of +himself. But Carl's mother could not get over it. It was that +garden, she declared, and when his younger brother as much as +squinted that way, she flew at him with a "You dare to touch it!" +and shook him. + +When Dr. Rothman thought his pupil ready for the university, he sent +him up to Lund, and the head-master of the Latin School gave him the +letter he must bring, to be admitted. "Boys at school," he wrote in +it, "may be likened to young trees in orchard nurseries, where it +sometimes happens that here and there among the saplings there are +some that make little growth, or even appear as wild seedlings, +giving no promise; but when afterwards transplanted to the orchard, +make a start, branch out freely, and at last yield satisfactory +fruit." By good luck, though, Carl ran across an old teacher from +Wexi, one of the few who had believed in him and was glad to see +him. He took him to the Rector and introduced him with warm words of +commendation, and also found him lodgings under the roof of Dr. +Kilian Stobus. + +Dr. Stobus was a physician of renown, but not good company. He was +one-eyed, sickly, lame in one foot, and a gloomy hypochondriac to +boot. Being unable to get around to his patients, he always had one +or two students to do the running for him and to learn as best they +might, in doing it. Carl found a young German installed there as the +doctor's right hand. He also found a library full of books on +botany, a veritable heaven for him. But the gate was shut against +him; the doctor had the key, and he saw nothing in the country lad +but a needy student of no account. Perhaps the Rector had passed the +head-master's letter along. However, love laughs at locksmiths, and +Carl Linnus was hopelessly in love with his flowers. He got on the +right side of the German by helping him over some hard stiles in the +_materia medica_. In return, his fellow student brought him books +out of the library when the doctor had gone to bed, and Carl sat up +studying the big tomes till early cockcrow. Before the house +stirred, the books were back on their shelves, the door locked, and +no one was the wiser. + +No one except the doctor's old mother, whose room was across the +yard. She did not sleep well, and all night she saw the window +lighted in her neighbor's room. She told the doctor that Carl +Linnus fell asleep with the candle burning every single night, and +sometime he would upset it and they would all be burned in their +beds. The doctor nodded grimly; he knew the young scamps. No doubt +they both sat up playing cards till dawn; but he would teach them. +And the very next morning, at two o'clock, up he stumped on his lame +foot to Carl's room, in which there was light, sure enough, and went +in without knocking. + +Carl was so deep in his work that he did not hear him at all, and +the doctor stole up unperceived and looked over his shoulder. There +lay his precious books, which he thought safely locked in the +library, spread out before him, and his pupil was taking notes and +copying drawings as if his life depended upon it. He gave a great +start when Dr. Stobus demanded what he was doing, but owned up +frankly, while the doctor frowned and turned over his notes, leaf by +leaf. + +"Go to bed and sleep like other people," he said gruffly, yet +kindly, when he had heard it all, "and hereafter study in the +daytime;" and he not only gave him a key to his library, but took +him to his own table after that. Up till then Carl had merely been a +lodger in the house. + +When he was at last on the home stretch, as it seemed, an accident +came near upsetting it all. He was stung by an adder on one of his +botanizing excursions, so far from home and help that the bite came +near proving fatal. However, Dr. Stobus' skill pulled him through, +and in after years he got square by labelling the serpent _furia +infernalis_--hell-fury--in his natural history. It was his way of +fighting back. All through his life he never wasted an hour on +controversy. He had no time, he said. But once when a rival made a +particularly nasty attack upon him, he named a new plant after him, +adding the descriptive adjective _detestabilis_--the detestable +so-and-so. On the whole, he had the best of it; for the names he +gave stuck. + +It was during his vacation after the year at Lund that Linnus made +a catalogue of the plants in his father's garden at Stenbrohult that +shows us the country parson as no mean botanist himself; for in the +list, which is preserved in the Academy of Sciences at Stockholm, +are no less than two hundred and twenty-four kinds of plants. Among +them are six American plants that had found their way to Sweden. The +poison ivy is there, though what they wanted of that is hard to +tell, and the four-o'clock, the pokeweed, the milkweed, the pearly +everlasting, and the potato, which was then (1732) classed as a rare +plant. Not until twenty years later did they begin to grow it for +food in Sweden. + +When Carl Linnus went up to Upsala University, his parents had so +far got over their disappointment at his deserting the ministry that +they gave him a little money to make a start with; but they let him +know that no more was coming--their pocket-book was empty. And +within the twelvemonth, for all his scrimping and saving, he was on +the point of starvation. He tells us himself that he depended on +chance for a meal and wore his fellow students' cast-off clothes. +His boots were without soles, and in his cheerless attic room he +patched them with birch bark and card board as well as he could. He +was now twenty-three years old, and it seemed as if he would have to +give up the study that gave him no bread; but still he clung to his +beloved flowers. They often made him forget the pangs of hunger. And +when the cloud was darkest the sun broke through. He was sitting in +the Botanical Garden sketching a plant, when Dean Celsius, a great +orientalist and theologian of his day, passed by. The evident +poverty of the young man, together with his deep absorption in his +work, arrested his attention; he sat down and talked with him. In +five minutes Carl had found a friend and the Dean a helper. He had +been commissioned to write a book on the plants of the Holy Land and +had collected a botanical library for the purpose, but the work +lagged. Here now was the one who could help set it going. That day +Linnus left his attic room and went to live in the Dean's house. +His days of starvation were over. + +In the Dean's employ his organizing genius developed the marvellous +skill of the cataloguer that brought order out of the chaos of +groping and guessing and blundering in which the science of botany +had floundered up till then. Here and there in it all were flashes +of the truth, which Linnus laid hold of and pinned down with his +own knowledge to system and order. Thus the Frenchman, Sebastian +Vaillant, who had died a dozen years before, had suggested a +classification of flowers by their seed-bearing organs, the stamens +and pistils, instead of by their fruits, the number of their petals, +or even by their color, as had been the vague practice of the past. +Linnus seized upon this as the truer way and wrote a brief treatise +developing the idea, which so pleased Dr. Celsius that he got his +young friend a license to lecture publicly in the Botanical Garden. + +The students flocked to hear him. His message was one that put life +and soul into the dry bones of a science that had only wearied them +before. The professor of botany himself sat in the front row and +hammered the floor with his cane in approval. But his very success +was the lecturer's undoing. Envy grew in place of the poverty he had +conquered. The instructor, Nils Rosn, was abroad taking his +doctor's degree. He came home to find his lectures deserted for the +irresponsible teachings of a mere undergraduate. He made grievous +complaint, and Linnus was silenced, to his great good luck. For so +his friend the professor, though he was unable to break the red tape +of the university, got him an appointment to go to Lapland on a +botanical mission. His enemies were only too glad to see him go. + +Linnus travelled more than three thousand miles that summer through +a largely unknown country, enduring, he tells us, more hardships and +dangers than in all his subsequent travels. Again and again he +nearly lost his life in swollen mountain streams, for he would not +wait until danger from the spring freshets was over. Once he was +shot at as he was gathering plants on a hillside, but happily the +Finn who did it was not a good marksman. Fish and reindeer milk were +his food, a pestilent plague of flies his worst trouble. But, he +says in his account of the trip, which is as fascinating a report of +a scientific expedition as was ever penned, they were good for +something, after all, for the migrating birds fed on them. From his +camps on lake or river bank he saw the water covered far and near +with swarms of ducks and geese. The Laplander's larder was easily +stocked. + +He came back from the dangers of the wild with a reputation that was +clinched by his book "The Flora of Lapland," to find the dragon of +professional jealousy rampant still at Upsala. His enemy, Rosn, +persuaded the senate of the university to adopt a rule that no +un-degreed man should lecture there to the prejudice of the +regularly appointed instructors. Tradition has it that Linnus flew +into a passion at that and drew upon Rosn, and there might have +been one regular less but for the interference of bystanders. It may +be true, though it is not like him. Men wore side-arms in those days +just as some people carry pistols in their hip-pockets to-day, and +with as little sense. At least they had the defence, such as it was, +that it was the fashion. However, it made an end of Linnus at +Upsala for the time. He sought a professorship at Lund, but another +got it. Then he led an expedition of his former students into the +Dalecarlia mountains and so he got to Falun, where Baron Reuterholm, +one of Sweden's copper magnates, was seeking a guide for his two +sons through the region where his mines were. + +Linnus was not merely a botanist, but an all around expert in +natural science. He took charge of the boys and, when the trip was +ended, started a school at Falun, where he taught mineralogy. It had +been hit or miss with the miners up till then. There was neither +science nor system in their work. What every-day experience or the +test of fire had taught a prospector, in delving among the rocks, +was all there was of it. Linnus was getting things upon a +scientific basis, when he met and fell in love with the handsome +daughter of Dr. Morus. The young people would marry, but the +doctor, though he liked the mineralogist, would not hear of it till +he could support a wife. So he gave him three years in which to go +abroad and get a degree that would give him the right to practise +medicine anywhere in Sweden. The doctor's daughter gave him a +hundred dollars she had saved, and her promise to wait for him. + +He went to Harderwyk in Holland and got his degree at the university +there on the strength of a thesis on the cause of malarial fever, +with the conclusions of which the learned doctors did not agree; +but they granted the diploma for the clever way in which he defended +it. On the way down he tarried in Hamburg long enough to give the +good burghers a severe jolt. They had a seven-headed serpent that +was one of the wonders of the town. The keen sight of the young +naturalist detected the fraud at once; the heads were weasels' +heads, covered with serpent's skin and cunningly sewed on the head +of the reptile. The shape of the jaws betrayed the trick. But the +Hamburgers were not grateful. The serpent was an asset. There was a +mortgage on it of ten thousand marks; now it was not worth a +hundred. They took it very ill, and Linnus found himself suddenly +so unpopular that he was glad to get out of town overnight. What +became of the serpent history does not record. + +Linnus had carried more than his thesis on malarial fever with him +to Holland. At the bottom of his trunk were the manuscripts of two +books on botany which, he told his sweetheart on parting, would yet +make him famous. Probably she shook her head at that. Pills and +powders, and broken legs to set, were more to her way of thinking, +and her father's, too. If only he had patients, fame might take care +of itself. But now he put them both to shame. At Leyden he found +friends who brought out his first book, "Systema Natur," in which +he divides all nature into the three kingdoms known to every child +since. It was hardly more than a small pamphlet, but it laid the +foundation for his later fame. To the enlarged tenth edition +zologists point back to this day as to the bed-rock on which they +built their science. The first was quickly followed by another, and +yet another. Seven large volumes bearing his name had come from the +press before he set sail for home, a whole library in botany, and a +new botany at that, so simple and sensible that the world adopted it +at once. + +Dr. Hermann Boerhaave was at that time the most famous physician in +Europe. He was also the greatest authority on systematic botany. +Great men flocked to his door, but the testy old Dutchman let them +wait until it suited him to receive them. Peter the Great had to +cool his heels in his waiting-room two long hours before his turn +came. Linnus he would not see at all--until he sent him a copy of +his book. Then he shut the door against all others and summoned the +author. The two walked through his garden, and the old doctor +pointed proudly to a tree which was very rare, he said, and not in +any of the books. Yes, said Linnus, it was in Vaillant's. The +doctor knew better; he had annotated Vaillant's botany himself, and +it was not there. Linnus insisted, and the doctor, in a temper, +went for the book to show him. But there it was; Linnus was right. +Nothing would do then but he must stay in Holland. Linnus demurred; +he could not afford it. But Dr. Boerhaave knew a way out of that. He +had for a patient Burgomaster Cliffort, a rich old hypochondriac +with whom he could do nothing because he would insist on living high +and taking too little exercise. When he came again he told him that +what he needed was a physician in daily attendance upon him, and +handed him over to Linnus. + +"He will fix your diet and fix your garden, too," was his +prescription. The Burgomaster was a famous collector and had a +wondrous garden that was the apple of his eye. He took Linnus into +his house and gave him a ducat a day for writing his menu and +cataloguing his collection. That was where his books grew, and the +biggest and finest of them was "Hortus Cliffortianus," the account +of his patron's garden. + +Armed with letters from Dr. Boerhaave and the Burgomaster, he took +one stronghold of professional prejudice after another. Not without +a siege. One of them refused flatly to surrender. That was Sir Hans +Sloan, the great English naturalist, to whom Dr. Boerhaave wrote in +a letter that is preserved in the British Museum: "Linnus, who +bears this letter, is alone worthy of seeing you, alone worthy of +being seen by you. He who shall see you both together shall see two +men whose like will scarce ever be found in the world." And the +doctor was no flatterer, as may be inferred from his treatment of +Peter the Great. But the aged baronet had had his own way so long, +and was so well pleased with it, that he would have nothing to do +with Linnus. At Oxford the learned professor Dillenius received him +with no better grace. "This," he said aside to a friend, "is the +young man who confounds all botany," and he took him rather +reluctantly into his garden. A plant that was new to him attracted +Linnus' attention and he asked to what family it belonged. + +"That is more than you can tell me," was the curt answer. + +"I can, if you will let me pluck a flower and examine it." + +"Do, and be welcome," said the professor, and his visitor after a +brief glance at the flower told its species correctly. The professor +stared. + +"Now," said Linnus, who had kept his eyes open, "what did you mean +by the crosses you had put all through my book?" He had seen it +lying on the professor's table, all marked up. + +"They mark the errors you made," declared the other. + +"Suppose we see about that," said the younger man and, taking the +book, led the way. They examined the flowers together, and when they +returned to the study all the pride had gone out of the professor. +He kept Linnus with him a month, never letting him out of his sight +and, when he left, implored him with tears to stay and share his +professorship; the pay was enough for both. + +A letter that reached him from home on his return to Holland made +him realize with a start that he had overstayed his leave. It was +now in the fourth year since he had left Sweden. All the while he +had written to his sweetheart in the care of a friend who proved +false. He wanted her for himself and, when the three years had +passed, told her that Carl would never come back. Dr. Morus was of +the same mind, and had not a real friend of the absent lover turned +up in the nick of time Linnus would probably have stayed a Dutchman +to his death. Now, on the urgent message of his friend, he hastened +home, found his Elisabeth holding out yet, married her and settled +down in Stockholm to practise medicine. + +Famous as he had become, he found the first stretch of the row at +home a hard one to hoe. His books brought him no income. Nobody +would employ him, "even for a sick servant," he complained. Envious +rivals assailed him and his botany, and there were days when herring +and black bread was fare not to be despised in Dr. Linnus' +household. But he kept pegging away and his luck changed. One +well-to-do patient brought another, and at last the queen herself +was opportunely seized with a bad cough. She saw one of her ladies +take a pill and asked what it was. Dr. Linnus' prescription for a +cold, she said, and it always cured her right up. So the doctor was +called to the castle and his cure worked there, too. Not long after +that he set down in his diary that "Now, no one can get well without +my help." + +But he was not happy. "Once, I had flowers and no money," he said; +"now, I have money and no flowers." That they appointed him +professor of medicine at Upsala did not mend matters. His lectures +were popular and full of common sense. Diet and the simple life were +his hobbies, temperance in all things. He ever insisted that where +one man dies from drinking too much, ten die from overeating. +Children should eat four times a day, grown-ups twice, was his rule. +The foolish fashions and all luxury he abhorred. He himself in his +most famous years lived so plainly that some said he was miserly, +and his clothes were sometimes almost shabby. The happiest day of +his life came when he and his old enemy Rosn, whom he found filling +the chair of botany at the university, and with whom he made it up +soon after they became fellow members of the faculty, exchanged +chairs with the ready consent of the authorities. So, at last, +Linnus had attained the place he coveted above all others, and the +goal of his ambition was reached. + +He lived at Upsala thirty-seven years and wrote many books. His +students idolized him. They came from all over the world. Twice a +week in summer, on Wednesday and Saturday, they sallied forth with +him to botanize in field and forest, and when they had collected +specimens all the long day they escorted the professor home through +the twilight streets with drums and trumpets and with flowers in +their hats. But however late they left him at his door, the earliest +dawn saw him up and at his work, for the older he grew the more +precious the hours that remained. In summer he was accustomed to +rise at three o'clock; in the dark winter days at six. + +He found biology a chaos and left it a science. In his special field +of botany he was not, as some think, the first. He himself +catalogued fully a thousand books on his topic. But he brought order +into it; he took what was good and, rejecting the false, fashioned +it into a workable system. In the mere matter of nomenclature, his +way of calling plants, like men, by a family name and a given name +wrought a change hard to appreciate in our day. The common blue +grass of our lawns, for instance, he called, and we call it still, +_Poa pratensis_. Up to his time it had three names and one of them +was _Gramen pratense paniculatum majus latiore folio poa +theophrasti_. Dr. Rydberg, of the New York Botanical Gardens, said +aptly at the bicentenary of his birth, that it was as if instead of +calling a girl Grace Darling one were to say "Mr. Darling's +beautiful, slender, graceful, blue-eyed girl with long, golden curls +and rosy cheeks." + +The binomial system revolutionized the science. What the lines of +longitude and latitude did for geography Linnus' genius did for +botany. And he did not let pride of achievement persuade him that he +had said the last word. He knew his system to be the best till some +one should find a better, and said so. The King gave him a noble +name and he was proud of it with reason--vain, some have said. But +vanity did not make the creature deny the Creator. He ever tried to +trace science to its author. When the people were frightened by the +"water turning to blood" and overzealous priests cried that it was a +sign of the wrath of God, he showed under the magnifying glass the +presence of innumerable little animals that gave the water its +reddish tinge, and thereby gave offence to some pious souls. But +over the door of his lecture room were the words in Latin: "Live +guiltless--God sees you!" and in his old age, seeing with prophetic +eye the day of bacteriology that dawned a hundred years after his +death, he thanked God that He had permitted him to "look into His +secret council room and workshop." + +He was one of the clear thinkers of all days, uniting imagination +with sound sense. It was Linnus who discovered that plants sleep +like animals. The Pope ordered that his books, wherever they were +found in his dominions, should be burned as materialistic and +heretical; but Linnus lived to see a professor in botany at Rome +dismissed because he did not understand his system, and another put +in his place who did, and whose lectures followed his theories. When +he was seventy he was stricken with apoplexy, while lecturing to his +students, and the last year of his life was full of misery. +"Linnus limps," is one of the last entries in his diary, "can +hardly walk, speaks unintelligibly, and is scarce able to write." +Death came on January 10, 1778. + +Under the white flashes of the northern lights in the desolate land +he explored in his youth, there grows in the shelter of the spruce +forests a flower which he found and loved beyond any other, the +_Linna borealis_, named after him. In some pictures we have of him, +he is seen holding a sprig of it in his hand. It is the twin flower +of the northern Pacific coast and of Labrador, indeed of the far +northern woods from Labrador all the way to Alaska, that lifts its +delicate, sweet-scented pink bells from the moss with gentle appeal, +"long overlooked, lowly, flowering early" despite cold and storm, +typical of the man himself. + + + + +NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER + + +Hard by the town of Thorshavn, in the Fare islands, a little lad +sat one day carving his name on a rock. His rough-coated pony +cropped the tufts of stunted grass within call. The grim North Sea +beat upon the shore below. What thoughts of the great world without +it stirred in the boy he never told. He came of a people to whom it +called all through the ages with a summons that rarely went +unheeded. If he heard he gave no sign. Slowly and laboriously he +traced in the stone the letters N.R.F. When he had finished he +surveyed his work with a quiet smile. "There!" he said, "that is +done." + +The years went by, and a distant city paused in its busy life to +hearken to bells tolling for one who lay dead. Kings and princes +walked behind his coffin and a whole people mourned. Yet in life he +had worn no purple. He was a plain, even a poor man. Upon his grave +they set a rock brought from the island in the North Sea, just like +the other that stands there yet, and in it they hewed the letters +N.R.F., for the man and the boy were one. And he who spoke there +said for all mankind that what he wrought was well done, for it was +done bravely and in love. + +Niels Ryberg Finsen was born in 1860 in the Fare islands, where his +father was an official under the Danish Government. His family came +of the sturdy old Iceland stock that comes down to our time unshorn +of its strength from the day of the vikings, and back to Iceland his +people sent him to get his education in the Reykjavik Latin school, +after a brief stay in Denmark where his teachers failed to find the +key to the silent, reserved lad. There he lived the seven pregnant +years of boyhood and youth, from fourteen to twenty-one, and ever +after there was that about him that brought to mind the wild +fastnesses of that storm-swept land. Its mountains were not more +rugged than his belief in the right as he saw it. + +The Reykjavik school had a good name, but school and pupils were +after their own kind. Conventional was hardly the word for it. Some +of the "boys" were twenty and over. Finsen loved to tell of how they +pursued the studies each liked best, paying scant attention to the +rest. In their chosen fields they often knew much more than the +curriculum called for, and were quite able to instruct the teacher; +the things they cared less about they helped one another out with, +so as to pass examinations. For mere proficiency in lessons they +cherished a sovereign contempt. To do anything by halves is not the +Iceland way, and it was not Niels Finsen's. All through his life he +was impatient with second-hand knowledge and borrowed thinking. So +he worked and played through the long winters of the North. In the +summer vacations he roamed the barren hills, helped herd the sheep, +and drank in the rough freedom of the land and its people. At +twenty-one the school gave him up to the university at Copenhagen. + +Training for life there was not the heyday of youthful frolicking we +sometimes associate with college life in our day and land. Not until +he was thirty could he hang up his sheepskin as a physician. Yet the +students had their fun and their sports, and Finsen was seldom +missing where these went on. He was not an athlete because already +at twenty-three the crippling disease with which he battled twenty +years had got its grip on him, but all the more he was an outdoor +man. He sailed his boat, and practised with the rifle until he +became one of the best shots in Denmark. And it is recorded that he +got himself into at least one scrape at the university by his love +of freedom. + +The country was torn up at that time by a struggle between people +and government over constitutional rights, and it had reached a +point where a country parish had refused to pay taxes illegally +assessed, as they claimed. It was their Boston tea-party. A +delegation of the "tax refusers" had come to Copenhagen, where the +political pot was boiling hot over the incident. The students were +enthusiastic, but the authorities of the university sternly +unsympathetic. The "Reds" were for giving a reception to the +visitors in Regentsen, the great dormitory where, as an Iceland +student, Finsen had free lodging; but it was certain that the Dean +would frown upon such a proposition. So they applied innocently for +permission to entertain some "friends from the country," and the +party was held in Finsen's room. Great was the scandal when the +opposition newspapers exploited the feasting of the tax refusers in +the sacred precincts of the university. To the end of his days +Finsen chuckled over the way they stole a march on the Dean. + +For two or three years after getting his degree he taught in the +medical school as demonstrator, eking out his scant income by +tutoring students in anatomy. His sure hand and clear decision in +any situation marked him as a practitioner of power, and he had +thoughts once of devoting himself to the most delicate of all +surgery,--that of the eye. He was even then groping for his +life-work, without knowing it, for it was always light, light--the +source or avenue or effect of it--that held him. And presently his +work found him. + +It has been said that Finsen was a sick man. A mysterious malady[1] +with dropsical symptoms clutched him from the earliest days with +ever tightening grip, and all his manhood's life he was a great but +silent sufferer. Perhaps it was that; perhaps it was the bleak North +in which his young years had been set that turned him to the light +as the source of life and healing. He said it himself: "It was +because I needed it so much, I longed for it so." Probably it was +both. Add to them his unique power of turning the things of everyday +life to account in his scientific research, and one begins to +understand at once his success and his speedy popularity. He dealt +with the humble things of life, and got to the heart of things on +that road. And the people comprehended; the wise men fell in behind +him--sometimes a long way behind. + +[Footnote 1: The autopsy which he himself ordered on his death-bed +as his last contribution to medical knowledge, showed it to be a +slow ossification of the membrane of the heart, involving the liver +and all the vital organs. He was "tapped" for dropsy more than +twenty times.] + +In the yard of Regentsen there grows a famous old linden tree. +Standing at his window one day and watching its young leaf sprout, +Finsen saw a cat sunning itself on the pavement. The shadow of the +house was just behind it and presently crept up on pussy who got up, +stretched herself, and moved into the sunlight. In a little while +the shadow overtook her there, and pussy moved once more. Finsen +watched the shadow rout her out again and again. It was clear that +the cat liked the sunlight. + +A few days later he stood upon a bridge and saw a little squad of +insects sporting on the water. They drifted down happily with the +stream till they came within the shadow of the bridge, when they at +once began to work their way up a piece to get a fresh start for a +sunlight sail. Finsen knew just how they felt. His own room looked +north and was sunless; his work never prospered as it did when he +sat with a friend whose room was on the south side, where the sun +came in. It was warm and pleasant; but was that all? Was it only the +warmth that made the birds break into song when the sun came out on +a cloudy day, made the insects hum joyously and man himself walk +with a more springy step? The housekeeper who "sunned" the +bed-clothes and looked with suspicion on a dark room had something +else in mind; the sun "disinfected" the bedding. Finsen wanted to +know what it was in the sunlight that had this power, and how we +could borrow it and turn it to use. + +The men of science had long before analyzed the sunlight. They had +broken it up into the rays of different color that together make +the white light we see. Any boy can do it with a prism, and in the +band or spectrum of red, yellow, green, blue, and violet that then +appears, he has before him the cipher that holds the key to the +secrets of the universe if we but knew how to read it aright; for +the sunlight is the physical source of all life and of all power. +The different colors represent rays with different wave-lengths; +that is, they vibrate with different speed and do different work. +The red vibrate only half as fast as the violet, at the other end of +the spectrum, and, roughly speaking, they are the heat carriers. The +blue and violet are cold by comparison. They are the force carriers. +They have power to cause chemical changes, hence are known as the +chemical or actinic rays. It is these the photographer shuts out of +his dark room, where he intrenches himself behind a ruby-colored +window. The chemical ray cannot pass that; if it did it would spoil +his plate. + +This much was known, and it had been suggested more than once that +the "disinfecting" qualities of the sunlight might be due to the +chemical rays killing germs. Finsen, experimenting with earthworms, +earwigs, and butterflies, in a box covered with glass of the +different colors of the spectrum, noted first that the bugs that +naturally burrowed in darkness became uneasy in the blue light. As +fast as they were able, they got out of it and crawled into the red, +where they lay quiet and apparently content. When the glass covers +were changed they wandered about until they found the red light +again. The earwigs were the smartest. They developed an intelligent +grasp of the situation, and soon learned to make straight for the +red room. The butterflies, on the other hand, liked the red light +only to sleep in. It was made clear by many such experiments that +the chemical rays, and they only, had power to stimulate, to "stir +life." Finsen called it that himself. In the language of the +children, he was getting "warm." + +That this power, like any other, had its perils, and that nature, if +not man, was awake to them, he proved by some simple experiments +with sunburn. He showed that the tan which boys so covet was the +defence the skin puts forth against the blue ray. The inflammation +of sunburn is succeeded by the brown pigmentation that henceforth +stands guard like the photographer's ruby window, protecting the +deeper layers of the skin. The black skin of the negro was no longer +a mystery. It is his protection against the fierce sunlight of the +tropics and the injurious effect of its chemical ray. + +Searching the libraries in Copenhagen for the records of earlier +explorers in his field, and finding little enough there, Finsen came +across the report of an American army surgeon on a smallpox epidemic +in the South in the thirties of the last century. There were so many +sick in the fort that, every available room being filled, they had +to put some of the patients into the bomb-proof, to great +inconvenience all round, as it was entirely dark there. The doctor +noted incidentally that, as if to make up for it, the underground +patients got well sooner and escaped pitting. To him it was a +curious incident, nothing more. Upon Dr. Finsen, sitting there with +the seventy-five-year-old report from over the sea in his hand, it +burst with a flood of light: the patients got well without scarring +_because_ they were in the dark. Red light or darkness, it was all +the same. The point was that the chemical rays that could cause +sunburn on men climbing glaciers, and had power to irritate the sick +skin, were barred out. Within a month he jolted the medical world by +announcing that smallpox patients treated under red light would +recover readily and without disfigurement. + +The learned scoffed. There were some of them who had read of the +practice in the Middle Ages of smothering smallpox patients in red +blankets, giving them red wine to drink and hanging the room with +scarlet. Finsen had not heard of it, and was much interested. +Evidently they had been groping toward the truth. How they came upon +the idea is not the only mystery of that strange day, for they knew +nothing of actinic rays or sunlight analyzed. But Finsen calmly +invited the test, which was speedy in coming. + +They had smallpox in Bergen, Norway, and there the matter was put to +the proof with entire success; later in Sweden and in Copenhagen. +The patients who were kept under the red light recovered rapidly, +though some of them were unvaccinated children, and bad cases. In no +instance was the most dangerous stage of the disease, the festering +stage, reached; the temperature did not rise again, and they all +came out unscarred. + +Finsen pointed out that where other methods of treatment such as +painting the face with iodine or lunar caustic, or covering it with +a mask or with fat, had met with any success in the past, the same +principle was involved of protecting the skin from the light, though +the practitioner did not know it. He was doing the thing they did in +the middle ages, and calling them quacks. + +It is strange but true that Dr. Finsen had never seen a smallpox +patient at that time, but he knew the nature of the disease, and +that the sufferer was affected by its eruption first and worst on +the face and hands--that is to say, on the parts of the body exposed +to the light--and he was as sure of his ground as was Leverrier +when, fifty years before, he bade his fellow astronomers look in a +particular spot of the heavens for an unknown planet that disturbed +the movements of Uranus. And they found the one we call Neptune +there. + +Presently all the world knew that the first definite step had been +taken toward harnessing in the service of man the strange force in +the sunlight that had been the object of so much speculation and +conjecture. The next step followed naturally. In the published +account of his early experiments Finsen foreshadows it in the words, +"That the beginning has been made with the hurtful effects of this +force is odd enough, since without doubt its beneficial effect is +far greater." His clear head had already asked the question: if the +blue rays of the sun can penetrate deep enough into the skin to +cause injury, why should they not be made to do police duty there, +and catch and kill offending germs--in short, to heal? + +Finsen had demonstrated the correctness of the theory that the +chemical rays have power to kill germs. But it happens that these +are the rays that possess the least penetration. How to make them go +deeper was the problem. By an experiment that is, in its simplicity, +wholly characteristic of the man, he demonstrated that the red blood +in the deeper layers of the skin was the obstacle. He placed a piece +of photographic paper behind the lobe of his wife's ears and +concentrated powerful blue rays on the other side. Five minutes of +exposure made no impression on the paper; it remained white. But +when he squeezed all the blood out of the lobe, by pressing it +between two pieces of glass, the paper was blackened in twenty +seconds. + +That night Finsen knew that he had within his grasp that which would +make him a rich man if he so chose. He had only to construct +apparatus to condense the chemical rays and double their power many +times, and to apply his discovery in medical practice. Wealth and +fame would come quickly. He told the writer in his own simple way +how he talked it over with his wife. They were poor. Finsen's salary +as a teacher at the university was something like $1200 a year. He +was a sick man, and wealth would buy leisure and luxury. Children +were growing up about them who needed care. They talked it out +together, and resolutely turned their backs upon it all. Hand in +hand they faced the world with their sacrifice. What remained of +life to him was to be devoted to suffering mankind. That duty done, +what came they would meet together. Wealth never came, but fame in +full measure, and the love and gratitude of their fellow-men. + +There is a loathsome disease called lupus, of which, happily, in +America with our bright skies we know little. Lupus is the Latin +word for wolf, and the ravenous ailment is fitly named, for it +attacks by preference the face, and gnaws at the features, at nose, +chin, or eye, with horrible, torturing persistence, killing slowly, +while the patient shuts himself out from the world praying daily for +death to end his misery. + +In the north of Europe it is sadly common, and there had never been +any cure for it. Ointments, burning, surgery--they were all equally +useless. Once the wolf had buried its fangs in its victim, he was +doomed to inevitable death. The disease is, in fact, tuberculosis of +the skin, and is the most dreadful of all the forms in which the +white plague scourges mankind--was, until one day Finsen announced +to the world his second discovery, that lupus was cured by the +simple application of light. + +It was not a conjecture, a theory, like the red-light treatment for +smallpox; it was a fact. For two years he had been sending people +away whole and happy who came to him in despair. The wolf was +slain, and by this silent sufferer whose modest establishment was +all contained within a couple of small shanties in a corner of the +city hospital grounds, at Copenhagen. + +There was a pause of amazed incredulity. The scientific men did not +believe it. Three years later, when the physician in charge of +Finsen's clinic told at the medical congress in Paris of the results +obtained at the Light Institute, his story was still received with a +polite smile. The smile became astonishment when, at a sign from +him, the door opened and twelve healed lupus patients came in, each +carrying a photograph of himself as he was before he underwent the +treatment. Still the doctors could not grasp it. The thing was too +simple as matched against all their futile skill. + +But the people did not doubt. There was a rush from all over Europe +to Copenhagen. Its streets became filled with men and women whose +faces were shrouded in heavy bandages, and it was easy to tell the +new-comers from those who had seen "the professor." They came in +gloom and misery; they went away carrying in their faces the +sunshine that gave them back their life. Finsen never tired, when +showing friends over his Institute, of pointing out the joyous +happiness of his patients. It was his reward. For not "science for +science's sake," or pride in his achievement, was his aim and +thought, but just the wish to do good where he could. Then, in three +more years, they awarded him the great Nobel prize for signal +service to humanity, and criticism was silenced. All the world +applauded. + +"They gave it to me this year," said Finsen, with his sad little +smile, "because they knew that next year it would have been too +late." And he prophesied truly. He died nine months later. + +All that is here set down seems simple enough. But it was achieved +with infinite toil and patience, by the most painstaking +experiments, many times repeated to make sure. In his method of +working Finsen was eminently conservative and thorough. Nothing +"happened" with him. There was ever behind his doings a definite +purpose for which he sought a way, and the higher the obstacles +piled up the more resolutely he set his teeth and kept right on. +"The thing is not in itself so difficult," he said, when making +ready for his war upon the wolf, "but the road is long and the +experiments many before we find the right way." + +He took no new step before he had planted his foot firmly in the one +that went before; but once he knew where he stood, he did not +hesitate to question any scientific dogma that opposed him, always +in his own quiet way, backed by irrefutable facts. In a remarkable +degree he had the faculty of getting down through the husk to the +core of things, but he rejected nothing untried. The little thing in +hand, he ever insisted, if faithfully done might hold the key to the +whole problem; only let it be done _now_ to get the matter settled. + +Whatever his mind touched it made perfectly clear, if it was not so +already. As a teacher of anatomy he invented a dissecting knife that +was an improvement on those in use, and clamps for securing the +edges of a wound in an operation. As a rifle shot he made an +improved breech; as a physician, observing the progress of his own +disease, an effective blood powder for anmia. At the Light +Institute, which friends built for him, and the government endowed, +he devised the powerful electric lamps to which he turned in the +treatment of lupus, for the sun does not shine every day in +Copenhagen; and when it did not, the lenses that gathered the blue +rays and concentrated them upon the swollen faces were idle. And +gradually he increased their power, checking the heat rays that +would slip through and threatened to scorch the patient's skin, by +cunning devices of cooling streams trickling through the tubes and +the hollow lenses. + +Nothing was patented; it was all given freely to the world. The +decision which he and his wife made together was made once for all. +When the great Nobel prize was given to him he turned it over to the +Light Institute, and was with difficulty persuaded to keep half of +it for himself only when friends raised an equal amount and +presented it to the Institute. + +Finsen knew that his discoveries were but the first groping steps +upon a new road that stretched farther ahead than any man now living +can see. He was content to have broken the way. His faith was +unshaken in the ultimate treatment of the whole organism under +electric light that, by concentrating the chemical rays, would +impart to the body their life-giving power. He himself was beyond +their help. Daily he felt life slipping from him, but no word of +complaint passed his lips. He prescribed for himself a treatment +that, if anything, was worse than the disease. Only a man of iron +will could have carried it through. + +A set of scales stood on the table before him, and for years he +weighed every mouthful of food he ate. He suffered tortures from +thirst because he would allow no fluid to pass his lips, on account +of his tendency to dropsy. Through it all he cheerfully kept up his +labors, rejoicing that he was allowed to do so much. His courage was +indomitable; his optimism under it all unwavering. His favorite +contention was that there is nothing in the world that is not good +for something, except war. That he hated, and his satire on the +militarism of Europe as its supreme folly was sharp and biting. + +Of such quality was this extraordinary man of whom half the world +was talking while the fewest, even in his own home city, ever saw +him. Fewer still knew him well. It suited his temper and native +modesty, as it did the state of his bodily health, to keep himself +secluded. His motto was: "_bene vixit qui bene latuit_--he has +lived well who has kept himself well hidden"--and his contention was +always that in proportion as one could keep himself in the +background his cause prospered, if it was a good cause. When kings +and queens came visiting, he could not always keep in hiding, though +he often tried. On one of his days of extreme prostration the +dowager empress of Russia knocked vainly at his door. She pleaded so +hard to be allowed to see Dr. Finsen that they relented at last, and +she sat by his bed and wept in sympathy with his sufferings, while +he with his brave smile on lips that would twitch with pain did his +best to comfort her. She and Queen Alexandra, both daughters of King +Christian, carried the gospel of hope and healing from his study to +their own lands, and Light Institutes sprang up all over Europe. + +In his own life he treated nearly nineteen hundred sufferers, +two-thirds of them lupus patients, and scarce a handful went from +his door unhelped. When his work was done he fell asleep with a +smile upon his lips, and the "universal judgment was one of +universal thanksgiving that he had lived." He was forty-three years +old. + +When the news of his death reached the Rigsdag, the Danish +parliament, it voted his widow a pension such as had been given to +few Danes in any day. The king, his sons and daughters, and, as it +seemed, the whole people followed his body to the grave. The rock +from his native island marks the place where he lies. His work is +his imperishable monument. His epitaph he wrote himself in the +speech another read when the Nobel prize was awarded him, for he was +then too ill to speak. + +"May the Light Institute grasp the obligation that comes with its +success, the obligation to maintain what I account the highest aim +in science--truth, faithful work, and sound criticism." + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH*** + + +******* This file should be named 12481-8.txt or 12481-8.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/4/8/12481 + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +https://gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** diff --git a/old/12481-8.zip b/old/12481-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c65ab1 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481-8.zip diff --git a/old/12481-h.zip b/old/12481-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..37ff188 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481-h.zip diff --git a/old/12481-h/12481-h.htm b/old/12481-h/12481-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7468325 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481-h/12481-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,6779 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Hero Tales of the Far North, by Jacob A. Riis</title> +<style type="text/css"> + <!-- + body { font-size: 100%; } + p { text-indent: 1.5em; + margin-top: .75em; + margin-left: 15%; + margin-right: 15%; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { text-align: center; } + hr { width: 50%; } + hr.full { width: 100%; + height: 5px; } + hr.short { width: 20%; } + p.noindent { text-indent: 0em; } + p.ar {text-align: right } + p.toc { text-align: center; font-size: 90%; } + p.note { text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; margin-top: 1em; font-size: 90%; } + p.fnote {text-indent: -1em; margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; font-size: 90%; } + p.block {text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 30%} + p.sblock {text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 25%} + CENTER { padding: 1em; } + a:link {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + link {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + a:visited {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + a:hover {color:red} + pre {font-size: 9pt;} + + // --> +</style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Hero Tales of the Far North, by Jacob A. Riis</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: Hero Tales of the Far North</p> +<p>Author: Jacob A. Riis</p> +<p>Release Date: May 31, 2004 [eBook #12481]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: iso-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH***</p> +<br> +<br> +<center><h3>E-text prepared by Janet Kegg<br> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team</h3></center> +<br> +<br> +<hr class="full" noshade> +<br> +<br> +<a name="image-0001"><!--IMG--></a> +<center> +<img src="images/front.jpg" width="300" height="487" +alt="Frederiksborg"> +</center> +<!--IMAGE END--> +<br> +<hr> +<h1>HERO TALES</h1> +<h1>OF THE FAR NORTH</h1> +<br> +<h3> + BY +</h3> +<h2> + JACOB A. RIIS +</h2> +<p class="note"> + AUTHOR OF "HOW THE OTHER HALF LIVES"<br> + "THE MAKING OF AN AMERICAN"<br> + "THE OLD TOWN," ETC. +</p> +<br> +<h4> + New York<br> + 1921 +</h4> +<hr> +<br> +<p class="note"> + THIS BOOK OF MY DEAD HEROES<br> + I DEDICATE TO MY LIVING HERO<br><br> + + <big>THEODORE ROOSEVELT</big><br><br> + + MAY IT BE MANY YEARS BEFORE THE LAST CHAPTER<br> + OF HIS SPLENDID WHOLESOME LIFE IS<br> + WRITTEN IN THE PAGES OF OUR<br> + COUNTRY'S HISTORY + </p> + +<hr class="short"> + +<br> +<br> + + +<h2> + FOREWORD +</h2> +<br> +<p> + When a man knocks at Uncle Sam's gate, craving admission to his + house, we ask him how much money he brings, lest he become a + hindrance instead of a help. If now we were to ask what he brings, + not only in his pocket, but in his mind and in his heart, this + stranger, what ideals he owns, what company he kept in the country + he left that shaped his hopes and ambitions,—might it not, if the + answer were right, be a help to a better mutual understanding + between host and guest? For the <i>Mayflower</i> did not hold all who in + this world have battled for freedom of home, of hope, and of + conscience. The struggle is bigger than that. Every land has its + George Washington, its Kosciusko, its William Tell, its Garibaldi, + its Kossuth, if there is but one that has a Joan d'Arc. What we want + to know of the man is: were its heroes his? +</p> +<p> + This book is an attempt to ask and to answer that question for my + own people, in a very small and simple way, it is true, but perhaps + abler pens with more leisure than mine may follow the trail it has + blazed. I should like to see some Swede write of the heroes of his + noble, chivalrous people, whom lack of space has made me slight + here, though I count them with my own. I should like to hear the + epic of United Italy, of proud and freedom-loving Hungary, the + swan-song of unhappy Poland, chanted to young America again and + again, to help us all understand that we are kin in the things that + really count, and help us pull together as we must if we are to make + the most of our common country. +</p> +<p> + These were my—our—heroes, then. Every lad of Northern blood, whose + heart is in the right place, loves them. And he need make no excuses + for any of them. Nor has he need of bartering them for the great of + his new home; they go very well together. It is partly for his sake + I have set their stories down here. All too quickly he lets go his + grip on them, on the new shore. Let him keep them and cherish them + with the memories of the motherland. The immigrant America wants and + needs is he who brings the best of the old home to the new, not he + who threw it overboard on the voyage. In the great melting-pot it + will tell its story for the good of us all. +</p> +<p> + To those who wonder that I have left the Saga era of the North + untouched, I would say that I have preferred to deal here only with + downright historic figures. For valuable aid rendered in insuring + accuracy I am indebted to the services of Dr. P.A. Rydberg, Dr. J. + Emile Blomn, Gustaf V. Lindner, and Professor Joakim Reinhard. My + thanks are due likewise to many friends, Danes by birth like myself, + who have helped me with the illustrations. +</p> +<p class="ar"><b>J. A. R.</b> +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + R<small>ICHMOND</small> H<small>ILL</small>,<br> + June, 1910. +</p> +<hr class="short"> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + CONTENTS +</h2> +<br> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0002"> +A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0003"> +HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0004"> +GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0005"> +ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0006"> +KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0007"> +HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0008"> +KING CHRISTIAN IV</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0009"> +GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0010"> +KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0011"> +THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0012"> +CARL LINN, KING OF THE FLOWERS</a></p> + +<p class="toc"><a href="#2H_4_0013"> +NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER</a></p> +<br> + +<hr> + +<a name="2H_4_0002"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA +</h2> +<br> +<p> + The Eighteenth Century broke upon a noisy family quarrel in the + north of Europe. Charles the Twelfth of Sweden, the royal hotspur of + all history, and Frederik of Denmark had fallen out. Like their + people, they were first cousins, and therefore all the more bent on + settling the old question which was the better man. After the + fashion of the lion and the unicorn, they fought "all about the + town," and, indeed, about every town that came in their way, now + this and now that side having the best of it. On the sea, which was + the more important because neither Swedes nor Danes could reach + their fighting ground or keep up their armaments without command of + the waterways, the victory rested finally with the Danes. And this + was due almost wholly to one extraordinary figure, the like of which + is scarce to be found in the annals of warfare, Peder Tordenskjold. + Rising in ten brief years from the humblest place before the mast, + a half-grown lad, to the rank of admiral, ennobled by his King and + the idol of two nations, only to be assassinated on the "field of + honor" at thirty, he seems the very incarnation of the stormy times + of the Eleven Years' War, with which his sun rose and set; for the + year in which peace was made also saw his death. +</p> +<p> + Peder Jansen Wessel was born on October 28, 1690, in the city of + Trondhjem, Norway, which country in those days was united with + Denmark under one king. His father was an alderman with eighteen + children. Peder was the tenth of twelve wild boys. It is related + that the father in sheer desperation once let make for him a pair of + leathern breeches which he would not be able to tear. But the lad, + not to be beaten so easily, sat on a grind-stone and had one of his + school-fellows turn it till the seat was worn thin, a piece of + bravado that probably cost him dear, for doubtless the exasperated + father's stick found the attenuated spot. +</p> +<p> + Since he would have none of the school, his father had him + apprenticed out to a tailor with the injunction not to spare the + rod. But sitting cross-legged on a tailor's stool did not suit the + lad, and he took it out of his master by snowballing him thoroughly + one winter's day. Next a barber undertook to teach him his trade; + but Peder ran away and was drifting about the streets when the King + came to Norway. The boy saw the splendid uniforms and heard the + story of the beautiful capital by the resund, with its palaces and + great fighting ships. When the King departed, he was missing, and + for a while there was peace in Trondhjem. +</p> +<p> + Down in Copenhagen the homeless lad was found wandering about by the + King's chaplain, who, being himself a Norwegian, took him home and + made him a household page. But the boy's wanderings had led him to + the navy-yard, where he saw mid-shipmen of his own size at drill, + and he could think of nothing else. When he should have been waiting + at table he was down among the ships. For him there was ever but one + way to any goal, the straight cut, and at fifteen he wrote to the + King asking to be appointed a midshipman. "I am wearing away my life + as a servant," he wrote. "I want to give it, and my blood, to the + service of your Majesty, and I will serve you with all my might + while I live!" +</p> +<p> + The navy had need of that kind of recruits, and the King saw to it + that he was apprenticed at once. And that was the beginning of his + strangely romantic career. +</p> +<p> + Three years he sailed before the mast and learned seamanship, while + Charles was baiting the Muscovite and the North was resting on its + arms. Then came Pultava and the Swedish King's crushing defeat. The + storm-centre was transferred to the North again, and the war on the + sea opened with a splendid deed, fit to appeal to any ardent young + heart. At the battle in the Bay of Kjge, the <i>Dannebrog</i>, commanded + by Ivar Hvitfeldt, caught fire, and by its position exposed the + Danish fleet to great danger. Hvitfeldt could do one of two things: + save his own life and his men's by letting his ship drift before the + wind and by his escape risking the rest of the fleet and losing the + battle, or stay where he was to meet certain death. He chose the + latter, anchored his vessel securely, and fought on until the ship + was burned down to the water's edge and blew up with him and his + five hundred men. Ivar Hvitfeldt's name is forever immortal in the + history of his country. A few years ago they raised the wreck of the + <i>Dannebrog</i>, fitly called after the Danish flag, and made of its + guns a monument that stands on Langelinie, the beautiful shore road + of Copenhagen. +</p> +<p> + Fired by such deeds, young Wessel implored the King, before he had + yet worn out his first midshipman's jacket, to give him command of a + frigate. He compromised on a small privateer, the <i>Ormen</i>, but with + it he did such execution in Swedish waters and earned such renown as + a dauntless sailor and a bold scout whose information about the + enemy was always first and best, that before spring they gave him a + frigate with eighteen guns and the emphatic warning "not to engage + any enemy when he was not clearly the stronger." He immediately + brought in a Swedish cruiser, the <i>Alabama</i> of those days, that had + been the terror of the sea. In a naval battle in the Baltic soon + after, he engaged with his little frigate two of the enemy's + line-of-battle ships that were trying to get away, and only when a + third came to help them did he retreat, so battered that he had to + seek port to make repairs. Accused of violating his orders, his + answer was prompt: "I promised your Majesty to do my best, and I + did." King Frederik IV, himself a young and spirited man, made him a + captain, jumping him over fifty odd older lieutenants, and gave him + leave to war on the enemy as he saw fit. +</p> +<p> + The immediate result was that the Governor of Gteborg, the enemy's + chief seaport in the North Sea, put a price on his head. Captain + Wessel heard of it and sent word into town that he was outside—to + come and take him; but to hurry, for time was short. While waiting + for a reply, he fell in with two Swedish men-of-war having in tow a + Danish prize. That was not to be borne, and though they together + mounted ninety-four guns to his eighteen, he fell upon them like a + thunderbolt. They beat him off, but he returned for their prize. + That time they nearly sank him with three broad-sides. However, he + ran for the Norwegian coast and saved his ship. In his report of + this affair he excuses himself for running away with the reflection + that allowing himself to be sunk "would not rightly have benefited + his Majesty's service." +</p> +<p> + However, the opportunity came to him swiftly of "rightly + benefiting" the King's service. After the battle of Kolberger Heide, + that had gone against the Swedes, he found them beaching their ships + under cover of the night to prevent their falling into the hands of + the victors. Wessel halted them with the threat that every man Jack + in the fleet should be made to walk the plank, saved the ships, and + took their admiral prisoner to his chief. When others slept, Wessel + was abroad with his swift sailer. If wind and sea went against him, + he knew how to turn his mishap to account. Driven in under the + hostile shore once, he took the opportunity, as was his wont, to get + the lay of the land and of the enemy. He learned quickly that in the + harbor of Wesens, not far away, a Swedish cutter was lying with a + Danish prize. She carried eight guns and had a crew of thirty-six + men; but though he had at the moment only eighteen sailors in his + boat, he crept up the coast at once, slipped quietly in after + sundown, and took ship and prize with a rush, killing and throwing + overboard such as resisted. In Sweden mothers hushed their crying + children with his dreaded name; on the sea they came near to + thinking him a troll, so sudden and unexpected were his onsets. But + there was no witchcraft about it. He sailed swiftly because he was a + skilled sailor and because he missed no opportunity to have the + bottom of his ship scraped and greased. And when on board, pistol + and cutlass hung loose; for it was a time of war with a brave and + relentless foe. +</p> +<p> + His reconnoitring expeditions he always headed himself, and + sometimes he went alone. Thus, when getting ready to take Marstrand, + a fortified seaport of great importance to Charles, he went ashore + disguised as a fisherman and peddled fish through the town, even in + the very castle itself, where he took notice, along with the + position of the guns and the strength of the garrison, of the fact + that the commandant had two pretty daughters. He was a sailor, sure + enough. Once when ashore on such an expedition, he was surprised by + a company of dragoons. His men escaped, but the dragoons cut off his + way to the shore. As they rode at him, reaching out for his sword, + he suddenly dashed among them, cut one down, and, diving through the + surf, swam out to the boat, his sword between his teeth. Their + bullets churned up the sea all about him, but he was not hit. He + seemed to bear a charmed life; in all his fights he was wounded but + once. That was in the attack on the strongly fortified port of + Strmstad, in which he was repulsed with a loss of 96 killed and 246 + wounded, while the Swedish loss footed up over 1500, a fight which + led straight to the most astonishing chapter in his whole career, of + which more anon. +</p> +<p> + All Denmark and Norway presently rang with the stories of his + exploits. They were always of the kind to appeal to the imagination, + for in truth he was a very knight errant of the sea who fought for + the love of it as well as of the flag, ardent patriot that he was. A + brave and chivalrous foe he loved next to a loyal friend. Cowardice + he loathed. Once when ordered to follow a retreating enemy with his + frigate <i>Hvide rnen</i> (the White Eagle) of thirty guns, he hugged + him so close that in the darkness he ran his ship into the great + Swedish man-of-war <i>sel</i> of sixty-four guns. The chance was too + good to let pass. Seeing that the <i>sel's</i> lower gun-ports were + closed, and reasoning from this that she had been struck in the + water-line and badly damaged, he was for boarding her at once, but + his men refused to follow him. In the delay the <i>sel</i> backed away. + Captain Wessel gave chase, pelted her with shot, and called to her + captain, whose name was <i>Sstjerna</i> (sea-star), to stop. +</p> +<p> + "Running away from a frigate, are you? Shame on you, coward and + poltroon! Stay and fight like a man for your King and your flag!" +</p> +<p> + Seeing him edge yet farther away, he shouted in utter exasperation, + "Your name shall be dog-star forever, not sea-star, if you don't + stay." +</p> +<p> + "But all this," he wrote sadly to the King, "with much more which + was worse, had no effect." +</p> +<p> + However, on his way back to join the fleet he ran across a convoy of + ten merchant vessels, guarded by three of the enemy's line-of-battle + ships. He made a feint at passing, but, suddenly turning, swooped + down upon the biggest trader, ran out his boats, made fast, and + towed it away from under the very noses of its protectors. It meant + prize-money for his men, but their captain did not forget their + craven conduct of the night, which had made him lose a bigger + prize, and with the money they got a sound flogging. +</p> +<p> + The account of the duel between his first frigate, <i>Lvendahl's + Galley</i>, of eighteen guns, and a Swede of twenty-eight guns reads + like the doings of the old vikings, and indeed both commanders were + likely descended straight from those arch fighters. Wessel certainly + was. The other captain was an English officer, Bactman by name, who + was on the way to deliver his ship, that had been bought in England, + to the Swedes. They met in the North Sea and fell to fighting by + noon of one day. The afternoon of the next saw them at it yet. Twice + the crew of the Swedish frigate had thrown down their arms, refusing + to fight any more. Vainly the vessel had tried to get away; the Dane + hung to it like a leech. In the afternoon of the second day Wessel + was informed that his powder had given out. He had a boat sent out + with a herald, who presented to Captain Bactman his regrets that he + had to quit for lack of powder, but would he come aboard and shake + hands? +</p> +<p> + The Briton declined. Meanwhile the ships had drifted close enough to + speak through the trumpet, and Captain Wessel shouted over from his + quarter-deck that "if he could lend him a little powder, they might + still go on." Captain Bactman smilingly shook his head, and then the + two drank to one another's health, each on his own quarter-deck, and + parted friends, while their crews manned what was left of the yards + and cheered each other wildly. +</p> +<p> + Wessel's enemies, of whom he had many, especially among the + nobility, who looked upon him as a vulgar upstart, used this + incident to bring him before a court-martial. It was unpatriotic, + they declared, and they demanded that he be degraded and fined. His + defence, which with all the records of his career are in the Navy + Department at Copenhagen, was brief but to the point. It is summed + up in the retort to his accusers that "they themselves should be + rebuked, and severely, for failing to understand that an officer in + the King's service should be promoted instead of censured for doing + his plain duty," and that there was nothing in the articles of war + commanding him to treat an honorable foe otherwise than with honor. +</p> +<p> + It must be admitted that he gave his critics no lack of cause. His + enterprises were often enough of a hair-raising kind, and he had + scant patience with censure. Thus once, when harassed by an + Admiralty order purposely issued to annoy him, he wrote back: "The + biggest fool can see that to obey would defeat all my plans. I shall + not do it. It may suit folk who love loafing about shore, but to an + honest man such talk is disgusting, let alone that the thing can't + be done." He was at that time twenty-six years old, and in charge of + the whole North Sea fleet. No wonder he had enemies. +</p> +<p> + However, the King was his friend. He made him a nobleman, and gave + him the name Tordenskjold. It means "thunder shield." +</p> +<p> + "Then, by the powers," he swore when he was told, "I shall thunder + in the ears of the Swedes so that the King shall hear of it!" And he + kept his word. +</p> +<p> + Charles had determined to take Denmark with one fell blow. He had an + army assembled in Skaane to cross the sound, which was frozen over + solid. All was ready for the invasion in January 1716. The people + throughout Sweden had assembled in the churches to pray for the + success of the King's arms, and he was there himself to lead; but + in the early morning hours a strong east wind broke up the ice, and + the campaign ended before it was begun. Charles then turned on + Norway, and laid siege to the city of Frederikshald, which, with its + strong fort, Frederiksteen, was the key to that country. A Danish + fleet lay in the Skagerak, blocking his way of renforcements by + sea. Tordenskjold, with his frigate, <i>Hvide rnen</i>, and six smaller + ships (the frigate <i>Vindhunden</i> of sixteen guns, and five vessels of + light draught, two of which were heavily armed), was doing scouting + duty for the Admiral when he learned that the entire Swedish fleet + of forty-four ships that was intended to aid in the operations + against Frederikshald lay in the harbor of Dynekilen waiting its + chance to slip out. It was so well shielded there that its commander + sent word to the King to rest easy; nothing could happen to him. He + would join him presently. +</p> +<p> + Tordenskjold saw that if he could capture or destroy this fleet + Norway was saved; the siege must perforce be abandoned. And Norway + was his native land, which he loved with his whole fervid soul. But + no time was to be lost. He could not go back to ask for permission, + and one may shrewdly guess that he did not want to, for it would + certainly have been refused. He heard that the Swedish officers, + secure in their stronghold, were to attend a wedding on shore the + next day. His instructions from the Admiralty were: in an emergency + always to hold a council of war, and to abide by its decision. At + daybreak he ran his ship alongside <i>Vindhunden</i>, her companion + frigate, and called to the captain: +</p> +<p> + "The Swedish officers are bidden to a wedding, and they have + forgotten us. What do you say—shall we go unasked?" +</p> +<p> + Captain Grip was game. "Good enough!" he shouted back. "The wind is + fair, and we have all day. I am ready." +</p> +<p> + That was the council of war and its decision. Tordenskjold gave the + signal to clear for action, and sailed in at the head of his handful + of ships. +</p> +<p> + The inlet to the harbor of Dynekilen is narrow and crooked, winding + between reefs and rocky steeps quite two miles, and only in spots + more than four hundred feet wide. Halfway in was a strong battery. + Tordenskjold's fleet was received with a tremendous fire from all + the Swedish ships, from the battery, and from an army of four + thousand soldiers lying along shore. The Danish ships made no reply. + They sailed up grimly silent till they reached a place wide enough + to let them wear round, broadside on. Then their guns spoke. Three + hours the battle raged before the Swedish fire began to slacken. As + soon as he noticed it, Tordenskjold slipped into the inner harbor + under cover of the heavy pall of smoke, and before the Swedes + suspected their presence they found his ships alongside. Broadside + after broadside crashed into them, and in terror they fled, soldiers + and sailors alike. While they ran Tordenskjold swooped down upon the + half-way battery, seized it, and spiked its guns. The fight was won. +</p> +<p> + But the heaviest part was left—the towing out of the captured + ships. All the afternoon Tordenskjold led the work in person, + pulling on ropes, cheering on his men. The Swedes, returning gamely + to the fight, showered them with bullets from shore. One of the + abandoned vessels caught fire. Lieutenant Tnder, of Tordenskjold's + staff, a veteran with a wooden leg, boarded it just as the + quartermaster ran up yelling that the ship was full of powder and + was going to blow up. He tried to jump overboard, but the lieutenant + seized him by the collar and, stumping along, made him lead the way + to the magazine. A fuse had been laid to an open keg of powder, and + the fire was sputtering within an inch of it when Lieutenant Tnder + plucked it out, smothered it between thumb and forefinger, and threw + it through the nearest port-hole. There were two hundred barrels of + powder in the ship. +</p> +<p> + Tordenskjold had kept his word to the King. Not as much as a yawl of + the Dynekilen fleet was left to the enemy. He had sunk or burned + thirteen and captured thirty-one ships with his seven, and all the + piled-up munitions of war were in his hands. King Charles gave up + the siege, marched his army out of Norway, and the country was + saved. The victory cost Tordenskjold but nineteen killed and + fifty-seven wounded. On his own ship six men were killed and twenty + wounded. +</p> +<p> + Of infinite variety was this sea-fighter. After a victory like this, + one hears of him in the next breath gratifying a passing whim of + the King, who wanted to know what the Swedish people thought of + their Government after Charles's long wars that are said to have + cost their country a million men. Tordenskjold overheard it, had + himself rowed across to Sweden, picked up there a wedding party, + bridegroom, minister, guests, and all, including the captain of the + shore watch who was among them, and returned in time for the palace + dinner with his catch. King Frederik was entertaining Czar Peter the + Great, who had been boasting of the unhesitating loyalty of his men + which his Danish host could not match. He now had the tables turned + upon him. It is recorded that the King sent the party back with + royal gifts for the bride. One would be glad to add that + Tordenskjold sent back, too, the silver pitcher and the parlor clock + his men took on their visit. But he didn't. They were still in + Copenhagen a hundred years later, and may be they are yet. It was + not like his usual gallantry toward the fair sex. But perhaps he + didn't know anything about it. +</p> +<p> + Then we find him, after an unsuccessful attack on Gteborg that cost + many lives, sending in his adjutant to congratulate the Swedish + commandant on their "gallant encounter" the day before, and + exchanging presents with him in token of mutual regard. And before + one can turn the page he is discovered swooping down upon Marstrand, + taking town and fleet anchored there, and the castle itself with its + whole garrison, all with two hundred men, swelled by stratagem into + an army of thousands. We are told that an officer sent out from the + castle to parley, issuing forth from a generous dinner, beheld the + besieging army drawn up in street after street, always two hundred + men around every corner, as he made his way through the town, + piloted by Tordenskjold himself, who was careful to take him the + longest way, while the men took the short cut to the next block. The + man returned home with the message that the town was full of them + and that resistance was useless. The ruse smacks of Peder Wessel's + boyish fight with a much bigger fellow who had beaten him once by + gripping his long hair, and so getting his head in chancery. But + Peder had taken notice. Next time he came to the encounter with hair + cut short and his whole head smeared with soft-soap, and that time + he won. +</p> +<p> + The most extraordinary of all his adventures befell when, after the + attack on Strmstad, he was hastening home to Copenhagen. Crossing + the Kattegat in a little smack that carried but two three-pound + guns, he was chased and overtaken by a Swedish frigate of sixteen + guns and a crew of sixty men. Tordenskjold had but twenty-one, and + eight of them were servants and non-combatants. They were dreadfully + frightened, and tradition has it that one of them wept when he saw + the Swede coming on. Her captain called upon him to surrender, but + the answer was flung back: +</p> +<p> + "I am Tordenskjold! Come and take me, if you can." +</p> +<p> + With that came a tiny broadside that did brisk execution on the + frigate. Tordenskjold had hauled both his guns over on the "fighting + side" of his vessel. There ensued a battle such as Homer would have + loved to sing. Both sides banged away for all they were worth. In + the midst of the din and smoke Tordenskjold used his musket with + cool skill; his servants loaded while he fired. At every shot a man + fell on the frigate. +</p> +<p> + Word was brought that there was no more round shot. He bade them + twist up his pewter dinner service and fire that, which they did. + The Swede tried vainly to board. Tordenskjold manoeuvred his smack + with such skill that they could not hook on. Seeing this, Captain + Lind, commander of the frigate, called to him to desist from the + useless struggle; he would be honored to carry such a prisoner into + Gteborg. Back came the taunt: +</p> +<p> + "Neither you nor any other Swede shall ever carry me there!" And + with that he shot the captain down. <a name="1"></a><a href="#note-1"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> +</p> + +<p> + When his men saw him fall, they were seized with panic and made off + as quickly as they could, while Tordenskjold's crew, of whom only + fourteen were left, beat their drums and blew trumpets in frantic + defiance. Their captain was for following the Swede and boarding + her, but he couldn't. Sails, rigging, and masts were shot to pieces. + Perhaps the terror of the Swedes was increased by the sight of + Tordenskjold's tame bear making faces at them behind his master. It + went with him everywhere till that day, and came out of the fight + unscathed. But during the night the crew ran the vessel on the + Swedish shore, whence Tordenskjold himself reached Denmark in an + open boat which he had to keep bailing all night, for the boat was + shot full of holes, and though he and his companions stuffed their + spare clothing into them it leaked badly. The enemy got the smack, + after all, and the bear, which, being a Norwegian, proved so + untractable on Swedish soil that, sad to relate, in the end they cut + him up and ate him. +</p> +<p> + King Charles, himself a knightly soul and an admirer of a gallant + enemy, gave orders to have all Tordenskjold's belongings sent back + to him, but he did not live to see the order carried out. He was + found dead in the rifle-pits before Frederiksteen on December 11, + 1718, shot through the head. It was Tordenskjold himself who brought + the all-important news to King Frederik in the night of December + 28,—they were not the days of telegraphs and fast steamers,—and + when the King, who had been roused out of bed to receive him, could + not trust his ears, he said with characteristic audacity, "I wish it + were as true that your Majesty had made me a schoutbynacht,"—the + rank next below admiral. And so he took the step next to the last on + the ladder of his ambition. +</p> +<p> + Within seven months he took Marstrand. It is part of the record of + that astonishing performance that when the unhappy Commandant + hesitated as the hour of evacuation came, not sure that he had done + right in capitulating, Tordenskjold walked up to the fort with a + hundred men, half his force, banged on the gate, went in alone and + up to the Commandant's window, thundering out: +</p> +<p> + "What are you waiting for? Don't you know time is up?" +</p> +<p> + In terror and haste, Colonel Dankwardt moved his Hessians out, and + Tordenskjold marched his handful of men in. When he brought the King + the keys of Marstrand, Frederik made him an admiral. +</p> +<p> + It was while blockading the port of Gteborg in the last year of the + war that he met and made a friend of Lord Carteret, the English + Ambassador to Denmark, and fell in love with the picture of a young + Englishwoman, Miss Norris, a lady of great beauty and wealth, who, + Lord Carteret told him, was an ardent admirer of his. It was this + love which indirectly sent him to his death. Lord Carteret had given + him a picture of her, and as soon as peace was made he started for + England; but he never reached that country. The remnant of the + Swedish fleet lay in the roadstead at Gteborg, under the guns of + the two forts, New and Old Elfsborg. While Tordenskjold was away at + Marstrand, the enemy sallied forth and snapped up seven of the + smaller vessels of his blockading fleet. The news made him furious. + He sent in, demanding them back at once, "or I will come after + them." He had already made one ineffectual attempt to take New + Elfsborg that cost him dear. In Gteborg they knew the strength of + his fleet and laughed at his threat. But it was never safe to laugh + at Tordenskjold. The first dark night he stole in with ten armed + boats, seized the shore batteries of the old fort, and spiked their + guns before a shot was fired. The rising moon saw his men in + possession of the ships lying at anchor. With their blue-lined coats + turned inside out so that they might pass for Swedish uniforms, they + surprised the watch in the guard-house and made them all prisoners. + Now that there was no longer reason for caution, they raised a + racket that woke the sleeping town up in a fright. The commander of + the other fort sent out a boat to ascertain the cause. It met the + Admiral's and challenged it, "Who goes there?" +</p> +<p> + "Tordenskjold," was the reply, "come to teach you to keep awake." +</p> +<p> + It proved impossible to warp the ships out. Only one of the seven + lost ones was recovered; all the rest were set on fire. By the light + of the mighty bonfire Tordenskjold rowed out with his men, hauling + the recovered ship right under the guns of the forts, the Danish + flag flying at the bow of his boat. He had not lost a single man. A + cannon-ball swept away all the oars on one side of his boat, but no + one was hurt. +</p> +<p> + At Marstrand they had been up all night listening to the cannonading + and the crash upon crash as the big ships blew up. They knew that + Tordenskjold was abroad with his men. In the morning, when they were + all in church, he walked in and sat down by his chief, the old + Admiral Judicher, who was a slow-going, cautious man. He whispered + anxiously, "What news?" but Tordenskjold only shrugged his shoulders + with unmoved face. It is not likely that either the old Admiral or + the congregation heard much of that sermon, if indeed they heard any + of it. But when it was over, they saw from the walls of the town + the Danish ships at anchor and heard the story of the last of + Tordenskjold's exploits. It fitly capped the climax of his life. + Sweden's entire force on the North Sea, with the exception of five + small galleys, had either been captured, sunk, or burned by him. +</p> +<p> + The King would not let Tordenskjold go when peace was made, but he + had his way in the end. To his undoing he consented to take with him + abroad a young scalawag, the son of his landlord, who had more money + than brains. In Hamburg the young man fell in with a gambler, a + Swedish colonel by name of Stahl, who fleeced him of all he had and + much more besides. When Tordenskjold heard of it and met the Colonel + in another man's house, he caned him soundly and threw him out in + the street. For this he was challenged, but refused to fight a + gambler. +</p> +<p> + "Friends," particularly one Colonel Mnnichhausen, who volunteered + to be his second, talked him over, and also persuaded him to give up + the pistol, with which he was an expert. The duel was fought at the + Village of Gledinge, over the line from Hanover, on the morning of + November 12, 1720. Tordenskjold was roused from sleep at five, and, + after saying his prayers, a duty he never on any account omitted, he + started for the place appointed. His old body-servant vainly pleaded + with his master to take his stout blade instead of the flimsy parade + sword the Admiral carried. Mnnichhausen advised against it; it + would be too heavy, he said. Stahl's weapon was a long fighting + rapier, and to this the treacherous second made no objection. Almost + at the first thrust he ran the Admiral through. The seconds held his + servant while Stahl jumped on his horse and galloped away. + Tordenskjold breathed out his dauntless soul in the arms of his + faithful servant and friend. +</p> +<p> + His body lies in a black marble sarcophagus in the "Navy Church" at + Copenhagen. The Danish and Norwegian peoples have never ceased to + mourn their idol. He was a sailor with a sailor's faults. But he + loved truth, honor, and courage in foe and friend alike. Like many + seafaring men, he was deeply religious, with the unquestioning faith + of a child. There is a letter in existence written by him to his + father when the latter was on his death-bed that bears witness to + this. He thanks him with filial affection for all his care, and says + navely that he would rather have his prayers than fall heir to + twenty thousand daler. His pictures show a stocky, broad-shouldered + youth with frank blue eyes, full lips, and an eagle nose. His deep, + sonorous voice used to be heard, in his midshipman days, above the + whole congregation in the Navy Church. In after years it called + louder still to Denmark's foes. When things were at their worst in + storm or battle, he was wont to shout to his men, "Hi, <i>now</i> we are + having a fine time!" and his battle-cry has passed into the + language. By it, in desperate straits demanding stout hearts, one + may know the Dane after his own heart, the real Dane, the world + over. Among his own Tordenskjold is still and always will be "the + Admiral of Norway's fleet." +</p> +<br> +<a name="note-1"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#1"> +<u><sup>1</sup></u></a> He was not mortally wounded, and Tordenskjold took him + prisoner later at the capture of Marstrand. + +</p> +<a name="2H_4_0003"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND +</h2> +<br> +<p> + When in the fall of 1909 the statement was flashed around the world + that the North Pole had at last been reached, a name long unfamiliar + ran from mouth to mouth with that of the man who claimed to be its + discoverer. Dr. Cook was coming to Copenhagen, the daily despatches + read, on the Danish Government steamer <i>Hans Egede</i>. A shipload of + reporters kept an anxious lookout from the Skaw for the vessel so + suddenly become famous, but few who through their telescopes made + out the name at last upon the prow of the ship gave it another + thought in the eager welcome to the man it brought back from the + perils of the Farthest North. Yet the name of that vessel stood for + something of more real account to humanity than the attainment of a + goal that had been the mystery of the ages. No such welcome awaited + the explorer Hans Egede, who a hundred and seventy-two years before + sailed homeward over that very route, a broken, saddened man, and + all he brought was the ashes of his best-beloved that they might + rest in her native soil. No gold medal was struck for him; the + people did not greet him with loud acclaim. The King and his court + paid scant attention to him, and he was allowed to live his last + days in poverty. Yet a greater honor is his than ever fell to a + discoverer: the simple natives of Greenland long reckoned the time + from his coming among them. To them he was in their ice-bound home + what Father Damien was to the stricken lepers in the South seas, and + Dr. Grenfell is to the fishermen of Labrador. +</p> +<p> + Hans Poulsen Egede, the apostle of Greenland, was a Norwegian of + Danish descent. He was born in the Northlands, in the parish of + Trondens, on January 31, 1686. His grandfather and his father + before him had been clergymen in Denmark, the former in the town of + West Egede, whence the name. Graduated in a single year from the + University of Copenhagen, "at which," his teachers bore witness, "no + one need wonder who knows the man," he became at twenty-two pastor + of a parish up in the Lofoden Islands, where the fabled malstrom + churns. Eleven years he preached to the poor fisherfolk on Sunday, + and on week-days helped his parishioners rebuild the old church. + When it was finished and the bishop came to consecrate it, he chided + Egede because the altar was too fine; it must have cost more than + they could afford. +</p> +<p> + "It did not cost anything," was his reply. "I made it myself." +</p> +<p> + No wonder his fame went far. When the church bell of Vaagen called, + boats carrying Sunday-clad fishermen were seen making for the island + from every point of the compass. Great crowds flocked to his church; + great enough to arouse the jealousy of neighboring preachers who + were not so popular, and they made it so unpleasant that his wife at + last tired of it. They little dreamed that they were industriously + paving the way for his greater work and for his undying fame. +</p> +<p> + The sea that surges against that rockbound coast ever called its + people out in quest of adventure. Some who went nine hundred years + ago found a land in the far Northwest barred by great icebergs; but + once inside the barrier, they saw deep fjords like their own at + home, to which the mountains sloped down, covered with a wealth of + lovely flowers. On green meadows antlered deer were grazing, the + salmon leaped in brawling brooks, and birds called for their mates + in the barrens. Above it all towered snow-covered peaks. They saw + only the summer day; they did not know how brief it was, and how + long the winter night, and they called the country Greenland. They + built their homes there, and other settlers came. They were hardy + men, bred in a harsh climate, and they stayed. They built churches + and had their priests and bishops, for Norway was Christian by that + time. And they prospered after their fashion. They even paid Peter's + Pence to Rome. There is a record that their contribution, being in + kind, namely, walrus teeth, was sold in 1386 by the Pope's agent to + a merchant in Flanders for twelve livres, fourteen sous. They kept + up communication with their kin across the seas until the Black + Death swept through the Old World in the Fourteenth Century; Norway, + when it was gone, was like a vast tomb. Two-thirds of its people lay + dead. Those who were left had enough to do at home; and Greenland + was forgotten. +</p> +<p> + The seasons passed, and the savages, with whom the colonists had + carried on a running feud, came out of the frozen North and + overwhelmed them. Dim traditions that were whispered among the + natives for centuries told of that last fight. It was the Ragnarok + of the Northmen. Not one was left to tell the tale. Long years + after, when fishing vessels landed on that desolate coast, they + found a strange and hostile people in possession. No one had ever + dared to settle there since. +</p> +<p> + This last Egede knew, but little more. He believed that there were + still settlements on the inaccessible east coast of Greenland where + descendants of the old Northmen lived, cut off from all the world, + sunk into ignorance and godlessness,—men and women who had once + known the true light,—and his heart yearned to go to their rescue. + Waking and dreaming, he thought of nothing else. The lamp in his + quiet study shone out over the sea at night when his people were + long asleep. Their pastor was poring over old manuscripts and the + logs of whalers that had touched upon Greenland. From Bergen he + gathered the testimony of many sailors. None of them had ever seen + traces of, or heard of, the old Northmen. +</p> +<p> + To his bishop went Egede with his burden. Ever it rang in his ears: + "God has chosen you to bring them back to the light." The bishop + listened and was interested. Yes, that was the land from which + seafarers in a former king's time had brought home golden sand. + There might be more. It couldn't be far from Cuba and Hispaniola, + those golden coasts. If one were to go equipped for trading, no + doubt a fine stroke of business might be done. Thus the Right + Reverend Bishop Krog of Trondhjem, and Egede went home, + disheartened. +</p> +<p> + At home his friends scouted him, said he was going mad to think of + giving up his living on such a fool's chase. His wife implored him + to stay, and with a heavy heart Egede was about to abandon his + purpose when his jealous neighbor, whose parishioners had been going + to hear Egede preach, stirred up such trouble that his wife was glad + to go. She even urged him to, and he took her at her word. They + moved to Bergen, and from that port they sailed on May 3, 1721, on + the ship <i>Haabet</i> (the Hope), with another and smaller vessel as + convoy, forty-six souls all told, bound for the unknown North. The + Danish King had made Egede missionary to the Greenlanders on a + salary of three hundred daler a year, the same amount which Egede + himself contributed of his scant store toward the equipment. The + bishop's plan had prevailed; the mission was to be carried by the + expected commerce, and upon that was to be built a permanent + colonization. +</p> +<p> + Early in June they sighted land, but the way to it was barred by + impassable ice. A whole month they sailed to and fro, trying vainly + for a passage. At last they found an opening and slipped through, + only to find themselves shut in, with towering icebergs closing + around them. As they looked fearfully out over the rail, their + convoy signalled that she had struck, and the captain of <i>Haabet</i> + cried out that all was lost. In the tumult of terror that succeeded, + Egede alone remained calm. Praying for succor where there seemed to + be none, he remembered the One Hundred and Seventh Psalm: "He + brought them out of darkness and the shadow of death, and brake + their bands in sunder." And the morning dawned clear, the ice was + moving and their prison widening. On July 3, <i>Haabet</i> cleared the + last ice-reef, and the shore lay open before them. +</p> +<p> + The Eskimos came out in their kayaks, and the boldest climbed aboard + the ship. In one boat sat an old man who refused the invitation. He + paddled about the vessel, mumbling darkly in a strange tongue. He + was an Angekok, one of the native medicine-men of whom presently + Egede was to know much more. As he stood upon the deck and looked at + these strangers for whose salvation he had risked all, his heart + fell. They were not the stalwart Northmen he had looked for, and + their jargon had no homelike sound. But a great wave of pity swept + over him, and the prayer that rose to his lips was for strength to + be their friend and their guide to the light. +</p> +<p> + Not at once did the way open for the coveted friendship with the + Eskimos. While they thought the strangers came only to trade they + were hospitable enough, but when they saw them build, clearly intent + on staying, they made signs that they had better go. They pointed to + the sun that sank lower toward the horizon every day, and shivered + as if from extreme cold, and they showed their visitors the + icebergs and the snow, making them understand that it would cover + the house by and by. When it all availed nothing and the winter came + on, they retired into their huts and cut the acquaintance of the + white men. They were afraid that they had come to take revenge for + the harm done their people in the olden time. There was nothing for + it, then, but that Egede must go to them, and this he did. +</p> +<p> + They seized their spears when they saw him coming, but he made signs + that he was their friend. When he had nothing else to give them, he + let them cut the buttons from his coat. Throughout the fifteen years + he spent in Greenland Egede never wore furs, as did the natives. The + black robe he thought more seemly for a clergyman, to his great + discomfort. He tells in his diary and in his letters that often when + he returned from his winter travels it could stand alone when he + took it off, being frozen stiff. After a while he got upon + neighborly terms with the Eskimos; but, if anything, the discomfort + was greater. They housed him at night in their huts, where the filth + and the stench were unendurable. They showed their special regard + by first licking off the piece of seal they put before him, and if + he rejected it they were hurt. Their housekeeping, of which he got + an inside view, was embarrassing in its simplicity. The dish-washing + was done by the dogs licking the kettles clean. Often, after a night + or two in a hut that held half a dozen families, he was compelled to + change his clothes to the skin in an open boat or out on the snow. + But the alternative was to sleep out in a cold that sometimes froze + his pillow to the bed and the tea-cup to the table even in his own + home. Above all, he must learn their language. +</p> +<p> + It proved a difficult task, for the Eskimo tongue was both very + simple and very complex. In all the things pertaining to their daily + life it was exceedingly complex. For instance, to catch one kind of + fish was expressed by one word, to catch another kind in quite + different terms. They had one word for catching a young seal, + another for catching an old one. When it came to matters of moral + and spiritual import, the language was poor to desperation. Egede's + instruction began when he caught the word "kine"—what is it? And + from that time on he learned every day; but the pronunciation was as + varied as the workaday vocabulary, and it was an unending task. +</p> +<p> + It proceeded with many interruptions from the Angekoks, who tried + more than once to bewitch him, but finally gave it up, convinced + that he was a great medicine-man himself, and therefore + invulnerable. But before that they tried to foment a regular mutiny, + the colony being by that time well under way, and Egede had to + arrest and punish the leaders. The natives naturally clung to them, + and when Egede had mastered their language and tried to make clear + that the Angekoks deceived them when they pretended to go to the + other world for advice, they demurred. "Did you ever see them go?" + he asked. "Well, have you seen this God of yours of whom you speak + so much?" was their reply. When Egede spoke of spiritual gifts, they + asked for good health and blubber: "Our Angekoks give us that." + Hell-fire was much in theological evidence in those days, but among + the Eskimos it was a failure as a deterrent. They listened to the + account of it eagerly and liked the prospect. When at length they + became convinced that Egede knew more than their Angekoks, they came + to him with the request that he would abolish winter. Very likely + they thought that one who had such knowledge of the hot place ought + to have influence enough with the keeper of it to obtain this favor. +</p> +<p> + It was not an easy task, from any point of view, to which he had put + his hands. As that first winter wore away there were gloomy days and + nights, and they were not brightened when, with the return of the + sun, no ship arrived from Denmark. The Dutch traders came, and + opened their eyes wide when they found Egede and his household safe + and even on friendly terms with the Eskimos. Pelesse—the natives + called the missionary that, as the nearest they could come to the + Danish <i>prst</i> (priest)—Pelesse was not there after blubber, they + told the Dutchmen, but to teach them about heaven and of "Him up + there," who had made them and wanted them home with Him again. So he + had not worked altogether in vain. But the brief summer passed, and + still no relief ship. The crew of <i>Haabet</i> clamored to go home, and + Egede had at last to give a reluctant promise that if no ship came + in two weeks, he would break up. His wife alone refused to take a + hand in packing. The ship was coming, she insisted, and at the last + moment it did come. A boat arriving after dark brought the first + word of it. The people ashore heard voices speaking in Danish, and + flew to Egede, who had gone to bed, with the news. The ship brought + good cheer. The Government was well disposed. Trading and preaching + were to go on together, as planned. Joyfully then they built a + bigger and a better house, and called their colony Godthaab (Good + Hope). +</p> +<p> + The work was now fairly under way. Of the energy and the hardships + it entailed, even we in our day that have heard so much of Arctic + exploration can have but a faint conception. Shut in on the coast of + eternal ice and silence,—silence, save when in summer the Arctic + rivers were alive, and crash after crash announced that the glaciers + coming down from the inland mountains were "casting their calves," + the great icebergs, upon the ocean,—the colonists counted the days + from the one when that year's ship was lost to sight till the + returning spring brought the next one, their only communication with + their far-off home. In summer the days were sometimes burning hot, + but the nights always bitterly cold. In winter, says Egede, hot + water spilled on the table froze as it ran, and the meat they cooked + was often frozen at the bone when set on the table. Summer and + winter Egede was on his travels between Sundays, sometimes in the + trader's boat, more often the only white man with one or two Eskimo + companions, seeking out the people. When night surprised him with no + native hut in sight, he pulled the boat on some desert shore and, + commending his soul to God, slept under it. Once he and his son + found an empty hut, and slept there in the darkness. Not until day + came again did they know that they had made their bed on the frozen + bodies of dead men who had once been the occupants of the house, and + had died they never knew how. Peril was everywhere. Again and again + his little craft was wrecked. Once the house blew down over their + heads in one of the dreadful winter storms that ravage those high + latitudes. Often he had to sit on the rail of his boat, and let his + numbed feet hang into the sea to restore feeling in them. On land he + sometimes waded waist-deep in snow, climbed mountains and slid down + into valleys, having but the haziest notion of where he would land. + At home his brave wife sat alone, praying for his safety and + listening to every sound that might herald his return. Tremble and + doubt they did, Egede owns, but they never flinched. Their work was + before them, and neither thought of turning back. +</p> +<p> + The Eskimos soon came to know that Egede was their friend. When his + boat entered a fjord where they were fishing, and his rowers shouted + out that the good priest had come who had news of God, they dropped + their work and flocked out to meet him. Then he spoke to a floating + congregation, simply as if they were children, and, as with Him + whose message he bore, "the people heard him gladly." They took him + to their sick, and asked him to breathe upon them, which he did to + humor them, until he found out that it was an Angekok practice, + whereupon he refused. Once, after he had spoken of the raising of + Lazarus from the dead, they took him to a new-made grave and asked + him, too, to bring back their dead. They brought him a blind man to + be healed. Egede looked upon them in sorrowful pity. "I can do + nothing," he said; "but if he believes in Jesus, He has the power + and can do it." +</p> +<p> + "I do believe," shouted the blind man: "let Him heal me." It + occurred to Egede, perhaps as a mere effort at cleanliness, to wash + his eyes in cognac, and he sent him away with words of comfort. He + did not see his patient again for thirteen years. Then he was in a + crowd of Eskimos who came to Godthaab. The man saw as well as Egede. +</p> +<p> + "Do you remember?" he said, "you washed my eyes with sharp water, + and the Son of God in whom I believed, He made me to see." +</p> +<p> + Children the Eskimos were in their idolatry, and children they + remained as Christians. By Egede's prayers they set great store. + "You ask for us," they told him. "God does not hear us; He does not + understand Eskimo." Of God they spoke as "Him up there." They + believed that the souls of the dead went up on the rainbow, and, + reaching the moon that night, rested there in the moon's house, on a + bench covered with the white skins of young polar bears. There they + danced and played games, and the northern lights were the young + people playing ball. Afterward they lived in houses on the shore of + a big lake overshadowed by a snow mountain. When the waters ran over + the edge of the lake, it rained on earth. When the "moon was dark," + it was down on earth catching seal for a living. Thunder was caused + by two old women shaking a dried sealskin between them; the + lightning came when they turned the white side out. The "Big Nail" + we have heard of as the Eskimos' Pole, was a high-pointed mountain + in the Farthest North on which the sky rested and turned around with + the sun, moon, and stars. Up there the stars were much bigger. + Orion's Belt was so near that you had to carry a whip to drive him + away. +</p> +<p> + The women were slaves. An Eskimo might have as many wives as he saw + fit; they were his, and it was nobody's business. But adultery was + unknown. The seventh commandment in Egede's translation came to + read, "One wife alone you shall have and love." The birth of a girl + was greeted with wailing. When grown, she was often wooed by + violence. If she fled from her admirer, he cut her feet when he + overtook her, so that she could run no more. The old women were + denounced as witches who drove the seals away, and were murdered. An + Eskimo who was going on a reindeer hunt, and found his aged mother a + burden, took her away and laid her in an open grave. Returning on + the third day, he heard her groaning yet, and smothered her with a + big stone. He tried to justify himself to Egede by saying that "she + died hard, and it was a pity not to speed her." Yet they buried a + dog's head with a child, so that the dog, being clever, could run + ahead and guide the little one's steps to heaven. +</p> +<p> + They could count no further than five; at a stretch they might get + to twenty, on their fingers and toes, but there they stopped. + However, they were not without resources. It was the day of long + Sunday services, and the Eskimos were a restless people. When the + sermon dragged, they would go up to Egede and make him measure on + their arms how much longer the talk was going to be. Then they + tramped back to their seats and sat listening with great attention, + all the time moving one hand down the arm, checking off the + preacher's progress. If they got to the finger-tips before he + stopped, they would shake their heads sourly and go back for a + remeasurement. No wonder Egede put his chief hope in the children, + whom he gathered about him in flocks. +</p> +<p> + For all that, the natives loved him. There came a day that brought + this message from the North: "Say to the speaker to come to us to + live, for the other strangers who come here can only talk to us of + blubber, blubber, blubber, and we also would hear of the great + Creator." Egede went as far as he could, but was compelled by ice + and storms to turn back after weeks of incredible hardships. The + disappointment was the more severe to him because he had never quite + given up his hope of finding remnants of the ancient Norse + settlements. The fact that the old records spoke of a West Bygd + (settlement) and an East Bygd had misled many into believing that + the desolate east coast had once been colonized. Not until our own + day was this shown to be an error, when Danish explorers searched + that coast for a hundred miles and found no other trace of + civilization than a beer bottle left behind by the explorer + Nordenskjold. +</p> +<p> + Egede's hope had been that Greenland might be once more colonized by + Christian people. When the Danish Government, after some years, sent + up a handful of soldiers, with a major who took the title of + governor, to give the settlement official character as a trading + station, they sent with them twenty unofficial "Christians," ten men + out of the penitentiary and as many lewd and drunken women from the + treadmill, who were married by lot before setting sail, to give the + thing a halfway decent look. They were good enough for the Eskimos, + they seem to have thought at Copenhagen. There followed a terrible + winter, during which mutiny and murder were threatened. "It is a + pity," writes the missionary, "that while we sleep secure among the + heathen savages, with so-called Christian people our lives are not + safe." As a matter of fact they were not, for the soldiers joined in + the mutiny against Egede as the cause of their having to live in + such a place, and had not sickness and death smitten the + malcontents, neither he nor the governor would have come safe + through the winter. On the Eskimos this view of the supposed fruits + of Christian teaching made its own impression. After seeing a woman + scourged on shipboard for misbehavior, they came innocently enough + to Egede and suggested that some of their best Angekoks be sent down + to Denmark to teach the people to be sober and decent. +</p> +<p> + There came a breathing spell after ten years of labor in what had + often enough seemed to him the spiritual as well as physical + ice-barrens of the North, when Egede surveyed a prosperous mission, + with trade established, a hundred and fifty children christened and + schooled, and many of their elders asking to be baptized. In the + midst of his rejoicing the summer's ship brought word from Denmark + that the King was dead, and orders from his successor to abandon the + station. Egede might stay with provisions for one year, if there was + enough left over after fitting out the ship; but after that he would + receive no further help. +</p> +<p> + When the Eskimos heard the news, they brought their little children + to the mission. "These will not let you go," they said; and he + stayed. His wife, whom hardship and privation and the lonely waiting + for her husband in the long winter nights had at last broken down, + refused to leave him, though she sadly needed the care of a + physician. A few of the sailors were persuaded to stay another year. + "So now," Egede wrote in his diary when, on July 31, 1731, he had + seen the ship sail away with all his hopes, "I am left alone with my + wife and three children, ten sailors and eight Eskimos, girls and + boys who have been with us from the start. God let me live to see + the blessed day that brings good news once more from home." His + prayer was heard. The next summer brought word that the mission was + to be continued, partly because Egede had strained every nerve to + send home much blubber and many skins. But it was as a glimpse of + the sun from behind dark clouds. His greatest trials trod hard upon + the good news. +</p> +<p> + To rouse interest in the mission Egede had sent home young Eskimos + from time to time. Three of these died of smallpox in Denmark. The + fourth came home and brought the contagion, all unknown, to his + people. It was the summer fishing season, when the natives travel + much and far, and wherever he went they flocked about him to hear of + the "Great Lord's land," where the houses were so tall that one + could not shoot an arrow over them, and to ask a multitude of + questions: Was the King very big? Had he caught many whales? Was he + strong and a great Angekok? and much more of the same kind. In a + week the disease broke out among the children at the mission, and + soon word came from islands and fjords where the Eskimos were + fishing, of death and misery unspeakable. It was virgin soil for the + plague, and it was terribly virulent, striking down young and old in + every tent and hut. More than two thousand natives, one-fourth of + the whole population, died that summer. Of two hundred families near + the mission only thirty were left alive. A cry of terror and anguish + rose throughout the settlements. No one knew what to do. In vain did + Egede implore them to keep their sick apart. In fever delirium they + ran out in the ice-fields or threw themselves into the sea. A wild + panic seized the survivors, and they fled to the farthest tribes, + carrying the seeds of death with them wherever they went. Whole + villages perished, and their dead lay unburied. Utter desolation + settled like a pall over the unhappy land. +</p> +<p> + Through it all a single ray of hope shone. The faith that Egede had + preached all those years, and the life he had lived with them, bore + their fruit. They had struck deeper than he thought. They crowded to + him, all that could, as their one friend. Dying mothers held their + suckling babes up to him and died content. In a deserted island camp + a half-grown girl was found alone with three little children. Their + father was dead. When he knew that for him and the baby there was no + help, he went to a cave and, covering himself and the child with + skins, lay down to die. His parting words to his daughter were, + "Before you have eaten the two seals and the fish I have laid away + for you, Pelesse will come, no doubt, and take you home. For he + loves you and will take care of you." At the mission every nook and + cranny was filled with the sick and the dying. Egede and his wife + nursed them day and night. Childlike, when death approached, they + tried to put on their best clothes, or even to have new ones made, + that they might please God by coming into His presence looking fine. + When Egede had closed their eyes, he carried the dead in his arms to + the vestibule, where in the morning the men who dug the graves found + them. At the sight of his suffering the scoffers were dumb. What his + preaching had not done to win them over, his sorrows did. They were + at last one. +</p> +<p> + That dreadful year left Egede a broken man. In his dark moments he + reproached himself with having brought only misery to those he had + come to help and serve. One thorn which one would think he might + have been spared rankled deep in it all. Some missionaries of a + dissenting sect—Egede was Lutheran—had come with the smallpox ship + to set up an establishment of their own. At their head was a man + full of misdirected zeal and quite devoid of common-sense, who + engaged Egede in a wordy dispute about justification by faith and + condemned him and his work unsparingly. He had grave doubts whether + he was in truth a "converted man." It came to an end when they + themselves fell ill, and Egede and his wife had the last word, after + their own fashion. They nursed the warlike brethren through their + illness with loving ministrations and gave them back to life, let us + hope, wiser and better men. +</p> +<p> + At Christmas, 1735, Egede's faithful wife, Gertrude, closed her + eyes. She had gone out with him from home and kin to a hard and + heathen land, and she had been his loyal helpmeet in all his trials. + Now it was all over. That winter scurvy laid him upon a bed of pain + and, lying there, his heart turned to the old home. His son had come + from Copenhagen to help, happily yet while his mother lived. To him + he would give over the work. In Denmark he could do more for it than + in Greenland, now he was alone. On July 29, 1736, he preached for + the last time to his people and baptized a little Eskimo to whom + they gave his name, Hans. The following week he sailed for home, + carrying, as all his earthly wealth, his beloved dead and his + motherless children. +</p> +<p> + The Eskimos gathered on the shore and wept as the ship bore their + friend away. They never saw him again. He lived in Denmark eighteen + years, training young men to teach the Eskimos. They gave him the + title of bishop, but so little to live on that he was forced in his + last days to move from Copenhagen to a country town, to make both + ends meet. His grave was forgotten by the generation that came after + him. No one knows now where it is; but in ice-girt Greenland, where + the northern lights on wintry nights flash to the natives their + message from the souls that have gone home, his memory will live + when that of the North Pole seeker whom the world applauds is long + forgotten. Hans Egede was their great man, their hero. He was + more,—he was their friend. +</p> +<a name="2H_4_0004"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN +</h2> +<br> +<p> + A great and wise woman had, after ages of war and bloodshed, united + the crowns of the three Scandinavian kingdoms upon one head. In the + strong city of Kalmar, around which the tide of battle had ever + raged hottest, the union was declared in the closing days of the + Thirteenth Century. Norwegian, Swede, and Dane were thenceforth to + stand together, to the end of time; so they resolved. It was all a + vain dream. Queen Margaret was not cold in her grave before the + kingdoms fell apart. Norway clung to Denmark, but Sweden went her + own way. In the wars of two generations the Danish kings won back + the Swedish crown and lost it, again and again, until in 1520 King + Christian II clutched it for the last time, at the head of a + conquering army. He celebrated his victory with a general amnesty, + and bade the Swedish nobles to a great feast, held at the capital in + November. +</p> +<p> + Christian is one of the unsolved riddles of history. Ablest but + unhappiest of all his house, he was an instinctive democrat, + sincerely solicitous for the welfare of the plain people, but + incredibly cruel and faithless when the dark mood seized him. The + coronation feast ended with the wholesale butchery of the + unsuspecting nobles. Hundreds were beheaded in the public square; + for days it was filled with the slain. It is small comfort that the + wicked priest who egged the King on to the dreadful deed was himself + burned at the stake by the master he had betrayed. The Stockholm + Massacre drowned the Kalmar Union in its torrents of blood. + Retribution came swiftly. Above the peal of the Christmas bells rose + the clash and clangor of armed hosts pouring forth from the mountain + fastnesses to avenge the foul treachery. They were led by Gustav<a name="2"></a><a href="#note-2"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> + Eriksson Vasa, a young noble upon whose head Christian had set a + price. +</p> +<p> + The Vasas were among the oldest and best of the great Swedish + families. It was said of them that they ever loved a friend, hated + a foe, and never forgot. Gustav was born in the castle of + Lindholmen, when the news that the world had grown suddenly big by + the discovery of lands beyond the unknown seas was still ringing + through Europe, on May 12, 1496. He was brought up in the home of + his kinsman, the Swedish patriot Sten Sture, and early showed the + fruits of his training. "See what I will do," he boasted in school + when he was thirteen, "I will go to Dalecarlia, rouse the people, + and give the Jutes (Danes) a black eye." Master Ivar, his Danish + teacher, gave him a whaling for that. White with anger, the boy + drove his dirk through the book, nailing it to the desk, and stalked + out of the room. Master Ivar's eyes followed the slim figure in the + scarlet cloak, and he sighed wearily "<i>nobilium nati nolunt aliquid + pati</i>,—the children of the great will put up with nothing." +</p> +<p> + Hardly yet of age, he served under the banner of Sten Sture against + King Christian, and was one of six hostages sent to the King when he + asked an interview of the Swedish leader. But Christian stayed away + from the meeting and carried the hostages off to Denmark against his + plighted faith. There Gustav was held prisoner a year. All that + winter rumors of great armaments against Sweden filled the land. He + heard the young bloods from the court prate about bending the stiff + necks in the country across the Sound, and watched them throw dice + for Swedish castles and Swedish women,—part of the loot when his + fatherland should be laid under the yoke. Ready to burst with anger + and grief, he sat silent at their boasts. In the spring he escaped, + disguised as a cattle-herder, and made his way to Lbeck, where he + found refuge in the house of the wealthy merchant Kort Knig. +</p> +<p> + They soon heard in Denmark where he was, and the King sent letters + demanding his surrender; but the burghers of the Hanse town hated + Christian with cause, and would not give him up. Then came Gustav's + warder who had gone bail for him in sixteen hundred gulden, and + pleaded for his prisoner. +</p> +<p> + "I am not a prisoner," was Gustav's retort, "I am a hostage, for + whom the Danish king pledged his oath and faith. If any one can + prove that I was taken captive in a fight or for just cause, let him + stand forth. Ambushed was I, and betrayed." The Lbeck men thought + of the plots King Christian was forever hatching against them. Now, + if he succeeded in getting Sweden under his heel, their turn would + come next. Better, they said, send this Gustav home to his own + country, perchance he might keep the King busy there; by which they + showed their good sense. His ex-keeper was packed off back home, and + Gustav reached Sweden, sole passenger on a little coast-trader, on + May 31, 1520. A stone marks the spot where he landed, near Kalmar; + for then struck the hour of Sweden's freedom. +</p> +<p> + But not yet for many weary months did the people hear its summons. + Swedish manhood was at its lowest ebb. Stockholm was held by the + widow of Sten Sture with a half-famished garrison. In Kalmar another + woman, Anna Bjelke, commanded, but her men murmured, and the fall of + the fortress was imminent. When Gustav Vasa, who had slipped in + unseen, exhorted them to stand fast, they would have mobbed him. He + left as he had come, the day before the surrender. Travelling by + night, he made his way inland, finding everywhere fear and distrust. + The King had promised that if they would obey him "they should + never want for herring and salt," so they told Gustav, and when he + tried to put heart into them and rouse their patriotism, they took + up bows and arrows and bade him be gone. Indeed, there were not + wanting those who shot at him. Like a hunted deer he fled from + hamlet to hamlet. Such friends as he had left advised him to throw + himself upon the King's mercy; told him of the amnesty proclaimed. + But Gustav's thoughts dwelt grimly among the Northern mountaineers + whom as a boy he had bragged he would set against the tyrant. + Insensibly he shaped his course toward their country. +</p> +<p> + He was with his brother-in-law, Joachim Brahe, when the King's + message bidding him to the coronation came. Gustav begged him not to + go, but Brahe's wife and children were within Christian's reach, and + he did not dare stay away. When he left, the fugitive hid in his + ancestral home at Rfsns on lake Mlar. There one of Brahe's men + brought him news of the massacre in which his master and Gustav's + father had perished. His mother, grandmother, and sisters were + dragged away to perish in Danish dungeons. On Gustav's head the King + had set a price, and spies were even then on his track. +</p> +<p> + Gustav's mind was made up. What was there now to wait for? Clad as a + peasant, he started for Dalecarlia with a single servant to keep him + company, but before he reached the mines the man stole all his money + and ran away. He had to work now to live, and hired out to Anders + Persson, the farmer of Rankhyttan. He had not been there many days + when one of the women saw an embroidered sleeve stick out under his + coat and told her master that the new hand was not what he pretended + to be. The farmer called him aside, and Gustav told him frankly who + he was. Anders Persson kept his secret, but advised him not to stay + long in any one place lest his enemies get wind of him. He slipped + away as soon as it was dark, nearly lost his life by breaking + through the ice, but reached Orns on the other side of Lake Runn, + half dead with cold and exposure. He knew that another Persson who + had been with him in the war lived there, and found his house. + Arendt Persson was a rascal. He received him kindly, but when he + slept harnessed his horse and went to Mns Nilsson, a neighbor, + with the news: the King's reward would make them both rich, if he + would help him seize the outlawed man. +</p> +<p> + Mns Nilsson held with the Danes, but he was no traitor, and he + showed the fellow the door. He went next to the King's sheriff; he + would be bound to help. To be sure, he would claim the lion's share + of the blood-money, but something was better than nothing. The + sheriff came soon enough with a score of armed men. But Arendt + Persson had not reckoned with his honest wife. She guessed his + errand and let Gustav down from the window to the rear gate, where + she had a sleigh and team in waiting. When the sheriff's posse + surrounded the house, Gustav was well on his way to Master Jon, the + parson of Svrdsj, who was his friend. Tradition has it that while + Christian was King, the brave little woman never dared show her face + in the house again. +</p> +<p> + Master Jon was all right, but news of the man-hunt had run through + the country, and when the parson's housekeeper one day saw him hold + the wash-bowl for his guest she wanted to know why he was so polite + to a common clod. Master Jon told her that it was none of her + business, but that night he piloted his friend across the lake to + Isala, where Sven Elfsson lived, a gamekeeper who knew the country + and could be trusted. The good parson was hardly out of sight on his + way back when the sheriff's men came looking for Gustav. It did not + occur to them that the yokel who stood warming himself by the stove + might be the man they were after. But the gamekeeper's wife was + quick to see his peril. She was baking bread and had just put the + loaves into the oven with a long-handled spade. "Here, you lummox!" + she cried, and whacked him soundly over the back with it, "what are + ye standing there gaping at? Did ye never see folks afore? Get back + to your work in the barn." And Gustav, taking the hint, slunk out of + the room. +</p> +<p> + For three days after that he lay hidden under a fallen tree in the + snow and bitter cold; but even there he was not safe, and the + gamekeeper took him deeper into the forest, where a big spruce grew + on a hill in the middle of a frozen swamp. There no one would seek + him till he could make a shift to get him out of the country. The + hill is still there; the people call it the King's Hill, and not + after King Christian, either. But in those long nights when Gustav + Vasa listened to the hungry wolves howling in the woods and nosing + about his retreat, it was hardly kingly conceits his mind brooded + over. His father and kinsmen were murdered; his mother and sister in + the pitiless grasp of the tyrant who was hunting him to his death; + he, the last of his race, alone and forsaken by his own. Bitter + sorrow filled his soul at the plight of his country that had fallen + so low. But the hope of the young years came to the rescue: all was + not lost yet. And in the morning came Sven, the gamekeeper, with a + load of straw, at the bottom of which he hid him. So no one would be + the wiser. +</p> +<p> + It was well he did it, for half-way to the next town some prowling + soldiers overtook them, and just to make sure that there was nothing + in the straw, prodded the load with their spears. Nothing stirred, + and they went on their way. But a spear had gashed Gustav's leg, and + presently blood began to drip in the snow. Sven had his wits about + him. He got down, and cut the fetlock of one of the beasts with his + jack-knife so that it bled and no one need ask questions. When they + got to Marns, Gustav was weak from the loss of blood, but a + friendly surgeon was found to bind up his wounds. +</p> +<p> + Farther and farther north he fled, keeping to the deep woods in the + day, until he reached Rttwik. Feeling safer there, he spoke to the + people coming from church one Sunday and implored them to shake off + the Danish yoke. But they only shook their heads. He was a stranger + among them, and they would talk it over with their neighbors. Not + yet were his wanderings over. To Mora he went next, where Parson + Jakob hid him in a lonely farm-house. Evil chance led the spies + direct to his hiding-place, and once more it was the housewife whose + quick wit saved him. Dame Margit was brewing the Yule beer when she + saw them coming. In a trice she had Gustav in the cellar and rolled + the brewing vat over the trap-door. Then they might search as they + saw fit; there was nothing there. The first blood was spilled for + Gustav Vasa while he was at Mora, and it was a Dane who did it. He + was the kind that liked to see fair play; when an under-sheriff came + looking for the hunted man there, the Dane waylaid and killed him. +</p> +<p> + Christmas morning, when Master Jakob had preached his sermon in the + church, Gustav spoke to the congregation out in the snow-covered + churchyard. A gravestone was his pulpit. Eloquent always, his + sorrows and wrongs and the memory of the hard months lent wings to + his words. His speech lives yet in Dalecarlia, for now he was among + its mountains. +</p> +<p> + "It is good to see this great meeting," he said, "but when I think + of our fatherland I am filled with grief. At what peril I am here + with you, you know who see me hounded as a wild beast day by day, + hour by hour. But our beloved country is more to me than life. How + long must we be thralls, we who were born to freedom? Those of you + who are old remember what persecution Swedish men and women have + suffered from the Danish kings. The young have heard the story of it + and have learned from they were little children to hate and resist + such rule. These tyrants have laid waste our land and sucked its + marrow, until nothing remains for us but empty houses and lean + fields. Our very lives are not safe." He called upon them to rise + and drive the invaders out. If they wanted a leader, he was ready. +</p> +<p> + His words stirred the mountaineers deeply. Cries of anger were + heard in the crowd; it was not the first time they had taken up arms + in the cause of freedom. But when they talked it over, the older + heads prevailed; there had not been time enough to hear both sides. + They told him that they would not desert the King; he must expect + nothing of them. +</p> +<p> + Broken-hearted and desperate, Gustav Vasa turned toward the + Norwegian frontier. He would leave the country for which there was + no hope. While the table in the poorest home groaned with Yuletide + cheer, Sweden's coming king hid under an old bridge, outcast and + starving, till it was safe to leave. Then he took up his weary + journey alone. The winter cold had grown harder as the days grew + shorter. Famished wolves dogged his steps, but he outran them on his + snow-shoes. By night he slept in some wayside shelter, such as they + build for travellers in that desolate country, or in the brush. The + snow grew deeper, and the landscape wilder, as he went. For days he + had gone without food, when he saw the sun set behind the lofty + range that was to bar him out of home and hope forever. Even there + was no abiding place for him. What thoughts of his vanished dream, + perchance of the distant lands across the seas where the tyrant's + hand could not reach him, were in his mind, who knows, as he bent + his strength to the last and hardest stage of his journey? He was + almost there, when he heard shouts behind him and turned to sell his + life dear. Two men on skis were calling to him. They were unarmed, + and he waited to let them come up. +</p> +<p> + Their story was soon told. They had come to call him back. After he + left, an old soldier whom they knew in Mora had come from the south + and told them worse things than even Gustav knew. It was all true + about the Stockholm murder; worse, the King was having gallows set + up in every county to hang all those on who said him nay; a heavy + tax was laid upon the peasants, and whoever did not pay was to have + a hand or foot cut off; they could still follow the plow. And now + they had sent away the one man who could lead against the Danes, + with the forests full of outlawed men who would have enlisted under + him as soon as ever the cry was raised! While the men of Dalecarlia + were debating the news among themselves orders came from the + bailiff at Westers that the tax was to be paid forthwith. That + night runners were sent on the trail of Gustav to tell him to come + back; they were ready. +</p> +<p> + When he came, it was as if a mighty storm swept through the + mountains. The people rose in a body. Every day whole parishes threw + off their allegiance to King Christian. Sunday after Sunday Gustav + spoke to the people at their meeting-houses, and they raised their + spears and swore to follow him to death. Two months after the murder + in Stockholm an army of thousands that swelled like an avalanche was + marching south, and province after province joined in the rebellion. + King Christian's host met them at Brunbck in April. One of its + leaders asked the country folk what kind of men the Dalecarlians + were, and when he was told that they drank water and ate bread made + of bark, he cried out, "Such a people the devil himself couldn't + whip; let us get out." But his advice was not taken and the Danish + army was wiped out. Gustav halted long enough to drill his men and + give them time to temper their arrows and spears, then he fell upon + Westers and beat the Danes there. The peasant mob scattered too + soon to loot the town, and the King's men came back with a sudden + rush. Only Gustav's valor and presence of mind saved the day that + had been won once from being lost again. +</p> +<p> + When it was seen that the Danes were not invincible, the whole + country rose, took the scattered castles, and put their defenders to + the sword. Gustav bore the rising on his shoulders from first to + last. He was everywhere, ordering and leading. His fiery eloquence + won over the timorous; his irresistible advance swept every obstacle + aside. In May he took Upsala; by midsummer he was besieging + Stockholm itself. Most of the other cities were in his hands. The + Hanse towns had found out what this Gustav could do at home. They + sang his praise, but as for backing him with their purse, that was + another matter. They refused to lend Gustav two siege-guns when he + lay before Stockholm, though he offered to pledge a castle for each. + He had no money. Happily his enemy, Christian, was even worse off. + Neither pledges nor promises could get him the money he needed. His + chief men were fighting among themselves and made peace only to turn + upon him. Within a year after the Swedish people had chosen Gustav + Vasa to be Regent at the Diet of Vadstena, Christian went into exile + and, when he tried to get his kingdom back, into prison, where he + languished the rest of his life. He fully deserved his fate. Yet he + meant well and had done some good things in his day. Had he been + able to rule himself, he might have ruled others with better + success. Schoolboys remember with gratitude that he forbade teachers + to "spank their pupils overmuch and without judgment, as was their + wont." +</p> +<p> + At the Diet of Vadstena the people had offered Gustav the crown, but + he put it from him. Scarce eight months had passed since he hid + under the bridge, hunted and starving. When Stockholm had fallen + after a siege of two years and all Sweden was free, the people met + (1523) and made him King, whether or no. He still objected, but gave + in at last and was crowned. +</p> +<p> + Popular favor is fickle. Hard times came that were not made easier + by Gustav's determination to fill the royal coffers, and the very + Dalecarlians who had put him in the high seat rose against him and + served notice that if things did not mend they would have none of + him. Gustav made sure that they had no backing elsewhere, then went + up and persuaded them to be good by cutting off the heads of their + leaders, who both happened to be priests: one was even a bishop. He + had been taught in a school that always found an axe ready to hand. + Let those who lament the savagery of modern warfare consider what + happened then to a Danish fleet that tried to bring relief to + hard-pressed Stockholm. It was beaten in a fight in which six + hundred men were taken prisoners. They were all, say the accounts, + "tied hand and foot and flung overboard amid the beating of drums + and blowing of trumpets to drown their cries." The clergy fared + little better than the laymen in that age, but then it was their own + fault. In plotting and scrapping they were abreast of the worst and + took the consequences. +</p> +<p> + They were the days of the Reformation, and Gustav would not have + been human had he failed to see a way out of his money troubles by + confiscating church property. He had pawned the country's trade to + the merchants of Lbeck and there was nothing else left. Naturally + the church opposed him. The King took the bull by the horns. He + called a meeting and told the people that he was sick of it all. He + had encouraged the Reformation for their good; now, if they did not + stand by him, they might choose between him and his enemies. The + oldest priest arose at that and said that the church's property was + sacred. The King asked if the rest of them thought the same way. + Only one voice was raised, and to say yes. +</p> +<p> + "Then," said Gustav, "I don't want to be your King any more. If it + does not rain, you blame me; if the sun does not shine, you do the + same. It is always so. All of you want to be masters. After all my + trouble and labor for you, you would as lief see my head split with + an axe, though none of you dare lay hold of the handle. Give me back + what I have spent in your service and I will go away and never come + back." And go he did, to his castle, with half a dozen of his + nearest friends. +</p> +<p> + They sat and looked at one another when he was gone, and then + priests and nobles fell to arguing among themselves, all talking at + once. The plain people, the burghers and the peasants, listened + awhile, but when they got no farther, let them know that if they + couldn't settle it, they, the people, would, and in a way that would + give them little joy. The upshot of it all was that messengers were + sent to bring the King back. He made them go three times, and when + he came at last, it was as absolute master. In the ordering of the + kingdom that was made there, he became the head of the church as + well as of the state. Gustav's pen was as sharp as his tongue. When + Hans Brask, the oldest prelate in the land, who had stood stoutly by + the old rgime, left the country and refused to come back, he wrote + to him: "As long as you might milk and shear your sheep, you staid + by them. When God spake and said you were to feed them, not to shear + and slaughter them, you ran away. Every honest man can judge if you + have done well." Hard words to a good old man; but there were plenty + of others who deserved them. That was the end of the hierarchy in + Sweden. +</p> +<p> + But not of the unruly peasants who had tasted the joys of + king-making. How kindly they took to the Reformation at the outset + one can judge from the demand of some of them that the King should + "burn or otherwise kill such as ate meat on Friday." They rose + again and again, and would listen only to the argument of force. + When the Lbeckers pressed hard for the payment of old debts, and + the treasury was empty as usual, King Gustav hit upon a new kind of + revenue. He demanded of every church in the land that it give up its + biggest bell to the funds. It was the last straw. The Dalecarlians + rose against what they deemed sacrilege, under the leadership of + Mns Nilsson and Anders Persson of Rankhyttan, the very men who had + befriended Gustav in his need, and the insurrection spread. The "War + of the Bells" was settled with the sword, and the peasants gave in. + But Gustav came of a stock that "never forgot." Two years later, + when his hands were free at home, he suddenly invaded Dalecarlia + with a powerful army, determined to "pull those weeds up by the + roots." He summoned the peasants to Thing, made a ring around them + of armed men, and gave them their choice: +</p> +<p> + "Submit now for good and all," he said, "or I will spoil the land so + that cock shall not crow nor hound bark in it again forever!" +</p> +<p> + The frightened peasants fell on their knees and begged for mercy. + He made them give up their leaders, including his former friends, + and they were all put to the sword. After that there was peace in + Dalecarlia. +</p> +<p> + Gustav Vasa's long reign ended in 1560. Like his enemy, Christian + II, he was a strange mixture of contradictions. He was brave in + battle, wise in council, pious, if not a saint, clean, and merciful + when mercy fitted into his plans. His enemies called him a greedy, + suspicious despot. Greedy he was. More than eleven thousand farms + were confiscated by the crown during his reign, and he left four + thousand farms and a great fortune to his children as his personal + share. But historians have called him "the great housekeeper" who + found waste and loss and left an ordered household. He gave all for + Sweden, and all he had was at her call. It was share and share + alike, in his view. Despotic he could be, too. <i>L'tat c'est moi</i> + might have been said by him. But he did not exploit the state; he + built it. He fashioned Sweden out of a bunch of quarrelsome + provincial governments into a hereditary monarchy, as the best + way—indeed, the only way then—of giving it strength and + stability. He was suspicious because everybody had betrayed him, or + had tried to. With all that, his steady purpose was to raise and + enlighten his people and make them keep the peace, if he had to + adopt the Irishman's plan of keeping it himself with an axe. He was + the father of a line of great warriors. Gustav Adolf was his + grandson. +</p> +<p> + Bent under the burden of years, he bade his people good-by at the + Diet of Stockholm, a few weeks before his death. His old eloquence + rings unimpaired in the farewell. He thanked God, who had chosen him + as His tool to set Sweden free from thralldom. Almost might he liken + himself to King David, whom God from a shepherd had made the leader + of his people. No such hope was in his heart when, forty years + before, he hid in the woods from a bloodthirsty enemy. For what he + had done wrong as king, he asked the people's pardon; it was not + done on purpose. He knew well that many thought him a hard ruler, + but the time would come when they would gladly dig him up from his + grave if they only could. And with that he went out, bowing deeply + to the Diet, the tears streaming down his face. +</p> +<p> + They saw him no more; but on his tomb the Swedish people, forgetting + all else, have written that he was the "Father of his Country." +</p> +<br> +<a name="note-2"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#2"> +<sup>1</sup></a> The older spelling of this name is followed here in + preference to the more modern Gustaf. Gustav Vasa himself wrote his + name so. +</p> + +<a name="2H_4_0005"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH +</h2> +<br> + +<p> + A welcome change awaits the traveller who, having shaken off the + chill of the German Dreadnaughts at Kiel, crosses the Baltic to the + Danish Islands—a change from the dread portents of war to smiling + peace. There can be nothing more pastoral and restful than the + Seeland landscape as framed in a car window; yet he misses its chief + charm whom its folk-lore escapes—the countless legends that cling + to field and forest from days long gone. The guide-book gives scarce + a hint of them; but turn from its page and they meet you at every + step, hail you from every homestead, every copse. Nor is their story + always of peace. Here was Knud Lavard slain by his envious kinsman + for the crown, and a miraculous spring gushed forth where he fell. + Of the church they built for the pilgrims who sought it from afar + they will show you the site, but the spring dried up with the simple + old faith. Yonder, under the roof of Ringsted church, lie Denmark's + greatest dead. Not half an hour from the ferry landing at Korsr, + your train labors past a hill crowned by a venerable cross, Holy + Anders' Hill. So saintly was that masterful priest that he was wont, + when he prayed, to hang his hat and gloves on a sunbeam as on a + hook. And woe to the land if his cross be disturbed, for then, the + peasant will tell you, the cattle die of plague and the crops fail. + A little further on, just beyond Sor, a village church rears twin + towers above the wheat-field where the skylark soars and sings to + its nesting mate. For seven hundred years the story of that church + and its builder has been told at Danish firesides, and the time will + never come when it is forgotten. +</p> +<p> + Fjenneslev is the name of the village, and Asker Ryg<a name="3"></a><a href="#note-3"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> ruled there + in the Twelfth Century, when the king summoned his men to the war. + Bidding good-by to his wife, Sir Asker tells her to build a new + church while he is away, for the old, "with wall of clay, + straw-thatched and grim," is in ruins. And let it be worthy of the + Master: +</p> +<p class="block"> + "The roof let make of tiling red;<br> + Of stone thou build the wall;" +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + and then he whispers in her ear: +</p> + +<p class="block"> + "Hear thou, my Lady Inge,<br> + Of women thou art the flower;<br> + An' thou bearest to me a son so bold,<br> + Set on the church a tower." +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + Should the child be a girl, he tells her to build only a spire, for + "modesty beseemeth a woman." Well for Sir Asker that he did not live + in our day of clamoring suffragists. He would have "views" without + doubt. But no such things troubled him while he battled in foreign + lands all summer. It was autumn when he returned and saw from afar + the swell behind which lay Fjenneslev and home. Impatiently he + spurred his horse to the brow of the hill, for no news had come of + Lady Inge those many months. The bard tells us what he saw there: +</p> +<p class="block"> + "It was the good Sir Asker Ryg;<br> + Right merrily laughed he,<br> + When from that green and swelling hill<br> + Two towers did he see." +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + Two sons lay at the Lady Inge's breast, and all was well. +</p> +<p class="block"> + "The first one of the brothers two<br> + They called him Esbern Snare.<a name="4"></a><a href="#note-4"><small><sup>2</sup></small></a><br> + He grew as strong as a savage bear<br> + And fleeter than any hare.<br><br> + + "The second him called they Absalon,<br> + A bishop he at home.<br> + He used his trusty Danish sword<br> + As the Pope his staff at Rome." +</p> +<p> + Absalon and Esbern were not twins, as tradition has it. They were + better than that. They became the great heroes of their day, and the + years have not dimmed their renown. And Absalon reached far beyond + the boundaries of little Denmark to every people that speaks the + English tongue. For it was he who, as archbishop of the North, + "strictly and earnestly" charged his friend and clerk Saxo to gather + the Danish chronicles while yet it was time, because, says Saxo, in + the preface of his monumental work, "he could no longer abide that + his fatherland, which he always honored and magnified with especial + zeal, should be without a record of the great deeds of the fathers." + And from the record Saxo wrote we have our Hamlet. +</p> +<p> + It was when they had grown great and famous that Sir Asker and his + wife built the church in thanksgiving for their boys, not when they + were born, and the way that came to light was good and wholesome. + They were about to rebuild the church, on which there had been no + towers at all since they crumbled in the middle ages, and had + decided to put on only one; for the sour critics, who are never + content in writing a people's history unless they can divest it of + all its flesh and make it sit in its bones, as it were, sneered at + the tradition and called it an old woman's tale. But they did not + shout quite so loud when, in peeling off the whitewash of the + Reformation, the mason's hammer brought forth mural paintings that + grew and grew until there stood the whole story to read on the wall, + with Sir Asker himself and the Lady Inge, clad in garments of the + Twelfth Century, bringing to the Virgin the church with the twin + towers. So the folk-lore was not so far out after all, and the + church was rebuilt with two towers, as it should be. +</p> +<p> + Under its eaves, whether of straw or tile, the two boys played their + childish games, and before long there came to join in them another + of their own age, young Valdemar, whose father, the very Knud Lavard + mentioned above, had been foully murdered a while before. It was a + time, says Saxo, in which "he must be of stout heart and strong head + who dared aspire to Denmark's crown. For in less than a hundred + years more than sixteen of her kings and their kin were either slain + without cause by their own subjects, or otherwise met a sudden + death." Sir Asker and the murdered Knud had been foster brothers, + and throughout the bloody years that followed, he and his brothers, + sons of the powerful Skjalm Hvide,<a name="5"></a><a href="#note-5"><small><sup>3</sup></small></a> espoused his cause in good and + evil days, while they saw to it that no harm came to the young + prince under their roof. +</p> +<p> + The three boys, as they grew up, were bred to the stern duties of + fighting men, as was the custom of their class. Absalon, indeed, was + destined for the church; but in a country so recently won from the + old war gods, it was the church militant yet, and he wielded spear + and sword with the best of them. When, at eighteen, they sent him to + France to be taught, he did not for his theological studies neglect + the instruction of his boyhood. There he became the disciple and + friend of the Abbot Bernard of Clairvaux, more powerful then than + prince or Pope, and when the abbot preached the second great + crusade, promising eternal salvation to those who took up arms + against the unbelievers, whether to wrest from them the Holy + Sepulchre or to plant the cross among the wild heathen on the + Baltic, his heart burned hot within him. It was a long way to the + Holy Land, but with the Baltic robbers his people had a grievous + score to settle. Their yells had sounded in his boyish ears as they + ravished the shores of his fatherland, penetrating with murder and + pillage almost to his peaceful home. And so, while he lent a + diligent ear to the teachings of the church, earning the name of the + "most learned clerk" in the cloister of Ste. Genevive in Paris, + daily he laid the breviary aside and took up sword and lance, + learning the arts of modern warfare with the graces of chivalry. In + the old way of fighting, man to man, the men of the North had been + the equals of any, if not their betters; but against the new methods + of warfare their prowess availed little. Absalon, the monk, kept his + body strong while soul and mind matured. When nothing more + adventurous befell, he chopped down trees for the cloister hearths. + But oftener the clash of arms echoed in the quiet halls, or the + peaceful brethren crossed themselves as they watched him break an + unruly horse in the cloister fen. Saxo tells us that he swam easily + in full armor, and in more than one campaign in later years saved + drowning comrades who were not so well taught. +</p> +<p> + The while he watched rising all about some of the finest churches in + Christendom. It was the era of cathedral building in Europe. The + Romanesque style of architecture had reached its highest development + in the very France where he spent his young manhood's years, and the + Gothic, with its stamp of massive strength, was beginning to + displace its gentler curve. Ten years of such an environment, in a + land teeming with historic traditions, rounded out the man who set + his face toward home, bent on redeeming his people from the unjust + reproach of being mere "barbarians of the North." +</p> +<p> + It was a stricken Denmark to which he came back. Three claimants + were fighting for the crown. The land was laid waste by sea-rovers, + who saw their chance to raid defenceless homes while the men able to + bear arms were following the rival kings. The people had lost hope. + Just when Absalon returned, peace was made between the claimants. + Knud, Svend, and Valdemar, his foster brother of old, divided up the + country between them. They swore a dear oath to keep the pact, but + for all that "the three kingdoms did not last three days." The + treacherous Svend waited only for a chance to murder both his + rivals, and it came quickly, when he and Valdemar were the guests of + Knud at Roskilde. They had eaten and drunk together and were + gathered in the "Storstue," the big room of the house, when Knud saw + Svend whispering aside with his men. With a sudden foreboding of + evil, he threw his arms about Valdemar's shoulders and kissed him. + The young King, who was playing chess with one of his men, looked up + in surprise and asked what it meant. Just then Svend left the hall, + and his henchmen fell upon the two with drawn swords. Knud was cut + down at once, his head cleft in twain. Valdemar upset the table with + the candles and, wrapping his cloak about his arm to ward off the + blows that showered upon him, knocked his assailants right and left + and escaped, badly wounded. +</p> +<p> + Absalon came into the room as Knud fell and, thinking it was + Valdemar, caught him in his arms and took his wounded head in his + lap. Sitting there in utter sorrow and despair, heedless of the + tumult that raged in the darkness around him, he felt the King's + garment and knew that the man who was breathing his last in his arms + was not his friend. He laid the lifeless body down gently and left + the hall. The murderers barred his way, but he brushed their swords + and spears aside and strode forth unharmed. Valdemar had found a + horse and made for Fjenneslev, twenty miles away, with all speed, + and there Absalon met him and his brother Esbern in the morning. +</p> +<p> + King Svend sought him high and low to finish his dastardly work, + while on Thing he wailed loudly before the people that Valdemar and + Knud had tried to kill him, showing in proof of it his cloak, which + he had rent with his own sword. But Valdemar's friends were wide + awake. Esbern flew through the island on his fleet horse in + Valdemar's clothes, leading his pursuers a merry dance, and when + the young King's wound was healed, he found him a boat and ferried + him across to the mainland, where the people flocked to his + standard. When Svend would have followed, it was the Lady Inge who + scuttled his ship by night and gave her foster son the start he + needed. There followed a short and sharp struggle that ended on + Grathe Heath with the utter rout of Svend's forces. He himself was + killed, and Valdemar at last was King of all Denmark. +</p> +<p> + From that time the three friends were inseparable as in the old days + when they played about the fields of Fjenneslev. Absalon was the + keeper of the King's conscience who was not afraid to tell him the + truth when he needed to hear it. And where they were Esbern was + found, never wavering in his loyalty to either. Within a year + Absalon was made bishop of Roskilde, the chief See of Denmark. Saxo + innocently discovers to us King Valdemar's little ruse to have his + friend chosen. He was yet a very young man, scarce turned thirty, + and had not been considered at all for the vacancy. There were three + candidates, all of powerful families, and, according to + ecclesiastical law, the brethren of the chapter were the electors. + The King went to their meeting and addressed them in person. Nothing + was farther from him, he said, than to wish to interfere with their + proper rights. Each must do as his conscience dictated, unhindered. + And with that he laid on the table <i>four</i> books with blank leaves + and bade them write down their names in them, each for his own + choice, to get the matter right on the record. The brethren thanked + him kindly and all voted "nicely together" for Absalon. So three of + the books were wasted. But presently Saxo found good use for them. +</p> +<p> + For now had come the bishop's chance of putting in practice the + great abbot's precepts. "Pray and fight" was the motto he had + written into the Knights Templars' rule, and Absalon had made it his + own. Of what use was it to build up the church at home, when any day + might see it raided by its enemies who were always watching their + chance outside? The Danish waters swarmed with pirates, the very + pagans against whom Abbot Bernard had preached his crusade. Of them + all the Wends were the worst, as they were the most powerful of the + Slav tribes that still resisted the efforts of their neighbors, the + Christian Germans, to dislodge them from their old home on the + Baltic. They lived in the island of Rgen, fairly in sight of the + Danish shores. Every favoring wind blew them across the sea in + shoals to burn and ravage. The Danes, once the terror of the seas, + had given over roving when they accepted the White Christ in + exchange for Thor and his hammer, and now, when they would be at + peace, they were in turn beset by this relentless enemy, who burned + their homes and their crops and dragged the peaceful husbandman away + to make him a thrall or offer him up as a sacrifice to heathen + idols. More than a third of all Denmark lay waste under their + ferocious assault. Here was the blow to be struck if the country was + to have peace and the church prosperity. +</p> +<p> + The chance to strike came speedily. Absalon had been bishop only a + few months when, on the evening before Palm Sunday, word was brought + that the enemy had landed, twenty-four ship-crews strong, and were + burning and murdering as usual. Absalon marshalled his eighteen + house-carles and such of the country-folk as he could, and fell + upon the Wends, routing them utterly. A bare handful escaped, the + rest were killed, while the bishop lost but a single man. He said + mass next morning, red-handed it is true, but one may well believe + that for all that his Easter message reached hearts filled with a + new, glad hope for their homes and for the country. That was a + bishop they could understand. So the first blow Absalon struck for + his people was at home. But he did not long wait for the enemy to + come to him. Half his long and stirring life he lived on the seas, + seeking them there. Saxo mentions, in speaking of his return from + one of his cruises, that he had then been nine months on shipboard. + And in a way he was shepherding his flock there, if it was with a + scourge; for, many years before, a Danish king had punished the + Wends in their own home and laid their lands under the See of + Roskilde, though little good it did them or any one else then. But + when Absalon had got his grip, there were days when he baptized as + many as a thousand of them into the true faith. +</p> +<p> + He was not altogether alone in the stand he took. Here and there, + from very necessity, the people had organized to resist the + invaders, but as no one could tell where they would strike next, + they were not often successful, and fear and discouragement sat + heavy on the land. From his own city of Roskilde a little fleet of + swift sailers under the bold Wedeman had for years waged relentless + war upon the freebooters and had taken four times the number of + their own ships. Their crews were organized into a brotherhood with + vows like an order of fighting monks. Before setting out on a cruise + they were shriven and absolved. Their vows bound them to unceasing + vigilance, to live on the plainest of fare, to sleep on their arms, + ready for instant attack, and to the rescue of Christians, wherever + they were found in captivity. The Roskilde guild became the strong + core of the King's armaments in his score of campaigns against the + Wends. +</p> +<p> + Perhaps it was not strange that Valdemar should be of two minds + about venturing to attack so formidable an enemy in his own house. + The nation was cowed and slow to move. In fact, from the first + expedition, that started with 250 vessels, only seven returned with + the standard, keeping up a running fight all the way across the + Baltic with pursuing Wends. The rest had basely deserted. On the + way over, the King, listening to their doubts and fears, turned back + himself once, but Absalon, who always led in the attack and was the + last on the homeward run, overtook him and gave him the talking to + be deserved. Saxo, who was very likely there and heard, for there is + little doubt that he accompanied his master on many of the campaigns + he so vividly describes, gives us a verbatim report of the lecture: +</p> +<p> + "What wonder," said the bishop, "if the words stick in our throats + and are nigh to stifling us, when such grievous dole is ours! Grieve + we must, indeed, to find in you such a turncoat that naught but + dishonor can come of it. You follow where you should lead, and those + you should rule over, you make your peers. There is nothing to stop + us but our own craven souls, hunt as we may for excuses. Is it with + such laurel you would bind your crown? with such high deed you would + consecrate your reign?" +</p> +<p> + The King was hard hit, and showed it, but he walked away without a + word. In the night a furious storm swept the sea and kept the fleet + in shelter four whole days, during which Valdemar's anger had time + to cool. He owned then that Absalon was right, and the friends shook + hands. The King gave order to make sail as soon as the gale abated. + If there was still a small doubt in Absalon's mind as he turned, on + taking leave, and asked, "What now, if we must turn back once more?" + Valdemar set it at rest: +</p> +<p> + "Then you write me from Wendland," he laughed, "and tell me how + things are there." +</p> +<p> + If little glory or gain came to the Danes from this first + expedition, at least they landed in the enemy's country and made + reprisal for past tort. The spirit of the people rose and shamed + them for their cowardice. When the King's summons went round again, + as it did speedily, there were few laggards. Attacked at home, the + Wends lost much of the terror they had inspired. Before many moons, + the chronicle records, the Danes cut their spear-shafts short, that + they might the more handily get at the foe. Scarce a year passed + that did not see one or more of these crusades. Absalon preached + them all, and his ship was ever first in landing. In battle he and + the King fought shoulder to shoulder. In the spring of 1169, he had + at last his wish: the heathen idols were destroyed and their temples + burned. +</p> +<p> + The holy city of the Wends, Arcona, stood on a steep cliff, + inaccessible save from the west, where a wall a hundred feet high + defended it. While the sacred banner Stanitza waved over it the + Danes might burn and kill, but the power of Svantevit was unbroken. + Svantevit was the god of gods in whose presence his own priests + dared not so much as breathe. When they had to, they must go to the + door and breathe in the open, a good enough plan if Saxo's disgust + at the filth of the Wendish homes was justified. Svantevit was a + horrid monster with four heads, and girt about with a huge sword. Up + till then the Christian arms had always been stayed at his door, but + this time the King laid siege to Arcona, determined to make an end + of him. Some of the youngsters in his army, making a mock assault + upon the strong walls, discovered an accidental hollow under the + great tower over which the Stanitza flew and, seizing upon a load of + straw that was handy, stuffed it in and set it on fire. It was done + in a frolic, but when the tower caught fire and was burned and the + holy standard fell, Absalon was quick to see his advantage, and got + the King to order a general assault. The besieged Wends, having no + water, tried to put out the fire with milk, but, says the chronicle, + "it only fed the flames." They fought desperately till, between fire + and foe, they were seized with panic and, calling loudly upon + Absalon in their extremity, offered to give up their city. The army + clamored for the revenge that was at last within their grasp, and + the King hesitated; but Absalon met the uproar firmly, reminding + them that they had crossed the seas to convert the heathen, not to + sack their towns. +</p> +<p> + The city was allowed to surrender and the people were spared, but + Svantevit and his temple were destroyed. A great crowd of his + followers had gathered to see him crush his enemies at the last, and + Absalon cautioned the men who cut the idol down to be careful that + he did not fall on them and so seem to justify their hopes. "He fell + with so great a noise that it was a wonder," says Saxo, navely; + "and in the same moment the fiend ran out of the temple in a black + shape with such speed that no eye could follow him or see where he + went." Svantevit was dragged out of the town and chopped into bits. + That night he fed the fires of the camp. So fickle is popular favor + that when the crowd saw that nothing happened, they spurned the god + loudly before whom they had grovelled in the dust till then. +</p> +<p> + When they heard of Arcona's fall in the royal city of Karents, they + hastened with offers of surrender, and Absalon went there with a + single ship's crew to take possession. They were met by 6000 armed + Wends, who guarded the narrow approach to the city. In single file + they walked between the ranks of the enemy, who stood with inverted + spears, watching them in sullen silence. His men feared a trap, but + Absalon strode ahead unmoved. Coming to the temple of their local + god, Rygievit, he attacked him with his axe and bade his guard fall + to, which they did. Saxo has left us a unique description of this + idol that stood behind purple hangings, fashioned of oak "in every + evil and revolting shape. The swallows had made their nests in his + mouths and throats" (there were seven in so many faces) "and filled + him up with all manner of stinking uncleanness. Truly, for such god + was such sacrifice fit." He had a sword for every one of his seven + faces, buckled about his ample waist, but for all that he went the + way of the others, and even had to put up with the indignity of the + Christian priests standing upon him while he was being dragged out. + That seems to have helped cure his followers of their faith in him. + They delivered the temple treasure into the hands of the King—seven + chests filled with money and valuables, among them a silver cup + which the wretched King Svend had sent to Svantevit as a bribe to + the Wends for joining him against his own country and kin. But those + days were ended. It was the Danes' turn now, and Wendland was laid + waste until "the swallows found no eaves of any house whereunder to + build their nests and were forced to build them on the ships." A sad + preliminary to bringing the country under the rule of the Prince of + Peace; but in the scheme of those days the sword was equal partner + with the cross in leading men to the true God. +</p> +<p> + The heathen temples were destroyed and churches built on their + sites of the timber gathered for the siege of Arcona. The people, + deserted by their own, accepted the Christians' God in good faith, + and were baptized in hosts, thirteen hundred on one day and nine + hundred on the next. Three days and nights Absalon saw no sleep. He + did nothing half-way. No sooner was he back home than he sent over + priests and teachers supplied with everything, even food for their + keep, so that they "should not be a burden to the people whom they + had come to show the way to salvation." +</p> +<p> + The Wends were conquered, but the end was not yet. They had savage + neighbors, and many a crusade did Absalon lead against them in the + following years, before the new title of the Danish rulers, "King of + the Slavs and Wends," was much more than an empty boast. He + organized a regular sea patrol of one-fourth of the available ships, + of which he himself took command, and said mass on board much + oftener than in the Roskilde church. It is the sailor, the warrior, + the leader of men one sees through all the troubled years of his + royal friend's life. Now the Danish fleet is caught in the inland + sea before Stettin, unable to make its way out, and already the + heathen hosts are shouting their triumph on shore. It is Absalon, + then, who finds the way and, as one would expect, he forces it. The + captains wail over the trap and abuse him for getting them into it. + Absalon, disdaining to answer them, leads his ships in single file + straight for the gap where the Wendish fleet lies waiting, and gets + the King to attack with his horsemen on shore. Between them the + enemy is routed, and the cowards are shamed. But when they come to + make amends, he is as unmoved as ever and will have none of it. + Again, when he is leading his men to the attack on a walled town, a + bridge upon which they crowd breaks, and it is the bishop who saves + his comrades from drowning, swimming ashore with them in full armor. +</p> +<p> + Resting in his castle at Haffn, the present Copenhagen, which he + built as a defence against the sea-rovers, he hears, while in his + bath, his men talking of strange ships that are sailing into the + Sound, and, hastily throwing on his clothes, gives chase and kills + their crews, for they were pirates whose business was murder, and + they merely got their deserts. In the pursuit his archers "pinned + the hands of the rowers to the oars with their arrows" and crippled + them, so skilful had much practice made them. Turn the leaf of + Saxo's chronicle, and we find him under Rgen with his fleet, + protecting the now peaceful Wendish fishermen in their autumn + herring-catch, on which their livelihood depended. Of such stuff was + made the bishop who +</p> +<p class="block"> + "Used his trusty Danish sword<br> + As the Pope his staff in Rome." +</p> +<p> + Wherever danger threatens Valdemar and Absalon, Esbern is found, + too, earning the name of the Fleet (Snare), which the people had + fondly given to their favorite. Where the fighting was hardest, he + was sure to be. The King's son had ventured too far and was caught + in a tight place by an overwhelming force, when Esbern pushed his + ship in between him and the enemy and bore the brunt of a fight that + came near to making an end of him. He had at last only a single man + left, but the two made a stand against a hundred. "When the heathen + saw his face they fled in terror." At last they knocked him + senseless with a stone and would have killed him, but in the nick of + time the King's men came to the rescue. +</p> +<p> + Coming home from Norway he ran afoul of forty pirate ships under + the coast of Seeland. He tried to steal past; forty against one were + heavy odds. But it was moonlight and he was discovered. The pirates + lay across his course and cut him off. Esbern made ready for a fight + and steered straight into the middle of them. The steersman + complained that he had no armor, and he gave him his own. He beat + his pursuers off again and again, but the wind slackened and they + were closing in once more, swearing by their heathen gods that they + would have him dead or alive, for a Danish prisoner on one of their + ships had told who he was. But Esbern had more than one string to + his bow. He sent a man aloft with flint and steel to strike fire in + the top, and the pirates, believing that he was signalling to a + fleet he had in ambush, fled helter-skelter. Esbern got home safe. +</p> +<p> + The German emperors' fingers had always itched for the over-lordship + of the Danish isles, and they have not ceased to do so to this day. + When Frederick Barbarossa drove Alexander III from Rome and set up a + rival Pope in his place, Archbishop Eskild of Lund, who was the + Primate of the North, championed the exiled Pope's case, and + Valdemar, whose path the ambitious priest had crossed more than + once, let it be known that he inclined to the Emperor's cause, in + part probably from mere pique, perhaps also because he thought it + good politics. The archbishop in a rage summoned Absalon and bade + him join him in a rising against the King. Absalon's answer is + worthy the man and friend: +</p> +<p> + "My oath to you I will keep, and in this wise, that I will not + counsel you to your own undoing. Whatever your cause against the + King, war against him you cannot, and succeed. And this know, that + never will I join with you against my liege lord, to whom I have + sworn fealty and friendship with heart and soul all the days of my + life." +</p> +<p> + He could not persuade the archbishop, who went his own way and was + beaten and exiled for a season, nor could he prevent the King from + yielding to the blandishments of Frederick and getting mixed up in + the papal troubles; but he went with him to Germany and saved him at + the last moment from committing himself by making him leave the + church council just as the anti-pope was about to pronounce sentence + of excommunication against Alexander. He commanded Absalon to + remain, as a servant of the church, but Absalon replied calmly that + he was not there in that capacity, but as an attendant on his King, + and must follow where he went. It appeared speedily that the + Emperor's real object was to get Valdemar to own him as his + over-lord, and this he did, to Absalon's great grief, on the idle + promise that Frederick would join him in his war upon all the Baltic + pagans. However, it was to be a purely personal matter, in nowise + affecting his descendants. That much was saved, and Absalon lived + long enough to fling back, as the counsellor of Valdemar's son, from + behind the stout wall he built at Denmark's southern gate, the + Emperor's demand for homage, with the reply that "the King ruled in + Denmark with the same right as the Emperor in Germany, and was no + man's subject." +</p> +<p> + However grievously Absalon had offended the aged archbishop, when + after forty years in his high office illness compelled him to lay it + down, he could find no one so worthy to step into his shoes. He sent + secretly to Rome and got the Pope's permission to name his own + successor, before he called a meeting of the church. The account of + what followed is the most singular of all Saxo's stories. Valdemar + did not know what was coming and, fearing fresh trouble, got the + archbishop to swear on the bones of the saints before them all that + he was not moved to abdication by hate of the King, or by any + coercion whatever. Then the venerable priest laid his staff, his + mitre, and his ring on the altar and announced that he had done with + it all forever. But he had made up his mind not to use the power + given him by the Pontiff. They might choose his successor + themselves. He would do nothing to influence their action. +</p> +<p> + The bishops and clergy went to the King and asked him if he had any + choice. The King said he had, but if he made it known he would get + no thanks for it and might estrange his best friend. If he did not, + he would certainly be committing a sin. He did not know what to do. +</p> +<p> + "Name him," said they, and Valdemar told them it was the bishop of + Roskilde. +</p> +<p> + At that the old archbishop got up and insisted on the election then + and there; but Absalon would have none of it. The burden was too + heavy for his shoulders, he said. However, the clergy seized him, + "being," says Saxo, who without doubt was one of them, "the more + emboldened to do so as the archbishop himself laid hands upon him + first." Intoning the hymn sung at archiepiscopal consecrations, they + tried to lead him to the altar. He resisted with all his might and + knocked several of the brethren down. Vestments were torn and + scattered, and a mighty ruction arose, to which the laity, not to be + outdone, added by striking up a hymn of their own. Archbishop and + King tried vainly to make peace; the clamor and battle only rose the + higher. Despite his struggles, Absalon was dragged to the high seat, + but as they were about to force him into it, he asked leave to say a + single word, and instantly appealed his case to the Pope. So there + was an end; but when the aged Eskild, on the plea of weakness, + begged him to pronounce the benediction, he refused warily, because + so he would be exercising archiepiscopal functions and would be <i>de + facto</i> incumbent of the office.<a name="6"></a><a href="#note-6"><small><sup>4</sup></small></a> +</p> +<p> + Here, as always, Absalon thought less of himself than of his + country, so the event showed. For when the Pope heard his plea, + though he decided against him, he allowed him to hold the bishopric + of Roskilde together with the higher office, and so he was left at + Valdemar's side to help finish their work of building up Denmark + within and without. At Roskilde he spent, as a matter of fact, most + of his time while Valdemar lived. At Lund he would have been in a + distant part of the country, parted from his friend and out of touch + with the things that were the first concern of his life. +</p> +<p> + They were preparing to aim a decisive blow against the Pomeranian + pagans when Valdemar died, on the very day set for the sailing. The + parting nearly killed Absalon. Saxo draws a touching picture of him + weeping bitterly as he said the requiem mass over his friend, and + observes: "Who can doubt that his tears, rising with the incense, + gave forth a peculiar and agreeable savour in high heaven before + God?" The plowmen left their fields and carried the bier, with sobs + and lamentations, to the church in Ringsted, where the great King + rests. His sorrow laid Absalon on a long and grievous sick-bed, from + which he rose only when Valdemar's son needed and called him. +</p> +<p> + In the fifteen years that follow we see his old warlike spirit still + unbroken. Thus his defiance of the German Emperor, whose anger was + hot. Frederick, in revenge, persuaded the Pomeranian duke Bugislav + to organize a raid on Denmark with a fleet of five hundred sail. + Scant warning reached Absalon of the danger. King Knud was away, and + there was no time to send for him. Mustering such vessels as were + near, he sailed across the Baltic and met the enemy under Rgen the + day after Whitsuntide (1184). The bishop had gone ashore to say mass + on the beach, when word was brought that the great fleet was in + sight. Hastily pulling off his robe and donning armor instead, he + made for his ship with the words: "Now let our swords sing the + praise of God." The Pomeranians were taken completely by surprise. + They did not know the Danes were there, and when they heard the + archbishop's dreaded war-cry raised, they turned and fled in such + terror and haste that eighteen of their ships were run down and sunk + with all on board. On one, a rower hanged himself for fear of + falling into the hands of the Danes. Absalon gave chase, and the + rout became complete. Of the five hundred ships only thirty-five + escaped; all the rest were either sunk or taken. Duke Bugislav soon + after became a vassal of Denmark, and of the Emperor's plots there + was an end. +</p> +<p> + It was the last blow, and the story of it went far and wide. + Absalon's work was nearly done. Denmark was safe from her enemies. + The people were happy and prosperous. Valdemar's son ruled + unchallenged, and though he was childless, by his side stood his + brother, a manly youth who, not yet full grown, had already shown + such qualities of courage and sagacious leadership that the old + archbishop could hang up the sword with heart at ease. The promise + was kept. The second Valdemar became Denmark's royal hero for all + time. Absalon's last days were devoted to strengthening the Church, + around which he had built such a stout wall. He built churches and + cloisters, and guided them with a wise and firm hand. And he made + Saxo, his clerk, set it all down as an eye-witness of these things, + and as one who came to the task by right; for, says the chronicler, + "have not my grandfather and his father before him served the King + well on land and sea, hence why should not I serve him with my + book-learning?" He bears witness that the bishop himself is his + authority for much that he has written. +</p> +<p> + Archbishop Absalon closed his eyes on St. Benedict's Day, March 21, + 1201, in the cloister at Sor which Sir Asker built and where he + lived his last days in peace. Absalon's statue of bronze, on + horseback, battle-axe in hand, stands in the market square in + Copenhagen, the city he founded and of which he is the patron saint; + but his body lies within the quiet sanctuary where, in the deep + forest glades, one listens yet for the evensong of the monks, long + silent now. When his grave was opened, in 1826, the lines of his + tall form, clad in clerical robes, were yet clearly traceable. The + strong hands, turned to dust, held a silver chalice in which lay his + episcopal ring. They are there to be seen to-day, with remnants of + his staff that had partly crumbled away. No Dane approaches his + grave without emotion. "All Denmark grieved for him," says a German + writer of that day, "and commended his soul to Jesus Christ, the + Prince of Peace, for that in his lifetime he had led many who were + enemies to peace and concord." In his old cathedral, in Roskilde + town, lies Saxo, according to tradition under an unmarked stone. + When he went to rest his friend and master had slept five years. +</p> +<p> + Esbern outlived his brother three years. The hero of so many battles + met his death at last by an accidental fall in his own house. The + last we hear of him is at a meeting in the Christmas season, 1187, + where emissaries of Pope Gregory VIII preached a general crusade. + Their hearers wept at the picture they drew of the sufferings + Christians were made to endure in the Holy Land. Then arose Esbern + and reminded them of the great deeds of the fathers at home and + abroad. The faith and the fire of Absalon were in his words: +</p> +<p> + "These things they did," he said, "for the glory of their name and + race, knowing nothing of our holy religion. Shall we, believing, do + less? Let us lay aside our petty quarrels and take up this greater + cause. Let us share the sufferings of the saints and earn their + reward. Perhaps we shall win—God keeps the issue. Let him who + cannot give himself, give of his means. So shall all we, sharing the + promise, share also the reward." +</p> +<p> + The account we have says that many took the cross, such was the + effect of his words, more likely of the man and what he was and had + been in the sight of them all throughout his long life. +</p> +<br> + +<a name="note-3"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#3"> +<sup>1</sup></a> Pronounce Reeg. +</p> + +<a name="note-4"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#4"> +<sup>2</sup></a> Pronounce Snar, with a as in are. In the Danish hare + rhymes with snare, so pronounced. +</p> + +<a name="note-5"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#5"> +<sup>3</sup></a> Pronounced Veeth. +</p> + +<a name="note-6"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#6"> +<sup>4</sup></a> That all this in no way affected the personal relations + of the two men Saxo assures us in one of the little human touches + with which his chronicle abounds. When Eskild was going away to end + his days as a monk in the monastery of Clairvaux, he rested awhile + with Absalon at his castle Haffn, where he was received as a father. + The old man suffered greatly from cold feet, and Absalon made a box + with many little holes in, and put a hot brick in it. With this at + his feet, Eskild was able to sleep, and he was very grateful to + Absalon, both because of the comfort it gave him and "because that + he perceived that filial piety rather than skill in the healer's + art" prompted the invention. +</p> + +<a name="2H_4_0006"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG +</h2> +<br> + +<p> + To the court of King Ottocar of Bohemia there came in the year 1205 + a brilliant embassy from far-off Denmark to ask the hand of his + daughter Dragomir for King Valdemar, the young ruler of that + country. Sir Strange<a name="7"></a><a href="#note-7"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> Ebbesn and Bishop Peder Sunesn were the + spokesmen, and many knights, whose fame had travelled far in the + long years of fighting to bring the Baltic pagans under the cross, + rode with them. The old king received them with delight. Valdemar + was not only a good son-in-law for a king to have, being himself a + great and renowned ruler, but he was a splendid knight, tall and + handsome, of most courteous bearing, ambitious, manly, and of ready + wit. So their suit prospered well. The folk-song tells how they + fared; how, according to the custom of those days, Sir Strange + wedded the fair princess by proxy for his lord, and how King + Ottocar, when he bade her good-by, took this promise of her: +</p> +<p class="block"> + In piety, virtue, and fear of God,<br> + Let all thy days be spent;<br> + And ever thy subjects be thy thought,<br> + Their hopes on thy care be bent. +</p> +<p> + The daughter kept her vow. Never was queen more beloved of her + people than Dagmar. That was the name they gave her in Denmark, for + the Bohemian Dragomir was strange to them. Dagmar meant daybreak in + their ancient tongue, and it really seemed as if a new and beautiful + day dawned upon the land in her coming. The dry pages of history + have little enough to tell of her beyond the simple fact of her + marriage and untimely death, though they are filled with her famous + husband's deeds; but not all of his glorious campaigns that earned + for him the name of "The Victor" have sunk so deep into the people's + memory, or have taken such hold of their hearts, as the lovely queen + who +</p> +<p class="sblock"> + Came without burden, she came with peace;<br> + She came the good peasant to cheer. +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + Through all the centuries the people have sung her praise, and they + sing it yet. Of the many folk-songs that have come down from the + middle ages, those that tell of Queen Dagmar are the sweetest, as + they are the most mournful, for her happiness was as brief as her + life was beautiful. +</p> +<p> + They sailed homeward over sunny seas, until they came to the shore + where the royal lover awaited his bride, impatiently scanning the + horizon for the gilded dragon's head of the ship that bore her. The + minstrel sings of the great wedding that was held in the old city of + Ribe.<a name="8"></a><a href="#note-8"><small><sup>2</sup></small></a> The gray old cathedral in which they knelt together still + stands; but of Valdemar's strong castle only a grass-grown hill is + left. It was the privilege of a bride in those days to ask a gift of + her husband on the morning after the wedding, and have it granted + without question. Two boons did Dagmar crave, +</p> +<p class="sblock"> + "right early in the morning, long before it was day": +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + one, that the plow-tax might be forgiven the peasant, and that those + who for rising against it had been laid in irons be set free; the + other, that the prison door of Bishop Valdemar be opened. Bishop + Valdemar was the arch-enemy of the King. The first request he + granted; but the other he refused for cause: +</p> +<p class="block"> + An' he comes out, Bishop Valdemar,<br> + Widow he makes you this year. +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + And he did his worst; for in the end the King yielded to Dagmar's + prayers, and much mischief came of it. +</p> +<p> + Seven years the good queen lived. Seven centuries have not dimmed + the memory of them, or of her. The King was away in a distant part + of the country when they sent to him in haste with the message that + the queen was dying. The ballad tells of his fears as he sees + Dagmar's page coming, and they proved only too true. +</p> +<p class="block"> + The king his checker-board shut in haste,<br> + The dice they rattled and rung.<br> + Forbid it God, who dwells in heaven,<br> + That Dagmar should die so young. +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + In the wild ride over field and moor, the King left his men far + behind: +</p> +<p class="block"> + When the king rode out of Skanderborg<br> + Him followed a hundred men.<br> + But when he rode o'er Ribe bridge,<br> + Then rode the king alone. +</p> +<p> + The tears of weeping women told him as he thundered over the + drawbridge of the castle that he was too late. But Dagmar had only + swooned. As he throws himself upon her bed she opens her eyes, and + smiles upon her husband. Her last prayer, as her first, is for mercy + and peace. Her sin, she says, is not great; she has done nothing + worse than to lace her silken sleeves on a Sunday. Then she closes + her eyes with a tired sigh: +</p> +<p class="block"> + The bells of heaven are chiming for me;<br> + No more may I stay to speak. +</p> +<p> + Thus the folk-song. Long before Dagmar went to her rest, Bishop + Valdemar had stirred up all Germany to wreak his vengeance upon the + King. He was an ambitious, unscrupulous priest, who hated his royal + master because he held himself entitled to the crown, being the + natural son of King Knud, who was murdered at Roskilde, as told in + the story of Absalon. While they were yet young men, when he saw + that the people followed his rival, he set the German princes + against Denmark, a task he never found hard. But young Valdemar made + short work of them. He took the strong cities on the Elbe and laid + the lands of his adversaries under the Danish crown. The bishop he + seized, and threw him into the dungeon of Sborg Castle, where he + had sat thirteen years when Dagmar's prayers set him free. He could + hardly walk when he came out, but he could hate, and all the world + knew it. The Pope bound him with heavy oaths never to return to + Denmark, and made him come to Italy so that he could keep an eye on + him himself. But two years had not passed before he broke his oath, + and fled to Bremen, where the people elected him to the vacant + archbishopric and its great political power. Forthwith he began + plotting against his native land. +</p> +<p> + In the bitter feud between the Guelphs and the Ghibellines he found + his opportunity. One of the rival emperors marched an army north to + help the perjured priest. King Valdemar hastened to meet them, but + on the eve of battle the Emperor was slain by one of his own men. On + Sunday, when the archbishop was saying mass in the Bremen cathedral, + an unknown knight, the visor of whose helmet was closed so that no + one saw his face, strode up to the altar, and laying a papal bull + before him, cried out that he was accursed, and under the ban of the + church. The people fled, and forsaken by all, the wretched man + turned once more to Rome in submission. But though the Pope forgave + him on condition that he meddle no more with politics, war, or + episcopal office, another summer found him wielding sword and lance + against the man he hated, this time under the banner of the Guelphs. + The Germans had made another onset on Denmark, but again King + Valdemar defeated them. The bishop intrenched himself in Hamburg, + and made a desperate resistance, but the King carried the city by + storm. The beaten and hopeless man fled, and shut himself up in a + cloister in Hanover, where daily and nightly he scourged himself for + his sins. If it is true that "hell was fashioned by the souls that + hated," not all the penance of all the years must have availed to + save him from the torments of the lost. +</p> +<p> + Denmark now had peace on its southern border. Dagmar was dead, and + Valdemar, whose restless soul yearned for new worlds to conquer, + turned toward the east where the wild Esthland tribes were guilty of + even worse outrages than the Wends before Absalon tamed them. The + dreadful cruelties practised by these pagans upon christian captives + cried aloud to all civilized Europe, and Valdemar took the cross + "for the honor of the Virgin Mary and the absolution of his sins," + and gathered a mighty fleet, the greatest ever assembled in Danish + waters. With more than a thousand ships he sailed across the Baltic. + The Pope sped them with his apostolic blessing, and took king and + people into his especial care, forbidding any one to attack the + country while they were away converting the heathen. Archbishop + Anders led the crusade with the king. As the fleet approached the + shore they saw it covered with an innumerable host of the enemy. So + great was their multitude that the crusaders quailed before the + peril of landing; but the archbishop put heart into them, and led + the fleet in fervent prayer to the God of battle. Then they landed + without hindrance. +</p> +<p> + There was an old stronghold there called Lyndanissa that had fallen + into decay. The crusaders busied themselves for two days with + building another and better fort. On the third day, being St. Vitus' + Day, they rested, fearing no harm. The Esthlanders had not troubled + them. Some of their chiefs had even come in with an offer of + surrender. They were willing to be converted, they said, and the + priests were baptizing them after vespers, while the camp was making + ready for the night, when suddenly the air was filled with the yells + of countless savages. On every side they broke from the woods, where + they had been gathering unsuspected, and overwhelmed the camp. The + guards were hewn down, the outposts taken, and the King's men were + falling back in confusion, their standard lost, when Prince Vitislav + of Rgen who had been camping with his men in a hollow between the + sand-hills, out of the line of attack, threw himself between them + and the Esthlanders, and gave the Danes time to form their lines. +</p> +<p> + In the twilight of the June evening the battle raged with great + fury. With the King at their head, who had led them to victory on so + many hard-fought fields, the Danes drove back their savage foes time + after time, literally hewing their way through their ranks with + sword and battle-axe. But they were hopelessly outnumbered. Their + hearts misgave them as they saw ten heathen spring out of the ground + for every one that was felled. The struggle grew fiercer as night + came on. The Christians were fighting for life; defeat meant that + they must perish to a man, by the sword or upon pagan altars; escape + there was none. Upon the cliff overlooking the battle-field the + archbishop and his priests were praying for success to the King's + arms. Tradition that has been busy with this great battle all + through the ages tells how, while the aged bishop's hands were + raised toward heaven, victory leaned to the Danes; but when he grew + tired, and let them fall, the heathen won forward, until the priests + held up his hands and once more the tide of battle rolled back from + the shore, and the Christian war-cry rose higher. +</p> +<p> + Suddenly, in the clash of steel upon steel and the wild tumult of + the conflict, there arose a great and wondering cry "the banner! the + banner! a miracle!" and Christian and pagan paused to listen. Out of + the sky, as it seemed, over against the hill upon which the priests + knelt, a blood-red banner with a great white cross was seen falling + into the ranks of the Christian knights, and a voice resounded over + the battle-field, "Bear this high, and victory shall be yours." With + the exultant cry, "For God and the King," the crusaders seized it, + and charged the foe. Terror-stricken, the Esthlanders wavered, then + turned, and fled. The battle became a massacre. Thousands were + slain. The chronicles say that the dead lay piled fathom-high on the + field that ran red with blood. Upon it, when the pursuit was over, + Valdemar knelt with his men, and they bowed their heads in + thanksgiving, while the venerable archbishop gave praise to God for + the victory. +</p> +<p> + That is the story of the Dannebrog which has been the flag of the + Danes seven hundred years. Whether the archbishop had brought it + with him intending to present it to King Valdemar, and threw it down + among the fighting hordes in the moment of extreme peril, or + whether, as some think, the Pope himself had sent it to the + crusaders with a happy inspiration, the fact remains that it came to + the Danes in this great battle, and on the very day which, fifty + years before, had seen the fall of Arcona, and the end of + idol-worship among the western Slavs. Three hundred years the + standard flew over the Danes fighting on land and sea. Then it was + lost in a campaign against the Holstein counts and, when recovered + half a century later, was hung up in the cathedral at Slesvig, + where gradually it fell to pieces. In the first half of the + Nineteenth Century, when national feeling and national pride were at + their lowest ebb, it was taken down with other moth-eaten old + banners, one day when they were cleaning up, and somebody made a + bonfire of them in the street. Such was the fate of "the flag that + fell from heaven," the sacred standard of the Danes. But it was not + the end of it. The Dannebrog flies yet over the Denmark of the + Valdemars, no longer great as then, it is true, nor master of its + ancient foes; but the world salutes it with respect, for there was + never blot of tyranny or treason upon it, and its sons own it with + pride wherever they go. +</p> +<p> + King Valdemar knighted five and thirty of his brave men on the + battle-field, and from that day the Order of the Dannebrog is said + to date. It bears upon a white crusader's cross the slogan of the + great fight "For God and the King," and on its reverse the date when + it was won, "June 15, 1219." The back of paganism was broken that + day, and the conversion of all Esthland followed soon. King Valdemar + built the castle he had begun before he sailed home, and called it + Reval, after one of the neighboring tribes. The Russian city of that + name grew up about it and about the church which Archbishop Anders + reared. The Dannebrog became its arms, and its people call it to + this day "the city of the Danes." +</p> +<p> + Denmark was now at the height of her glory. Her flag flew over all + the once hostile lands to the south and east, clear into Russia. The + Baltic was a Danish inland sea. King Valdemar was named "Victor" + with cause. His enemies feared him; his people adored him. In a + single night foul treachery laid the whole splendid structure low. + The King and young Valdemar, Dagmar's son, with a small suite of + retainers had spent the day hunting on the little island of Ly. + Count Henrik of Schwerin,—the Black Count they called him,—who had + just returned from a pilgrimage to the Holy Land, was his guest. The + count hated Valdemar bitterly for some real or fancied injury, but + he hid his hatred under a friendly bearing and smooth speech. He + brought the King gifts from the Holy Sepulchre, hunted with him, and + was his friend. But by night, when the King and his son slept in + their tent, unguarded, since no enemy was thought to be near, he + fell upon them with his cutthroats, bound and gagged them despite + their struggles, and gathering up all the valuables that lay around, + to put the finishing touch upon his villainy, fled with his + prisoners "in great haste and fear," while the King's men slept. + When they awoke, and tried to follow, they found their ships + scuttled. The count's boat had been lying under sail all day, hidden + in a sheltered cove, awaiting his summons. +</p> +<p> + Germany at last had the lion and its whelp in her grasp. In chains + and fetters they were dragged from one dungeon to another. The + traitors dared not trust them long in any city, however strong. The + German Emperor shook his fist at Count Henrik, but secretly he was + glad. He would have liked nothing better than to have the precious + spoil in his own power. The Pope thundered in Rome and hurled his + ban at the thugs. But the Black Count's conscience was as swarthy as + his countenance; and besides, had he not just been to the Holy Land, + and thereby washed himself clean of all his sins, past and present? +</p> +<p> + Behind prison walls, comforted only by Dagmar's son, sat the King, + growing old and gray with anger and grief. Denmark lay prostrate + under the sudden blow, while her enemies rose on every side. Day by + day word came of outbreaks in the conquered provinces. The people + did not know which way to turn; the strong hand that held the helm + was gone, and the ship drifted, the prey of every ill wind. It was + as if all that had been won by sixty years of victories and + sacrifice fell away in one brief season. The forests filled with + out-laws; neither peasant nor wayfarer, nor yet monk or nun in their + quiet retreat, was safe from outrage; and pirates swarmed again in + bay and sound, where for two generations there had been peace. The + twice-perjured Bishop Valdemar left his cloister cell once more and + girt on the sword, to take the kingdom he coveted by storm. +</p> +<p> + He was met by King Valdemar's kinsman and friend, Albert of + Orlamunde, who hastened to the frontier with all the men he could + gather. They halted him with a treaty of peace that offered to set + Valdemar free if he would take his kingdom as a fief of the German + crown. He, Albert, so it was written, was to keep all his lands and + more, would he but sign it. He did not stop to hear the rest, but + slashed the parchment into ribbons with his sword, and ordered an + instant advance. The bishop he made short work of, and he was heard + of no more. But in the battle with the German princes Albert was + defeated and taken prisoner. The door of King Valdemar's dungeon was + opened only to let his friend in. +</p> +<p> + After two years and a half in chains, Valdemar was ransomed by his + people with a great sum of gold. The Danish women gave their rings + and their jewels to bring back their king. They flocked about him + when he returned, and received him like the conqueror of old; but he + rode among them gray and stern, and his thoughts were far away. +</p> +<p> + They had made him swear on oath upon the sacrament, and all + Denmark's bishops with him, before they set him free, that he would + not seek revenge. But once he was back in his own, he sent to Pope + Gregory, asking him to loose him from an oath wrung from him while + he was helpless in the power of bandits. And the Pope responded that + to keep faith with traitors was no man's duty. Then back he rode + over the River Eider into the enemy's land—for they had stripped + Denmark of all her hard-won possessions south of the ancient border + of the kingdom, except Esthland and Rgen—and with him went every + man who could bear arms in all the nation. He crushed the Black + Count who tried to block his way, and at Bornhved met the German + allies who had gathered from far and near to give him battle. Well + they knew that if Valdemar won, the reckoning would be terrible. All + day they fought, and victory seemed to lean toward the Danes, when + the base Holsteiners, the Danish rear-guard whom the enemy had + bought to betray their king, turned their spears upon his army, and + decided the day. The battle ended in utter rout of Valdemar's + forces. Four thousand Danish men were slain. The King himself fell + wounded on the field, his eye pierced by an arrow, and would have + fallen into the hands of the enemy once more but for an unknown + German knight, who took him upon his horse and bore him in the night + over unfrequented paths to Kiel, where he was safe. +</p> +<p> + "But all men said that this great hurt befell the King because that + he brake the oath he swore upon the sacred body of the Lord." +</p> +<p> + The wars of Valdemar were over, but his sorrows were not. Four years + later the crushing blow fell when Dagmar's son, who was crowned king + to succeed him, lost his life while hunting. With him, says the + folk-song, died the hope of Denmark. The King had other sons, but to + Dagmar's boy the people had given their love from the first, as they + had to his gentle mother. The old King and his people grieved + together. +</p> +<p> + But Valdemar rose above his sorrows. Great as he had been in the + days of victory, he was greater still in adversity. The country was + torn by the wars of three-score years, and in need of rest. He gave + his last days to healing the wounds the sword had struck. Valdemar, + the Victor, became Valdemar, the Law-giver. The laws of the country + had hitherto made themselves. They were the outgrowths of the + people's ancient customs, passed down by word of mouth through the + generations, and confirmed on Thing from time to time. King + Valdemar gave Denmark her first written laws that judged between + man and man, in at least one of her provinces clear down into our + day. "With law shall land be built" begins his code. "The law," it + says, "must be honest, just, reasonable, and according to the ways + of the people. It must meet their needs, and speak plainly so that + all men may know and understand what the law is. It is not to be + made in any man's favor, but for the needs of all them who live in + the land." That is its purpose, and "no man shall judge (condemn) + the law which the King has given and the country chosen; neither + shall he (the King) take it back without the will of the people." + That tells the story of Valdemar's day, and of the people who are so + near of kin with ourselves. They were not sovereign and subjects; + they were a chosen king and a free people, working together "with + law land to build." +</p> +<p> + King Valdemar was married twice. The folk-song represents Dagmar as + urging the King with her dying breath +</p> +<p class="block"> + "that Bengerd, my lord, that base bad dame<br> + you never to wife will take." +</p> +<p class="noindent"> + Bengerd, or Berengaria, was a Portuguese princess whom Valdemar + married in spite of the warning, two years later. As the people had + loved the fair Dagmar, so they hated the proud Southern beauty, + whether with reason or not. The story of her "morning gift," as it + has come down to us through the mists of time, is very different + from the other. She asks the King, so the ballad has it, to give her + Sams, a great and fertile island, and "a golden crown<a name="9"></a><a href="#note-9"><small><sup>3</sup></small></a> for every + maid," but he tells her not to be quite so greedy: +</p> +<p class="block"> + There be full many an honest maid<br> + with not dry bread to eat. +</p> +<p> + Undismayed, Bengerd objects that Danish women have no business to + wear silken gowns, and that a good horse is not for a peasant lad. + The King replies patiently that what a woman can buy she may wear + for him, and that he will not take the lad's horse if he can feed + it. Bengerd is not satisfied. "Let bar the land with iron chains" is + her next proposal, that neither man nor woman enter it without + paying tax. Her husband says scornfully that Danish kings have never + had need of such measures, and never will. He is plainly getting + bored, and when she keeps it up, and begrudges the husbandman more + than "two oxen and a cow," he loses his temper, and presumably there + is a matrimonial tiff. Very likely most of this is fiction, bred of + the popular prejudice. The King loved her, that is certain. She was + a beautiful high-spirited woman, so beautiful that many hundreds of + years after, when her grave was opened, the delicate oval of her + skull excited admiration yet. But the people hated her. Twenty + generations after her death it was their custom when passing her + grave to spit on it with the exclamation "Out upon thee, Bengerd! + God bless the King of Denmark"; for in good or evil days they never + wavered in their love and admiration for the king who was a son of + the first Valdemar, and the heir of his greatness and of that of the + sainted Absalon. Tradition has it that Bengerd was killed in battle, + having gone with her husband on one of his campaigns. "It was not + heard in any place," says the folk-song wickedly, "that any one + grieved for her." But the King mourned for his beautiful queen to + the end of his days. +</p> +<p> + Bengerd bore Valdemar three sons upon whom he lavished all the + affection of his lonely old age. Erik he chose as his successor, and + to keep his brothers loyal to him he gave them great fiefs and thus, + unknowing, brought on the very trouble he sought to avoid, and set + his foot on the path that led to Denmark's dismemberment after + centuries of bloody wars. For to his second son Abel he gave + Slesvig, and Abel, when his brother became king, sought alliance + with the Holstein count Adolf,<a name="10"></a><a href="#note-10"><small><sup>4</sup></small></a> the very one who had led the + Germans at the fatal battle of Bornhved. The result was a war + between the brothers that raged seven years, and laid waste the + land. Worse was to follow, for Abel was only "Abel in name, but Cain + in deed." But happily the old King's eyes were closed then, and he + was spared the sight of one brother murdering the other for the + kingdom. +</p> +<p> + Some foreboding of this seems to have troubled him in his last + years. It is related that once when he was mounting his horse to go + hunting he fell into a deep reverie, and remained standing with his + foot in the stirrup a long time, while his men wondered, not daring + to disturb him. At last one of them went to remind him that the sun + was low in the west. The King awoke from his dream, and bade him go + at once to a wise old hermit who lived in a distant part of the + country. "Ask him," he said, "what King Valdemar was thinking of + just now, and bring me his answer." The knight went away on his + strange errand, and found the hermit. And this was the message he + brought back: "Your lord and master pondered as he stood by his + horse, how his sons would fare when he was dead. Tell him that war + and discord they shall have, but kings they will all be." When the + King heard the prophecy he was troubled in mind, and called his sons + and all his great knights to a council at which he pleaded with them + to keep the peace. But though they promised, he was barely in his + grave when riot and bloodshed filled the land. The climax was + reached when Abel inveigled his brother to his home with fair words + and, once he had him in his power, seized him and gave him over to + his men to do with "as they pleased." They understood their master + only too well, and took King Erik out on the fjord in an open boat, + and killed him there, scarce giving him time to say his prayers. + They weighted his body with his helmet, and sank it in the deep. +</p> +<p> + Abel made oath with four and twenty of his men that he was innocent + of his brother's blood, and took the crown after him. But the foul + crime was soon avenged. Within a few years he was himself slain by a + peasant in a rising of his own people. For a while his body lay + unburied, the prey of beast and bird, and when it was interred in + the Slesvig cathedral there was no rest for it. "Such turmoil arose + in the church by night that the monks could not chant their vigils," + and in the end they took him out, and buried him in a swamp, with a + stake driven through the heart to lay his ghost. But clear down to + our time when people ceased to believe in ghosts, the fratricide was + seen at night hunting through the woods, coal-black and on a white + horse, with three fiery dogs trailing after; and blue flames burned + over the sea where they vanished. That was how the superstition of + the people judged the man whom the nobles and the priests made + king, red-handed. +</p> +<p> + Christopher, the youngest of the three brothers, was king last. His + end was no better than that of the rest. Indeed, it was worse. + Hardly yet forty years old, he died—poisoned, it was said, by the + Abbot Arnfast, in the sacrament as he knelt at the altar-rail in the + Ribe cathedral. He was buried in the chancel where the penitents + going to the altar walk over his grave. So, of all Valdemar's four + sons, not one died a peaceful, natural death. But kings they all + were. +</p> +<p> + Valdemar was laid in Ringsted with his great father. He sleeps + between his two queens. Dagmar's grave was disturbed in the late + middle ages by unknown vandals, and the remains of Denmark's + best-loved queen were scattered. Only a golden cross, which she had + worn in life, somehow escaped, and found its way in course of time + into the museum of antiquities at Copenhagen, where it now is, its + chief and priceless treasure. There also is a braid of Queen + Bengerd's hair that was found when her grave was opened in 1855. The + people's hate had followed her even there, and would not let her + rest. The slab that covered her tomb had been pried off, and a round + stone dropped into the place made for her head. Otherwise her grave + was undisturbed. +</p> +<p> + "Truly then fell the crown from the heads of Danish men," says the + old chronicle of King Valdemar's death, and black clouds were + gathering ominously even then over the land. But in storm and + stress, as in days that were fair, the Danish people have clung + loyally to the memory of their beloved King and of his sweet Dagmar. +</p> +<br> + +<a name="note-7"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#7"> +<sup>1</sup></a> Pronounce as Strangle, with the l left out. +</p> + +<a name="note-8"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"> <a href="#8"> +<sup>2</sup></a> Pronounced Reebe, in two syllables. +</p> + +<a name="note-9"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#9"> +<sup>3</sup></a> A coin, probably. +</p> + +<a name="note-10"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#10"> +<sup>4</sup></a> That was the beginning of the Slesvig-Holstein question + that troubled Europe to our day; for the fashion set by Abel other + rulers of his dukedom followed, and by degrees Slesvig came to be + reckoned with the German duchies, whereas up till then it had always + been South-Jutland, a part of Denmark proper. +</p> +<a name="2H_4_0007"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID +</h2> +<br> + +<p> + On the map of Europe the mainland of Denmark looks like a beckoning + finger pointing due north and ending in a narrow sand-reef, upon + which the waves of the North Sea and of the Kattegat break with + unceasing clamor and strife. The heart of the peninsula, quite + one-fourth of its area, was fifty years ago a desert, a barren, + melancholy waste, where the only sign of life encountered by the + hunter, gunning for heath-fowl and plover, was a rare shepherd + tending a few lonesome sheep, and knitting mechanically on his + endless stocking. The two, the lean sheep and the long stocking, + together comprised the only industries which the heath afforded and + was thought capable of sustaining. A great change has taken place + within the span of a single life, and it is all due to the clear + sight and patient devotion of one strong man, the Gifford Pinchot of + Denmark. The story of that unique achievement reads like the tale + of the Sleeping Beauty who was roused from her hundred years' sleep + by the kiss of her lover prince. The prince who awoke the slumbering + heath was a captain of engineers, Enrico Dalgas by name. +</p> +<p> + Not altogether fanciful is the conceit. Barren, black, and desolate, + the great moor gripped the imagination as no smiling landscape of + field and forest could—does yet, where enough of it remains. Far as + eye reaches the dun heather covers hill and plain with its sombre + pall. Like gloomy sentinels, furry cattails nod in the bog where the + blue gentian peeps timidly into murky pools; the only human + habitation in sight some heath boer's ling-thatched hut, flanked by + rows of peat stacks in vain endeavor to stay the sweep of the + pitiless west wind. On the barrows where the vikings sleep their + long sleep, the plover pipes its melancholy lay; between steep banks + a furtive brook steals swiftly by as if anxious to escape from the + universal blight. Over it all broods the silence of the desert, + drowsy with the hum of many bees winging their swift way to the + secret feeding-places they know of, where mayflower and anemone hide + under the heather, witness that forests grew here in the long ago. + In midsummer, when the purple is on the broom, a strange pageant + moves on the dim horizon, a shifting mirage of sea and shore, + forest, lake, and islands lying high, with ships and castles and + spires of distant churches—the witchery of the heath that speaks in + the tales and superstitions of its simple people. High in the blue + soars the lark, singing its song of home and hope to its nesting + mate. This is the heath which, denying to the hardest toil all but + the barest living, has given of its poetry to the Danish tongue some + of its sweetest songs. +</p> +<p> + But in this busy world day-dreams must make way for the things that + make the day count, castles in the air to homes upon the soil. The + heath had known such in the dim past. It had not always been a + desert. The numberless cairns that lie scattered over it, sometimes + strung out for miles as if marking the highways of the ancients, + which they doubtless do, sometimes grouped where their villages + stood, bear witness to it. Great battles account for their share, + and some of them were fought in historic times. On Grathe Heath the + young King Valdemar overcame his treacherous rival Svend. Alone and + hunted, the beaten man sought refuge, Saxo tells us, behind a stump, + where he was found and slain by one of the King's axemen. A chapel + was built on the spot. More than seven centuries later (in 1892) + they dug there, and found the bones of a man with skull split in + two. +</p> +<p> + The stump behind which the wretched Svend hid was probably the last + representative of great forests that grew where now is sterile moor. + In the bogs trunks of oak and fir are found lying as they fell + centuries ago. The local names preserve the tradition, with here and + there patches of scrub oak that hug the ground close, to escape the + blast from the North Sea. There is one such thicket near the hamlet + of Taulund—the name itself tells of long-forgotten groves—and the + story runs among the people yet that once squirrels jumped from tree + to tree without touching ground all the way from Taulund to + Gjellerup church, a stretch of more than five miles to which the + wild things of the woods have long been strangers. In the shelter of + the old forests men dwelt through ages, and made the land yield them + a living. Some cairns that have been explored span over more than a + thousand years. They were built in the stone age, and served the + people of the bronze and iron ages successively as burial-places, + doubtless the same tribes who thus occupied their homesteads from + generation to generation. That they were farmers, not nomads, is + proved by the clear impression of grains of wheat and barley in + their burial urns. The seeds strayed into the clay and were burned + away, but the impression abides, and tells the story. +</p> +<p> + Clear down to historic times there was a thrifty population in many + of the now barren spots. But a change was slowly creeping over the + landscape. The country was torn by long and bloody wars. The big men + fought for the land and the little ones paid the score, as they + always do. They were hunted from house and home. Next the wild + hordes of the Holstein counts overran Jutland. Its towns were + burned, the country laid waste. Great fires swept the forests. What + ravaging armies had left was burned in the smelteries. In the sandy + crust of the heath there is iron, and swords and spears were the + grim need of that day. The smelteries are only names now. They + went, but they took the forests with them, and where the ground was + cleared the west wind broke through, and ruin followed fast. Last of + all came the Black Death, and set its seal of desolation upon it + all. When it had passed, the country was a huge graveyard. The heath + had moved in. Rovers and smugglers found refuge there; honest folk + shunned it. Under the heather the old landmarks are sometimes found + yet, and deep ruts made by wheels that long since ceased to turn. +</p> +<p> + In the Eighteenth Century men began to think of reclamation. A + thousand German colonists were called in and settled on the heath, + but it was stronger than they, and they drifted away until scarce + half a hundred families remained. The Government tried its hand, but + there was no one who knew just how, and only discouragement + resulted. Then came the war with Germany in 1864, that lost to + Denmark a third of her territory. The country lay prostrate under + the crushing blow. But it rose above defeat and disaster, and once + more expectant eyes were turned toward the ancient domain that had + slipped from its grasp. "What was lost without must be won within" + became the national slogan. And this time the man for the task was + at hand. +</p> +<p> + Enrico Mylius Dalgas was by the accident of birth an Italian, his + father being the Danish consul in Naples; by descent a Frenchman; by + choice and training a Dane, typical of the best in that people. He + came of the Huguenot stock that left France after the repeal of the + Edict of Nantes in 1685 and scattered over Europe, to the great good + of every land in which it settled. They had been tillers of the soil + from the beginning, and at least two of the family, who found homes + in Denmark, made in their day notable contributions to the cause of + advanced, sensible husbandry. Enrico's father, though a merchant, + had an open eye for the interests which in later years claimed the + son's life-work. In the diary of a journey through Sweden he makes + indignant comment upon the reckless way in which the people of that + country dealt with their forests. That he was also a man of + resolution is shown by an incident of the time when Jew-baiting was + having its sorry day in Denmark. An innkeeper mistook the + dark-skinned little man for a Jew, and set before him a spoiled + ham, retorting contemptuously, when protest was made, that it was + "good enough for a Sheeny." Without further parley Mr. Dalgas seized + the hot ham by its shank and beat the fellow with it till he cried + for mercy. The son tells of the first school he attended, when he + was but five years old. It was kept by the widow of one of + Napoleon's generals, a militant lady who every morning marshalled + the school, a Lilliputian army with the teachers flanking the line + like beardless sergeants in stays and petticoats, and distributed + rewards and punishments as the great Emperor was wont to do after a + battle. For the dunces there was a corner strewn with dried peas on + which they were made to kneel with long-eared donkey caps adorning + their luckless heads. Very likely it was after an insult of this + kind that Enrico decided to elope to America with his baby sister. + They were found down by the harbor bargaining with some fishermen to + take them over to Capri <i>en route</i> for the land of freedom. The + elder Dalgas died while the children were yet little, and the widow + went back to Denmark to bring up her boys there. +</p> +<p> + They were poor, and the change from the genial skies of sunny Italy + to the bleak North did not make it any easier for them. Enrico's + teacher saw it, and gave him his overcoat to be made over. But the + boys spotted it and squared accounts with their teacher by + snowballing the wearer of the big green plaid until he was glad to + leave it at home, and go without. He was in the military school when + war broke out with Germany in 1848. Both of his brothers + volunteered, and fell in battle. Enrico was ordered out as + lieutenant, and put on the shoulder-straps joyfully, to the great + scandal of his godfather in Milan, who sympathized with the German + cause. When the young soldier refused to resign he not only cut him + off in his will, but took away a pension of four hundred kroner he + had given his mother in her widowhood. If he had thoughts of + bringing them over by such means, he found out his mistake. Mother + and son were made of sterner stuff. Dalgas fought twice for his + country, the last time in 1864, as a captain of engineers. +</p> +<p> + It was no ordinary class, the one of 1851 that resumed its studies + in the military high school. Two of the students did not answer + roll-call; their names were written among the nation's heroic dead. + Some had scars and wore the cross for valor in battle. All were + first lieutenants, to be graduated as captains. Dalgas had himself + transferred from the artillery to the engineers, and was detailed as + road inspector. So the opportunity of his life came to him. +</p> +<p> + There were few railways in those days; the highways were still the + great arteries of traffic. Dalgas built roads that crossed the + heath, and he learned to know it and the strong and independent, if + narrow, people who clung to it with such a tenacious grip. He had a + natural liking for practical geology and for the chemistry of the + soil, and the deep cuts which his roads sometimes made gave him the + best of chances for following his bent. The heath lay as an open + book before him, and he studied it with delight. He found the traces + of the old forests, and noted their extent. Occasionally the pickaxe + uncovered peat deposits of unsuspected depth and value. Sometimes + the line led across the lean fields, and damages had to be discussed + and assessed. He learned the point of view of the heath farmer, + sympathized with his struggles, and gained his confidence. Best of + all, he found a man of his own mind, a lawyer by the name of + Morville, himself a descendant of the exiled Huguenots. It is not a + little curious that when the way was cleared for the Heath Society's + great work, in its formal organization with M. Mourier-Petersen, a + large landowner, as their associate in its management, the three men + who for a quarter of a century planned the work and marked out the + groove in which it was to run were all of that strong stock which is + by no means the most common in Denmark. +</p> +<p> + With his lawyer friend Captain Dalgas tramped the heath far and wide + for ten years. Then their talks had matured a plan. Dalgas wrote to + the Copenhagen newspapers that the heath could be reclaimed, and + suggested that it should be done by the State. They laughed at him. + "Nothing better could have happened," he said in after years, "for + it made us turn to the people themselves, and that was the road to + success, though we did not know it." In the spring of 1866 a hundred + men, little and big landowners most of them, met at his call, and + organized the Heath Society<a name="11"></a><a href="#note-11"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> with the object of reclaiming the + moor. Dalgas became its managing director. +</p> +<p> + To restore to the treeless waste its forest growth was the + fundamental idea, for until that was done nothing but the heather + could grow there. The west wind would not let it. But the heath + farmer shook his head. It would cost too much, and give too little + back. What he needed was water and marl. Could the captain help them + to these?—that was another matter. The little streams that found + their way into the heath and lost it there, dire need had taught + them to turn to use in their fields; not a drop escaped. But the + river that ran between deep banks was beyond their reach. Could he + show them how to harness that? Dalgas saw their point. "We are + working, not for the dead soil, but for the living men who find + homes upon it," he told his associates, and tree planting was put + aside for the time. They turned canal diggers instead. Irrigation + became their aim and task; the engineer was in his right place. The + water was raised from the stream and led out upon the moor, and + presently grass grew in the sand which the wiry stems of the heather + had clutched so long. Green meadows lined the water-runs, and + fragrant haystacks rose. To the lean sheep was added a cow, then + two. The farmer laid by a little, and took in more land for + cultivation. That meant breaking the heath. Also, it meant marl. The + heath is lime-poor; marl is lime in the exact form in which it best + fits that sandy soil. It was known to exist in some favored spots, + but the poor heath farmer could not bring it from a distance. So the + marl borer went with the canal digger. Into every acre he drove his + auger, and mapped out his discoveries. At last accounts he had found + marl in more than seventeen hundred places, and he is not done yet. + Where there was none, Dalgas's Society built portable railways into + the moor far enough to bring it to nearly every farmer's door. +</p> +<p> + It was as if a magic wand had been waved over the heath. With water + and marl, the means were at hand for fighting it and winning out. + Heads that had drooped in discouragement were raised. The cattle + keep increased, and with it came the farmer's wealth. Marl changes + the character of the heath soil; with manure to fertilize it there + was no reason why it should not grow crops—none, except the + withering blast of the west wind. The time for Dalgas to preach tree + planting had come. +</p> +<p> + While the canal digger and marl seeker were at work, there had been + neighborhood meetings and talks at which Captain Dalgas did the + talking. When he spoke the heath boer listened, for he had learned + to look upon him as one of them. He wore no gold lace. A plain man + in every-day gray tweeds, with his trousers tucked into his boots, + he spoke to plain people of things that concerned them vitally, and + in a way they could understand. So when he told them that the heath + had once been forest-clad, at least a large part of it, and pointed + them to the proofs, and that the woods could be made to grow again + to give them timber and shelter and crops, they gave heed. It was + worth trying at any rate. The shelter was the immediate thing. They + began planting hedges about their homesteads; not always wisely, for + it is not every tree that will grow in the heath. The wind whipped + and wore them, the ahl cramped their roots, and they died. The ahl + is the rusty-red crust that forms under the heather in the course of + the ages where the desert rules. Sometimes it is a loose sandstone + formation; sometimes it carries as much as twenty per cent of iron + that is absorbed from the upper layers of the sand. In any case, it + must be broken through; no tree root can do it. The ahl, the poverty + of the sand, and the wind, together make the "evil genius" of the + heath that had won until then in the century-old fight with man. But + this time he had backing, and was not minded to give up. The Heath + Society was there to counsel, to aid. And soon the hedges took hold, + and gardens grew in their shelter. There is hardly a farm in all + west Jutland to-day that has not one, even if the moor waits just + beyond the gate. +</p> +<p> + Out in the desert the Society had made a beginning with plantations + of Norway spruce. They took root, but the heather soon overwhelmed + the young plants. Not without a fight would this enemy let go its + grip upon the land. It had smothered the hardy Scotch pine in days + past, and now the spruce was in peril. Searching high and low for + something that would grow fast and grow green, Dalgas and his + associates planted dwarf pine with the spruce. Strangely, it not + only grew itself, but proved to be a real nurse for the other. The + spruce took a fresh start, and they grew vigorously together—for a + while. Then the pine outstripped its nursling, and threatened to + smother it. The spruce was the more valuable; the other was at best + little more than a shrub. The croaker raised his voice: the black + heath had turned green, but it was still heath, of no value to any + one, then or ever. +</p> +<p> + He had not reckoned with Dalgas. The captain of engineers could use + the axe as well as the spade. He cut the dwarf pine out wherever the + spruce had got its grip, and gave it light and air. And it grew big + and beautiful. The Heath Society has now over nineteen hundred + plantations that cover nearly a hundred thousand acres, and the + State and private individuals, inspired by the example it set, have + planted almost as large an area. The ghost of the heath has been + laid for all time. +</p> +<p> + Go now across the heath and see the change forty years have wrought. + You shall seek in vain the lonely shepherd with his stocking. The + stocking has grown into an organized industry. In grandfather's day + the farmer and his household "knitted for the taxes"; if all hands + made enough in the twelvemonth to pay the tax-gatherer, they had + done well. Last year the single county of Hammerum, of which more + below, sold machine-made underwear to the value of over a million + and a half kroner. The sheep are there, but no longer lean; no more + the ling-thatched hut, but prosperous farms backed by thrifty + groves, with hollyhock and marigold in the dooryards, heaps of gray + marl in the fields, tiny rivulets of water singing the doom of the + heath in the sand; for where it comes the heather moves out. A + resolute, thrifty peasantry looks hopefully forward. Not all of the + heath is conquered yet. Roughly speaking, thirty-three hundred + square miles of heath confronted Dalgas in 1866. Just about a + thousand remain for those who come after to wrestle with; but + already voices are raised pleading that some of it be preserved + untouched for its natural beauty, while yet it is time. +</p> +<p> + Meanwhile the plow goes over fresh acres every year—once, twice, + then a deeper plowing, this time to break the stony crust, and the + heath is ready for its human mission. From the Society's nurseries + that are scattered through the country come thousands of tiny + trees, and are set out in the furrows, two of the spruce for each + dwarf pine till the nurse has done her work. Then she is turned into + charcoal, into tar, and a score of other things of use. The men who + do the planting in summer find chopping to do in winter in the older + plantations, at good wages. Money is flowing into the moor in the + wake of the water and the marl. Roads are being made, and every day + the mail-carrier comes. In the olden time a stranger straying into + the heath often brought the first news of the world without for + weeks together. Game is coming, too,—roebuck and deer,—in the + young forests. The climate itself is changing; more rain falls in + midsummer, when it is needed. The sand-blast has been checked, the + power of the west wind broken. The shrivelled soil once more takes + up and holds the rains, and the streams will deepen, fish leap in + them as of yore. Groves of beech and oak are springing up in the + shelter of their hardier evergreen kin. "Make the land furry," + Dalgas said, with prophetic eye beholding great forests taking the + place of sand and heather, and in his lifetime the change was + wrought that is transforming the barren moor into the home-land of + a prosperous people. +</p> +<p> + To the most unlikely of places, through the very prison doors, his + gospel of hope has made its way. For the last dozen years the life + prisoners in the Horsens penitentiary have been employed in breaking + and reforesting the heath, and their keepers report that the effect + upon them of the hard work in the open has been to notably cheer and + brighten them. The discipline has been excellent. There have been + few attempts at escape, and they have come to nothing through the + vigilance of the other prisoners. +</p> +<p> + While the population in the rest of Denmark is about stationary, in + west Jutland it grows apace. The case of Skphus farm in the parish + of Sunds shows how this happens. Prior to 1870 this farm of three + thousand acres was rated the "biggest and poorest" in Denmark. Last + year it had dwindled to three hundred and fifty acres, but upon its + old land thirty-three homesteads had risen that kept between them + sixty-two horses and two hundred and fifty-two cows, beside the + sheep, and the manor farm was worth twice as much as before. The + town of Herning, sometimes called "the Star of the Heath," is the + seat of Hammerum county, once the baldest and most miserable on the + Danish mainland. In 1841 twenty-one persons lived in Herning. To-day + there are more than six thousand in a town with handsome buildings, + gas, electric lighting, and paved streets. The heath is half a dozen + miles away. And this is not the result of any special or forced + industry, but the natural, healthy growth of a centre for an army of + industrious men and women winning back the land of their fathers by + patient toil. All through the landscape one sees from the train the + black giving way to the green. Churches rear their white gables; + bells that have been silent since the Black Death stalked through + the land once more call the people to worship on the old sites. More + churches were built in the reign of "the good King Christian," who + has just been gathered to his fathers, than in all the centuries + since the day of the Valdemars. +</p> +<p> + Bog cultivation is the Heath Society's youngest child. The heath is + full of peat-bogs that only need the sand, so plentiful on the + uplands, to make their soil as good as the best, the muck of the bog + being all plant food, and they have a surplus of water to give in + exchange. With hope the keynote of it all, the State has taken up + the herculean task of keeping down the moving sands of the North Sea + coast. All along it is a range of dunes that in the fierce storms of + that region may change shape and place in a single night. The "sand + flight" at times reached miles inland, and threatened to bury the + farmer's acres past recovery. Austrian fir and dwarf pine now grow + upon the white range, helping alike to keep down the sand and to bar + out the blast. +</p> +<p> + With this exception, the great change has been, is being, wrought by + the people themselves. It was for their good, in the apathy that + followed 1864, that it should be so, and Dalgas saw it. The State + aids the man who plants ten acres or more, and assumes the + obligation to preserve the forest intact; the Heath Society sells + him plants at half-price, and helps him with its advice. It disposes + annually of over thirteen million young trees. The people do the + rest, and back the Society with their support. The Danish peasant + has learned the value of coperation since he turned dairy farmer, + and associations for irrigation, for tree planting, and garden + planting are everywhere. They even reach across the ocean. This year + a call was issued to sons of the old soil, who have found a new home + in America, to join in planting a Danish-American forest in the + desert where hill and heather hide a silvery lake in their deep + shadows and returning wanderers may rest and dream of the long ago. +</p> +<p> + Soldier though he was, Enrico Dalgas's pick and spade brigade won + greater victories for Denmark than her armies in two wars. He + literally "won for his country within what she had lost without." A + natural organizer, a hard worker who found his greatest joy in his + daily tasks, a fearless and lucid writer who yet knew how to keep + his cause out of the rancorous politics that often enough seemed to + mistake partisanship for patriotism, he was the most modest of men. + Praise he always passed up to others. At the "silver wedding" of the + Society he founded they toasted him jubilantly, but he sat quiet a + long time. When at last he arose, it was to make this characteristic + little speech: +</p> +<p> + "I thank you very much. His Excellency the Minister of the Interior, + who is present here, will see from this how much you think of me, + and possibly my recommendation that the State make a larger + contribution to the Heath Society's treasury may thereby acquire + greater weight with him. I drink to an increased appropriation." +</p> +<p> + On the heath Dalgas was prophet, prince, and friend of the people. + In the crowds that flocked about his bier homespun elbowed gold lace + in the grief of a common loss. Boughs of the fragrant spruce decked + his coffin, the gift of the heath to the memory of him who set it + free. +</p> +<p> + To Dalgas apply the words of the seer with which he himself + characterized the Society that was the child of his heart and brain: + "The good men are those who plant and water," for they add to the + happiness of mankind. +</p> +<br> +<a name="note-11"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#11"> +<sup>1</sup></a> Danske Hedeselskab. +</p> + +<a name="2H_4_0008"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + KING CHRISTIAN IV +</h2> +<br> + +<a name="image-0002"><!--IMG--></a> +<center> +<img src="images/music.png" width="400" height="936" +alt="Musical Notation With Lyrics +"> +</center> +<!--IMAGE END--> + <p> + Deep in the beech-woods between Copenhagen and Elsinore, upon the + shore of a limpid lake, stands Frederiksborg, one of the most + beautiful castles in Europe. In its chapel the Danish kings were + crowned for two centuries, and here was born on April 12, 1577, King + Christian of the Danish national hymn which Longfellow translated + into our tongue. No Danish ruler since the days of the great + Valdemars made such a mark upon his time; none lives as he in the + imagination of the people. He led armies to war and won and lost + battles; indeed, he lost more than he won on land when matched + against the great generals of that fighting era. On the sea he + sailed his own ship and was the captain of his own fleet, and there + he had no peer. He made laws in the days of peace and reigned over a + happy, prosperous land. In his old age misfortune in which he had no + share overwhelmed Denmark, but he was ever greatest in adversity, + and his courage saved the country from ruin. The great did not love + him overmuch; but to the plain people he was ever, with all his + failings, which were the failings of his day, a great, appealing + figure, and lives in their hearts, not merely in the dry pages of + musty books. +</p> +<p> + He was eleven years old when his father died, and until he came of + age the country was governed by a council of happily most able men + who, with his mother, gave him such a schooling as few kings have + had. He not only became proficient in the languages, living and + dead, and in mathematics which he put to such practical use that he + was among the greatest of architects and ship-builders; he was the + best all-round athlete among his fellows as well, and there was some + sense in the tradition that survives to this day that whoever was + touched by him in wrath did not live long, for he was very tall with + a big, strong body, and when he struck, he struck hard. He was a + dauntless sailor who knew as much about sailing a ship as any one of + his captains, and much more about building it. Danger appealed to + him always. When the spire on the great cathedral in Copenhagen + threatened to fall, he was the one who went up in it alone and gave + orders where and how to brace it. +</p> +<p> + As he grew, he sat in the council of state, learning kingcraft, and + showed there the hard-headed sense of fairness and justice that went + with him through life. He was hardly fourteen when the case of three + brothers of the powerful Friis family came before the council. They + had attacked another young nobleman in the street, struck off one of + his hands, and crippled the other. Because of their influence, the + council was for being lenient, atrocious as the crime was. A fine + was deemed sufficient. The young prince asked if there were not some + law covering the case with severer punishment, and was told that in + the province of Skaane there was such a law that applied to serfs. + But the assault had not been committed in Skaane, and these were + high noblemen. +</p> +<p> + "All the worse for them," said the prince. "Is then a serf in Skaane + to have more rights under the law than a nobleman in the rest of + Denmark? Let the law for the serf be theirs." And the judgment + stood. +</p> +<p> + He had barely attained his majority, when the young king was called + upon to judge between another great noble and a widow whom he sued + for 9000 daler, money he claimed to have lent to her husband. In + proof he laid before the judges two bonds bearing the signatures of + husband and wife. The widow denounced them as forgeries, but the + court decided that she must pay. She went straight to the King with + her story, assuring him that she had never heard of the debt. The + King sent for the bonds and upon close scrutiny discovered that one + of them was on paper bearing the water-mark of a mill that was not + built till two years after the date written in the bond. The noble + was arrested and the search of his house brought to light several + similar documents waiting their turn. He went to the scaffold. His + rank only aggravated his offence in the eyes of the King. No wonder + the fame of this judge spread quickly through the land. +</p> +<p> + A dozen contented years he reigned in peace, doing justice between + man and man at home. Then the curse of his house gripped him. In two + centuries, since the brief union between the three Scandinavian + kingdoms was broken by the secession of Sweden, only two of sixteen + kings in either country had gone to their rest without ripping up + the old feud. It was now Christian's turn. The pretext was of little + account: there was always cause enough. Gustav Adolf, whose father + was then on the throne of Sweden, said in after years that there was + no one he had such hearty admiration for and whose friend he would + like so well to be as Christian IV: "The mischief is that we are + neighbors." King Christian crossed over into Sweden and laid siege + to the strong fortress of Kalmar where he first saw actual war and + showed himself a doughty campaigner of intrepid courage. It came + near costing him his life when a cannoneer with whom he had often + talked on his rounds deserted to the enemy and picked the King out + as his especial target. Twice he killed an officer attending upon + him, but the King he never hit. It is almost a pleasure to record + that when he tried it again, in another fight, Christian caught him + and dealt with him as the traitor he was, though the rough justice + of those days is not pleasant to dwell on. The besieged tried to + create a diversion by sneaking into camp at night and burying wax + images of the King and his generals in the earth, where they were + afterwards found and spread consternation through the army; for such + things were believed to be wrought by witchcraft and to bring bad + luck to those whom they represented. +</p> +<p> + However, neither the real courage of the defenders, nor their + dallying with the black art, helped them any. King Christian stormed + the town at the head of his army and took it. The burgomaster hid in + the church, disguised as a priest, and pretended to be shriving some + women when the crash came, but it did not save him. When the + Swedish king came with a host twice the size of his own, there was + a battle royal, but Christian drove him off and laid siege to the + castle where dissension presently arose between the garrison and its + commander who was for surrendering. In the midst of their noisy + quarrel, King Christian was discovered standing upon the wall, + calmly looking on. He had climbed up alone on a rope ladder which + the sentinel let down at his bidding. At the sight they gave it up + and opened the gates, and the King wrote home, proudly dating his + letter from "our castle Kalmar." +</p> +<p> + Its loss so angered the Swedish king who was old and sick, that he + challenged Christian to single combat, without armor. The letters + that passed between them were hardly kingly. King Christian wrote + that he had other things to do: "Better catch a doctor, old man, and + have your head-piece looked after." Helpless anger killed Karl, and + Gustav Adolf, of whom the world was presently to hear, took the + command and the crown. After that Christian had a harder road to + hoe. +</p> +<p> + A foretaste of it came to him when he tried to surprise the fortress + of Gullberg near the present Gtaborg. Its commander was wounded + early in the fight, but his wife who took his place more than filled + it. She and her women poured boiling lye upon the attacking Danes + until they lay "like scalded pigs" under the walls. Their leader + knew when he had enough and made off in haste, with the lady + commandant calling after him, "You were a little unexpected for + breakfast, but come back for dinner and we will receive you + properly." She would not even let them take their dead away. "Since + God gave us luck to kill them," she said, "we will manage to bury + them too." They were very pious days after their own fashion, and + God was much on the lips of his servants. Troubles rarely come + singly. Soon after, King Christian met the enemy unexpectedly and + was so badly beaten that for the second time he had to run for it, + though he held out till nearly all his men had fallen. His horse got + mired in a swamp with the pursuers close behind. The gay and wealthy + Sir Christen Barnekow, who had been last on the field, passed him + there, and at once got down and gave him his horse. It meant giving + up his life, and when Sir Christen could no longer follow the + fleeing King he sat down on a rock with the words, "I give the King + my horse, the enemy my life, and God my soul." The rock is there yet + and the country folk believe that the red spots in the granite are + Christen Barnekow's blood which all the years have not availed to + wash out. +</p> +<p> + They tired of fighting at last and made it up. Sweden paid Denmark a + million daler; for the rest, things stayed as they had been before. + King Christian had shown himself no mean fighter, but the senseless + sacking and burning of town and country that was an ugly part of + those days' warfare went against his grain, and he tried to persuade + the Swedes to agree to leave that out in future. Gustav Adolf had + not yet grown into the man he afterward became. "As to the burning," + was his reply, "seeing that it is the usage of war, and we enemies, + why we will each have to do the best we can," which meant the worst. + Had the two kings, who had much in common, got together in the years + of peace that followed, much misery might have been saved Denmark, + and a black page of history might read very differently. For those + were the days of the Thirty Years' War, in which together they + might have dictated peace to harassed Europe. +</p> +<p> + Now King Christian's ambition, his piety, for he was a sincerely + religious man, as well as his jealousy of his younger rival and of + the growing power of Sweden—so mixed are human motives—made him + yield to the entreaties of the hard-pressed Protestant princes to + take up alone their cause against the German Emperor. He had tried + for half a dozen years to make peace between them. At last he drew + the sword and went down to force it. After a year of fighting Tilly + and Wallenstein, the Emperor's great generals, he met the former in + a decisive battle at Lutter-am-Baremberg. King Christian's army was + beaten and put to rout. He himself fled bareheaded through the + forests of the Hartz Mountains, pursued by the enemy's horsemen. It + was hardly necessary for the Emperor to make him promise as the + price of peace to keep out of German affairs thenceforth. His allies + had left him to fight it out alone. All their fine speeches went for + nothing when it came to the test, and King Christian rode back to + Denmark, a sadder and wiser man. It was left to Gustav Adolf, after + all, to teach the German generals the lesson they needed. +</p> +<p> + In the years of peace before that unhappy war, Danish trade and + Danish culture had blossomed exceedingly, thanks to the wisdom, the + clever management, and untiring industry of the King. He built + factories, cloth-mills, silk-mills, paper-mills, dammed the North + Sea out from the rich marshlands with great dikes, taught the + farmers profitable ways of tilling their fields; for he was a + wondrous manager for whom nothing was too little and nothing too + big. He kept minute account of his children's socks and little + shirts, and found ways of providing money for his war-ships and for + countless building schemes he had in hand both in Denmark and + Norway. For many of them he himself drew the plans. Wherever one + goes to this day, his monogram, which heads this story, stares at + him from the splendid buildings he erected. The Bourse in Copenhagen + and the Round Tower, the beautiful palace of Rosenborg, a sort of + miniature of his beloved Frederiksborg which also he rebuilt on a + more magnificent scale—these are among his works which every + traveller in the North knows. He built more cities and strongholds + than those who went before or came after him for centuries. + Christiania and Christiansand in Norway bear his name. He laid out a + whole quarter of Copenhagen for his sailors, and the quaint little + houses still serve that purpose. Regentsen, a dormitory for poor + students at the university, was built by him. He created seven new + chairs of learning and saw to it that all the professors got better + pay. He ferreted out and dismissed in disgrace all the grafting + officials in Norway, and administered justice with an even hand. At + the same time he burned witches without end, or let it be done for + their souls' sake. That was the way of his time; and when he needed + fireworks for his son's wedding (he made them himself, too), he sent + around to all the old cloisters and cathedral churches for the old + parchments they had. Heaven only knows what treasures that can never + be replaced went up in fire and smoke for that one night's fun. +</p> +<p> + King Christian founded a score of big trading companies to exploit + the East, taking care that their ships should have their bulwarks + pierced for at least six guns, so that they might serve as war-ships + in time of need. He sent one expedition after another to the waters + of Greenland in search of the Northwest Passage. It was on the + fourth of these, in 1619, that Jens Munk with two ships and + sixty-four sailors was caught in the ice of Hudson Bay and compelled + to winter there. One after another the crew died of hunger and + scurvy. When Jens Munk himself crept out from what he had thought + his death-bed, he found only two of them all alive. Together they + burrowed in the snow, digging for roots until spring came when they + managed to make their way down to Bergen in the smallest of the two + vessels. Jens Munk had deserved a better end than he got. He spun + his yarns so persistently at court that he got to be a tiresome + bore, and at last one day the King told him that he had no time to + listen to him. Whereat the veteran took great umbrage and, slapping + his sword, let the King know that he had served him well and was + entitled to better treatment. Christian snatched the weapon in anger + and struck him with the scabbard. The sailor never got over it. "He + withered away and died," says the tradition. It was the old + superstition; but whether that killed him or not, the King lost a + good man in Jens Munk. +</p> +<p> + He was not averse to hearing the truth, though, when boldly put. + When Ole Vind, a popular preacher, offended some of the nobles by + his plain speech and they complained to the King, he bade him to the + court and told him to preach the same sermon over. Master Vind was + game and the truths he told went straight home, for he knew well + where the shoe pinched. But King Christian promptly made him court + preacher. "He is the kind we need here," he said. There was never a + day that the King did not devoutly read his Bible, and he was + determined that everybody should read it the same way. The result + was a kind of Puritanism that filled the churches and compelled the + employment of men to go around with long sticks to rap the people on + the head when they fell asleep. Christian the Fourth was not the + first ruler who has tried to herd men into heaven by battalions. But + his people would have gladly gone in the fire for him. He was their + friend. When on his tramps, as likely as not he would come home + sitting beside some peasant on his load of truck, and would step off + at the palace gate with a "So long, thanks for good company!" He was + everywhere, interested in everything. In his walking-stick he + carried a foot-rule, a level, and other tools, and would stop at the + bench of a workman in the navy-yard and test his work to see how + well he was doing it. "I can lie down and sleep in any hut in the + land," was his contented boast. And he would have been safe + anywhere. +</p> +<p> + Gustav Adolf was a wise and generous foe. While he lived he refused + to listen to proposals for the partition of Denmark after King + Christian's defeat in Germany. He knew well that she was a barrier + against the ambition of the German princes and that, once she was + out of the way, Sweden's turn would come next. But when he had + fallen on the battle-field of Ltzen, and his generals, following in + his footsteps, had achieved fame and lands and the freedom of + worship for which he gave his life, the Swedish statesmen lost their + heads and dreamed of the erection of a great northern Protestant + state by the conquest of Denmark and Norway, to balance the power + of the German empire. Without warning or declaration of war a great + army was thrown into the Danish peninsula from the south. Another + advanced from Sweden upon the eastern provinces, and a fleet hired + in Holland for Swedish money came through the North Sea to help them + over to the Danish islands. If the two armies met, Denmark was lost. + In Swedish harbors a still bigger fleet was fitting out for the + Baltic. +</p> +<p> + King Christian was well up in the sixties, worn with the tireless + activities of a long reign; but once more he proved himself greater + than adversity. When the evil tidings reached him, in the midst of + profound peace, the enemy was already within the gates. The country + lay prostrate. The name of Torstenson, the Swedish general, spread + terror wherever it was heard. In the German campaigns he had been + known as the "Swedish Lightning." Beset on every side, never had + Denmark's need been greater. The one man who did not lose his head + was her king. By his personal example he put heart into the people + and shamed the cowardly nobles. He borrowed money wherever he could, + sent his own silver to the mint, crowded the work in the navy-yard + by night and by day, gathered an army, and hurried with it to the + Sounds where the enemy might cross. When the first ships were ready + he sailed around the Skaw to meet the Dutch hirelings. "I am old and + stiff," he said, "and no good any more to fight on land. But I can + manage the ships." +</p> +<p> + And he did. He met the Dutchmen in the North Sea, in under the + Danish coast, and whipped them, almost single-handed, for his own + ship <i>Trefoldigheden</i> was for a long while the only one that wind + and tide would let come up with them. That done, he left one of his + captains to watch lest they come out from among the islands where + their ships of shallower draught had sought refuge, and sailed for + Copenhagen. Everything that could carry sail was ready for him by + that time; also the news that the Swedish fleet of forty-six + fighting ships under Klas Fleming had sailed for the coast of + Holstein to take on board Torstenson's army. +</p> +<p> + King Christian lost no time. He hoisted his flag on <i>Trefoldigheden</i> + and made after them with thirty-nine ships, vowing that he would + win this fight or die. At Kolberger Heide, the water outside the + Fjord of Kiel, he caught up with them and attacked at once. The + battle that then ensued is the one of which the poet sings and with + which the name of Christian IV is forever linked. +</p> +<p> + At the outset the Danish fleet was in great peril. The Swedes fought + gallantly as was their wont, and they were three or four against + one, for most of the King's ships came up slowly, some of them + purposely, so it seems. The King said after the battle of certain of + his captains, "They used me as a screen between them and the enemy." + His own ship and that of his chief admiral's bore the brunt of the + battle for a long time. <i>Trefoldigheden</i> fired 315 shots during the + engagement, and at one time had four hostile, ships clustering about + her. King Christian was on the quarter-deck when a cannon-ball + shivered the bulwark and one of his guns, throwing a shower of + splintered iron and wood over him and those near him, killing and + wounding twelve of the crew. The King himself fell, stunned and + wounded in twenty-three places. His right eye was knocked out, two + of his teeth, and his left ear hung in shreds. +</p> +<p> + The cry was raised that the King was dead and panic spread on board. + The story has it that a sailor was sent aloft to strike the flag but + purposely entangled it in the rigging so that it could not fall; he + could not bear to see the King's ship strike its colors. In the + midst of the tumult the aged monarch rose to his feet, torn and + covered with blood. "I live yet," he cried, "and God has left me + strength to fight on for my country. Let every man do his duty." + Leaning on his sword, he led the fight until darkness fell and the + battle was won. Denmark was saved. The danger of an invasion was + averted. In the palace of Rosenborg the priceless treasure they show + to visitors is the linen cloth, all blood-stained, that bound the + King's face as he fought and won his last and biggest fight that + day. +</p> +<p> + Half blind, his body black and blue and sore from many bruises, King + Christian yet refused to sail for Copenhagen to have his wounds + attended. Three weeks he lay watching the narrow inlet behind which + the beaten enemy was hiding, to destroy his ships when he came out. + Then he gave over the command to another and hastened to the + province of Skaane on the Swedish mainland, from which he expelled a + hostile army. But when his back was turned, the men he had set to + watch fell asleep and let the Swedish admiral steal out into the + open. There he found and joined the Dutch ships that had slipped + around the Skaw during the rumpus. Together they overwhelmed the + Danish fleet, being now three to one, and crushed it. The slothful + admiral paid for it with his life, but the harm was done. It was the + last and heaviest blow. The old King sheathed his sword and set his + name to a peace that took from Denmark some of her ancient + provinces, with the bitter sigh: "God knows I had no share in this," + and he had not. Even at the last he appealed to the country to try + the fortunes of war with him once more. The people were willing, but + the nobles wanted peace, "however God send it," and he had to yield. + The treaty was made at Brmsebro, where a bridge crossed the river + dividing the two kingdoms. In the middle of the river was an island + and the negotiations were carried on in a tent erected there, the + French and the Dutch being the arbitrators. The envoys of Sweden + and Denmark sat on opposite sides of the boundary post where the + line cut through, each on the soil of his own country. So bitterly + did they hate one another that they did not speak but wrote their + messages, though they could have shaken hands where they sat. Even + that was too close quarters, and they ended up by negotiating at + second hand through the foreign ambassadors, all at the same table, + but each looking straight past the other as if he were not there. +</p> +<p> + Another touch of comedy relieves the gloom of that heavy day. It was + the conquest of the Srnadal, a mountain valley in Norway just over + the Swedish frontier, by Pastor Buschovius who, Bible in hand, at + the head of two hundred ski-men invaded and captured it one winter's + day without a blow. He came over the snow-fields into the valley + that had not seen a preacher in many a long day, had the church + bells rung to summon the people, preached to them, married and + christened them, and gave them communion. The simple mountaineers + had hardly heard of the war and had nothing against their neighbors + over the mountain. They joined Sweden then and there at the request + of the preacher, and they stayed Swedes too, for in the final muster + they were forgotten with their valley. Very likely the treaty-makers + did not know that it existed. +</p> +<p> + King Christian died four years later, in 1648, past the three score + and ten allotted to man. He was not a great leader like Gustav + Adolf, and he was very human in some of his failings. But he was a + strong man, a just king, and a father of his people who still cling + to his memory with more than filial affection. +</p> +<a name="2H_4_0009"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING +</h2> +<br> + +<p> + The city of Prague, the capital of Bohemia, went wild with + excitement one spring morning in the year 1618. The Protestant + Estates of Germany had met there to protest against the aggressions + of the Catholic League and the bad faith of the Emperor, who had + guaranteed freedom of worship in the land and had now sent two + envoys to defy the meeting and declare it illegal. In the old castle + they delivered their message and bade the convention disperse; and + the delegates, when they had heard, seized them and their clerk and + threw them out of the window "in good old Bohemian fashion." They + fell seventy feet and escaped almost without a scratch, which fact + was accepted by the Catholics of that strenuous day as proof of + their miraculous preservation; by the Protestants as evidence that + the devil ever takes care of his own. +</p> +<p> + It was the tiny spark that set Europe on fire. Out of it grew the + Thirty Years' War, the most terrible that ever scourged the + civilized world. When Catholic League and Evangelical Union first + mustered their armies, Bohemia had a prosperous population of four + million souls; when the war was over there were less than eight + hundred thousand alive in that unhappy land, and the wolves that + roamed its forests were scarcely more ferocious than the human + starvelings who skulked among the smoking ruins of burned towns and + hamlets. Other states fared little better. Two centuries did not + wipe out the blight of those awful years when rapine and murder, + inspired by bigotry and hate, ran riot in the name of religion. +</p> +<p> + In the gloom and horror of it all a noble figure stands forth alone. + It were almost worth the sufferings of a Thirty Years' War for the + world to have gained a Gustav Adolf. The "snow-king" the Emperor's + generals named him when he first appeared on German soil at the head + of his army of Northmen, and they prophesied that he would speedily + melt, once the southern sun shone upon his host. They little knew + the man. He went from victory to victory, less because he was the + greatest general of his day than because he, and all his army with + him, believed himself charged by the Almighty with the defence of + his country and of his faith. The Emperor had attacked both, the + first by attempting to extend his dominion to the Baltic; but + Pommerania and the Baltic provinces were regarded by the Swedish + ruler as the outworks of his kingdom; and Sweden was Protestant. + Hence he drew the sword. "Our brethren in the faith are sighing for + deliverance from spiritual and bodily thraldom," he said to his + people. "Please God, they shall not sigh long." That was his + warrant. Axel Oxenstjerna, his friend and right hand who lived to + finish his work, said of him, "He felt himself impelled by a mighty + spirit which he was unable to resist." As warrior, king, and man, he + was head and shoulders above his time. Gustav Adolf saved religious + liberty to the world. He paid the price with his life, but he would + have asked no better fate. A soldier of God, he met a soldier's + death on the field of battle, in the hour of victory. +</p> +<p> + A man of destiny he was to his people as to himself. Long years + before his birth, upon the appearance of the comet of 1577, Tycho + Brahe, the astronomer, who was deep in the occultism of his day, had + predicted that a prince would appear in Finland who would do great + things in Germany and deliver the Protestant peoples from the + oppression of the popes, and the prophecy was applied to Gustav + Adolf by his subjects all through his life. He was born on December + 9, 1594, old style, as they still reckon time in Russia. Very early + he showed the kind of stuff he was made of. When he was yet almost a + baby he was told that there were snakes in the park, and showed + fight at once: "Give me a stick and I will kill them." With the + years he grew into a handsome youth who read his books, knew his + Seneca by heart, was fond of the poets and the great orators, and + mastered eight languages, living and dead. At seventeen he buckled + on the sword and put the books away, but kept Xenophon as his + friend; for he was a military historian after his own heart. He was + then Duke of Finland. +</p> +<p> + The King, his father, was a stern but observant man who, seeing his + bent, threw him with soldiers to his heart's content, glad to have + it so, for it was a warlike age. From his tenth year he let him sit + in council with him and early delegated to him the duty of answering + ambassadors from foreign countries. The lad was the only one who + dared oppose the king when he was in a temper, and often he made + peace and healed wounds struck in anger. The people worshipped the + fair young prince, and his father, when he felt the palsy of old age + and bodily infirmities creeping upon him and thought of his + unfinished tasks, would murmur as his eyes rested upon the bonny + youth: "<i>Ille faciet</i>—He will do it." There is still in existence a + document in which he laid down to him his course as a sovereign. + "First of all," he writes, "you shall fear God and honor your father + and mother. Give your brothers and sisters brotherly affection; love + your father's faithful servants and requite them after their due. Be + gracious to your subjects; punish evil and love the good. Believe in + men, but find out first what is in them. Hold by the law without + respect of person." +</p> +<p> + It was good advice to a prince, and the king took it to heart. On + the docket of the Supreme Court at Stockholm is a letter written by + Gustav Adolf to the judges and ordered by him to be entered there, + which tells them plainly that if any of them is found perverting + justice to suit him, the King, or any one else, he will have him + flayed alive and his hide nailed to the judgment-seat, his ears + to the pillory! Not a nice way of talking to dignified judges, + perhaps, but then the prescription was intended to suit the + practice, if there was need. +</p> +<p> + The young king earned his spurs in a war with Denmark that came near + being his last as it was his first campaign. He and his horsemen + were surprised by the Danes on a winter's night as they were warming + themselves by a fire built of the pews in the Wittsj church, and + they cut their way through only after a desperate fight on the + frozen lake. The ice broke under the king's horse and he was going + down when two of his men caught him in the nick of time. He got away + with the loss of his sword, his pistols, and his gloves. "I will + remember you with a crust that shall do for your bairns too," he + promised one of his rescuers, a stout peasant lad, and he kept his + word. Thomas Larsson's descendants a generation ago still tilled the + farm the King gave him. When the trouble with Denmark was over for + the time being, he settled old scores with Russia and Poland in a + way that left Sweden mistress of the Baltic. In the Polish war he + was wounded twice and was repeatedly in peril of his life. Once he + was shot in the neck, and, as the bullet could not be removed, it + ever after troubled him to wear armor. His officers pleaded with him + to spare himself, but his reply was that Csar and Alexander did not + skulk behind the lines; a general must lead if he expected his men + to follow. +</p> +<p> + In this campaign he met the League's troops, sent to chase him back + to his own so that Wallenstein, the leader of the imperial armies, + might be "General of the Baltic Sea," unmolested. "Go to Poland," he + commanded one of his lieutenants, "and drive the snow-king out; or + else tell him that I shall come and do it myself." The proud soldier + never knew how near he came to entertaining the snow-king as his + unwilling guest then. In a fight between his rear-guard and the + imperial army Gustav Adolf was disarmed and taken prisoner by two + troopers. There was another prisoner who had kept his pistol. He + handed it to the King behind his back and with it he shot one of his + captors and brained the other. For all that they nearly got him. He + saved himself only by wriggling out of his belt and leaving it in + the hands of the enemy. Eight years he campaigned in Poland and + Prussia, learning the arts of war. Then he was ready for his + life-work. He made a truce with Poland that freed his hands for a + season, and went home to Sweden. +</p> +<p> + That spring (1629) he laid before the Swedish Estates his plan of + freeing the Protestants. To defend Sweden, he declared, was to + defend her faith, and the Estates voted supplies for the war. To + gauge fully the splendid courage of the nation it must be remembered + that the whole kingdom, including Finland, had a population of only + a million and a half at the time and was preparing to attack the + mighty Roman empire. In the first year of the war the Swedish budget + was thirteen millions of dollars, of which nine and a half went for + armaments. The whole army which Gustav Adolf led into Germany + numbered only 14,000 soldiers, but it was made up of Swedish + veterans led by men whose names were to become famous for all time, + and welded together by an unshakable belief in their commander, a + rigid discipline and a religious enthusiasm that swayed master and + men with a common impulse. Such a combination has in all days proven + irresistible. +</p> +<p> + The King's farewell to his people—he was never to see Sweden + again—moved a nation to tears. He spoke to the nobles, the clergy + and to the people, admonishing them to stand together in the hard + years that were coming and gave them all into the keeping of God. + They stood on the beach and watched his ships sail into the sunset + until they were swallowed up in glory. Then they went back home to + take up the burden that was their share. On the Rgen shore the King + knelt with his men and thanked God for having brought them safe + across the sea, then seized a spade, and himself turned the first + sod in the making of a camp. "Who prays well, fights well," he said. +</p> +<p> + He was not exactly hospitably received. The old Duke of Pommerania + would have none of him, begged him to go away, and only when the + King pointed to his guns and hinted that he had keys well able to + open the gates of Stettin, his capital, did he give in and promise + help. The other German princes, with one or two exceptions, were as + cravenly short-sighted. They held meetings and denounced the Emperor + and his lawless doings, but Gustav they would not help. The princes + of Brandenburg and of Saxony, the two Protestant Electors of the + empire, were rather disposed to hinder him, if they might, though + Brandenburg was his brother-in-law. Only when the King threatened to + burn the city of Berlin over his head did he listen. While he was + yet laboring with them, recruiting his army and keeping it in + practice by driving the enemy out of Pommerania, news reached him of + the fall of Magdeburg, the strongest city in northern Germany, that + had of its own free will joined his cause. +</p> +<p> + The sacking of Magdeburg is one of the black deeds of history. In a + night the populous city was reduced to a heap of smoking ruins under + which twenty thousand men, women, and children lay buried. Not since + the fall of Jerusalem, said Pappenheim, Tilly's famous cavalry + leader to whom looting and burning were things of every day, had so + awful a visitation befallen a town. Only the great cathedral and a + few houses near it were left standing. The history of warfare of the + Christian peoples of that day reads like a horrid nightmare. The + fighting armies left a trail of black desolation where they passed. + "They are not made up of birds that feed on air," sneered Tilly. + Peaceful husbandmen were murdered, the young women dragged away to + worse than slavery, and helpless children spitted upon the lances + of the wild landsknechts and tossed with a laugh into the blazing + ruins of their homes. But no such foul blot cleaves to the memory of + Gustav Adolf. While he lived his men were soldiers, not demons. In + his tent the work of Hugo Grotius on the rights of the nations in + war and peace lay beside the Bible and he knew them both by heart. + When he was gone, the fame of some of his greatest generals was + smirched by as vile orgies as Tilly's worst days had witnessed. It + is told of John Banr, one of the most brilliant of them, that he + demanded ransom of the city of Prix, past which his way led. The + city fathers permitted themselves an untimely jest: "Prix giebt + nichts—Prix gives nothing," they said. Banr was as brief: "Prix + wird zu nichts—Prix comes to nothing," and his army wiped it out. +</p> +<p> + Grief and anger almost choked the King when he heard of Magdeburg's + fate. "I will avenge that on the Old Corporal (Tilly's nickname)," + he cried, "if it costs my life." Without further ado he forced the + two Electors to terms and joined the Saxon army to his own. On + September 7, 1631, fifteen months after he had landed in Germany, he + met Tilly face to face at Breitenfeld, a village just north of + Leipzig. The Emperor's host in its brave show of silver and plumes + and gold, the plunder of many campaigns under its invincible leader, + looked with contempt upon the travel-worn Swedes in their poor, + soiled garb. The stolid Finns sat their mean but wiry little horses + very unlike Pappenheim's dreaded Walloons, descendants of the + warlike Belg of Gaul who defied the Germans of old in the forest of + the Ardennes and joined Csar in his victorious march. But Tilly + himself was not deceived. He knew how far this enemy had come and + with what hardships cheerfully borne; how they had routed the + Russians, written laws for the Poles in their own land, and + overthrown armies and forts that barred their way. He would wait for + reinforcements; but his generals egged him on, said age had made him + timid and slow, and carried the day. +</p> +<p> + The King slept in an empty cart the night before the battle and + dreamed that he wrestled with Tilly and threw him, but that he tore + his breast with his teeth. When all was ready in the morning he rode + along the front and told his fusiliers not to shoot till they saw + the white in the enemy's eyes, the horsemen not to dull their + swords by hacking the helmets of the Walloons: "Cut at their horses + and they will go down with them." In the pause before the onset he + prayed with head uncovered and lowered sword, and his voice carried + to the farthest lines: +</p> +<p> + "Thou, God, in whose hands are victory and defeat, look graciously + upon thy servants. From distant lands and peaceful homes have we + come to battle for freedom, truth and thy gospel. Give us victory + for thy holy name's sake, Amen!" +</p> +<p> + Tilly had expected the King to attack, but the fiery Pappenheim + upset his plans. The smoke of the guns drifted in the faces of the + Swedes and the King swung his army to the south to get the wind + right. In making the turn they had to cross a brook and this moment + Pappenheim chose for his charge. Like a thunderbolt his Walloons + fell upon them. The Swedish fire mowed them down like ripened grain + and checked their impetuous rush. They tried to turn the King's + right and so outflank him; but the army turned with them and stood + like a rock. The extreme mobility of his forces was Gustav Adolf's + great advantage in his campaigns. He revised the book of military + tactics up to date. The imperial troops were massed in solid + columns, after the old Spanish fashion, the impact of which was hard + to resist when they struck. The King's, on the contrary, moved in + smaller bodies, quickly thrown upon the point of danger, and his + artillery was so distributed among them as to make every shot tell + on the compact body of the enemy. Whichever way Pappenheim turned he + found a firm front, bristling with guns, opposing him. Seven times + he threw himself upon the living wall; each time his horsemen were + flung back, their lines thinned and broken. The field was strewn + with their dead. Tilly, anxiously watching, threw up his hands in + despair. "This man will lose me honor and fame, and the Emperor his + lands," he cried. The charge ended in wild flight, and Tilly saw + that he must himself attack, to turn the tide. +</p> +<p> + On the double-quick his columns of spearmen charged down the + heights, swept the Saxons from the field, and fell upon the Swedish + left. The shock was tremendous. General Gustav Horn gave back to let + his second line come up, and held the ground stubbornly against + fearful odds. Word was brought the King of his danger. With the + right wing that had crushed Pappenheim he hurried to the rescue. In + the heat of the fight the armies had changed position, and the + Swedes found themselves climbing the hill upon which Tilly's + artillery was posted. Seeing this, the King made one of the rapid + movements that more than once won him the day. Raising the cry, + "Remember Magdeburg!" he carried the position with his Finns by a + sudden overwhelming assault, and turned the guns upon the dense + masses of the enemy fighting below. +</p> +<p> + In vain they stormed the heights. Both wings and the centre closed + in upon them, and the day was lost. Tilly fled, wounded, and + narrowly escaped capture. A captain in the Swedish army, who was + called Long Fritz because of his great height, was at his heels + hammering him on the head with the butt of his pistol. A staff + officer shot him down in passing, and freed his chief. Twilight fell + upon a battle-field where seven thousand men lay dead, two-thirds of + them the flower of the Emperor's army. Blood-stained and + smoke-begrimed, Gustav Adolf and his men knelt on the field and + thanked God for the victory. +</p> +<p> + Had the King's friend and adviser, Axel Oxenstjerna, been with him + he might have marched upon Vienna then, leaving the Protestant + Estates to settle their own affairs, and very likely have ended the + war. Gustav Adolf thought of Tilly who would return with another + army. Oxenstjerna saw farther, weighing things upon the scales of + the diplomatist. +</p> +<p> + "How think you we would fare," asked the King once, when the + chancellor saw obstacles in their way which he would brush aside, + "if my fire did not thaw the chill in you?" +</p> +<p> + "But for my chill cooling your Majesty's fire," was his friend's + retort, "you would have long since been burned up." The King laughed + and owned that he was right. +</p> +<p> + Instead of bearding the Emperor in his capital he turned toward the + Rhine where millions of Protestants were praying for his coming and + where his army might find rest and abundance. The cathedral city of + Wrzburg he took by storm. The bishop who ruled it fled at his + approach, but the full treasury of the Jesuits fell into his hands. + The Madonna of beaten gold and the twelve solid silver apostles, + famous throughout Europe, were sent to the mint and coined into + money to pay his army. In the cellar they found chests filled with + ducats. The bottom fell out of one as they carried it up and the + gold rolled out on the pavement. The soldiers swarmed to pick it up, + but a good many coins stuck to their pockets. The King saw it and + laughed: "Since you have them, boys, keep them." The dead were still + lying in the castle yard after the siege, a number of monks among + them. The color of some of them seemed high for corpses. "Arise from + the dead," he said waggishly, "no one will hurt you," and the + frightened monks got upon their feet and scampered away. +</p> +<p> + Frankfort opened its gates to his victorious host and Nrnberg + received him as a heaven-sent liberator. But Tilly was in the field + with a fresh army, burning to avenge Breitenfeld. He had surprised + General Horn at Bamberg and beaten him. At the approach of the King + he camped where the river Lech joins the Danube, awaiting attack. + There was but one place to cross to get at him, and right there he + stood. The king seized Donauworth and Ulm, and under cover of the + fire of seventy guns threw a bridge across the Lech. Three hundred + Finns carrying picks and spades ran across the shaky planks upon + which the fire of Tilly's whole artillery park was concentrated. + Once across, they burrowed in the ground like moles and, with + bullets raining upon them, threw up earthworks for shelter. Squad + after squad of volunteers followed. Duke Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar + swam his horsemen across the river farther up-stream and took the + Bavarian troops in the flank, beating them back far enough to let + him join the Finns at the landing. The King himself was directing + the artillery on the other shore, aiming the guns with his own hand. + The Walloons, Tilly's last hope, charged, but broke under the + withering fire. In desperation the old field-marshal seized the + standard and himself led the forlorn hope. Half-way to the bridge he + fell, one leg shattered by a cannon-ball, and panic seized his men. + The imperialists fled in the night, carrying their wounded leader. + He died on the march soon after. Men said of him that he had served + his master well. +</p> +<p> + The snow-king had not melted in the south. He was master of the + Roman empire from the Baltic to the Alps. The way to Austria and + Italy lay open before him. Protestant princes crowded to do him + homage, offering him the imperial crown. But Gustav Adolf did not + lose his head. Toward the humbled Catholics he showed only + forbearance and toleration. In Munich he visited the college of the + Jesuits, and spoke long with the rector in the Latin tongue, + assuring him of their safety as long as they kept from politics and + plotting. The armory in that city was known to be the best stocked + in all Europe and the King's surprise was great when he found + gun-carriages in plenty, but not a single cannon. Looking about him, + he saw evidence that the floor had been hastily relaid and + remembered the "dead" monks at Wrzburg. He had it taken up and a + dark vault appeared. The King looked into it. +</p> +<p> + "Arise!" he called out, "and come to judgment," and amid shouts of + laughter willing hands brought out a hundred and forty good guns, + welcome renforcements. +</p> +<p> + The ignorant Bavarian peasants had been told that the King was the + very anti-Christ, come to harass the world for its sins, and carried + on a cruel guerilla warfare upon his army. They waylaid the Swedes + by night on their foraging trips and maimed and murdered those they + caught with fiendish tortures. The bitterest anger filled Gustav + Adolf's soul when upon his entry into Landshut the burgomaster knelt + at his stirrup asking mercy for his city. +</p> +<p> + "Pray not to me," he said harshly, "but to God for yourself and for + your people, for in truth you have need." +</p> +<p> + For once thoughts of vengeance seemed to fill his soul. "No, no!" he + thundered when the frightened burgomaster pleaded that his townsmen + should not be held accountable for the cruelty of the country-folk, + "you are beasts, not men, and deserve to be wiped from the earth + with fire and sword." From out the multitude there came a warning + voice: "Will the King now abandon the path of mercy for the way of + vengeance and visit his wrath upon these innocent people?" No one + saw the speaker. The day was oppressively hot and the King came near + fainting in the saddle. As he rode out of the city toward the camp, + a bolt of lightning struck the ground beside him and a mighty crash + of thunder rolled overhead. Pale and thoughtful, he rode on. But + Landshut was spared. That evening General Horn brought the anxious + citizens the King's promise of pardon. +</p> +<p> + A few weeks later tidings reached Gustav Adolf that Wallenstein and + the Elector of Bavaria were marching to effect a junction at + Nrnberg. If they took the city, his line of communication was cut + and his army threatened. Wallenstein, who was a traitor, had been in + disgrace; but he was a great general and in his dire need Emperor + Ferdinand had no one else to turn to. So he took him back on his own + terms, and in the spring he had an army of forty thousand veterans + in the field. This was the host he was leading against Nrnberg. But + the King got there first and intrenched himself so strongly that + there was no ousting him. Wallenstein followed suit and for eleven + weeks the enemies eyed one another from their "lagers," neither + willing to risk an attack. In the end Gustav Adolf tried, but even + his Finns could not take the impregnable heights the enemy held. At + last he went away with colors flying and bands playing, right under + the enemy's walls, in the hope of tempting him out. But he never + stirred. +</p> +<p> + When Wallenstein was sure he had gone, he burned his camp and + turned toward Saxony to punish the Elector for joining the Swedes. A + wail of anguish went up from that unhappy land and the King heard it + clear across the country. By forced marches he hurried to the rescue + of his ally, picking up Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar on the way. At + Naumburg the people crowded about him and sought to kiss or even to + touch his garments. The King looked sadly at them. "They put their + trust in me, poor weak mortal, as if I were the Almighty. It may be + that He will punish their folly soon upon the object of their + senseless idolatry." He had come to stay, but when he learned that + Wallenstein had sent Pappenheim away to the west, thus weakening his + army, and was going into winter quarters at Ltzen, near Leipzig, a + half-day's march from the memorable Breitenfeld, he broke camp at + once and hastened to attack him. Starting early, his army reached + Ltzen at nightfall on November 15, 1632. +</p> +<p> + Wallenstein believed the campaign was over for that year and the + Swedes in winter quarters, and was taken completely by surprise. Had + the King given battle that night, he would have wiped the enemy + out. Two things, in themselves of little account, delayed him: a + small brook that crossed his path, and the freshly plowed fields. + His men were tired after the long march and he decided to let them + rest. It was Wallenstein's chance. Overnight he posted his army + north of the highway that leads from Ltzen to Leipzig, dug deep the + ditches that enclosed it, and made breastworks of the dirt. Sunrise + found sheltered behind them twenty-seven thousand seasoned veterans + to whom Gustav Adolf could oppose but twenty thousand; but he had + more guns and they were better served. +</p> +<p> + As the day broke the Swedish army, drawn up in battle array, intoned + Luther's hymn, "A mighty fortress is our God," and cheered the King. + He wore a leathern doublet and a gray mantle. To the pleadings of + his officers that he put on armor he replied only, "God is my + armor." "To-day," he cried as he rode along the lines, "will end all + our hardships." He himself took command of the right wing, the + gallant Duke Bernhard of the left. As at Breitenfeld, the rallying + cry was, "God with us!" +</p> +<p> + The King hoped to crush his enemy utterly, and the whole line + attacked at once with great fury. From the start victory leaned + toward the Swedish army. Then suddenly in the wild tumult of battle + a heavy fog settled upon the field. What followed was all confusion. + No one knows the rights of it to this day. The King led his famous + yellow and blue regiments against the enemy's left. "The black + fellows there," he shouted, pointing to the Emperor's cuirassiers in + their black armor, "attack them!" Just then an adjutant reported + that his infantry was hard pressed. "Follow me," he commanded, and, + clapping spurs to his horse, set off at full speed for the + threatened quarter. In the fog he lost his way and ran into the + cuirassiers. His two attendants were shot down and a bullet crushed + the King's right arm. He tried to hide the fact that he was wounded, + but pain and loss of blood made him faint and he asked the Duke of + Lauenburg who rode with him to help him out of the crush. At that + moment a fresh troop of horsemen bore down upon them and their + leader, Moritz von Falkenberg, shot the King through the body with + the exultant cry, "You I have long sought!" The words had hardly + left his lips when he fell with a bullet through his head. +</p> +<p> + The King swayed in the saddle and lost the reins. "Save yourself," + he whispered to the Duke, "I am done for." The Duke put his arm + around him to support him, but the cuirassiers surged against them + and tore them apart. The King's horse was shot in the neck and threw + its rider. Awhile he hung by the stirrup and was dragged over the + trampled field. Then the horse shook itself free and ran through the + lines, spreading the tidings of the King's fall afar. +</p> +<p> + A German page, Leubelfing, a lad of eighteen, was alone with the + King. He sprang from his horse and tried to help him into the saddle + but had not the strength to do it. Gustav Adolf was stout and very + heavy. While he was trying to lift him some Croats rode up and + demanded the name of the wounded man. The page held his tongue, and + they ran him through. Gustav Adolf, to save him, said that he was + the King.<a name="12"></a><a href="#note-12"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> At that they shot him through the head, and showered + blows upon him. When the body was found in the night it was naked. + They had robbed and stripped him. +</p> +<p> + The King was dead. Through the Swedish ranks Duke Bernhard shouted + the tidings. "Who now cares to live? Forward, to avenge his death!" + With the blind fury of the Berserkers of old the Swedes cleared the + ditches, stormed the breastworks, and drove the foe in a panic + before them. The Duke's arm was broken by a bullet. He hardly knew + it. With his regiment he rode down the crew of one of the enemy's + batteries and swept on. In the midst of it all a cry resounded over + the plain that made the runaways halt and turn back. +</p> +<p> + "Pappenheim! Pappenheim is here!" +</p> +<p> + He had come with his Walloons in answer to the general's summons. + "Where is the King?" he asked, and they pointed to the Finnish + brigade. With a mighty crash the two hosts that had met so often + before came together. Wallenstein mustered his scattered forces and + the King's army was attacked from three sides at once. The yellow + brigade fell where it stood almost to the last man. The blue fared + little better. Slowly the Swedish infantry gave back. The battle + seemed lost. +</p> +<p> + But the tide turned once more. In the hottest fight Pappenheim + fell, pierced by three bullets. The "man of a hundred scars" died, + exulting that the King whom he hated had gone before. With his death + the Emperor's men lost heart. The Swedes charged again and again + with unabated fury. Night closed in with Wallenstein's centre still + unbroken; but he had lost all his guns. Under cover of the darkness + he made his escape. The King's army camped upon the battle-field. + The carnage had been fearful; nine thousand were slain. It was + Wallenstein's last fight. With the remnants of his army he retreated + to Bohemia, sick and sore, and spent his last days there plotting + against his master. He died by an assassin's hand. +</p> +<p> + The cathedrals of Vienna, Brussels, and Madrid rang with joyful Te + Deums at the news of the King's death. The Spanish capital + celebrated the "triumph" with twelve days of bull-fighting. Emperor + Ferdinand was better than his day; he wept at the sight of the + King's blood-stained jacket. The Protestant world trembled; its hope + and strength were gone. But the Swedish people, wiping away their + tears, resolved stoutly to carry on Gustav Adolf's work. The men he + had trained led his armies to victory on yet many a stricken field. + Peace came at length to Europe; the last religious war had been + fought and won. Freedom of worship, liberty of conscience, were + bought at the cost of the kingliest head that ever wore a crown. The + great ruler's life-work was done. +</p> +<p> + Gustav Adolf was in his thirty-eighth year when he fell. Of stature + he was tall and stout, a fair-haired, blue-eyed giant, stern in war, + gentle in the friendships of peace. He was a born ruler of men. + Though he was away fighting in foreign lands all the years of his + reign, he kept a firm grasp on the home affairs of his kingdom. One + traces his hand everywhere, ordering, shaping, finding ways, or + making them where there was none. The valuable mines of Sweden were + ill managed. The metal was exported in coarse pigs to Germany for + very little, worked up there, and resold to Sweden at the highest + price. He created a Board of Mines, established smelteries, and the + day came when, instead of going abroad for its munitions of war, + Sweden had for its customers half Europe. Like Christian of Denmark + with whom he disagreed, he encouraged industries and greatly + furthered trade and commerce. He built highways and canals, and he + did not forget the cause of instruction. Upon the university at + Upsala he bestowed his entire personal patrimony of three hundred + and thirteen farms as a free gift. His people honor him with cause + as the real founder of the Swedish system of education. +</p> +<p> + The master he was always. Sweden had, on one hand, a powerful, able + nobility; on the other, a strong, independent peasantry,—a combination + full of pitfalls for a weak ruler, but with equal promise of great + things under the master hand. His father had cowed the stubborn + nobles with the headsman's axe. Gustav Adolf drew them to him and + imbued them with his own spirit. He found them a contentious party + within the state; he left them its strongest props in the conduct of + public affairs. Nor was it always with persuasion he worked. His + reward for the unjust judge has been quoted. When the council failed + to send him supplies in Germany, pleading failure of crops as their + excuse, he wrote back: "You speak of the high prices of corn. + Probably they are high because those who have it want to profit by + the need of others." And he set a new chief over the finances. On + the other hand, he gave shape to the relations between king and + people. The Riksdag held its sessions, but the laws that ruled it + were so vague that it was no unusual thing for men who were not + members at all to attend and join in the debates. Gustav Adolf put + an abrupt end to "a state of things that exposed Sweden to the + contempt of the nations." As he ordered it, the initiative remained + with the crown; it was the right of the Riksdag to complain and + discuss; of the King to "choose the best" after hearing all sides. +</p> +<p> + As a young prince, Gustav Adolf fell deeply in love with Ebba Brahe, + the beautiful daughter of one of Sweden's most powerful noblemen. + The two had been play-mates and became lovers. But the old queen + frowned upon the match. He was the coming king, she was a subject, + and the queen managed, with the help of Oxenstjerna, who was + Gustav's best friend all through his life, to make him give up his + love. "Then I will never marry," he cried in a burst of tempestuous + grief. But when the queen had got Ebba Brahe safely married to one + of his father's famous generals, he wedded the lovely sister of the + Elector of Brandenburg. She adored her royal husband, but never took + kindly to Sweden, and the people did not like her. They clung to the + great king's early love, and to this day they linger before the + picture of the beautiful Ebba in the Stockholm castle when they come + from his grave in the Riddarholm church, while they pass the queen's + by with hardly a glance. It is recorded that Ebba made her husband a + good and dutiful wife. If her thoughts strayed at times to the old + days and what might have been, it is not strange. In one of those + moods she wrote on a window-pane in the castle: +</p> +<p class="block"> + I am happy in my lot,<br> + And thanks I give to God. +</p> +<p> + The queen-mother saw it and wrote under it her own version: +</p> +<p class="block"> + You wouldn't, but you must.<br> + 'Tis the lot of the dust. +</p> +<br> +<a name="note-12"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#12"> +<sup>1</sup></a> This is the story as the page told it. He lived two + days. +</p> + +<a name="2H_4_0010"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN +</h2> +<br> + +<p> + Of all the foolish wars that were ever waged, it would seem that the + one declared by Denmark against Sweden in 1657 had the least excuse. + A century before, the two countries had fought through eight bitter + years over the momentous question whether Denmark should carry in + her shield the three lions that stood for the three Scandinavian + kingdoms, the Swedish one having set up for itself in the + dissolution of the union between them, and at the end of the fight + they were where they had started: each of them kept the whole brood. + But this war was without even that excuse. Denmark was helplessly + impoverished. Her trade was ruined; the nobles were sucking the + marrow of the country. Of the freehold farms that had been its + strength scarce five thousand were left in the land. It could hardly + pay its way in days of peace. Its strongholds lay in ruins; it had + neither arms, ammunition, nor officers. On its roster of thirty + thousand men for the national defence were carried the dead and the + yet unborn, while the Swedish army of tried veterans had gone from + victory to victory under a warlike king. To cap the climax, + Copenhagen had been harassed by pestilence that had killed one-fifth + of its fifty thousand people. +</p> +<p> + So ill matched were they when a stubborn king forced a war that + could end only in disaster. When one of his councillors advised + against the folly, he caned him and sent him into exile. Yet out of + the fiery trial this king came a hero; his queen, whose pride and + wasteful vanity<a name="13"></a><a href="#note-13"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> had done its full share in bringing the country + to the verge of ruin, became the idol of the nation. In the hour of + its peril she grew to the stature of a great woman who shared danger + and hardship with her people and by her example put hope and courage + into their hearts. +</p> +<p> + Karl Gustav, the Swedish king, was campaigning in Poland, but as + soon as he could turn around he marched his army against Denmark, + scattered the forces that opposed him, and before news of his + advance had reached Copenhagen knocked at the gate of Denmark + demanding "speech of brother Frederik in good Swedish." A winter of + great severity had bridged the Baltic and the sounds of the island + kingdom. In two weeks he led his army, horse, foot, and guns, over + the frozen seas where hardly a wagon had dared cross before. Great + rifts yawned in their way, and whole companies were swallowed up; + his own sleigh sank in the deep, but nothing stopped him. Danish + emissaries came pleading for peace. He met them on the way to the + capital, surrounded by his Finnish horsemen, and gave scant ear to + their speeches while he drove on. Before the city he halted and + dictated a peace so humiliating that one of the Danish commissioners + exclaimed when he came to sign, "I wish I could not write." Perhaps + the same wish troubled the conqueror's ambitious dreams. The peace + was broken as swiftly as made. In five months he was back before + Frederik's capital with his whole army, while a Swedish fleet + anchored in the roadstead outside. "What difference does it make to + you," was the contemptuous taunt flung at the anxious envoys who + sought his camp, "whether the name of your king is Karl or Frederik + so long as you are safe?" He had come to make an end of Denmark. +</p> +<p> + Copenhagen was almost without defences. The old earth walls mounted + only six guns, with breastworks scarce knee-high. In places King + Karl could have driven his sleigh into the heart of the city at the + head of his army. But for the second time he hesitated when a swift + blow would have won all—and lost. Overnight the Danish nation awoke + to a fight for its life. King and people, till then strangers, in + that hour became one. Frederik the Third met the craven counsel that + he fly to Norway with the proud answer, "I will die in my nest, if + need be, and my wife with me." With a shout the burghers swore to + fight to the last man. The walls of the city rose as if by magic. + Nobles and mechanics, clergy and laborers, students, professors and + sailors worked side by side; high-born women wheeled barrows. Every + tree was cut down and made into palisades. The crops ripening in + the fields were gathered in haste and the cattle driven in. The city + had been provisioned for barely a week and garrisoned by four + hundred raw recruits. Sailors from the useless ships took out their + guns and mounted them in the redoubts. Peasants flocked in and were + armed with battle-axes, clubs, and boat-hooks when the supply of + muskets gave out. When Karl Gustav drew his lines tight he faced six + thousand determined men behind strong walls. The city stood in a + ring of blazing fires. Its defenders were burning down the houses + and woods beyond the moats to clear the way for their gunners. The + King watched the sight from his horse in silence. He knew what it + meant; he had fought in the Thirty Years' War: "Now, I vow, we shall + have fighting," was all he said. +</p> +<p> + It was not long in coming. On the second night the garrison made a + sortie and drove back the invaders, destroying their works with + great slaughter. Night after night, and sometimes in the broad day, + they returned to the charge, overwhelming the Swedes where least + expected, capturing their guns, their supplies, and their outposts. + Short of arms and ammunition, they took them in the enemy's lines. + In one of these raids Karl Gustav himself was all but made prisoner. + A horseman had him by the shoulder, but he wrenched himself loose + and spurred his horse into the sea where a boat from one of the + ships rescued him. The defence took on something of the fervor of + religious frenzy. Twice a day services were held on the walls of the + city; within, the men who could not bear arms, and the women, + barricaded the streets with stones and iron chains for the last + fight, were it to come. In his place on the wall every burgher had a + hundred brickbats or stones piled up for ammunition, and by night + when the enemy rained red-hot shot upon the city, he fought with a + club or spear in one hand, a torch in the other. +</p> +<p> + Eleven weeks the battle raged by night and by day. Then a Dutch + fleet forced its way through the blockade after a fight in which it + lost six ships and two admirals. It brought food, ammunition, and + troops. The joy in the city was great. All day the church bells were + rung, and the people hailed the Dutch as the saviours of the nation. + But when they, too, would thank God for the victory and asked for + the use of the University's hall, they were refused. They were + followers of Calvin and their heresies must not be preached in the + place set apart for teaching the doctrines of the "pure faith," said + the professors, who were Lutheran. It was the way of the day. The + Reformation had learned little from the bigotry of the Inquisition. + The Dutchmen had to be content with the court-house. But the siege + was not over. Another hard winter closed in with the enemy at the + door, burrowing hourly nearer the outworks, and food and fire-wood + grew scarcer day by day in the hard-pressed city. When things were + at the worst pass in February, the Swedes gathered their hosts for a + final assault. In the midnight hour they came on with white shirts + drawn over their uniforms to make it hard to tell them from the + snow. Karl Gustav himself led the storming party and at last was in + the way of "getting speech of brother Frederik," for the Danish King + was as good as his word. He had said that he would die in his nest, + and time and again he had to be sternly reasoned with to prevent him + from exposing himself overmuch. Where the danger was greatest he + was, and beside him ever the queen, all her frivolity gone and + forgotten. She who had danced at the court ftes and followed the + hounds on the chase as if the world had no other cares, became the + very incarnation of the spirit of the bitter and bloody struggle. + All through that winter the royal couple lived in a tent among their + men, and when the alarm was sounded they were first on foot to lead + them. Now that the hour had come, they were in the forefront of the + fight. +</p> +<p> + Where the famous pleasure garden Tivoli now is, the strength of the + enemy was massed against the redoubts at the western gate. The name + of "Storm Street" tells yet of the doings of that night. King Karl + had promised to give over the captured town to be sacked by his army + three days and nights, and like hungry wolves they swarmed to the + attack, a mob of sailors and workmen with scaling ladders in the + van. The moats they crossed in spite of the gaps that had been made + in the ice to stop them, but the garrison had poured water over the + walls that froze as it ran, until they were like slippery icebergs. + A bird could have found no foothold on them. Showers of rocks and + junk and clubs fell upon the laddermen. Three times Karl Gustav + hurled his columns against them; as often they were driven back, + broken and beaten. A few gained a foothold on the walls only to be + dashed down to death. The burghers fought for their lives and their + homes. Their women carried boiling pitch and poured it over the + breastworks, and when they had no more, dragged great beams and + rolled them down upon the ladders, sweeping them clear of the enemy. + In the hottest fight Gunde Rosenkrantz, one of the king's + councillors, trod on a fallen soldier and, looking into his face, + saw that it was his own son breathing his last. He bent over and + kissed him, and went on fighting. +</p> +<p> + In the early morning hour Karl Gustav gave the order to retreat. The + attack had failed. Many of his general officers were slain; nearly + half of his army was killed, disabled, or captured. Six Swedish + standards were taken by the Danes. The moats were filled with the + dead. The Swedes had "come in their shrouds." The guns of the city + thundered out a triple salute of triumph and the people sang Te + Deums on the walls. Their hardships were not over. Fifteen months + yet the city was invested and the home of daily privation; but their + greatest peril was past. Copenhagen was saved, and with it the + nation; the people had found itself and its king. That autumn a + second Swedish army under the veteran Stenbock was massacred in the + island of Fyen, and Karl Gustav exclaimed when the beaten general + brought him the news, "Since the devil took the sheep he might have + taken the buck too." He never got over it. Three months later he lay + dead, and the siege of Copenhagen was raised in May, 1660. It had + lasted twenty months. +</p> +<hr class="short"> +<p> + Seven score years and one passed, and the morning of Holy + Thursday<a name="14"></a><a href="#note-14"><small><sup>2</sup></small></a> saw a British fleet sailing slowly up the deep before + Copenhagen, the deck of every ship bristling with guns, their crews + at quarters, Lord Nelson's signal to "close for action" flying from + the top of the flag-ship <i>Elephant</i>. Between the fleet and the shore + lay a line of dismantled hulks on which men with steady eyes and + stout hearts were guarding Denmark's honor. Once more it had been + jeopardized by foolish counsel in high places. Danish statesmen had + trifled and temporized while England, facing all Europe alone in the + fight for her life, made ready to strike a decisive blow against the + Armed Neutrality that threatened her supremacy on the sea. Once more + the city had been caught unprepared, defenceless, and once more its + people rose as one man to meet the danger. But it was too late. + Outside, in the Sound, a fleet as great as that led by Nelson + waited, should he fail, to finish his work. That was to destroy the + Danish ships, if need be to bombard the city and so detach Denmark + from the coalition of England's foes. So she chose to consider such + as were not her declared friends. +</p> +<p> + Denmark had no fighting ships at home to pit against her. Her + sailors were away serving in the merchant marine. She had no + practised gunners, nothing but a huddle of dismantled vessels in her + navy-yard, most of them half-rotten hulks without masts. Those that + had standing rigging were even worse, for none of them had sails and + the falling spars in battle lumbered up the decks and menaced the + crew. But such as they were she made the most of them. Eighteen + hulks were hauled into the channel and moored head and stern. Where + they lay they could not be moved. Only the guns on one side were + therefore of use, while the enemy could turn and manoeuvre. They + were manned by farm lads, mechanics, students, enlisted in haste, + not one of whom had ever smelt powder, and these were matched + against Nelson's grim veterans. Even their commander, J. Olfert + Fischer, had not been under fire before that day, for Denmark had + had peace for eighty years. But his father had served as a + midshipman with Tordenskjold and the son did not flinch, outnumbered + though his force was, two to one, in men and guns. +</p> +<p> + The sun shone fair upon the blue waters as the great fleet of + thirty-odd fighting ships sailed up from the south. From the city's + walls and towers a mighty multitude watched it come, unmindful of + peril from shot and shell; the Danish line was not half a mile away. + In the churches whose bells were still ringing when the first gun + was fired from the block-ship <i>Prvestenen</i>, the old men and women + prayed through the long day, for there were few homes in Copenhagen + that did not have son, brother, or friend fighting out there. A + single gun answered the challenge, now two and three at once, then + broadside crashed upon broadside with deafening roar. When at length + all was quiet a tremendous report shook the city. It was the + flag-ship <i>Dannebrog</i> that blew up. She was on fire with only three + serviceable guns left when she struck her colors, but no ship of her + name might sail with an enemy's prize crew on board, and she did + not. +</p> +<p> + The story of that bloody day has been told many times. Briton and + Dane hoist their flags on April 2 with equal right, for never was + challenge met with more dauntless valor. Lord Nelson owned that of + all the hundred and five battles he had fought this was hottest. On + the <i>Monarch</i>, which for hours was under the most galling fire from + the Danish ships, two hundred and twenty of the crew were killed or + wounded. "There was not a single man standing," wrote a young + officer on board of her, "the whole way from the mainmast forward, a + district containing eight guns a side, some of which were run out + ready for firing, others lay dismounted, and others remained as they + were after recoiling.... I hastened down the fore ladder to the + lower deck and felt really relieved to find somebody alive." The + slaughter on the Danish ships was even greater. More than one-fifth + of their entire strength of a little over five thousand men were + slain or wounded. Of the eighteen hulls they lost thirteen, but only + one were the British able to take home with them. The rest were + literally shot to pieces and were burned where they lay. As one + after another was silenced, those yet alive on board spiked their + last guns, if indeed there were any left worth the trouble, threw + their powder overboard and made, for the shore. Twice the Danish + Admiral abandoned his burning ship, the last time taking up his post + in the island battery Tre Kroner. Each time one of the old hulls was + crushed, a Briton pushed into the hole made in the line and raked + the remaining ones fore and aft until their decks were like huge + shambles. The block-ship <i>Indfdsretten</i> bore the concentrated fire + of five frigates and two smaller vessels throughout most of the + battle. Her chief was killed. When the news reached head-quarters on + shore, Captain von Schrdersee, an old naval officer who had been + retired because of ill health, volunteered to take his place. He was + rowed out, but as he came over the side of the ship a cannon-ball + cut him in two. <i>Prvestenen</i>, as it was the first to fire a shot, + held out also to the last. One-fourth of her crew lay dead, and her + flag had been shot away three times when the decks threatened to + cave in and Captain Lassen spiked his last guns and left the wreck + to be burned. All through the fight she was the target of ninety + guns to which she could oppose only twenty-nine of her own sixty. +</p> +<p> + Nelson had promised Admiral Parker to finish the fight in an hour. + When the battle had lasted three, Parker signalled to him to stop. + Every school-boy knows the story of how Lord Nelson put the glass to + his blind eye and, remarking that he could see no signal, kept right + on. In the end he had to resort to stratagem to force a truce so + that he might disentangle some of his ships that were drifting into + great danger in the narrow channel. The ruse succeeded. Crown Prince + Frederik, moved by compassion for the wounded whom Nelson threatened + to burn with the captured hulks if firing did not stop, ordered + hostilities to cease without consulting the Admiral of the fleet, + and the battle was over. Denmark's honor was saved. "Nothing," wrote + our own Captain Mahan, "could place a nation's warlike fame higher + than did her great deeds that day." All else was lost; for "there + had come upon Denmark one of those days of judgment to which nations + are liable who neglect in time of peace to prepare for war." It had + been long coming, but it had overtaken her at last and found all the + bars down. +</p> +<p> + Alongside the <i>Dannebrog</i> throughout her fight with Nelson's + flag-ship, and edging ever closer in under the <i>Elephant's</i> side + until at last the marines were sent to man her rail and keep it away + with their muskets, lay a floating battery mounting twenty guns + under command of a beardless second lieutenant. The name of Peter + Willemoes will live as long as the Danish tongue is spoken. Barely + graduated from the Naval Academy, he was but eighteen when the need + of officers thrust the command of "Floating Battery No. 1" upon him. + So gallantly did he acquit himself that Nelson took notice of the + young man who, every time a broadside crashed into his ship or + overhead, swung his cocked hat and led his men in a lusty cheer. + When after the battle he met the Crown Prince on shore, the English + commander asked to be introduced to his youthful adversary. "You + ought to make an admiral of him," he said, and Prince Frederik + smiled: "If I were to make admirals of all my brave officers, I + should have no captains or lieutenants left." When the <i>Dannebrog</i> + drifted on the shoals, abandoned and burning, Willemoes cut his + cables and got away under cover of the heavy smoke. Having neither + sails nor oars, he was at the mercy of the tide, but luckily it + carried him to the north of the Tre Kroner battery, and he reached + port with forty-nine of his crew of one hundred and twenty-nine dead + or wounded. The people received him as a conqueror returning with + victory. His youth and splendid valor aroused the enthusiasm of the + whole country. Wherever he went crowds flocked to see him as the + hero of "Holy Thursday's Battle." Especially was he the young + people's idol. Sailor that he was, he was "the friend of all pretty + girls," sang the poet of that day. He danced and made merry with + them, but the one of them all on whom his heart was set, so runs the + story, would have none of him, and sent him away to foreign parts, a + saddened lover. +</p> +<p> + Meanwhile much praise had not made him vain. "I did my duty," he + wrote to his father, a minor government official in the city of + Odense where four years later Hans Christian Andersen was born on + the anniversary day of the battle, "and I have whole limbs which I + least expected. The Crown Prince and the Admiral have said that I + behaved well." He was to have one more opportunity of fighting his + country's enemy, and this time to the death. +</p> +<p> + In the summer of 1807, England was advised that by the treaty of + Tilsit Russia and Prussia had secretly joined Napoleon in his + purpose of finally crushing his mortal enemy by uniting all the + fleets of Europe against her, Denmark's too, by compulsion if + persuasion failed. Without warning a British fleet swooped down upon + the unsuspecting nation, busy with the pursuits of peace, bombarded + and burned Copenhagen when the Commandant refused to deliver the + ships into the hands of the robbers as a "pledge of peace," and + carried away ships, supplies, even the carpenters' tools in the + navy-yard. Nothing was spared. Seventy vessels, sixteen of them + ships of the line, fell into their hands, and supplies that filled + ninety-two transports beside. A single fighting ship was left to + Denmark of all her fleet,—the <i>Prince Christian Frederik</i> of + sixty-eight guns. She happened to be away in a Norwegian port and so + escaped. Willemoes was on leave serving in the Russian navy, but + hastened home when news came of the burning of Copenhagen, and found + a berth under Captain Jessen. +</p> +<p> + On March 22, 1808, the <i>Prince Christian</i>, so she was popularly + called, hunting a British frigate that was making Danish waters + insecure, met in the Kattegat the <i>Stately</i> and the <i>Nassau</i>, each + like herself of sixty-eight guns. The <i>Nassau</i> was the old + <i>Holsteen</i>, renamed,—the single prize the victors had carried home + from the battle of Copenhagen. Three British frigates were working + up to join them. The coast of Seeland was near, but wind and tide + cut off escape to the Sound. Captain Jessen ran his ship in close + under the shore so that at the last he might beach her, and awaited + the enemy there. +</p> +<p> + The sun had set, but the night was clear when the fight between the + three ships began. With one on either side, hardly a pistol-shot + away, Jessen returned shot for shot, giving as good as they sent, + and with such success that at the end of an hour and a half the + Britons dropped astern to make repairs. The <i>Prince Christian</i> + drifted, helpless, with rudder shot to pieces, half a wreck, rigging + all gone, and a number of her guns demolished. But when the enemy + returned he was hailed with a cheer and a broadside, and the fight + was on once more. This time they were three to one; one of the + British frigates of forty-four guns had come up and joined in. +</p> +<p> + When the hull of the <i>Prince Christian</i> was literally knocked to + pieces, and of her 576 men 69 lay dead and 137 wounded, including + the chief and all of his officers who were yet alive, Captain Jessen + determined as a last desperate chance to run one of his opponents + down and board her with what remained of his crew. But his officers + showed him that it was impossible; the ship could not be manoeuvred. + There was a momentary lull in the fire and out of the night came a + cry, "Strike your colors!" The Danish reply was a hurrah and a + volley from all the standing guns. Three broad-sides crashed into + the doomed ship in quick succession, and the battle was over. The + <i>Prince Christian</i> stood upon the shore, a wreck. +</p> +<p> + Young Willemoes was spared the grief of seeing the last Danish + man-of-war strike its flag. In the hottest of the fight, as he + jumped upon a gun the better to locate the enemy in the gloom, a + cannon-ball took off the top of his head. He fell into the arms of a + fellow officer with the muttered words, "Oh God! my head—my + country!" and was dead. In his report of the fight Captain Jessen + wrote against his name: "Fell in battle—honored as he is missed." + They made his grave on shore with the fallen sailors, and as the sea + washed up other bodies they were buried with them. +</p> +<p> + The British captured the wreck, but they could only set fire to it + after removing the wounded. In the night it blew up where it stood. + That was the end of the last ship of Denmark's proud navy. +</p> +<br> + +<a name="note-13"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#13"> +<sup>1</sup></a> It is of record that Queen Sofie Amalie used one-third + of the annual revenues of the country for her household. The menu of + a single "rustic dinner" of the court mentions 200 courses and + nearly as many kinds of preserves and dessert, served on gold, with + wines in corresponding abundance. +</p> + +<a name="note-14"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#14"> +<sup>2</sup></a> The battle of Copenhagen was fought April 2, 1801. +</p> +<a name="2H_4_0011"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE +</h2> +<br> +<p> + Jens Kofoed was the name of a trooper who served in the disastrous + war of Denmark against Sweden in Karl Gustav's day. He came from the + island of Bornholm in the Baltic, where he tilled a farm in days of + peace. When his troop went into winter quarters, he got a furlough + to go home to receive the new baby that was expected about + Christmas. Most of his comrades were going home for the holidays, + and their captain made no objection. The Swedish king was fighting + in far-off Poland, and no one dreamed that he would come over the + ice with his army in the depth of winter to reckon with Denmark. So + Jens Kofoed took ship with the promise that he would be back in two + weeks. But they were to be two long weeks. They did not hear of him + again for many moons, and then strange tidings came of his doings. + Single-handed he had bearded the Swedish lion, and downed it in a + fair fight—strangest of all, almost without bloodshed. +</p> +<p> + The winter storms blew hard, and it was Christmas eve when he made + land, but he came in time to receive, not one new heir, but twin + baby girls. Then there were six of them, counting Jens and his wife, + and a merry Christmas they all had together. On Twelfth Night the + little ones were christened, and then the trooper bethought himself + of his promise to get back soon. The storms had ceased, but worse + had befallen; the sea was frozen over as far as eye reached, and the + island was cut off from all communication with the outer world. + There was nothing for it but to wait. It proved the longest and + hardest winter any one then living could remember. Easter was at + hand before the ice broke up, and let a fishing smack slip over to + Ystad, on the mainland. It came back with news that set the whole + island wondering. Peace had been made, and Denmark had ceded all its + ancient provinces east of the resund to Karl Gustav. Ystad itself + and Skaane, the province in which Jens Kofoed had been campaigning, + were Swedish now, and so was Bornholm. All unknown to its people, + the island had changed hands in the game of war overnight, as it + were. A Swedish garrison was coming over presently to take charge. +</p> +<p> + When Jens Kofoed heard it, he sat down and thought things over. If + there was peace, his old captain had no use for him, that was + certain; but there might be need of him at home. What would happen + there, no one could tell. And there were the wife and children to + take care of. The upshot of it all was that he stayed. Only, to be + on the safe side, he got the Burgomaster and the Aldermen in his + home town, Hasle, to set it down in writing that he could not have + got back to his troop for all he might have tried. Kofoed, it will + be seen, was a man with a head on his shoulders, which was well, for + presently he had need of it. +</p> +<p> + There were no Danish soldiers in the island, only a peasant militia, + ill-armed and untaught in the ways of war; so no one thought of + resisting the change of masters. The people simply waited to see + what would happen. Along in May a company of one hundred and twenty + men with four guns landed, and took possession of Castle + Hammershus, on the north shore, the only stronghold on the island, + in the name of the Swedish king. Colonel Printzenskld, who had + command, summoned the islanders to a meeting, and told them that he + had come to be their governor. They were to obey him, and that was + all. The people listened and said nothing. +</p> +<p> + Perhaps if the new rulers had been wise, things might have kept on + so. The people would have tilled their farms, and paid their taxes, + and Jens Kofoed, with all his hot hatred of the enemy he had fought, + might never have been heard of outside his own island. But the + Swedish soldiers had been through the Thirty Years' War and plunder + had become their profession. They rioted in the towns, doubled the + taxes, put an embargo on trade and export, crushed the industries; + worse, they took the young men and sent them away to Karl Gustav's + wars in foreign lands. They left only the old men and the boys, and + these last they kept a watchful eye on for drafts in days to come. + When the conscripts hid in the woods, so as not to be torn from + their wives and sweethearts, they organized regular man-hunts as if + the quarry were wild beasts, and, indeed, the poor fellows were not + treated much better when caught. +</p> +<p> + All summer they did as they pleased; then came word that Karl Gustav + had broken the peace he made, and of the siege of Copenhagen. The + news made the people sit up and take notice. Their rightful + sovereign had ceded the island to the Swedish king, that was one + thing. But now that they were at war again, these strangers who + persecuted them were the public enemy. It was time something were + done. In Hasle there was a young parson with his heart in the right + place, Poul Anker by name. Jens Kofoed sat in his church; he had + been to the wars, and was fit to take command. Also, the two were + friends. Presently a web of conspiracy spread quietly through the + island, gripping priest and peasant, skipper and trader, alike. Its + purpose was to rout out the Swedes. The Hasle trooper and parson + were the leaders; but their secret was well kept. With the tidings + that the Dutch fleet had forced its way through to Copenhagen with + aid for the besieged, and had bottled the Swedish ships up in + Landskrona, came a letter purporting to be from King Frederik + himself, encouraging the people to rise. It was passed secretly + from hand to hand by the underground route, and found the island + ready for rebellion. +</p> +<p> + Governor Printzenskld had seen something brewing, but he was a + fearless man, and despised the "peasant mob." However, he sent to + Sweden for a troop of horsemen, the better to patrol the island and + watch the people. Early in December, 1658, just a year after Jens + Kofoed, the trooper, had set out for his home on furlough, the + governor went to Rnne, the chief city in the island, to start off a + ship for the reinforcements. The conspirators sought to waylay him + at Hasle, where he stopped to give warning that all who had not paid + the heavy war-tax would be sold out forthwith; but they were too + late. Master Poul and Jens Kofoed rode after him, expecting to meet + a band of their fellows on the way, but missed them. The parson + stayed behind then to lay the fuse to the mine, while Kofoed kept on + to town. By the time he got there he had been joined by four others, + Aage Svendsn, Klavs Nielsen, Jens Laurssn, and Niels Gummelse. + The last two were town officers. As soon as the report went around + Rnne that they had come, Burgomaster Klaus Kam went to them openly. +</p> +<p> + The governor had ridden to the house of the other burgomaster, Per + Larssn, who was not in the plot. His horse was tied outside and he + just sitting down to supper when Jens Kofoed and his band crowded + into the room, and took him prisoner. They would have killed him + there, but his host pleaded for his life. However, when they took + him out in the street, Printzenskld thought he saw a chance to + escape in the crowd and the darkness, and sprang for his horse. But + his great size made him an easy mark. He was shot through the head + as he ran. The man who shot him had loaded his pistol with a silver + button torn from his vest. That was sure death to any goblin on whom + neither lead nor steel would bite, and it killed the governor all + right. The place is marked to this day in the pavement of the main + street as the spot where fell the only tyrant who ever ruled the + island against the people's will. +</p> +<p> + The die was cast now, and there was need of haste. Under cover of + the night the little band rode through the island with the news, + ringing the church bells far and near to call the people to arms. + Many were up and waiting; Master Poul had roused them already. At + Hammershus the Swedish garrison heard the clamor, and wondered what + it meant. They found out when at sunrise an army of half the + population thundered on the castle gates summoning them to + surrender. Burgomaster Kam sat among them on the governor's horse, + wearing his uniform, and shouted to the officers in command that + unless they surrendered, he, the governor, would be killed, and his + head sent in to his wife in the castle. The frightened woman's tears + decided the day. The garrison surrendered, only to discover that + they had been tricked. Jens Kofoed took command in the castle. The + Swedish soldiers were set to doing chores for the farmers they had + so lately harassed. The ship that was to have fetched renforcements + from Sweden was sent to Denmark instead, with the heartening news. + They needed that kind there just then. +</p> +<p> + But the ex-trooper, now Commandant, knew that a day of reckoning was + coming, and kept a sharp lookout. When the hostile ship <i>Spes</i> was + reported steering in from the sea, the flag of Sweden flew from the + peak of Hammershus, and nothing on land betrayed that there had been + a change. As soon as she anchored, a boat went out with an + invitation from the governor to any officers who might be on board, + to come ashore and arrange for the landing of the troops. The + captain of the ship and the major in charge came, and were made + prisoners as soon as they had them where they could not be seen from + the ship. It blew up to a storm, and the <i>Spes</i> was obliged to put + to sea, but as soon as she returned boats were sent out to land the + soldiers. They sent only little skiffs that could hold not over + three or four, and as fast as they were landed they were overpowered + and bound. Half of the company had been thus disposed of when the + lieutenant on board grew suspicious, and sent word that without the + express orders of the major no more would come. But Jens Kofoed's + wit was equal to the emergency. The next boat brought an invitation + to the lieutenant to come in and have breakfast with the officers, + who would give him his orders there. He walked into the trap; but + when he also failed to return, his men refused to follow. He had + arranged to send them a sign, they said, that everything was all + right. If it did not come, they would sail away to Sweden for help. +</p> +<p> + It took some little persuasion to make the lieutenant tell about the + sign, but in the end Jens Kofoed got it. It turned out to be his + pocket-knife. When they saw that, the rest came, and were put under + lock and key with their fellows. +</p> +<p> + The ship was left. If that went back, all was lost. Happily both + captain and mate were prisoners ashore. Four boat-loads of + islanders, with arms carefully stowed under the seats, went out with + the mate of the <i>Spes</i>, who was given to understand that if he as + much as opened his mouth he would be a dead man. They boarded the + ship, taking the crew by surprise. By night the last enemy was + comfortably stowed, and the ship on her way to Rnne, where the + prisoners were locked in the court-house cellar, with shotted guns + guarding the door. Perhaps it was the cruelties practised by Swedish + troops in Denmark that preyed upon the mind of Jens Kofoed when he + sent the parson to prepare them for death then and there; but + better counsel prevailed. They were allowed to live. The whole war + cost only two lives, the governor's and that of a sentinel at the + castle, who refused to surrender. The mate of the <i>Spes</i> and two + of her crew contrived to escape after they had been taken to + Copenhagen, and from them Karl Gustav had the first tidings of how + he lost the island. +</p> +<p> + The captured ship sailed down to Copenhagen with greeting to King + Frederik that the people of Bornholm had chosen him and his heirs + forever to rule over them, on condition that their island was never + to be separated from the Danish Crown. The king in his delight + presented them with a fine silver cup, and made Jens Kofoed captain + of the island, beside giving him a handsome estate. He lived + thirty-three years after that, the patriarch of his people, and + raised a large family of children. Not a few of his descendants are + to-day living in the United States. In the home of one of them in + Brooklyn, New York, is treasured a silver drinking cup which King + Frederik gave to the ex-trooper; but it is not the one he sent back + with his deputation. That one is still in the island of Bornholm. +</p> +<a name="2H_4_0012"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + CARL LINN, KING OF THE FLOWERS +</h2> +<br> + +<p> + Years ago there grew on the Jonsboda farm in Smland, Sweden, a + linden tree that was known far and wide for its great age and size. + So beautiful and majestic was the tree, and so wide the reach of its + spreading branches, that all the countryside called it sacred. + Misfortune was sure to come if any one did it injury. So thought the + people. It was not strange, then, that the farmer's boys, when they + grew to be learned men and chose a name, should call themselves + after the linden. The peasant folk had no family names in those + days. Sven Carlsson was Sven, the son of Carl; and his son, if his + given name were John, would be John Svensson. So it had always been. + But when a man could make a name for himself out of the big + dictionary, that was his right. The daughter of the Jonsboda farmer + married; and her son played in the shadow of the old tree, and grew + so fond of it that when he went out to preach he also called himself + after it. Nils Ingemarsson was the name he received in baptism, and + to that he added Linnus, never dreaming that in doing it he handed + down the name and the fame of the friend of his play hours to all + coming days. But it was so; for Parson Nils' eldest son, Carl Linn, + or Linnus, became a great man who brought renown to his country and + his people by telling them and all the world more than any one had + ever known before about the trees and the flowers. The King knighted + him for his services to science, and the people of every land united + in acclaiming him the father of botany and the king of the flowers. +</p> +<p> + They were the first things he learned to love in his baby world. If + he was cross, they had but to lay him on the grass in the garden and + put a daisy in his hand, and he would croon happily over it for + hours. He was four years old when his father took him to a wedding + in the neighborhood. The men guests took a tramp over the farm, and + in the twilight they sat and rested in the meadow, where the spring + flowers grew. The minister began telling them stories about them; + how they all had their own names and what powers for good or ill + the apothecary found in the leaves and root of some of them. Carl's + father, though barely out of college, was a bright and gifted man. + One of his parishioners said once that they couldn't afford a whole + parson, and so they took a young one; but if that was the way of it, + the men of Stenbrohult made a better bargain than they knew. They + sat about listening to his talk, but no one listened more closely + than little Carl. After that he had thought for nothing else. In the + corner of the garden he had a small plot of his own, and into it he + planted all the wild flowers from the fields, and he asked many more + questions about them than his father could answer. One day he came + back with one whose name he had forgotten. The minister was busy + with his sermon. +</p> +<p> + "If you don't remember," he said impatiently, "I will never tell you + the name of another flower." The boy went away, his eyes wide with + terror at the threat; but after that he did not forget a single + name. +</p> +<p> + When he was big enough, they sent him to the Latin school at Wexi, + where the other boys nicknamed him "the little botanist." His + thoughts were outdoors when they should have been in the dry books, + and his teachers set him down as a dunce. They did not know that his + real study days were when, in vacation, he tramped the thirty miles + to his home. Every flower and every tree along the way was an old + friend, and he was glad to see them again. Once in a while he found + a book that told of plants, and then he was anything but a dunce. + But when his father, after Carl had been eight years in the school, + asked his teachers what they thought of him, they told him + flatly that he might make a good tailor or shoemaker, but a + minister—never; he was too stupid. +</p> +<p> + That was a blow, for the parson of Stenbrohult and his wife had set + their hearts on making a minister of Carl, and small wonder. His + mother was born in the parsonage, and her father and grandfather had + been shepherds of the parish all their lives. There were tears in + the good minister's eyes as he told Carl to pack up and get ready to + go back home; he had an errand at Dr. Rothman's, but would return + presently. The good doctor saw that his patient was heavy of heart + and asked him what was wrong. When he heard what Carl's teachers + had said, he flashed out: +</p> +<p> + "What! he not amount to anything? There is not one in the whole lot + who will go as far as he. A minister he won't be, that I'll allow, + but I shall make a doctor of him such as none of them ever saw. You + leave him here with me." And the parson did, comforted in spite of + himself. But Carl's mother could not get over it. It was that + garden, she declared, and when his younger brother as much as + squinted that way, she flew at him with a "You dare to touch it!" + and shook him. +</p> +<p> + When Dr. Rothman thought his pupil ready for the university, he sent + him up to Lund, and the head-master of the Latin School gave him the + letter he must bring, to be admitted. "Boys at school," he wrote in + it, "may be likened to young trees in orchard nurseries, where it + sometimes happens that here and there among the saplings there are + some that make little growth, or even appear as wild seedlings, + giving no promise; but when afterwards transplanted to the orchard, + make a start, branch out freely, and at last yield satisfactory + fruit." By good luck, though, Carl ran across an old teacher from + Wexi, one of the few who had believed in him and was glad to see + him. He took him to the Rector and introduced him with warm words of + commendation, and also found him lodgings under the roof of Dr. + Kilian Stobus. +</p> +<p> + Dr. Stobus was a physician of renown, but not good company. He was + one-eyed, sickly, lame in one foot, and a gloomy hypochondriac to + boot. Being unable to get around to his patients, he always had one + or two students to do the running for him and to learn as best they + might, in doing it. Carl found a young German installed there as the + doctor's right hand. He also found a library full of books on + botany, a veritable heaven for him. But the gate was shut against + him; the doctor had the key, and he saw nothing in the country lad + but a needy student of no account. Perhaps the Rector had passed the + head-master's letter along. However, love laughs at locksmiths, and + Carl Linnus was hopelessly in love with his flowers. He got on the + right side of the German by helping him over some hard stiles in the + <i>materia medica</i>. In return, his fellow student brought him books + out of the library when the doctor had gone to bed, and Carl sat up + studying the big tomes till early cockcrow. Before the house + stirred, the books were back on their shelves, the door locked, and + no one was the wiser. +</p> +<p> + No one except the doctor's old mother, whose room was across the + yard. She did not sleep well, and all night she saw the window + lighted in her neighbor's room. She told the doctor that Carl + Linnus fell asleep with the candle burning every single night, and + sometime he would upset it and they would all be burned in their + beds. The doctor nodded grimly; he knew the young scamps. No doubt + they both sat up playing cards till dawn; but he would teach them. + And the very next morning, at two o'clock, up he stumped on his lame + foot to Carl's room, in which there was light, sure enough, and went + in without knocking. +</p> +<p> + Carl was so deep in his work that he did not hear him at all, and + the doctor stole up unperceived and looked over his shoulder. There + lay his precious books, which he thought safely locked in the + library, spread out before him, and his pupil was taking notes and + copying drawings as if his life depended upon it. He gave a great + start when Dr. Stobus demanded what he was doing, but owned up + frankly, while the doctor frowned and turned over his notes, leaf by + leaf. +</p> +<p> + "Go to bed and sleep like other people," he said gruffly, yet + kindly, when he had heard it all, "and hereafter study in the + daytime;" and he not only gave him a key to his library, but took + him to his own table after that. Up till then Carl had merely been a + lodger in the house. +</p> +<p> + When he was at last on the home stretch, as it seemed, an accident + came near upsetting it all. He was stung by an adder on one of his + botanizing excursions, so far from home and help that the bite came + near proving fatal. However, Dr. Stobus' skill pulled him through, + and in after years he got square by labelling the serpent <i>furia + infernalis</i>—hell-fury—in his natural history. It was his way of + fighting back. All through his life he never wasted an hour on + controversy. He had no time, he said. But once when a rival made a + particularly nasty attack upon him, he named a new plant after him, + adding the descriptive adjective <i>detestabilis</i>—the detestable + so-and-so. On the whole, he had the best of it; for the names he + gave stuck. +</p> +<p> + It was during his vacation after the year at Lund that Linnus made + a catalogue of the plants in his father's garden at Stenbrohult that + shows us the country parson as no mean botanist himself; for in the + list, which is preserved in the Academy of Sciences at Stockholm, + are no less than two hundred and twenty-four kinds of plants. Among + them are six American plants that had found their way to Sweden. The + poison ivy is there, though what they wanted of that is hard to + tell, and the four-o'clock, the pokeweed, the milkweed, the pearly + everlasting, and the potato, which was then (1732) classed as a rare + plant. Not until twenty years later did they begin to grow it for + food in Sweden. +</p> +<p> + When Carl Linnus went up to Upsala University, his parents had so + far got over their disappointment at his deserting the ministry that + they gave him a little money to make a start with; but they let him + know that no more was coming—their pocket-book was empty. And + within the twelvemonth, for all his scrimping and saving, he was on + the point of starvation. He tells us himself that he depended on + chance for a meal and wore his fellow students' cast-off clothes. + His boots were without soles, and in his cheerless attic room he + patched them with birch bark and card board as well as he could. He + was now twenty-three years old, and it seemed as if he would have to + give up the study that gave him no bread; but still he clung to his + beloved flowers. They often made him forget the pangs of hunger. And + when the cloud was darkest the sun broke through. He was sitting in + the Botanical Garden sketching a plant, when Dean Celsius, a great + orientalist and theologian of his day, passed by. The evident + poverty of the young man, together with his deep absorption in his + work, arrested his attention; he sat down and talked with him. In + five minutes Carl had found a friend and the Dean a helper. He had + been commissioned to write a book on the plants of the Holy Land and + had collected a botanical library for the purpose, but the work + lagged. Here now was the one who could help set it going. That day + Linnus left his attic room and went to live in the Dean's house. + His days of starvation were over. +</p> +<p> + In the Dean's employ his organizing genius developed the marvellous + skill of the cataloguer that brought order out of the chaos of + groping and guessing and blundering in which the science of botany + had floundered up till then. Here and there in it all were flashes + of the truth, which Linnus laid hold of and pinned down with his + own knowledge to system and order. Thus the Frenchman, Sebastian + Vaillant, who had died a dozen years before, had suggested a + classification of flowers by their seed-bearing organs, the stamens + and pistils, instead of by their fruits, the number of their petals, + or even by their color, as had been the vague practice of the past. + Linnus seized upon this as the truer way and wrote a brief treatise + developing the idea, which so pleased Dr. Celsius that he got his + young friend a license to lecture publicly in the Botanical Garden. +</p> +<p> + The students flocked to hear him. His message was one that put life + and soul into the dry bones of a science that had only wearied them + before. The professor of botany himself sat in the front row and + hammered the floor with his cane in approval. But his very success + was the lecturer's undoing. Envy grew in place of the poverty he had + conquered. The instructor, Nils Rosn, was abroad taking his + doctor's degree. He came home to find his lectures deserted for the + irresponsible teachings of a mere undergraduate. He made grievous + complaint, and Linnus was silenced, to his great good luck. For so + his friend the professor, though he was unable to break the red tape + of the university, got him an appointment to go to Lapland on a + botanical mission. His enemies were only too glad to see him go. +</p> +<p> + Linnus travelled more than three thousand miles that summer through + a largely unknown country, enduring, he tells us, more hardships and + dangers than in all his subsequent travels. Again and again he + nearly lost his life in swollen mountain streams, for he would not + wait until danger from the spring freshets was over. Once he was + shot at as he was gathering plants on a hillside, but happily the + Finn who did it was not a good marksman. Fish and reindeer milk were + his food, a pestilent plague of flies his worst trouble. But, he + says in his account of the trip, which is as fascinating a report of + a scientific expedition as was ever penned, they were good for + something, after all, for the migrating birds fed on them. From his + camps on lake or river bank he saw the water covered far and near + with swarms of ducks and geese. The Laplander's larder was easily + stocked. +</p> +<p> + He came back from the dangers of the wild with a reputation that was + clinched by his book "The Flora of Lapland," to find the dragon of + professional jealousy rampant still at Upsala. His enemy, Rosn, + persuaded the senate of the university to adopt a rule that no + un-degreed man should lecture there to the prejudice of the + regularly appointed instructors. Tradition has it that Linnus flew + into a passion at that and drew upon Rosn, and there might have + been one regular less but for the interference of bystanders. It may + be true, though it is not like him. Men wore side-arms in those days + just as some people carry pistols in their hip-pockets to-day, and + with as little sense. At least they had the defence, such as it was, + that it was the fashion. However, it made an end of Linnus at + Upsala for the time. He sought a professorship at Lund, but another + got it. Then he led an expedition of his former students into the + Dalecarlia mountains and so he got to Falun, where Baron Reuterholm, + one of Sweden's copper magnates, was seeking a guide for his two + sons through the region where his mines were. +</p> +<p> + Linnus was not merely a botanist, but an all around expert in + natural science. He took charge of the boys and, when the trip was + ended, started a school at Falun, where he taught mineralogy. It had + been hit or miss with the miners up till then. There was neither + science nor system in their work. What every-day experience or the + test of fire had taught a prospector, in delving among the rocks, + was all there was of it. Linnus was getting things upon a + scientific basis, when he met and fell in love with the handsome + daughter of Dr. Morus. The young people would marry, but the + doctor, though he liked the mineralogist, would not hear of it till + he could support a wife. So he gave him three years in which to go + abroad and get a degree that would give him the right to practise + medicine anywhere in Sweden. The doctor's daughter gave him a + hundred dollars she had saved, and her promise to wait for him. +</p> +<p> + He went to Harderwyk in Holland and got his degree at the university + there on the strength of a thesis on the cause of malarial fever, + with the conclusions of which the learned doctors did not agree; + but they granted the diploma for the clever way in which he defended + it. On the way down he tarried in Hamburg long enough to give the + good burghers a severe jolt. They had a seven-headed serpent that + was one of the wonders of the town. The keen sight of the young + naturalist detected the fraud at once; the heads were weasels' + heads, covered with serpent's skin and cunningly sewed on the head + of the reptile. The shape of the jaws betrayed the trick. But the + Hamburgers were not grateful. The serpent was an asset. There was a + mortgage on it of ten thousand marks; now it was not worth a + hundred. They took it very ill, and Linnus found himself suddenly + so unpopular that he was glad to get out of town overnight. What + became of the serpent history does not record. +</p> +<p> + Linnus had carried more than his thesis on malarial fever with him + to Holland. At the bottom of his trunk were the manuscripts of two + books on botany which, he told his sweetheart on parting, would yet + make him famous. Probably she shook her head at that. Pills and + powders, and broken legs to set, were more to her way of thinking, + and her father's, too. If only he had patients, fame might take care + of itself. But now he put them both to shame. At Leyden he found + friends who brought out his first book, "Systema Natur," in which + he divides all nature into the three kingdoms known to every child + since. It was hardly more than a small pamphlet, but it laid the + foundation for his later fame. To the enlarged tenth edition + zologists point back to this day as to the bed-rock on which they + built their science. The first was quickly followed by another, and + yet another. Seven large volumes bearing his name had come from the + press before he set sail for home, a whole library in botany, and a + new botany at that, so simple and sensible that the world adopted it + at once. +</p> +<p> + Dr. Hermann Boerhaave was at that time the most famous physician in + Europe. He was also the greatest authority on systematic botany. + Great men flocked to his door, but the testy old Dutchman let them + wait until it suited him to receive them. Peter the Great had to + cool his heels in his waiting-room two long hours before his turn + came. Linnus he would not see at all—until he sent him a copy of + his book. Then he shut the door against all others and summoned the + author. The two walked through his garden, and the old doctor + pointed proudly to a tree which was very rare, he said, and not in + any of the books. Yes, said Linnus, it was in Vaillant's. The + doctor knew better; he had annotated Vaillant's botany himself, and + it was not there. Linnus insisted, and the doctor, in a temper, + went for the book to show him. But there it was; Linnus was right. + Nothing would do then but he must stay in Holland. Linnus demurred; + he could not afford it. But Dr. Boerhaave knew a way out of that. He + had for a patient Burgomaster Cliffort, a rich old hypochondriac + with whom he could do nothing because he would insist on living high + and taking too little exercise. When he came again he told him that + what he needed was a physician in daily attendance upon him, and + handed him over to Linnus. +</p> +<p> + "He will fix your diet and fix your garden, too," was his + prescription. The Burgomaster was a famous collector and had a + wondrous garden that was the apple of his eye. He took Linnus into + his house and gave him a ducat a day for writing his menu and + cataloguing his collection. That was where his books grew, and the + biggest and finest of them was "Hortus Cliffortianus," the account + of his patron's garden. +</p> +<p> + Armed with letters from Dr. Boerhaave and the Burgomaster, he took + one stronghold of professional prejudice after another. Not without + a siege. One of them refused flatly to surrender. That was Sir Hans + Sloan, the great English naturalist, to whom Dr. Boerhaave wrote in + a letter that is preserved in the British Museum: "Linnus, who + bears this letter, is alone worthy of seeing you, alone worthy of + being seen by you. He who shall see you both together shall see two + men whose like will scarce ever be found in the world." And the + doctor was no flatterer, as may be inferred from his treatment of + Peter the Great. But the aged baronet had had his own way so long, + and was so well pleased with it, that he would have nothing to do + with Linnus. At Oxford the learned professor Dillenius received him + with no better grace. "This," he said aside to a friend, "is the + young man who confounds all botany," and he took him rather + reluctantly into his garden. A plant that was new to him attracted + Linnus' attention and he asked to what family it belonged. +</p> +<p> + "That is more than you can tell me," was the curt answer. +</p> +<p> + "I can, if you will let me pluck a flower and examine it." +</p> +<p> + "Do, and be welcome," said the professor, and his visitor after a + brief glance at the flower told its species correctly. The professor + stared. +</p> +<p> + "Now," said Linnus, who had kept his eyes open, "what did you mean + by the crosses you had put all through my book?" He had seen it + lying on the professor's table, all marked up. +</p> +<p> + "They mark the errors you made," declared the other. +</p> +<p> + "Suppose we see about that," said the younger man and, taking the + book, led the way. They examined the flowers together, and when they + returned to the study all the pride had gone out of the professor. + He kept Linnus with him a month, never letting him out of his sight + and, when he left, implored him with tears to stay and share his + professorship; the pay was enough for both. +</p> +<p> + A letter that reached him from home on his return to Holland made + him realize with a start that he had overstayed his leave. It was + now in the fourth year since he had left Sweden. All the while he + had written to his sweetheart in the care of a friend who proved + false. He wanted her for himself and, when the three years had + passed, told her that Carl would never come back. Dr. Morus was of + the same mind, and had not a real friend of the absent lover turned + up in the nick of time Linnus would probably have stayed a Dutchman + to his death. Now, on the urgent message of his friend, he hastened + home, found his Elisabeth holding out yet, married her and settled + down in Stockholm to practise medicine. +</p> +<p> + Famous as he had become, he found the first stretch of the row at + home a hard one to hoe. His books brought him no income. Nobody + would employ him, "even for a sick servant," he complained. Envious + rivals assailed him and his botany, and there were days when herring + and black bread was fare not to be despised in Dr. Linnus' + household. But he kept pegging away and his luck changed. One + well-to-do patient brought another, and at last the queen herself + was opportunely seized with a bad cough. She saw one of her ladies + take a pill and asked what it was. Dr. Linnus' prescription for a + cold, she said, and it always cured her right up. So the doctor was + called to the castle and his cure worked there, too. Not long after + that he set down in his diary that "Now, no one can get well without + my help." +</p> +<p> + But he was not happy. "Once, I had flowers and no money," he said; + "now, I have money and no flowers." That they appointed him + professor of medicine at Upsala did not mend matters. His lectures + were popular and full of common sense. Diet and the simple life were + his hobbies, temperance in all things. He ever insisted that where + one man dies from drinking too much, ten die from overeating. + Children should eat four times a day, grown-ups twice, was his rule. + The foolish fashions and all luxury he abhorred. He himself in his + most famous years lived so plainly that some said he was miserly, + and his clothes were sometimes almost shabby. The happiest day of + his life came when he and his old enemy Rosn, whom he found filling + the chair of botany at the university, and with whom he made it up + soon after they became fellow members of the faculty, exchanged + chairs with the ready consent of the authorities. So, at last, + Linnus had attained the place he coveted above all others, and the + goal of his ambition was reached. +</p> +<p> + He lived at Upsala thirty-seven years and wrote many books. His + students idolized him. They came from all over the world. Twice a + week in summer, on Wednesday and Saturday, they sallied forth with + him to botanize in field and forest, and when they had collected + specimens all the long day they escorted the professor home through + the twilight streets with drums and trumpets and with flowers in + their hats. But however late they left him at his door, the earliest + dawn saw him up and at his work, for the older he grew the more + precious the hours that remained. In summer he was accustomed to + rise at three o'clock; in the dark winter days at six. +</p> +<p> + He found biology a chaos and left it a science. In his special field + of botany he was not, as some think, the first. He himself + catalogued fully a thousand books on his topic. But he brought order + into it; he took what was good and, rejecting the false, fashioned + it into a workable system. In the mere matter of nomenclature, his + way of calling plants, like men, by a family name and a given name + wrought a change hard to appreciate in our day. The common blue + grass of our lawns, for instance, he called, and we call it still, + <i>Poa pratensis</i>. Up to his time it had three names and one of them + was <i>Gramen pratense paniculatum majus latiore folio poa + theophrasti</i>. Dr. Rydberg, of the New York Botanical Gardens, said + aptly at the bicentenary of his birth, that it was as if instead of + calling a girl Grace Darling one were to say "Mr. Darling's + beautiful, slender, graceful, blue-eyed girl with long, golden curls + and rosy cheeks." +</p> +<p> + The binomial system revolutionized the science. What the lines of + longitude and latitude did for geography Linnus' genius did for + botany. And he did not let pride of achievement persuade him that he + had said the last word. He knew his system to be the best till some + one should find a better, and said so. The King gave him a noble + name and he was proud of it with reason—vain, some have said. But + vanity did not make the creature deny the Creator. He ever tried to + trace science to its author. When the people were frightened by the + "water turning to blood" and overzealous priests cried that it was a + sign of the wrath of God, he showed under the magnifying glass the + presence of innumerable little animals that gave the water its + reddish tinge, and thereby gave offence to some pious souls. But + over the door of his lecture room were the words in Latin: "Live + guiltless—God sees you!" and in his old age, seeing with prophetic + eye the day of bacteriology that dawned a hundred years after his + death, he thanked God that He had permitted him to "look into His + secret council room and workshop." +</p> +<p> + He was one of the clear thinkers of all days, uniting imagination + with sound sense. It was Linnus who discovered that plants sleep + like animals. The Pope ordered that his books, wherever they were + found in his dominions, should be burned as materialistic and + heretical; but Linnus lived to see a professor in botany at Rome + dismissed because he did not understand his system, and another put + in his place who did, and whose lectures followed his theories. When + he was seventy he was stricken with apoplexy, while lecturing to his + students, and the last year of his life was full of misery. + "Linnus limps," is one of the last entries in his diary, "can + hardly walk, speaks unintelligibly, and is scarce able to write." + Death came on January 10, 1778. +</p> +<p> + Under the white flashes of the northern lights in the desolate land + he explored in his youth, there grows in the shelter of the spruce + forests a flower which he found and loved beyond any other, the + <i>Linna borealis</i>, named after him. In some pictures we have of him, + he is seen holding a sprig of it in his hand. It is the twin flower + of the northern Pacific coast and of Labrador, indeed of the far + northern woods from Labrador all the way to Alaska, that lifts its + delicate, sweet-scented pink bells from the moss with gentle appeal, + "long overlooked, lowly, flowering early" despite cold and storm, + typical of the man himself. +</p> +<a name="2H_4_0013"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> + +<h2> + NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER +</h2> +<br> + +<p> + Hard by the town of Thorshavn, in the Fare islands, a little lad + sat one day carving his name on a rock. His rough-coated pony + cropped the tufts of stunted grass within call. The grim North Sea + beat upon the shore below. What thoughts of the great world without + it stirred in the boy he never told. He came of a people to whom it + called all through the ages with a summons that rarely went + unheeded. If he heard he gave no sign. Slowly and laboriously he + traced in the stone the letters N.R.F. When he had finished he + surveyed his work with a quiet smile. "There!" he said, "that is + done." +</p> +<p> + The years went by, and a distant city paused in its busy life to + hearken to bells tolling for one who lay dead. Kings and princes + walked behind his coffin and a whole people mourned. Yet in life he + had worn no purple. He was a plain, even a poor man. Upon his grave + they set a rock brought from the island in the North Sea, just like + the other that stands there yet, and in it they hewed the letters + N.R.F., for the man and the boy were one. And he who spoke there + said for all mankind that what he wrought was well done, for it was + done bravely and in love. +</p> +<p> + Niels Ryberg Finsen was born in 1860 in the Fare islands, where his + father was an official under the Danish Government. His family came + of the sturdy old Iceland stock that comes down to our time unshorn + of its strength from the day of the vikings, and back to Iceland his + people sent him to get his education in the Reykjavik Latin school, + after a brief stay in Denmark where his teachers failed to find the + key to the silent, reserved lad. There he lived the seven pregnant + years of boyhood and youth, from fourteen to twenty-one, and ever + after there was that about him that brought to mind the wild + fastnesses of that storm-swept land. Its mountains were not more + rugged than his belief in the right as he saw it. +</p> +<p> + The Reykjavik school had a good name, but school and pupils were + after their own kind. Conventional was hardly the word for it. Some + of the "boys" were twenty and over. Finsen loved to tell of how they + pursued the studies each liked best, paying scant attention to the + rest. In their chosen fields they often knew much more than the + curriculum called for, and were quite able to instruct the teacher; + the things they cared less about they helped one another out with, + so as to pass examinations. For mere proficiency in lessons they + cherished a sovereign contempt. To do anything by halves is not the + Iceland way, and it was not Niels Finsen's. All through his life he + was impatient with second-hand knowledge and borrowed thinking. So + he worked and played through the long winters of the North. In the + summer vacations he roamed the barren hills, helped herd the sheep, + and drank in the rough freedom of the land and its people. At + twenty-one the school gave him up to the university at Copenhagen. +</p> +<p> + Training for life there was not the heyday of youthful frolicking we + sometimes associate with college life in our day and land. Not until + he was thirty could he hang up his sheepskin as a physician. Yet the + students had their fun and their sports, and Finsen was seldom + missing where these went on. He was not an athlete because already + at twenty-three the crippling disease with which he battled twenty + years had got its grip on him, but all the more he was an outdoor + man. He sailed his boat, and practised with the rifle until he + became one of the best shots in Denmark. And it is recorded that he + got himself into at least one scrape at the university by his love + of freedom. +</p> +<p> + The country was torn up at that time by a struggle between people + and government over constitutional rights, and it had reached a + point where a country parish had refused to pay taxes illegally + assessed, as they claimed. It was their Boston tea-party. A + delegation of the "tax refusers" had come to Copenhagen, where the + political pot was boiling hot over the incident. The students were + enthusiastic, but the authorities of the university sternly + unsympathetic. The "Reds" were for giving a reception to the + visitors in Regentsen, the great dormitory where, as an Iceland + student, Finsen had free lodging; but it was certain that the Dean + would frown upon such a proposition. So they applied innocently for + permission to entertain some "friends from the country," and the + party was held in Finsen's room. Great was the scandal when the + opposition newspapers exploited the feasting of the tax refusers in + the sacred precincts of the university. To the end of his days + Finsen chuckled over the way they stole a march on the Dean. +</p> +<p> + For two or three years after getting his degree he taught in the + medical school as demonstrator, eking out his scant income by + tutoring students in anatomy. His sure hand and clear decision in + any situation marked him as a practitioner of power, and he had + thoughts once of devoting himself to the most delicate of all + surgery,—that of the eye. He was even then groping for his + life-work, without knowing it, for it was always light, light—the + source or avenue or effect of it—that held him. And presently his + work found him. +</p> +<p> + It has been said that Finsen was a sick man. A mysterious malady<a name="15"></a><a href="#note-15"><small><sup>1</sup></small></a> + with dropsical symptoms clutched him from the earliest days with + ever tightening grip, and all his manhood's life he was a great but + silent sufferer. Perhaps it was that; perhaps it was the bleak North + in which his young years had been set that turned him to the light + as the source of life and healing. He said it himself: "It was + because I needed it so much, I longed for it so." Probably it was + both. Add to them his unique power of turning the things of everyday + life to account in his scientific research, and one begins to + understand at once his success and his speedy popularity. He dealt + with the humble things of life, and got to the heart of things on + that road. And the people comprehended; the wise men fell in behind + him—sometimes a long way behind. +</p> +<p> + In the yard of Regentsen there grows a famous old linden tree. + Standing at his window one day and watching its young leaf sprout, + Finsen saw a cat sunning itself on the pavement. The shadow of the + house was just behind it and presently crept up on pussy who got up, + stretched herself, and moved into the sunlight. In a little while + the shadow overtook her there, and pussy moved once more. Finsen + watched the shadow rout her out again and again. It was clear that + the cat liked the sunlight. +</p> +<p> + A few days later he stood upon a bridge and saw a little squad of + insects sporting on the water. They drifted down happily with the + stream till they came within the shadow of the bridge, when they at + once began to work their way up a piece to get a fresh start for a + sunlight sail. Finsen knew just how they felt. His own room looked + north and was sunless; his work never prospered as it did when he + sat with a friend whose room was on the south side, where the sun + came in. It was warm and pleasant; but was that all? Was it only the + warmth that made the birds break into song when the sun came out on + a cloudy day, made the insects hum joyously and man himself walk + with a more springy step? The housekeeper who "sunned" the + bed-clothes and looked with suspicion on a dark room had something + else in mind; the sun "disinfected" the bedding. Finsen wanted to + know what it was in the sunlight that had this power, and how we + could borrow it and turn it to use. +</p> +<p> + The men of science had long before analyzed the sunlight. They had + broken it up into the rays of different color that together make + the white light we see. Any boy can do it with a prism, and in the + band or spectrum of red, yellow, green, blue, and violet that then + appears, he has before him the cipher that holds the key to the + secrets of the universe if we but knew how to read it aright; for + the sunlight is the physical source of all life and of all power. + The different colors represent rays with different wave-lengths; + that is, they vibrate with different speed and do different work. + The red vibrate only half as fast as the violet, at the other end of + the spectrum, and, roughly speaking, they are the heat carriers. The + blue and violet are cold by comparison. They are the force carriers. + They have power to cause chemical changes, hence are known as the + chemical or actinic rays. It is these the photographer shuts out of + his dark room, where he intrenches himself behind a ruby-colored + window. The chemical ray cannot pass that; if it did it would spoil + his plate. +</p> +<p> + This much was known, and it had been suggested more than once that + the "disinfecting" qualities of the sunlight might be due to the + chemical rays killing germs. Finsen, experimenting with earthworms, + earwigs, and butterflies, in a box covered with glass of the + different colors of the spectrum, noted first that the bugs that + naturally burrowed in darkness became uneasy in the blue light. As + fast as they were able, they got out of it and crawled into the red, + where they lay quiet and apparently content. When the glass covers + were changed they wandered about until they found the red light + again. The earwigs were the smartest. They developed an intelligent + grasp of the situation, and soon learned to make straight for the + red room. The butterflies, on the other hand, liked the red light + only to sleep in. It was made clear by many such experiments that + the chemical rays, and they only, had power to stimulate, to "stir + life." Finsen called it that himself. In the language of the + children, he was getting "warm." +</p> +<p> + That this power, like any other, had its perils, and that nature, if + not man, was awake to them, he proved by some simple experiments + with sunburn. He showed that the tan which boys so covet was the + defence the skin puts forth against the blue ray. The inflammation + of sunburn is succeeded by the brown pigmentation that henceforth + stands guard like the photographer's ruby window, protecting the + deeper layers of the skin. The black skin of the negro was no longer + a mystery. It is his protection against the fierce sunlight of the + tropics and the injurious effect of its chemical ray. +</p> +<p> + Searching the libraries in Copenhagen for the records of earlier + explorers in his field, and finding little enough there, Finsen came + across the report of an American army surgeon on a smallpox epidemic + in the South in the thirties of the last century. There were so many + sick in the fort that, every available room being filled, they had + to put some of the patients into the bomb-proof, to great + inconvenience all round, as it was entirely dark there. The doctor + noted incidentally that, as if to make up for it, the underground + patients got well sooner and escaped pitting. To him it was a + curious incident, nothing more. Upon Dr. Finsen, sitting there with + the seventy-five-year-old report from over the sea in his hand, it + burst with a flood of light: the patients got well without scarring + <i>because</i> they were in the dark. Red light or darkness, it was all + the same. The point was that the chemical rays that could cause + sunburn on men climbing glaciers, and had power to irritate the sick + skin, were barred out. Within a month he jolted the medical world by + announcing that smallpox patients treated under red light would + recover readily and without disfigurement. +</p> +<p> + The learned scoffed. There were some of them who had read of the + practice in the Middle Ages of smothering smallpox patients in red + blankets, giving them red wine to drink and hanging the room with + scarlet. Finsen had not heard of it, and was much interested. + Evidently they had been groping toward the truth. How they came upon + the idea is not the only mystery of that strange day, for they knew + nothing of actinic rays or sunlight analyzed. But Finsen calmly + invited the test, which was speedy in coming. +</p> +<p> + They had smallpox in Bergen, Norway, and there the matter was put to + the proof with entire success; later in Sweden and in Copenhagen. + The patients who were kept under the red light recovered rapidly, + though some of them were unvaccinated children, and bad cases. In no + instance was the most dangerous stage of the disease, the festering + stage, reached; the temperature did not rise again, and they all + came out unscarred. +</p> +<p> + Finsen pointed out that where other methods of treatment such as + painting the face with iodine or lunar caustic, or covering it with + a mask or with fat, had met with any success in the past, the same + principle was involved of protecting the skin from the light, though + the practitioner did not know it. He was doing the thing they did in + the middle ages, and calling them quacks. +</p> +<p> + It is strange but true that Dr. Finsen had never seen a smallpox + patient at that time, but he knew the nature of the disease, and + that the sufferer was affected by its eruption first and worst on + the face and hands—that is to say, on the parts of the body exposed + to the light—and he was as sure of his ground as was Leverrier + when, fifty years before, he bade his fellow astronomers look in a + particular spot of the heavens for an unknown planet that disturbed + the movements of Uranus. And they found the one we call Neptune + there. +</p> +<p> + Presently all the world knew that the first definite step had been + taken toward harnessing in the service of man the strange force in + the sunlight that had been the object of so much speculation and + conjecture. The next step followed naturally. In the published + account of his early experiments Finsen foreshadows it in the words, + "That the beginning has been made with the hurtful effects of this + force is odd enough, since without doubt its beneficial effect is + far greater." His clear head had already asked the question: if the + blue rays of the sun can penetrate deep enough into the skin to + cause injury, why should they not be made to do police duty there, + and catch and kill offending germs—in short, to heal? +</p> +<p> + Finsen had demonstrated the correctness of the theory that the + chemical rays have power to kill germs. But it happens that these + are the rays that possess the least penetration. How to make them go + deeper was the problem. By an experiment that is, in its simplicity, + wholly characteristic of the man, he demonstrated that the red blood + in the deeper layers of the skin was the obstacle. He placed a piece + of photographic paper behind the lobe of his wife's ears and + concentrated powerful blue rays on the other side. Five minutes of + exposure made no impression on the paper; it remained white. But + when he squeezed all the blood out of the lobe, by pressing it + between two pieces of glass, the paper was blackened in twenty + seconds. +</p> +<p> + That night Finsen knew that he had within his grasp that which would + make him a rich man if he so chose. He had only to construct + apparatus to condense the chemical rays and double their power many + times, and to apply his discovery in medical practice. Wealth and + fame would come quickly. He told the writer in his own simple way + how he talked it over with his wife. They were poor. Finsen's salary + as a teacher at the university was something like $1200 a year. He + was a sick man, and wealth would buy leisure and luxury. Children + were growing up about them who needed care. They talked it out + together, and resolutely turned their backs upon it all. Hand in + hand they faced the world with their sacrifice. What remained of + life to him was to be devoted to suffering mankind. That duty done, + what came they would meet together. Wealth never came, but fame in + full measure, and the love and gratitude of their fellow-men. +</p> +<p> + There is a loathsome disease called lupus, of which, happily, in + America with our bright skies we know little. Lupus is the Latin + word for wolf, and the ravenous ailment is fitly named, for it + attacks by preference the face, and gnaws at the features, at nose, + chin, or eye, with horrible, torturing persistence, killing slowly, + while the patient shuts himself out from the world praying daily for + death to end his misery. +</p> +<p> + In the north of Europe it is sadly common, and there had never been + any cure for it. Ointments, burning, surgery—they were all equally + useless. Once the wolf had buried its fangs in its victim, he was + doomed to inevitable death. The disease is, in fact, tuberculosis of + the skin, and is the most dreadful of all the forms in which the + white plague scourges mankind—was, until one day Finsen announced + to the world his second discovery, that lupus was cured by the + simple application of light. +</p> +<p> + It was not a conjecture, a theory, like the red-light treatment for + smallpox; it was a fact. For two years he had been sending people + away whole and happy who came to him in despair. The wolf was + slain, and by this silent sufferer whose modest establishment was + all contained within a couple of small shanties in a corner of the + city hospital grounds, at Copenhagen. +</p> +<p> + There was a pause of amazed incredulity. The scientific men did not + believe it. Three years later, when the physician in charge of + Finsen's clinic told at the medical congress in Paris of the results + obtained at the Light Institute, his story was still received with a + polite smile. The smile became astonishment when, at a sign from + him, the door opened and twelve healed lupus patients came in, each + carrying a photograph of himself as he was before he underwent the + treatment. Still the doctors could not grasp it. The thing was too + simple as matched against all their futile skill. +</p> +<p> + But the people did not doubt. There was a rush from all over Europe + to Copenhagen. Its streets became filled with men and women whose + faces were shrouded in heavy bandages, and it was easy to tell the + new-comers from those who had seen "the professor." They came in + gloom and misery; they went away carrying in their faces the + sunshine that gave them back their life. Finsen never tired, when + showing friends over his Institute, of pointing out the joyous + happiness of his patients. It was his reward. For not "science for + science's sake," or pride in his achievement, was his aim and + thought, but just the wish to do good where he could. Then, in three + more years, they awarded him the great Nobel prize for signal + service to humanity, and criticism was silenced. All the world + applauded. +</p> +<p> + "They gave it to me this year," said Finsen, with his sad little + smile, "because they knew that next year it would have been too + late." And he prophesied truly. He died nine months later. +</p> +<p> + All that is here set down seems simple enough. But it was achieved + with infinite toil and patience, by the most painstaking + experiments, many times repeated to make sure. In his method of + working Finsen was eminently conservative and thorough. Nothing + "happened" with him. There was ever behind his doings a definite + purpose for which he sought a way, and the higher the obstacles + piled up the more resolutely he set his teeth and kept right on. + "The thing is not in itself so difficult," he said, when making + ready for his war upon the wolf, "but the road is long and the + experiments many before we find the right way." +</p> +<p> + He took no new step before he had planted his foot firmly in the one + that went before; but once he knew where he stood, he did not + hesitate to question any scientific dogma that opposed him, always + in his own quiet way, backed by irrefutable facts. In a remarkable + degree he had the faculty of getting down through the husk to the + core of things, but he rejected nothing untried. The little thing in + hand, he ever insisted, if faithfully done might hold the key to the + whole problem; only let it be done <i>now</i> to get the matter settled. +</p> +<p> + Whatever his mind touched it made perfectly clear, if it was not so + already. As a teacher of anatomy he invented a dissecting knife that + was an improvement on those in use, and clamps for securing the + edges of a wound in an operation. As a rifle shot he made an + improved breech; as a physician, observing the progress of his own + disease, an effective blood powder for anmia. At the Light + Institute, which friends built for him, and the government endowed, + he devised the powerful electric lamps to which he turned in the + treatment of lupus, for the sun does not shine every day in + Copenhagen; and when it did not, the lenses that gathered the blue + rays and concentrated them upon the swollen faces were idle. And + gradually he increased their power, checking the heat rays that + would slip through and threatened to scorch the patient's skin, by + cunning devices of cooling streams trickling through the tubes and + the hollow lenses. +</p> +<p> + Nothing was patented; it was all given freely to the world. The + decision which he and his wife made together was made once for all. + When the great Nobel prize was given to him he turned it over to the + Light Institute, and was with difficulty persuaded to keep half of + it for himself only when friends raised an equal amount and + presented it to the Institute. +</p> +<p> + Finsen knew that his discoveries were but the first groping steps + upon a new road that stretched farther ahead than any man now living + can see. He was content to have broken the way. His faith was + unshaken in the ultimate treatment of the whole organism under + electric light that, by concentrating the chemical rays, would + impart to the body their life-giving power. He himself was beyond + their help. Daily he felt life slipping from him, but no word of + complaint passed his lips. He prescribed for himself a treatment + that, if anything, was worse than the disease. Only a man of iron + will could have carried it through. +</p> +<p> + A set of scales stood on the table before him, and for years he + weighed every mouthful of food he ate. He suffered tortures from + thirst because he would allow no fluid to pass his lips, on account + of his tendency to dropsy. Through it all he cheerfully kept up his + labors, rejoicing that he was allowed to do so much. His courage was + indomitable; his optimism under it all unwavering. His favorite + contention was that there is nothing in the world that is not good + for something, except war. That he hated, and his satire on the + militarism of Europe as its supreme folly was sharp and biting. +</p> +<p> + Of such quality was this extraordinary man of whom half the world + was talking while the fewest, even in his own home city, ever saw + him. Fewer still knew him well. It suited his temper and native + modesty, as it did the state of his bodily health, to keep himself + secluded. His motto was: "<i>bene vixit qui bene latuit</i>—he has + lived well who has kept himself well hidden"—and his contention was + always that in proportion as one could keep himself in the + background his cause prospered, if it was a good cause. When kings + and queens came visiting, he could not always keep in hiding, though + he often tried. On one of his days of extreme prostration the + dowager empress of Russia knocked vainly at his door. She pleaded so + hard to be allowed to see Dr. Finsen that they relented at last, and + she sat by his bed and wept in sympathy with his sufferings, while + he with his brave smile on lips that would twitch with pain did his + best to comfort her. She and Queen Alexandra, both daughters of King + Christian, carried the gospel of hope and healing from his study to + their own lands, and Light Institutes sprang up all over Europe. +</p> +<p> + In his own life he treated nearly nineteen hundred sufferers, + two-thirds of them lupus patients, and scarce a handful went from + his door unhelped. When his work was done he fell asleep with a + smile upon his lips, and the "universal judgment was one of + universal thanksgiving that he had lived." He was forty-three years + old. +</p> +<p> + When the news of his death reached the Rigsdag, the Danish + parliament, it voted his widow a pension such as had been given to + few Danes in any day. The king, his sons and daughters, and, as it + seemed, the whole people followed his body to the grave. The rock + from his native island marks the place where he lies. His work is + his imperishable monument. His epitaph he wrote himself in the + speech another read when the Nobel prize was awarded him, for he was + then too ill to speak. +</p> +<p> + "May the Light Institute grasp the obligation that comes with its + success, the obligation to maintain what I account the highest aim + in science—truth, faithful work, and sound criticism." +</p> +<br> +<a name="note-15"><!--Note--></a> +<p class="fnote"><a href="#15"> +<sup>1</sup></a> The autopsy which he himself ordered on his death-bed + as his last contribution to medical knowledge, showed it to be a + slow ossification of the membrane of the heart, involving the liver + and all the vital organs. He was "tapped" for dropsy more than + twenty times. +</p> + +<br> +<br> +<hr class="full" noshade> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 12481-h.txt or 12481-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/4/8/12481">https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/4/8/12481</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="https://gutenberg.org/license">https://gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">https://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="https://gutenberg.org/etext06/">https://gutenberg.org/etext06</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL">https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/old/12481-h/images/front.jpg b/old/12481-h/images/front.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7265e8f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481-h/images/front.jpg diff --git a/old/12481-h/images/music.png b/old/12481-h/images/music.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0600ad7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481-h/images/music.png diff --git a/old/12481.txt b/old/12481.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..533ecf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6171 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, Hero Tales of the Far North, by Jacob A. Riis + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: Hero Tales of the Far North + +Author: Jacob A. Riis + +Release Date: May 31, 2004 [eBook #12481] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: US-ASCII + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH*** + + +E-text prepared by Janet Kegg and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed +Proofreading Team + + + +HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH + +By + +JACOB A. RIIS + +AUTHOR OF "HOW THE OTHER HALF LIVES" +"THE MAKING OF AN AMERICAN" +"THE OLD TOWN," ETC. + +New York, 1921 + + + + + + +[Illustration: FREDERIKSBORG] + + + + + THIS BOOK OF MY DEAD HEROES + I DEDICATE TO MY LIVING HERO + + THEODORE ROOSEVELT + + MAY IT BE MANY YEARS BEFORE THE LAST CHAPTER + OF HIS SPLENDID WHOLESOME LIFE IS + WRITTEN IN THE PAGES OF OUR + COUNTRY'S HISTORY + + + + +FOREWORD + + +When a man knocks at Uncle Sam's gate, craving admission to his +house, we ask him how much money he brings, lest he become a +hindrance instead of a help. If now we were to ask what he brings, +not only in his pocket, but in his mind and in his heart, this +stranger, what ideals he owns, what company he kept in the country +he left that shaped his hopes and ambitions,--might it not, if the +answer were right, be a help to a better mutual understanding +between host and guest? For the _Mayflower_ did not hold all who in +this world have battled for freedom of home, of hope, and of +conscience. The struggle is bigger than that. Every land has its +George Washington, its Kosciusko, its William Tell, its Garibaldi, +its Kossuth, if there is but one that has a Joan d'Arc. What we want +to know of the man is: were its heroes his? + +This book is an attempt to ask and to answer that question for my +own people, in a very small and simple way, it is true, but perhaps +abler pens with more leisure than mine may follow the trail it has +blazed. I should like to see some Swede write of the heroes of his +noble, chivalrous people, whom lack of space has made me slight +here, though I count them with my own. I should like to hear the +epic of United Italy, of proud and freedom-loving Hungary, the +swan-song of unhappy Poland, chanted to young America again and +again, to help us all understand that we are kin in the things that +really count, and help us pull together as we must if we are to make +the most of our common country. + +These were my--our--heroes, then. Every lad of Northern blood, whose +heart is in the right place, loves them. And he need make no excuses +for any of them. Nor has he need of bartering them for the great of +his new home; they go very well together. It is partly for his sake +I have set their stories down here. All too quickly he lets go his +grip on them, on the new shore. Let him keep them and cherish them +with the memories of the motherland. The immigrant America wants and +needs is he who brings the best of the old home to the new, not he +who threw it overboard on the voyage. In the great melting-pot it +will tell its story for the good of us all. + +To those who wonder that I have left the Saga era of the North +untouched, I would say that I have preferred to deal here only with +downright historic figures. For valuable aid rendered in insuring +accuracy I am indebted to the services of Dr. P.A. Rydberg, Dr. J. +Emile Blomen, Gustaf V. Lindner, and Professor Joakim Reinhard. My +thanks are due likewise to many friends, Danes by birth like myself, +who have helped me with the illustrations. + +J. A. R. +RICHMOND HILL, +June, 1910. + + + + CONTENTS + + A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA + HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND + GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN + ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH + KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG + HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID + KING CHRISTIAN IV + GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING + KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN + THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE + CARL LINNE, KING OF THE FLOWERS + NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER + + + + + +A KNIGHT ERRANT OF THE SEA + + +The Eighteenth Century broke upon a noisy family quarrel in the +north of Europe. Charles the Twelfth of Sweden, the royal hotspur of +all history, and Frederik of Denmark had fallen out. Like their +people, they were first cousins, and therefore all the more bent on +settling the old question which was the better man. After the +fashion of the lion and the unicorn, they fought "all about the +town," and, indeed, about every town that came in their way, now +this and now that side having the best of it. On the sea, which was +the more important because neither Swedes nor Danes could reach +their fighting ground or keep up their armaments without command of +the waterways, the victory rested finally with the Danes. And this +was due almost wholly to one extraordinary figure, the like of which +is scarce to be found in the annals of warfare, Peder Tordenskjold. +Rising in ten brief years from the humblest place before the mast, +a half-grown lad, to the rank of admiral, ennobled by his King and +the idol of two nations, only to be assassinated on the "field of +honor" at thirty, he seems the very incarnation of the stormy times +of the Eleven Years' War, with which his sun rose and set; for the +year in which peace was made also saw his death. + +Peder Jansen Wessel was born on October 28, 1690, in the city of +Trondhjem, Norway, which country in those days was united with +Denmark under one king. His father was an alderman with eighteen +children. Peder was the tenth of twelve wild boys. It is related +that the father in sheer desperation once let make for him a pair of +leathern breeches which he would not be able to tear. But the lad, +not to be beaten so easily, sat on a grind-stone and had one of his +school-fellows turn it till the seat was worn thin, a piece of +bravado that probably cost him dear, for doubtless the exasperated +father's stick found the attenuated spot. + +Since he would have none of the school, his father had him +apprenticed out to a tailor with the injunction not to spare the +rod. But sitting cross-legged on a tailor's stool did not suit the +lad, and he took it out of his master by snowballing him thoroughly +one winter's day. Next a barber undertook to teach him his trade; +but Peder ran away and was drifting about the streets when the King +came to Norway. The boy saw the splendid uniforms and heard the +story of the beautiful capital by the Oeresund, with its palaces and +great fighting ships. When the King departed, he was missing, and +for a while there was peace in Trondhjem. + +Down in Copenhagen the homeless lad was found wandering about by the +King's chaplain, who, being himself a Norwegian, took him home and +made him a household page. But the boy's wanderings had led him to +the navy-yard, where he saw mid-shipmen of his own size at drill, +and he could think of nothing else. When he should have been waiting +at table he was down among the ships. For him there was ever but one +way to any goal, the straight cut, and at fifteen he wrote to the +King asking to be appointed a midshipman. "I am wearing away my life +as a servant," he wrote. "I want to give it, and my blood, to the +service of your Majesty, and I will serve you with all my might +while I live!" + +The navy had need of that kind of recruits, and the King saw to it +that he was apprenticed at once. And that was the beginning of his +strangely romantic career. + +Three years he sailed before the mast and learned seamanship, while +Charles was baiting the Muscovite and the North was resting on its +arms. Then came Pultava and the Swedish King's crushing defeat. The +storm-centre was transferred to the North again, and the war on the +sea opened with a splendid deed, fit to appeal to any ardent young +heart. At the battle in the Bay of Kjoege, the _Dannebrog_, commanded +by Ivar Hvitfeldt, caught fire, and by its position exposed the +Danish fleet to great danger. Hvitfeldt could do one of two things: +save his own life and his men's by letting his ship drift before the +wind and by his escape risking the rest of the fleet and losing the +battle, or stay where he was to meet certain death. He chose the +latter, anchored his vessel securely, and fought on until the ship +was burned down to the water's edge and blew up with him and his +five hundred men. Ivar Hvitfeldt's name is forever immortal in the +history of his country. A few years ago they raised the wreck of the +_Dannebrog_, fitly called after the Danish flag, and made of its +guns a monument that stands on Langelinie, the beautiful shore road +of Copenhagen. + +Fired by such deeds, young Wessel implored the King, before he had +yet worn out his first midshipman's jacket, to give him command of a +frigate. He compromised on a small privateer, the _Ormen_, but with +it he did such execution in Swedish waters and earned such renown as +a dauntless sailor and a bold scout whose information about the +enemy was always first and best, that before spring they gave him a +frigate with eighteen guns and the emphatic warning "not to engage +any enemy when he was not clearly the stronger." He immediately +brought in a Swedish cruiser, the _Alabama_ of those days, that had +been the terror of the sea. In a naval battle in the Baltic soon +after, he engaged with his little frigate two of the enemy's +line-of-battle ships that were trying to get away, and only when a +third came to help them did he retreat, so battered that he had to +seek port to make repairs. Accused of violating his orders, his +answer was prompt: "I promised your Majesty to do my best, and I +did." King Frederik IV, himself a young and spirited man, made him a +captain, jumping him over fifty odd older lieutenants, and gave him +leave to war on the enemy as he saw fit. + +The immediate result was that the Governor of Goeteborg, the enemy's +chief seaport in the North Sea, put a price on his head. Captain +Wessel heard of it and sent word into town that he was outside--to +come and take him; but to hurry, for time was short. While waiting +for a reply, he fell in with two Swedish men-of-war having in tow a +Danish prize. That was not to be borne, and though they together +mounted ninety-four guns to his eighteen, he fell upon them like a +thunderbolt. They beat him off, but he returned for their prize. +That time they nearly sank him with three broad-sides. However, he +ran for the Norwegian coast and saved his ship. In his report of +this affair he excuses himself for running away with the reflection +that allowing himself to be sunk "would not rightly have benefited +his Majesty's service." + +However, the opportunity came to him swiftly of "rightly +benefiting" the King's service. After the battle of Kolberger Heide, +that had gone against the Swedes, he found them beaching their ships +under cover of the night to prevent their falling into the hands of +the victors. Wessel halted them with the threat that every man Jack +in the fleet should be made to walk the plank, saved the ships, and +took their admiral prisoner to his chief. When others slept, Wessel +was abroad with his swift sailer. If wind and sea went against him, +he knew how to turn his mishap to account. Driven in under the +hostile shore once, he took the opportunity, as was his wont, to get +the lay of the land and of the enemy. He learned quickly that in the +harbor of Wesensoe, not far away, a Swedish cutter was lying with a +Danish prize. She carried eight guns and had a crew of thirty-six +men; but though he had at the moment only eighteen sailors in his +boat, he crept up the coast at once, slipped quietly in after +sundown, and took ship and prize with a rush, killing and throwing +overboard such as resisted. In Sweden mothers hushed their crying +children with his dreaded name; on the sea they came near to +thinking him a troll, so sudden and unexpected were his onsets. But +there was no witchcraft about it. He sailed swiftly because he was a +skilled sailor and because he missed no opportunity to have the +bottom of his ship scraped and greased. And when on board, pistol +and cutlass hung loose; for it was a time of war with a brave and +relentless foe. + +His reconnoitring expeditions he always headed himself, and +sometimes he went alone. Thus, when getting ready to take Marstrand, +a fortified seaport of great importance to Charles, he went ashore +disguised as a fisherman and peddled fish through the town, even in +the very castle itself, where he took notice, along with the +position of the guns and the strength of the garrison, of the fact +that the commandant had two pretty daughters. He was a sailor, sure +enough. Once when ashore on such an expedition, he was surprised by +a company of dragoons. His men escaped, but the dragoons cut off his +way to the shore. As they rode at him, reaching out for his sword, +he suddenly dashed among them, cut one down, and, diving through the +surf, swam out to the boat, his sword between his teeth. Their +bullets churned up the sea all about him, but he was not hit. He +seemed to bear a charmed life; in all his fights he was wounded but +once. That was in the attack on the strongly fortified port of +Stroemstad, in which he was repulsed with a loss of 96 killed and 246 +wounded, while the Swedish loss footed up over 1500, a fight which +led straight to the most astonishing chapter in his whole career, of +which more anon. + +All Denmark and Norway presently rang with the stories of his +exploits. They were always of the kind to appeal to the imagination, +for in truth he was a very knight errant of the sea who fought for +the love of it as well as of the flag, ardent patriot that he was. A +brave and chivalrous foe he loved next to a loyal friend. Cowardice +he loathed. Once when ordered to follow a retreating enemy with his +frigate _Hvide Oernen_ (the White Eagle) of thirty guns, he hugged +him so close that in the darkness he ran his ship into the great +Swedish man-of-war _Oesel_ of sixty-four guns. The chance was too +good to let pass. Seeing that the _Oesel's_ lower gun-ports were +closed, and reasoning from this that she had been struck in the +water-line and badly damaged, he was for boarding her at once, but +his men refused to follow him. In the delay the _Oesel_ backed away. +Captain Wessel gave chase, pelted her with shot, and called to her +captain, whose name was _Soestjerna_ (sea-star), to stop. + +"Running away from a frigate, are you? Shame on you, coward and +poltroon! Stay and fight like a man for your King and your flag!" + +Seeing him edge yet farther away, he shouted in utter exasperation, +"Your name shall be dog-star forever, not sea-star, if you don't +stay." + +"But all this," he wrote sadly to the King, "with much more which +was worse, had no effect." + +However, on his way back to join the fleet he ran across a convoy of +ten merchant vessels, guarded by three of the enemy's line-of-battle +ships. He made a feint at passing, but, suddenly turning, swooped +down upon the biggest trader, ran out his boats, made fast, and +towed it away from under the very noses of its protectors. It meant +prize-money for his men, but their captain did not forget their +craven conduct of the night, which had made him lose a bigger +prize, and with the money they got a sound flogging. + +The account of the duel between his first frigate, _Loevendahl's +Galley_, of eighteen guns, and a Swede of twenty-eight guns reads +like the doings of the old vikings, and indeed both commanders were +likely descended straight from those arch fighters. Wessel certainly +was. The other captain was an English officer, Bactman by name, who +was on the way to deliver his ship, that had been bought in England, +to the Swedes. They met in the North Sea and fell to fighting by +noon of one day. The afternoon of the next saw them at it yet. Twice +the crew of the Swedish frigate had thrown down their arms, refusing +to fight any more. Vainly the vessel had tried to get away; the Dane +hung to it like a leech. In the afternoon of the second day Wessel +was informed that his powder had given out. He had a boat sent out +with a herald, who presented to Captain Bactman his regrets that he +had to quit for lack of powder, but would he come aboard and shake +hands? + +The Briton declined. Meanwhile the ships had drifted close enough to +speak through the trumpet, and Captain Wessel shouted over from his +quarter-deck that "if he could lend him a little powder, they might +still go on." Captain Bactman smilingly shook his head, and then the +two drank to one another's health, each on his own quarter-deck, and +parted friends, while their crews manned what was left of the yards +and cheered each other wildly. + +Wessel's enemies, of whom he had many, especially among the +nobility, who looked upon him as a vulgar upstart, used this +incident to bring him before a court-martial. It was unpatriotic, +they declared, and they demanded that he be degraded and fined. His +defence, which with all the records of his career are in the Navy +Department at Copenhagen, was brief but to the point. It is summed +up in the retort to his accusers that "they themselves should be +rebuked, and severely, for failing to understand that an officer in +the King's service should be promoted instead of censured for doing +his plain duty," and that there was nothing in the articles of war +commanding him to treat an honorable foe otherwise than with honor. + +It must be admitted that he gave his critics no lack of cause. His +enterprises were often enough of a hair-raising kind, and he had +scant patience with censure. Thus once, when harassed by an +Admiralty order purposely issued to annoy him, he wrote back: "The +biggest fool can see that to obey would defeat all my plans. I shall +not do it. It may suit folk who love loafing about shore, but to an +honest man such talk is disgusting, let alone that the thing can't +be done." He was at that time twenty-six years old, and in charge of +the whole North Sea fleet. No wonder he had enemies. + +However, the King was his friend. He made him a nobleman, and gave +him the name Tordenskjold. It means "thunder shield." + +"Then, by the powers," he swore when he was told, "I shall thunder +in the ears of the Swedes so that the King shall hear of it!" And he +kept his word. + +Charles had determined to take Denmark with one fell blow. He had an +army assembled in Skaane to cross the sound, which was frozen over +solid. All was ready for the invasion in January 1716. The people +throughout Sweden had assembled in the churches to pray for the +success of the King's arms, and he was there himself to lead; but +in the early morning hours a strong east wind broke up the ice, and +the campaign ended before it was begun. Charles then turned on +Norway, and laid siege to the city of Frederikshald, which, with its +strong fort, Frederiksteen, was the key to that country. A Danish +fleet lay in the Skagerak, blocking his way of reenforcements by +sea. Tordenskjold, with his frigate, _Hvide Oernen_, and six smaller +ships (the frigate _Vindhunden_ of sixteen guns, and five vessels of +light draught, two of which were heavily armed), was doing scouting +duty for the Admiral when he learned that the entire Swedish fleet +of forty-four ships that was intended to aid in the operations +against Frederikshald lay in the harbor of Dynekilen waiting its +chance to slip out. It was so well shielded there that its commander +sent word to the King to rest easy; nothing could happen to him. He +would join him presently. + +Tordenskjold saw that if he could capture or destroy this fleet +Norway was saved; the siege must perforce be abandoned. And Norway +was his native land, which he loved with his whole fervid soul. But +no time was to be lost. He could not go back to ask for permission, +and one may shrewdly guess that he did not want to, for it would +certainly have been refused. He heard that the Swedish officers, +secure in their stronghold, were to attend a wedding on shore the +next day. His instructions from the Admiralty were: in an emergency +always to hold a council of war, and to abide by its decision. At +daybreak he ran his ship alongside _Vindhunden_, her companion +frigate, and called to the captain: + +"The Swedish officers are bidden to a wedding, and they have +forgotten us. What do you say--shall we go unasked?" + +Captain Grip was game. "Good enough!" he shouted back. "The wind is +fair, and we have all day. I am ready." + +That was the council of war and its decision. Tordenskjold gave the +signal to clear for action, and sailed in at the head of his handful +of ships. + +The inlet to the harbor of Dynekilen is narrow and crooked, winding +between reefs and rocky steeps quite two miles, and only in spots +more than four hundred feet wide. Halfway in was a strong battery. +Tordenskjold's fleet was received with a tremendous fire from all +the Swedish ships, from the battery, and from an army of four +thousand soldiers lying along shore. The Danish ships made no reply. +They sailed up grimly silent till they reached a place wide enough +to let them wear round, broadside on. Then their guns spoke. Three +hours the battle raged before the Swedish fire began to slacken. As +soon as he noticed it, Tordenskjold slipped into the inner harbor +under cover of the heavy pall of smoke, and before the Swedes +suspected their presence they found his ships alongside. Broadside +after broadside crashed into them, and in terror they fled, soldiers +and sailors alike. While they ran Tordenskjold swooped down upon the +half-way battery, seized it, and spiked its guns. The fight was won. + +But the heaviest part was left--the towing out of the captured +ships. All the afternoon Tordenskjold led the work in person, +pulling on ropes, cheering on his men. The Swedes, returning gamely +to the fight, showered them with bullets from shore. One of the +abandoned vessels caught fire. Lieutenant Toender, of Tordenskjold's +staff, a veteran with a wooden leg, boarded it just as the +quartermaster ran up yelling that the ship was full of powder and +was going to blow up. He tried to jump overboard, but the lieutenant +seized him by the collar and, stumping along, made him lead the way +to the magazine. A fuse had been laid to an open keg of powder, and +the fire was sputtering within an inch of it when Lieutenant Toender +plucked it out, smothered it between thumb and forefinger, and threw +it through the nearest port-hole. There were two hundred barrels of +powder in the ship. + +Tordenskjold had kept his word to the King. Not as much as a yawl of +the Dynekilen fleet was left to the enemy. He had sunk or burned +thirteen and captured thirty-one ships with his seven, and all the +piled-up munitions of war were in his hands. King Charles gave up +the siege, marched his army out of Norway, and the country was +saved. The victory cost Tordenskjold but nineteen killed and +fifty-seven wounded. On his own ship six men were killed and twenty +wounded. + +Of infinite variety was this sea-fighter. After a victory like this, +one hears of him in the next breath gratifying a passing whim of +the King, who wanted to know what the Swedish people thought of +their Government after Charles's long wars that are said to have +cost their country a million men. Tordenskjold overheard it, had +himself rowed across to Sweden, picked up there a wedding party, +bridegroom, minister, guests, and all, including the captain of the +shore watch who was among them, and returned in time for the palace +dinner with his catch. King Frederik was entertaining Czar Peter the +Great, who had been boasting of the unhesitating loyalty of his men +which his Danish host could not match. He now had the tables turned +upon him. It is recorded that the King sent the party back with +royal gifts for the bride. One would be glad to add that +Tordenskjold sent back, too, the silver pitcher and the parlor clock +his men took on their visit. But he didn't. They were still in +Copenhagen a hundred years later, and may be they are yet. It was +not like his usual gallantry toward the fair sex. But perhaps he +didn't know anything about it. + +Then we find him, after an unsuccessful attack on Goeteborg that cost +many lives, sending in his adjutant to congratulate the Swedish +commandant on their "gallant encounter" the day before, and +exchanging presents with him in token of mutual regard. And before +one can turn the page he is discovered swooping down upon Marstrand, +taking town and fleet anchored there, and the castle itself with its +whole garrison, all with two hundred men, swelled by stratagem into +an army of thousands. We are told that an officer sent out from the +castle to parley, issuing forth from a generous dinner, beheld the +besieging army drawn up in street after street, always two hundred +men around every corner, as he made his way through the town, +piloted by Tordenskjold himself, who was careful to take him the +longest way, while the men took the short cut to the next block. The +man returned home with the message that the town was full of them +and that resistance was useless. The ruse smacks of Peder Wessel's +boyish fight with a much bigger fellow who had beaten him once by +gripping his long hair, and so getting his head in chancery. But +Peder had taken notice. Next time he came to the encounter with hair +cut short and his whole head smeared with soft-soap, and that time +he won. + +The most extraordinary of all his adventures befell when, after the +attack on Stroemstad, he was hastening home to Copenhagen. Crossing +the Kattegat in a little smack that carried but two three-pound +guns, he was chased and overtaken by a Swedish frigate of sixteen +guns and a crew of sixty men. Tordenskjold had but twenty-one, and +eight of them were servants and non-combatants. They were dreadfully +frightened, and tradition has it that one of them wept when he saw +the Swede coming on. Her captain called upon him to surrender, but +the answer was flung back: + +"I am Tordenskjold! Come and take me, if you can." + +With that came a tiny broadside that did brisk execution on the +frigate. Tordenskjold had hauled both his guns over on the "fighting +side" of his vessel. There ensued a battle such as Homer would have +loved to sing. Both sides banged away for all they were worth. In +the midst of the din and smoke Tordenskjold used his musket with +cool skill; his servants loaded while he fired. At every shot a man +fell on the frigate. + +Word was brought that there was no more round shot. He bade them +twist up his pewter dinner service and fire that, which they did. +The Swede tried vainly to board. Tordenskjold manoeuvred his smack +with such skill that they could not hook on. Seeing this, Captain +Lind, commander of the frigate, called to him to desist from the +useless struggle; he would be honored to carry such a prisoner into +Goeteborg. Back came the taunt: + +"Neither you nor any other Swede shall ever carry me there!" And +with that he shot the captain down.[1] + +[Footnote 1: He was not mortally wounded, and Tordenskjold took him +prisoner later at the capture of Marstrand.] + +When his men saw him fall, they were seized with panic and made off +as quickly as they could, while Tordenskjold's crew, of whom only +fourteen were left, beat their drums and blew trumpets in frantic +defiance. Their captain was for following the Swede and boarding +her, but he couldn't. Sails, rigging, and masts were shot to pieces. +Perhaps the terror of the Swedes was increased by the sight of +Tordenskjold's tame bear making faces at them behind his master. It +went with him everywhere till that day, and came out of the fight +unscathed. But during the night the crew ran the vessel on the +Swedish shore, whence Tordenskjold himself reached Denmark in an +open boat which he had to keep bailing all night, for the boat was +shot full of holes, and though he and his companions stuffed their +spare clothing into them it leaked badly. The enemy got the smack, +after all, and the bear, which, being a Norwegian, proved so +untractable on Swedish soil that, sad to relate, in the end they cut +him up and ate him. + +King Charles, himself a knightly soul and an admirer of a gallant +enemy, gave orders to have all Tordenskjold's belongings sent back +to him, but he did not live to see the order carried out. He was +found dead in the rifle-pits before Frederiksteen on December 11, +1718, shot through the head. It was Tordenskjold himself who brought +the all-important news to King Frederik in the night of December +28,--they were not the days of telegraphs and fast steamers,--and +when the King, who had been roused out of bed to receive him, could +not trust his ears, he said with characteristic audacity, "I wish it +were as true that your Majesty had made me a schoutbynacht,"--the +rank next below admiral. And so he took the step next to the last on +the ladder of his ambition. + +Within seven months he took Marstrand. It is part of the record of +that astonishing performance that when the unhappy Commandant +hesitated as the hour of evacuation came, not sure that he had done +right in capitulating, Tordenskjold walked up to the fort with a +hundred men, half his force, banged on the gate, went in alone and +up to the Commandant's window, thundering out: + +"What are you waiting for? Don't you know time is up?" + +In terror and haste, Colonel Dankwardt moved his Hessians out, and +Tordenskjold marched his handful of men in. When he brought the King +the keys of Marstrand, Frederik made him an admiral. + +It was while blockading the port of Goeteborg in the last year of the +war that he met and made a friend of Lord Carteret, the English +Ambassador to Denmark, and fell in love with the picture of a young +Englishwoman, Miss Norris, a lady of great beauty and wealth, who, +Lord Carteret told him, was an ardent admirer of his. It was this +love which indirectly sent him to his death. Lord Carteret had given +him a picture of her, and as soon as peace was made he started for +England; but he never reached that country. The remnant of the +Swedish fleet lay in the roadstead at Goeteborg, under the guns of +the two forts, New and Old Elfsborg. While Tordenskjold was away at +Marstrand, the enemy sallied forth and snapped up seven of the +smaller vessels of his blockading fleet. The news made him furious. +He sent in, demanding them back at once, "or I will come after +them." He had already made one ineffectual attempt to take New +Elfsborg that cost him dear. In Goeteborg they knew the strength of +his fleet and laughed at his threat. But it was never safe to laugh +at Tordenskjold. The first dark night he stole in with ten armed +boats, seized the shore batteries of the old fort, and spiked their +guns before a shot was fired. The rising moon saw his men in +possession of the ships lying at anchor. With their blue-lined coats +turned inside out so that they might pass for Swedish uniforms, they +surprised the watch in the guard-house and made them all prisoners. +Now that there was no longer reason for caution, they raised a +racket that woke the sleeping town up in a fright. The commander of +the other fort sent out a boat to ascertain the cause. It met the +Admiral's and challenged it, "Who goes there?" + +"Tordenskjold," was the reply, "come to teach you to keep awake." + +It proved impossible to warp the ships out. Only one of the seven +lost ones was recovered; all the rest were set on fire. By the light +of the mighty bonfire Tordenskjold rowed out with his men, hauling +the recovered ship right under the guns of the forts, the Danish +flag flying at the bow of his boat. He had not lost a single man. A +cannon-ball swept away all the oars on one side of his boat, but no +one was hurt. + +At Marstrand they had been up all night listening to the cannonading +and the crash upon crash as the big ships blew up. They knew that +Tordenskjold was abroad with his men. In the morning, when they were +all in church, he walked in and sat down by his chief, the old +Admiral Judicher, who was a slow-going, cautious man. He whispered +anxiously, "What news?" but Tordenskjold only shrugged his shoulders +with unmoved face. It is not likely that either the old Admiral or +the congregation heard much of that sermon, if indeed they heard any +of it. But when it was over, they saw from the walls of the town +the Danish ships at anchor and heard the story of the last of +Tordenskjold's exploits. It fitly capped the climax of his life. +Sweden's entire force on the North Sea, with the exception of five +small galleys, had either been captured, sunk, or burned by him. + +The King would not let Tordenskjold go when peace was made, but he +had his way in the end. To his undoing he consented to take with him +abroad a young scalawag, the son of his landlord, who had more money +than brains. In Hamburg the young man fell in with a gambler, a +Swedish colonel by name of Stahl, who fleeced him of all he had and +much more besides. When Tordenskjold heard of it and met the Colonel +in another man's house, he caned him soundly and threw him out in +the street. For this he was challenged, but refused to fight a +gambler. + +"Friends," particularly one Colonel Muennichhausen, who volunteered +to be his second, talked him over, and also persuaded him to give up +the pistol, with which he was an expert. The duel was fought at the +Village of Gledinge, over the line from Hanover, on the morning of +November 12, 1720. Tordenskjold was roused from sleep at five, and, +after saying his prayers, a duty he never on any account omitted, he +started for the place appointed. His old body-servant vainly pleaded +with his master to take his stout blade instead of the flimsy parade +sword the Admiral carried. Muennichhausen advised against it; it +would be too heavy, he said. Stahl's weapon was a long fighting +rapier, and to this the treacherous second made no objection. Almost +at the first thrust he ran the Admiral through. The seconds held his +servant while Stahl jumped on his horse and galloped away. +Tordenskjold breathed out his dauntless soul in the arms of his +faithful servant and friend. + +His body lies in a black marble sarcophagus in the "Navy Church" at +Copenhagen. The Danish and Norwegian peoples have never ceased to +mourn their idol. He was a sailor with a sailor's faults. But he +loved truth, honor, and courage in foe and friend alike. Like many +seafaring men, he was deeply religious, with the unquestioning faith +of a child. There is a letter in existence written by him to his +father when the latter was on his death-bed that bears witness to +this. He thanks him with filial affection for all his care, and says +naively that he would rather have his prayers than fall heir to +twenty thousand daler. His pictures show a stocky, broad-shouldered +youth with frank blue eyes, full lips, and an eagle nose. His deep, +sonorous voice used to be heard, in his midshipman days, above the +whole congregation in the Navy Church. In after years it called +louder still to Denmark's foes. When things were at their worst in +storm or battle, he was wont to shout to his men, "Hi, _now_ we are +having a fine time!" and his battle-cry has passed into the +language. By it, in desperate straits demanding stout hearts, one +may know the Dane after his own heart, the real Dane, the world +over. Among his own Tordenskjold is still and always will be "the +Admiral of Norway's fleet." + + + + + +HANS EGEDE, THE APOSTLE TO GREENLAND + + +When in the fall of 1909 the statement was flashed around the world +that the North Pole had at last been reached, a name long unfamiliar +ran from mouth to mouth with that of the man who claimed to be its +discoverer. Dr. Cook was coming to Copenhagen, the daily despatches +read, on the Danish Government steamer _Hans Egede_. A shipload of +reporters kept an anxious lookout from the Skaw for the vessel so +suddenly become famous, but few who through their telescopes made +out the name at last upon the prow of the ship gave it another +thought in the eager welcome to the man it brought back from the +perils of the Farthest North. Yet the name of that vessel stood for +something of more real account to humanity than the attainment of a +goal that had been the mystery of the ages. No such welcome awaited +the explorer Hans Egede, who a hundred and seventy-two years before +sailed homeward over that very route, a broken, saddened man, and +all he brought was the ashes of his best-beloved that they might +rest in her native soil. No gold medal was struck for him; the +people did not greet him with loud acclaim. The King and his court +paid scant attention to him, and he was allowed to live his last +days in poverty. Yet a greater honor is his than ever fell to a +discoverer: the simple natives of Greenland long reckoned the time +from his coming among them. To them he was in their ice-bound home +what Father Damien was to the stricken lepers in the South seas, and +Dr. Grenfell is to the fishermen of Labrador. + +Hans Poulsen Egede, the apostle of Greenland, was a Norwegian of +Danish descent. He was born in the Northlands, in the parish of +Trondenaes, on January 31, 1686. His grandfather and his father +before him had been clergymen in Denmark, the former in the town of +West Egede, whence the name. Graduated in a single year from the +University of Copenhagen, "at which," his teachers bore witness, "no +one need wonder who knows the man," he became at twenty-two pastor +of a parish up in the Lofoden Islands, where the fabled maelstrom +churns. Eleven years he preached to the poor fisherfolk on Sunday, +and on week-days helped his parishioners rebuild the old church. +When it was finished and the bishop came to consecrate it, he chided +Egede because the altar was too fine; it must have cost more than +they could afford. + +"It did not cost anything," was his reply. "I made it myself." + +No wonder his fame went far. When the church bell of Vaagen called, +boats carrying Sunday-clad fishermen were seen making for the island +from every point of the compass. Great crowds flocked to his church; +great enough to arouse the jealousy of neighboring preachers who +were not so popular, and they made it so unpleasant that his wife at +last tired of it. They little dreamed that they were industriously +paving the way for his greater work and for his undying fame. + +The sea that surges against that rockbound coast ever called its +people out in quest of adventure. Some who went nine hundred years +ago found a land in the far Northwest barred by great icebergs; but +once inside the barrier, they saw deep fjords like their own at +home, to which the mountains sloped down, covered with a wealth of +lovely flowers. On green meadows antlered deer were grazing, the +salmon leaped in brawling brooks, and birds called for their mates +in the barrens. Above it all towered snow-covered peaks. They saw +only the summer day; they did not know how brief it was, and how +long the winter night, and they called the country Greenland. They +built their homes there, and other settlers came. They were hardy +men, bred in a harsh climate, and they stayed. They built churches +and had their priests and bishops, for Norway was Christian by that +time. And they prospered after their fashion. They even paid Peter's +Pence to Rome. There is a record that their contribution, being in +kind, namely, walrus teeth, was sold in 1386 by the Pope's agent to +a merchant in Flanders for twelve livres, fourteen sous. They kept +up communication with their kin across the seas until the Black +Death swept through the Old World in the Fourteenth Century; Norway, +when it was gone, was like a vast tomb. Two-thirds of its people lay +dead. Those who were left had enough to do at home; and Greenland +was forgotten. + +The seasons passed, and the savages, with whom the colonists had +carried on a running feud, came out of the frozen North and +overwhelmed them. Dim traditions that were whispered among the +natives for centuries told of that last fight. It was the Ragnarok +of the Northmen. Not one was left to tell the tale. Long years +after, when fishing vessels landed on that desolate coast, they +found a strange and hostile people in possession. No one had ever +dared to settle there since. + +This last Egede knew, but little more. He believed that there were +still settlements on the inaccessible east coast of Greenland where +descendants of the old Northmen lived, cut off from all the world, +sunk into ignorance and godlessness,--men and women who had once +known the true light,--and his heart yearned to go to their rescue. +Waking and dreaming, he thought of nothing else. The lamp in his +quiet study shone out over the sea at night when his people were +long asleep. Their pastor was poring over old manuscripts and the +logs of whalers that had touched upon Greenland. From Bergen he +gathered the testimony of many sailors. None of them had ever seen +traces of, or heard of, the old Northmen. + +To his bishop went Egede with his burden. Ever it rang in his ears: +"God has chosen you to bring them back to the light." The bishop +listened and was interested. Yes, that was the land from which +seafarers in a former king's time had brought home golden sand. +There might be more. It couldn't be far from Cuba and Hispaniola, +those golden coasts. If one were to go equipped for trading, no +doubt a fine stroke of business might be done. Thus the Right +Reverend Bishop Krog of Trondhjem, and Egede went home, +disheartened. + +At home his friends scouted him, said he was going mad to think of +giving up his living on such a fool's chase. His wife implored him +to stay, and with a heavy heart Egede was about to abandon his +purpose when his jealous neighbor, whose parishioners had been going +to hear Egede preach, stirred up such trouble that his wife was glad +to go. She even urged him to, and he took her at her word. They +moved to Bergen, and from that port they sailed on May 3, 1721, on +the ship _Haabet_ (the Hope), with another and smaller vessel as +convoy, forty-six souls all told, bound for the unknown North. The +Danish King had made Egede missionary to the Greenlanders on a +salary of three hundred daler a year, the same amount which Egede +himself contributed of his scant store toward the equipment. The +bishop's plan had prevailed; the mission was to be carried by the +expected commerce, and upon that was to be built a permanent +colonization. + +Early in June they sighted land, but the way to it was barred by +impassable ice. A whole month they sailed to and fro, trying vainly +for a passage. At last they found an opening and slipped through, +only to find themselves shut in, with towering icebergs closing +around them. As they looked fearfully out over the rail, their +convoy signalled that she had struck, and the captain of _Haabet_ +cried out that all was lost. In the tumult of terror that succeeded, +Egede alone remained calm. Praying for succor where there seemed to +be none, he remembered the One Hundred and Seventh Psalm: "He +brought them out of darkness and the shadow of death, and brake +their bands in sunder." And the morning dawned clear, the ice was +moving and their prison widening. On July 3, _Haabet_ cleared the +last ice-reef, and the shore lay open before them. + +The Eskimos came out in their kayaks, and the boldest climbed aboard +the ship. In one boat sat an old man who refused the invitation. He +paddled about the vessel, mumbling darkly in a strange tongue. He +was an Angekok, one of the native medicine-men of whom presently +Egede was to know much more. As he stood upon the deck and looked at +these strangers for whose salvation he had risked all, his heart +fell. They were not the stalwart Northmen he had looked for, and +their jargon had no homelike sound. But a great wave of pity swept +over him, and the prayer that rose to his lips was for strength to +be their friend and their guide to the light. + +Not at once did the way open for the coveted friendship with the +Eskimos. While they thought the strangers came only to trade they +were hospitable enough, but when they saw them build, clearly intent +on staying, they made signs that they had better go. They pointed to +the sun that sank lower toward the horizon every day, and shivered +as if from extreme cold, and they showed their visitors the +icebergs and the snow, making them understand that it would cover +the house by and by. When it all availed nothing and the winter came +on, they retired into their huts and cut the acquaintance of the +white men. They were afraid that they had come to take revenge for +the harm done their people in the olden time. There was nothing for +it, then, but that Egede must go to them, and this he did. + +They seized their spears when they saw him coming, but he made signs +that he was their friend. When he had nothing else to give them, he +let them cut the buttons from his coat. Throughout the fifteen years +he spent in Greenland Egede never wore furs, as did the natives. The +black robe he thought more seemly for a clergyman, to his great +discomfort. He tells in his diary and in his letters that often when +he returned from his winter travels it could stand alone when he +took it off, being frozen stiff. After a while he got upon +neighborly terms with the Eskimos; but, if anything, the discomfort +was greater. They housed him at night in their huts, where the filth +and the stench were unendurable. They showed their special regard +by first licking off the piece of seal they put before him, and if +he rejected it they were hurt. Their housekeeping, of which he got +an inside view, was embarrassing in its simplicity. The dish-washing +was done by the dogs licking the kettles clean. Often, after a night +or two in a hut that held half a dozen families, he was compelled to +change his clothes to the skin in an open boat or out on the snow. +But the alternative was to sleep out in a cold that sometimes froze +his pillow to the bed and the tea-cup to the table even in his own +home. Above all, he must learn their language. + +It proved a difficult task, for the Eskimo tongue was both very +simple and very complex. In all the things pertaining to their daily +life it was exceedingly complex. For instance, to catch one kind of +fish was expressed by one word, to catch another kind in quite +different terms. They had one word for catching a young seal, +another for catching an old one. When it came to matters of moral +and spiritual import, the language was poor to desperation. Egede's +instruction began when he caught the word "kine"--what is it? And +from that time on he learned every day; but the pronunciation was as +varied as the workaday vocabulary, and it was an unending task. + +It proceeded with many interruptions from the Angekoks, who tried +more than once to bewitch him, but finally gave it up, convinced +that he was a great medicine-man himself, and therefore +invulnerable. But before that they tried to foment a regular mutiny, +the colony being by that time well under way, and Egede had to +arrest and punish the leaders. The natives naturally clung to them, +and when Egede had mastered their language and tried to make clear +that the Angekoks deceived them when they pretended to go to the +other world for advice, they demurred. "Did you ever see them go?" +he asked. "Well, have you seen this God of yours of whom you speak +so much?" was their reply. When Egede spoke of spiritual gifts, they +asked for good health and blubber: "Our Angekoks give us that." +Hell-fire was much in theological evidence in those days, but among +the Eskimos it was a failure as a deterrent. They listened to the +account of it eagerly and liked the prospect. When at length they +became convinced that Egede knew more than their Angekoks, they came +to him with the request that he would abolish winter. Very likely +they thought that one who had such knowledge of the hot place ought +to have influence enough with the keeper of it to obtain this favor. + +It was not an easy task, from any point of view, to which he had put +his hands. As that first winter wore away there were gloomy days and +nights, and they were not brightened when, with the return of the +sun, no ship arrived from Denmark. The Dutch traders came, and +opened their eyes wide when they found Egede and his household safe +and even on friendly terms with the Eskimos. Pelesse--the natives +called the missionary that, as the nearest they could come to the +Danish _praest_ (priest)--Pelesse was not there after blubber, they +told the Dutchmen, but to teach them about heaven and of "Him up +there," who had made them and wanted them home with Him again. So he +had not worked altogether in vain. But the brief summer passed, and +still no relief ship. The crew of _Haabet_ clamored to go home, and +Egede had at last to give a reluctant promise that if no ship came +in two weeks, he would break up. His wife alone refused to take a +hand in packing. The ship was coming, she insisted, and at the last +moment it did come. A boat arriving after dark brought the first +word of it. The people ashore heard voices speaking in Danish, and +flew to Egede, who had gone to bed, with the news. The ship brought +good cheer. The Government was well disposed. Trading and preaching +were to go on together, as planned. Joyfully then they built a +bigger and a better house, and called their colony Godthaab (Good +Hope). + +The work was now fairly under way. Of the energy and the hardships +it entailed, even we in our day that have heard so much of Arctic +exploration can have but a faint conception. Shut in on the coast of +eternal ice and silence,--silence, save when in summer the Arctic +rivers were alive, and crash after crash announced that the glaciers +coming down from the inland mountains were "casting their calves," +the great icebergs, upon the ocean,--the colonists counted the days +from the one when that year's ship was lost to sight till the +returning spring brought the next one, their only communication with +their far-off home. In summer the days were sometimes burning hot, +but the nights always bitterly cold. In winter, says Egede, hot +water spilled on the table froze as it ran, and the meat they cooked +was often frozen at the bone when set on the table. Summer and +winter Egede was on his travels between Sundays, sometimes in the +trader's boat, more often the only white man with one or two Eskimo +companions, seeking out the people. When night surprised him with no +native hut in sight, he pulled the boat on some desert shore and, +commending his soul to God, slept under it. Once he and his son +found an empty hut, and slept there in the darkness. Not until day +came again did they know that they had made their bed on the frozen +bodies of dead men who had once been the occupants of the house, and +had died they never knew how. Peril was everywhere. Again and again +his little craft was wrecked. Once the house blew down over their +heads in one of the dreadful winter storms that ravage those high +latitudes. Often he had to sit on the rail of his boat, and let his +numbed feet hang into the sea to restore feeling in them. On land he +sometimes waded waist-deep in snow, climbed mountains and slid down +into valleys, having but the haziest notion of where he would land. +At home his brave wife sat alone, praying for his safety and +listening to every sound that might herald his return. Tremble and +doubt they did, Egede owns, but they never flinched. Their work was +before them, and neither thought of turning back. + +The Eskimos soon came to know that Egede was their friend. When his +boat entered a fjord where they were fishing, and his rowers shouted +out that the good priest had come who had news of God, they dropped +their work and flocked out to meet him. Then he spoke to a floating +congregation, simply as if they were children, and, as with Him +whose message he bore, "the people heard him gladly." They took him +to their sick, and asked him to breathe upon them, which he did to +humor them, until he found out that it was an Angekok practice, +whereupon he refused. Once, after he had spoken of the raising of +Lazarus from the dead, they took him to a new-made grave and asked +him, too, to bring back their dead. They brought him a blind man to +be healed. Egede looked upon them in sorrowful pity. "I can do +nothing," he said; "but if he believes in Jesus, He has the power +and can do it." + +"I do believe," shouted the blind man: "let Him heal me." It +occurred to Egede, perhaps as a mere effort at cleanliness, to wash +his eyes in cognac, and he sent him away with words of comfort. He +did not see his patient again for thirteen years. Then he was in a +crowd of Eskimos who came to Godthaab. The man saw as well as Egede. + +"Do you remember?" he said, "you washed my eyes with sharp water, +and the Son of God in whom I believed, He made me to see." + +Children the Eskimos were in their idolatry, and children they +remained as Christians. By Egede's prayers they set great store. +"You ask for us," they told him. "God does not hear us; He does not +understand Eskimo." Of God they spoke as "Him up there." They +believed that the souls of the dead went up on the rainbow, and, +reaching the moon that night, rested there in the moon's house, on a +bench covered with the white skins of young polar bears. There they +danced and played games, and the northern lights were the young +people playing ball. Afterward they lived in houses on the shore of +a big lake overshadowed by a snow mountain. When the waters ran over +the edge of the lake, it rained on earth. When the "moon was dark," +it was down on earth catching seal for a living. Thunder was caused +by two old women shaking a dried sealskin between them; the +lightning came when they turned the white side out. The "Big Nail" +we have heard of as the Eskimos' Pole, was a high-pointed mountain +in the Farthest North on which the sky rested and turned around with +the sun, moon, and stars. Up there the stars were much bigger. +Orion's Belt was so near that you had to carry a whip to drive him +away. + +The women were slaves. An Eskimo might have as many wives as he saw +fit; they were his, and it was nobody's business. But adultery was +unknown. The seventh commandment in Egede's translation came to +read, "One wife alone you shall have and love." The birth of a girl +was greeted with wailing. When grown, she was often wooed by +violence. If she fled from her admirer, he cut her feet when he +overtook her, so that she could run no more. The old women were +denounced as witches who drove the seals away, and were murdered. An +Eskimo who was going on a reindeer hunt, and found his aged mother a +burden, took her away and laid her in an open grave. Returning on +the third day, he heard her groaning yet, and smothered her with a +big stone. He tried to justify himself to Egede by saying that "she +died hard, and it was a pity not to speed her." Yet they buried a +dog's head with a child, so that the dog, being clever, could run +ahead and guide the little one's steps to heaven. + +They could count no further than five; at a stretch they might get +to twenty, on their fingers and toes, but there they stopped. +However, they were not without resources. It was the day of long +Sunday services, and the Eskimos were a restless people. When the +sermon dragged, they would go up to Egede and make him measure on +their arms how much longer the talk was going to be. Then they +tramped back to their seats and sat listening with great attention, +all the time moving one hand down the arm, checking off the +preacher's progress. If they got to the finger-tips before he +stopped, they would shake their heads sourly and go back for a +remeasurement. No wonder Egede put his chief hope in the children, +whom he gathered about him in flocks. + +For all that, the natives loved him. There came a day that brought +this message from the North: "Say to the speaker to come to us to +live, for the other strangers who come here can only talk to us of +blubber, blubber, blubber, and we also would hear of the great +Creator." Egede went as far as he could, but was compelled by ice +and storms to turn back after weeks of incredible hardships. The +disappointment was the more severe to him because he had never quite +given up his hope of finding remnants of the ancient Norse +settlements. The fact that the old records spoke of a West Bygd +(settlement) and an East Bygd had misled many into believing that +the desolate east coast had once been colonized. Not until our own +day was this shown to be an error, when Danish explorers searched +that coast for a hundred miles and found no other trace of +civilization than a beer bottle left behind by the explorer +Nordenskjold. + +Egede's hope had been that Greenland might be once more colonized by +Christian people. When the Danish Government, after some years, sent +up a handful of soldiers, with a major who took the title of +governor, to give the settlement official character as a trading +station, they sent with them twenty unofficial "Christians," ten men +out of the penitentiary and as many lewd and drunken women from the +treadmill, who were married by lot before setting sail, to give the +thing a halfway decent look. They were good enough for the Eskimos, +they seem to have thought at Copenhagen. There followed a terrible +winter, during which mutiny and murder were threatened. "It is a +pity," writes the missionary, "that while we sleep secure among the +heathen savages, with so-called Christian people our lives are not +safe." As a matter of fact they were not, for the soldiers joined in +the mutiny against Egede as the cause of their having to live in +such a place, and had not sickness and death smitten the +malcontents, neither he nor the governor would have come safe +through the winter. On the Eskimos this view of the supposed fruits +of Christian teaching made its own impression. After seeing a woman +scourged on shipboard for misbehavior, they came innocently enough +to Egede and suggested that some of their best Angekoks be sent down +to Denmark to teach the people to be sober and decent. + +There came a breathing spell after ten years of labor in what had +often enough seemed to him the spiritual as well as physical +ice-barrens of the North, when Egede surveyed a prosperous mission, +with trade established, a hundred and fifty children christened and +schooled, and many of their elders asking to be baptized. In the +midst of his rejoicing the summer's ship brought word from Denmark +that the King was dead, and orders from his successor to abandon the +station. Egede might stay with provisions for one year, if there was +enough left over after fitting out the ship; but after that he would +receive no further help. + +When the Eskimos heard the news, they brought their little children +to the mission. "These will not let you go," they said; and he +stayed. His wife, whom hardship and privation and the lonely waiting +for her husband in the long winter nights had at last broken down, +refused to leave him, though she sadly needed the care of a +physician. A few of the sailors were persuaded to stay another year. +"So now," Egede wrote in his diary when, on July 31, 1731, he had +seen the ship sail away with all his hopes, "I am left alone with my +wife and three children, ten sailors and eight Eskimos, girls and +boys who have been with us from the start. God let me live to see +the blessed day that brings good news once more from home." His +prayer was heard. The next summer brought word that the mission was +to be continued, partly because Egede had strained every nerve to +send home much blubber and many skins. But it was as a glimpse of +the sun from behind dark clouds. His greatest trials trod hard upon +the good news. + +To rouse interest in the mission Egede had sent home young Eskimos +from time to time. Three of these died of smallpox in Denmark. The +fourth came home and brought the contagion, all unknown, to his +people. It was the summer fishing season, when the natives travel +much and far, and wherever he went they flocked about him to hear of +the "Great Lord's land," where the houses were so tall that one +could not shoot an arrow over them, and to ask a multitude of +questions: Was the King very big? Had he caught many whales? Was he +strong and a great Angekok? and much more of the same kind. In a +week the disease broke out among the children at the mission, and +soon word came from islands and fjords where the Eskimos were +fishing, of death and misery unspeakable. It was virgin soil for the +plague, and it was terribly virulent, striking down young and old in +every tent and hut. More than two thousand natives, one-fourth of +the whole population, died that summer. Of two hundred families near +the mission only thirty were left alive. A cry of terror and anguish +rose throughout the settlements. No one knew what to do. In vain did +Egede implore them to keep their sick apart. In fever delirium they +ran out in the ice-fields or threw themselves into the sea. A wild +panic seized the survivors, and they fled to the farthest tribes, +carrying the seeds of death with them wherever they went. Whole +villages perished, and their dead lay unburied. Utter desolation +settled like a pall over the unhappy land. + +Through it all a single ray of hope shone. The faith that Egede had +preached all those years, and the life he had lived with them, bore +their fruit. They had struck deeper than he thought. They crowded to +him, all that could, as their one friend. Dying mothers held their +suckling babes up to him and died content. In a deserted island camp +a half-grown girl was found alone with three little children. Their +father was dead. When he knew that for him and the baby there was no +help, he went to a cave and, covering himself and the child with +skins, lay down to die. His parting words to his daughter were, +"Before you have eaten the two seals and the fish I have laid away +for you, Pelesse will come, no doubt, and take you home. For he +loves you and will take care of you." At the mission every nook and +cranny was filled with the sick and the dying. Egede and his wife +nursed them day and night. Childlike, when death approached, they +tried to put on their best clothes, or even to have new ones made, +that they might please God by coming into His presence looking fine. +When Egede had closed their eyes, he carried the dead in his arms to +the vestibule, where in the morning the men who dug the graves found +them. At the sight of his suffering the scoffers were dumb. What his +preaching had not done to win them over, his sorrows did. They were +at last one. + +That dreadful year left Egede a broken man. In his dark moments he +reproached himself with having brought only misery to those he had +come to help and serve. One thorn which one would think he might +have been spared rankled deep in it all. Some missionaries of a +dissenting sect--Egede was Lutheran--had come with the smallpox ship +to set up an establishment of their own. At their head was a man +full of misdirected zeal and quite devoid of common-sense, who +engaged Egede in a wordy dispute about justification by faith and +condemned him and his work unsparingly. He had grave doubts whether +he was in truth a "converted man." It came to an end when they +themselves fell ill, and Egede and his wife had the last word, after +their own fashion. They nursed the warlike brethren through their +illness with loving ministrations and gave them back to life, let us +hope, wiser and better men. + +At Christmas, 1735, Egede's faithful wife, Gertrude, closed her +eyes. She had gone out with him from home and kin to a hard and +heathen land, and she had been his loyal helpmeet in all his trials. +Now it was all over. That winter scurvy laid him upon a bed of pain +and, lying there, his heart turned to the old home. His son had come +from Copenhagen to help, happily yet while his mother lived. To him +he would give over the work. In Denmark he could do more for it than +in Greenland, now he was alone. On July 29, 1736, he preached for +the last time to his people and baptized a little Eskimo to whom +they gave his name, Hans. The following week he sailed for home, +carrying, as all his earthly wealth, his beloved dead and his +motherless children. + +The Eskimos gathered on the shore and wept as the ship bore their +friend away. They never saw him again. He lived in Denmark eighteen +years, training young men to teach the Eskimos. They gave him the +title of bishop, but so little to live on that he was forced in his +last days to move from Copenhagen to a country town, to make both +ends meet. His grave was forgotten by the generation that came after +him. No one knows now where it is; but in ice-girt Greenland, where +the northern lights on wintry nights flash to the natives their +message from the souls that have gone home, his memory will live +when that of the North Pole seeker whom the world applauds is long +forgotten. Hans Egede was their great man, their hero. He was +more,--he was their friend. + + + + + +GUSTAV VASA, THE FATHER OF SWEDEN + + +A great and wise woman had, after ages of war and bloodshed, united +the crowns of the three Scandinavian kingdoms upon one head. In the +strong city of Kalmar, around which the tide of battle had ever +raged hottest, the union was declared in the closing days of the +Thirteenth Century. Norwegian, Swede, and Dane were thenceforth to +stand together, to the end of time; so they resolved. It was all a +vain dream. Queen Margaret was not cold in her grave before the +kingdoms fell apart. Norway clung to Denmark, but Sweden went her +own way. In the wars of two generations the Danish kings won back +the Swedish crown and lost it, again and again, until in 1520 King +Christian II clutched it for the last time, at the head of a +conquering army. He celebrated his victory with a general amnesty, +and bade the Swedish nobles to a great feast, held at the capital in +November. + +Christian is one of the unsolved riddles of history. Ablest but +unhappiest of all his house, he was an instinctive democrat, +sincerely solicitous for the welfare of the plain people, but +incredibly cruel and faithless when the dark mood seized him. The +coronation feast ended with the wholesale butchery of the +unsuspecting nobles. Hundreds were beheaded in the public square; +for days it was filled with the slain. It is small comfort that the +wicked priest who egged the King on to the dreadful deed was himself +burned at the stake by the master he had betrayed. The Stockholm +Massacre drowned the Kalmar Union in its torrents of blood. +Retribution came swiftly. Above the peal of the Christmas bells rose +the clash and clangor of armed hosts pouring forth from the mountain +fastnesses to avenge the foul treachery. They were led by Gustav[1] +Eriksson Vasa, a young noble upon whose head Christian had set a +price. + +[Footnote 1: The older spelling of this name is followed here in +preference to the more modern Gustaf. Gustav Vasa himself wrote his +name so.] + +The Vasas were among the oldest and best of the great Swedish +families. It was said of them that they ever loved a friend, hated +a foe, and never forgot. Gustav was born in the castle of +Lindholmen, when the news that the world had grown suddenly big by +the discovery of lands beyond the unknown seas was still ringing +through Europe, on May 12, 1496. He was brought up in the home of +his kinsman, the Swedish patriot Sten Sture, and early showed the +fruits of his training. "See what I will do," he boasted in school +when he was thirteen, "I will go to Dalecarlia, rouse the people, +and give the Jutes (Danes) a black eye." Master Ivar, his Danish +teacher, gave him a whaling for that. White with anger, the boy +drove his dirk through the book, nailing it to the desk, and stalked +out of the room. Master Ivar's eyes followed the slim figure in the +scarlet cloak, and he sighed wearily "_nobilium nati nolunt aliquid +pati_,--the children of the great will put up with nothing." + +Hardly yet of age, he served under the banner of Sten Sture against +King Christian, and was one of six hostages sent to the King when he +asked an interview of the Swedish leader. But Christian stayed away +from the meeting and carried the hostages off to Denmark against his +plighted faith. There Gustav was held prisoner a year. All that +winter rumors of great armaments against Sweden filled the land. He +heard the young bloods from the court prate about bending the stiff +necks in the country across the Sound, and watched them throw dice +for Swedish castles and Swedish women,--part of the loot when his +fatherland should be laid under the yoke. Ready to burst with anger +and grief, he sat silent at their boasts. In the spring he escaped, +disguised as a cattle-herder, and made his way to Luebeck, where he +found refuge in the house of the wealthy merchant Kort Koenig. + +They soon heard in Denmark where he was, and the King sent letters +demanding his surrender; but the burghers of the Hanse town hated +Christian with cause, and would not give him up. Then came Gustav's +warder who had gone bail for him in sixteen hundred gulden, and +pleaded for his prisoner. + +"I am not a prisoner," was Gustav's retort, "I am a hostage, for +whom the Danish king pledged his oath and faith. If any one can +prove that I was taken captive in a fight or for just cause, let him +stand forth. Ambushed was I, and betrayed." The Luebeck men thought +of the plots King Christian was forever hatching against them. Now, +if he succeeded in getting Sweden under his heel, their turn would +come next. Better, they said, send this Gustav home to his own +country, perchance he might keep the King busy there; by which they +showed their good sense. His ex-keeper was packed off back home, and +Gustav reached Sweden, sole passenger on a little coast-trader, on +May 31, 1520. A stone marks the spot where he landed, near Kalmar; +for then struck the hour of Sweden's freedom. + +But not yet for many weary months did the people hear its summons. +Swedish manhood was at its lowest ebb. Stockholm was held by the +widow of Sten Sture with a half-famished garrison. In Kalmar another +woman, Anna Bjelke, commanded, but her men murmured, and the fall of +the fortress was imminent. When Gustav Vasa, who had slipped in +unseen, exhorted them to stand fast, they would have mobbed him. He +left as he had come, the day before the surrender. Travelling by +night, he made his way inland, finding everywhere fear and distrust. +The King had promised that if they would obey him "they should +never want for herring and salt," so they told Gustav, and when he +tried to put heart into them and rouse their patriotism, they took +up bows and arrows and bade him be gone. Indeed, there were not +wanting those who shot at him. Like a hunted deer he fled from +hamlet to hamlet. Such friends as he had left advised him to throw +himself upon the King's mercy; told him of the amnesty proclaimed. +But Gustav's thoughts dwelt grimly among the Northern mountaineers +whom as a boy he had bragged he would set against the tyrant. +Insensibly he shaped his course toward their country. + +He was with his brother-in-law, Joachim Brahe, when the King's +message bidding him to the coronation came. Gustav begged him not to +go, but Brahe's wife and children were within Christian's reach, and +he did not dare stay away. When he left, the fugitive hid in his +ancestral home at Raefsnaes on lake Maelar. There one of Brahe's men +brought him news of the massacre in which his master and Gustav's +father had perished. His mother, grandmother, and sisters were +dragged away to perish in Danish dungeons. On Gustav's head the King +had set a price, and spies were even then on his track. + +Gustav's mind was made up. What was there now to wait for? Clad as a +peasant, he started for Dalecarlia with a single servant to keep him +company, but before he reached the mines the man stole all his money +and ran away. He had to work now to live, and hired out to Anders +Persson, the farmer of Rankhyttan. He had not been there many days +when one of the women saw an embroidered sleeve stick out under his +coat and told her master that the new hand was not what he pretended +to be. The farmer called him aside, and Gustav told him frankly who +he was. Anders Persson kept his secret, but advised him not to stay +long in any one place lest his enemies get wind of him. He slipped +away as soon as it was dark, nearly lost his life by breaking +through the ice, but reached Ornaes on the other side of Lake Runn, +half dead with cold and exposure. He knew that another Persson who +had been with him in the war lived there, and found his house. +Arendt Persson was a rascal. He received him kindly, but when he +slept harnessed his horse and went to Mans Nilsson, a neighbor, +with the news: the King's reward would make them both rich, if he +would help him seize the outlawed man. + +Mans Nilsson held with the Danes, but he was no traitor, and he +showed the fellow the door. He went next to the King's sheriff; he +would be bound to help. To be sure, he would claim the lion's share +of the blood-money, but something was better than nothing. The +sheriff came soon enough with a score of armed men. But Arendt +Persson had not reckoned with his honest wife. She guessed his +errand and let Gustav down from the window to the rear gate, where +she had a sleigh and team in waiting. When the sheriff's posse +surrounded the house, Gustav was well on his way to Master Jon, the +parson of Svaerdsjoe, who was his friend. Tradition has it that while +Christian was King, the brave little woman never dared show her face +in the house again. + +Master Jon was all right, but news of the man-hunt had run through +the country, and when the parson's housekeeper one day saw him hold +the wash-bowl for his guest she wanted to know why he was so polite +to a common clod. Master Jon told her that it was none of her +business, but that night he piloted his friend across the lake to +Isala, where Sven Elfsson lived, a gamekeeper who knew the country +and could be trusted. The good parson was hardly out of sight on his +way back when the sheriff's men came looking for Gustav. It did not +occur to them that the yokel who stood warming himself by the stove +might be the man they were after. But the gamekeeper's wife was +quick to see his peril. She was baking bread and had just put the +loaves into the oven with a long-handled spade. "Here, you lummox!" +she cried, and whacked him soundly over the back with it, "what are +ye standing there gaping at? Did ye never see folks afore? Get back +to your work in the barn." And Gustav, taking the hint, slunk out of +the room. + +For three days after that he lay hidden under a fallen tree in the +snow and bitter cold; but even there he was not safe, and the +gamekeeper took him deeper into the forest, where a big spruce grew +on a hill in the middle of a frozen swamp. There no one would seek +him till he could make a shift to get him out of the country. The +hill is still there; the people call it the King's Hill, and not +after King Christian, either. But in those long nights when Gustav +Vasa listened to the hungry wolves howling in the woods and nosing +about his retreat, it was hardly kingly conceits his mind brooded +over. His father and kinsmen were murdered; his mother and sister in +the pitiless grasp of the tyrant who was hunting him to his death; +he, the last of his race, alone and forsaken by his own. Bitter +sorrow filled his soul at the plight of his country that had fallen +so low. But the hope of the young years came to the rescue: all was +not lost yet. And in the morning came Sven, the gamekeeper, with a +load of straw, at the bottom of which he hid him. So no one would be +the wiser. + +It was well he did it, for half-way to the next town some prowling +soldiers overtook them, and just to make sure that there was nothing +in the straw, prodded the load with their spears. Nothing stirred, +and they went on their way. But a spear had gashed Gustav's leg, and +presently blood began to drip in the snow. Sven had his wits about +him. He got down, and cut the fetlock of one of the beasts with his +jack-knife so that it bled and no one need ask questions. When they +got to Marnaes, Gustav was weak from the loss of blood, but a +friendly surgeon was found to bind up his wounds. + +Farther and farther north he fled, keeping to the deep woods in the +day, until he reached Raettwik. Feeling safer there, he spoke to the +people coming from church one Sunday and implored them to shake off +the Danish yoke. But they only shook their heads. He was a stranger +among them, and they would talk it over with their neighbors. Not +yet were his wanderings over. To Mora he went next, where Parson +Jakob hid him in a lonely farm-house. Evil chance led the spies +direct to his hiding-place, and once more it was the housewife whose +quick wit saved him. Dame Margit was brewing the Yule beer when she +saw them coming. In a trice she had Gustav in the cellar and rolled +the brewing vat over the trap-door. Then they might search as they +saw fit; there was nothing there. The first blood was spilled for +Gustav Vasa while he was at Mora, and it was a Dane who did it. He +was the kind that liked to see fair play; when an under-sheriff came +looking for the hunted man there, the Dane waylaid and killed him. + +Christmas morning, when Master Jakob had preached his sermon in the +church, Gustav spoke to the congregation out in the snow-covered +churchyard. A gravestone was his pulpit. Eloquent always, his +sorrows and wrongs and the memory of the hard months lent wings to +his words. His speech lives yet in Dalecarlia, for now he was among +its mountains. + +"It is good to see this great meeting," he said, "but when I think +of our fatherland I am filled with grief. At what peril I am here +with you, you know who see me hounded as a wild beast day by day, +hour by hour. But our beloved country is more to me than life. How +long must we be thralls, we who were born to freedom? Those of you +who are old remember what persecution Swedish men and women have +suffered from the Danish kings. The young have heard the story of it +and have learned from they were little children to hate and resist +such rule. These tyrants have laid waste our land and sucked its +marrow, until nothing remains for us but empty houses and lean +fields. Our very lives are not safe." He called upon them to rise +and drive the invaders out. If they wanted a leader, he was ready. + +His words stirred the mountaineers deeply. Cries of anger were +heard in the crowd; it was not the first time they had taken up arms +in the cause of freedom. But when they talked it over, the older +heads prevailed; there had not been time enough to hear both sides. +They told him that they would not desert the King; he must expect +nothing of them. + +Broken-hearted and desperate, Gustav Vasa turned toward the +Norwegian frontier. He would leave the country for which there was +no hope. While the table in the poorest home groaned with Yuletide +cheer, Sweden's coming king hid under an old bridge, outcast and +starving, till it was safe to leave. Then he took up his weary +journey alone. The winter cold had grown harder as the days grew +shorter. Famished wolves dogged his steps, but he outran them on his +snow-shoes. By night he slept in some wayside shelter, such as they +build for travellers in that desolate country, or in the brush. The +snow grew deeper, and the landscape wilder, as he went. For days he +had gone without food, when he saw the sun set behind the lofty +range that was to bar him out of home and hope forever. Even there +was no abiding place for him. What thoughts of his vanished dream, +perchance of the distant lands across the seas where the tyrant's +hand could not reach him, were in his mind, who knows, as he bent +his strength to the last and hardest stage of his journey? He was +almost there, when he heard shouts behind him and turned to sell his +life dear. Two men on skis were calling to him. They were unarmed, +and he waited to let them come up. + +Their story was soon told. They had come to call him back. After he +left, an old soldier whom they knew in Mora had come from the south +and told them worse things than even Gustav knew. It was all true +about the Stockholm murder; worse, the King was having gallows set +up in every county to hang all those on who said him nay; a heavy +tax was laid upon the peasants, and whoever did not pay was to have +a hand or foot cut off; they could still follow the plow. And now +they had sent away the one man who could lead against the Danes, +with the forests full of outlawed men who would have enlisted under +him as soon as ever the cry was raised! While the men of Dalecarlia +were debating the news among themselves orders came from the +bailiff at Westeras that the tax was to be paid forthwith. That +night runners were sent on the trail of Gustav to tell him to come +back; they were ready. + +When he came, it was as if a mighty storm swept through the +mountains. The people rose in a body. Every day whole parishes threw +off their allegiance to King Christian. Sunday after Sunday Gustav +spoke to the people at their meeting-houses, and they raised their +spears and swore to follow him to death. Two months after the murder +in Stockholm an army of thousands that swelled like an avalanche was +marching south, and province after province joined in the rebellion. +King Christian's host met them at Brunbaeck in April. One of its +leaders asked the country folk what kind of men the Dalecarlians +were, and when he was told that they drank water and ate bread made +of bark, he cried out, "Such a people the devil himself couldn't +whip; let us get out." But his advice was not taken and the Danish +army was wiped out. Gustav halted long enough to drill his men and +give them time to temper their arrows and spears, then he fell upon +Westeras and beat the Danes there. The peasant mob scattered too +soon to loot the town, and the King's men came back with a sudden +rush. Only Gustav's valor and presence of mind saved the day that +had been won once from being lost again. + +When it was seen that the Danes were not invincible, the whole +country rose, took the scattered castles, and put their defenders to +the sword. Gustav bore the rising on his shoulders from first to +last. He was everywhere, ordering and leading. His fiery eloquence +won over the timorous; his irresistible advance swept every obstacle +aside. In May he took Upsala; by midsummer he was besieging +Stockholm itself. Most of the other cities were in his hands. The +Hanse towns had found out what this Gustav could do at home. They +sang his praise, but as for backing him with their purse, that was +another matter. They refused to lend Gustav two siege-guns when he +lay before Stockholm, though he offered to pledge a castle for each. +He had no money. Happily his enemy, Christian, was even worse off. +Neither pledges nor promises could get him the money he needed. His +chief men were fighting among themselves and made peace only to turn +upon him. Within a year after the Swedish people had chosen Gustav +Vasa to be Regent at the Diet of Vadstena, Christian went into exile +and, when he tried to get his kingdom back, into prison, where he +languished the rest of his life. He fully deserved his fate. Yet he +meant well and had done some good things in his day. Had he been +able to rule himself, he might have ruled others with better +success. Schoolboys remember with gratitude that he forbade teachers +to "spank their pupils overmuch and without judgment, as was their +wont." + +At the Diet of Vadstena the people had offered Gustav the crown, but +he put it from him. Scarce eight months had passed since he hid +under the bridge, hunted and starving. When Stockholm had fallen +after a siege of two years and all Sweden was free, the people met +(1523) and made him King, whether or no. He still objected, but gave +in at last and was crowned. + +Popular favor is fickle. Hard times came that were not made easier +by Gustav's determination to fill the royal coffers, and the very +Dalecarlians who had put him in the high seat rose against him and +served notice that if things did not mend they would have none of +him. Gustav made sure that they had no backing elsewhere, then went +up and persuaded them to be good by cutting off the heads of their +leaders, who both happened to be priests: one was even a bishop. He +had been taught in a school that always found an axe ready to hand. +Let those who lament the savagery of modern warfare consider what +happened then to a Danish fleet that tried to bring relief to +hard-pressed Stockholm. It was beaten in a fight in which six +hundred men were taken prisoners. They were all, say the accounts, +"tied hand and foot and flung overboard amid the beating of drums +and blowing of trumpets to drown their cries." The clergy fared +little better than the laymen in that age, but then it was their own +fault. In plotting and scrapping they were abreast of the worst and +took the consequences. + +They were the days of the Reformation, and Gustav would not have +been human had he failed to see a way out of his money troubles by +confiscating church property. He had pawned the country's trade to +the merchants of Luebeck and there was nothing else left. Naturally +the church opposed him. The King took the bull by the horns. He +called a meeting and told the people that he was sick of it all. He +had encouraged the Reformation for their good; now, if they did not +stand by him, they might choose between him and his enemies. The +oldest priest arose at that and said that the church's property was +sacred. The King asked if the rest of them thought the same way. +Only one voice was raised, and to say yes. + +"Then," said Gustav, "I don't want to be your King any more. If it +does not rain, you blame me; if the sun does not shine, you do the +same. It is always so. All of you want to be masters. After all my +trouble and labor for you, you would as lief see my head split with +an axe, though none of you dare lay hold of the handle. Give me back +what I have spent in your service and I will go away and never come +back." And go he did, to his castle, with half a dozen of his +nearest friends. + +They sat and looked at one another when he was gone, and then +priests and nobles fell to arguing among themselves, all talking at +once. The plain people, the burghers and the peasants, listened +awhile, but when they got no farther, let them know that if they +couldn't settle it, they, the people, would, and in a way that would +give them little joy. The upshot of it all was that messengers were +sent to bring the King back. He made them go three times, and when +he came at last, it was as absolute master. In the ordering of the +kingdom that was made there, he became the head of the church as +well as of the state. Gustav's pen was as sharp as his tongue. When +Hans Brask, the oldest prelate in the land, who had stood stoutly by +the old regime, left the country and refused to come back, he wrote +to him: "As long as you might milk and shear your sheep, you staid +by them. When God spake and said you were to feed them, not to shear +and slaughter them, you ran away. Every honest man can judge if you +have done well." Hard words to a good old man; but there were plenty +of others who deserved them. That was the end of the hierarchy in +Sweden. + +But not of the unruly peasants who had tasted the joys of +king-making. How kindly they took to the Reformation at the outset +one can judge from the demand of some of them that the King should +"burn or otherwise kill such as ate meat on Friday." They rose +again and again, and would listen only to the argument of force. +When the Luebeckers pressed hard for the payment of old debts, and +the treasury was empty as usual, King Gustav hit upon a new kind of +revenue. He demanded of every church in the land that it give up its +biggest bell to the funds. It was the last straw. The Dalecarlians +rose against what they deemed sacrilege, under the leadership of +Mans Nilsson and Anders Persson of Rankhyttan, the very men who had +befriended Gustav in his need, and the insurrection spread. The "War +of the Bells" was settled with the sword, and the peasants gave in. +But Gustav came of a stock that "never forgot." Two years later, +when his hands were free at home, he suddenly invaded Dalecarlia +with a powerful army, determined to "pull those weeds up by the +roots." He summoned the peasants to Thing, made a ring around them +of armed men, and gave them their choice: + +"Submit now for good and all," he said, "or I will spoil the land so +that cock shall not crow nor hound bark in it again forever!" + +The frightened peasants fell on their knees and begged for mercy. +He made them give up their leaders, including his former friends, +and they were all put to the sword. After that there was peace in +Dalecarlia. + +Gustav Vasa's long reign ended in 1560. Like his enemy, Christian +II, he was a strange mixture of contradictions. He was brave in +battle, wise in council, pious, if not a saint, clean, and merciful +when mercy fitted into his plans. His enemies called him a greedy, +suspicious despot. Greedy he was. More than eleven thousand farms +were confiscated by the crown during his reign, and he left four +thousand farms and a great fortune to his children as his personal +share. But historians have called him "the great housekeeper" who +found waste and loss and left an ordered household. He gave all for +Sweden, and all he had was at her call. It was share and share +alike, in his view. Despotic he could be, too. _L'etat c'est moi_ +might have been said by him. But he did not exploit the state; he +built it. He fashioned Sweden out of a bunch of quarrelsome +provincial governments into a hereditary monarchy, as the best +way--indeed, the only way then--of giving it strength and +stability. He was suspicious because everybody had betrayed him, or +had tried to. With all that, his steady purpose was to raise and +enlighten his people and make them keep the peace, if he had to +adopt the Irishman's plan of keeping it himself with an axe. He was +the father of a line of great warriors. Gustav Adolf was his +grandson. + +Bent under the burden of years, he bade his people good-by at the +Diet of Stockholm, a few weeks before his death. His old eloquence +rings unimpaired in the farewell. He thanked God, who had chosen him +as His tool to set Sweden free from thralldom. Almost might he liken +himself to King David, whom God from a shepherd had made the leader +of his people. No such hope was in his heart when, forty years +before, he hid in the woods from a bloodthirsty enemy. For what he +had done wrong as king, he asked the people's pardon; it was not +done on purpose. He knew well that many thought him a hard ruler, +but the time would come when they would gladly dig him up from his +grave if they only could. And with that he went out, bowing deeply +to the Diet, the tears streaming down his face. + +They saw him no more; but on his tomb the Swedish people, forgetting +all else, have written that he was the "Father of his Country." + + + + +ABSALON, WARRIOR BISHOP OF THE NORTH + + +A welcome change awaits the traveller who, having shaken off the +chill of the German Dreadnaughts at Kiel, crosses the Baltic to the +Danish Islands--a change from the dread portents of war to smiling +peace. There can be nothing more pastoral and restful than the +Seeland landscape as framed in a car window; yet he misses its chief +charm whom its folk-lore escapes--the countless legends that cling +to field and forest from days long gone. The guide-book gives scarce +a hint of them; but turn from its page and they meet you at every +step, hail you from every homestead, every copse. Nor is their story +always of peace. Here was Knud Lavard slain by his envious kinsman +for the crown, and a miraculous spring gushed forth where he fell. +Of the church they built for the pilgrims who sought it from afar +they will show you the site, but the spring dried up with the simple +old faith. Yonder, under the roof of Ringsted church, lie Denmark's +greatest dead. Not half an hour from the ferry landing at Korsoer, +your train labors past a hill crowned by a venerable cross, Holy +Anders' Hill. So saintly was that masterful priest that he was wont, +when he prayed, to hang his hat and gloves on a sunbeam as on a +hook. And woe to the land if his cross be disturbed, for then, the +peasant will tell you, the cattle die of plague and the crops fail. +A little further on, just beyond Soroe, a village church rears twin +towers above the wheat-field where the skylark soars and sings to +its nesting mate. For seven hundred years the story of that church +and its builder has been told at Danish firesides, and the time will +never come when it is forgotten. + +Fjenneslev is the name of the village, and Asker Ryg[1] ruled there +in the Twelfth Century, when the king summoned his men to the war. +Bidding good-by to his wife, Sir Asker tells her to build a new +church while he is away, for the old, "with wall of clay, +straw-thatched and grim," is in ruins. And let it be worthy of the +Master: + + "The roof let make of tiling red; + Of stone thou build the wall;" + +and then he whispers in her ear: + + "Hear thou, my Lady Inge, + Of women thou art the flower; + An' thou bearest to me a son so bold, + Set on the church a tower." + +[Footnote 1: Pronounce Reeg.] + +Should the child be a girl, he tells her to build only a spire, for +"modesty beseemeth a woman." Well for Sir Asker that he did not live +in our day of clamoring suffragists. He would have "views" without +doubt. But no such things troubled him while he battled in foreign +lands all summer. It was autumn when he returned and saw from afar +the swell behind which lay Fjenneslev and home. Impatiently he +spurred his horse to the brow of the hill, for no news had come of +Lady Inge those many months. The bard tells us what he saw there: + + "It was the good Sir Asker Ryg; + Right merrily laughed he, + When from that green and swelling hill + Two towers did he see." + +Two sons lay at the Lady Inge's breast, and all was well. + + "The first one of the brothers two + They called him Esbern Snare.[2] + He grew as strong as a savage bear + And fleeter than any hare. + + "The second him called they Absalon, + A bishop he at home. + He used his trusty Danish sword + As the Pope his staff at Rome." + +[Footnote 2: Pronounce Snare, with a as in are. In the Danish hare +rhymes with snare, so pronounced.] + +Absalon and Esbern were not twins, as tradition has it. They were +better than that. They became the great heroes of their day, and the +years have not dimmed their renown. And Absalon reached far beyond +the boundaries of little Denmark to every people that speaks the +English tongue. For it was he who, as archbishop of the North, +"strictly and earnestly" charged his friend and clerk Saxo to gather +the Danish chronicles while yet it was time, because, says Saxo, in +the preface of his monumental work, "he could no longer abide that +his fatherland, which he always honored and magnified with especial +zeal, should be without a record of the great deeds of the fathers." +And from the record Saxo wrote we have our Hamlet. + +It was when they had grown great and famous that Sir Asker and his +wife built the church in thanksgiving for their boys, not when they +were born, and the way that came to light was good and wholesome. +They were about to rebuild the church, on which there had been no +towers at all since they crumbled in the middle ages, and had +decided to put on only one; for the sour critics, who are never +content in writing a people's history unless they can divest it of +all its flesh and make it sit in its bones, as it were, sneered at +the tradition and called it an old woman's tale. But they did not +shout quite so loud when, in peeling off the whitewash of the +Reformation, the mason's hammer brought forth mural paintings that +grew and grew until there stood the whole story to read on the wall, +with Sir Asker himself and the Lady Inge, clad in garments of the +Twelfth Century, bringing to the Virgin the church with the twin +towers. So the folk-lore was not so far out after all, and the +church was rebuilt with two towers, as it should be. + +Under its eaves, whether of straw or tile, the two boys played their +childish games, and before long there came to join in them another +of their own age, young Valdemar, whose father, the very Knud Lavard +mentioned above, had been foully murdered a while before. It was a +time, says Saxo, in which "he must be of stout heart and strong head +who dared aspire to Denmark's crown. For in less than a hundred +years more than sixteen of her kings and their kin were either slain +without cause by their own subjects, or otherwise met a sudden +death." Sir Asker and the murdered Knud had been foster brothers, +and throughout the bloody years that followed, he and his brothers, +sons of the powerful Skjalm Hvide,[3] espoused his cause in good and +evil days, while they saw to it that no harm came to the young +prince under their roof. + +[Footnote 3: Pronounced Veethe.] + +The three boys, as they grew up, were bred to the stern duties of +fighting men, as was the custom of their class. Absalon, indeed, was +destined for the church; but in a country so recently won from the +old war gods, it was the church militant yet, and he wielded spear +and sword with the best of them. When, at eighteen, they sent him to +France to be taught, he did not for his theological studies neglect +the instruction of his boyhood. There he became the disciple and +friend of the Abbot Bernard of Clairvaux, more powerful then than +prince or Pope, and when the abbot preached the second great +crusade, promising eternal salvation to those who took up arms +against the unbelievers, whether to wrest from them the Holy +Sepulchre or to plant the cross among the wild heathen on the +Baltic, his heart burned hot within him. It was a long way to the +Holy Land, but with the Baltic robbers his people had a grievous +score to settle. Their yells had sounded in his boyish ears as they +ravished the shores of his fatherland, penetrating with murder and +pillage almost to his peaceful home. And so, while he lent a +diligent ear to the teachings of the church, earning the name of the +"most learned clerk" in the cloister of Ste. Genevieve in Paris, +daily he laid the breviary aside and took up sword and lance, +learning the arts of modern warfare with the graces of chivalry. In +the old way of fighting, man to man, the men of the North had been +the equals of any, if not their betters; but against the new methods +of warfare their prowess availed little. Absalon, the monk, kept his +body strong while soul and mind matured. When nothing more +adventurous befell, he chopped down trees for the cloister hearths. +But oftener the clash of arms echoed in the quiet halls, or the +peaceful brethren crossed themselves as they watched him break an +unruly horse in the cloister fen. Saxo tells us that he swam easily +in full armor, and in more than one campaign in later years saved +drowning comrades who were not so well taught. + +The while he watched rising all about some of the finest churches in +Christendom. It was the era of cathedral building in Europe. The +Romanesque style of architecture had reached its highest development +in the very France where he spent his young manhood's years, and the +Gothic, with its stamp of massive strength, was beginning to +displace its gentler curve. Ten years of such an environment, in a +land teeming with historic traditions, rounded out the man who set +his face toward home, bent on redeeming his people from the unjust +reproach of being mere "barbarians of the North." + +It was a stricken Denmark to which he came back. Three claimants +were fighting for the crown. The land was laid waste by sea-rovers, +who saw their chance to raid defenceless homes while the men able to +bear arms were following the rival kings. The people had lost hope. +Just when Absalon returned, peace was made between the claimants. +Knud, Svend, and Valdemar, his foster brother of old, divided up the +country between them. They swore a dear oath to keep the pact, but +for all that "the three kingdoms did not last three days." The +treacherous Svend waited only for a chance to murder both his +rivals, and it came quickly, when he and Valdemar were the guests of +Knud at Roskilde. They had eaten and drunk together and were +gathered in the "Storstue," the big room of the house, when Knud saw +Svend whispering aside with his men. With a sudden foreboding of +evil, he threw his arms about Valdemar's shoulders and kissed him. +The young King, who was playing chess with one of his men, looked up +in surprise and asked what it meant. Just then Svend left the hall, +and his henchmen fell upon the two with drawn swords. Knud was cut +down at once, his head cleft in twain. Valdemar upset the table with +the candles and, wrapping his cloak about his arm to ward off the +blows that showered upon him, knocked his assailants right and left +and escaped, badly wounded. + +Absalon came into the room as Knud fell and, thinking it was +Valdemar, caught him in his arms and took his wounded head in his +lap. Sitting there in utter sorrow and despair, heedless of the +tumult that raged in the darkness around him, he felt the King's +garment and knew that the man who was breathing his last in his arms +was not his friend. He laid the lifeless body down gently and left +the hall. The murderers barred his way, but he brushed their swords +and spears aside and strode forth unharmed. Valdemar had found a +horse and made for Fjenneslev, twenty miles away, with all speed, +and there Absalon met him and his brother Esbern in the morning. + +King Svend sought him high and low to finish his dastardly work, +while on Thing he wailed loudly before the people that Valdemar and +Knud had tried to kill him, showing in proof of it his cloak, which +he had rent with his own sword. But Valdemar's friends were wide +awake. Esbern flew through the island on his fleet horse in +Valdemar's clothes, leading his pursuers a merry dance, and when +the young King's wound was healed, he found him a boat and ferried +him across to the mainland, where the people flocked to his +standard. When Svend would have followed, it was the Lady Inge who +scuttled his ship by night and gave her foster son the start he +needed. There followed a short and sharp struggle that ended on +Grathe Heath with the utter rout of Svend's forces. He himself was +killed, and Valdemar at last was King of all Denmark. + +From that time the three friends were inseparable as in the old days +when they played about the fields of Fjenneslev. Absalon was the +keeper of the King's conscience who was not afraid to tell him the +truth when he needed to hear it. And where they were Esbern was +found, never wavering in his loyalty to either. Within a year +Absalon was made bishop of Roskilde, the chief See of Denmark. Saxo +innocently discovers to us King Valdemar's little ruse to have his +friend chosen. He was yet a very young man, scarce turned thirty, +and had not been considered at all for the vacancy. There were three +candidates, all of powerful families, and, according to +ecclesiastical law, the brethren of the chapter were the electors. +The King went to their meeting and addressed them in person. Nothing +was farther from him, he said, than to wish to interfere with their +proper rights. Each must do as his conscience dictated, unhindered. +And with that he laid on the table _four_ books with blank leaves +and bade them write down their names in them, each for his own +choice, to get the matter right on the record. The brethren thanked +him kindly and all voted "nicely together" for Absalon. So three of +the books were wasted. But presently Saxo found good use for them. + +For now had come the bishop's chance of putting in practice the +great abbot's precepts. "Pray and fight" was the motto he had +written into the Knights Templars' rule, and Absalon had made it his +own. Of what use was it to build up the church at home, when any day +might see it raided by its enemies who were always watching their +chance outside? The Danish waters swarmed with pirates, the very +pagans against whom Abbot Bernard had preached his crusade. Of them +all the Wends were the worst, as they were the most powerful of the +Slav tribes that still resisted the efforts of their neighbors, the +Christian Germans, to dislodge them from their old home on the +Baltic. They lived in the island of Ruegen, fairly in sight of the +Danish shores. Every favoring wind blew them across the sea in +shoals to burn and ravage. The Danes, once the terror of the seas, +had given over roving when they accepted the White Christ in +exchange for Thor and his hammer, and now, when they would be at +peace, they were in turn beset by this relentless enemy, who burned +their homes and their crops and dragged the peaceful husbandman away +to make him a thrall or offer him up as a sacrifice to heathen +idols. More than a third of all Denmark lay waste under their +ferocious assault. Here was the blow to be struck if the country was +to have peace and the church prosperity. + +The chance to strike came speedily. Absalon had been bishop only a +few months when, on the evening before Palm Sunday, word was brought +that the enemy had landed, twenty-four ship-crews strong, and were +burning and murdering as usual. Absalon marshalled his eighteen +house-carles and such of the country-folk as he could, and fell +upon the Wends, routing them utterly. A bare handful escaped, the +rest were killed, while the bishop lost but a single man. He said +mass next morning, red-handed it is true, but one may well believe +that for all that his Easter message reached hearts filled with a +new, glad hope for their homes and for the country. That was a +bishop they could understand. So the first blow Absalon struck for +his people was at home. But he did not long wait for the enemy to +come to him. Half his long and stirring life he lived on the seas, +seeking them there. Saxo mentions, in speaking of his return from +one of his cruises, that he had then been nine months on shipboard. +And in a way he was shepherding his flock there, if it was with a +scourge; for, many years before, a Danish king had punished the +Wends in their own home and laid their lands under the See of +Roskilde, though little good it did them or any one else then. But +when Absalon had got his grip, there were days when he baptized as +many as a thousand of them into the true faith. + +He was not altogether alone in the stand he took. Here and there, +from very necessity, the people had organized to resist the +invaders, but as no one could tell where they would strike next, +they were not often successful, and fear and discouragement sat +heavy on the land. From his own city of Roskilde a little fleet of +swift sailers under the bold Wedeman had for years waged relentless +war upon the freebooters and had taken four times the number of +their own ships. Their crews were organized into a brotherhood with +vows like an order of fighting monks. Before setting out on a cruise +they were shriven and absolved. Their vows bound them to unceasing +vigilance, to live on the plainest of fare, to sleep on their arms, +ready for instant attack, and to the rescue of Christians, wherever +they were found in captivity. The Roskilde guild became the strong +core of the King's armaments in his score of campaigns against the +Wends. + +Perhaps it was not strange that Valdemar should be of two minds +about venturing to attack so formidable an enemy in his own house. +The nation was cowed and slow to move. In fact, from the first +expedition, that started with 250 vessels, only seven returned with +the standard, keeping up a running fight all the way across the +Baltic with pursuing Wends. The rest had basely deserted. On the +way over, the King, listening to their doubts and fears, turned back +himself once, but Absalon, who always led in the attack and was the +last on the homeward run, overtook him and gave him the talking to +be deserved. Saxo, who was very likely there and heard, for there is +little doubt that he accompanied his master on many of the campaigns +he so vividly describes, gives us a verbatim report of the lecture: + +"What wonder," said the bishop, "if the words stick in our throats +and are nigh to stifling us, when such grievous dole is ours! Grieve +we must, indeed, to find in you such a turncoat that naught but +dishonor can come of it. You follow where you should lead, and those +you should rule over, you make your peers. There is nothing to stop +us but our own craven souls, hunt as we may for excuses. Is it with +such laurel you would bind your crown? with such high deed you would +consecrate your reign?" + +The King was hard hit, and showed it, but he walked away without a +word. In the night a furious storm swept the sea and kept the fleet +in shelter four whole days, during which Valdemar's anger had time +to cool. He owned then that Absalon was right, and the friends shook +hands. The King gave order to make sail as soon as the gale abated. +If there was still a small doubt in Absalon's mind as he turned, on +taking leave, and asked, "What now, if we must turn back once more?" +Valdemar set it at rest: + +"Then you write me from Wendland," he laughed, "and tell me how +things are there." + +If little glory or gain came to the Danes from this first +expedition, at least they landed in the enemy's country and made +reprisal for past tort. The spirit of the people rose and shamed +them for their cowardice. When the King's summons went round again, +as it did speedily, there were few laggards. Attacked at home, the +Wends lost much of the terror they had inspired. Before many moons, +the chronicle records, the Danes cut their spear-shafts short, that +they might the more handily get at the foe. Scarce a year passed +that did not see one or more of these crusades. Absalon preached +them all, and his ship was ever first in landing. In battle he and +the King fought shoulder to shoulder. In the spring of 1169, he had +at last his wish: the heathen idols were destroyed and their temples +burned. + +The holy city of the Wends, Arcona, stood on a steep cliff, +inaccessible save from the west, where a wall a hundred feet high +defended it. While the sacred banner Stanitza waved over it the +Danes might burn and kill, but the power of Svantevit was unbroken. +Svantevit was the god of gods in whose presence his own priests +dared not so much as breathe. When they had to, they must go to the +door and breathe in the open, a good enough plan if Saxo's disgust +at the filth of the Wendish homes was justified. Svantevit was a +horrid monster with four heads, and girt about with a huge sword. Up +till then the Christian arms had always been stayed at his door, but +this time the King laid siege to Arcona, determined to make an end +of him. Some of the youngsters in his army, making a mock assault +upon the strong walls, discovered an accidental hollow under the +great tower over which the Stanitza flew and, seizing upon a load of +straw that was handy, stuffed it in and set it on fire. It was done +in a frolic, but when the tower caught fire and was burned and the +holy standard fell, Absalon was quick to see his advantage, and got +the King to order a general assault. The besieged Wends, having no +water, tried to put out the fire with milk, but, says the chronicle, +"it only fed the flames." They fought desperately till, between fire +and foe, they were seized with panic and, calling loudly upon +Absalon in their extremity, offered to give up their city. The army +clamored for the revenge that was at last within their grasp, and +the King hesitated; but Absalon met the uproar firmly, reminding +them that they had crossed the seas to convert the heathen, not to +sack their towns. + +The city was allowed to surrender and the people were spared, but +Svantevit and his temple were destroyed. A great crowd of his +followers had gathered to see him crush his enemies at the last, and +Absalon cautioned the men who cut the idol down to be careful that +he did not fall on them and so seem to justify their hopes. "He fell +with so great a noise that it was a wonder," says Saxo, naively; +"and in the same moment the fiend ran out of the temple in a black +shape with such speed that no eye could follow him or see where he +went." Svantevit was dragged out of the town and chopped into bits. +That night he fed the fires of the camp. So fickle is popular favor +that when the crowd saw that nothing happened, they spurned the god +loudly before whom they had grovelled in the dust till then. + +When they heard of Arcona's fall in the royal city of Karents, they +hastened with offers of surrender, and Absalon went there with a +single ship's crew to take possession. They were met by 6000 armed +Wends, who guarded the narrow approach to the city. In single file +they walked between the ranks of the enemy, who stood with inverted +spears, watching them in sullen silence. His men feared a trap, but +Absalon strode ahead unmoved. Coming to the temple of their local +god, Rygievit, he attacked him with his axe and bade his guard fall +to, which they did. Saxo has left us a unique description of this +idol that stood behind purple hangings, fashioned of oak "in every +evil and revolting shape. The swallows had made their nests in his +mouths and throats" (there were seven in so many faces) "and filled +him up with all manner of stinking uncleanness. Truly, for such god +was such sacrifice fit." He had a sword for every one of his seven +faces, buckled about his ample waist, but for all that he went the +way of the others, and even had to put up with the indignity of the +Christian priests standing upon him while he was being dragged out. +That seems to have helped cure his followers of their faith in him. +They delivered the temple treasure into the hands of the King--seven +chests filled with money and valuables, among them a silver cup +which the wretched King Svend had sent to Svantevit as a bribe to +the Wends for joining him against his own country and kin. But those +days were ended. It was the Danes' turn now, and Wendland was laid +waste until "the swallows found no eaves of any house whereunder to +build their nests and were forced to build them on the ships." A sad +preliminary to bringing the country under the rule of the Prince of +Peace; but in the scheme of those days the sword was equal partner +with the cross in leading men to the true God. + +The heathen temples were destroyed and churches built on their +sites of the timber gathered for the siege of Arcona. The people, +deserted by their own, accepted the Christians' God in good faith, +and were baptized in hosts, thirteen hundred on one day and nine +hundred on the next. Three days and nights Absalon saw no sleep. He +did nothing half-way. No sooner was he back home than he sent over +priests and teachers supplied with everything, even food for their +keep, so that they "should not be a burden to the people whom they +had come to show the way to salvation." + +The Wends were conquered, but the end was not yet. They had savage +neighbors, and many a crusade did Absalon lead against them in the +following years, before the new title of the Danish rulers, "King of +the Slavs and Wends," was much more than an empty boast. He +organized a regular sea patrol of one-fourth of the available ships, +of which he himself took command, and said mass on board much +oftener than in the Roskilde church. It is the sailor, the warrior, +the leader of men one sees through all the troubled years of his +royal friend's life. Now the Danish fleet is caught in the inland +sea before Stettin, unable to make its way out, and already the +heathen hosts are shouting their triumph on shore. It is Absalon, +then, who finds the way and, as one would expect, he forces it. The +captains wail over the trap and abuse him for getting them into it. +Absalon, disdaining to answer them, leads his ships in single file +straight for the gap where the Wendish fleet lies waiting, and gets +the King to attack with his horsemen on shore. Between them the +enemy is routed, and the cowards are shamed. But when they come to +make amends, he is as unmoved as ever and will have none of it. +Again, when he is leading his men to the attack on a walled town, a +bridge upon which they crowd breaks, and it is the bishop who saves +his comrades from drowning, swimming ashore with them in full armor. + +Resting in his castle at Haffn, the present Copenhagen, which he +built as a defence against the sea-rovers, he hears, while in his +bath, his men talking of strange ships that are sailing into the +Sound, and, hastily throwing on his clothes, gives chase and kills +their crews, for they were pirates whose business was murder, and +they merely got their deserts. In the pursuit his archers "pinned +the hands of the rowers to the oars with their arrows" and crippled +them, so skilful had much practice made them. Turn the leaf of +Saxo's chronicle, and we find him under Ruegen with his fleet, +protecting the now peaceful Wendish fishermen in their autumn +herring-catch, on which their livelihood depended. Of such stuff was +made the bishop who + + "Used his trusty Danish sword + As the Pope his staff in Rome." + +Wherever danger threatens Valdemar and Absalon, Esbern is found, +too, earning the name of the Fleet (Snare), which the people had +fondly given to their favorite. Where the fighting was hardest, he +was sure to be. The King's son had ventured too far and was caught +in a tight place by an overwhelming force, when Esbern pushed his +ship in between him and the enemy and bore the brunt of a fight that +came near to making an end of him. He had at last only a single man +left, but the two made a stand against a hundred. "When the heathen +saw his face they fled in terror." At last they knocked him +senseless with a stone and would have killed him, but in the nick of +time the King's men came to the rescue. + +Coming home from Norway he ran afoul of forty pirate ships under +the coast of Seeland. He tried to steal past; forty against one were +heavy odds. But it was moonlight and he was discovered. The pirates +lay across his course and cut him off. Esbern made ready for a fight +and steered straight into the middle of them. The steersman +complained that he had no armor, and he gave him his own. He beat +his pursuers off again and again, but the wind slackened and they +were closing in once more, swearing by their heathen gods that they +would have him dead or alive, for a Danish prisoner on one of their +ships had told who he was. But Esbern had more than one string to +his bow. He sent a man aloft with flint and steel to strike fire in +the top, and the pirates, believing that he was signalling to a +fleet he had in ambush, fled helter-skelter. Esbern got home safe. + +The German emperors' fingers had always itched for the over-lordship +of the Danish isles, and they have not ceased to do so to this day. +When Frederick Barbarossa drove Alexander III from Rome and set up a +rival Pope in his place, Archbishop Eskild of Lund, who was the +Primate of the North, championed the exiled Pope's case, and +Valdemar, whose path the ambitious priest had crossed more than +once, let it be known that he inclined to the Emperor's cause, in +part probably from mere pique, perhaps also because he thought it +good politics. The archbishop in a rage summoned Absalon and bade +him join him in a rising against the King. Absalon's answer is +worthy the man and friend: + +"My oath to you I will keep, and in this wise, that I will not +counsel you to your own undoing. Whatever your cause against the +King, war against him you cannot, and succeed. And this know, that +never will I join with you against my liege lord, to whom I have +sworn fealty and friendship with heart and soul all the days of my +life." + +He could not persuade the archbishop, who went his own way and was +beaten and exiled for a season, nor could he prevent the King from +yielding to the blandishments of Frederick and getting mixed up in +the papal troubles; but he went with him to Germany and saved him at +the last moment from committing himself by making him leave the +church council just as the anti-pope was about to pronounce sentence +of excommunication against Alexander. He commanded Absalon to +remain, as a servant of the church, but Absalon replied calmly that +he was not there in that capacity, but as an attendant on his King, +and must follow where he went. It appeared speedily that the +Emperor's real object was to get Valdemar to own him as his +over-lord, and this he did, to Absalon's great grief, on the idle +promise that Frederick would join him in his war upon all the Baltic +pagans. However, it was to be a purely personal matter, in nowise +affecting his descendants. That much was saved, and Absalon lived +long enough to fling back, as the counsellor of Valdemar's son, from +behind the stout wall he built at Denmark's southern gate, the +Emperor's demand for homage, with the reply that "the King ruled in +Denmark with the same right as the Emperor in Germany, and was no +man's subject." + +However grievously Absalon had offended the aged archbishop, when +after forty years in his high office illness compelled him to lay it +down, he could find no one so worthy to step into his shoes. He sent +secretly to Rome and got the Pope's permission to name his own +successor, before he called a meeting of the church. The account of +what followed is the most singular of all Saxo's stories. Valdemar +did not know what was coming and, fearing fresh trouble, got the +archbishop to swear on the bones of the saints before them all that +he was not moved to abdication by hate of the King, or by any +coercion whatever. Then the venerable priest laid his staff, his +mitre, and his ring on the altar and announced that he had done with +it all forever. But he had made up his mind not to use the power +given him by the Pontiff. They might choose his successor +themselves. He would do nothing to influence their action. + +The bishops and clergy went to the King and asked him if he had any +choice. The King said he had, but if he made it known he would get +no thanks for it and might estrange his best friend. If he did not, +he would certainly be committing a sin. He did not know what to do. + +"Name him," said they, and Valdemar told them it was the bishop of +Roskilde. + +At that the old archbishop got up and insisted on the election then +and there; but Absalon would have none of it. The burden was too +heavy for his shoulders, he said. However, the clergy seized him, +"being," says Saxo, who without doubt was one of them, "the more +emboldened to do so as the archbishop himself laid hands upon him +first." Intoning the hymn sung at archiepiscopal consecrations, they +tried to lead him to the altar. He resisted with all his might and +knocked several of the brethren down. Vestments were torn and +scattered, and a mighty ruction arose, to which the laity, not to be +outdone, added by striking up a hymn of their own. Archbishop and +King tried vainly to make peace; the clamor and battle only rose the +higher. Despite his struggles, Absalon was dragged to the high seat, +but as they were about to force him into it, he asked leave to say a +single word, and instantly appealed his case to the Pope. So there +was an end; but when the aged Eskild, on the plea of weakness, +begged him to pronounce the benediction, he refused warily, because +so he would be exercising archiepiscopal functions and would be _de +facto_ incumbent of the office.[4] + +[Footnote 4: That all this in no way affected the personal relations +of the two men Saxo assures us in one of the little human touches +with which his chronicle abounds. When Eskild was going away to end +his days as a monk in the monastery of Clairvaux, he rested awhile +with Absalon at his castle Haffn, where he was received as a father. +The old man suffered greatly from cold feet, and Absalon made a box +with many little holes in, and put a hot brick in it. With this at +his feet, Eskild was able to sleep, and he was very grateful to +Absalon, both because of the comfort it gave him and "because that +he perceived that filial piety rather than skill in the healer's +art" prompted the invention.] + +Here, as always, Absalon thought less of himself than of his +country, so the event showed. For when the Pope heard his plea, +though he decided against him, he allowed him to hold the bishopric +of Roskilde together with the higher office, and so he was left at +Valdemar's side to help finish their work of building up Denmark +within and without. At Roskilde he spent, as a matter of fact, most +of his time while Valdemar lived. At Lund he would have been in a +distant part of the country, parted from his friend and out of touch +with the things that were the first concern of his life. + +They were preparing to aim a decisive blow against the Pomeranian +pagans when Valdemar died, on the very day set for the sailing. The +parting nearly killed Absalon. Saxo draws a touching picture of him +weeping bitterly as he said the requiem mass over his friend, and +observes: "Who can doubt that his tears, rising with the incense, +gave forth a peculiar and agreeable savour in high heaven before +God?" The plowmen left their fields and carried the bier, with sobs +and lamentations, to the church in Ringsted, where the great King +rests. His sorrow laid Absalon on a long and grievous sick-bed, from +which he rose only when Valdemar's son needed and called him. + +In the fifteen years that follow we see his old warlike spirit still +unbroken. Thus his defiance of the German Emperor, whose anger was +hot. Frederick, in revenge, persuaded the Pomeranian duke Bugislav +to organize a raid on Denmark with a fleet of five hundred sail. +Scant warning reached Absalon of the danger. King Knud was away, and +there was no time to send for him. Mustering such vessels as were +near, he sailed across the Baltic and met the enemy under Ruegen the +day after Whitsuntide (1184). The bishop had gone ashore to say mass +on the beach, when word was brought that the great fleet was in +sight. Hastily pulling off his robe and donning armor instead, he +made for his ship with the words: "Now let our swords sing the +praise of God." The Pomeranians were taken completely by surprise. +They did not know the Danes were there, and when they heard the +archbishop's dreaded war-cry raised, they turned and fled in such +terror and haste that eighteen of their ships were run down and sunk +with all on board. On one, a rower hanged himself for fear of +falling into the hands of the Danes. Absalon gave chase, and the +rout became complete. Of the five hundred ships only thirty-five +escaped; all the rest were either sunk or taken. Duke Bugislav soon +after became a vassal of Denmark, and of the Emperor's plots there +was an end. + +It was the last blow, and the story of it went far and wide. +Absalon's work was nearly done. Denmark was safe from her enemies. +The people were happy and prosperous. Valdemar's son ruled +unchallenged, and though he was childless, by his side stood his +brother, a manly youth who, not yet full grown, had already shown +such qualities of courage and sagacious leadership that the old +archbishop could hang up the sword with heart at ease. The promise +was kept. The second Valdemar became Denmark's royal hero for all +time. Absalon's last days were devoted to strengthening the Church, +around which he had built such a stout wall. He built churches and +cloisters, and guided them with a wise and firm hand. And he made +Saxo, his clerk, set it all down as an eye-witness of these things, +and as one who came to the task by right; for, says the chronicler, +"have not my grandfather and his father before him served the King +well on land and sea, hence why should not I serve him with my +book-learning?" He bears witness that the bishop himself is his +authority for much that he has written. + +Archbishop Absalon closed his eyes on St. Benedict's Day, March 21, +1201, in the cloister at Soroe which Sir Asker built and where he +lived his last days in peace. Absalon's statue of bronze, on +horseback, battle-axe in hand, stands in the market square in +Copenhagen, the city he founded and of which he is the patron saint; +but his body lies within the quiet sanctuary where, in the deep +forest glades, one listens yet for the evensong of the monks, long +silent now. When his grave was opened, in 1826, the lines of his +tall form, clad in clerical robes, were yet clearly traceable. The +strong hands, turned to dust, held a silver chalice in which lay his +episcopal ring. They are there to be seen to-day, with remnants of +his staff that had partly crumbled away. No Dane approaches his +grave without emotion. "All Denmark grieved for him," says a German +writer of that day, "and commended his soul to Jesus Christ, the +Prince of Peace, for that in his lifetime he had led many who were +enemies to peace and concord." In his old cathedral, in Roskilde +town, lies Saxo, according to tradition under an unmarked stone. +When he went to rest his friend and master had slept five years. + +Esbern outlived his brother three years. The hero of so many battles +met his death at last by an accidental fall in his own house. The +last we hear of him is at a meeting in the Christmas season, 1187, +where emissaries of Pope Gregory VIII preached a general crusade. +Their hearers wept at the picture they drew of the sufferings +Christians were made to endure in the Holy Land. Then arose Esbern +and reminded them of the great deeds of the fathers at home and +abroad. The faith and the fire of Absalon were in his words: + +"These things they did," he said, "for the glory of their name and +race, knowing nothing of our holy religion. Shall we, believing, do +less? Let us lay aside our petty quarrels and take up this greater +cause. Let us share the sufferings of the saints and earn their +reward. Perhaps we shall win--God keeps the issue. Let him who +cannot give himself, give of his means. So shall all we, sharing the +promise, share also the reward." + +The account we have says that many took the cross, such was the +effect of his words, more likely of the man and what he was and had +been in the sight of them all throughout his long life. + + + + +KING VALDEMAR, AND THE STORY OF THE DANNEBROG + + +To the court of King Ottocar of Bohemia there came in the year 1205 +a brilliant embassy from far-off Denmark to ask the hand of his +daughter Dragomir for King Valdemar, the young ruler of that +country. Sir Strange[1] Ebbesoen and Bishop Peder Sunesoen were the +spokesmen, and many knights, whose fame had travelled far in the +long years of fighting to bring the Baltic pagans under the cross, +rode with them. The old king received them with delight. Valdemar +was not only a good son-in-law for a king to have, being himself a +great and renowned ruler, but he was a splendid knight, tall and +handsome, of most courteous bearing, ambitious, manly, and of ready +wit. So their suit prospered well. The folk-song tells how they +fared; how, according to the custom of those days, Sir Strange +wedded the fair princess by proxy for his lord, and how King +Ottocar, when he bade her good-by, took this promise of her: + + In piety, virtue, and fear of God, + Let all thy days be spent; + And ever thy subjects be thy thought, + Their hopes on thy care be bent. + +[Footnote 1: Pronounce as Strangle, with the l left out.] + +The daughter kept her vow. Never was queen more beloved of her +people than Dagmar. That was the name they gave her in Denmark, for +the Bohemian Dragomir was strange to them. Dagmar meant daybreak in +their ancient tongue, and it really seemed as if a new and beautiful +day dawned upon the land in her coming. The dry pages of history +have little enough to tell of her beyond the simple fact of her +marriage and untimely death, though they are filled with her famous +husband's deeds; but not all of his glorious campaigns that earned +for him the name of "The Victor" have sunk so deep into the people's +memory, or have taken such hold of their hearts, as the lovely queen +who + + Came without burden, she came with peace; + She came the good peasant to cheer. + +Through all the centuries the people have sung her praise, and they +sing it yet. Of the many folk-songs that have come down from the +middle ages, those that tell of Queen Dagmar are the sweetest, as +they are the most mournful, for her happiness was as brief as her +life was beautiful. + +They sailed homeward over sunny seas, until they came to the shore +where the royal lover awaited his bride, impatiently scanning the +horizon for the gilded dragon's head of the ship that bore her. The +minstrel sings of the great wedding that was held in the old city of +Ribe.[2] The gray old cathedral in which they knelt together still +stands; but of Valdemar's strong castle only a grass-grown hill is +left. It was the privilege of a bride in those days to ask a gift of +her husband on the morning after the wedding, and have it granted +without question. Two boons did Dagmar crave, + + "right early in the morning, long before it was day": + +one, that the plow-tax might be forgiven the peasant, and that those +who for rising against it had been laid in irons be set free; the +other, that the prison door of Bishop Valdemar be opened. Bishop +Valdemar was the arch-enemy of the King. The first request he +granted; but the other he refused for cause: + + An' he comes out, Bishop Valdemar, + Widow he makes you this year. + +And he did his worst; for in the end the King yielded to Dagmar's +prayers, and much mischief came of it. + +[Footnote 2: Pronounced Reebe, in two syllables.] + +Seven years the good queen lived. Seven centuries have not dimmed +the memory of them, or of her. The King was away in a distant part +of the country when they sent to him in haste with the message that +the queen was dying. The ballad tells of his fears as he sees +Dagmar's page coming, and they proved only too true. + + The king his checker-board shut in haste, + The dice they rattled and rung. + Forbid it God, who dwells in heaven, + That Dagmar should die so young. + +In the wild ride over field and moor, the King left his men far +behind: + + When the king rode out of Skanderborg + Him followed a hundred men. + But when he rode o'er Ribe bridge, + Then rode the king alone. + +The tears of weeping women told him as he thundered over the +drawbridge of the castle that he was too late. But Dagmar had only +swooned. As he throws himself upon her bed she opens her eyes, and +smiles upon her husband. Her last prayer, as her first, is for mercy +and peace. Her sin, she says, is not great; she has done nothing +worse than to lace her silken sleeves on a Sunday. Then she closes +her eyes with a tired sigh: + + The bells of heaven are chiming for me; + No more may I stay to speak. + +Thus the folk-song. Long before Dagmar went to her rest, Bishop +Valdemar had stirred up all Germany to wreak his vengeance upon the +King. He was an ambitious, unscrupulous priest, who hated his royal +master because he held himself entitled to the crown, being the +natural son of King Knud, who was murdered at Roskilde, as told in +the story of Absalon. While they were yet young men, when he saw +that the people followed his rival, he set the German princes +against Denmark, a task he never found hard. But young Valdemar made +short work of them. He took the strong cities on the Elbe and laid +the lands of his adversaries under the Danish crown. The bishop he +seized, and threw him into the dungeon of Soeborg Castle, where he +had sat thirteen years when Dagmar's prayers set him free. He could +hardly walk when he came out, but he could hate, and all the world +knew it. The Pope bound him with heavy oaths never to return to +Denmark, and made him come to Italy so that he could keep an eye on +him himself. But two years had not passed before he broke his oath, +and fled to Bremen, where the people elected him to the vacant +archbishopric and its great political power. Forthwith he began +plotting against his native land. + +In the bitter feud between the Guelphs and the Ghibellines he found +his opportunity. One of the rival emperors marched an army north to +help the perjured priest. King Valdemar hastened to meet them, but +on the eve of battle the Emperor was slain by one of his own men. On +Sunday, when the archbishop was saying mass in the Bremen cathedral, +an unknown knight, the visor of whose helmet was closed so that no +one saw his face, strode up to the altar, and laying a papal bull +before him, cried out that he was accursed, and under the ban of the +church. The people fled, and forsaken by all, the wretched man +turned once more to Rome in submission. But though the Pope forgave +him on condition that he meddle no more with politics, war, or +episcopal office, another summer found him wielding sword and lance +against the man he hated, this time under the banner of the Guelphs. +The Germans had made another onset on Denmark, but again King +Valdemar defeated them. The bishop intrenched himself in Hamburg, +and made a desperate resistance, but the King carried the city by +storm. The beaten and hopeless man fled, and shut himself up in a +cloister in Hanover, where daily and nightly he scourged himself for +his sins. If it is true that "hell was fashioned by the souls that +hated," not all the penance of all the years must have availed to +save him from the torments of the lost. + +Denmark now had peace on its southern border. Dagmar was dead, and +Valdemar, whose restless soul yearned for new worlds to conquer, +turned toward the east where the wild Esthland tribes were guilty of +even worse outrages than the Wends before Absalon tamed them. The +dreadful cruelties practised by these pagans upon christian captives +cried aloud to all civilized Europe, and Valdemar took the cross +"for the honor of the Virgin Mary and the absolution of his sins," +and gathered a mighty fleet, the greatest ever assembled in Danish +waters. With more than a thousand ships he sailed across the Baltic. +The Pope sped them with his apostolic blessing, and took king and +people into his especial care, forbidding any one to attack the +country while they were away converting the heathen. Archbishop +Anders led the crusade with the king. As the fleet approached the +shore they saw it covered with an innumerable host of the enemy. So +great was their multitude that the crusaders quailed before the +peril of landing; but the archbishop put heart into them, and led +the fleet in fervent prayer to the God of battle. Then they landed +without hindrance. + +There was an old stronghold there called Lyndanissa that had fallen +into decay. The crusaders busied themselves for two days with +building another and better fort. On the third day, being St. Vitus' +Day, they rested, fearing no harm. The Esthlanders had not troubled +them. Some of their chiefs had even come in with an offer of +surrender. They were willing to be converted, they said, and the +priests were baptizing them after vespers, while the camp was making +ready for the night, when suddenly the air was filled with the yells +of countless savages. On every side they broke from the woods, where +they had been gathering unsuspected, and overwhelmed the camp. The +guards were hewn down, the outposts taken, and the King's men were +falling back in confusion, their standard lost, when Prince Vitislav +of Ruegen who had been camping with his men in a hollow between the +sand-hills, out of the line of attack, threw himself between them +and the Esthlanders, and gave the Danes time to form their lines. + +In the twilight of the June evening the battle raged with great +fury. With the King at their head, who had led them to victory on so +many hard-fought fields, the Danes drove back their savage foes time +after time, literally hewing their way through their ranks with +sword and battle-axe. But they were hopelessly outnumbered. Their +hearts misgave them as they saw ten heathen spring out of the ground +for every one that was felled. The struggle grew fiercer as night +came on. The Christians were fighting for life; defeat meant that +they must perish to a man, by the sword or upon pagan altars; escape +there was none. Upon the cliff overlooking the battle-field the +archbishop and his priests were praying for success to the King's +arms. Tradition that has been busy with this great battle all +through the ages tells how, while the aged bishop's hands were +raised toward heaven, victory leaned to the Danes; but when he grew +tired, and let them fall, the heathen won forward, until the priests +held up his hands and once more the tide of battle rolled back from +the shore, and the Christian war-cry rose higher. + +Suddenly, in the clash of steel upon steel and the wild tumult of +the conflict, there arose a great and wondering cry "the banner! the +banner! a miracle!" and Christian and pagan paused to listen. Out of +the sky, as it seemed, over against the hill upon which the priests +knelt, a blood-red banner with a great white cross was seen falling +into the ranks of the Christian knights, and a voice resounded over +the battle-field, "Bear this high, and victory shall be yours." With +the exultant cry, "For God and the King," the crusaders seized it, +and charged the foe. Terror-stricken, the Esthlanders wavered, then +turned, and fled. The battle became a massacre. Thousands were +slain. The chronicles say that the dead lay piled fathom-high on the +field that ran red with blood. Upon it, when the pursuit was over, +Valdemar knelt with his men, and they bowed their heads in +thanksgiving, while the venerable archbishop gave praise to God for +the victory. + +That is the story of the Dannebrog which has been the flag of the +Danes seven hundred years. Whether the archbishop had brought it +with him intending to present it to King Valdemar, and threw it down +among the fighting hordes in the moment of extreme peril, or +whether, as some think, the Pope himself had sent it to the +crusaders with a happy inspiration, the fact remains that it came to +the Danes in this great battle, and on the very day which, fifty +years before, had seen the fall of Arcona, and the end of +idol-worship among the western Slavs. Three hundred years the +standard flew over the Danes fighting on land and sea. Then it was +lost in a campaign against the Holstein counts and, when recovered +half a century later, was hung up in the cathedral at Slesvig, +where gradually it fell to pieces. In the first half of the +Nineteenth Century, when national feeling and national pride were at +their lowest ebb, it was taken down with other moth-eaten old +banners, one day when they were cleaning up, and somebody made a +bonfire of them in the street. Such was the fate of "the flag that +fell from heaven," the sacred standard of the Danes. But it was not +the end of it. The Dannebrog flies yet over the Denmark of the +Valdemars, no longer great as then, it is true, nor master of its +ancient foes; but the world salutes it with respect, for there was +never blot of tyranny or treason upon it, and its sons own it with +pride wherever they go. + +King Valdemar knighted five and thirty of his brave men on the +battle-field, and from that day the Order of the Dannebrog is said +to date. It bears upon a white crusader's cross the slogan of the +great fight "For God and the King," and on its reverse the date when +it was won, "June 15, 1219." The back of paganism was broken that +day, and the conversion of all Esthland followed soon. King Valdemar +built the castle he had begun before he sailed home, and called it +Reval, after one of the neighboring tribes. The Russian city of that +name grew up about it and about the church which Archbishop Anders +reared. The Dannebrog became its arms, and its people call it to +this day "the city of the Danes." + +Denmark was now at the height of her glory. Her flag flew over all +the once hostile lands to the south and east, clear into Russia. The +Baltic was a Danish inland sea. King Valdemar was named "Victor" +with cause. His enemies feared him; his people adored him. In a +single night foul treachery laid the whole splendid structure low. +The King and young Valdemar, Dagmar's son, with a small suite of +retainers had spent the day hunting on the little island of Lyoe. +Count Henrik of Schwerin,--the Black Count they called him,--who had +just returned from a pilgrimage to the Holy Land, was his guest. The +count hated Valdemar bitterly for some real or fancied injury, but +he hid his hatred under a friendly bearing and smooth speech. He +brought the King gifts from the Holy Sepulchre, hunted with him, and +was his friend. But by night, when the King and his son slept in +their tent, unguarded, since no enemy was thought to be near, he +fell upon them with his cutthroats, bound and gagged them despite +their struggles, and gathering up all the valuables that lay around, +to put the finishing touch upon his villainy, fled with his +prisoners "in great haste and fear," while the King's men slept. +When they awoke, and tried to follow, they found their ships +scuttled. The count's boat had been lying under sail all day, hidden +in a sheltered cove, awaiting his summons. + +Germany at last had the lion and its whelp in her grasp. In chains +and fetters they were dragged from one dungeon to another. The +traitors dared not trust them long in any city, however strong. The +German Emperor shook his fist at Count Henrik, but secretly he was +glad. He would have liked nothing better than to have the precious +spoil in his own power. The Pope thundered in Rome and hurled his +ban at the thugs. But the Black Count's conscience was as swarthy as +his countenance; and besides, had he not just been to the Holy Land, +and thereby washed himself clean of all his sins, past and present? + +Behind prison walls, comforted only by Dagmar's son, sat the King, +growing old and gray with anger and grief. Denmark lay prostrate +under the sudden blow, while her enemies rose on every side. Day by +day word came of outbreaks in the conquered provinces. The people +did not know which way to turn; the strong hand that held the helm +was gone, and the ship drifted, the prey of every ill wind. It was +as if all that had been won by sixty years of victories and +sacrifice fell away in one brief season. The forests filled with +out-laws; neither peasant nor wayfarer, nor yet monk or nun in their +quiet retreat, was safe from outrage; and pirates swarmed again in +bay and sound, where for two generations there had been peace. The +twice-perjured Bishop Valdemar left his cloister cell once more and +girt on the sword, to take the kingdom he coveted by storm. + +He was met by King Valdemar's kinsman and friend, Albert of +Orlamunde, who hastened to the frontier with all the men he could +gather. They halted him with a treaty of peace that offered to set +Valdemar free if he would take his kingdom as a fief of the German +crown. He, Albert, so it was written, was to keep all his lands and +more, would he but sign it. He did not stop to hear the rest, but +slashed the parchment into ribbons with his sword, and ordered an +instant advance. The bishop he made short work of, and he was heard +of no more. But in the battle with the German princes Albert was +defeated and taken prisoner. The door of King Valdemar's dungeon was +opened only to let his friend in. + +After two years and a half in chains, Valdemar was ransomed by his +people with a great sum of gold. The Danish women gave their rings +and their jewels to bring back their king. They flocked about him +when he returned, and received him like the conqueror of old; but he +rode among them gray and stern, and his thoughts were far away. + +They had made him swear on oath upon the sacrament, and all +Denmark's bishops with him, before they set him free, that he would +not seek revenge. But once he was back in his own, he sent to Pope +Gregory, asking him to loose him from an oath wrung from him while +he was helpless in the power of bandits. And the Pope responded that +to keep faith with traitors was no man's duty. Then back he rode +over the River Eider into the enemy's land--for they had stripped +Denmark of all her hard-won possessions south of the ancient border +of the kingdom, except Esthland and Ruegen--and with him went every +man who could bear arms in all the nation. He crushed the Black +Count who tried to block his way, and at Bornhoeved met the German +allies who had gathered from far and near to give him battle. Well +they knew that if Valdemar won, the reckoning would be terrible. All +day they fought, and victory seemed to lean toward the Danes, when +the base Holsteiners, the Danish rear-guard whom the enemy had +bought to betray their king, turned their spears upon his army, and +decided the day. The battle ended in utter rout of Valdemar's +forces. Four thousand Danish men were slain. The King himself fell +wounded on the field, his eye pierced by an arrow, and would have +fallen into the hands of the enemy once more but for an unknown +German knight, who took him upon his horse and bore him in the night +over unfrequented paths to Kiel, where he was safe. + +"But all men said that this great hurt befell the King because that +he brake the oath he swore upon the sacred body of the Lord." + +The wars of Valdemar were over, but his sorrows were not. Four years +later the crushing blow fell when Dagmar's son, who was crowned king +to succeed him, lost his life while hunting. With him, says the +folk-song, died the hope of Denmark. The King had other sons, but to +Dagmar's boy the people had given their love from the first, as they +had to his gentle mother. The old King and his people grieved +together. + +But Valdemar rose above his sorrows. Great as he had been in the +days of victory, he was greater still in adversity. The country was +torn by the wars of three-score years, and in need of rest. He gave +his last days to healing the wounds the sword had struck. Valdemar, +the Victor, became Valdemar, the Law-giver. The laws of the country +had hitherto made themselves. They were the outgrowths of the +people's ancient customs, passed down by word of mouth through the +generations, and confirmed on Thing from time to time. King +Valdemar gave Denmark her first written laws that judged between +man and man, in at least one of her provinces clear down into our +day. "With law shall land be built" begins his code. "The law," it +says, "must be honest, just, reasonable, and according to the ways +of the people. It must meet their needs, and speak plainly so that +all men may know and understand what the law is. It is not to be +made in any man's favor, but for the needs of all them who live in +the land." That is its purpose, and "no man shall judge (condemn) +the law which the King has given and the country chosen; neither +shall he (the King) take it back without the will of the people." +That tells the story of Valdemar's day, and of the people who are so +near of kin with ourselves. They were not sovereign and subjects; +they were a chosen king and a free people, working together "with +law land to build." + +King Valdemar was married twice. The folk-song represents Dagmar as +urging the King with her dying breath + + "that Bengerd, my lord, that base bad dame + you never to wife will take." + +Bengerd, or Berengaria, was a Portuguese princess whom Valdemar +married in spite of the warning, two years later. As the people had +loved the fair Dagmar, so they hated the proud Southern beauty, +whether with reason or not. The story of her "morning gift," as it +has come down to us through the mists of time, is very different +from the other. She asks the King, so the ballad has it, to give her +Samsoe, a great and fertile island, and "a golden crown[3] for every +maid," but he tells her not to be quite so greedy: + + There be full many an honest maid + with not dry bread to eat. + +[Footnote 3: A coin, probably.] + +Undismayed, Bengerd objects that Danish women have no business to +wear silken gowns, and that a good horse is not for a peasant lad. +The King replies patiently that what a woman can buy she may wear +for him, and that he will not take the lad's horse if he can feed +it. Bengerd is not satisfied. "Let bar the land with iron chains" is +her next proposal, that neither man nor woman enter it without +paying tax. Her husband says scornfully that Danish kings have never +had need of such measures, and never will. He is plainly getting +bored, and when she keeps it up, and begrudges the husbandman more +than "two oxen and a cow," he loses his temper, and presumably there +is a matrimonial tiff. Very likely most of this is fiction, bred of +the popular prejudice. The King loved her, that is certain. She was +a beautiful high-spirited woman, so beautiful that many hundreds of +years after, when her grave was opened, the delicate oval of her +skull excited admiration yet. But the people hated her. Twenty +generations after her death it was their custom when passing her +grave to spit on it with the exclamation "Out upon thee, Bengerd! +God bless the King of Denmark"; for in good or evil days they never +wavered in their love and admiration for the king who was a son of +the first Valdemar, and the heir of his greatness and of that of the +sainted Absalon. Tradition has it that Bengerd was killed in battle, +having gone with her husband on one of his campaigns. "It was not +heard in any place," says the folk-song wickedly, "that any one +grieved for her." But the King mourned for his beautiful queen to +the end of his days. + +Bengerd bore Valdemar three sons upon whom he lavished all the +affection of his lonely old age. Erik he chose as his successor, and +to keep his brothers loyal to him he gave them great fiefs and thus, +unknowing, brought on the very trouble he sought to avoid, and set +his foot on the path that led to Denmark's dismemberment after +centuries of bloody wars. For to his second son Abel he gave +Slesvig, and Abel, when his brother became king, sought alliance +with the Holstein count Adolf,[4] the very one who had led the +Germans at the fatal battle of Bornhoeved. The result was a war +between the brothers that raged seven years, and laid waste the +land. Worse was to follow, for Abel was only "Abel in name, but Cain +in deed." But happily the old King's eyes were closed then, and he +was spared the sight of one brother murdering the other for the +kingdom. + +[Footnote 4: That was the beginning of the Slesvig-Holstein question +that troubled Europe to our day; for the fashion set by Abel other +rulers of his dukedom followed, and by degrees Slesvig came to be +reckoned with the German duchies, whereas up till then it had always +been South-Jutland, a part of Denmark proper.] + +Some foreboding of this seems to have troubled him in his last +years. It is related that once when he was mounting his horse to go +hunting he fell into a deep reverie, and remained standing with his +foot in the stirrup a long time, while his men wondered, not daring +to disturb him. At last one of them went to remind him that the sun +was low in the west. The King awoke from his dream, and bade him go +at once to a wise old hermit who lived in a distant part of the +country. "Ask him," he said, "what King Valdemar was thinking of +just now, and bring me his answer." The knight went away on his +strange errand, and found the hermit. And this was the message he +brought back: "Your lord and master pondered as he stood by his +horse, how his sons would fare when he was dead. Tell him that war +and discord they shall have, but kings they will all be." When the +King heard the prophecy he was troubled in mind, and called his sons +and all his great knights to a council at which he pleaded with them +to keep the peace. But though they promised, he was barely in his +grave when riot and bloodshed filled the land. The climax was +reached when Abel inveigled his brother to his home with fair words +and, once he had him in his power, seized him and gave him over to +his men to do with "as they pleased." They understood their master +only too well, and took King Erik out on the fjord in an open boat, +and killed him there, scarce giving him time to say his prayers. +They weighted his body with his helmet, and sank it in the deep. + +Abel made oath with four and twenty of his men that he was innocent +of his brother's blood, and took the crown after him. But the foul +crime was soon avenged. Within a few years he was himself slain by a +peasant in a rising of his own people. For a while his body lay +unburied, the prey of beast and bird, and when it was interred in +the Slesvig cathedral there was no rest for it. "Such turmoil arose +in the church by night that the monks could not chant their vigils," +and in the end they took him out, and buried him in a swamp, with a +stake driven through the heart to lay his ghost. But clear down to +our time when people ceased to believe in ghosts, the fratricide was +seen at night hunting through the woods, coal-black and on a white +horse, with three fiery dogs trailing after; and blue flames burned +over the sea where they vanished. That was how the superstition of +the people judged the man whom the nobles and the priests made +king, red-handed. + +Christopher, the youngest of the three brothers, was king last. His +end was no better than that of the rest. Indeed, it was worse. +Hardly yet forty years old, he died--poisoned, it was said, by the +Abbot Arnfast, in the sacrament as he knelt at the altar-rail in the +Ribe cathedral. He was buried in the chancel where the penitents +going to the altar walk over his grave. So, of all Valdemar's four +sons, not one died a peaceful, natural death. But kings they all +were. + +Valdemar was laid in Ringsted with his great father. He sleeps +between his two queens. Dagmar's grave was disturbed in the late +middle ages by unknown vandals, and the remains of Denmark's +best-loved queen were scattered. Only a golden cross, which she had +worn in life, somehow escaped, and found its way in course of time +into the museum of antiquities at Copenhagen, where it now is, its +chief and priceless treasure. There also is a braid of Queen +Bengerd's hair that was found when her grave was opened in 1855. The +people's hate had followed her even there, and would not let her +rest. The slab that covered her tomb had been pried off, and a round +stone dropped into the place made for her head. Otherwise her grave +was undisturbed. + +"Truly then fell the crown from the heads of Danish men," says the +old chronicle of King Valdemar's death, and black clouds were +gathering ominously even then over the land. But in storm and +stress, as in days that were fair, the Danish people have clung +loyally to the memory of their beloved King and of his sweet Dagmar. + + + + +HOW THE GHOST OF THE HEATH WAS LAID + + +On the map of Europe the mainland of Denmark looks like a beckoning +finger pointing due north and ending in a narrow sand-reef, upon +which the waves of the North Sea and of the Kattegat break with +unceasing clamor and strife. The heart of the peninsula, quite +one-fourth of its area, was fifty years ago a desert, a barren, +melancholy waste, where the only sign of life encountered by the +hunter, gunning for heath-fowl and plover, was a rare shepherd +tending a few lonesome sheep, and knitting mechanically on his +endless stocking. The two, the lean sheep and the long stocking, +together comprised the only industries which the heath afforded and +was thought capable of sustaining. A great change has taken place +within the span of a single life, and it is all due to the clear +sight and patient devotion of one strong man, the Gifford Pinchot of +Denmark. The story of that unique achievement reads like the tale +of the Sleeping Beauty who was roused from her hundred years' sleep +by the kiss of her lover prince. The prince who awoke the slumbering +heath was a captain of engineers, Enrico Dalgas by name. + +Not altogether fanciful is the conceit. Barren, black, and desolate, +the great moor gripped the imagination as no smiling landscape of +field and forest could--does yet, where enough of it remains. Far as +eye reaches the dun heather covers hill and plain with its sombre +pall. Like gloomy sentinels, furry cattails nod in the bog where the +blue gentian peeps timidly into murky pools; the only human +habitation in sight some heath boer's ling-thatched hut, flanked by +rows of peat stacks in vain endeavor to stay the sweep of the +pitiless west wind. On the barrows where the vikings sleep their +long sleep, the plover pipes its melancholy lay; between steep banks +a furtive brook steals swiftly by as if anxious to escape from the +universal blight. Over it all broods the silence of the desert, +drowsy with the hum of many bees winging their swift way to the +secret feeding-places they know of, where mayflower and anemone hide +under the heather, witness that forests grew here in the long ago. +In midsummer, when the purple is on the broom, a strange pageant +moves on the dim horizon, a shifting mirage of sea and shore, +forest, lake, and islands lying high, with ships and castles and +spires of distant churches--the witchery of the heath that speaks in +the tales and superstitions of its simple people. High in the blue +soars the lark, singing its song of home and hope to its nesting +mate. This is the heath which, denying to the hardest toil all but +the barest living, has given of its poetry to the Danish tongue some +of its sweetest songs. + +But in this busy world day-dreams must make way for the things that +make the day count, castles in the air to homes upon the soil. The +heath had known such in the dim past. It had not always been a +desert. The numberless cairns that lie scattered over it, sometimes +strung out for miles as if marking the highways of the ancients, +which they doubtless do, sometimes grouped where their villages +stood, bear witness to it. Great battles account for their share, +and some of them were fought in historic times. On Grathe Heath the +young King Valdemar overcame his treacherous rival Svend. Alone and +hunted, the beaten man sought refuge, Saxo tells us, behind a stump, +where he was found and slain by one of the King's axemen. A chapel +was built on the spot. More than seven centuries later (in 1892) +they dug there, and found the bones of a man with skull split in +two. + +The stump behind which the wretched Svend hid was probably the last +representative of great forests that grew where now is sterile moor. +In the bogs trunks of oak and fir are found lying as they fell +centuries ago. The local names preserve the tradition, with here and +there patches of scrub oak that hug the ground close, to escape the +blast from the North Sea. There is one such thicket near the hamlet +of Taulund--the name itself tells of long-forgotten groves--and the +story runs among the people yet that once squirrels jumped from tree +to tree without touching ground all the way from Taulund to +Gjellerup church, a stretch of more than five miles to which the +wild things of the woods have long been strangers. In the shelter of +the old forests men dwelt through ages, and made the land yield them +a living. Some cairns that have been explored span over more than a +thousand years. They were built in the stone age, and served the +people of the bronze and iron ages successively as burial-places, +doubtless the same tribes who thus occupied their homesteads from +generation to generation. That they were farmers, not nomads, is +proved by the clear impression of grains of wheat and barley in +their burial urns. The seeds strayed into the clay and were burned +away, but the impression abides, and tells the story. + +Clear down to historic times there was a thrifty population in many +of the now barren spots. But a change was slowly creeping over the +landscape. The country was torn by long and bloody wars. The big men +fought for the land and the little ones paid the score, as they +always do. They were hunted from house and home. Next the wild +hordes of the Holstein counts overran Jutland. Its towns were +burned, the country laid waste. Great fires swept the forests. What +ravaging armies had left was burned in the smelteries. In the sandy +crust of the heath there is iron, and swords and spears were the +grim need of that day. The smelteries are only names now. They +went, but they took the forests with them, and where the ground was +cleared the west wind broke through, and ruin followed fast. Last of +all came the Black Death, and set its seal of desolation upon it +all. When it had passed, the country was a huge graveyard. The heath +had moved in. Rovers and smugglers found refuge there; honest folk +shunned it. Under the heather the old landmarks are sometimes found +yet, and deep ruts made by wheels that long since ceased to turn. + +In the Eighteenth Century men began to think of reclamation. A +thousand German colonists were called in and settled on the heath, +but it was stronger than they, and they drifted away until scarce +half a hundred families remained. The Government tried its hand, but +there was no one who knew just how, and only discouragement +resulted. Then came the war with Germany in 1864, that lost to +Denmark a third of her territory. The country lay prostrate under +the crushing blow. But it rose above defeat and disaster, and once +more expectant eyes were turned toward the ancient domain that had +slipped from its grasp. "What was lost without must be won within" +became the national slogan. And this time the man for the task was +at hand. + +Enrico Mylius Dalgas was by the accident of birth an Italian, his +father being the Danish consul in Naples; by descent a Frenchman; by +choice and training a Dane, typical of the best in that people. He +came of the Huguenot stock that left France after the repeal of the +Edict of Nantes in 1685 and scattered over Europe, to the great good +of every land in which it settled. They had been tillers of the soil +from the beginning, and at least two of the family, who found homes +in Denmark, made in their day notable contributions to the cause of +advanced, sensible husbandry. Enrico's father, though a merchant, +had an open eye for the interests which in later years claimed the +son's life-work. In the diary of a journey through Sweden he makes +indignant comment upon the reckless way in which the people of that +country dealt with their forests. That he was also a man of +resolution is shown by an incident of the time when Jew-baiting was +having its sorry day in Denmark. An innkeeper mistook the +dark-skinned little man for a Jew, and set before him a spoiled +ham, retorting contemptuously, when protest was made, that it was +"good enough for a Sheeny." Without further parley Mr. Dalgas seized +the hot ham by its shank and beat the fellow with it till he cried +for mercy. The son tells of the first school he attended, when he +was but five years old. It was kept by the widow of one of +Napoleon's generals, a militant lady who every morning marshalled +the school, a Lilliputian army with the teachers flanking the line +like beardless sergeants in stays and petticoats, and distributed +rewards and punishments as the great Emperor was wont to do after a +battle. For the dunces there was a corner strewn with dried peas on +which they were made to kneel with long-eared donkey caps adorning +their luckless heads. Very likely it was after an insult of this +kind that Enrico decided to elope to America with his baby sister. +They were found down by the harbor bargaining with some fishermen to +take them over to Capri _en route_ for the land of freedom. The +elder Dalgas died while the children were yet little, and the widow +went back to Denmark to bring up her boys there. + +They were poor, and the change from the genial skies of sunny Italy +to the bleak North did not make it any easier for them. Enrico's +teacher saw it, and gave him his overcoat to be made over. But the +boys spotted it and squared accounts with their teacher by +snowballing the wearer of the big green plaid until he was glad to +leave it at home, and go without. He was in the military school when +war broke out with Germany in 1848. Both of his brothers +volunteered, and fell in battle. Enrico was ordered out as +lieutenant, and put on the shoulder-straps joyfully, to the great +scandal of his godfather in Milan, who sympathized with the German +cause. When the young soldier refused to resign he not only cut him +off in his will, but took away a pension of four hundred kroner he +had given his mother in her widowhood. If he had thoughts of +bringing them over by such means, he found out his mistake. Mother +and son were made of sterner stuff. Dalgas fought twice for his +country, the last time in 1864, as a captain of engineers. + +It was no ordinary class, the one of 1851 that resumed its studies +in the military high school. Two of the students did not answer +roll-call; their names were written among the nation's heroic dead. +Some had scars and wore the cross for valor in battle. All were +first lieutenants, to be graduated as captains. Dalgas had himself +transferred from the artillery to the engineers, and was detailed as +road inspector. So the opportunity of his life came to him. + +There were few railways in those days; the highways were still the +great arteries of traffic. Dalgas built roads that crossed the +heath, and he learned to know it and the strong and independent, if +narrow, people who clung to it with such a tenacious grip. He had a +natural liking for practical geology and for the chemistry of the +soil, and the deep cuts which his roads sometimes made gave him the +best of chances for following his bent. The heath lay as an open +book before him, and he studied it with delight. He found the traces +of the old forests, and noted their extent. Occasionally the pickaxe +uncovered peat deposits of unsuspected depth and value. Sometimes +the line led across the lean fields, and damages had to be discussed +and assessed. He learned the point of view of the heath farmer, +sympathized with his struggles, and gained his confidence. Best of +all, he found a man of his own mind, a lawyer by the name of +Morville, himself a descendant of the exiled Huguenots. It is not a +little curious that when the way was cleared for the Heath Society's +great work, in its formal organization with M. Mourier-Petersen, a +large landowner, as their associate in its management, the three men +who for a quarter of a century planned the work and marked out the +groove in which it was to run were all of that strong stock which is +by no means the most common in Denmark. + +With his lawyer friend Captain Dalgas tramped the heath far and wide +for ten years. Then their talks had matured a plan. Dalgas wrote to +the Copenhagen newspapers that the heath could be reclaimed, and +suggested that it should be done by the State. They laughed at him. +"Nothing better could have happened," he said in after years, "for +it made us turn to the people themselves, and that was the road to +success, though we did not know it." In the spring of 1866 a hundred +men, little and big landowners most of them, met at his call, and +organized the Heath Society[1] with the object of reclaiming the +moor. Dalgas became its managing director. + +[Footnote 1: Danske Hedeselskab.] + +To restore to the treeless waste its forest growth was the +fundamental idea, for until that was done nothing but the heather +could grow there. The west wind would not let it. But the heath +farmer shook his head. It would cost too much, and give too little +back. What he needed was water and marl. Could the captain help them +to these?--that was another matter. The little streams that found +their way into the heath and lost it there, dire need had taught +them to turn to use in their fields; not a drop escaped. But the +river that ran between deep banks was beyond their reach. Could he +show them how to harness that? Dalgas saw their point. "We are +working, not for the dead soil, but for the living men who find +homes upon it," he told his associates, and tree planting was put +aside for the time. They turned canal diggers instead. Irrigation +became their aim and task; the engineer was in his right place. The +water was raised from the stream and led out upon the moor, and +presently grass grew in the sand which the wiry stems of the heather +had clutched so long. Green meadows lined the water-runs, and +fragrant haystacks rose. To the lean sheep was added a cow, then +two. The farmer laid by a little, and took in more land for +cultivation. That meant breaking the heath. Also, it meant marl. The +heath is lime-poor; marl is lime in the exact form in which it best +fits that sandy soil. It was known to exist in some favored spots, +but the poor heath farmer could not bring it from a distance. So the +marl borer went with the canal digger. Into every acre he drove his +auger, and mapped out his discoveries. At last accounts he had found +marl in more than seventeen hundred places, and he is not done yet. +Where there was none, Dalgas's Society built portable railways into +the moor far enough to bring it to nearly every farmer's door. + +It was as if a magic wand had been waved over the heath. With water +and marl, the means were at hand for fighting it and winning out. +Heads that had drooped in discouragement were raised. The cattle +keep increased, and with it came the farmer's wealth. Marl changes +the character of the heath soil; with manure to fertilize it there +was no reason why it should not grow crops--none, except the +withering blast of the west wind. The time for Dalgas to preach tree +planting had come. + +While the canal digger and marl seeker were at work, there had been +neighborhood meetings and talks at which Captain Dalgas did the +talking. When he spoke the heath boer listened, for he had learned +to look upon him as one of them. He wore no gold lace. A plain man +in every-day gray tweeds, with his trousers tucked into his boots, +he spoke to plain people of things that concerned them vitally, and +in a way they could understand. So when he told them that the heath +had once been forest-clad, at least a large part of it, and pointed +them to the proofs, and that the woods could be made to grow again +to give them timber and shelter and crops, they gave heed. It was +worth trying at any rate. The shelter was the immediate thing. They +began planting hedges about their homesteads; not always wisely, for +it is not every tree that will grow in the heath. The wind whipped +and wore them, the ahl cramped their roots, and they died. The ahl +is the rusty-red crust that forms under the heather in the course of +the ages where the desert rules. Sometimes it is a loose sandstone +formation; sometimes it carries as much as twenty per cent of iron +that is absorbed from the upper layers of the sand. In any case, it +must be broken through; no tree root can do it. The ahl, the poverty +of the sand, and the wind, together make the "evil genius" of the +heath that had won until then in the century-old fight with man. But +this time he had backing, and was not minded to give up. The Heath +Society was there to counsel, to aid. And soon the hedges took hold, +and gardens grew in their shelter. There is hardly a farm in all +west Jutland to-day that has not one, even if the moor waits just +beyond the gate. + +Out in the desert the Society had made a beginning with plantations +of Norway spruce. They took root, but the heather soon overwhelmed +the young plants. Not without a fight would this enemy let go its +grip upon the land. It had smothered the hardy Scotch pine in days +past, and now the spruce was in peril. Searching high and low for +something that would grow fast and grow green, Dalgas and his +associates planted dwarf pine with the spruce. Strangely, it not +only grew itself, but proved to be a real nurse for the other. The +spruce took a fresh start, and they grew vigorously together--for a +while. Then the pine outstripped its nursling, and threatened to +smother it. The spruce was the more valuable; the other was at best +little more than a shrub. The croaker raised his voice: the black +heath had turned green, but it was still heath, of no value to any +one, then or ever. + +He had not reckoned with Dalgas. The captain of engineers could use +the axe as well as the spade. He cut the dwarf pine out wherever the +spruce had got its grip, and gave it light and air. And it grew big +and beautiful. The Heath Society has now over nineteen hundred +plantations that cover nearly a hundred thousand acres, and the +State and private individuals, inspired by the example it set, have +planted almost as large an area. The ghost of the heath has been +laid for all time. + +Go now across the heath and see the change forty years have wrought. +You shall seek in vain the lonely shepherd with his stocking. The +stocking has grown into an organized industry. In grandfather's day +the farmer and his household "knitted for the taxes"; if all hands +made enough in the twelvemonth to pay the tax-gatherer, they had +done well. Last year the single county of Hammerum, of which more +below, sold machine-made underwear to the value of over a million +and a half kroner. The sheep are there, but no longer lean; no more +the ling-thatched hut, but prosperous farms backed by thrifty +groves, with hollyhock and marigold in the dooryards, heaps of gray +marl in the fields, tiny rivulets of water singing the doom of the +heath in the sand; for where it comes the heather moves out. A +resolute, thrifty peasantry looks hopefully forward. Not all of the +heath is conquered yet. Roughly speaking, thirty-three hundred +square miles of heath confronted Dalgas in 1866. Just about a +thousand remain for those who come after to wrestle with; but +already voices are raised pleading that some of it be preserved +untouched for its natural beauty, while yet it is time. + +Meanwhile the plow goes over fresh acres every year--once, twice, +then a deeper plowing, this time to break the stony crust, and the +heath is ready for its human mission. From the Society's nurseries +that are scattered through the country come thousands of tiny +trees, and are set out in the furrows, two of the spruce for each +dwarf pine till the nurse has done her work. Then she is turned into +charcoal, into tar, and a score of other things of use. The men who +do the planting in summer find chopping to do in winter in the older +plantations, at good wages. Money is flowing into the moor in the +wake of the water and the marl. Roads are being made, and every day +the mail-carrier comes. In the olden time a stranger straying into +the heath often brought the first news of the world without for +weeks together. Game is coming, too,--roebuck and deer,--in the +young forests. The climate itself is changing; more rain falls in +midsummer, when it is needed. The sand-blast has been checked, the +power of the west wind broken. The shrivelled soil once more takes +up and holds the rains, and the streams will deepen, fish leap in +them as of yore. Groves of beech and oak are springing up in the +shelter of their hardier evergreen kin. "Make the land furry," +Dalgas said, with prophetic eye beholding great forests taking the +place of sand and heather, and in his lifetime the change was +wrought that is transforming the barren moor into the home-land of +a prosperous people. + +To the most unlikely of places, through the very prison doors, his +gospel of hope has made its way. For the last dozen years the life +prisoners in the Horsens penitentiary have been employed in breaking +and reforesting the heath, and their keepers report that the effect +upon them of the hard work in the open has been to notably cheer and +brighten them. The discipline has been excellent. There have been +few attempts at escape, and they have come to nothing through the +vigilance of the other prisoners. + +While the population in the rest of Denmark is about stationary, in +west Jutland it grows apace. The case of Skaphus farm in the parish +of Sunds shows how this happens. Prior to 1870 this farm of three +thousand acres was rated the "biggest and poorest" in Denmark. Last +year it had dwindled to three hundred and fifty acres, but upon its +old land thirty-three homesteads had risen that kept between them +sixty-two horses and two hundred and fifty-two cows, beside the +sheep, and the manor farm was worth twice as much as before. The +town of Herning, sometimes called "the Star of the Heath," is the +seat of Hammerum county, once the baldest and most miserable on the +Danish mainland. In 1841 twenty-one persons lived in Herning. To-day +there are more than six thousand in a town with handsome buildings, +gas, electric lighting, and paved streets. The heath is half a dozen +miles away. And this is not the result of any special or forced +industry, but the natural, healthy growth of a centre for an army of +industrious men and women winning back the land of their fathers by +patient toil. All through the landscape one sees from the train the +black giving way to the green. Churches rear their white gables; +bells that have been silent since the Black Death stalked through +the land once more call the people to worship on the old sites. More +churches were built in the reign of "the good King Christian," who +has just been gathered to his fathers, than in all the centuries +since the day of the Valdemars. + +Bog cultivation is the Heath Society's youngest child. The heath is +full of peat-bogs that only need the sand, so plentiful on the +uplands, to make their soil as good as the best, the muck of the bog +being all plant food, and they have a surplus of water to give in +exchange. With hope the keynote of it all, the State has taken up +the herculean task of keeping down the moving sands of the North Sea +coast. All along it is a range of dunes that in the fierce storms of +that region may change shape and place in a single night. The "sand +flight" at times reached miles inland, and threatened to bury the +farmer's acres past recovery. Austrian fir and dwarf pine now grow +upon the white range, helping alike to keep down the sand and to bar +out the blast. + +With this exception, the great change has been, is being, wrought by +the people themselves. It was for their good, in the apathy that +followed 1864, that it should be so, and Dalgas saw it. The State +aids the man who plants ten acres or more, and assumes the +obligation to preserve the forest intact; the Heath Society sells +him plants at half-price, and helps him with its advice. It disposes +annually of over thirteen million young trees. The people do the +rest, and back the Society with their support. The Danish peasant +has learned the value of cooeperation since he turned dairy farmer, +and associations for irrigation, for tree planting, and garden +planting are everywhere. They even reach across the ocean. This year +a call was issued to sons of the old soil, who have found a new home +in America, to join in planting a Danish-American forest in the +desert where hill and heather hide a silvery lake in their deep +shadows and returning wanderers may rest and dream of the long ago. + +Soldier though he was, Enrico Dalgas's pick and spade brigade won +greater victories for Denmark than her armies in two wars. He +literally "won for his country within what she had lost without." A +natural organizer, a hard worker who found his greatest joy in his +daily tasks, a fearless and lucid writer who yet knew how to keep +his cause out of the rancorous politics that often enough seemed to +mistake partisanship for patriotism, he was the most modest of men. +Praise he always passed up to others. At the "silver wedding" of the +Society he founded they toasted him jubilantly, but he sat quiet a +long time. When at last he arose, it was to make this characteristic +little speech: + +"I thank you very much. His Excellency the Minister of the Interior, +who is present here, will see from this how much you think of me, +and possibly my recommendation that the State make a larger +contribution to the Heath Society's treasury may thereby acquire +greater weight with him. I drink to an increased appropriation." + +On the heath Dalgas was prophet, prince, and friend of the people. +In the crowds that flocked about his bier homespun elbowed gold lace +in the grief of a common loss. Boughs of the fragrant spruce decked +his coffin, the gift of the heath to the memory of him who set it +free. + +To Dalgas apply the words of the seer with which he himself +characterized the Society that was the child of his heart and brain: +"The good men are those who plant and water," for they add to the +happiness of mankind. + + + + +KING CHRISTIAN IV + + +[Illustration: Musical notation with lyrics] + + _Maestoso_. + + King Christian stood by loft-y mast In mist and + smoke; His sword was ham-mer-ing so fast, Thro' + Goth-ic helm and brain it passed; Then sank each hos-tile + hulk and mast. In mist and smoke. "Fly," + shout-ed they, "fly, he who can! Who braves of Denmark's + Christ-i-an, Who braves of Denmark's Christian The stroke?" + + +Deep in the beech-woods between Copenhagen and Elsinore, upon the +shore of a limpid lake, stands Frederiksborg, one of the most +beautiful castles in Europe. In its chapel the Danish kings were +crowned for two centuries, and here was born on April 12, 1577, King +Christian of the Danish national hymn which Longfellow translated +into our tongue. No Danish ruler since the days of the great +Valdemars made such a mark upon his time; none lives as he in the +imagination of the people. He led armies to war and won and lost +battles; indeed, he lost more than he won on land when matched +against the great generals of that fighting era. On the sea he +sailed his own ship and was the captain of his own fleet, and there +he had no peer. He made laws in the days of peace and reigned over a +happy, prosperous land. In his old age misfortune in which he had no +share overwhelmed Denmark, but he was ever greatest in adversity, +and his courage saved the country from ruin. The great did not love +him overmuch; but to the plain people he was ever, with all his +failings, which were the failings of his day, a great, appealing +figure, and lives in their hearts, not merely in the dry pages of +musty books. + +He was eleven years old when his father died, and until he came of +age the country was governed by a council of happily most able men +who, with his mother, gave him such a schooling as few kings have +had. He not only became proficient in the languages, living and +dead, and in mathematics which he put to such practical use that he +was among the greatest of architects and ship-builders; he was the +best all-round athlete among his fellows as well, and there was some +sense in the tradition that survives to this day that whoever was +touched by him in wrath did not live long, for he was very tall with +a big, strong body, and when he struck, he struck hard. He was a +dauntless sailor who knew as much about sailing a ship as any one of +his captains, and much more about building it. Danger appealed to +him always. When the spire on the great cathedral in Copenhagen +threatened to fall, he was the one who went up in it alone and gave +orders where and how to brace it. + +As he grew, he sat in the council of state, learning kingcraft, and +showed there the hard-headed sense of fairness and justice that went +with him through life. He was hardly fourteen when the case of three +brothers of the powerful Friis family came before the council. They +had attacked another young nobleman in the street, struck off one of +his hands, and crippled the other. Because of their influence, the +council was for being lenient, atrocious as the crime was. A fine +was deemed sufficient. The young prince asked if there were not some +law covering the case with severer punishment, and was told that in +the province of Skaane there was such a law that applied to serfs. +But the assault had not been committed in Skaane, and these were +high noblemen. + +"All the worse for them," said the prince. "Is then a serf in Skaane +to have more rights under the law than a nobleman in the rest of +Denmark? Let the law for the serf be theirs." And the judgment +stood. + +He had barely attained his majority, when the young king was called +upon to judge between another great noble and a widow whom he sued +for 9000 daler, money he claimed to have lent to her husband. In +proof he laid before the judges two bonds bearing the signatures of +husband and wife. The widow denounced them as forgeries, but the +court decided that she must pay. She went straight to the King with +her story, assuring him that she had never heard of the debt. The +King sent for the bonds and upon close scrutiny discovered that one +of them was on paper bearing the water-mark of a mill that was not +built till two years after the date written in the bond. The noble +was arrested and the search of his house brought to light several +similar documents waiting their turn. He went to the scaffold. His +rank only aggravated his offence in the eyes of the King. No wonder +the fame of this judge spread quickly through the land. + +A dozen contented years he reigned in peace, doing justice between +man and man at home. Then the curse of his house gripped him. In two +centuries, since the brief union between the three Scandinavian +kingdoms was broken by the secession of Sweden, only two of sixteen +kings in either country had gone to their rest without ripping up +the old feud. It was now Christian's turn. The pretext was of little +account: there was always cause enough. Gustav Adolf, whose father +was then on the throne of Sweden, said in after years that there was +no one he had such hearty admiration for and whose friend he would +like so well to be as Christian IV: "The mischief is that we are +neighbors." King Christian crossed over into Sweden and laid siege +to the strong fortress of Kalmar where he first saw actual war and +showed himself a doughty campaigner of intrepid courage. It came +near costing him his life when a cannoneer with whom he had often +talked on his rounds deserted to the enemy and picked the King out +as his especial target. Twice he killed an officer attending upon +him, but the King he never hit. It is almost a pleasure to record +that when he tried it again, in another fight, Christian caught him +and dealt with him as the traitor he was, though the rough justice +of those days is not pleasant to dwell on. The besieged tried to +create a diversion by sneaking into camp at night and burying wax +images of the King and his generals in the earth, where they were +afterwards found and spread consternation through the army; for such +things were believed to be wrought by witchcraft and to bring bad +luck to those whom they represented. + +However, neither the real courage of the defenders, nor their +dallying with the black art, helped them any. King Christian stormed +the town at the head of his army and took it. The burgomaster hid in +the church, disguised as a priest, and pretended to be shriving some +women when the crash came, but it did not save him. When the +Swedish king came with a host twice the size of his own, there was +a battle royal, but Christian drove him off and laid siege to the +castle where dissension presently arose between the garrison and its +commander who was for surrendering. In the midst of their noisy +quarrel, King Christian was discovered standing upon the wall, +calmly looking on. He had climbed up alone on a rope ladder which +the sentinel let down at his bidding. At the sight they gave it up +and opened the gates, and the King wrote home, proudly dating his +letter from "our castle Kalmar." + +Its loss so angered the Swedish king who was old and sick, that he +challenged Christian to single combat, without armor. The letters +that passed between them were hardly kingly. King Christian wrote +that he had other things to do: "Better catch a doctor, old man, and +have your head-piece looked after." Helpless anger killed Karl, and +Gustav Adolf, of whom the world was presently to hear, took the +command and the crown. After that Christian had a harder road to +hoe. + +A foretaste of it came to him when he tried to surprise the fortress +of Gullberg near the present Goetaborg. Its commander was wounded +early in the fight, but his wife who took his place more than filled +it. She and her women poured boiling lye upon the attacking Danes +until they lay "like scalded pigs" under the walls. Their leader +knew when he had enough and made off in haste, with the lady +commandant calling after him, "You were a little unexpected for +breakfast, but come back for dinner and we will receive you +properly." She would not even let them take their dead away. "Since +God gave us luck to kill them," she said, "we will manage to bury +them too." They were very pious days after their own fashion, and +God was much on the lips of his servants. Troubles rarely come +singly. Soon after, King Christian met the enemy unexpectedly and +was so badly beaten that for the second time he had to run for it, +though he held out till nearly all his men had fallen. His horse got +mired in a swamp with the pursuers close behind. The gay and wealthy +Sir Christen Barnekow, who had been last on the field, passed him +there, and at once got down and gave him his horse. It meant giving +up his life, and when Sir Christen could no longer follow the +fleeing King he sat down on a rock with the words, "I give the King +my horse, the enemy my life, and God my soul." The rock is there yet +and the country folk believe that the red spots in the granite are +Christen Barnekow's blood which all the years have not availed to +wash out. + +They tired of fighting at last and made it up. Sweden paid Denmark a +million daler; for the rest, things stayed as they had been before. +King Christian had shown himself no mean fighter, but the senseless +sacking and burning of town and country that was an ugly part of +those days' warfare went against his grain, and he tried to persuade +the Swedes to agree to leave that out in future. Gustav Adolf had +not yet grown into the man he afterward became. "As to the burning," +was his reply, "seeing that it is the usage of war, and we enemies, +why we will each have to do the best we can," which meant the worst. +Had the two kings, who had much in common, got together in the years +of peace that followed, much misery might have been saved Denmark, +and a black page of history might read very differently. For those +were the days of the Thirty Years' War, in which together they +might have dictated peace to harassed Europe. + +Now King Christian's ambition, his piety, for he was a sincerely +religious man, as well as his jealousy of his younger rival and of +the growing power of Sweden--so mixed are human motives--made him +yield to the entreaties of the hard-pressed Protestant princes to +take up alone their cause against the German Emperor. He had tried +for half a dozen years to make peace between them. At last he drew +the sword and went down to force it. After a year of fighting Tilly +and Wallenstein, the Emperor's great generals, he met the former in +a decisive battle at Lutter-am-Baremberg. King Christian's army was +beaten and put to rout. He himself fled bareheaded through the +forests of the Hartz Mountains, pursued by the enemy's horsemen. It +was hardly necessary for the Emperor to make him promise as the +price of peace to keep out of German affairs thenceforth. His allies +had left him to fight it out alone. All their fine speeches went for +nothing when it came to the test, and King Christian rode back to +Denmark, a sadder and wiser man. It was left to Gustav Adolf, after +all, to teach the German generals the lesson they needed. + +In the years of peace before that unhappy war, Danish trade and +Danish culture had blossomed exceedingly, thanks to the wisdom, the +clever management, and untiring industry of the King. He built +factories, cloth-mills, silk-mills, paper-mills, dammed the North +Sea out from the rich marshlands with great dikes, taught the +farmers profitable ways of tilling their fields; for he was a +wondrous manager for whom nothing was too little and nothing too +big. He kept minute account of his children's socks and little +shirts, and found ways of providing money for his war-ships and for +countless building schemes he had in hand both in Denmark and +Norway. For many of them he himself drew the plans. Wherever one +goes to this day, his monogram, which heads this story, stares at +him from the splendid buildings he erected. The Bourse in Copenhagen +and the Round Tower, the beautiful palace of Rosenborg, a sort of +miniature of his beloved Frederiksborg which also he rebuilt on a +more magnificent scale--these are among his works which every +traveller in the North knows. He built more cities and strongholds +than those who went before or came after him for centuries. +Christiania and Christiansand in Norway bear his name. He laid out a +whole quarter of Copenhagen for his sailors, and the quaint little +houses still serve that purpose. Regentsen, a dormitory for poor +students at the university, was built by him. He created seven new +chairs of learning and saw to it that all the professors got better +pay. He ferreted out and dismissed in disgrace all the grafting +officials in Norway, and administered justice with an even hand. At +the same time he burned witches without end, or let it be done for +their souls' sake. That was the way of his time; and when he needed +fireworks for his son's wedding (he made them himself, too), he sent +around to all the old cloisters and cathedral churches for the old +parchments they had. Heaven only knows what treasures that can never +be replaced went up in fire and smoke for that one night's fun. + +King Christian founded a score of big trading companies to exploit +the East, taking care that their ships should have their bulwarks +pierced for at least six guns, so that they might serve as war-ships +in time of need. He sent one expedition after another to the waters +of Greenland in search of the Northwest Passage. It was on the +fourth of these, in 1619, that Jens Munk with two ships and +sixty-four sailors was caught in the ice of Hudson Bay and compelled +to winter there. One after another the crew died of hunger and +scurvy. When Jens Munk himself crept out from what he had thought +his death-bed, he found only two of them all alive. Together they +burrowed in the snow, digging for roots until spring came when they +managed to make their way down to Bergen in the smallest of the two +vessels. Jens Munk had deserved a better end than he got. He spun +his yarns so persistently at court that he got to be a tiresome +bore, and at last one day the King told him that he had no time to +listen to him. Whereat the veteran took great umbrage and, slapping +his sword, let the King know that he had served him well and was +entitled to better treatment. Christian snatched the weapon in anger +and struck him with the scabbard. The sailor never got over it. "He +withered away and died," says the tradition. It was the old +superstition; but whether that killed him or not, the King lost a +good man in Jens Munk. + +He was not averse to hearing the truth, though, when boldly put. +When Ole Vind, a popular preacher, offended some of the nobles by +his plain speech and they complained to the King, he bade him to the +court and told him to preach the same sermon over. Master Vind was +game and the truths he told went straight home, for he knew well +where the shoe pinched. But King Christian promptly made him court +preacher. "He is the kind we need here," he said. There was never a +day that the King did not devoutly read his Bible, and he was +determined that everybody should read it the same way. The result +was a kind of Puritanism that filled the churches and compelled the +employment of men to go around with long sticks to rap the people on +the head when they fell asleep. Christian the Fourth was not the +first ruler who has tried to herd men into heaven by battalions. But +his people would have gladly gone in the fire for him. He was their +friend. When on his tramps, as likely as not he would come home +sitting beside some peasant on his load of truck, and would step off +at the palace gate with a "So long, thanks for good company!" He was +everywhere, interested in everything. In his walking-stick he +carried a foot-rule, a level, and other tools, and would stop at the +bench of a workman in the navy-yard and test his work to see how +well he was doing it. "I can lie down and sleep in any hut in the +land," was his contented boast. And he would have been safe +anywhere. + +Gustav Adolf was a wise and generous foe. While he lived he refused +to listen to proposals for the partition of Denmark after King +Christian's defeat in Germany. He knew well that she was a barrier +against the ambition of the German princes and that, once she was +out of the way, Sweden's turn would come next. But when he had +fallen on the battle-field of Luetzen, and his generals, following in +his footsteps, had achieved fame and lands and the freedom of +worship for which he gave his life, the Swedish statesmen lost their +heads and dreamed of the erection of a great northern Protestant +state by the conquest of Denmark and Norway, to balance the power +of the German empire. Without warning or declaration of war a great +army was thrown into the Danish peninsula from the south. Another +advanced from Sweden upon the eastern provinces, and a fleet hired +in Holland for Swedish money came through the North Sea to help them +over to the Danish islands. If the two armies met, Denmark was lost. +In Swedish harbors a still bigger fleet was fitting out for the +Baltic. + +King Christian was well up in the sixties, worn with the tireless +activities of a long reign; but once more he proved himself greater +than adversity. When the evil tidings reached him, in the midst of +profound peace, the enemy was already within the gates. The country +lay prostrate. The name of Torstenson, the Swedish general, spread +terror wherever it was heard. In the German campaigns he had been +known as the "Swedish Lightning." Beset on every side, never had +Denmark's need been greater. The one man who did not lose his head +was her king. By his personal example he put heart into the people +and shamed the cowardly nobles. He borrowed money wherever he could, +sent his own silver to the mint, crowded the work in the navy-yard +by night and by day, gathered an army, and hurried with it to the +Sounds where the enemy might cross. When the first ships were ready +he sailed around the Skaw to meet the Dutch hirelings. "I am old and +stiff," he said, "and no good any more to fight on land. But I can +manage the ships." + +And he did. He met the Dutchmen in the North Sea, in under the +Danish coast, and whipped them, almost single-handed, for his own +ship _Trefoldigheden_ was for a long while the only one that wind +and tide would let come up with them. That done, he left one of his +captains to watch lest they come out from among the islands where +their ships of shallower draught had sought refuge, and sailed for +Copenhagen. Everything that could carry sail was ready for him by +that time; also the news that the Swedish fleet of forty-six +fighting ships under Klas Fleming had sailed for the coast of +Holstein to take on board Torstenson's army. + +King Christian lost no time. He hoisted his flag on _Trefoldigheden_ +and made after them with thirty-nine ships, vowing that he would +win this fight or die. At Kolberger Heide, the water outside the +Fjord of Kiel, he caught up with them and attacked at once. The +battle that then ensued is the one of which the poet sings and with +which the name of Christian IV is forever linked. + +At the outset the Danish fleet was in great peril. The Swedes fought +gallantly as was their wont, and they were three or four against +one, for most of the King's ships came up slowly, some of them +purposely, so it seems. The King said after the battle of certain of +his captains, "They used me as a screen between them and the enemy." +His own ship and that of his chief admiral's bore the brunt of the +battle for a long time. _Trefoldigheden_ fired 315 shots during the +engagement, and at one time had four hostile, ships clustering about +her. King Christian was on the quarter-deck when a cannon-ball +shivered the bulwark and one of his guns, throwing a shower of +splintered iron and wood over him and those near him, killing and +wounding twelve of the crew. The King himself fell, stunned and +wounded in twenty-three places. His right eye was knocked out, two +of his teeth, and his left ear hung in shreds. + +The cry was raised that the King was dead and panic spread on board. +The story has it that a sailor was sent aloft to strike the flag but +purposely entangled it in the rigging so that it could not fall; he +could not bear to see the King's ship strike its colors. In the +midst of the tumult the aged monarch rose to his feet, torn and +covered with blood. "I live yet," he cried, "and God has left me +strength to fight on for my country. Let every man do his duty." +Leaning on his sword, he led the fight until darkness fell and the +battle was won. Denmark was saved. The danger of an invasion was +averted. In the palace of Rosenborg the priceless treasure they show +to visitors is the linen cloth, all blood-stained, that bound the +King's face as he fought and won his last and biggest fight that +day. + +Half blind, his body black and blue and sore from many bruises, King +Christian yet refused to sail for Copenhagen to have his wounds +attended. Three weeks he lay watching the narrow inlet behind which +the beaten enemy was hiding, to destroy his ships when he came out. +Then he gave over the command to another and hastened to the +province of Skaane on the Swedish mainland, from which he expelled a +hostile army. But when his back was turned, the men he had set to +watch fell asleep and let the Swedish admiral steal out into the +open. There he found and joined the Dutch ships that had slipped +around the Skaw during the rumpus. Together they overwhelmed the +Danish fleet, being now three to one, and crushed it. The slothful +admiral paid for it with his life, but the harm was done. It was the +last and heaviest blow. The old King sheathed his sword and set his +name to a peace that took from Denmark some of her ancient +provinces, with the bitter sigh: "God knows I had no share in this," +and he had not. Even at the last he appealed to the country to try +the fortunes of war with him once more. The people were willing, but +the nobles wanted peace, "however God send it," and he had to yield. +The treaty was made at Broemsebro, where a bridge crossed the river +dividing the two kingdoms. In the middle of the river was an island +and the negotiations were carried on in a tent erected there, the +French and the Dutch being the arbitrators. The envoys of Sweden +and Denmark sat on opposite sides of the boundary post where the +line cut through, each on the soil of his own country. So bitterly +did they hate one another that they did not speak but wrote their +messages, though they could have shaken hands where they sat. Even +that was too close quarters, and they ended up by negotiating at +second hand through the foreign ambassadors, all at the same table, +but each looking straight past the other as if he were not there. + +Another touch of comedy relieves the gloom of that heavy day. It was +the conquest of the Saernadal, a mountain valley in Norway just over +the Swedish frontier, by Pastor Buschovius who, Bible in hand, at +the head of two hundred ski-men invaded and captured it one winter's +day without a blow. He came over the snow-fields into the valley +that had not seen a preacher in many a long day, had the church +bells rung to summon the people, preached to them, married and +christened them, and gave them communion. The simple mountaineers +had hardly heard of the war and had nothing against their neighbors +over the mountain. They joined Sweden then and there at the request +of the preacher, and they stayed Swedes too, for in the final muster +they were forgotten with their valley. Very likely the treaty-makers +did not know that it existed. + +King Christian died four years later, in 1648, past the three score +and ten allotted to man. He was not a great leader like Gustav +Adolf, and he was very human in some of his failings. But he was a +strong man, a just king, and a father of his people who still cling +to his memory with more than filial affection. + + + + +GUSTAV ADOLF, THE SNOW-KING + + +The city of Prague, the capital of Bohemia, went wild with +excitement one spring morning in the year 1618. The Protestant +Estates of Germany had met there to protest against the aggressions +of the Catholic League and the bad faith of the Emperor, who had +guaranteed freedom of worship in the land and had now sent two +envoys to defy the meeting and declare it illegal. In the old castle +they delivered their message and bade the convention disperse; and +the delegates, when they had heard, seized them and their clerk and +threw them out of the window "in good old Bohemian fashion." They +fell seventy feet and escaped almost without a scratch, which fact +was accepted by the Catholics of that strenuous day as proof of +their miraculous preservation; by the Protestants as evidence that +the devil ever takes care of his own. + +It was the tiny spark that set Europe on fire. Out of it grew the +Thirty Years' War, the most terrible that ever scourged the +civilized world. When Catholic League and Evangelical Union first +mustered their armies, Bohemia had a prosperous population of four +million souls; when the war was over there were less than eight +hundred thousand alive in that unhappy land, and the wolves that +roamed its forests were scarcely more ferocious than the human +starvelings who skulked among the smoking ruins of burned towns and +hamlets. Other states fared little better. Two centuries did not +wipe out the blight of those awful years when rapine and murder, +inspired by bigotry and hate, ran riot in the name of religion. + +In the gloom and horror of it all a noble figure stands forth alone. +It were almost worth the sufferings of a Thirty Years' War for the +world to have gained a Gustav Adolf. The "snow-king" the Emperor's +generals named him when he first appeared on German soil at the head +of his army of Northmen, and they prophesied that he would speedily +melt, once the southern sun shone upon his host. They little knew +the man. He went from victory to victory, less because he was the +greatest general of his day than because he, and all his army with +him, believed himself charged by the Almighty with the defence of +his country and of his faith. The Emperor had attacked both, the +first by attempting to extend his dominion to the Baltic; but +Pommerania and the Baltic provinces were regarded by the Swedish +ruler as the outworks of his kingdom; and Sweden was Protestant. +Hence he drew the sword. "Our brethren in the faith are sighing for +deliverance from spiritual and bodily thraldom," he said to his +people. "Please God, they shall not sigh long." That was his +warrant. Axel Oxenstjerna, his friend and right hand who lived to +finish his work, said of him, "He felt himself impelled by a mighty +spirit which he was unable to resist." As warrior, king, and man, he +was head and shoulders above his time. Gustav Adolf saved religious +liberty to the world. He paid the price with his life, but he would +have asked no better fate. A soldier of God, he met a soldier's +death on the field of battle, in the hour of victory. + +A man of destiny he was to his people as to himself. Long years +before his birth, upon the appearance of the comet of 1577, Tycho +Brahe, the astronomer, who was deep in the occultism of his day, had +predicted that a prince would appear in Finland who would do great +things in Germany and deliver the Protestant peoples from the +oppression of the popes, and the prophecy was applied to Gustav +Adolf by his subjects all through his life. He was born on December +9, 1594, old style, as they still reckon time in Russia. Very early +he showed the kind of stuff he was made of. When he was yet almost a +baby he was told that there were snakes in the park, and showed +fight at once: "Give me a stick and I will kill them." With the +years he grew into a handsome youth who read his books, knew his +Seneca by heart, was fond of the poets and the great orators, and +mastered eight languages, living and dead. At seventeen he buckled +on the sword and put the books away, but kept Xenophon as his +friend; for he was a military historian after his own heart. He was +then Duke of Finland. + +The King, his father, was a stern but observant man who, seeing his +bent, threw him with soldiers to his heart's content, glad to have +it so, for it was a warlike age. From his tenth year he let him sit +in council with him and early delegated to him the duty of answering +ambassadors from foreign countries. The lad was the only one who +dared oppose the king when he was in a temper, and often he made +peace and healed wounds struck in anger. The people worshipped the +fair young prince, and his father, when he felt the palsy of old age +and bodily infirmities creeping upon him and thought of his +unfinished tasks, would murmur as his eyes rested upon the bonny +youth: "_Ille faciet_--He will do it." There is still in existence a +document in which he laid down to him his course as a sovereign. +"First of all," he writes, "you shall fear God and honor your father +and mother. Give your brothers and sisters brotherly affection; love +your father's faithful servants and requite them after their due. Be +gracious to your subjects; punish evil and love the good. Believe in +men, but find out first what is in them. Hold by the law without +respect of person." + +It was good advice to a prince, and the king took it to heart. On +the docket of the Supreme Court at Stockholm is a letter written by +Gustav Adolf to the judges and ordered by him to be entered there, +which tells them plainly that if any of them is found perverting +justice to suit him, the King, or any one else, he will have him +flayed alive and his hide nailed to the judgment-seat, his ears +to the pillory! Not a nice way of talking to dignified judges, +perhaps, but then the prescription was intended to suit the +practice, if there was need. + +The young king earned his spurs in a war with Denmark that came near +being his last as it was his first campaign. He and his horsemen +were surprised by the Danes on a winter's night as they were warming +themselves by a fire built of the pews in the Wittsjoe church, and +they cut their way through only after a desperate fight on the +frozen lake. The ice broke under the king's horse and he was going +down when two of his men caught him in the nick of time. He got away +with the loss of his sword, his pistols, and his gloves. "I will +remember you with a crust that shall do for your bairns too," he +promised one of his rescuers, a stout peasant lad, and he kept his +word. Thomas Larsson's descendants a generation ago still tilled the +farm the King gave him. When the trouble with Denmark was over for +the time being, he settled old scores with Russia and Poland in a +way that left Sweden mistress of the Baltic. In the Polish war he +was wounded twice and was repeatedly in peril of his life. Once he +was shot in the neck, and, as the bullet could not be removed, it +ever after troubled him to wear armor. His officers pleaded with him +to spare himself, but his reply was that Caesar and Alexander did not +skulk behind the lines; a general must lead if he expected his men +to follow. + +In this campaign he met the League's troops, sent to chase him back +to his own so that Wallenstein, the leader of the imperial armies, +might be "General of the Baltic Sea," unmolested. "Go to Poland," he +commanded one of his lieutenants, "and drive the snow-king out; or +else tell him that I shall come and do it myself." The proud soldier +never knew how near he came to entertaining the snow-king as his +unwilling guest then. In a fight between his rear-guard and the +imperial army Gustav Adolf was disarmed and taken prisoner by two +troopers. There was another prisoner who had kept his pistol. He +handed it to the King behind his back and with it he shot one of his +captors and brained the other. For all that they nearly got him. He +saved himself only by wriggling out of his belt and leaving it in +the hands of the enemy. Eight years he campaigned in Poland and +Prussia, learning the arts of war. Then he was ready for his +life-work. He made a truce with Poland that freed his hands for a +season, and went home to Sweden. + +That spring (1629) he laid before the Swedish Estates his plan of +freeing the Protestants. To defend Sweden, he declared, was to +defend her faith, and the Estates voted supplies for the war. To +gauge fully the splendid courage of the nation it must be remembered +that the whole kingdom, including Finland, had a population of only +a million and a half at the time and was preparing to attack the +mighty Roman empire. In the first year of the war the Swedish budget +was thirteen millions of dollars, of which nine and a half went for +armaments. The whole army which Gustav Adolf led into Germany +numbered only 14,000 soldiers, but it was made up of Swedish +veterans led by men whose names were to become famous for all time, +and welded together by an unshakable belief in their commander, a +rigid discipline and a religious enthusiasm that swayed master and +men with a common impulse. Such a combination has in all days proven +irresistible. + +The King's farewell to his people--he was never to see Sweden +again--moved a nation to tears. He spoke to the nobles, the clergy +and to the people, admonishing them to stand together in the hard +years that were coming and gave them all into the keeping of God. +They stood on the beach and watched his ships sail into the sunset +until they were swallowed up in glory. Then they went back home to +take up the burden that was their share. On the Ruegen shore the King +knelt with his men and thanked God for having brought them safe +across the sea, then seized a spade, and himself turned the first +sod in the making of a camp. "Who prays well, fights well," he said. + +He was not exactly hospitably received. The old Duke of Pommerania +would have none of him, begged him to go away, and only when the +King pointed to his guns and hinted that he had keys well able to +open the gates of Stettin, his capital, did he give in and promise +help. The other German princes, with one or two exceptions, were as +cravenly short-sighted. They held meetings and denounced the Emperor +and his lawless doings, but Gustav they would not help. The princes +of Brandenburg and of Saxony, the two Protestant Electors of the +empire, were rather disposed to hinder him, if they might, though +Brandenburg was his brother-in-law. Only when the King threatened to +burn the city of Berlin over his head did he listen. While he was +yet laboring with them, recruiting his army and keeping it in +practice by driving the enemy out of Pommerania, news reached him of +the fall of Magdeburg, the strongest city in northern Germany, that +had of its own free will joined his cause. + +The sacking of Magdeburg is one of the black deeds of history. In a +night the populous city was reduced to a heap of smoking ruins under +which twenty thousand men, women, and children lay buried. Not since +the fall of Jerusalem, said Pappenheim, Tilly's famous cavalry +leader to whom looting and burning were things of every day, had so +awful a visitation befallen a town. Only the great cathedral and a +few houses near it were left standing. The history of warfare of the +Christian peoples of that day reads like a horrid nightmare. The +fighting armies left a trail of black desolation where they passed. +"They are not made up of birds that feed on air," sneered Tilly. +Peaceful husbandmen were murdered, the young women dragged away to +worse than slavery, and helpless children spitted upon the lances +of the wild landsknechts and tossed with a laugh into the blazing +ruins of their homes. But no such foul blot cleaves to the memory of +Gustav Adolf. While he lived his men were soldiers, not demons. In +his tent the work of Hugo Grotius on the rights of the nations in +war and peace lay beside the Bible and he knew them both by heart. +When he was gone, the fame of some of his greatest generals was +smirched by as vile orgies as Tilly's worst days had witnessed. It +is told of John Baner, one of the most brilliant of them, that he +demanded ransom of the city of Prix, past which his way led. The +city fathers permitted themselves an untimely jest: "Prix giebt +nichts--Prix gives nothing," they said. Baner was as brief: "Prix +wird zu nichts--Prix comes to nothing," and his army wiped it out. + +Grief and anger almost choked the King when he heard of Magdeburg's +fate. "I will avenge that on the Old Corporal (Tilly's nickname)," +he cried, "if it costs my life." Without further ado he forced the +two Electors to terms and joined the Saxon army to his own. On +September 7, 1631, fifteen months after he had landed in Germany, he +met Tilly face to face at Breitenfeld, a village just north of +Leipzig. The Emperor's host in its brave show of silver and plumes +and gold, the plunder of many campaigns under its invincible leader, +looked with contempt upon the travel-worn Swedes in their poor, +soiled garb. The stolid Finns sat their mean but wiry little horses +very unlike Pappenheim's dreaded Walloons, descendants of the +warlike Belgae of Gaul who defied the Germans of old in the forest of +the Ardennes and joined Caesar in his victorious march. But Tilly +himself was not deceived. He knew how far this enemy had come and +with what hardships cheerfully borne; how they had routed the +Russians, written laws for the Poles in their own land, and +overthrown armies and forts that barred their way. He would wait for +reinforcements; but his generals egged him on, said age had made him +timid and slow, and carried the day. + +The King slept in an empty cart the night before the battle and +dreamed that he wrestled with Tilly and threw him, but that he tore +his breast with his teeth. When all was ready in the morning he rode +along the front and told his fusiliers not to shoot till they saw +the white in the enemy's eyes, the horsemen not to dull their +swords by hacking the helmets of the Walloons: "Cut at their horses +and they will go down with them." In the pause before the onset he +prayed with head uncovered and lowered sword, and his voice carried +to the farthest lines: + +"Thou, God, in whose hands are victory and defeat, look graciously +upon thy servants. From distant lands and peaceful homes have we +come to battle for freedom, truth and thy gospel. Give us victory +for thy holy name's sake, Amen!" + +Tilly had expected the King to attack, but the fiery Pappenheim +upset his plans. The smoke of the guns drifted in the faces of the +Swedes and the King swung his army to the south to get the wind +right. In making the turn they had to cross a brook and this moment +Pappenheim chose for his charge. Like a thunderbolt his Walloons +fell upon them. The Swedish fire mowed them down like ripened grain +and checked their impetuous rush. They tried to turn the King's +right and so outflank him; but the army turned with them and stood +like a rock. The extreme mobility of his forces was Gustav Adolf's +great advantage in his campaigns. He revised the book of military +tactics up to date. The imperial troops were massed in solid +columns, after the old Spanish fashion, the impact of which was hard +to resist when they struck. The King's, on the contrary, moved in +smaller bodies, quickly thrown upon the point of danger, and his +artillery was so distributed among them as to make every shot tell +on the compact body of the enemy. Whichever way Pappenheim turned he +found a firm front, bristling with guns, opposing him. Seven times +he threw himself upon the living wall; each time his horsemen were +flung back, their lines thinned and broken. The field was strewn +with their dead. Tilly, anxiously watching, threw up his hands in +despair. "This man will lose me honor and fame, and the Emperor his +lands," he cried. The charge ended in wild flight, and Tilly saw +that he must himself attack, to turn the tide. + +On the double-quick his columns of spearmen charged down the +heights, swept the Saxons from the field, and fell upon the Swedish +left. The shock was tremendous. General Gustav Horn gave back to let +his second line come up, and held the ground stubbornly against +fearful odds. Word was brought the King of his danger. With the +right wing that had crushed Pappenheim he hurried to the rescue. In +the heat of the fight the armies had changed position, and the +Swedes found themselves climbing the hill upon which Tilly's +artillery was posted. Seeing this, the King made one of the rapid +movements that more than once won him the day. Raising the cry, +"Remember Magdeburg!" he carried the position with his Finns by a +sudden overwhelming assault, and turned the guns upon the dense +masses of the enemy fighting below. + +In vain they stormed the heights. Both wings and the centre closed +in upon them, and the day was lost. Tilly fled, wounded, and +narrowly escaped capture. A captain in the Swedish army, who was +called Long Fritz because of his great height, was at his heels +hammering him on the head with the butt of his pistol. A staff +officer shot him down in passing, and freed his chief. Twilight fell +upon a battle-field where seven thousand men lay dead, two-thirds of +them the flower of the Emperor's army. Blood-stained and +smoke-begrimed, Gustav Adolf and his men knelt on the field and +thanked God for the victory. + +Had the King's friend and adviser, Axel Oxenstjerna, been with him +he might have marched upon Vienna then, leaving the Protestant +Estates to settle their own affairs, and very likely have ended the +war. Gustav Adolf thought of Tilly who would return with another +army. Oxenstjerna saw farther, weighing things upon the scales of +the diplomatist. + +"How think you we would fare," asked the King once, when the +chancellor saw obstacles in their way which he would brush aside, +"if my fire did not thaw the chill in you?" + +"But for my chill cooling your Majesty's fire," was his friend's +retort, "you would have long since been burned up." The King laughed +and owned that he was right. + +Instead of bearding the Emperor in his capital he turned toward the +Rhine where millions of Protestants were praying for his coming and +where his army might find rest and abundance. The cathedral city of +Wuerzburg he took by storm. The bishop who ruled it fled at his +approach, but the full treasury of the Jesuits fell into his hands. +The Madonna of beaten gold and the twelve solid silver apostles, +famous throughout Europe, were sent to the mint and coined into +money to pay his army. In the cellar they found chests filled with +ducats. The bottom fell out of one as they carried it up and the +gold rolled out on the pavement. The soldiers swarmed to pick it up, +but a good many coins stuck to their pockets. The King saw it and +laughed: "Since you have them, boys, keep them." The dead were still +lying in the castle yard after the siege, a number of monks among +them. The color of some of them seemed high for corpses. "Arise from +the dead," he said waggishly, "no one will hurt you," and the +frightened monks got upon their feet and scampered away. + +Frankfort opened its gates to his victorious host and Nuernberg +received him as a heaven-sent liberator. But Tilly was in the field +with a fresh army, burning to avenge Breitenfeld. He had surprised +General Horn at Bamberg and beaten him. At the approach of the King +he camped where the river Lech joins the Danube, awaiting attack. +There was but one place to cross to get at him, and right there he +stood. The king seized Donauworth and Ulm, and under cover of the +fire of seventy guns threw a bridge across the Lech. Three hundred +Finns carrying picks and spades ran across the shaky planks upon +which the fire of Tilly's whole artillery park was concentrated. +Once across, they burrowed in the ground like moles and, with +bullets raining upon them, threw up earthworks for shelter. Squad +after squad of volunteers followed. Duke Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar +swam his horsemen across the river farther up-stream and took the +Bavarian troops in the flank, beating them back far enough to let +him join the Finns at the landing. The King himself was directing +the artillery on the other shore, aiming the guns with his own hand. +The Walloons, Tilly's last hope, charged, but broke under the +withering fire. In desperation the old field-marshal seized the +standard and himself led the forlorn hope. Half-way to the bridge he +fell, one leg shattered by a cannon-ball, and panic seized his men. +The imperialists fled in the night, carrying their wounded leader. +He died on the march soon after. Men said of him that he had served +his master well. + +The snow-king had not melted in the south. He was master of the +Roman empire from the Baltic to the Alps. The way to Austria and +Italy lay open before him. Protestant princes crowded to do him +homage, offering him the imperial crown. But Gustav Adolf did not +lose his head. Toward the humbled Catholics he showed only +forbearance and toleration. In Munich he visited the college of the +Jesuits, and spoke long with the rector in the Latin tongue, +assuring him of their safety as long as they kept from politics and +plotting. The armory in that city was known to be the best stocked +in all Europe and the King's surprise was great when he found +gun-carriages in plenty, but not a single cannon. Looking about him, +he saw evidence that the floor had been hastily relaid and +remembered the "dead" monks at Wuerzburg. He had it taken up and a +dark vault appeared. The King looked into it. + +"Arise!" he called out, "and come to judgment," and amid shouts of +laughter willing hands brought out a hundred and forty good guns, +welcome reenforcements. + +The ignorant Bavarian peasants had been told that the King was the +very anti-Christ, come to harass the world for its sins, and carried +on a cruel guerilla warfare upon his army. They waylaid the Swedes +by night on their foraging trips and maimed and murdered those they +caught with fiendish tortures. The bitterest anger filled Gustav +Adolf's soul when upon his entry into Landshut the burgomaster knelt +at his stirrup asking mercy for his city. + +"Pray not to me," he said harshly, "but to God for yourself and for +your people, for in truth you have need." + +For once thoughts of vengeance seemed to fill his soul. "No, no!" he +thundered when the frightened burgomaster pleaded that his townsmen +should not be held accountable for the cruelty of the country-folk, +"you are beasts, not men, and deserve to be wiped from the earth +with fire and sword." From out the multitude there came a warning +voice: "Will the King now abandon the path of mercy for the way of +vengeance and visit his wrath upon these innocent people?" No one +saw the speaker. The day was oppressively hot and the King came near +fainting in the saddle. As he rode out of the city toward the camp, +a bolt of lightning struck the ground beside him and a mighty crash +of thunder rolled overhead. Pale and thoughtful, he rode on. But +Landshut was spared. That evening General Horn brought the anxious +citizens the King's promise of pardon. + +A few weeks later tidings reached Gustav Adolf that Wallenstein and +the Elector of Bavaria were marching to effect a junction at +Nuernberg. If they took the city, his line of communication was cut +and his army threatened. Wallenstein, who was a traitor, had been in +disgrace; but he was a great general and in his dire need Emperor +Ferdinand had no one else to turn to. So he took him back on his own +terms, and in the spring he had an army of forty thousand veterans +in the field. This was the host he was leading against Nuernberg. But +the King got there first and intrenched himself so strongly that +there was no ousting him. Wallenstein followed suit and for eleven +weeks the enemies eyed one another from their "lagers," neither +willing to risk an attack. In the end Gustav Adolf tried, but even +his Finns could not take the impregnable heights the enemy held. At +last he went away with colors flying and bands playing, right under +the enemy's walls, in the hope of tempting him out. But he never +stirred. + +When Wallenstein was sure he had gone, he burned his camp and +turned toward Saxony to punish the Elector for joining the Swedes. A +wail of anguish went up from that unhappy land and the King heard it +clear across the country. By forced marches he hurried to the rescue +of his ally, picking up Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar on the way. At +Naumburg the people crowded about him and sought to kiss or even to +touch his garments. The King looked sadly at them. "They put their +trust in me, poor weak mortal, as if I were the Almighty. It may be +that He will punish their folly soon upon the object of their +senseless idolatry." He had come to stay, but when he learned that +Wallenstein had sent Pappenheim away to the west, thus weakening his +army, and was going into winter quarters at Luetzen, near Leipzig, a +half-day's march from the memorable Breitenfeld, he broke camp at +once and hastened to attack him. Starting early, his army reached +Luetzen at nightfall on November 15, 1632. + +Wallenstein believed the campaign was over for that year and the +Swedes in winter quarters, and was taken completely by surprise. Had +the King given battle that night, he would have wiped the enemy +out. Two things, in themselves of little account, delayed him: a +small brook that crossed his path, and the freshly plowed fields. +His men were tired after the long march and he decided to let them +rest. It was Wallenstein's chance. Overnight he posted his army +north of the highway that leads from Luetzen to Leipzig, dug deep the +ditches that enclosed it, and made breastworks of the dirt. Sunrise +found sheltered behind them twenty-seven thousand seasoned veterans +to whom Gustav Adolf could oppose but twenty thousand; but he had +more guns and they were better served. + +As the day broke the Swedish army, drawn up in battle array, intoned +Luther's hymn, "A mighty fortress is our God," and cheered the King. +He wore a leathern doublet and a gray mantle. To the pleadings of +his officers that he put on armor he replied only, "God is my +armor." "To-day," he cried as he rode along the lines, "will end all +our hardships." He himself took command of the right wing, the +gallant Duke Bernhard of the left. As at Breitenfeld, the rallying +cry was, "God with us!" + +The King hoped to crush his enemy utterly, and the whole line +attacked at once with great fury. From the start victory leaned +toward the Swedish army. Then suddenly in the wild tumult of battle +a heavy fog settled upon the field. What followed was all confusion. +No one knows the rights of it to this day. The King led his famous +yellow and blue regiments against the enemy's left. "The black +fellows there," he shouted, pointing to the Emperor's cuirassiers in +their black armor, "attack them!" Just then an adjutant reported +that his infantry was hard pressed. "Follow me," he commanded, and, +clapping spurs to his horse, set off at full speed for the +threatened quarter. In the fog he lost his way and ran into the +cuirassiers. His two attendants were shot down and a bullet crushed +the King's right arm. He tried to hide the fact that he was wounded, +but pain and loss of blood made him faint and he asked the Duke of +Lauenburg who rode with him to help him out of the crush. At that +moment a fresh troop of horsemen bore down upon them and their +leader, Moritz von Falkenberg, shot the King through the body with +the exultant cry, "You I have long sought!" The words had hardly +left his lips when he fell with a bullet through his head. + +The King swayed in the saddle and lost the reins. "Save yourself," +he whispered to the Duke, "I am done for." The Duke put his arm +around him to support him, but the cuirassiers surged against them +and tore them apart. The King's horse was shot in the neck and threw +its rider. Awhile he hung by the stirrup and was dragged over the +trampled field. Then the horse shook itself free and ran through the +lines, spreading the tidings of the King's fall afar. + +A German page, Leubelfing, a lad of eighteen, was alone with the +King. He sprang from his horse and tried to help him into the saddle +but had not the strength to do it. Gustav Adolf was stout and very +heavy. While he was trying to lift him some Croats rode up and +demanded the name of the wounded man. The page held his tongue, and +they ran him through. Gustav Adolf, to save him, said that he was +the King.[1] At that they shot him through the head, and showered +blows upon him. When the body was found in the night it was naked. +They had robbed and stripped him. + +[Footnote 1: This is the story as the page told it. He lived two +days.] + +The King was dead. Through the Swedish ranks Duke Bernhard shouted +the tidings. "Who now cares to live? Forward, to avenge his death!" +With the blind fury of the Berserkers of old the Swedes cleared the +ditches, stormed the breastworks, and drove the foe in a panic +before them. The Duke's arm was broken by a bullet. He hardly knew +it. With his regiment he rode down the crew of one of the enemy's +batteries and swept on. In the midst of it all a cry resounded over +the plain that made the runaways halt and turn back. + +"Pappenheim! Pappenheim is here!" + +He had come with his Walloons in answer to the general's summons. +"Where is the King?" he asked, and they pointed to the Finnish +brigade. With a mighty crash the two hosts that had met so often +before came together. Wallenstein mustered his scattered forces and +the King's army was attacked from three sides at once. The yellow +brigade fell where it stood almost to the last man. The blue fared +little better. Slowly the Swedish infantry gave back. The battle +seemed lost. + +But the tide turned once more. In the hottest fight Pappenheim +fell, pierced by three bullets. The "man of a hundred scars" died, +exulting that the King whom he hated had gone before. With his death +the Emperor's men lost heart. The Swedes charged again and again +with unabated fury. Night closed in with Wallenstein's centre still +unbroken; but he had lost all his guns. Under cover of the darkness +he made his escape. The King's army camped upon the battle-field. +The carnage had been fearful; nine thousand were slain. It was +Wallenstein's last fight. With the remnants of his army he retreated +to Bohemia, sick and sore, and spent his last days there plotting +against his master. He died by an assassin's hand. + +The cathedrals of Vienna, Brussels, and Madrid rang with joyful Te +Deums at the news of the King's death. The Spanish capital +celebrated the "triumph" with twelve days of bull-fighting. Emperor +Ferdinand was better than his day; he wept at the sight of the +King's blood-stained jacket. The Protestant world trembled; its hope +and strength were gone. But the Swedish people, wiping away their +tears, resolved stoutly to carry on Gustav Adolf's work. The men he +had trained led his armies to victory on yet many a stricken field. +Peace came at length to Europe; the last religious war had been +fought and won. Freedom of worship, liberty of conscience, were +bought at the cost of the kingliest head that ever wore a crown. The +great ruler's life-work was done. + +Gustav Adolf was in his thirty-eighth year when he fell. Of stature +he was tall and stout, a fair-haired, blue-eyed giant, stern in war, +gentle in the friendships of peace. He was a born ruler of men. +Though he was away fighting in foreign lands all the years of his +reign, he kept a firm grasp on the home affairs of his kingdom. One +traces his hand everywhere, ordering, shaping, finding ways, or +making them where there was none. The valuable mines of Sweden were +ill managed. The metal was exported in coarse pigs to Germany for +very little, worked up there, and resold to Sweden at the highest +price. He created a Board of Mines, established smelteries, and the +day came when, instead of going abroad for its munitions of war, +Sweden had for its customers half Europe. Like Christian of Denmark +with whom he disagreed, he encouraged industries and greatly +furthered trade and commerce. He built highways and canals, and he +did not forget the cause of instruction. Upon the university at +Upsala he bestowed his entire personal patrimony of three hundred +and thirteen farms as a free gift. His people honor him with cause +as the real founder of the Swedish system of education. + +The master he was always. Sweden had, on one hand, a powerful, able +nobility; on the other, a strong, independent peasantry,--a combination +full of pitfalls for a weak ruler, but with equal promise of great +things under the master hand. His father had cowed the stubborn +nobles with the headsman's axe. Gustav Adolf drew them to him and +imbued them with his own spirit. He found them a contentious party +within the state; he left them its strongest props in the conduct of +public affairs. Nor was it always with persuasion he worked. His +reward for the unjust judge has been quoted. When the council failed +to send him supplies in Germany, pleading failure of crops as their +excuse, he wrote back: "You speak of the high prices of corn. +Probably they are high because those who have it want to profit by +the need of others." And he set a new chief over the finances. On +the other hand, he gave shape to the relations between king and +people. The Riksdag held its sessions, but the laws that ruled it +were so vague that it was no unusual thing for men who were not +members at all to attend and join in the debates. Gustav Adolf put +an abrupt end to "a state of things that exposed Sweden to the +contempt of the nations." As he ordered it, the initiative remained +with the crown; it was the right of the Riksdag to complain and +discuss; of the King to "choose the best" after hearing all sides. + +As a young prince, Gustav Adolf fell deeply in love with Ebba Brahe, +the beautiful daughter of one of Sweden's most powerful noblemen. +The two had been play-mates and became lovers. But the old queen +frowned upon the match. He was the coming king, she was a subject, +and the queen managed, with the help of Oxenstjerna, who was +Gustav's best friend all through his life, to make him give up his +love. "Then I will never marry," he cried in a burst of tempestuous +grief. But when the queen had got Ebba Brahe safely married to one +of his father's famous generals, he wedded the lovely sister of the +Elector of Brandenburg. She adored her royal husband, but never took +kindly to Sweden, and the people did not like her. They clung to the +great king's early love, and to this day they linger before the +picture of the beautiful Ebba in the Stockholm castle when they come +from his grave in the Riddarholm church, while they pass the queen's +by with hardly a glance. It is recorded that Ebba made her husband a +good and dutiful wife. If her thoughts strayed at times to the old +days and what might have been, it is not strange. In one of those +moods she wrote on a window-pane in the castle: + + I am happy in my lot, + And thanks I give to God. + +The queen-mother saw it and wrote under it her own version: + + You wouldn't, but you must. + 'Tis the lot of the dust. + + + + +KING AND SAILOR, HEROES OF COPENHAGEN + + +Of all the foolish wars that were ever waged, it would seem that the +one declared by Denmark against Sweden in 1657 had the least excuse. +A century before, the two countries had fought through eight bitter +years over the momentous question whether Denmark should carry in +her shield the three lions that stood for the three Scandinavian +kingdoms, the Swedish one having set up for itself in the +dissolution of the union between them, and at the end of the fight +they were where they had started: each of them kept the whole brood. +But this war was without even that excuse. Denmark was helplessly +impoverished. Her trade was ruined; the nobles were sucking the +marrow of the country. Of the freehold farms that had been its +strength scarce five thousand were left in the land. It could hardly +pay its way in days of peace. Its strongholds lay in ruins; it had +neither arms, ammunition, nor officers. On its roster of thirty +thousand men for the national defence were carried the dead and the +yet unborn, while the Swedish army of tried veterans had gone from +victory to victory under a warlike king. To cap the climax, +Copenhagen had been harassed by pestilence that had killed one-fifth +of its fifty thousand people. + +So ill matched were they when a stubborn king forced a war that +could end only in disaster. When one of his councillors advised +against the folly, he caned him and sent him into exile. Yet out of +the fiery trial this king came a hero; his queen, whose pride and +wasteful vanity[1] had done its full share in bringing the country +to the verge of ruin, became the idol of the nation. In the hour of +its peril she grew to the stature of a great woman who shared danger +and hardship with her people and by her example put hope and courage +into their hearts. + +[Footnote 1: It is of record that Queen Sofie Amalie used one-third +of the annual revenues of the country for her household. The menu of +a single "rustic dinner" of the court mentions 200 courses and +nearly as many kinds of preserves and dessert, served on gold, with +wines in corresponding abundance.] + +Karl Gustav, the Swedish king, was campaigning in Poland, but as +soon as he could turn around he marched his army against Denmark, +scattered the forces that opposed him, and before news of his +advance had reached Copenhagen knocked at the gate of Denmark +demanding "speech of brother Frederik in good Swedish." A winter of +great severity had bridged the Baltic and the sounds of the island +kingdom. In two weeks he led his army, horse, foot, and guns, over +the frozen seas where hardly a wagon had dared cross before. Great +rifts yawned in their way, and whole companies were swallowed up; +his own sleigh sank in the deep, but nothing stopped him. Danish +emissaries came pleading for peace. He met them on the way to the +capital, surrounded by his Finnish horsemen, and gave scant ear to +their speeches while he drove on. Before the city he halted and +dictated a peace so humiliating that one of the Danish commissioners +exclaimed when he came to sign, "I wish I could not write." Perhaps +the same wish troubled the conqueror's ambitious dreams. The peace +was broken as swiftly as made. In five months he was back before +Frederik's capital with his whole army, while a Swedish fleet +anchored in the roadstead outside. "What difference does it make to +you," was the contemptuous taunt flung at the anxious envoys who +sought his camp, "whether the name of your king is Karl or Frederik +so long as you are safe?" He had come to make an end of Denmark. + +Copenhagen was almost without defences. The old earth walls mounted +only six guns, with breastworks scarce knee-high. In places King +Karl could have driven his sleigh into the heart of the city at the +head of his army. But for the second time he hesitated when a swift +blow would have won all--and lost. Overnight the Danish nation awoke +to a fight for its life. King and people, till then strangers, in +that hour became one. Frederik the Third met the craven counsel that +he fly to Norway with the proud answer, "I will die in my nest, if +need be, and my wife with me." With a shout the burghers swore to +fight to the last man. The walls of the city rose as if by magic. +Nobles and mechanics, clergy and laborers, students, professors and +sailors worked side by side; high-born women wheeled barrows. Every +tree was cut down and made into palisades. The crops ripening in +the fields were gathered in haste and the cattle driven in. The city +had been provisioned for barely a week and garrisoned by four +hundred raw recruits. Sailors from the useless ships took out their +guns and mounted them in the redoubts. Peasants flocked in and were +armed with battle-axes, clubs, and boat-hooks when the supply of +muskets gave out. When Karl Gustav drew his lines tight he faced six +thousand determined men behind strong walls. The city stood in a +ring of blazing fires. Its defenders were burning down the houses +and woods beyond the moats to clear the way for their gunners. The +King watched the sight from his horse in silence. He knew what it +meant; he had fought in the Thirty Years' War: "Now, I vow, we shall +have fighting," was all he said. + +It was not long in coming. On the second night the garrison made a +sortie and drove back the invaders, destroying their works with +great slaughter. Night after night, and sometimes in the broad day, +they returned to the charge, overwhelming the Swedes where least +expected, capturing their guns, their supplies, and their outposts. +Short of arms and ammunition, they took them in the enemy's lines. +In one of these raids Karl Gustav himself was all but made prisoner. +A horseman had him by the shoulder, but he wrenched himself loose +and spurred his horse into the sea where a boat from one of the +ships rescued him. The defence took on something of the fervor of +religious frenzy. Twice a day services were held on the walls of the +city; within, the men who could not bear arms, and the women, +barricaded the streets with stones and iron chains for the last +fight, were it to come. In his place on the wall every burgher had a +hundred brickbats or stones piled up for ammunition, and by night +when the enemy rained red-hot shot upon the city, he fought with a +club or spear in one hand, a torch in the other. + +Eleven weeks the battle raged by night and by day. Then a Dutch +fleet forced its way through the blockade after a fight in which it +lost six ships and two admirals. It brought food, ammunition, and +troops. The joy in the city was great. All day the church bells were +rung, and the people hailed the Dutch as the saviours of the nation. +But when they, too, would thank God for the victory and asked for +the use of the University's hall, they were refused. They were +followers of Calvin and their heresies must not be preached in the +place set apart for teaching the doctrines of the "pure faith," said +the professors, who were Lutheran. It was the way of the day. The +Reformation had learned little from the bigotry of the Inquisition. +The Dutchmen had to be content with the court-house. But the siege +was not over. Another hard winter closed in with the enemy at the +door, burrowing hourly nearer the outworks, and food and fire-wood +grew scarcer day by day in the hard-pressed city. When things were +at the worst pass in February, the Swedes gathered their hosts for a +final assault. In the midnight hour they came on with white shirts +drawn over their uniforms to make it hard to tell them from the +snow. Karl Gustav himself led the storming party and at last was in +the way of "getting speech of brother Frederik," for the Danish King +was as good as his word. He had said that he would die in his nest, +and time and again he had to be sternly reasoned with to prevent him +from exposing himself overmuch. Where the danger was greatest he +was, and beside him ever the queen, all her frivolity gone and +forgotten. She who had danced at the court fetes and followed the +hounds on the chase as if the world had no other cares, became the +very incarnation of the spirit of the bitter and bloody struggle. +All through that winter the royal couple lived in a tent among their +men, and when the alarm was sounded they were first on foot to lead +them. Now that the hour had come, they were in the forefront of the +fight. + +Where the famous pleasure garden Tivoli now is, the strength of the +enemy was massed against the redoubts at the western gate. The name +of "Storm Street" tells yet of the doings of that night. King Karl +had promised to give over the captured town to be sacked by his army +three days and nights, and like hungry wolves they swarmed to the +attack, a mob of sailors and workmen with scaling ladders in the +van. The moats they crossed in spite of the gaps that had been made +in the ice to stop them, but the garrison had poured water over the +walls that froze as it ran, until they were like slippery icebergs. +A bird could have found no foothold on them. Showers of rocks and +junk and clubs fell upon the laddermen. Three times Karl Gustav +hurled his columns against them; as often they were driven back, +broken and beaten. A few gained a foothold on the walls only to be +dashed down to death. The burghers fought for their lives and their +homes. Their women carried boiling pitch and poured it over the +breastworks, and when they had no more, dragged great beams and +rolled them down upon the ladders, sweeping them clear of the enemy. +In the hottest fight Gunde Rosenkrantz, one of the king's +councillors, trod on a fallen soldier and, looking into his face, +saw that it was his own son breathing his last. He bent over and +kissed him, and went on fighting. + +In the early morning hour Karl Gustav gave the order to retreat. The +attack had failed. Many of his general officers were slain; nearly +half of his army was killed, disabled, or captured. Six Swedish +standards were taken by the Danes. The moats were filled with the +dead. The Swedes had "come in their shrouds." The guns of the city +thundered out a triple salute of triumph and the people sang Te +Deums on the walls. Their hardships were not over. Fifteen months +yet the city was invested and the home of daily privation; but their +greatest peril was past. Copenhagen was saved, and with it the +nation; the people had found itself and its king. That autumn a +second Swedish army under the veteran Stenbock was massacred in the +island of Fyen, and Karl Gustav exclaimed when the beaten general +brought him the news, "Since the devil took the sheep he might have +taken the buck too." He never got over it. Three months later he lay +dead, and the siege of Copenhagen was raised in May, 1660. It had +lasted twenty months. + + * * * * * + +Seven score years and one passed, and the morning of Holy +Thursday[2] saw a British fleet sailing slowly up the deep before +Copenhagen, the deck of every ship bristling with guns, their crews +at quarters, Lord Nelson's signal to "close for action" flying from +the top of the flag-ship _Elephant_. Between the fleet and the shore +lay a line of dismantled hulks on which men with steady eyes and +stout hearts were guarding Denmark's honor. Once more it had been +jeopardized by foolish counsel in high places. Danish statesmen had +trifled and temporized while England, facing all Europe alone in the +fight for her life, made ready to strike a decisive blow against the +Armed Neutrality that threatened her supremacy on the sea. Once more +the city had been caught unprepared, defenceless, and once more its +people rose as one man to meet the danger. But it was too late. +Outside, in the Sound, a fleet as great as that led by Nelson +waited, should he fail, to finish his work. That was to destroy the +Danish ships, if need be to bombard the city and so detach Denmark +from the coalition of England's foes. So she chose to consider such +as were not her declared friends. + +[Footnote 2: The battle of Copenhagen was fought April 2, 1801.] + +Denmark had no fighting ships at home to pit against her. Her +sailors were away serving in the merchant marine. She had no +practised gunners, nothing but a huddle of dismantled vessels in her +navy-yard, most of them half-rotten hulks without masts. Those that +had standing rigging were even worse, for none of them had sails and +the falling spars in battle lumbered up the decks and menaced the +crew. But such as they were she made the most of them. Eighteen +hulks were hauled into the channel and moored head and stern. Where +they lay they could not be moved. Only the guns on one side were +therefore of use, while the enemy could turn and manoeuvre. They +were manned by farm lads, mechanics, students, enlisted in haste, +not one of whom had ever smelt powder, and these were matched +against Nelson's grim veterans. Even their commander, J. Olfert +Fischer, had not been under fire before that day, for Denmark had +had peace for eighty years. But his father had served as a +midshipman with Tordenskjold and the son did not flinch, outnumbered +though his force was, two to one, in men and guns. + +The sun shone fair upon the blue waters as the great fleet of +thirty-odd fighting ships sailed up from the south. From the city's +walls and towers a mighty multitude watched it come, unmindful of +peril from shot and shell; the Danish line was not half a mile away. +In the churches whose bells were still ringing when the first gun +was fired from the block-ship _Proevestenen_, the old men and women +prayed through the long day, for there were few homes in Copenhagen +that did not have son, brother, or friend fighting out there. A +single gun answered the challenge, now two and three at once, then +broadside crashed upon broadside with deafening roar. When at length +all was quiet a tremendous report shook the city. It was the +flag-ship _Dannebrog_ that blew up. She was on fire with only three +serviceable guns left when she struck her colors, but no ship of her +name might sail with an enemy's prize crew on board, and she did +not. + +The story of that bloody day has been told many times. Briton and +Dane hoist their flags on April 2 with equal right, for never was +challenge met with more dauntless valor. Lord Nelson owned that of +all the hundred and five battles he had fought this was hottest. On +the _Monarch_, which for hours was under the most galling fire from +the Danish ships, two hundred and twenty of the crew were killed or +wounded. "There was not a single man standing," wrote a young +officer on board of her, "the whole way from the mainmast forward, a +district containing eight guns a side, some of which were run out +ready for firing, others lay dismounted, and others remained as they +were after recoiling.... I hastened down the fore ladder to the +lower deck and felt really relieved to find somebody alive." The +slaughter on the Danish ships was even greater. More than one-fifth +of their entire strength of a little over five thousand men were +slain or wounded. Of the eighteen hulls they lost thirteen, but only +one were the British able to take home with them. The rest were +literally shot to pieces and were burned where they lay. As one +after another was silenced, those yet alive on board spiked their +last guns, if indeed there were any left worth the trouble, threw +their powder overboard and made, for the shore. Twice the Danish +Admiral abandoned his burning ship, the last time taking up his post +in the island battery Tre Kroner. Each time one of the old hulls was +crushed, a Briton pushed into the hole made in the line and raked +the remaining ones fore and aft until their decks were like huge +shambles. The block-ship _Indfoedsretten_ bore the concentrated fire +of five frigates and two smaller vessels throughout most of the +battle. Her chief was killed. When the news reached head-quarters on +shore, Captain von Schroedersee, an old naval officer who had been +retired because of ill health, volunteered to take his place. He was +rowed out, but as he came over the side of the ship a cannon-ball +cut him in two. _Proevestenen_, as it was the first to fire a shot, +held out also to the last. One-fourth of her crew lay dead, and her +flag had been shot away three times when the decks threatened to +cave in and Captain Lassen spiked his last guns and left the wreck +to be burned. All through the fight she was the target of ninety +guns to which she could oppose only twenty-nine of her own sixty. + +Nelson had promised Admiral Parker to finish the fight in an hour. +When the battle had lasted three, Parker signalled to him to stop. +Every school-boy knows the story of how Lord Nelson put the glass to +his blind eye and, remarking that he could see no signal, kept right +on. In the end he had to resort to stratagem to force a truce so +that he might disentangle some of his ships that were drifting into +great danger in the narrow channel. The ruse succeeded. Crown Prince +Frederik, moved by compassion for the wounded whom Nelson threatened +to burn with the captured hulks if firing did not stop, ordered +hostilities to cease without consulting the Admiral of the fleet, +and the battle was over. Denmark's honor was saved. "Nothing," wrote +our own Captain Mahan, "could place a nation's warlike fame higher +than did her great deeds that day." All else was lost; for "there +had come upon Denmark one of those days of judgment to which nations +are liable who neglect in time of peace to prepare for war." It had +been long coming, but it had overtaken her at last and found all the +bars down. + +Alongside the _Dannebrog_ throughout her fight with Nelson's +flag-ship, and edging ever closer in under the _Elephant's_ side +until at last the marines were sent to man her rail and keep it away +with their muskets, lay a floating battery mounting twenty guns +under command of a beardless second lieutenant. The name of Peter +Willemoes will live as long as the Danish tongue is spoken. Barely +graduated from the Naval Academy, he was but eighteen when the need +of officers thrust the command of "Floating Battery No. 1" upon him. +So gallantly did he acquit himself that Nelson took notice of the +young man who, every time a broadside crashed into his ship or +overhead, swung his cocked hat and led his men in a lusty cheer. +When after the battle he met the Crown Prince on shore, the English +commander asked to be introduced to his youthful adversary. "You +ought to make an admiral of him," he said, and Prince Frederik +smiled: "If I were to make admirals of all my brave officers, I +should have no captains or lieutenants left." When the _Dannebrog_ +drifted on the shoals, abandoned and burning, Willemoes cut his +cables and got away under cover of the heavy smoke. Having neither +sails nor oars, he was at the mercy of the tide, but luckily it +carried him to the north of the Tre Kroner battery, and he reached +port with forty-nine of his crew of one hundred and twenty-nine dead +or wounded. The people received him as a conqueror returning with +victory. His youth and splendid valor aroused the enthusiasm of the +whole country. Wherever he went crowds flocked to see him as the +hero of "Holy Thursday's Battle." Especially was he the young +people's idol. Sailor that he was, he was "the friend of all pretty +girls," sang the poet of that day. He danced and made merry with +them, but the one of them all on whom his heart was set, so runs the +story, would have none of him, and sent him away to foreign parts, a +saddened lover. + +Meanwhile much praise had not made him vain. "I did my duty," he +wrote to his father, a minor government official in the city of +Odense where four years later Hans Christian Andersen was born on +the anniversary day of the battle, "and I have whole limbs which I +least expected. The Crown Prince and the Admiral have said that I +behaved well." He was to have one more opportunity of fighting his +country's enemy, and this time to the death. + +In the summer of 1807, England was advised that by the treaty of +Tilsit Russia and Prussia had secretly joined Napoleon in his +purpose of finally crushing his mortal enemy by uniting all the +fleets of Europe against her, Denmark's too, by compulsion if +persuasion failed. Without warning a British fleet swooped down upon +the unsuspecting nation, busy with the pursuits of peace, bombarded +and burned Copenhagen when the Commandant refused to deliver the +ships into the hands of the robbers as a "pledge of peace," and +carried away ships, supplies, even the carpenters' tools in the +navy-yard. Nothing was spared. Seventy vessels, sixteen of them +ships of the line, fell into their hands, and supplies that filled +ninety-two transports beside. A single fighting ship was left to +Denmark of all her fleet,--the _Prince Christian Frederik_ of +sixty-eight guns. She happened to be away in a Norwegian port and so +escaped. Willemoes was on leave serving in the Russian navy, but +hastened home when news came of the burning of Copenhagen, and found +a berth under Captain Jessen. + +On March 22, 1808, the _Prince Christian_, so she was popularly +called, hunting a British frigate that was making Danish waters +insecure, met in the Kattegat the _Stately_ and the _Nassau_, each +like herself of sixty-eight guns. The _Nassau_ was the old +_Holsteen_, renamed,--the single prize the victors had carried home +from the battle of Copenhagen. Three British frigates were working +up to join them. The coast of Seeland was near, but wind and tide +cut off escape to the Sound. Captain Jessen ran his ship in close +under the shore so that at the last he might beach her, and awaited +the enemy there. + +The sun had set, but the night was clear when the fight between the +three ships began. With one on either side, hardly a pistol-shot +away, Jessen returned shot for shot, giving as good as they sent, +and with such success that at the end of an hour and a half the +Britons dropped astern to make repairs. The _Prince Christian_ +drifted, helpless, with rudder shot to pieces, half a wreck, rigging +all gone, and a number of her guns demolished. But when the enemy +returned he was hailed with a cheer and a broadside, and the fight +was on once more. This time they were three to one; one of the +British frigates of forty-four guns had come up and joined in. + +When the hull of the _Prince Christian_ was literally knocked to +pieces, and of her 576 men 69 lay dead and 137 wounded, including +the chief and all of his officers who were yet alive, Captain Jessen +determined as a last desperate chance to run one of his opponents +down and board her with what remained of his crew. But his officers +showed him that it was impossible; the ship could not be manoeuvred. +There was a momentary lull in the fire and out of the night came a +cry, "Strike your colors!" The Danish reply was a hurrah and a +volley from all the standing guns. Three broad-sides crashed into +the doomed ship in quick succession, and the battle was over. The +_Prince Christian_ stood upon the shore, a wreck. + +Young Willemoes was spared the grief of seeing the last Danish +man-of-war strike its flag. In the hottest of the fight, as he +jumped upon a gun the better to locate the enemy in the gloom, a +cannon-ball took off the top of his head. He fell into the arms of a +fellow officer with the muttered words, "Oh God! my head--my +country!" and was dead. In his report of the fight Captain Jessen +wrote against his name: "Fell in battle--honored as he is missed." +They made his grave on shore with the fallen sailors, and as the sea +washed up other bodies they were buried with them. + +The British captured the wreck, but they could only set fire to it +after removing the wounded. In the night it blew up where it stood. +That was the end of the last ship of Denmark's proud navy. + + + + +THE TROOPER WHO WON A WAR ALONE + + +Jens Kofoed was the name of a trooper who served in the disastrous +war of Denmark against Sweden in Karl Gustav's day. He came from the +island of Bornholm in the Baltic, where he tilled a farm in days of +peace. When his troop went into winter quarters, he got a furlough +to go home to receive the new baby that was expected about +Christmas. Most of his comrades were going home for the holidays, +and their captain made no objection. The Swedish king was fighting +in far-off Poland, and no one dreamed that he would come over the +ice with his army in the depth of winter to reckon with Denmark. So +Jens Kofoed took ship with the promise that he would be back in two +weeks. But they were to be two long weeks. They did not hear of him +again for many moons, and then strange tidings came of his doings. +Single-handed he had bearded the Swedish lion, and downed it in a +fair fight--strangest of all, almost without bloodshed. + +The winter storms blew hard, and it was Christmas eve when he made +land, but he came in time to receive, not one new heir, but twin +baby girls. Then there were six of them, counting Jens and his wife, +and a merry Christmas they all had together. On Twelfth Night the +little ones were christened, and then the trooper bethought himself +of his promise to get back soon. The storms had ceased, but worse +had befallen; the sea was frozen over as far as eye reached, and the +island was cut off from all communication with the outer world. +There was nothing for it but to wait. It proved the longest and +hardest winter any one then living could remember. Easter was at +hand before the ice broke up, and let a fishing smack slip over to +Ystad, on the mainland. It came back with news that set the whole +island wondering. Peace had been made, and Denmark had ceded all its +ancient provinces east of the Oeresund to Karl Gustav. Ystad itself +and Skaane, the province in which Jens Kofoed had been campaigning, +were Swedish now, and so was Bornholm. All unknown to its people, +the island had changed hands in the game of war overnight, as it +were. A Swedish garrison was coming over presently to take charge. + +When Jens Kofoed heard it, he sat down and thought things over. If +there was peace, his old captain had no use for him, that was +certain; but there might be need of him at home. What would happen +there, no one could tell. And there were the wife and children to +take care of. The upshot of it all was that he stayed. Only, to be +on the safe side, he got the Burgomaster and the Aldermen in his +home town, Hasle, to set it down in writing that he could not have +got back to his troop for all he might have tried. Kofoed, it will +be seen, was a man with a head on his shoulders, which was well, for +presently he had need of it. + +There were no Danish soldiers in the island, only a peasant militia, +ill-armed and untaught in the ways of war; so no one thought of +resisting the change of masters. The people simply waited to see +what would happen. Along in May a company of one hundred and twenty +men with four guns landed, and took possession of Castle +Hammershus, on the north shore, the only stronghold on the island, +in the name of the Swedish king. Colonel Printzenskoeld, who had +command, summoned the islanders to a meeting, and told them that he +had come to be their governor. They were to obey him, and that was +all. The people listened and said nothing. + +Perhaps if the new rulers had been wise, things might have kept on +so. The people would have tilled their farms, and paid their taxes, +and Jens Kofoed, with all his hot hatred of the enemy he had fought, +might never have been heard of outside his own island. But the +Swedish soldiers had been through the Thirty Years' War and plunder +had become their profession. They rioted in the towns, doubled the +taxes, put an embargo on trade and export, crushed the industries; +worse, they took the young men and sent them away to Karl Gustav's +wars in foreign lands. They left only the old men and the boys, and +these last they kept a watchful eye on for drafts in days to come. +When the conscripts hid in the woods, so as not to be torn from +their wives and sweethearts, they organized regular man-hunts as if +the quarry were wild beasts, and, indeed, the poor fellows were not +treated much better when caught. + +All summer they did as they pleased; then came word that Karl Gustav +had broken the peace he made, and of the siege of Copenhagen. The +news made the people sit up and take notice. Their rightful +sovereign had ceded the island to the Swedish king, that was one +thing. But now that they were at war again, these strangers who +persecuted them were the public enemy. It was time something were +done. In Hasle there was a young parson with his heart in the right +place, Poul Anker by name. Jens Kofoed sat in his church; he had +been to the wars, and was fit to take command. Also, the two were +friends. Presently a web of conspiracy spread quietly through the +island, gripping priest and peasant, skipper and trader, alike. Its +purpose was to rout out the Swedes. The Hasle trooper and parson +were the leaders; but their secret was well kept. With the tidings +that the Dutch fleet had forced its way through to Copenhagen with +aid for the besieged, and had bottled the Swedish ships up in +Landskrona, came a letter purporting to be from King Frederik +himself, encouraging the people to rise. It was passed secretly +from hand to hand by the underground route, and found the island +ready for rebellion. + +Governor Printzenskoeld had seen something brewing, but he was a +fearless man, and despised the "peasant mob." However, he sent to +Sweden for a troop of horsemen, the better to patrol the island and +watch the people. Early in December, 1658, just a year after Jens +Kofoed, the trooper, had set out for his home on furlough, the +governor went to Roenne, the chief city in the island, to start off a +ship for the reinforcements. The conspirators sought to waylay him +at Hasle, where he stopped to give warning that all who had not paid +the heavy war-tax would be sold out forthwith; but they were too +late. Master Poul and Jens Kofoed rode after him, expecting to meet +a band of their fellows on the way, but missed them. The parson +stayed behind then to lay the fuse to the mine, while Kofoed kept on +to town. By the time he got there he had been joined by four others, +Aage Svendsoen, Klavs Nielsen, Jens Laurssoen, and Niels Gummeloese. +The last two were town officers. As soon as the report went around +Roenne that they had come, Burgomaster Klaus Kam went to them openly. + +The governor had ridden to the house of the other burgomaster, Per +Larssoen, who was not in the plot. His horse was tied outside and he +just sitting down to supper when Jens Kofoed and his band crowded +into the room, and took him prisoner. They would have killed him +there, but his host pleaded for his life. However, when they took +him out in the street, Printzenskoeld thought he saw a chance to +escape in the crowd and the darkness, and sprang for his horse. But +his great size made him an easy mark. He was shot through the head +as he ran. The man who shot him had loaded his pistol with a silver +button torn from his vest. That was sure death to any goblin on whom +neither lead nor steel would bite, and it killed the governor all +right. The place is marked to this day in the pavement of the main +street as the spot where fell the only tyrant who ever ruled the +island against the people's will. + +The die was cast now, and there was need of haste. Under cover of +the night the little band rode through the island with the news, +ringing the church bells far and near to call the people to arms. +Many were up and waiting; Master Poul had roused them already. At +Hammershus the Swedish garrison heard the clamor, and wondered what +it meant. They found out when at sunrise an army of half the +population thundered on the castle gates summoning them to +surrender. Burgomaster Kam sat among them on the governor's horse, +wearing his uniform, and shouted to the officers in command that +unless they surrendered, he, the governor, would be killed, and his +head sent in to his wife in the castle. The frightened woman's tears +decided the day. The garrison surrendered, only to discover that +they had been tricked. Jens Kofoed took command in the castle. The +Swedish soldiers were set to doing chores for the farmers they had +so lately harassed. The ship that was to have fetched reenforcements +from Sweden was sent to Denmark instead, with the heartening news. +They needed that kind there just then. + +But the ex-trooper, now Commandant, knew that a day of reckoning was +coming, and kept a sharp lookout. When the hostile ship _Spes_ was +reported steering in from the sea, the flag of Sweden flew from the +peak of Hammershus, and nothing on land betrayed that there had been +a change. As soon as she anchored, a boat went out with an +invitation from the governor to any officers who might be on board, +to come ashore and arrange for the landing of the troops. The +captain of the ship and the major in charge came, and were made +prisoners as soon as they had them where they could not be seen from +the ship. It blew up to a storm, and the _Spes_ was obliged to put +to sea, but as soon as she returned boats were sent out to land the +soldiers. They sent only little skiffs that could hold not over +three or four, and as fast as they were landed they were overpowered +and bound. Half of the company had been thus disposed of when the +lieutenant on board grew suspicious, and sent word that without the +express orders of the major no more would come. But Jens Kofoed's +wit was equal to the emergency. The next boat brought an invitation +to the lieutenant to come in and have breakfast with the officers, +who would give him his orders there. He walked into the trap; but +when he also failed to return, his men refused to follow. He had +arranged to send them a sign, they said, that everything was all +right. If it did not come, they would sail away to Sweden for help. + +It took some little persuasion to make the lieutenant tell about the +sign, but in the end Jens Kofoed got it. It turned out to be his +pocket-knife. When they saw that, the rest came, and were put under +lock and key with their fellows. + +The ship was left. If that went back, all was lost. Happily both +captain and mate were prisoners ashore. Four boat-loads of +islanders, with arms carefully stowed under the seats, went out with +the mate of the _Spes_, who was given to understand that if he as +much as opened his mouth he would be a dead man. They boarded the +ship, taking the crew by surprise. By night the last enemy was +comfortably stowed, and the ship on her way to Roenne, where the +prisoners were locked in the court-house cellar, with shotted guns +guarding the door. Perhaps it was the cruelties practised by Swedish +troops in Denmark that preyed upon the mind of Jens Kofoed when he +sent the parson to prepare them for death then and there; but +better counsel prevailed. They were allowed to live. The whole war +cost only two lives, the governor's and that of a sentinel at the +castle, who refused to surrender. The mate of the _Spes_ and two +of her crew contrived to escape after they had been taken to +Copenhagen, and from them Karl Gustav had the first tidings of how +he lost the island. + +The captured ship sailed down to Copenhagen with greeting to King +Frederik that the people of Bornholm had chosen him and his heirs +forever to rule over them, on condition that their island was never +to be separated from the Danish Crown. The king in his delight +presented them with a fine silver cup, and made Jens Kofoed captain +of the island, beside giving him a handsome estate. He lived +thirty-three years after that, the patriarch of his people, and +raised a large family of children. Not a few of his descendants are +to-day living in the United States. In the home of one of them in +Brooklyn, New York, is treasured a silver drinking cup which King +Frederik gave to the ex-trooper; but it is not the one he sent back +with his deputation. That one is still in the island of Bornholm. + + + + +CARL LINNE, KING OF THE FLOWERS + + +Years ago there grew on the Jonsboda farm in Smaland, Sweden, a +linden tree that was known far and wide for its great age and size. +So beautiful and majestic was the tree, and so wide the reach of its +spreading branches, that all the countryside called it sacred. +Misfortune was sure to come if any one did it injury. So thought the +people. It was not strange, then, that the farmer's boys, when they +grew to be learned men and chose a name, should call themselves +after the linden. The peasant folk had no family names in those +days. Sven Carlsson was Sven, the son of Carl; and his son, if his +given name were John, would be John Svensson. So it had always been. +But when a man could make a name for himself out of the big +dictionary, that was his right. The daughter of the Jonsboda farmer +married; and her son played in the shadow of the old tree, and grew +so fond of it that when he went out to preach he also called himself +after it. Nils Ingemarsson was the name he received in baptism, and +to that he added Linnaeus, never dreaming that in doing it he handed +down the name and the fame of the friend of his play hours to all +coming days. But it was so; for Parson Nils' eldest son, Carl Linne, +or Linnaeus, became a great man who brought renown to his country and +his people by telling them and all the world more than any one had +ever known before about the trees and the flowers. The King knighted +him for his services to science, and the people of every land united +in acclaiming him the father of botany and the king of the flowers. + +They were the first things he learned to love in his baby world. If +he was cross, they had but to lay him on the grass in the garden and +put a daisy in his hand, and he would croon happily over it for +hours. He was four years old when his father took him to a wedding +in the neighborhood. The men guests took a tramp over the farm, and +in the twilight they sat and rested in the meadow, where the spring +flowers grew. The minister began telling them stories about them; +how they all had their own names and what powers for good or ill +the apothecary found in the leaves and root of some of them. Carl's +father, though barely out of college, was a bright and gifted man. +One of his parishioners said once that they couldn't afford a whole +parson, and so they took a young one; but if that was the way of it, +the men of Stenbrohult made a better bargain than they knew. They +sat about listening to his talk, but no one listened more closely +than little Carl. After that he had thought for nothing else. In the +corner of the garden he had a small plot of his own, and into it he +planted all the wild flowers from the fields, and he asked many more +questions about them than his father could answer. One day he came +back with one whose name he had forgotten. The minister was busy +with his sermon. + +"If you don't remember," he said impatiently, "I will never tell you +the name of another flower." The boy went away, his eyes wide with +terror at the threat; but after that he did not forget a single +name. + +When he was big enough, they sent him to the Latin school at Wexioe, +where the other boys nicknamed him "the little botanist." His +thoughts were outdoors when they should have been in the dry books, +and his teachers set him down as a dunce. They did not know that his +real study days were when, in vacation, he tramped the thirty miles +to his home. Every flower and every tree along the way was an old +friend, and he was glad to see them again. Once in a while he found +a book that told of plants, and then he was anything but a dunce. +But when his father, after Carl had been eight years in the school, +asked his teachers what they thought of him, they told him +flatly that he might make a good tailor or shoemaker, but a +minister--never; he was too stupid. + +That was a blow, for the parson of Stenbrohult and his wife had set +their hearts on making a minister of Carl, and small wonder. His +mother was born in the parsonage, and her father and grandfather had +been shepherds of the parish all their lives. There were tears in +the good minister's eyes as he told Carl to pack up and get ready to +go back home; he had an errand at Dr. Rothman's, but would return +presently. The good doctor saw that his patient was heavy of heart +and asked him what was wrong. When he heard what Carl's teachers +had said, he flashed out: + +"What! he not amount to anything? There is not one in the whole lot +who will go as far as he. A minister he won't be, that I'll allow, +but I shall make a doctor of him such as none of them ever saw. You +leave him here with me." And the parson did, comforted in spite of +himself. But Carl's mother could not get over it. It was that +garden, she declared, and when his younger brother as much as +squinted that way, she flew at him with a "You dare to touch it!" +and shook him. + +When Dr. Rothman thought his pupil ready for the university, he sent +him up to Lund, and the head-master of the Latin School gave him the +letter he must bring, to be admitted. "Boys at school," he wrote in +it, "may be likened to young trees in orchard nurseries, where it +sometimes happens that here and there among the saplings there are +some that make little growth, or even appear as wild seedlings, +giving no promise; but when afterwards transplanted to the orchard, +make a start, branch out freely, and at last yield satisfactory +fruit." By good luck, though, Carl ran across an old teacher from +Wexioe, one of the few who had believed in him and was glad to see +him. He took him to the Rector and introduced him with warm words of +commendation, and also found him lodgings under the roof of Dr. +Kilian Stobaeus. + +Dr. Stobaeus was a physician of renown, but not good company. He was +one-eyed, sickly, lame in one foot, and a gloomy hypochondriac to +boot. Being unable to get around to his patients, he always had one +or two students to do the running for him and to learn as best they +might, in doing it. Carl found a young German installed there as the +doctor's right hand. He also found a library full of books on +botany, a veritable heaven for him. But the gate was shut against +him; the doctor had the key, and he saw nothing in the country lad +but a needy student of no account. Perhaps the Rector had passed the +head-master's letter along. However, love laughs at locksmiths, and +Carl Linnaeus was hopelessly in love with his flowers. He got on the +right side of the German by helping him over some hard stiles in the +_materia medica_. In return, his fellow student brought him books +out of the library when the doctor had gone to bed, and Carl sat up +studying the big tomes till early cockcrow. Before the house +stirred, the books were back on their shelves, the door locked, and +no one was the wiser. + +No one except the doctor's old mother, whose room was across the +yard. She did not sleep well, and all night she saw the window +lighted in her neighbor's room. She told the doctor that Carl +Linnaeus fell asleep with the candle burning every single night, and +sometime he would upset it and they would all be burned in their +beds. The doctor nodded grimly; he knew the young scamps. No doubt +they both sat up playing cards till dawn; but he would teach them. +And the very next morning, at two o'clock, up he stumped on his lame +foot to Carl's room, in which there was light, sure enough, and went +in without knocking. + +Carl was so deep in his work that he did not hear him at all, and +the doctor stole up unperceived and looked over his shoulder. There +lay his precious books, which he thought safely locked in the +library, spread out before him, and his pupil was taking notes and +copying drawings as if his life depended upon it. He gave a great +start when Dr. Stobaeus demanded what he was doing, but owned up +frankly, while the doctor frowned and turned over his notes, leaf by +leaf. + +"Go to bed and sleep like other people," he said gruffly, yet +kindly, when he had heard it all, "and hereafter study in the +daytime;" and he not only gave him a key to his library, but took +him to his own table after that. Up till then Carl had merely been a +lodger in the house. + +When he was at last on the home stretch, as it seemed, an accident +came near upsetting it all. He was stung by an adder on one of his +botanizing excursions, so far from home and help that the bite came +near proving fatal. However, Dr. Stobaeus' skill pulled him through, +and in after years he got square by labelling the serpent _furia +infernalis_--hell-fury--in his natural history. It was his way of +fighting back. All through his life he never wasted an hour on +controversy. He had no time, he said. But once when a rival made a +particularly nasty attack upon him, he named a new plant after him, +adding the descriptive adjective _detestabilis_--the detestable +so-and-so. On the whole, he had the best of it; for the names he +gave stuck. + +It was during his vacation after the year at Lund that Linnaeus made +a catalogue of the plants in his father's garden at Stenbrohult that +shows us the country parson as no mean botanist himself; for in the +list, which is preserved in the Academy of Sciences at Stockholm, +are no less than two hundred and twenty-four kinds of plants. Among +them are six American plants that had found their way to Sweden. The +poison ivy is there, though what they wanted of that is hard to +tell, and the four-o'clock, the pokeweed, the milkweed, the pearly +everlasting, and the potato, which was then (1732) classed as a rare +plant. Not until twenty years later did they begin to grow it for +food in Sweden. + +When Carl Linnaeus went up to Upsala University, his parents had so +far got over their disappointment at his deserting the ministry that +they gave him a little money to make a start with; but they let him +know that no more was coming--their pocket-book was empty. And +within the twelvemonth, for all his scrimping and saving, he was on +the point of starvation. He tells us himself that he depended on +chance for a meal and wore his fellow students' cast-off clothes. +His boots were without soles, and in his cheerless attic room he +patched them with birch bark and card board as well as he could. He +was now twenty-three years old, and it seemed as if he would have to +give up the study that gave him no bread; but still he clung to his +beloved flowers. They often made him forget the pangs of hunger. And +when the cloud was darkest the sun broke through. He was sitting in +the Botanical Garden sketching a plant, when Dean Celsius, a great +orientalist and theologian of his day, passed by. The evident +poverty of the young man, together with his deep absorption in his +work, arrested his attention; he sat down and talked with him. In +five minutes Carl had found a friend and the Dean a helper. He had +been commissioned to write a book on the plants of the Holy Land and +had collected a botanical library for the purpose, but the work +lagged. Here now was the one who could help set it going. That day +Linnaeus left his attic room and went to live in the Dean's house. +His days of starvation were over. + +In the Dean's employ his organizing genius developed the marvellous +skill of the cataloguer that brought order out of the chaos of +groping and guessing and blundering in which the science of botany +had floundered up till then. Here and there in it all were flashes +of the truth, which Linnaeus laid hold of and pinned down with his +own knowledge to system and order. Thus the Frenchman, Sebastian +Vaillant, who had died a dozen years before, had suggested a +classification of flowers by their seed-bearing organs, the stamens +and pistils, instead of by their fruits, the number of their petals, +or even by their color, as had been the vague practice of the past. +Linnaeus seized upon this as the truer way and wrote a brief treatise +developing the idea, which so pleased Dr. Celsius that he got his +young friend a license to lecture publicly in the Botanical Garden. + +The students flocked to hear him. His message was one that put life +and soul into the dry bones of a science that had only wearied them +before. The professor of botany himself sat in the front row and +hammered the floor with his cane in approval. But his very success +was the lecturer's undoing. Envy grew in place of the poverty he had +conquered. The instructor, Nils Rosen, was abroad taking his +doctor's degree. He came home to find his lectures deserted for the +irresponsible teachings of a mere undergraduate. He made grievous +complaint, and Linnaeus was silenced, to his great good luck. For so +his friend the professor, though he was unable to break the red tape +of the university, got him an appointment to go to Lapland on a +botanical mission. His enemies were only too glad to see him go. + +Linnaeus travelled more than three thousand miles that summer through +a largely unknown country, enduring, he tells us, more hardships and +dangers than in all his subsequent travels. Again and again he +nearly lost his life in swollen mountain streams, for he would not +wait until danger from the spring freshets was over. Once he was +shot at as he was gathering plants on a hillside, but happily the +Finn who did it was not a good marksman. Fish and reindeer milk were +his food, a pestilent plague of flies his worst trouble. But, he +says in his account of the trip, which is as fascinating a report of +a scientific expedition as was ever penned, they were good for +something, after all, for the migrating birds fed on them. From his +camps on lake or river bank he saw the water covered far and near +with swarms of ducks and geese. The Laplander's larder was easily +stocked. + +He came back from the dangers of the wild with a reputation that was +clinched by his book "The Flora of Lapland," to find the dragon of +professional jealousy rampant still at Upsala. His enemy, Rosen, +persuaded the senate of the university to adopt a rule that no +un-degreed man should lecture there to the prejudice of the +regularly appointed instructors. Tradition has it that Linnaeus flew +into a passion at that and drew upon Rosen, and there might have +been one regular less but for the interference of bystanders. It may +be true, though it is not like him. Men wore side-arms in those days +just as some people carry pistols in their hip-pockets to-day, and +with as little sense. At least they had the defence, such as it was, +that it was the fashion. However, it made an end of Linnaeus at +Upsala for the time. He sought a professorship at Lund, but another +got it. Then he led an expedition of his former students into the +Dalecarlia mountains and so he got to Falun, where Baron Reuterholm, +one of Sweden's copper magnates, was seeking a guide for his two +sons through the region where his mines were. + +Linnaeus was not merely a botanist, but an all around expert in +natural science. He took charge of the boys and, when the trip was +ended, started a school at Falun, where he taught mineralogy. It had +been hit or miss with the miners up till then. There was neither +science nor system in their work. What every-day experience or the +test of fire had taught a prospector, in delving among the rocks, +was all there was of it. Linnaeus was getting things upon a +scientific basis, when he met and fell in love with the handsome +daughter of Dr. Moraeus. The young people would marry, but the +doctor, though he liked the mineralogist, would not hear of it till +he could support a wife. So he gave him three years in which to go +abroad and get a degree that would give him the right to practise +medicine anywhere in Sweden. The doctor's daughter gave him a +hundred dollars she had saved, and her promise to wait for him. + +He went to Harderwyk in Holland and got his degree at the university +there on the strength of a thesis on the cause of malarial fever, +with the conclusions of which the learned doctors did not agree; +but they granted the diploma for the clever way in which he defended +it. On the way down he tarried in Hamburg long enough to give the +good burghers a severe jolt. They had a seven-headed serpent that +was one of the wonders of the town. The keen sight of the young +naturalist detected the fraud at once; the heads were weasels' +heads, covered with serpent's skin and cunningly sewed on the head +of the reptile. The shape of the jaws betrayed the trick. But the +Hamburgers were not grateful. The serpent was an asset. There was a +mortgage on it of ten thousand marks; now it was not worth a +hundred. They took it very ill, and Linnaeus found himself suddenly +so unpopular that he was glad to get out of town overnight. What +became of the serpent history does not record. + +Linnaeus had carried more than his thesis on malarial fever with him +to Holland. At the bottom of his trunk were the manuscripts of two +books on botany which, he told his sweetheart on parting, would yet +make him famous. Probably she shook her head at that. Pills and +powders, and broken legs to set, were more to her way of thinking, +and her father's, too. If only he had patients, fame might take care +of itself. But now he put them both to shame. At Leyden he found +friends who brought out his first book, "Systema Naturae," in which +he divides all nature into the three kingdoms known to every child +since. It was hardly more than a small pamphlet, but it laid the +foundation for his later fame. To the enlarged tenth edition +zooelogists point back to this day as to the bed-rock on which they +built their science. The first was quickly followed by another, and +yet another. Seven large volumes bearing his name had come from the +press before he set sail for home, a whole library in botany, and a +new botany at that, so simple and sensible that the world adopted it +at once. + +Dr. Hermann Boerhaave was at that time the most famous physician in +Europe. He was also the greatest authority on systematic botany. +Great men flocked to his door, but the testy old Dutchman let them +wait until it suited him to receive them. Peter the Great had to +cool his heels in his waiting-room two long hours before his turn +came. Linnaeus he would not see at all--until he sent him a copy of +his book. Then he shut the door against all others and summoned the +author. The two walked through his garden, and the old doctor +pointed proudly to a tree which was very rare, he said, and not in +any of the books. Yes, said Linnaeus, it was in Vaillant's. The +doctor knew better; he had annotated Vaillant's botany himself, and +it was not there. Linnaeus insisted, and the doctor, in a temper, +went for the book to show him. But there it was; Linnaeus was right. +Nothing would do then but he must stay in Holland. Linnaeus demurred; +he could not afford it. But Dr. Boerhaave knew a way out of that. He +had for a patient Burgomaster Cliffort, a rich old hypochondriac +with whom he could do nothing because he would insist on living high +and taking too little exercise. When he came again he told him that +what he needed was a physician in daily attendance upon him, and +handed him over to Linnaeus. + +"He will fix your diet and fix your garden, too," was his +prescription. The Burgomaster was a famous collector and had a +wondrous garden that was the apple of his eye. He took Linnaeus into +his house and gave him a ducat a day for writing his menu and +cataloguing his collection. That was where his books grew, and the +biggest and finest of them was "Hortus Cliffortianus," the account +of his patron's garden. + +Armed with letters from Dr. Boerhaave and the Burgomaster, he took +one stronghold of professional prejudice after another. Not without +a siege. One of them refused flatly to surrender. That was Sir Hans +Sloan, the great English naturalist, to whom Dr. Boerhaave wrote in +a letter that is preserved in the British Museum: "Linnaeus, who +bears this letter, is alone worthy of seeing you, alone worthy of +being seen by you. He who shall see you both together shall see two +men whose like will scarce ever be found in the world." And the +doctor was no flatterer, as may be inferred from his treatment of +Peter the Great. But the aged baronet had had his own way so long, +and was so well pleased with it, that he would have nothing to do +with Linnaeus. At Oxford the learned professor Dillenius received him +with no better grace. "This," he said aside to a friend, "is the +young man who confounds all botany," and he took him rather +reluctantly into his garden. A plant that was new to him attracted +Linnaeus' attention and he asked to what family it belonged. + +"That is more than you can tell me," was the curt answer. + +"I can, if you will let me pluck a flower and examine it." + +"Do, and be welcome," said the professor, and his visitor after a +brief glance at the flower told its species correctly. The professor +stared. + +"Now," said Linnaeus, who had kept his eyes open, "what did you mean +by the crosses you had put all through my book?" He had seen it +lying on the professor's table, all marked up. + +"They mark the errors you made," declared the other. + +"Suppose we see about that," said the younger man and, taking the +book, led the way. They examined the flowers together, and when they +returned to the study all the pride had gone out of the professor. +He kept Linnaeus with him a month, never letting him out of his sight +and, when he left, implored him with tears to stay and share his +professorship; the pay was enough for both. + +A letter that reached him from home on his return to Holland made +him realize with a start that he had overstayed his leave. It was +now in the fourth year since he had left Sweden. All the while he +had written to his sweetheart in the care of a friend who proved +false. He wanted her for himself and, when the three years had +passed, told her that Carl would never come back. Dr. Moraeus was of +the same mind, and had not a real friend of the absent lover turned +up in the nick of time Linnaeus would probably have stayed a Dutchman +to his death. Now, on the urgent message of his friend, he hastened +home, found his Elisabeth holding out yet, married her and settled +down in Stockholm to practise medicine. + +Famous as he had become, he found the first stretch of the row at +home a hard one to hoe. His books brought him no income. Nobody +would employ him, "even for a sick servant," he complained. Envious +rivals assailed him and his botany, and there were days when herring +and black bread was fare not to be despised in Dr. Linnaeus' +household. But he kept pegging away and his luck changed. One +well-to-do patient brought another, and at last the queen herself +was opportunely seized with a bad cough. She saw one of her ladies +take a pill and asked what it was. Dr. Linnaeus' prescription for a +cold, she said, and it always cured her right up. So the doctor was +called to the castle and his cure worked there, too. Not long after +that he set down in his diary that "Now, no one can get well without +my help." + +But he was not happy. "Once, I had flowers and no money," he said; +"now, I have money and no flowers." That they appointed him +professor of medicine at Upsala did not mend matters. His lectures +were popular and full of common sense. Diet and the simple life were +his hobbies, temperance in all things. He ever insisted that where +one man dies from drinking too much, ten die from overeating. +Children should eat four times a day, grown-ups twice, was his rule. +The foolish fashions and all luxury he abhorred. He himself in his +most famous years lived so plainly that some said he was miserly, +and his clothes were sometimes almost shabby. The happiest day of +his life came when he and his old enemy Rosen, whom he found filling +the chair of botany at the university, and with whom he made it up +soon after they became fellow members of the faculty, exchanged +chairs with the ready consent of the authorities. So, at last, +Linnaeus had attained the place he coveted above all others, and the +goal of his ambition was reached. + +He lived at Upsala thirty-seven years and wrote many books. His +students idolized him. They came from all over the world. Twice a +week in summer, on Wednesday and Saturday, they sallied forth with +him to botanize in field and forest, and when they had collected +specimens all the long day they escorted the professor home through +the twilight streets with drums and trumpets and with flowers in +their hats. But however late they left him at his door, the earliest +dawn saw him up and at his work, for the older he grew the more +precious the hours that remained. In summer he was accustomed to +rise at three o'clock; in the dark winter days at six. + +He found biology a chaos and left it a science. In his special field +of botany he was not, as some think, the first. He himself +catalogued fully a thousand books on his topic. But he brought order +into it; he took what was good and, rejecting the false, fashioned +it into a workable system. In the mere matter of nomenclature, his +way of calling plants, like men, by a family name and a given name +wrought a change hard to appreciate in our day. The common blue +grass of our lawns, for instance, he called, and we call it still, +_Poa pratensis_. Up to his time it had three names and one of them +was _Gramen pratense paniculatum majus latiore folio poa +theophrasti_. Dr. Rydberg, of the New York Botanical Gardens, said +aptly at the bicentenary of his birth, that it was as if instead of +calling a girl Grace Darling one were to say "Mr. Darling's +beautiful, slender, graceful, blue-eyed girl with long, golden curls +and rosy cheeks." + +The binomial system revolutionized the science. What the lines of +longitude and latitude did for geography Linnaeus' genius did for +botany. And he did not let pride of achievement persuade him that he +had said the last word. He knew his system to be the best till some +one should find a better, and said so. The King gave him a noble +name and he was proud of it with reason--vain, some have said. But +vanity did not make the creature deny the Creator. He ever tried to +trace science to its author. When the people were frightened by the +"water turning to blood" and overzealous priests cried that it was a +sign of the wrath of God, he showed under the magnifying glass the +presence of innumerable little animals that gave the water its +reddish tinge, and thereby gave offence to some pious souls. But +over the door of his lecture room were the words in Latin: "Live +guiltless--God sees you!" and in his old age, seeing with prophetic +eye the day of bacteriology that dawned a hundred years after his +death, he thanked God that He had permitted him to "look into His +secret council room and workshop." + +He was one of the clear thinkers of all days, uniting imagination +with sound sense. It was Linnaeus who discovered that plants sleep +like animals. The Pope ordered that his books, wherever they were +found in his dominions, should be burned as materialistic and +heretical; but Linnaeus lived to see a professor in botany at Rome +dismissed because he did not understand his system, and another put +in his place who did, and whose lectures followed his theories. When +he was seventy he was stricken with apoplexy, while lecturing to his +students, and the last year of his life was full of misery. +"Linnaeus limps," is one of the last entries in his diary, "can +hardly walk, speaks unintelligibly, and is scarce able to write." +Death came on January 10, 1778. + +Under the white flashes of the northern lights in the desolate land +he explored in his youth, there grows in the shelter of the spruce +forests a flower which he found and loved beyond any other, the +_Linnaea borealis_, named after him. In some pictures we have of him, +he is seen holding a sprig of it in his hand. It is the twin flower +of the northern Pacific coast and of Labrador, indeed of the far +northern woods from Labrador all the way to Alaska, that lifts its +delicate, sweet-scented pink bells from the moss with gentle appeal, +"long overlooked, lowly, flowering early" despite cold and storm, +typical of the man himself. + + + + +NIELS FINSEN, THE WOLF-SLAYER + + +Hard by the town of Thorshavn, in the Faroee islands, a little lad +sat one day carving his name on a rock. His rough-coated pony +cropped the tufts of stunted grass within call. The grim North Sea +beat upon the shore below. What thoughts of the great world without +it stirred in the boy he never told. He came of a people to whom it +called all through the ages with a summons that rarely went +unheeded. If he heard he gave no sign. Slowly and laboriously he +traced in the stone the letters N.R.F. When he had finished he +surveyed his work with a quiet smile. "There!" he said, "that is +done." + +The years went by, and a distant city paused in its busy life to +hearken to bells tolling for one who lay dead. Kings and princes +walked behind his coffin and a whole people mourned. Yet in life he +had worn no purple. He was a plain, even a poor man. Upon his grave +they set a rock brought from the island in the North Sea, just like +the other that stands there yet, and in it they hewed the letters +N.R.F., for the man and the boy were one. And he who spoke there +said for all mankind that what he wrought was well done, for it was +done bravely and in love. + +Niels Ryberg Finsen was born in 1860 in the Faroee islands, where his +father was an official under the Danish Government. His family came +of the sturdy old Iceland stock that comes down to our time unshorn +of its strength from the day of the vikings, and back to Iceland his +people sent him to get his education in the Reykjavik Latin school, +after a brief stay in Denmark where his teachers failed to find the +key to the silent, reserved lad. There he lived the seven pregnant +years of boyhood and youth, from fourteen to twenty-one, and ever +after there was that about him that brought to mind the wild +fastnesses of that storm-swept land. Its mountains were not more +rugged than his belief in the right as he saw it. + +The Reykjavik school had a good name, but school and pupils were +after their own kind. Conventional was hardly the word for it. Some +of the "boys" were twenty and over. Finsen loved to tell of how they +pursued the studies each liked best, paying scant attention to the +rest. In their chosen fields they often knew much more than the +curriculum called for, and were quite able to instruct the teacher; +the things they cared less about they helped one another out with, +so as to pass examinations. For mere proficiency in lessons they +cherished a sovereign contempt. To do anything by halves is not the +Iceland way, and it was not Niels Finsen's. All through his life he +was impatient with second-hand knowledge and borrowed thinking. So +he worked and played through the long winters of the North. In the +summer vacations he roamed the barren hills, helped herd the sheep, +and drank in the rough freedom of the land and its people. At +twenty-one the school gave him up to the university at Copenhagen. + +Training for life there was not the heyday of youthful frolicking we +sometimes associate with college life in our day and land. Not until +he was thirty could he hang up his sheepskin as a physician. Yet the +students had their fun and their sports, and Finsen was seldom +missing where these went on. He was not an athlete because already +at twenty-three the crippling disease with which he battled twenty +years had got its grip on him, but all the more he was an outdoor +man. He sailed his boat, and practised with the rifle until he +became one of the best shots in Denmark. And it is recorded that he +got himself into at least one scrape at the university by his love +of freedom. + +The country was torn up at that time by a struggle between people +and government over constitutional rights, and it had reached a +point where a country parish had refused to pay taxes illegally +assessed, as they claimed. It was their Boston tea-party. A +delegation of the "tax refusers" had come to Copenhagen, where the +political pot was boiling hot over the incident. The students were +enthusiastic, but the authorities of the university sternly +unsympathetic. The "Reds" were for giving a reception to the +visitors in Regentsen, the great dormitory where, as an Iceland +student, Finsen had free lodging; but it was certain that the Dean +would frown upon such a proposition. So they applied innocently for +permission to entertain some "friends from the country," and the +party was held in Finsen's room. Great was the scandal when the +opposition newspapers exploited the feasting of the tax refusers in +the sacred precincts of the university. To the end of his days +Finsen chuckled over the way they stole a march on the Dean. + +For two or three years after getting his degree he taught in the +medical school as demonstrator, eking out his scant income by +tutoring students in anatomy. His sure hand and clear decision in +any situation marked him as a practitioner of power, and he had +thoughts once of devoting himself to the most delicate of all +surgery,--that of the eye. He was even then groping for his +life-work, without knowing it, for it was always light, light--the +source or avenue or effect of it--that held him. And presently his +work found him. + +It has been said that Finsen was a sick man. A mysterious malady[1] +with dropsical symptoms clutched him from the earliest days with +ever tightening grip, and all his manhood's life he was a great but +silent sufferer. Perhaps it was that; perhaps it was the bleak North +in which his young years had been set that turned him to the light +as the source of life and healing. He said it himself: "It was +because I needed it so much, I longed for it so." Probably it was +both. Add to them his unique power of turning the things of everyday +life to account in his scientific research, and one begins to +understand at once his success and his speedy popularity. He dealt +with the humble things of life, and got to the heart of things on +that road. And the people comprehended; the wise men fell in behind +him--sometimes a long way behind. + +[Footnote 1: The autopsy which he himself ordered on his death-bed +as his last contribution to medical knowledge, showed it to be a +slow ossification of the membrane of the heart, involving the liver +and all the vital organs. He was "tapped" for dropsy more than +twenty times.] + +In the yard of Regentsen there grows a famous old linden tree. +Standing at his window one day and watching its young leaf sprout, +Finsen saw a cat sunning itself on the pavement. The shadow of the +house was just behind it and presently crept up on pussy who got up, +stretched herself, and moved into the sunlight. In a little while +the shadow overtook her there, and pussy moved once more. Finsen +watched the shadow rout her out again and again. It was clear that +the cat liked the sunlight. + +A few days later he stood upon a bridge and saw a little squad of +insects sporting on the water. They drifted down happily with the +stream till they came within the shadow of the bridge, when they at +once began to work their way up a piece to get a fresh start for a +sunlight sail. Finsen knew just how they felt. His own room looked +north and was sunless; his work never prospered as it did when he +sat with a friend whose room was on the south side, where the sun +came in. It was warm and pleasant; but was that all? Was it only the +warmth that made the birds break into song when the sun came out on +a cloudy day, made the insects hum joyously and man himself walk +with a more springy step? The housekeeper who "sunned" the +bed-clothes and looked with suspicion on a dark room had something +else in mind; the sun "disinfected" the bedding. Finsen wanted to +know what it was in the sunlight that had this power, and how we +could borrow it and turn it to use. + +The men of science had long before analyzed the sunlight. They had +broken it up into the rays of different color that together make +the white light we see. Any boy can do it with a prism, and in the +band or spectrum of red, yellow, green, blue, and violet that then +appears, he has before him the cipher that holds the key to the +secrets of the universe if we but knew how to read it aright; for +the sunlight is the physical source of all life and of all power. +The different colors represent rays with different wave-lengths; +that is, they vibrate with different speed and do different work. +The red vibrate only half as fast as the violet, at the other end of +the spectrum, and, roughly speaking, they are the heat carriers. The +blue and violet are cold by comparison. They are the force carriers. +They have power to cause chemical changes, hence are known as the +chemical or actinic rays. It is these the photographer shuts out of +his dark room, where he intrenches himself behind a ruby-colored +window. The chemical ray cannot pass that; if it did it would spoil +his plate. + +This much was known, and it had been suggested more than once that +the "disinfecting" qualities of the sunlight might be due to the +chemical rays killing germs. Finsen, experimenting with earthworms, +earwigs, and butterflies, in a box covered with glass of the +different colors of the spectrum, noted first that the bugs that +naturally burrowed in darkness became uneasy in the blue light. As +fast as they were able, they got out of it and crawled into the red, +where they lay quiet and apparently content. When the glass covers +were changed they wandered about until they found the red light +again. The earwigs were the smartest. They developed an intelligent +grasp of the situation, and soon learned to make straight for the +red room. The butterflies, on the other hand, liked the red light +only to sleep in. It was made clear by many such experiments that +the chemical rays, and they only, had power to stimulate, to "stir +life." Finsen called it that himself. In the language of the +children, he was getting "warm." + +That this power, like any other, had its perils, and that nature, if +not man, was awake to them, he proved by some simple experiments +with sunburn. He showed that the tan which boys so covet was the +defence the skin puts forth against the blue ray. The inflammation +of sunburn is succeeded by the brown pigmentation that henceforth +stands guard like the photographer's ruby window, protecting the +deeper layers of the skin. The black skin of the negro was no longer +a mystery. It is his protection against the fierce sunlight of the +tropics and the injurious effect of its chemical ray. + +Searching the libraries in Copenhagen for the records of earlier +explorers in his field, and finding little enough there, Finsen came +across the report of an American army surgeon on a smallpox epidemic +in the South in the thirties of the last century. There were so many +sick in the fort that, every available room being filled, they had +to put some of the patients into the bomb-proof, to great +inconvenience all round, as it was entirely dark there. The doctor +noted incidentally that, as if to make up for it, the underground +patients got well sooner and escaped pitting. To him it was a +curious incident, nothing more. Upon Dr. Finsen, sitting there with +the seventy-five-year-old report from over the sea in his hand, it +burst with a flood of light: the patients got well without scarring +_because_ they were in the dark. Red light or darkness, it was all +the same. The point was that the chemical rays that could cause +sunburn on men climbing glaciers, and had power to irritate the sick +skin, were barred out. Within a month he jolted the medical world by +announcing that smallpox patients treated under red light would +recover readily and without disfigurement. + +The learned scoffed. There were some of them who had read of the +practice in the Middle Ages of smothering smallpox patients in red +blankets, giving them red wine to drink and hanging the room with +scarlet. Finsen had not heard of it, and was much interested. +Evidently they had been groping toward the truth. How they came upon +the idea is not the only mystery of that strange day, for they knew +nothing of actinic rays or sunlight analyzed. But Finsen calmly +invited the test, which was speedy in coming. + +They had smallpox in Bergen, Norway, and there the matter was put to +the proof with entire success; later in Sweden and in Copenhagen. +The patients who were kept under the red light recovered rapidly, +though some of them were unvaccinated children, and bad cases. In no +instance was the most dangerous stage of the disease, the festering +stage, reached; the temperature did not rise again, and they all +came out unscarred. + +Finsen pointed out that where other methods of treatment such as +painting the face with iodine or lunar caustic, or covering it with +a mask or with fat, had met with any success in the past, the same +principle was involved of protecting the skin from the light, though +the practitioner did not know it. He was doing the thing they did in +the middle ages, and calling them quacks. + +It is strange but true that Dr. Finsen had never seen a smallpox +patient at that time, but he knew the nature of the disease, and +that the sufferer was affected by its eruption first and worst on +the face and hands--that is to say, on the parts of the body exposed +to the light--and he was as sure of his ground as was Leverrier +when, fifty years before, he bade his fellow astronomers look in a +particular spot of the heavens for an unknown planet that disturbed +the movements of Uranus. And they found the one we call Neptune +there. + +Presently all the world knew that the first definite step had been +taken toward harnessing in the service of man the strange force in +the sunlight that had been the object of so much speculation and +conjecture. The next step followed naturally. In the published +account of his early experiments Finsen foreshadows it in the words, +"That the beginning has been made with the hurtful effects of this +force is odd enough, since without doubt its beneficial effect is +far greater." His clear head had already asked the question: if the +blue rays of the sun can penetrate deep enough into the skin to +cause injury, why should they not be made to do police duty there, +and catch and kill offending germs--in short, to heal? + +Finsen had demonstrated the correctness of the theory that the +chemical rays have power to kill germs. But it happens that these +are the rays that possess the least penetration. How to make them go +deeper was the problem. By an experiment that is, in its simplicity, +wholly characteristic of the man, he demonstrated that the red blood +in the deeper layers of the skin was the obstacle. He placed a piece +of photographic paper behind the lobe of his wife's ears and +concentrated powerful blue rays on the other side. Five minutes of +exposure made no impression on the paper; it remained white. But +when he squeezed all the blood out of the lobe, by pressing it +between two pieces of glass, the paper was blackened in twenty +seconds. + +That night Finsen knew that he had within his grasp that which would +make him a rich man if he so chose. He had only to construct +apparatus to condense the chemical rays and double their power many +times, and to apply his discovery in medical practice. Wealth and +fame would come quickly. He told the writer in his own simple way +how he talked it over with his wife. They were poor. Finsen's salary +as a teacher at the university was something like $1200 a year. He +was a sick man, and wealth would buy leisure and luxury. Children +were growing up about them who needed care. They talked it out +together, and resolutely turned their backs upon it all. Hand in +hand they faced the world with their sacrifice. What remained of +life to him was to be devoted to suffering mankind. That duty done, +what came they would meet together. Wealth never came, but fame in +full measure, and the love and gratitude of their fellow-men. + +There is a loathsome disease called lupus, of which, happily, in +America with our bright skies we know little. Lupus is the Latin +word for wolf, and the ravenous ailment is fitly named, for it +attacks by preference the face, and gnaws at the features, at nose, +chin, or eye, with horrible, torturing persistence, killing slowly, +while the patient shuts himself out from the world praying daily for +death to end his misery. + +In the north of Europe it is sadly common, and there had never been +any cure for it. Ointments, burning, surgery--they were all equally +useless. Once the wolf had buried its fangs in its victim, he was +doomed to inevitable death. The disease is, in fact, tuberculosis of +the skin, and is the most dreadful of all the forms in which the +white plague scourges mankind--was, until one day Finsen announced +to the world his second discovery, that lupus was cured by the +simple application of light. + +It was not a conjecture, a theory, like the red-light treatment for +smallpox; it was a fact. For two years he had been sending people +away whole and happy who came to him in despair. The wolf was +slain, and by this silent sufferer whose modest establishment was +all contained within a couple of small shanties in a corner of the +city hospital grounds, at Copenhagen. + +There was a pause of amazed incredulity. The scientific men did not +believe it. Three years later, when the physician in charge of +Finsen's clinic told at the medical congress in Paris of the results +obtained at the Light Institute, his story was still received with a +polite smile. The smile became astonishment when, at a sign from +him, the door opened and twelve healed lupus patients came in, each +carrying a photograph of himself as he was before he underwent the +treatment. Still the doctors could not grasp it. The thing was too +simple as matched against all their futile skill. + +But the people did not doubt. There was a rush from all over Europe +to Copenhagen. Its streets became filled with men and women whose +faces were shrouded in heavy bandages, and it was easy to tell the +new-comers from those who had seen "the professor." They came in +gloom and misery; they went away carrying in their faces the +sunshine that gave them back their life. Finsen never tired, when +showing friends over his Institute, of pointing out the joyous +happiness of his patients. It was his reward. For not "science for +science's sake," or pride in his achievement, was his aim and +thought, but just the wish to do good where he could. Then, in three +more years, they awarded him the great Nobel prize for signal +service to humanity, and criticism was silenced. All the world +applauded. + +"They gave it to me this year," said Finsen, with his sad little +smile, "because they knew that next year it would have been too +late." And he prophesied truly. He died nine months later. + +All that is here set down seems simple enough. But it was achieved +with infinite toil and patience, by the most painstaking +experiments, many times repeated to make sure. In his method of +working Finsen was eminently conservative and thorough. Nothing +"happened" with him. There was ever behind his doings a definite +purpose for which he sought a way, and the higher the obstacles +piled up the more resolutely he set his teeth and kept right on. +"The thing is not in itself so difficult," he said, when making +ready for his war upon the wolf, "but the road is long and the +experiments many before we find the right way." + +He took no new step before he had planted his foot firmly in the one +that went before; but once he knew where he stood, he did not +hesitate to question any scientific dogma that opposed him, always +in his own quiet way, backed by irrefutable facts. In a remarkable +degree he had the faculty of getting down through the husk to the +core of things, but he rejected nothing untried. The little thing in +hand, he ever insisted, if faithfully done might hold the key to the +whole problem; only let it be done _now_ to get the matter settled. + +Whatever his mind touched it made perfectly clear, if it was not so +already. As a teacher of anatomy he invented a dissecting knife that +was an improvement on those in use, and clamps for securing the +edges of a wound in an operation. As a rifle shot he made an +improved breech; as a physician, observing the progress of his own +disease, an effective blood powder for anaemia. At the Light +Institute, which friends built for him, and the government endowed, +he devised the powerful electric lamps to which he turned in the +treatment of lupus, for the sun does not shine every day in +Copenhagen; and when it did not, the lenses that gathered the blue +rays and concentrated them upon the swollen faces were idle. And +gradually he increased their power, checking the heat rays that +would slip through and threatened to scorch the patient's skin, by +cunning devices of cooling streams trickling through the tubes and +the hollow lenses. + +Nothing was patented; it was all given freely to the world. The +decision which he and his wife made together was made once for all. +When the great Nobel prize was given to him he turned it over to the +Light Institute, and was with difficulty persuaded to keep half of +it for himself only when friends raised an equal amount and +presented it to the Institute. + +Finsen knew that his discoveries were but the first groping steps +upon a new road that stretched farther ahead than any man now living +can see. He was content to have broken the way. His faith was +unshaken in the ultimate treatment of the whole organism under +electric light that, by concentrating the chemical rays, would +impart to the body their life-giving power. He himself was beyond +their help. Daily he felt life slipping from him, but no word of +complaint passed his lips. He prescribed for himself a treatment +that, if anything, was worse than the disease. Only a man of iron +will could have carried it through. + +A set of scales stood on the table before him, and for years he +weighed every mouthful of food he ate. He suffered tortures from +thirst because he would allow no fluid to pass his lips, on account +of his tendency to dropsy. Through it all he cheerfully kept up his +labors, rejoicing that he was allowed to do so much. His courage was +indomitable; his optimism under it all unwavering. His favorite +contention was that there is nothing in the world that is not good +for something, except war. That he hated, and his satire on the +militarism of Europe as its supreme folly was sharp and biting. + +Of such quality was this extraordinary man of whom half the world +was talking while the fewest, even in his own home city, ever saw +him. Fewer still knew him well. It suited his temper and native +modesty, as it did the state of his bodily health, to keep himself +secluded. His motto was: "_bene vixit qui bene latuit_--he has +lived well who has kept himself well hidden"--and his contention was +always that in proportion as one could keep himself in the +background his cause prospered, if it was a good cause. When kings +and queens came visiting, he could not always keep in hiding, though +he often tried. On one of his days of extreme prostration the +dowager empress of Russia knocked vainly at his door. She pleaded so +hard to be allowed to see Dr. Finsen that they relented at last, and +she sat by his bed and wept in sympathy with his sufferings, while +he with his brave smile on lips that would twitch with pain did his +best to comfort her. She and Queen Alexandra, both daughters of King +Christian, carried the gospel of hope and healing from his study to +their own lands, and Light Institutes sprang up all over Europe. + +In his own life he treated nearly nineteen hundred sufferers, +two-thirds of them lupus patients, and scarce a handful went from +his door unhelped. When his work was done he fell asleep with a +smile upon his lips, and the "universal judgment was one of +universal thanksgiving that he had lived." He was forty-three years +old. + +When the news of his death reached the Rigsdag, the Danish +parliament, it voted his widow a pension such as had been given to +few Danes in any day. The king, his sons and daughters, and, as it +seemed, the whole people followed his body to the grave. The rock +from his native island marks the place where he lies. His work is +his imperishable monument. His epitaph he wrote himself in the +speech another read when the Nobel prize was awarded him, for he was +then too ill to speak. + +"May the Light Institute grasp the obligation that comes with its +success, the obligation to maintain what I account the highest aim +in science--truth, faithful work, and sound criticism." + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HERO TALES OF THE FAR NORTH*** + + +******* This file should be named 12481.txt or 12481.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/4/8/12481 + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +https://gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** diff --git a/old/12481.zip b/old/12481.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c846198 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12481.zip |
